PC1000 Favco Other Crane

CRANE
INSTALLATION,OPERATION
AND
MAINTENANCEMANUAL

PROJECT : JB118
JACKͲUPBARGEB.V.

CRANETYPE : PedestalCrane
CRANEMODEL : PC1000
CRANESERIALNo. : 1814
DELIVERYDATE : May2013
PRIMEMOVERTYPE : SIEMENSLVELECTRICMOTOR
DesignedandManufacturedby:

FAVELLEFAVCOCRANES(M)S/B
FAVELLEFAVCOCRANESP/L Lot42,PersiaranBungaTanjung2,
28YarrungaStreet, SenawangIndustrialPark,
PRESTONSNSW2170 74000Seremban,
SYDNEY,AUSTRALIA NEGERISEMBILAN,MALAYSIA
TEL.:+61(0)296082000 TEL.:+60(0)66768866
FAX:+61(0)296070022 FAX:+60(0)66768888
WEBSITE:www.favellefavco.com
EMAIL:ffb@favellefavco.com.my
ii
MANUAL REVISION
Responsibility
Themanualholdersareresponsiblefor:
1. Keepingtheircopiescurrentandensuringthatallrevisionsareappropriatelyfiled.
2. Studyingallnewmaterialissuedandincorporatingitintotheirworkpractice.
3. Suggestingchangesandcontributingnewtextmaterialtoimprovethequalityofthemanual.
4. Disseminatinginformationcontainedinrevisions.
InitiatingRevisions
Manualholdersmayinitiatechangesoraddnewtextmaterialby:
1. Markinguprelevantpageswithcorrectionsorattachadditions.
2. MailingtoFAVELLEFAVCO(email/faxareaccepted).Refertofrontcoverformailingaddress.
Whensendinformationquotefollowing:
x Company
x Sendersnameandcontactdetails
x Cranemodelandserialnumber
RevisionReview
FAVELLEFAVCOacknowledgesreviewsandconsidersallmaterialforinclusioninmanual.Originatorsareadvised
offinaldispositionoftherequest.Approvedmaterialispublishedasarevision.Whenchangesaremadetoapage,
areplacementpagewillbeissued.Thenewpagewillshowtherevisiondateinthefooter.
FilingRevisions
Whenarevisionisreceived:
1. Readthetextcarefully.
2. Removeanddestroythesupersededpages.
3. Inserttherevisedpagesinproperplace.
©CopyrightofFavelleFavcoCranesPtyLtd,2013 IOM1814FRONT03.doc
iii
FOREWORD
Thismanualprovidesoperation,maintenance,installationandpartslistinformationforthisspecificcrane.
It is intended as a guide to both the operator and the maintenance personnel to assist them in obtaining the
maximumperformanceandlifeoftheequipment.
Themanualdoesnotincludemanufacturingdrawingsandintheeventofmajorrepairsorreplacements,FAVELLE
FAVCOCRANESortheirnearestrepresentativeshouldbecontacted.
Tousethismanual,refertonextpageforanabridgedtableofcontents.Refertothesectionwhichcontainsthe
informationthenrefertotableofcontentsatthefrontofthissectionforthespecificparagraph,drawingorpart
required.
All information disclosed in this manual is to be considered confidential and proprietary by FAVELLE FAVCO
CRANES and the owner. Communication of the contents to others should not take place without prior written
consent.
FAVELLEFAVCOCRANESPTY.LTD.
iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GENERALSTATEMENT CHP01.02
2. CRANEDESCRIPTION CHP02.01
3. CRANEINSTALLATION CHP03.01
4. CRANEOPERATION CHP04.02
5. MAINTENANCE CHP05.01
6. TROUBLESHOOTINGGUILDELINE CHP06.01
7. DRAWINGS CHP07.02
8. SPAREPARTLIST CHP08.01
9. REFERENCEMATERIAL CHP09.01
10. COMPONENT/EQUIPMENTMANUALS CHP10.02

OffshorePedestalCraneModelPC1000SerialNo.1814
IOMͲSection1.GeneralStatement
1Ͳ1
1 GENERALSTATEMENT
1.1 Introduction 1Ͳ3
1.2 Safety 1Ͳ3
1.3 Warranty 1Ͳ10

©CopyrightofFavelleFavcoCranesPtyLtd,2013 IOM1814CHP01.02.doc
1Ͳ2
Figurelist

FIGURE1Ͳ1ͲHANGERBLOCK......................................................................................................................................1Ͳ6

1Ͳ3
1.1 Introduction
The FAVELLE FAVCO PC1000 Serial No. 1814 is an electric hydraulic drive rope luffing crane with a rotating
superstructure.Itisfittedwith2nos.SIEMENS800kWelectricmotors.ThePC1000SerialNo.1814consistsof2
nos.100Tmainhoistwinches,a100Tluffwinchanda25Tauxiliaryhoistwinch,withboomlengthconfigurations
of60.76m,72.92mand97.23m.RefertotheloadchartonGeneralArrangementintheSection7forpermitted
liftingcapacityofcorrespondingboomlengthconfigurationandoperatingcondition.
The crane described in this manual is designed and manufactured in accordance with API Specification 2C (6th
edition Ͳ with exceptions of hoisting speed and Load testing) and referenced to ABS Guide for Certification of
LiftingAppliances.
As shown on General Arrangement and Load Charts in cabin, the crane offboard Safe Working Load Charts are
subjectedtoseastateconditions.Itremainsastheresponsibilityofcraneoperatortoselecttheappropriateload
chartduringcraneoperation.

Theboomlengthoranystructuralmembersmustnotbealteredwithoutclearwrittenauthorisation
fromFFC.
1.2 Safety
Theimportanceofsafeoperationcannotbeoverlooked.Carelessnessandnegligencebyoperator,jobsupervisors
andplanners,riggingpersonnel,andjobsitepersonnelcanresultintheirdeathorinjuryanddamagetothecrane
orproperty.
The safety information in this publication is intended only as a guide to assist qualified operators for safe
operation.
FFCcannotforeseeallhazards/dangersthatwillariseinthefield;thereforesafetyremainstheresponsibilityof
craneoperator,maintenanceworkersandcraneowner.
Operatorqualifications
Thecraneshallbeoperatedonlybythefollowingqualifiedpersonnel:
x Designatedoperators;
x Traineeunderthedirectsupervisionofadesignatedoperator;
x Inspectorsandmaintenanceortestpersonnelwhennecessaryintheperformanceoftheirduties.

ATTENTION No other personnel shall be allowed to enter operator’s cabin while crane is in
operation.

Qualified person is defined as one who by reason of training and experience is thoroughly familiar with crane
operationsandthehazardsinvolved.Suchpersonshallbephysicallyandmentallyfittooperatecrane.

ATTENTION
Operator’strainingandqualificationiscraneowner’sresponsibility.
1Ͳ4
OperatorConduct
1. Theoperatorshallnotengageinanypractice,whichdivertstheirattentionwhileoperatingthecrane.
2. The operator shall not operate the crane when physically or mentally unfit or under the influence of
drugsoralcohol,
3. The operator shall be responsible for all operations under their direct control. When the safety of an
operationisindoubt,theoperatorshallhavetheauthoritytostoptheoperationandrefusetocontinue
untiltheunsafeconditionshavebeencorrected.
4. Theoperatorshallbethoroughlyfamiliarwithoperationofthecraneanditspropercare.Ifadjustments
orrepairsarenecessaryorifthereareknowndefectsthatimpairsafeoperation,thecraneshallnotbe
operateduntiltheunsafeconditionshavebeencorrected.
5. Ifthereisawarningsignatthestartcontrols,theoperatorshallnotstarttheprimemoveruntilthesign
hasbeenremovedbythepersonwhoinstalledit.
6. Beforestartingtheprimemover,theoperatorshallmakesurethat:
x Alldailyinspectionandmaintenanceserviceshavebeenperformed.
x Allcontrolsareintheoffpositionandallbrakesandlockingdevicesareappliedorengaged.
x Allpersonnelareinclearsight(vision).
7. The operator shall test all controls, limits and communication systems at the start of each shift. Any
defectsfoundshallbecorrectedbeforeoperationisbegun.
8. Theoperatorshallnotliftanyloadsifthemachineexceedsthelevelnesstoleranceof1%.Themachine
mustbelevelbeforeliftingloads.
9. The operator shall not start crane movement if the load or designated signal person is not within the
rangeofvision.
10. The operator shall respond to signals from the person directing the lift or from the designated signal
person. When a signal person or crane follower is notrequired,theoperatorisresponsibleforthelift.
Operatorshallobeyastopsignalatalltimes,nomatterwhogivesthecommand.
11. Theoperatorshallverifythatthecapacitychartbeingusedisthecorrectone,specifyingrelevantbarge
status (floating / elevated), boom length, load line reeving (number of falls), lifted and dropped loads
(onboard/offͲboard)etc.
The only load charts that may be used with this crane are those included in the Drawing
Sectionofthismanual.Donotuseanyothercapacitychartswiththiscrane.Ifcapacitycharts
aremissingcontactFAVELLEFAVCOCRANES(FFC).
12. Theoperatorshallperformthefollowingoperationsbeforeleavingtheoperatorscabinforanyreason:
x Parkthecraneandpositiontheupperworkssothecranedoesnotinterferewithoperationofother
equipment;
x Landanyattachedload;
x Moveallcontrolstooff;
x Stoptheprimemover.
13. The operator shall perform the following operations if main power supply or a control function fails
duringoperation:
x LandallsuspendedloadsͲFollowtheemergencyloadloweringprocedureforrelevanthoist(switch
ontheEmergencypowerpackwhichisbeensuppliedwiththiscrane);
x Switchallcontrolstooff.
14. Ifthecranewillbeoperatedatnight,theoperatorshallmakesurethatthereissufficientlightingforsafe
operation.Theloadandlandingareashallbeilluminated.
1Ͳ5
15. Theoperatorshallnotoperatethecraneduringperiodsofbadweatherifhisabilitytoseetheloador
signalpersonisimpairedbydarkness,fog,rain,snow,etc.
16. Wind can cause the crane or the boom and other attachments to collapse. The operator or the
designatedpersondirectingtheliftshallcompensatefortheeffectofwindloadandboombyreducing
speeds,orcombinationofboth.
17. Unlessotherwisespecifiedontheloadchart,stopoperationunderthefollowingwindconditions.Wind
speed indicator fitted in cabin tells the wind speed. Operator must follow the reading on indicator to
ensuresafety.
x Ifthewindcausestheloadtoswingforwardpasttheallowableoperatingradiusorsidewayspast
eithertheboomheelpin,landtheload.
x Ifthewindexceedsthelimitstatedontheappropriateloadchart,landallloadsandapplybrakes,
lowertheboomontoblockingatgroundlevelorotherwiserestrainit.
18. Booms sections or mast are being assembled or disassembled on ground (with or without support of
boomrigging)shallbesecurelyblockedtopreventdroppingoftheboomsectionormast.
19. Workersshallnotgo/standunderboomsectionsormastsectionswhenremovingconnectingpins.
HandlingtheLoad
Size of load and position of hooks
Whenhandlingalift,thefollowingmustbeconsidered:
1. Thecraneshallnotbeloadedbeyondtheratedcapacityaspertheloadchart.
2. The operator or designated person shall verify that the weight of the load is within the rating for the
correspondingliftingradius.
3. Theloadchartsforthecranearekeptintheoperator’scabin.
4. The crane is a “Twin Hook Design Crane”, so this crane can be operated by either single hook
configurationortwinhookconfiguration.

x Forsinglehookoperation,refertotheloadchartA3Ͳ2170.1062andA3Ͳ2170.1063inSection7
forthedetail.
However,itisprohibitedusingbothsinglehookstohandletwoloadsatsametime,i.e.oneload
issuspendedbyonesinglehookandusinganothersinglehooktodothelifting.

x Fortwinhookoperation,refertotheloadchartA3Ͳ2170.1039,A3Ͳ2170.1040andA3Ͳ2170.1041
inSection7forthedetail.

5. Position(anglebetween)oftwohooksalsoreducesthepermittedloadcapacity.Iftheslingsoftwohooks
aremakinganglesbetweenthem,assume‘T’isthepermittedcapacitystatedinLoadChart,permittedlift
shouldbeinterpretedasthefollowingtable.
1Ͳ6
Anglebetweentwo PermittedLoad
hooks Capacity
600 0.866T
300 0.970T
0 0 T

Figure1Ͳ1ͲHangerblock

Attaching the load
1. Attachthehooktotheloadwithslings,orothersuitablerigging.Eachhookshallhavealatchthatisin
properworkingorder.Hooklatchesshallnotbewiredopen.
2. Only use sling and other rigging which are in safe operation condition and have a rating equal to or
greaterthantheloadtobelifted.
3. Donotwraptheloadlinearoundtheload
4. Usesuitableprotectionbetweenslingsandsharpedgesontheload
5. Secureunusedlegsofamultilegslingbeforehandlingaloadwithonelegofthesling.
Lifting / moving the load
Beforeliftingormovingtheload,theoperatororthedesignatedpersondirectingtheliftshallmakethefollowing
checks:
1. Theloadissecuredandproperlybalancedintheslingsorliftingdevicebeforeliftingtheloadmorethan
fewcentimetres/inches.
2. Theliftandswingpathsareclearofpersonnelandobstructions.
3. Theloadisfreetobelifted.
4. Theloadline(rope)isnotkinkedorotherwisedamaged.
5. Multiple part load lines are not twisted around each other in such a manner that the lines will not
separatewhentheloadislifted.
6. Thehookisbroughtoverloadinamannerthatwillminimizetwistingorswinging.
7. Theloadlineandboomhoistropesareproperlyspooledonthedrumsandseatedinthesheaves.
8. Theoperatorshalltestthebrakeseachtimealoadapproachingtheratedloadishandledbyliftingthe
loadafewcentimetres/inchesandpositioningthecontrolhandleinneutral.
9. Whileliftingtheload,theoperatorshalltakethefollowingprecautions:
x Accelerate and decelerate the load smoothly to avoid excessive stress on the crane boom and
machinery.
1Ͳ7
x Avoidsuddenstartsandstopswhileswinging.Keeptheswingspeedundercontroltopreventthe
load from swinging out beyond the radius at which the load can be handled and to minimize the
pendulumactionoftheload.
x Usetaglinesorotherrestraintstocontroltheloadwhennecessary.
x Donotexceedanyswinglimitations(areasofoperation)givenonloadchart.
x Donotallowtheload,theboomoranyotherpartofthecranetocontactobstructions.
x Donothoist,orlower,orswingtheloadwhilepersonnelareontheloadhook.
x Avoidcarryingtheloadoverpersonnel.Loadswhicharesuspendedshallbeblockedorsupportedby
thegroundorasuitablestructurebeforepersonnelareallowedtoworkunderorbetweenthem.
10. Operatewithcautionwhenusingtwoormorecranestoliftthesameload.
11. Onedesignatedpersonshallberesponsiblefortheoperationwhentwoormorecranesareusedtolift
the same load. The designated person shall analyse the lift and instruct all personnel involved in the
properriggingandpositioningoftheloadandallmovementstobemade.Decisionssuchasthenecessity
toreducecraneratings,loadposition,boomposition,groundsupport,andspeedofmovementsshallbe
inaccordancewiththedesignatedpersonsdecision
12. Do not lower the load or the boom to the point that less than three full wraps of wire remain on the
respectivedrum.
1Ͳ8
Holding the load

Whenaloadissuspended,theoperatorshalltakethefollowingprecautions:
1. Notleavetheirpositionatthecontrols;
2. Notallowpersonneltostandorpassundertheload;
3. Movecontrolstooff.
Signals
1. Signalstotheoperatorshallbeinaccordancewiththestandardsignals.
2. The operator should easily understand all signals to the operator at all times. The operator shall not
respondtoanysignals,whicharenotclearlyunderstood.
3. Whenitisnecessarytogiveinstructionstotheoperator,allcranemotionsshallbestopped.
4. Thesignalpersonshall:
x Bequalifiedbyexperiencewithcraneoperationsandthoroughlyfamiliarwiththestandardsignals.
x Bepositionedinclearviewoftheoperator.Thesignalperson’spositionshouldgivehimorherclear
viewoftheload,thecraneandtheoperatingarea.
x Directtheloadsotheloaddoesnotpassoverpersonnel.
x Keepunnecessarypersonneloutofthecrane’soperatingarea.
Getting onto or off the crane
1. Personnelgettingontooroffthecraneshalldosoonlyatdesignatedareasandonlywhilethecraneis
parked.
Cabins, ladders and walkways
1. Necessary clothing and personal belongings shall be stored so they do not interfere with access to the
operator’scabinorwithoperationofthecrane
2. When climbing onto the crane using steps/ ladders/ handrails both hands shall be used. Lift tools and
otherequipment,whichcannotbecarriedinpocketsortoolsbeltsontoandoffthecranewithhandlines
orhoist.
3. Tools,oilcanssparepartsandothernecessaryequipmentshallbestoredittoolboxesandnotallowedto
liearoundlooseintheoperatorscabinorwalkwaysandstairs.Allwasteshallbedisposedoff.
Fire fighting system and fire extinguishers
1. Aportablefireextinguisherisinstalledinthecabinatalltime.
2. Theoperatorandallmaintenancepersonnelshallbethoroughlyfamiliarwiththelocation,useandcare
ofthefireextinguisher.
3. A fire suppression system is installed for crane machinery house. The operator and all maintenance
personnelshallbethoroughlyfamiliarwiththelocation,useandcareofthesystem.Refertosection4for
operatingdetails.
SafeMaintenancePractices
1. Training/qualificationofmaintenancepersonnelisresponsibilityofthecraneowner.
2. Wearclothingthatisrelativelytightandbelted.Donotwearloosefittingclothing.Wearappropriateeye
protection,hearingprotection,gloves,safetybootsandanapprovedhardhat.
3. Performthefollowingstepsbeforestartingamaintenanceprocedure:
x Parktheboomwhereitwillnotinterferewithotherequipmentoroperations
x Lowerallloadstotheground
1Ͳ9
x Move all controls to off and secure all functions against movement by applying or engaging all
brakes.
x Stoptheprimemoverandrenderthestartingmeansinoperative.
x Placewarningsignsatthestartcontrolsalertingotherpersonnelthatthecraneisbeingserviced.Do
notremovesignuntilitissafetoreturncranetoservice.
x Donotattempttomaintainorrepairanypartofthecranewhiletheprimemoverisrunning,unless
absolutelynecessary.
x If the prime mover must be run, keep your clothing and all partsofyourbodyawayfrommoving
parts. Maintain constant communication between person at controls and person performing
maintenanceorrepairprocedure.
x Pressurized air and hydraulic oil can cause serious injury. Make sure all air and hydraulic lines,
fittingsandcomponentsaretightandserviceable.
x Relievepressurebeforedisconnectingairandhydrauliclinesandfittings.
4. Lowertheboomontotheboomrestbeforedoingworkontheboom.
5. Hydraulicoilcanbealsoflammable.Donotsmokeorallowopenflamesintheareawhenfillinghydraulic
tanks.
6. Neverhandlewireropewithbarehands.Wearleatherrigginggloves
7. Onlyusecleaningsolvents,whicharenonͲvolatileandnonͲflammable.
8. Donotliftheavycomponentsbyhand.Useahoistjack,orblockingtoliftcomponents.
9. Usecarewhileweldingorburningoncrane.CoverallhosesandcomponentswithnonͲflammableshields
orblanketstopreventafireorotherdamage.
10. Disconnect and lock the power supply switch before attempting to service high voltage electrical
componentsandbeforeenteringtightareascontaininghighvoltagecomponents.
11. When assembling and disassembling booms, jibs or masts on ground, securely block each section to
provideadequatesupportandalignment.Donotgounderboomormastsectionswhileconnectingbolts
orpinsarebeingremoved.
12. UnlessauthorizedinwritingbyFFCdonotalterthecraneinanywaythatmightaffecttheperformance
(include welding, cutting, or burning of structural members or changing pressures and flow of
air/hydraulic components). Doing so will invalidate all warranties and load charts and make the crane
ownerliableforanyresultantaccidents.
13. Keep crane clean. Accumulations of dirt grease, oil rags, paper and other waste will not only interfere
withsafeoperationandmaintenancebutalsocreateafirehazard.
14. Storetools,oilscans,sparepartsandothernecessaryequipmentintoolboxes.Donotallowtheseitems
toliearoundlooseintheoperatorcabinoronwalkways.
15. Donotstoreflammablematerialsonthecrane.
16. Donotreturnthecranetoserviceatthecompletionofmaintenanceorrepairuntilallguardsandcovers
have been reinstalled, trapped air has been bled from the hydraulic systems, safety devices have been
reactivated,andmaintenanceequipmenthasbeenremoved.
17. Performafunctionchecktoensureproperoperationatthecompletionofmaintenanceorrepair.
1Ͳ10
1.3 Warranty
FAVELLEFAVCOCRANESwarrantsitsproductstobefreefromdefectsinmaterialandworkmanshipforaperiod
oftwelve(12)monthsfromthedateaftercommissioningofthegoodsoreighteen(18)monthsfromthedelivery
of the project to the original PurchaserͲuser, whichever comes first. The obligation of FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES
(thecompany)underthiswarrantyislimitedtorepairingorreplacingequipment,whichinthecompany’sopinion
isdefectiveinmaterialorworkmanship.Thirdpartyequipment/componentsmanufacturedbyothers(e.g.electric
motors, LMI, etc) are covered by the warranty of the respective manufacturers. No recommendation of items
madebyothersshallimplyorconstituteanywarrantybythecompanywithrespecttosuchitems.
All costs of shipping the product to or from the company’s factory for any repair or replacement shall be to
purchaser’saccount.Noclaimunderthiswarrantywillbeallowedbythecompanyunlesssuchclaimissubmitted
inwritingtothecompanywithinthirty(30)daysofthedateofdiscoveryofthedefect,butinnoeventlaterthan
theexpirationoftheapplicablewarrantyperiod,andsubjectalwaystoparagraph1above.
This warranty does not cover consumable items, mainly but not limited to hydraulic fluids, lubricants, filters,
coolants and wire rope. In addition, this warranty does not cover ordinary wear and tear, vandalism, abuse,
misuse,overloading,alteredequipment,equipmentorpartswhichhavenotbeenproperlyinstalled,operatedor
maintainedorwhichhavebeenimproperlyadjusted,oranydamagecausedbyfailuretofollowthemaintenance
proceduresoutlinedintheapplicablemanualsandtechnicalbulletinsissuedbythecompany.
This warranty and the company’s obligation hereunder is in lieu of all other warranties, expressed or implied
without limitation, the implied warranties of merchant ability and fitness for a particular purpose and all other
obligationsorliabilities,includingliabilityfordirect,indirectorconsequentialdamageswithrespecttothesaleor
theuseoftheproduct.
The company shall not be liable under any circumstances for any incidental, consequential or special damages,
includingwithoutlimitationanylostprofitsorlabourcosts,arisingfromthesaleofuseoftheequipment,whether
basedonwarranty(expressedorimplied)orotherwisebasedoncontract,tortoronanyothertheoryofliability,
andregardlessofanyadviceorrepresentationsthatmayhavebeenrenderedbythecompanyconcerningthesale
oruseoftheequipment.
Any repair or replacement, as the company may elect shall be done at an establishment authorised by it. This
warrantydoesnotapplytonormalmaintenanceserviceortonormalreplacementofserviceitems(suchasservice
filters),nordoesitapplytoconditionsresultingfrommisuse,negligence,alteration,lackofspecifiedmaintenance,
oraccident.Lossoftime,inconvenience,lossofuseofequipment,otherconsequentialdamagesorothermatters
notspecificallyincludedareNOTcoveredbythiswarranty.
Nopersonisauthorisedtochangeorotherwisemodifythiswarrantyorassumeanyotherliabilityonbehalfofthe
companyunlesssuchchange,modificationorassumptionismadeinwritingandsignedbyanauthorizedofficerof
thecompany.
FAVELLEFAVCOCRANESPTYLTD

OffshorePedestalCraneModelPC1000,SerialN0.1814
IOM–Section2.CraneDescription
2Ͳ1
2 CRANEDESCRIPTION
2.1 MajorCraneComponents 2Ͳ3
2.2 CraneReachDiagram 2Ͳ14
2.3 OperatingEnvironment 2Ͳ17

© Copyright of Favelle Favco Cranes Pty Ltd, 2013 IOM1814 CHP02.01.doc

2Ͳ2
Figurelist

FIGURE2Ͳ1–CRANEARRANGEMENT(97.23MBOOM)............................................................................................2Ͳ3
FIGURE2Ͳ2–PEDESTALASSEMBLY............................................................................................................................2Ͳ4
FIGURE2Ͳ3–PEDESTALINTERNALPLATFORM..........................................................................................................2Ͳ4
FIGURE2Ͳ4–SLEWRINGASSEMBLY..........................................................................................................................2Ͳ5
FIGURE2Ͳ5–MACHINERYDECK................................................................................................................................2Ͳ6
FIGURE2Ͳ6–DECKTANKSANDDRAINCONNECTION...............................................................................................2Ͳ7
FIGURE2Ͳ7–MACHINERYHOUSE..............................................................................................................................2Ͳ7
FIGURE2Ͳ8–INSIDESLEWWELL...............................................................................................................................2Ͳ8
FIGURE2Ͳ9ͲSLIPRING................................................................................................................................................2Ͳ8
FIGURE2Ͳ10–MASTASSEMBLY................................................................................................................................2Ͳ9
FIGURE2Ͳ11–60.76MBOOMASSEMBLY................................................................................................................2Ͳ10
FIGURE2Ͳ13–OPERATOR’SCABIN..........................................................................................................................2Ͳ11
FIGURE2Ͳ14–POWERPACKUNIT............................................................................................................................2Ͳ12
FIGURE2Ͳ15–LUFFWINCH.....................................................................................................................................2Ͳ12
FIGURE2Ͳ16–AUXILIARYWINCH............................................................................................................................2Ͳ13
FIGURE2Ͳ17–MAINHOISTWINCH.........................................................................................................................2Ͳ13
FIGURE2Ͳ18–CRANEREACHDIAGRAM–60.76M.................................................................................................2Ͳ14

2Ͳ3
2.1 Major Crane Components
CraneOverview

Figure2Ͳ1–CraneArrangement(97.23mBoom)

2Ͳ4
PedestalAssembly
PedestalAdaptorisacylindricalbarrelwhichsupportscranestructureandistheinterfacebetweentherotating
crane structure and the nonͲrotating crane pedestal. The pedestal adaptor's top flange is a machined surface
whichistheinterfacefortotheboltedͲonslewring.
It has internal circular platform and ladder to access the machinery deck or the barge. The Internal platform
provides access to the internal slew bolts and slew drives and accommodates the incoming caballing from the
bargetotheslipringthroughMCTinterface.A1Ͳ1/4"BSPsocketisprovidedforAirsupplyfromthebarge,which
canbeusedformaintenancetools.Thedraininterfaceisa2"RFFlangeunderneaththeinternalplatform.
The external platform, which is also circular, has a ladder fitted which provides access from the barge and a
staircase which is the main access to the crane. The Pedestal adaptor external platform accommodates utility
hosesandatundishtodrainhydraulicoilorsludgefrommachinerysludgetanksandwinchareaintothebarge's
sludgecollection.Agatevalveisprovidedtoopenandclosetheconnection.
LiftingLugsareweldedtotheinternalstructureforliftingandhandlingthepedestaladaptor.
PEDESTAL INTERNAL
PLATFORM
PEDESTAL PEDESTAL EXTERNAL

LIFTING LUGS PLATFORM
GREASE COLLECTION
TRAY
SLEWRING MOUNTING
EXTERNAL CRANE FLANGE (MACHINED)
ACCESS TRAP DOOR
EXTERNAL LADDER
"CLIENT SUPPLY" UTILITY HOSES
INTERNAL
ACCESS LADDER

Figure2Ͳ2–PedestalAssembly
MCT
INTERNAL LADDER
UTILITY HOSES
2" BSP FLANGE

1.5" BSP FLANGE (SPARE)
AIR SUPPLY
EXTERNAL LADDER
"CLIENT SUPPLY"

Figure2Ͳ3–PedestalInternalPlatform

2Ͳ5
SlewBearingandDrives
Theslewbearingisboltedtoboththemachinerydeckandpedestaladaptor.Anintegralgearprovidesdriveavia
hydraulicmotorsandagearboxessituatedwithinthemachinerydeck.Therearetotaloffour(4)slewdriveson
thiscrane.
Figure2Ͳ4–SlewRingAssembly

2Ͳ6
MachineryDeck&House
Themachinerydeckisafullyweldedstructurethatcancontinuouslyrotateineitherdirection.Itsrotationcanbe
alsorestrictedtosuitsiterequirements,viaanoptionalslewlimitsetting.Thedecksupportsthepowerpack,main
hoistwinches,auxiliaryhoistwinch,luffwinch,andtheoperator’scabin.Italsoprovidesstructuralconnectionsfor
themastandtheboom.Thebottomflangeofthedeckismachinedtoaccommodatetheslewringandslewdrive.
TheMainaccesswaytothemachinerydeckisprovidedviaanexternalstaircase.TheCabinislocatedattheupper
decklevel.Itcanbeaccessedviaastaircaseinfrontofthemachineryhouseateither,portorstbdside.Theupper
platform and hoist winch side platforms also provide access to monitor the winches for correct operation. In
additioncamerasareprovidedformonitoringthewinches.
Stairsareprovidedfortheaccesstothemastheadformaintenance.
AUXILIARY HOIST WINCH

LUFF WINCH
MAST ACCESS STARBOARD HOIST WINCH
LADDERS & PLATFORMS
PORT HOIST WINCH

MACHINERY HOUSE
DECK PLATFORM
BOOM ACCESS PLATFORM
CO2 System
TUGGER WINCH
MACHINERY DECK
OPERATOR CABIN
TUGGER WINCH SLEW BEARING

BOOM ACCESS PLATFORM
DECK ACCESS
LADDERS & PLATFORMS
Figure2Ͳ5–MachineryDeck
Themachinerydeckalsoaccommodates2tuggerwinches,locatedatportandstbdsideatthefrontofthedeck.
Thesearecontrolledinthecabinviafootpedals.

2Ͳ7
Thehydraulicoiltankandcranesludgetankarelocatedattherearofthecrane,underneaththelowerdecklevel.
These can be accessed from the pedestal external platform via ladders or from the deck. Fixed piping and ball
valvesextendthedrainpointtothepedestalexternalplatformwhichprovideseasydrainagewhenrequired.The
deckwinchareashavecoamingprovidedtocaptureoilspillage.Drainlinesareprovided,whichareconnectedto
themaindrainpointatpedestallevel.
DRAIN
TUNDISH
PEDESTAL
STRUCTURE
GATE VALVE
INTERNAL
PEDESTAL DRAIN
CONNECTION PEDESTAL
EXTERNAL INTERNAL
PLATFORM PLATFORM
INTERFACE
WITH BARGE
(FLANGE 2"NB
150RF ANSI)

Figure2Ͳ6–DeckTanksandDrainConnection
Themachineryhouseinboltedtothedeckandprovidesprotectiontothepowerpackfromtheenvironment.Four
(4)doorsareprovidedforaccesstothemachinery.Louversareinstalledateachofthepowerpacksandontopof
theroofforventilationofthemachineryspace.Theroofisremovablesothatcomponents(e.g.electricmotors)
canbeliftedoutforservicingviaamaintenancemonorailinstalledontothemast.
REMOVEABLE HOUSE ROOF

FOR SERVICE WORK
AIR INLET
VENTILATION LOUVRE
MULTIPLE ACCESS DOOR

Figure2Ͳ7–MachineryHouse

2Ͳ8
Access to the slew well and pedestal adapter is by an internal stairway. The slew well accommodates the slew
drives,SlipringandSoftstartersfortheelectricmotors.Inadditionfour(4)slewbarrelmonorailsareprovidedto
lift out the slew drives of their brackets. An opening with trapdoor on the port side deck floor allows to lift
componentsoutoftheslewwell.Riggingequipmentcanbeconnectedtoaliftingluglocatedabovethisopening
whichismountedtotheflyWinchSupportFrame.

Figure2Ͳ8–InsideSlewWell
The slipring is located inside the slew well. It interfaces electrical signals and power supply between the crane
supportingstructureandtherotatingupperstructureofthecrane.Detailsoftheslipringinterfacescanbefound
intheelectricalschematicsinsection7.
SLEW WELL
UPPER
PLATFORM
SLEW WELL
LOWER
PLATFORM
SLIPRING
PEDESTAL INT.
PLATFORM

Figure2Ͳ9ͲSlipring

2Ͳ9
Mast
Themastismadeupofthefrontandrearlegswhicharepinnedtothemachinerydeckwithhightensilepins.At
topofthemastthefive(5)sheavesarefixedwithahightensileshaft.Thesheaves,anaviationlight,floodlights
and the boom buffer are all accessed via a series of ladders and platforms. A 5T WLL maintenance monorail is
providedtoallowfortheremoval/replacementofheavyitemsinthemachineryhouseanddeck.
Themastisequippedwith2floodlightswhichilluminatethedeckarea.Inadditionamastaviationlightisfittedto
thetopofthemastheadplate.
Thespringloadedboombufferprovidesaloadontheboomtoensuretheboomwilllowerdownwhenluffingout.
Italsoprotectstheincomingboomatminimumradiusfromfallingbackwards.
MAST HEAD SHEAVES
MAST AVIATION LIGHT MAST

FLOODLIGHT
MAST TOP PLATFORM
MAST FLOODLIGHT
MAST INTERMEDIATE BOOM BUFFER

PLATFORM
MAST REAR LEG
800kg MAINTENANCE
SWING JIB
MAST FRONT LEG
5 TONNE
MAINTENANCE MONORAIL

Figure2Ͳ10–MastAssembly

2Ͳ10
Boom
Theboomsectionsaretubularhighstrengthsteelconstruction.Boomsectionsareconnectedwithsteelflanges
and high strength bolts. The boom sections are jig assembled during fabrication to allow interͲchangeability of
sections for boom extension. The PC1000 boom comes in three (3) boom configurations; 60.76m, 72.92m and
97.23m.Thefigurebelowshowsthe60.76mboom.Accessplatformsandwalkwaysarepositionedinsuchaway
thattherewillbeminimumassemblyworkduringachangeofboomconfiguration.Themainboomaccessisviaan
internalwalkway.Theboombuttandboomtiphaveinadditionexternalwalkways.Connectoraccessplatforms
and ladders provide access to the flanged connectors. Refer to FPͲBOOM CONNECTORͲ104 in Section 9 for
detailed tightening and inspection procedure of boom connector fasteners. An upper walkway is provided for
accesstothedeflectorsheavesandbridleplatform.ManͲsafelinesareinstalledtoprovidesafetyonthelowerand
upperwalkways.Upperwalkwayshavehandrailsfittedatportandstbdsideforsafety
Allsheavesandpinsarefittedwithgreasenipplesandmustbelubricatedwhentheboomisstowedorlowered
formaintenance.Thehangerblockpinshaveacentralgreasemanifoldinstalledtotheboomtop.Fordetailsrefer
torelevantAssemblyDrawingsinSection7.
Theboomisequippedwithfloodlightsatapprox.every12m.Theboomtopisfittedinadditionwithanaviation
light,boomzoomcameraandananemometer.Theoperationandmaintenancemanualsofthisequipmentcanbe
found in section 10 Ͳ parts manuals. Junction boxes are installed at the boom top, boom transition and 24m
extensionforeasyconnection/disconnectionofcablingduringboomlengthchangeout.

Figure2Ͳ11–60.76mBoomAssembly

2Ͳ11
Operator’sCabin
Thecabinisergonomicallydesignedtoprovidemaximumefficiencyofoperationinallweatherandsiteconditions.
Allwindowsaremadeofsafetyglasswithslideopensidewindowstoprovideadequateventilation.Areversible
HeatingͲVentilationͲAirͲConditioningsystemhasbeeninstalledtothecabinrooffortemperatureadjustment.All
motion controls come readily to hand. The front and top window is supplied with windscreen wiper(s) and
demister.
Thecabinseatisfullyadjustabletoprovideoptimumcomfort.Excellentvisibilityisprovidedfortheoperatorwith
fullͲlengthfrontwindowconfiguredtoallowfullvisionwhenlookingdownwithouttheneedtoleavetheseat.An
additionalinstructor'sseatisprovidedbehindtheoperator.Adetailedlayoutofthecabincanbefoundinsection
4ofthismanual.
Figure2Ͳ12–Operator’sCabin
Winch,PowerPackandtheElectricalSystem
Themachineryofthiscraneconsistsofthefollowing:
1. Powerpackx2nos.
2. Mainhoistwinchx2nos.
3. Luffwinch
4. Slewdrivex4nos.
5. Auxiliaryhoistwinch
6. EmergencyPowerpack
7. TuggerWinchx2nos.
Allwinchesarepinconnectedtothemachinerydeck.Thepowerpacksaremountedonvibrationpadsandbolted
tothemachineryhousefloor.

2Ͳ12
STARBOARD EMERGENCY POWERPACK

POWERPACK
EMERGENCY
HYDRAULIC PUMPS
HYDRAULIC PUMPS
PORT POWERPACK
VIBRATION
DAMPENER(S)
PUMP DRIVES
SPLITTER GEARBOX

Figure2Ͳ13–PowerpackUnit
Powerforallmotionsissuppliedbytwo(2)electricmotorswhichindirectlydrivethevariabledisplacementaxial
piston pumps, through a distribution gearbox. All motion pumps are connected in a closed loop hydrostatic
transmissionsystemtovariableorfixeddisplacementmotorsforthehoist,luffandslewmotions.
The motors drive through multiͲdisc brakes and depending on motion, include two or three stage planetary
gearboxes.Thedrivecontinuesthroughthepinions,whichmeshwiththeindividualdrumgearsandtheinternal
slew ring gear. The luff drum is fitted with a ratchet, which engages automatically whenever the prime mover
stopsorboostpressureislost.Thediscbrakesarefailsafeholdingbrakes,withaminimumstaticcapacitydouble
themotor’sdynamicallyratedtorque.

GEAR GUARD
LUFF WINCH LIFTING LUG(S)
DRUM SHAFT
LUFF DRUM FLANGE
LEBUS
GROOVE DRUM
PIN CONNECTION
(TO DECK)
LUFF RATCHET PAWL

Figure2Ͳ14–LuffWinch
2Ͳ13
AUX DRUM GEAR
AUXILIARY DRUM
GEAR GUARD
AUX WINCH
AUX WINCH FRAME
DRIVE ASSEMBLY
PIN CONNECTION AUX DRIVE PINION

(TO SUPPORT) AUX WINCH DRIVE ASSEMBLY

Figure2Ͳ15–AuxiliaryWinch
WINCH GUARDS
DRUM SHAFT
LIFTING LUGS
HOIST DRUM
DRUM GEAR DRIVE PINION DRIVE ASSEMBLY

PIN CONNECTION
(TO DECK)

Figure2Ͳ16–MainHoistWinch
All operating controls for the crane movements are by sensitive 'dead man' type proportional joysticks. These
incorporatethebrakecontrolasthediscbrakesareautomaticallyappliedwhenthecontrolleverisintheneutral
position. The control valves give stepͲless control to each crane motion with all motion speeds having been
selectedtogiveoptimumsafetyincontrolunderanyloadcondition.Theslewbrakesareheldoffduringnormal
operation to avoid pendulation and can be applied for parking by means of a selector switch control in the
operator’scabin.
Thecraneelectricalcontrol&safetysystemispoweredfromthe24Vcontrolcircuit.
Thekeythatoperatestheignitionswitchistobekeptremotefromthecraneduringshutdown,preventingeither
unauthoriseduseorstartingofprimemover.
Wherenecessary,allelectricsarewiredinafailͲsafemode,i.e.automaticshutdownofprimemover,functionsor
switchingintoasafemodeofoperation.

2Ͳ14
2.2 Crane Reach Diagram

JB 118
Figure2Ͳ17–CraneReachDiagram–60.76m

2Ͳ15

JB 118


2Ͳ16

JB 118


2Ͳ17
2.3 Operating Environment

Thecraneisdesignedtoworkinthefollowingenvironmentcondition:
DesignTemperature
Minimum Ͳ10°C
Maximum +45°C
Designwindspeed
Inservice 20m/s
Outofservice 42m/s
Humidity
High 100%
Low 0%
ZoneClassification
ElectricalequipmentoncraneisclassifiedforSafeZonearea.
ElectricalcomponentsontheboomaresuitabletooperateinHazardousareazone1.

Offshore Pedestal Crane Model PC1000, Serial N0. 1814
IOM – Section 3. Crane Installation
3-1
3 CRANE INSTALLATION
3.1 Dimensions and Masses of Major Assemblies 3-3
3.2 Delivery Checks 3-4
3.3 Crane Erection – General 3-5
3.4 Erection Accessories and Field Handling Procedure 3-5
3.5 Lifting & Installation Guides for Pedestal Adaptor 3-8
3.6 Installation and Erection of Crane Structure 3-10
© Copyright of Favelle Favco Cranes Pty Ltd, 2013 IOM1814 CHP03.01

3-2
Figure List
FIGURE 3-1 – PROPER DRUM REEL REEVING ....................................................................................................... 3-7

FIGURE 3-2 – DECK TO PEDESTAL INSTALLATION............................................................................................... 3-10
FIGURE 3-3 – MAST DELIVERY POSITION ........................................................................................................... 3-11
FIGURE 3-4 – MAST INSTALLATION ON TO DECK ............................................................................................... 3-12
FIGURE 3-5 – FITTING MAST FOOT PINS ............................................................................................................ 3-12
FIGURE 3-6 – BOOM SECTION LIFTING .............................................................................................................. 3-13
FIGURE 3-7 – ASSEMBLING BOOM SECTIONS .................................................................................................... 3-14
FIGURE 3-8 – BOOM CONNECTIONS .................................................................................................................. 3-14
FIGURE 3-9 – FINAL BOOM ASSEMBLY .............................................................................................................. 3-14
FIGURE 3-10 – HANDLING OF BRIDLE PENDANT ASSEMBLY............................................................................... 3-16
FIGURE 3-11 – INSTALLATION OF PENDANTS TO BOOM .................................................................................... 3-16

3-3
3.1 Dimensions and Masses of Major Assemblies

Mass Width Length Height
Assemblies / Components
(T) (m) (m) (m)
Machinery deck assembly
(dry weight only; consists of deck, platforms, cabin, house, main & 593 14.0 17.0 11.8
luff winches, fly winch, ropes, powerpack, electrical & hydraulic
system)
House assembly (incl. powerpack & roof louvre) 36.2 5.7 12.0 3.1
Mast assembly (w/o buffer & monorail) 162 9.5 10.6 26.3
Cabin assembly (w/o handrails & ladder) 2.5 1.8 3.4 3.5
Main winch – PORT & STARBOARD (w/o rope) 44.6 2.7 3.8 4.5
Fly winch (w/o rope) 7.7 2.0 2.0 2.5
Luff winch (w/o rope) 45.6 2.7 3.8 4.5
Powerpack (on skid) 4.9 1.6 3.3 2.1
Pedestal adaptor 116 Ø7.1 Ø7.1 7.0
Slew Ring (w/o Drives) 56.0 Ø7.7 Ø7.7 0.7
Boom assembly (61.76m) inc platform 181.0 9.2 66.0 11.1
Boom assembly (72.92m) inc platform 204.0 9.2 78.2 11.1
Boom assembly (97.23m) inc platform 248 9.2 102.0 11.1
Rigging component
Bridle 15.3 3.2 4.2 2.6
Main hook 500T WLL 14.2 0.8 4.8 1.9
Main hook 250T WLL 10.4 0.7 4.3 1.9
Fly hook 50T WLL 3.3 0.6 2.5 1.2
Main rope (76mm) 17.4 - 610 -
Luff rope (76mm) 17.5 - 615 -
Fly rope (42mm) 3.6 - 420 -
60.76 Boom Length 9.6 0.5 24.0 0.5
Pendants 72.92 Boom Length 14.0 0.5 37.0 0.5
97.23 Boom Length 22.8 0.5 62.0 0.5
Operation fluid weight (T)
Hydraulic oil (5,500 Litre) 5.0

3-4
3.2 Delivery Checks
General
Each component of the crane must be checked immediately after delivery to site. Components can get damaged
during transport, and is important that any damage incurred during transport be discovered prior to erection so
that safe operation and structural integrity of the crane are not affected. Any damage must immediately be
reported to Favelle Favco Cranes Pty. Ltd., who will decide whether the damaged component can be repaired or
if a new part is required.
Check List
The following check list will be of assistance when checking a crane after delivery to the site:
Item Crane Arrival Check

Check that delivery is complete (compare with delivery dockets, packing list and
1
delivery specification).
Make a note of all damages and describe them, obtaining truck driver's name
2
and vehicle registration number for your insurance purposes.
Ensure that components have adequate support and are clear of mud, water
3
etc., when stored on site.
4 Structural components shall be free from deformations.
Crane wire ropes shall be clean, well lubricated and stored on reels or on winch
5
drums for transport.
Ensure that all connector pins, washers and fastening devices are on site,
6
adequately lubricated and are ready for initial assembly.
Check all oil levels on the power pack and top up where necessary (See
7
lubrication schedule for grades and quantities in Section 5).
8 Repair the damaged and scuffed areas of paintwork.

3-5
3.3 Crane Erection – General

This typical erection procedure requires an area with restricted access and safety clothing/personal protection to
be worn. Prior to crane erection, ensure that:
 The crane components have been checked and are in good working condition.
 Adequate mobile cranage, including lifting slings (of appropriate rating), erection gear, etc, are available.
 Construction crew / riggers and sufficient tools are available for the job.
 A service engineer will be required to commission the crane on completion of erection.
 Use slew ring bolt tensioner together with hydraulic pump and hose assembly for fastening slew bolts.
The erection process can be lengthy and dangerous if correct preparation is not made
attention in advance. Always be aware of the weather conditions. The erection should not
proceed on windy days or if the wind exceeding speed of 20m/s.
3.4 Erection Accessories and Field Handling Procedure
Erection and Lifting Accessories

The following list covers materials and tools by the vendor that are required for the crane installation:
 Slings and shackles (various lengths and S.W.L. refer to lifting arrangement drawings in Section 7.)
 Slew ring guide pins (tapered drifts) (4 off).
 Hydraulic bolt tension cylinder, power unit and 100mm socket.
 Torque wrench, power unit and 45mm socket
 500m long manila reeving rope and joining rigs.
 Wire rope ‘sock’ to suit each rope, Ø76mm hoist, Ø76mm luff and Ø42mm fly.
 Rope drum support frame (1 off).
 Lubricants and solvents, oils, grease. Refer lubrication schedule.
 Standard hand tools.
 7.6kg plastic faced hammer/pinch bars.
 Puller/chain blocks (3T capacity).
 Wooden blocks 10 x (100mm x250 mm x5m) for landing boom and other crane components.
 Small crates for transferring small components to crane.
 Set of lifting arrangement drawings.
Ensure that adequate number of slings and lifting gears are available on site and complies with the local statutory
requirements. Chains must not be used under any circumstances on boom sections as these sections are
manufactured from thin wall, high tensile tube.

3-6
List of Drawings
 General Assembly
 Pedestal Details
 Pedestal Assembly
 Pedestal Adaptor Lifting Arrangement
 Machinery Deck Assembly
 Machinery Deck Lifting Arrangement
 Slew Ring Assembly
 Mast Assembly
 Mast Assembly Lifting Arrangement
 Boom Assembly
 Boom Assembly Lifting Arrangement
 Reeving Diagram
 Electrical Schematic Diagram (A.C.)
 Electrical Schematic Diagram (D.C.)
 Hydraulic Circuit
 Lubrication Schedule
Lifting of components and sub-assemblies

(a) It is recommended that experienced personnel who are familiar with the lifting and assembling of cranes shall
do all lifting. It is assumed that qualified supervisors will be available to assist with the lifting of all components.
Care must always be taken to ensure minimal paint damage when lifting, lowering, and settling down of all loads.
(b) Rigging equipment of correct rating should be used. Lifting attachments on components are to be used at all
times. Loads shall be securely rigged to ensure minimum paint damage on all components.
Lifting of containerized items

All containers shall be lifted by equal length rated chains secured to lifting points on corners of containers. Loads
are to be carefully located onto transport vehicles and transit-locked into position.
Bulk crane weights

For details on bulk loads, dimensional details and weights of crane components are provided. Refer to drawings
and table of components and sub-assemblies weights and centres of gravity.
Reeving rope and sock

A manila or hemp reeving rope complete with 'wire rope sock' will be required to assist the reeving of the luff,
main hoist and auxiliary hoist wire ropes. Ensure that the 'sock' will pass over the respective 'buttons' on the
wire ropes.

3-7
Drum reel support

A stand for the reels of wire rope may be required so that the wire ropes can be reeved onto the winch drums
without kinking and twisting.
Refer to figure below for explanation.
Figure 3-1 – Proper Drum Reel Reeving

3-8
3.5 Lifting & Installation Guides for Pedestal Adaptor
SCOPE
This procedure covers the lifting and installation of the Pedestal Adaptor
PURPOSE
The procedure ensures that the pedestal adaptor is installed safely and without damaging the slew bearing and
slew drive units.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Chains of appropriate rating, cranage of sufficient capacity, and rigging crew
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Upon receipt of the pedestal adaptor in the module yard, a visual check shall be performed to ensure there are
no major damages to structure and machined surfaces. At the same time check the pedestal adaptor for paint
work.
Internal spider bracing which are installed for transportation, should be left in place at least until the tack
welding of the pedestal adaptor into its position is complete. Removal of these supports will cause distortion of
the adaptor which will lead to distortion of its top flange. If top flange is distorted then machining of flange at
site is necessary.
The pedestal should be prepared as follows prior to the site assembly and welding:
 Check the level of the pedestal using a calibrated theodolite. Trim if necessary to ensure that the edge is
level within acceptable limits (2 mm around circumference)
 Locate a position on the pedestal which indicates due North or any other significant orientation and
clearly mark this position with a centre punch
The pedestal adaptor should be installed as follows:
1. Lift the pedestal adaptor from the transport cradles in vertical position. Lifting lugs have been provided
to assist in this operation. The adaptor is to be lowered onto a flat surface to perform an inspection on
the top flange. It is essential to ensure a stable position for the pedestal adaptor to prevent any
movement when the inspection is performed.
2. Using a calibrated tape measure, check the circumference of the pedestal and the pedestal adaptor
within 100 mm of the weld preparation. If there is a significant difference between the two readings,
this must be compensated by aligning the two units.
3. Mark the exact position, as North or any significant orientation as on the pedestal. When placing the two
pedestals together, these two marks should be aligned exactly to ensure exact placement.
4. Lift the pedestal adaptor from the top lifting lugs, and lower into position on the pedestal ensuring
correct orientation (i.e. marks are aligned)
5. Gently lower pedestal adaptor towards pedestal. Ideally, both internal walls should be in the same plane
6. While lowering, ensure that the air gap for welding around the joint interface does not exceed 2 mm at
any position around the circumference. If necessary, further trim the pedestal to reduce all gaps to
within the 2 mm allowable. Excessive air gap will lead to pedestal distortion affecting the top flange.
7. Tack weld the pedestal adaptor to the client’s pedestal and remove all wedges (if used) and dogs from
weld point.

3-9
8. Weld up the joint using the approved weld procedures. Follow the practice mentioned below while
welding:
 First weld the areas where the gap is small or non-existent and then areas with a gap. This will help to
reduce pulling in the weld.
 Regularly check/monitor the level of its machined flange during welding and adjust the welding to suit.
 Ensure a balanced welding sequence to limit distortion and movement of the machined top flange. It is
recommended that four welders shall be used simultaneously on the joint at 90 degrees separation. This
will help to avoid the need for stitch welding and unproductive sequencing procedures.
 Perform the necessary NDT checks on welds and quality control checks on the paint works. Repair all
defects if necessary before painting to the approved paint specifications.
9. Survey the machined top flange of the pedestal using an approved surveyor, and the tolerances as per
slew manufacturer must be attained.
10. If tolerances are not attained, machine the top flange of the pedestal using a self-levelling milling
machine. Machine only the minimum amount necessary to attain the required tolerances.
11. If the crane is not to be installed immediately, the machined flange shall be protected with a sealer
12. Fit the pedestal internal and external platform. Fit the platform access ladders
13. Fit all cable channels, cables and the required utility pipe works.
14. Fit the collector ring (slip ring) support bracket and collector ring assembly into the pedestal. Connect
the cables to the collector ring terminal boxes (junction boxes) and perform the appropriate electrical
checks.

3-10
3.6 Installation and Erection of Crane Structure
Machinery Deck assembly

1. Clean the slew bearing contact surface of pedestal adaptor. The contact surfaces shall be clean, dry and
free from grease.
2. Machinery deck should be placed on stands, with allowance for clearance of approximately 500mm from
the slew bearing to the ground/deck.
3. Remove the preservation from the contact surfaces of the slew bearing and the gear. Please note, when
removing the preservation (Mobilarma 633), prevent any solvent from coming into contact with the
bearing seal and also from entering the raceway.
4. Do not paint the bearing seals.
5. Sling the deck by following the machinery deck lifting arrangement drawing.
6. Ensure that all items are adequately secured prior to lifting entire assembly.
7. Take up tension on slings then remove fasteners to the stands.
8. Load and check the level of the load by measuring at the bottom of slew ring + 6mm. Adjust sling to
attain correct level.
9. Lift machinery deck assembly onto the pedestal and install slew ring bolts.
Figure 3-2 – Deck to Pedestal Installation
10. Fit and "hand tighten" bolts. See slew ring assembly drawing and FP-Slew-033 in Section 9 for slew bolt
fitting.
11. Remove slings.
12. Preload bolts carefully in a cross-wise manner, to the recommended pre-load detailed on the slew ring
assembly drawing in two stages. Tighten to 70% of preload in first stage and 100% in second.

3-11
13. Outer slew bolts have been tensioned in factory. Check 10% at random to verify.
Machinery House Assembly

If the Machinery House is delivered separately from the machinery deck, follow the procedure below to
install the machinery house.
1. Ensure that all machinery (except for the electric motors) has been installed in the house as per the
power pack and machinery house drawing.
2. Refer to the machinery deck assembly for installation of machinery house. Lift the complete machinery
houses (without electric motors) and place onto deck as per Deck Assembly drawing.
3. Install electric motors; follow Powerpack assembly for positions.
4. Refer to machinery deck assembly for installation of access ladders and machinery house handrails.
Handrails can be installed prior or after installation of the machinery house to the machinery deck.
5. Connect electrical cables and hydraulic hoses.
Main, Auxiliary & Luff Hoists

1. Before installing the winches, ensure that the machinery house, deck and house hand rails have been
installed. This will provide a safe and large working platform.
2. Sling the winches into position according to Deck Assembly Drawing.
3. Pin the winches to the deck according to the Winch Assembly Drawing. Pay special attention to the
orientation of the winches, to ensure they aren’t backwards.
4. Connect electrical cables and hydraulic hoses to each winch.
Mast Assembly Installation

1. Mast Assembly will be transported as shown in Figure 3.2 (with platforms). The mast should be placed
on level ground with adequate all round clearance.
MAST FRONT LEG
MAST REAR LEG
STOOLS
MAST PLATFORMS MAST PLATFORMS
Figure 3-3 – Mast delivery position
2. Attach rigging equipment as shown in the mast lifting arrangement drawing. (2 cranes may be used.)
3. Lift slowly, and rotate the mast into vertical position and lower to ground.
4. Install buffer assembly. Refer to mast assembly drawing.

3-12
5. Replace slings and connect to mast lifting lugs as per mast lifting diagram. The lifting points will ensure
that the lifting hook is above the centre of gravity the mast and therefore it will hang in a suitable
position for erection without further restraints. The mast stopper will prevent the legs from closing.
6. Mast is ready for fitting onto the machinery deck.
7. Lift mast assembly very slowly to the top of machinery deck assembly refer to Figure 3.3.
ENSURE MAST CLEARS THE WINCH

DRIVES BY MOVING, MAST TO
THREAD LEGS THROUGH DRIVES.
LACK OF CARE AT THIS POINT
COULD LEAD TO DAMAGED
MOTORS AND HYDRAULIC HOSES.
Figure 3-4 – Mast Installation on to Deck
Figure 3-5 – Fitting Mast Foot Pins

3-13
8. Ensure mast clears the winch drives by moving mast to thread legs through drives. Lack of care at this
point could lead to damaged motors and hydraulic hoses.
9. Lower the mast assembly gently. The mast front legs should be positioned onto the mast front leg lugs
on the deck and once holes are aligned connect using the mast front leg connector pins, refer to Figure
3.4.
10. Lower the mast rear legs (adjust by using drifts if required) onto the mast lugs on the machinery deck.
Once holes are aligned connect using the mast rear leg connector pins.
Cabin
1. Lift the cabin via the 2 supplied lifting lugs and place onto the machinery deck upper platform. For exact
position refer to Machinery Deck Assembly drawing The cabin is to be mounted on vibration mounts.
2. Connect electrical cables and hydraulic hoses as per the electrical schematic and hydraulic circuit
drawings. Connect the anemometer from the boom top to the cabin console.
Lifting boom sections

The boom assembly will be dismantled to its sections for transportation and shipment, i.e. into boom bottom,
boom transition, boom extension and boom head sections. The boom will be shipped in these separate sections.
Soft slings shall be used to lift all boom sections. Slings shall be securely attached at four points on the top chord
as per lifting Diagram. The centre of the lift shall be at the centre of gravity (C.O.G.)
Boom Assembly Installation

Ensure adequate room is allowed for the complete length of boom assembly.
Pick up boom sections such that the sections are horizontal and vertically balanced and gently lower onto timber
sleepers, refer to Figure 3.5.
HARDWOOD HARDWOOD HARDWOOD
Figure 3-6 – Boom Section Lifting

3-14
Lift next section slowly and place into position as shown in Figure 3.6.
Figure 3-7 – Assembling Boom Sections
Fit male to female connection ends and join using connection bolts, nuts and washers. Refer to boom assembly
drawing and connector bolt tightening procedure (FP-BOOM CONNECTOR-104) in Section 7 & 9.
Figure 3-8 – Boom Connections

Attach boom bottom section and fit male to female connection ends and join using connection bolts as shown in
Figure 3.7.
Attach boom top section and fit male to female connection ends as shown in Figure 3.8. Please refer to
applicable boom assembly and boom lifting arrangement for exact arrangement and quantity of boom sections.
SLOWLY
Figure 3-9 – Final Boom Assembly

3-15
Fit all walkways, platforms handrails, access ladders and sheaves to complete the assembly of the boom, refer to
boom assembly and boom walkway assembly drawing for details. Pay attention to boom rest location and eternal
connector access platforms. Ensure applicable connector access platform is "folded up; and secured so it does
not interfere with boom rest.
Locate slings as shown in the Boom Assembly Lifting Arrangement drawing.
Ensure that boom is level when lifted.
Lift the boom assembly to meet the machinery deck boom lug positions and slowly bring boom heel to
connection point.
Carefully insert lightly greased boom pivot pins through boom heel/deck lug connections. If required use
hydraulic jacks or other rigging equipment to assist proper connection. Fasten keeper plate to secure pivot pin.
Slowly lower boom assembly onto the prepared boom rest.

3-16
Bridle and Pendants

Assemble bridle and pendants on ground. Follow pendant link assembly for required length of pendants.
Connect 2 slings using basket method to outer sheaves.
Lift bridle - pendant assembly and lower onto boom with pendant side first.
Figure 3-11 – Installation of Pendants to

Boom
Connect boom - pendant connector link to boom

head plate pendant anchor using pendant link pins.
Figure 3-10 – Handling of Bridle Pendant Slowly lower the bridle with connected pendants
Assembly onto the bridle platform.
Reeving of luff and hoist ropes

1. Reeve the crane as per reeving diagram drawing in Section 7. Use rope reel stands and apply friction to
rope reel drum to allow tight wrap on winch drum.
2. Reeve the luff system by running the manila rope through the sheaves and use the luff drum as a
windlass. Secure both ends of the luff rope on completion, i.e. one end to luff drum clamp and other on
the mast anchor.
3. The hoist ropes are also reeved using the manila rope. Secure both ends of the rope i.e. on hoist drum
with the clamp and on hook or boom anchor.
4. Ropes must lie tightly on the drum bottom layers to prevent crushing of the ropes during heavy lifts.
Ensure this by using a tensioning winch where necessary, use ~3 tonne tensioning load. Other methods
to ensure good tension on the ropes is (only do once the limits have been set) Luff out to the ultimate
limit (roughly -10°) and hoist to. At minimum radius, hoist down to the ultimate limit (5 dead wraps of
rope on the drum) with a suitable load approximately 3T per fall of rope. Follow the same reeving
method for other main hoist.
5. The crane is now structurally erected. Adjust/set luffing and hoisting limits.
Ensure the rope attached does not interfere with the luff pawl assembly. The rope may need to
note be trimmed if interference is taking place. Fasteners for rope clamping must be done in
accordance with attached table on fastener’s torques.
3-17
System Installation
This section follows on from the completion of the structural installation. The following section lays out the steps
required to complete the system installation of the crane. Refer to the electrical and hydraulic schematics in
Section 7.
1. Install all power supply and communication cables to the slip-ring.
2. Terminate power supply, communications cables, etc to interface junction boxes.
3. Connect the CAN Bus cable , power cables and earth strap between the boom and the deck.
Prior to starting the electric motor the following is to be carried out:
1. Check hydraulic oil tank level, remove water from tank if present, and top up with new clean oil.
2. Check all other fluid levels.
3. Check UPS power supplies, are functioning.
4. Replace filter elements, if necessary.
5. Check all piping.
SLI System Installation

Upon completion reeving of rope, proceed to LINEC Safe Load Indication (SLI) system setting. Refer to Linec SLI
setting guideline in Section 10.
Pre – commissioning (start) Check

Before continuing to system installation, carry out the Pre-commissioning procedure
 Check the hoist rope anchorage and spooling on the drum.
 Check the luff rope anchorage and spooling on the drum.
 Check that all the ladders and handrails are secure.
 Check the power availability from the platform.
 Check the incoming supply to the collector ring against the electric circuit diagrams.
 Grease all points including ropes and open gear teeth. (Refer to lubrication schedule for details).
 Check the pump drive gearbox and the motion drive gearbox oil levels and the brake oil levels.
 Check the hydraulic oil reservoir level.
 Check the emergency stop for mechanical simulation.
 Check the control display for any equipment faults.
 Check telecommunication equipment for correct functioning.
 Check that fire & gas detectors are functional.
Final Checks
Final checks prior to commissioning should include the following:
1. Test run electric motors, main, auxiliary, slew and luff motions. Check piping for leaks and rectify if
required.
2. Check relief valve settings, pressure switch settings and record on circuits.

3-17
3. Test run all motions with no load and then with medium load to ensure all controls operate properly.
NOTE: all controls have been preset during the factory test and should only need minimal adjustment. It
is strongly recommended that there be a Favelle Favco technician present for the above operation.
4. Install and test run auxiliary items (e.g. air conditioner, lighting, communication units etc.)
5. Connect remaining power supplies, telecoms signals and etc.
6. connect up Boom-, Deck- and Mast floodlights, Aviation lights (boom and mast) and wind speed
indicator on the boom.
Refer to Commissioning Procedure COP for functioning check in Section 9.

Offshore Pedestal Crane Model PC1000, Serial No. 1814
IOM – Section 4. Crane Operation
4-1
4 CRANE OPERATION
4 CRANE OPERATION 4-1
4.1 General 4-3
4.2 Crane Safety 4-3
4.3 Description of Crane Safety Equipment 4-5
4.4 Cabin and Control Console 4-10
4.5 Pre Crane Operational Checks and Crane Start 4-16
4.6 Operating Instruction 4-18
4.7 Crane Shut Down and Out of Operation Condition 4-23
4.8 Emergency Powerpack Operation Procedure 4-24
4.9 Crane CO2 - Fire Suppression Circuit 4-25
4.10 Crane Access & Emergency Escape Routes 4-27
4.11 Allowable Hook Offlead and Sidelead Angles 4-29

4-2
Figure List
FIGURE 4-1 – GEARED CAM LIMIT SWITCH ........................................................................................................... 4-7

FIGURE 4-2 - BOOM BUFFER ................................................................................................................................ 4-8
FIGURE 4-3 - LUFF RATCHET ASSEMBLY ............................................................................................................... 4-9
FIGURE 4-4 – CABIN OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................................... 4-10
FIGURE 4-5 – CABIN CONSOLE ........................................................................................................................... 4-11
FIGURE 4-6 - CONTROL CONSOLE....................................................................................................................... 4-12
FIGURE 4-7 – GAUGE PANEL .............................................................................................................................. 4-12
FIGURE 4-8 – MGOP PANEL ............................................................................................................................... 4-13
FIGURE 4-9 - INDICATOR LIGHT PANEL ............................................................................................................... 4-13
FIGURE 4-10 – OPERATOR SEAT WITH JOYSTICKS ............................................................................................... 4-14
FIGURE 4-11 – CONTROL JOYSTICKS (VIEW FROM SEAT) .................................................................................... 4-14
FIGURE 4-12 - CONTROL JOYSTICKS CONTROL BUTTONS (VIEW FROM SEAT)...................................................... 4-15
FIGURE 4-13 - HOIST MECHANISM AND CONTROL ............................................................................................. 4-19
FIGURE 4-14 – LUFF MECHANISM AND CONTROL .............................................................................................. 4-20
FIGURE 4-15 – SLEW MECHANISM AND CONTROL ............................................................................................. 4-21
FIGURE 4-16 – CO2 OPERATING BOX .................................................................................................................. 4-25
FIGURE 4-17 - MACHINERY HOUSE CO2 SYSTEM LAYOUT................................................................................... 4-26
FIGURE 4-18 - CRANE ACCESS AND EXIT WAYS (LOWER LEVEL)........................................................................... 4-27
FIGURE 4-19- CRANE ACCESS AND EXIT WAYS (UPPER LEVEL)............................................................................. 4-28
FIGURE 4-20 – LEGEND - CRANE ACCESS AND EXIT WAYS ................................................................................... 4-28

4-3
4.1 General
This section of the manual covers operations and safe use of the crane.
The crane operator should read through this section to gain a basic understanding of crane operation and safety,
before attempting to operate the crane. This section covers routine operations, heavy lifting safety precautions as
well as emergency procedures.
By reading though this section the crane operator should become familiar with the safety equipment available to
ensure the crane is operated safely.
Instructions on the operations of the crane are also explained to familiarise the operator with this particular crane.
4.2 Crane Safety

All personnel involved in the maintenance and operation of the crane should be trained in the identification of these
hazards and the appropriate methods of their control.
Listed below are some of the more significant safety precautions that the crane operator should observe. For further
operator requirements refer o latest edition of API Recommended practice 2D for offshore cranes.
Prior to Crane Operation

1) Only qualified operators should be permitted to operate the crane. Thorough training in accident
prevention is essential.
2) Unauthorised personnel should be prevented from gaining access to the crane.
3) The operator must be physically and mentally fit, to operate the crane.
4) The crane must be operated by a person who is familiar with this crane's limitations, safety equipment and
operating instructions.
5) The directions of your local inspection authority concerning the operation of this equipment should be
posted inside the control cabin.
6) Never alter any equipment or change any pressure settings without prior written permission from FAVELLE
FAVCO CRANES PTY. LTD. Pty. Ltd.
7) Never heat, weld or oxy-cut on the boom sections or any other structural components without prior
permission and procedures given by FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES PTY. LTD. Pty. Ltd.
8) Strictly adhere to the daily check list in this section to avoid untimely crane shut down or failure.
9) The operator should be instructed to check the operation of the main hoist, fly hoist and luff brakes, as well
as the luff ratchet.
10) The operator should be instructed to report any occasion when a rope becomes kinked or displaced from a
sheave or rope drum. This situation requires careful checking of the rope. Operations should stop if a
dangerous condition exists.
11) Report any cases of excessive wear, faults, unusual noise or other irregularities immediately.
12) The crane should only be serviced when out of operation.
13) Keep the equipment in a clean condition to avoid accidents.

4-4
During Crane Operations

These are some of the safety precautions the crane operator should observe:
1. Ensure the crane has sufficient oils to prevent unexpected shutdowns when working.
2. DO NOT operate the crane if any limits or safety equipment are out of order.
3. The crane should NOT be operated in winds exceeding speed of 20m/s (including gusts). Immediately lower
all loads, and stop using the crane.
4. Under strong wind conditions bulky loads should be handled with care.
5. NEVER divert your attention while operating.
6. Pay attention to the appointed signalman.
7. DO NOT start crane operation until signalman or load is in full view.
8. Obey an emergency signal at any time no matter who gives it.
9. If there is any doubt as to safety, refuse to handle loads until safe conditions exist.
10. Conveyance of persons on the hook is prohibited.
11. Control levers must be operated steadily at all times.
12. NEVER lift a load in excess of the rated load capacity chart. Pay attention to the overload system.
13. DO NOT use crane limit switches/ encoders as stopping devices.
14. DO NOT lift more than one separately rigged load at a time.
15. DO NOT leave the operator's seat when a load is on the hook or with crane running.
16. DO NOT load fly hoist (If fitted), when a load is on the main hook, and vice versa.
17. NEVER swing a load over people. Use the warning horn.
18. Use tag lines for handling bulky loads.
19. Dragging heavy loads along the ground is a dangerous practice and is prohibited.
20. Once the hook has reached a landing, STOP hoisting down. This is to avoid slackening of the wire rope,
which may result in the incorrect re-reeling on the winch drum.

4-5
4.3 Description of Crane Safety Equipment

General Description
The crane protective and safety system consists of a combination of electrical and hydraulic operated devices.
All electrical equipment mounted on the boom is suitable for operating in a Zone 1 hazardous area. Other
equipment is rated for unclassified area.
The safety system monitors two primary sets of data, firstly the load/radius of the crane and compares to the load
chart to prevent overloading the crane, the second of which is monitoring the limits of motion to prevent the boom
or hook moving beyond the safe working zones of the hook. This however does not include offlead and sidelead
angles.
The control system diagnostics constantly check health of all components used in the crane. Should there be a fault
in the component, the control system will indicate which item requires attention and prevent use of crane should it
be critical.
LINEC Control and Safe Load Indicator System

This system is a Favelle Favco cranes developed system that monitors all aspects of the crane and its operation.
 Crane Operation speeds and limits
 Prime mover control
 Prime mover faults supply
 Hydraulic system control
 Crane function diagnostics
 Safe Load Indicator
LINEC annunciator panel gives both visual and audible alarms to indicate the status of the entire crane control.
When faults, operational limits or maintenance issues are detected by the control system, an audible and visual
alarm will be given on the main menu page which system needs attention. Each system has its own diagnostics page,
indicating in detail what is causing the alarm.
The LINEC SLI System provides the crane operator with a clear and continuous picture of his margin of safety by
indicating the hook radius, the load on the hook and the permitted safe working load for a given radius. Visual and
audible indication of approaching overload is provided as follow:
 90% SWL, visual alarm
 100% SWL, visual and continuous audible alarm
 110% SWL, motion stop
A 'self check' system to allow the operator to check the correct functioning of equipment is also provided. For more
details from the manufacturer refer to Section 10 - LINEC manual.
Pressure Transducers
Pressure transducers monitor up and down pressure lines of all winches (hoist, luff and fly). When low boost
pressure is detected by pressure transducers, all brakes will be automatically applied and the prime mover stops.
Pressure Cut Off

All hydraulic pumps are fitted with a pressure cut off system, which de-strokes the pumps when the system reaches
a set pressure, except gear pump for boost control circuit.
Manual Gross Overload Protection (MGOP)

Manual overload protection system is fitted on the crane. The protection is provided for operator to take action
against crane overloading when found crane hook accidentally caught in a sailing away ship. Upon activation, all
slew brakes are released and to be guided by hoist rope following the sailing away ship. All Hoist brakes are also
released to allow payout of hoist rope. The MGOP is actuated via a push button located in cabin control console,
4-6
with spring return detent lever. The MGOP button can be deactivated by the operator when danger no longer
present. There are indicators in the cabin console to address health of the MGOP and MGOP Activated.
Crane Winch Motion Limits

All normal operational limits are set in the LINEC control system via the display in the operator's cabin. The crane
position is determined from encoders mounted on each of the winches and slew mechanism. The encoders are
operated via shafts fitted with a plate gear and driven by the relevant drum gear. The LINEC manual in section 10
details the process to follow to set the limits on the display.
Main and Fly Hoist Encoders

Each of the Main hoist winch encoders (Stbd Main Hoist - B27A; Port Main Hoist - B27) and fly hoist (B26) have 6
encoder settings:
 Up Deceleration and Up Limit
 Up Ultimate Limit
 Down Deceleration and Down Limit
 Down Ultimate Limit
The up limits must be set with the boom at maximum radius and starting with the up limit. The up working limit is
set approximately 5 metres below the boom head hanger/ boom fly head. When reached it stops the hoist up
motion and applies the hoist brakes.
The ultimate limit stops the prime mover and all crane motions, when the hook is approximately 1.5 metres below
boom head’s hanger block.
note If the hoist ultimate limit is tripped, rectify the cause before resuming any crane operation.
The working up limit is set approximately 3 metres below the ultimate limit setting and stops the hoist motion and
applies the brakes.
note A minimum of 5 full turns of rope must remain on the drum at the lowest hoist limit.
Luff Hoist Encoder

The luff limits are set by an encoder (B25) in the LINEC control system similar to main hoist encoders. There are 6
encoder position settings:
 Luff in deceleration and in Limit
 Luff in ultimate stop
 Luff out deceleration and out Limit
 Luff Out ultimate
Luff in ultimate limit stops the motor and all crane motions. If this limit is tripped, the reason
must be determined by a qualified person and rectified before the limit can be bridged over and
the crane restarted
Luff in limit is set at minimum radius. When triggered, it stops the luff in motion and applies the brakes.
Luff in ultimate limit is set fractionally behind the in limit to prevent the boom buffer being fully compressed and
boom being bent.
The luff out limit is set at maximum radius. When triggered, it stops the motion and applies the brakes.
If ever the ultimate limit is tripped, the crane shuts down completely. The reason must be determined by a qualified
person and rectified before the limit can be bridged over and boom driven out of the tripped position.
Luff in/out Deceleration and Stop:
The deceleration and motion cease limit is controlled by the incoming boom and provides gradual deceleration at a
radius where upon motion ceases and luff brake automatically applies. Luff-in (Luff-out) deceleration and stop is
controlled by LINEC control system. This value is set during crane commissioning (approximately 10-15m greater/
(lesser) than minimum/ (maximum) radius) through the encoder setting. Luff speed decelerates when crane reaches
the decal limit, overriding the manual control in the cabin, and stops when reaches Stop value.

4-7
Hoist Limit switches (Geared Cam Limit Switches)

All crane hoists are equipped with an, additional to the encoder, ultimate limit switch, which is set fractionally
behind the encoder ultimate limit. The ultimate limits are operated by a gear cam limit switch connected to drum
gearing. The limit automatically resets when the motion is driven in the opposite direction. The gear cam rotary limit
switch work as back up of the Encoder Ultimate limit. If the ultimate limit is detected by either of the ways (encoder
or Rotary Limit switch), the prime mover will stop.
These limits are as following:
 Starboard Hoist Winch Ultimate Limit (LS1A)
 Port Hoist Winch Ultimate Limit (LS1B)
 Auxiliary Hoist Ultimate Limit (LS3)
 Luff Winch Ultimate Limit Switch (LS2)
Snap action switches with change over function are operated by maintenance free moulded gears. Switches as well
as reduction gears, reduction being selected to suit maximum drum turns, are housed in a reinforced polycarbonate
enclosure with IP66 protection. Adjustment of limit switch is infinitely made on the cam disc by means of a self-
locking worm gear. Worm gear is operated by either a 10mm screw drive or 4 mm Allen key.
Only the white worm gears are used to adjust limit switch position.
Block adjustment:
The planetary gear construction allows a block adjustment in addition to individual contact adjustment from the
usable revolution 6.5. The final gear stage is also provided with an adjustable worm, coloured black. All cam discs
can be commonly adjusted by means of this adjusting worm. The relative adjustments of the individual contacts to
each other are not modified.
Standard cam discs are supplied with 20 rises. Other cam angles are available at extra cost. The following picture
illustrates the geared cam limit switch.
Figure 4-1 – Geared Cam Limit Switch
Slew Drives
No slew limit is fitted on this crane but Slew Encoder (B7) is coupled directly on to slew drive axle for rotation
monitoring.
Slack Rope Limits

In addition all winches are provided with slack rope detection system. When detected, there will be an alarm in the
LINEC annunciator panel and respective winch motion will be stopped. The reason for slack rope alarm needs to be
determined before bypassing it, using the Reeving Mode. Selection and operation in reeving mode is operator’s
responsibility.
The following switches are used for Slack Rope Indication:
 Starboard Hoist Slack Rope Limit (LS13A)
 Port Hoist Slack Rope Limit (LS13B)
 Auxiliary Hoist Slack Rope Limit (LS15)

4-8
 Luff Slack Rope Limit (LS14)
Boom Buffer
This provides a load on the boom at minimum radius to ensure that a slack luff rope is not possible at absolute
minimum radius. The boom buffer has a RED marker, which must be always visible.
The boom buffer piston should never be compressed beyond the RED marker into the buffer
cylinder. Serious damages to boom assembly will occur.
Buffer chain
RED marker
Front
Mast
Leg
RED Marker
Boom Boom Buffer In Extreme Position
Buffer Piston
Cylinder
Figure 4-2 - Boom Buffer
Emergency Stop
This is a palm push lock down button mounted on the operator's control panel and when activated, ceases all
motions, applies all brakes, shuts down prime mover and engages luff ratchet. There are 7 emergency stops in total
on the crane and it is located at:
 Cabin Console (S2)
 Starboard Hoist Winch (S2/1)
 Port Hoist Winch (S2/2)
 Auxiliary Hoist Winch (S2/3)
 Luff Winch (S2/6)
 Port Powerpack (S2/4)
 Starboard Powerpack (S2/5)
High Temperature Indicators

High temperature sensors are fitted to crane hydraulic system. All warnings are indicate through the LINEC
annunciator located the drivers cabin.
Temperature Sensor Sender set point
Pump Drive Gearbox (TS1A & TS1B ) 95C
Hydraulic Oil (TS3) 95C
Luff Drum Ratchet (LS5)

This provides a positive lock on the luff drum and engages with prime mover shutdown. Luff Ratchet status is
provided on the Control Panel in the operator's cabin.

4-9
LS5
Figure 4-3 - Luff Ratchet Assembly
Multi Disk Drum Brakes

All the Drum drive units are equipped with fail safe wet disk brakes. These brakes are used as holding brakes only,
and not to be used to slow crane motions. Motion control is purely achieved through the hydraulic system. Brake
status is indicated control panel in the Operator's cabin.
Other Switches on Crane

 Hydraulic Oil Level LOW (LLS1/1)
 Hydraulic Oil Level HIGH (LLS1/2)

4-10
4.4 Cabin and Control Console

Operator Cabin
The operator cabin is ergonomically designed and provides all crane controls for the crane operator to operate and
monitor the crane and its control system. It also provides space for the distribution Panel X8 and other components
junction- and control boxes. The crane console is located at the left hand side of the crane operator.
A camera system is installed which monitors the hook operation and all winches. The camera operation manual can
be found in Section 10.
The Crane has two tugger winches installed, for control of the load that is to be lifted. The foot pedals are positioned
in front of the driver's seat. To operate the tugger winch the tugger winch selector switch on the console must be
turned ON.
The cabin is also equipped with a reverse cycle HVAC system that adjusts the room temperature as required. A Fire
extinguisher is placed in the back of the cabin for fire emergency situations. In addition a Smoke Detector is fitted in
the cabin.
Figure 4-4 – Cabin Overview

4-11
Control Console
The Control Console located next to cabin seat provides the operator with convenient access to crane control.
Figure 4-5 – Cabin Console

The cabin console consists of the following:
 4 Position Powerpack Selector Switch - to select Powerpack: DUAL (port and stbd Powerpack); port
Powerpack, stbd Powerpack or Emergency Powerpack
 Ignition on/ off
 Motor Start pushbutton - to start electric motors selected
 Motor Stop Push button - to stop electric motors
 Hoist/ Fly Selector
 4 Position Hoist Winch Selector Switch – to select winch mode: Personnel Lift , Dual winch (port and
stbd), Port winch or stbd winch
 Tugger Winch on / off selector switch
 Slew torque low/ high selector switch
 Emergency Stop
 ESD indicator light - to indicate platform status of the barge (controlled by barge)
 Boom Parking On/ Off selector switch
 SLI Bypass Pushbutton
 Horn Pushbutton

4-12
Figure 4-6 - Control Console
Gauge Panel
The gauge panel provides the operator with visual indication of the crane’s conditions. The panel instrumentation
consists of actual gauges indicating operating parameter. Following Gauges are installed in the gauge panel:
 Slew Pressure
 Luff Pressure
 Fly Pressure
 Port Hoist Pressure
 Stbd Hoist Pressure
 Control circuit pressure
Figure 4-7 – Gauge Panel

4-13
Manual Gross Overload Protection Panel

The MGOP panel is located in the main console in easy reachable location. The MGOP is actuated via a push button
with spring return detent lever. An indicator to address health of the MGOP is provided in the console. In addition
there is an indicator light and a buzzer to alarm the operator that MGOP is activated.
Figure 4-8 – MGOP Panel
Monitor Bracket
The monitor bracket is positioned in the front left corner in the cabin, readily visible for the crane operator. All
displays are mounted on a Vogel arm which allows the position of each of the monitors to be moved to suit the
operator. The bracket holds following displays:
 CCTV Camera Display (consisting of 4 pictures - boom camera, 3 winch cameras)
 Linec SLI and Control Display with built in Annunciator
 Indicator light panel
The indicator light panel indicates status of:
 STBD Hoist brake applied
 PORT Hoist Brake applied
 Fly Brake applied
 Luff Brake applied
 Slew Brake applied
 Luff ratchet engaged
Figure 4-9 - Indicator light panel

Further documentation and user manuals for Camera controller and display, Linec Safe Load Indicator and Crane
Control can be found in Section 10 - Reference material.

4-14
Other components (free issued)

In addition to crane control the console is equipped with UHF/ VHF radio station, Telephone, Wind speed indicator
and a PA system with goose neck microphone. These components are free issued items and detailed description is
not included in this manual.
Cabin Seat
The operator's seat is adjustable forward/ back up/ down. The seat has 2 arm rests. The arm rests come complete
with control handles (dead man type/ spring return) for crane motions and additional functions
Adjustable Control Joystick

Operator Seat
Tugger Winch
Control
Figure 4-10 – Operator Seat with Joysticks
Each control lever has a dead man button which prevents inadvertent motions without the operator's conscious
command.
LH Joystick
Port Winch
Slew
Figure 4-11 – Control Joysticks (view from seat)

Right hand joystick is a four directional level, which operates the starboard main hoist winch (or auxiliary hoist - if
selected) and luff. The main hoist is controlled with a push or pull motion () on the joystick. The Luff winch is
controlled by pushing the joystick left (luff in) or right (luff out).
The right controller also includes the following functions:

4-15
 Stbd Hoist (or Fly) Fine Control activate button - reduces Hoisting speed by 50% giving better operating
control to precisely place loads
 Luff Fine Control activate button - reduces luffing speed by 50% giving better operating control to precisely
place loads
 Boom Parking (Luff Out Override) activate button - allows to override minimum boom angle in order to park
the boom in Boom Rest. Note: Luff out override can only be active when no load is attached to the hooks.
 Winch Synchronization activate button – allows to operate and control both port and stbd hoist winches
using one stbd joystick.
Left hand controller which also is a 4 directional lever, operates port hoist winch and slew motions. Forward and
backward motion () controls the port main hoist, while left and right motion () controls the Slewing rotation.
Following functions are included into the left Hand Joystick:
 Port Hoist fine control activate button - reduces Hoisting speed by 50% giving better operating control to
precisely place loads
 Slew fine Control activate button - reduces slewing speed by 50% giving better operating control to
precisely place loads
 Slew Brake Release activate button - releases slew brake while holding the button allowing the crane to
follow load on a supply boat
 Horn - activates an external audible warning horn
Note: all activation buttons on the joystick must be held for entire operation. Once released, the function will be de-
activated.
Figure 4-12 - Control Joysticks control buttons (view from seat)
Light Switches
The Cabin Light Switch can be found on X55 Distribution Panel in the back of the cabin which includes switches to
light up following areas:
Fluorescent lights: Flood lights

 Cabin lights  Mast floodlights
 Outside cabin lights  Boom floodlights
 Upper deck access route
 External deck access ladder lights
 Hoist winch access lights
 Fly winch light
 Slew well lights (upper and lower level)
 Pedestal internal platform light
 Machinery house lights
 External machinery house lights
 Rear tank access platform lights

4-16
4.5 Pre Crane Operational Checks and Crane Start

Daily Check List
According to the usage of this crane, "Daily Check List" means inspection either by the crane operator or the
maintenance personnel whenever the crane is to be operated.
It is imperative that the crane operator is informed by the previous operator or the person responsible for the crane
of any shut down or problem.
Visually check the whole crane prior to start up looking for possible defects and loose items.
It must be noted that DAILY CHECKS do not include all specific directions given for the electric motor. The following
checks will help to ensure that no untimely shutdown will occur.
Check Prior to Prime Mover Start:

Item Check Prior to Prime Mover Start Check
1. Check pump drive gearbox and/or gearbox oil level for evidence of leaks
2. Check hydraulic oil level tank level.
3. Add MGOP accumulator N2 pressure Gauge. If the N2 is leaking this gauge will not
show anything and MGOP is not ready to operate. Normally, it shows 20Bar as it is
pre-charged.
4. Check motion gearbox oil levels and check for leaks
5. Visually check for oil leakage around the Power Pack and the winch.
6. Visually check for any sign of leakage or damage in the non-mechanical systems.
7. Ensure crane is in a clean and safe condition for daily operation.
8. Reset emergency stop button (if latch down type is used)
9. Check boom buffer positions. Both buffers must be of equal length when the
boom is away from them.
10. Check hoist, luff and fly ropes for defects.
Ensure that ropes are lying correctly in all sheaves and drums. The ropes shall be
free of kinks, loose strands or rust
11. Visually check for loose, missing, or corroded bolts, pins, keepers or cotter pins
12. Visually check loose gear to be used, such as slings, sling hooks and shackles (if
applicable).
13. Reset circuit breakers, if disengaged, to supply electric power to the prime mover
and crane safety system
14. Check Power Supply Lines for correct polarity and condition
15. Check the condition for over current and overload protection switches
16. Check condition of hydraulic oil tank heater
17. Check emergency route escape lighting, aviation lights and floodlights are working.
18. Ensure cabin windows are clean.
19. Determine that wind is not excessive for crane use and type of lift.

4-17
Prime Mover Start

Carry out daily routine as described above.
Check the control display for any warning signals; see the LINEC manual in section 10. Rectify any problems before
starting. Ensure that the control system is in normal operating mode. Select the Powerpack that is to be operated via
the Powerpack selector switch in the cabin console. Turn the Ignition Switch on and press the start button.
If using only one (1) motor the crane can still be operated to its full load capacity but with reduced speed (approx.
50%). If Emergency Powerpack is selected, the crane will operate only with Emergency (UPS) power supplied by the
barge. Refer to Section 4.8 for Emergency Powerpack Operating Instructions.
Checks during the Warm-Up Period (Prior to Operation):

Warm-up checks shall be conducting before using the crane. For optimum working temperature refer to item 18 in
the below table for minimum temperature for warming up oil.
Drive all motions while checking for abnormalities.
Warm up prime mover and pump drives, and then continue with checks. Drive all motions at half speed only while
checking, as the hydraulic system needs time to warm up to optimum operating temperature.
Do not lift any loads while the hydraulic system is below operational temperature.
Do not attempt lift any loads until Warm Up checks are complete
Item Checks During Warm Up Check

1. Check motor speed, amps and voltage, this can be found on the motor soft starter
cabinet doors. Refer to section 10 in the user’s manual
2. Check filter visual indicators, replace elements if required.
3. Check hydraulic pipe work for leakage.
4. Check that load chart for applicable boom length is installed in the cabin.
5. Check safe load indicator and run a comparison with the mechanical radius
indicator on the boom.
6. Check to ensure SLI and annunciator visual and audible alarms are working.
7. Check emergency stop is working.
8. Check 'dead man' controls i.e. ensure that all controls return to zero position by
themselves.
9. Check all brakes (main hoist, luff hoist, fly and slew).
10. Check main 'hoist up' and 'hoist down' limit function
11. Check 'luff up' and 'luff down' limit
12. Check 'luff in' and 'luff out' deceleration and motion cease limit.
13. Check 'hoist up' and 'hoist down' deceleration
14. Check the operation of the luff drum pawl.
15. Check horn.
16. Check that there is absolutely no motion creep with brakes applied.
If any motion is detected, immediately shut down the crane and
contact qualified maintenance personnel.
17. With brakes released, creep up in both hoist and luff is possible. The pumps can be
set slightly off centre to avoid the load or boom drop with heavy loads.
18. Check oil tank temperature before any heavy work is required. The minimum
temperature shall not be less than 25-35 degrees Celsius, depending on the oil
type. Refer to the Section 5.3 of this manual for further information.

4-18
4.6 Operating Instruction

Prior to starting the electric motor and during the warm up period, the operator is required to check the crane
according to the daily checklist in section 4.5.
When the crane is assembled for the first time, circuit breakers in the electric cubicle must be engaged to provide
power. Ignition is switched on and the annunciator shows low oil and boost pressure until prime movers are started.
The SLI display is also switched on through the ignition switch and shows boom radius, load in tonnes and permitted
load in tonnes.
When the crane is started with cold and thick hydraulic oil in the system, the filter bypass may indicate on the
annunciator until the hydraulic oil warms up.
When hoisting loads the first load of the shift must be raised a short distance from the ground held for a moment
then the lift can continue; this also must occur for the first lift greater than 50% of the rated capacity.
Motion control valves are of the ‘dead man’ type and motion speeds are in direct proportion to the deflection of the
lever from the neutral position. If creep mode on either of the motions is selected the motion speeds reduce by 50%
even if joystick is deflected to its maximum.
Care must be taken at all times to ensure that all motion controls are operated smoothly and progressively and not
'plugged' or 'counter switched' before the load stops.
On electrically controlled cranes electronic ramping of controls will occur to prevent shock loading however this
means response to controls is reduced so familiarisation with the crane is recommended for drivers before in service
use.
The SLI continually shows the radius, actual and permitted load at any specific radius, which must be observed at all
times. This is to avoid tripping the motion cut-out while luffing out. When overload condition occurs, the operator
should immediately luff in or lower the load to the ground.
Further information on the SLI can be found in Section 10 of this manual.
All crane alarms are provided as an operator’s aid only and should not be solely relied on. The operator should be
aware at all times of the permitted safe working load, the current load on the hook and the current radius.
General Precaution
All lifts are undertaken by observing the safe load indicator for the hoist in operation.
To check the load, tension the rope by pulling the control valve slowly in the up direction. Release lever immediately
when either indicator shows overload.
If the indicator shows overload, then the load must be lightened, or the lifting radius reduced.
Pay strict attention to the safe load indicator when luffing out with a heavy load to avoid
overloading the crane.
When raising heavy loads the control is pulled slowly to accelerate the load to maximum hoist speed.
Lowering of heavy loads (above ¾ full loads) will generate reserve load on to hoist and luff circuit and transmission.
A load retarding system is built in to the crane hydraulic to dissipate the generate energy via heat. It is
recommended to lower heavy loads at a slower speed.
If during operation a further drop is observed, immediately back-off the controls to avoid stalling of the prime
mover.
Should a load or the boom ever accelerate out of control, never counter switch controls, let all
controls go and hit the emergency stop button to arrest load or boom.

4-19
Main Hoist Control

The crane is equipped with twin hoist winch, each independently controlled via an operator joysticks. This allows
independent control of main hoist hook.
When overload is detected beyond the calibrated load cell value, lifting motion is not permitted. This may occur if
load detected on hook exceeds the permitted load chart. As ultimate safe guard of the hoisting mechanism, pressure
overload protection on the hoist circuit is set at approximately 30 bar beyond design lifting pressure to prevent
lifting of any load exceeded original design.
Each hoist winch is equipped with six (6) hoist drives arranged in closed loop configuration for smooth operation.
Each drive consists of a variable displacement motor, a reduction gearbox and a disc brake. Brakes are automatically
engaged upon release of operator joystick.
DRUM GEAR DRUM FLANGE
HYDRAULIC REDUCTION
BRAKE
CABIN MOTOR GEARBOX
PRESSURE
GAUGE
HYDRAULIC
PUMP
HYDRAULIC REDUCTION
BRAKE
MOTOR GEARBOX
PORT
POWERPACK
HYDRAULIC REDUCTION
BRAKE
MOTOR GEARBOX
HYDRAULIC
PUMP
HOIST WINCH
HYDRAULIC
PUMP
HYDRAULIC REDUCTION
BRAKE
MOTOR GEARBOX
STARBOARD
POWERPACK
HYDRAULIC REDUCTION
BRAKE
MOTOR GEARBOX
HYDRAULIC
PUMP
HYDRAULIC REDUCTION
BRAKE
MOTOR GEARBOX
RH CONTROL
JOYSTICK
Figure 4-13 - Hoist Mechanism and Control

The hoist winch is safe guard with main hoist up limit and down limit. Upon activation of these limits, continue
motion is not permitted except those in reverse direction.
In addition to the up- and down limit, the crane is equipped with a up- and down deceleration function, which
decelerates the hoisting up (down) speed at approx. 5-10m below (above) the up (down) limit.
The crane is also fitted with ultimate up limit and ultimate down limit. This is mainly to protect structural damage
occurring due to unintended movement of the hook. Upon activation of these limits the prime mover will shutdown
automatically. Restarting of the crane is not permitted until the limit is bypassed under supervision. Investigation
must be carried out until the cause of tripping is identified and rectified.
Synchronised control of both hoist winches is possible via selection of winch synchronization operating mode in the
Linec display. Using this feature, the operator is able to use only one (1) joystick (left hand side) to operate both
(port and stbd) main hoist winches at the same speed.
During synchronised control mode, the load cell installed on each hoist line continues to monitor line pulls of the
hoist to prevent overloading of either one of the hoist winch. Speed is therefore synchronised.

4-20
Auxiliary Hoist Control

The crane is equipped with auxiliary hoist winch, with control via operator joysticks.
Auxiliary hoist winch is equipped with three (3) hoist drives arranged in a closed loop configuration for smooth
operation. Each drive consists of a variable displacement motor, a reduction gearbox and a disc brake. Brakes are
automatically engaged upon release of operator joystick.
The Fly winch is, same as the main hoist winches equipped with up- and down limits, up- and down deceleration as
well as up- and down ultimate limits.
Luff Control
The crane luff winch is equipped with six (6) luff drives arranged in closed loop configuration for smooth operation.
Each drive consists of variable displacement motor, reduction gearbox and disc brake. Brakes automatically engaged
upon release of cabin control joystick.
As luff drives are equipped with variable displacement hydraulic motor, luffing speed may increase when luff load
reduces. This occurs during boom luffing inward towards the crane.
DRUM GEAR DRUM FLANGE

HYDRAULIC REDUCTION
MOTOR GEARBOX
BRAKE
CABIN
PRESSURE
GAUGE
HYDRAULIC
PUMP
HYDRAULIC REDUCTION
BRAKE
MOTOR GEARBOX
PORT
POWERPACK
HYDRAULIC REDUCTION
BRAKE
MOTOR GEARBOX
LUFF WINCH
HYDRAULIC
PUMP
HYDRAULIC REDUCTION
BRAKE
MOTOR GEARBOX
STARBOARD
POWERPACK
HYDRAULIC REDUCTION
BRAKE
MOTOR GEARBOX
HYDRAULIC
PUMP
HYDRAULIC REDUCTION
BRAKE
MOTOR GEARBOX
LUFF RATCHET
RH CONTROL
JOYSTICK PINION
Figure 4-14 – Luff Mechanism and Control

The luff winch is fitted with ratchet pawl acting directly on luff drum flange. Luff ratchet is connected to ratchet
cylinder positively and therefore automatically engaged upon shutdown of prime mover. Note luff pawl ratchet is
not part of luff hoist control and therefore should not be engaged during crane operation.
In addition to load monitoring by Linec SLI System, the hydraulic pumps are built in with Pressure Overload
Protection via relief valves. As load on luff winch corresponds proportionally to luff pressure, these relief valves
prevent overload of luff winch by relieving pressure build up in the system. Luff overload could be occurred under
following conditions:
 With tension developed in hoist rope higher than permitted in Load Chart, attempt to luff up boom to pick
up load off ground;
 With load on hook and above ground, attempt to luff out beyond permitted radius of corresponding load
Under such condition operator shall stop immediately and reverse operating direction.

4-21
The luff drive motors are also fitted with luff down overspeed protection. This ensures during lowering of heavy
boom or boom with heavy load on hook, luff down speed would not accumulate over gravitational and inertia effect.
When happens it could create hazard to operation and potentially damage in reversing energy to prime mover.
Slew Control
The crane is equipped with four (4) slew drives arranged in closed loop configuration for smooth operation. Each
drive consists of fixed displacement motor, reduction gearbox and disc brake. Brakes automatically engaged upon
release of cabin control joystick.
SLEWING
REDUCTION REDUCTION REDUCTION REDUCTION BEARING
GEARBOX GEARBOX GEARBOX GEARBOX
BRAKE BRAKE BRAKE BRAKE
HYDRAULIC HYDRAULIC HYDRAULIC HYDRAULIC

MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR
CABIN
FREE SLEW PRESSURE FREE SLEW
MGOP GAUGE MGOP
HYDRAULIC LH CONTROL HYDRAULIC

PUMP JOYSTICK PUMP
PORT STARBOARD
POWERPACK POWERPACK
Figure 4-15 – Slew Mechanism and Control

Note both the slew pumps are connected to independent Primary Powerpack. Slewing operation is designed to
operate with both Powerpack running at nominal motor speed. However it is also possible to continue slew
operation with only one Primary Powerpack in running mode. During this total oil flow within the circuit is reduced
by approximately half, therefore reduced performance should also be expected.
Free slew is provided during actuation of MGOP, which means that all slew brakes are released permitting the crane
to be guided inline towards ship sailing away direction.
Slew brake control

During normal operation, with the control lever in neutral position the brake switch is in the ON position (brake
closed). By holding the control push button on the joystick, slew brake releases without deflecting the joystick,
allowing the crane to follow load on a supply boat.
Cooling Circuit
The crane is fitted with cooling circuit connected to cooling pump. The circuit is also connected to control circuit of
the crane and generally operate around 30 bar. No attention is required on the operation of cooling circuit, however
operator should pay attention to performance of the cooling circuit by monitoring operation temperature.

4-22
Overriding crane limits

Ensure the operator conducts daily checks and only has the required keys to operate the crane. Only the crane
supervisor should hold the SLI Override key. Under no circumstances are operators to circumvent any limits,
without prior authorization by Favelle Favco, see contacts at the start of this manual. All such operation of the crane
is to be supervised by a qualified person.
Overriding limits should only be for maintenance purposes, NOT for handling loads. Reeving mode is only to be used
for and during major maintenance operations and bypass slack rope limits.
Luff Out Limit Override/Boom Parking

The luff override can be initiated two ways. Pressing the “Parking Mode” button only allows the operator to place
the boom in the boom rest. Pressing the reeving mode button overrides all limits and should only be used when
major maintenance programs are to be carried out.
When lowering the boom follow the procedure below. Press the “Parking Mode” button and gradually lower the
boom to park position. Refer to general arrangement drawing, section 7 for details on boom parking positions and
boom angle. Warnings may trip during the boom lowering.
Switch OFF the crane.
To raise the boom, follow the pre-operation and normal operation (where possible) checklist, then raise boom.
Carry out the remaining items in the normal operation check list.

4-23
4.7 Crane Shut Down and Out of Operation Condition

Prime mover and hydraulic components should be allowed a sufficient "cooling off" period prior to shutdown.
Running prime mover at approximately for at least 5 minutes after crane has been working hard should be sufficient
for cooling off purposes.
Before leaving the cabin, ensure that all windows are closed. Switch off all lights and shut cabin door securely.
Before leaving the crane, a visual check of components should be undertaken and the maintenance supervisor or the
responsible person informed of any discrepancies.

4-24
4.8 Emergency Powerpack Operation Procedure

Occasionally due to unfavourable circumstances, crane prime mover(s) may trip during operation. After the trip, the
crane prime mover(s) may not able to restart immediately and safely. When this happens the crane has completely
loss power for driving any of the hoisting, luffing or slewing mechanisms. During then there could be 2 scenarios:
 If there are any loads on hook, the load must be lowered otherwise could post hazard to nearby working
environment. This may involve hoisting, luffing and slewing of crane for the load to be positioned to a safe
location.
 If necessary during emergency, the crane may need to continue transferring personnel even during event of
power failure. The operation may involve hoisting, luffing and slewing of crane for personnel to be placed at
a safe location.
In such the event, the crane operation may resume operation with the emergency power supply from the barge.
This crane is equipped with an emergency powerpack unit, 110kW electro-hydraulic powerpack, located in the
machinery house. The emergency power supply is connected such that it only powered up the emergency
powerpack. Once switch over to emergency powerpack, the crane may continue operation at full load but in
reduced speed mode.
Emergency powerpack is designed to permit hoisting, luffing and slewing of crane at reduced
speed to lower down load on hook to a safe location. It must not be used for normal crane
lifting operation!
The crane control system shall remain active when emergency motions are carried out. When the load is still at hook
hanged in the air, it must be lowered to a safe place once the power has recovered by emergency power supply. This
is crucial if the failure cannot be fixed in a short period. Take note that once the emergency mode is selected or
activated. The interlock system will allow the 3rd powerpack or the emergency powerpack to be able to start up and
both main powerpacks are shut down.
In this mode, the operation of the crane is different from normal mode operation in which it can only operate one
motion at a time. For example: when wish to luff down and then hoist down, select the luff mode and follow by the
hoist mode. Once the load is successfully lowered, if possible park the boom back to boom rest.

4-25
4.9 Crane CO2 - Fire Suppression Circuit

The crane's machinery house is equipped with a manually operated CO2 - Fire Suppression System. The cabined with
3 units of CO2 Cylinders is located on the stbd side in front of the machinery house (next to the house entry door).
The CO2 Operating Box is located on stbd side of the machinery house beside the CO2 Cabinet. Upon opening of the
cabinet doors an audible fire alarm will be activated. A handle to activate the quick release valves is provided inside
the CO2 operating Box.
The crane personnel shall be familiar with the procedure of the usage of Fire Suppression system. A detailed
instruction manual can be found in Section 9.
PROCEDURE
 Evacuate the protected space (machinery House).
 Open door of CO2 Operating Box. A pre-alarm will sound and crane prime movers will stop.
 Close all doors, vents and hatches in the machinery house. For detailed plan and location refer to
machinery house layout below.
 Operate pull handle to open CO2 main valve
 Turn thumb screw so that the pull handle for CO2 cylinders is free to operate
 Operate the pull handle to open CO2 cylinders
 CO2 system released.
 Do not enter the machinery space while CO2 system is activated.
Thumb
screw
Handle to
open CO2
Main Valve Handle to
open CO2
Cylinders
Figure 4-16 – CO2 Operating Box

4-26
CO2 Operating
Box
Figure 4-17 - Machinery House CO2 System Layout

4-27
4.10 Crane Access & Emergency Escape Routes

The crane has 3 exit ways from the deck level to the pedestal, which are shown in the Layout below. The crane
operator and personnel have to be familiar with all exit ways and escape routes on the crane in case of an
emergency.
Deck External Exit ways

The main deck exit way is located at the stbd side of the crane, next to the stbd side hoist winch, which is an outer
stair way to the pedestal adaptor external platform.
Another exit way is via the ladder in the rear of the crane next to the stbd side of the luff winch. This exterior exit
way also leads tho the pedestal adaptor external platform.
The pedestal adaptor external platform is equipped with an ladder down to the barge.
Deck Internal Exit way

There is an internal exit way from the machinery house, through the slew well, which leads to the internal pedestal
platform. A ladder is provided from the internal platform down to the barge pedestal.
Further Exit ways are shown on the Access and Exit way plan. In case of an emergency and depending on the type of
the emergency crane personnel have to identify the safest exit way to evacuate themselves from the crane.
Figure 4-18 - Crane Access and Exit ways (LOWER LEVEL)

4-28
Figure 4-19- Crane Access and Exit ways (UPPER LEVEL)
Figure 4-20 – legend - Crane Access and Exit ways

An A3 sized Drawing Escape plan SK-6711 has been attached in Section 9 - Reference material.

4-29
4.11 Allowable Hook Offlead and Sidelead Angles

Based on API-2C, the crane is designed to allow certain offlead and sidelead angle for different boom length, lifting
radii and significant wave heights.
Offlead and sidelead angles tabulated below are extracts from the load chart calculations and are for reference only.
There are no provisions on the crane to evaluate and restrict the lifts to these limits.
The SWL, offlead and sidelead values tabulated below do not take into account the angle between two hooks
separated by the hangerblock. For maximum SWL for specific hook angle separated by hangerblock, please refer to
Chapter 1.2.

4-30

4-31

4-32

4-33

4-34

4-35

4-36

4-37

OffshorePedestalCraneModelPC1000,SerialNo.1814
IOM–Section5.Maintenance
5Ͳ1
5 MAINTENANCE
5.1 PreventativeMaintenanceͲGeneral 5Ͳ3
5.2 DetailedMaintenanceSchedule 5Ͳ4
5.3 RecommendedOilsandGreases 5Ͳ12
5.4 GeneralRopeCare 5Ͳ15
5.5 ServiceandRepairofStructuralandMechanicalComponents 5Ͳ22
5.6 ServiceandRepairofFluidComponents 5Ͳ24
5.7 ServiceandRepairofElectricalComponents 5Ͳ28


5Ͳ2
FigureList

FIGURE5Ͳ1–TYPICALWINCHDRIVEASSEMBLY.......................................................................................................5Ͳ5
FIGURE5Ͳ2–SLEWDRIVEASSEMBLY........................................................................................................................5Ͳ6
FIGURE5Ͳ3–DISCBRAKEMAINTENANCE.................................................................................................................5Ͳ7
FIGURE5Ͳ4–PUMPDRIVEGEARBOX(TYPICAL)........................................................................................................5Ͳ8
FIGURE5Ͳ5–OPENGEAR...........................................................................................................................................5Ͳ8
FIGURE5Ͳ6GEARͲPINIONGREASEPUMP................................................................................................................5Ͳ9
FIGURE5Ͳ7–SLEWRINGGREASENIPPLESONCENTRALMANIFOLD.......................................................................5Ͳ9
FIGURE5Ͳ8–HYDRAULICOILFILTERCROSSSECTION.............................................................................................5Ͳ11
FIGURE5Ͳ9–CORRECTSPOOLINGFROMREELTODRUM......................................................................................5Ͳ16
FIGURE5Ͳ10–VALLEYBREAK..................................................................................................................................5Ͳ17
FIGURE5Ͳ11–CORRECTMETHODOFMEASURINGROPEDIAMETERS...................................................................5Ͳ18


5Ͳ3
5.1 Preventative Maintenance - General

Thissectionofthemanualcoversroutinemaintenancerecommendationsforthecrane.
The owner must establish a regular maintenanceschedule,suitedtothespecificapplicationandlocalconditions,
usingthismanualasaguideinconjunctionwithcomponentmanufacturer'smanuals.
Itisrecommendedthattheownerofthiscraneclearlydefinestheresponsibilitiesofthecraneoperators(drivers)
andthemaintenancepersonnel.
Asexperienceisgainedbytheowner,andoperatingschedulesestablished,thefollowingrecommendedprocedures
andchecksshouldbemodifiedtosuittheoperatingpattern.
For this reason, specific quantities and times are not specified for normal maintenance procedures, eg. greasing,
inspections,etc.Theserequirementsshouldbedeterminedbyobservation,andpracticalapplicationofestablished
maintenanceprocedures.
Amaintenancelogbookshouldbeusedtoestablishtherequiredschedule.ThislogbookshouldcontaintheSLEW
RINGCLEARANCESrecord.
In later subͲsections, FFC recommend periodical checks, lubrication schedule and system maintenance. These are
basedonanannualusageof2000hours.

5Ͳ4
5.2 Detailed Maintenance Schedule
ThoroughExamination
A thorough examination of the crane should be carried out after the initial 100 hours of operation. Refer to
maintenanceloginSection9–ReferenceMaterial.
Bolts,screwsandhydraulicfittingsshouldbecheckedandreͲtightenedifnecessary.

Forrecommendedbolttighteningtorques,refertoSection9–ReferenceMaterial.
HydraulicSystem
Maintenance of the hydraulic system mainly involves changing the oil and oil filter elements. Typical system
maintenancechecksare:
x Checkforthefilterbypasswarninglightontheannunciatorpanelafterthewarmupperiod.
x Checktankoillevelregularly.
x Topupwithcorrectoilasspecified.
Donotoverfillhydraulicoiltank,astheoilmightoverflowthroughbreatherduringoperation.

x Usecleanoilreceptacles.
x Checkfillerbreatherontankforclogging.
x Checkthesysteminstrumentationi.e.ensurepressuregauges,etc.,arefunctioningsatisfactorily.
x After each 100 hours operation or during general service of crane, drain off 1 litre of oil from tank to
removeanycondensedwater.Ifwaterispresent,drainuntilremovedandtopupwithcleanoil.
x Frequencyofhydraulicoilchangedependsonthecleanlinessoftheoil.Comparetankoilwithasampleof
newoilandifindoubtaskahydraulicoilsupplierforassistanceinevaluatingsuitabilityofoilforfurther
use.
x Checkforexternalleaks.Immediatelyrepairanyleaksdiscovered.
x CheckthatpipeͲworkissound.Whererubberhoseisused,ensurethatnochafinghasoccurred.
x Checkthatallsystempressuresarenormalfortheapplication.
x Whenamaintenanceshutdownoccursitisadvisabletoexaminetheoiltankforsludgeandforeignmatter,
andcompletelycleanifnecessary.Thisisimperativeifacomponentfailurehasoccurred.
PlanetaryGearboxes(MotionDrives)
Thefirstoilchangemustbecarriedoutaftertheinitial50Ͳ100hoursofoperation,withsubsequentchangesevery
2500hoursor12months,whicheveroccursfirst.Theseintervalsmaybemodified,dependingonactualoperating
conditions.
x During oil change, we recommend that the inside of the gearbox is flushed out with flushing fluid
recommended by the lubricant manufacturer. Check that there are no metallic parts with unusual
dimensionsinthemagneticplugofthegearunitoranymultiͲdiskbrake.
x Oilshouldbechangedwhenhottopreventbuildupofsludgedeposit.
x Oillevelsshouldbecheckedoncepermonth.

5Ͳ5
WhencheckingoillevelsingearunitsequippedwithamultiͲdiskbrakeorhydraulicmotor,if
thelevelshaverisen,thismeansthatoilispenetratingeitherfromthebrakesealsorfromthe
motorrotaryseal.
x Ifmorethan10%oftotaloilcapacityhastobeadded,checkforoilleaks.
x Oillevelonhorizontalmountedboxesisonthecentreline.
x Verticalmountedboxes(slewdrives)arefilledtothetopthroughtheExpansiontankasfollows:
o RemoveExpansiontankplug
o Filluntiloilreachestheminimummark.
o With the gear running under steady steadyͲstate thermal condition and the oil at its expansion,
addoiltothemaximum,butnotexceedingmaximummark.
o Runthegearuntilallairpocketsareeliminated.
x Duetothelesserusage,changeoilinslewdrivesonceeveryyear.
Todrainthegearboxes,opendrainplugsandemptygearboxes.Ensureappropriatecontainersareinplacetocatch
usedoilandpreventfromspillage.
Figure5Ͳ1–TypicalWinchDriveAssembly

5Ͳ6
HYDRAULIC EXPANSION TANK

MOTOR
BRAKE FILLER
BRAKE
RELEASE
PORT
GEARBOX
DRAIN PLUG
SLEW PINION
Figure5Ͳ2–SlewDriveAssembly

5Ͳ7
Discbrakes(partofplanetarygearboxes)
Figure5Ͳ3–DiscBrakeMaintenance

5Ͳ8
PumpDriveGearbox
Thefirstoilchangemustbecarriedoutafterinitial200hoursofoperation,withsubsequentchangesevery2000
hoursorevery12months,whicheveroccursfirst.Theseintervalsmaybemodified,dependingonactualoperating
conditions.
1. During oil change, we recommend that the inside of the gearbox is flushed out with flushing fluid
recommendedbythegearboxmanufacturer.
2. Oilshouldbechangedwhenhottopreventbuildupofsludgedeposit.
3. Oillevelsshouldbecheckedoncepermonth.
4. Ifmorethan10%oftotaloilcapacityhastobeadded,checkforoilleaks.
5. Ifoillevelrises,pumpshaftsealorenginesealsmaybefaultyandmustbereplaced.
6. Oillevelisindicatedbythemaximumnotchonthemeasuringstick(partofbreather)oftheoiltank.
Figure5Ͳ4–PumpDriveGearbox(Typical)
FordetailedgearboxservicemanualreferSection10Ͳpartsmanuals.
Opengears
Greaseopengearswiththerecommendedcompoundsavoidingbaremetaltometalcontact.Anautomaticgrease
pumpisprovidedoneachwinch.TheGreasepumpshouldautomaticallyreleasegreasewhencraneisoperating.
OnlyNGLI2typegreaseistobeused.
Figure5Ͳ5–OpenGear
5Ͳ9
GREASE PUMP
GREASE NOZZLES
PINION

Figure5Ͳ6GearͲPinionGreasePump
In addition, it is recommended to apply grease with brush sparingly to avoid dripping or splattering. Lubrication
shouldbecheckedweekly.
SlewRing
Lubricating intervals depend on the operating conditions. This is generally every 50 operating hours for roller
bearings.
Thegreasefillingistheretoreducefriction,sealthebearingandprovideprotectionagainstcorrosion.Therefore,
thebearingmustalwaysbegreasedliberallysothatacollaroffreshgreaseformsaroundthewholecircumference
ofthebearinggapsandseals.ThebearingshouldberotatedduringreͲlubrication.
During periods of down time (3 months), thecraneshouldbeslewedtoformacollaroffreshgreasearoundthe
slewringcircumference.Thisistoensurefreshgreaseformsatthesealsandthebearinggapsaroundtheslewring.
Greaseuntilfreshgreaseoozesfromseals.
Figure5Ͳ7–SlewRingGreaseNipplesonCentralManifold

5Ͳ10
Maintenance/InspectionofSplinedPinionDrives
Thecraneisfittedwithsplinedpiniondrivesonthemain,luff,flyandslewdrives;thesemustbeinspectedpriorto
erectionofthecraneandrepeatedevery4,000workinghours,oreverytwoyears,whicheveroccursfirst.Failureto
dosocanresultintheprematurefailureofthewinchesonthecrane.Thefollowingisaprocedureforinspectionof
thepinionspline.
Forstandardgearbox/pinionarrangement:
1. Removethepinionfromeachgearboxoutputshaft.
2. Washdownandcleanthemaleandfemalesplinesandinspectforwear.
3. Handfitthepiniontotheshaft,androcksthepinionbackwardsandforwardsaspernormalrotation.Any
movementgreaterthan1mmattheouteredgeoftheteethofthepinionindicatesthepinionand/orthe
gearboxoutputshaftmustbereplaced.Anyvisualsignofsignificantcorrosionorwearalsoindicatesthat
thepinionand/orgearboxshaftmustbereplaced.
4. Ifthepinionandthegearboxshaftweararewithinlimits,refitthepinion,andensureoilerisconnected
andchargedwithoil
5. Repeattheprocedureforeachpinion.
Internal splines on winch pinions are designed as a wet connection and should be greased (using grease gun)
periodically (approximately every 8 working hours) run to maintain a film of oil. Failure to do this may cause the
piniontoseizetothegearboxshaft.
WireRopes
Usecompoundwhennecessarytopreventcorrosion.Checkweekly.
BearingsandBushes
RefertoLubricationDiagramforlocationsandgreasingintervals.
UnpaintedComponents
Unpaintedpartsofthecrane,suchasshaftsandpins,aregenerallytreatedwithantiͲcorrosioncoating.Itshouldbe
inspectedonaregularbasisandpreservedwithasprayͲoncoating.
Sheaves(Mast,Bridle,Boom,HangerblockandHook)
Greasesheavebearings.
Checkforbearingwearandnylonringcoversevery250hrs.
Checksheaverotationandwobble
Checksheaverootandrootflangesfornormalwear.

5Ͳ11
ReplacingFilterElement
Element Removal and Cleaning
1. Ensurethattheoilsupplylinestothefilterareclosedandthelinedecompressedtoatmosphere.
2. Drainthefilterofoilbyremovingthebowl,whichisthreadedintothehousing.Unscrewbyapplyingthe
correctspannertothebasehexagon.
3. Lowerthebowlverticallytocleartheelementassembly,whichwillremaininthehousing.
4. Dislodgetheelementfromthehousing.Removecarefully.
5. Paperelementscannotbecleaned,andmustbereplaced.Cranesfittedwithwashableelementsshouldbe
cleanedappropriatelybeforereplacingtheelement.
Fitting the Clean Element
1. Before replacing the element, thoroughly clean the interior of the bowl and the accessible areas of the
housing.Replaceelement,wireonly,‘O’ringsealandlubricate.
2. Pushtheelementspigotintothehousinguntilitholdsinplace.
3. Replacebowlrimsealandlubricatehousingandbowlbeforerefittingbowl.
4. Screwthebowlrimsealandlubricatethehousingandtightenwiththecorrectspanner.
Figure5Ͳ8–HydraulicOilFilterCrossSection

5Ͳ12
5.3 Recommended Oils and Greases
HydraulicSystemOil
For optimum performance and service life of hydraulic axial piston pumps and motors, and fixed displacement
pumpsandmotors,theviscosityistobe30centistokes(30cst)at60ºC.
FFCrecommendsusinghydraulicoilwithanISOviscosityclassVG68;withaviscosityindexofaminimumof95is
suitablefortropicalconditionsorforareaswithhighambienttemperatures.
Brand Oil MinimumOperatingTemp
Mobil* DTE 26°C
Shell Tellus 68°C
Esso NutoH 68°C
Ampol Tecoma 68°C
Castrol HystinAWH 68°C
*Showsfactoryrecommendedandfirstfill.
For areas where the ambient temperature falls below zero or day time ambient temperature is between 0ºC to
maximumof+20ºC,athinneroilasISOͲVG46or32mustbeused.Recommendedoilsandoperatingtemperatures:
Approx.Ambient(DayTimeTemperature) Below0qC 0qͲ+20qC +10qͲ+35qC
HydraulicOil:ISOClass VG32 VG46 VG68
Oilshouldbeexchangedandstoredincleandrumsforfutureusebeforeambienttemperaturesfallbelow0ºCand
theallowableviscosityoftheoilinthesystemrisesabove1000cst.
Forcranesinlowtemperature(0ºCtoͲ10ºC)conditiononly:Provisiontofitlowwattageheatersintohydraulicoil
tankmustbemade,butthewarmoilwillonlybenefitthepumpswhenstarted,whilethecontrol,brakeandsafety
systemoilremainsinfreezingenvironmentandwilloperatesluggishlyandcouldleadtoadangerouscondition.
In any case, oil must be warmed up to a minimum temperature as shown on following table before full pressure
operationcancommence.
Viscosity OilTemperature
Oilmustbeheatedtoreachminimumof 1000cst Ͳ10qC Ͳ5qC 0qC
Preferredminimumstartingstate 600cst Ͳ5qC 0qC +5qC

Minimumfullpressureworkingstate 100cst +20qC +27qC +33qC
Optimumworkingstate 30cst +40qC +50qC +60qC
Maximumworkingstate 20cst +50qC +60qC +70qC

Shorttimepeaktemperature(critical) 15cst +60qC +70qC +80qC
DiscBrakes(PartofPlanetaryTransmissionGearboxes)
Manufacturer’s recommendations: Hydraulic Oils, ISO class: VG32. Mineral oils with enhanced heat and aging
resistance and viscosity ISO VG 32, with a viscosity index greater than or equal to 95. Alternative Oil: Auto
transmissionfluid,SAEGrade:10W.Oilsmeetingthisrecommendationare:
Manufacturer OilDesignation
Esso ATFDexronII
Mobil* ATF220

5Ͳ13
PumpDriveGearbox
Gearboxmanufacturer’srecommendation:SAE90withEPadditives.Oilsmeetingthisrecommendationare:
Ͳ20ȗC/+5ȗC +5ȗC/+40ȗC Ͳ30ȗC/+65ȗC
AmbientTemperature
(Ͳ4ȗF/41ȗF) (41ȗF/104ȗF) (Ͳ22ȗF/149ȗF)
Viscosity–ISO3448 VG100 VG150 VG150Ͳ220
Viscosity–Ivmin 95 95 165
MOBIL Mobilgear600XP100 Mobilgear600XP150 MobilSHC630
AGIP Blasia100 Blasia150 Blasia220
BPMACH GRXP100 BRXP100 SGRXP220
CASTROL AlphaSP100 AlphaSP150 AlphaSN6
ELF ReductelfSP100 ReductelfSP150 Oritis125MS
ESSO SpartanEP100 SpartanEP150 C.OilLg150
I.P. Mellana100 Mellana150 TelesiaOil150
SHELL OmalaOil100 OmalaOil150 n/a
TOTAL CarterEP100N CarterEP150 na
PlanetaryGearboxes(MotionDrives)
Gearbox manufacturer’s recommendation: ISO viscosity. Class: VG150 (V.I. 95 min.). Oils meeting this
recommendationare:
Ͳ20ȗC/+5ȗC +5ȗC/+30ȗC Ͳ30ȗC/+50ȗC Ͳ30ȗC/+65ȗC
Lubricant
IV95min IV95min IV95min IV165min
ISO3448 VG100 VG150 VG320 VG150Ͳ220
AGIP Blasia100 Blasia150 Blasia320 BlasiaS220
ARAL DegolBG100 DegolBG150 DegolBG320 DegolGS220
BPMACH GRXP100 GRXP150 GRXP320 EnersynHXT220
CASTROL AlphaSP100 AlphaSP150 Alpha320 AlphaSN150
CHEVRON Nonleadedgear Nonleadedgear Nonleadedgear n/a
Compound100 Compound150 Compound320 n/a
ESSO SpartanEP100 SpartanEP150 SpartanEP320 ExcolubSLG
Q8 Goya100 Goya150 Goya320 ELGreco220
I.P. Mellana100 Mellana150 Mellana320 TelesiaOil150
MOBIL Mobilgear600XP100 Mobilgear600XP150 Mobilgear600XP320 MOBILSHC630
SHELL OmalaOil100 OmalaOil150 OmalaOil320 TivelaOilSA
TOTAL CarterEP100N CarterEP150 CarterEP320N n/a
KLUEBER Lamora100 Lamora150 Lamora320 SyntesoD220EP
ElfORITIS125MS
ELF ReductelfSP100 ReductelfSP150 ReductelfSP320
ElfSynthermaP30

5Ͳ14
GreasePoints(NipplesProvided)
Grease must contain an effective corrosion prevention additive and must be consistent after extreme periods of
service. FFC recommends a Lithium based EP 2 grease to be used in slew bearing. Greases meeting this
recommendationare:
Manufacturer GreaseDesignation
Castrol EPL2
Esso BeaconEP2
Mobil* MobiluxEP2
If the slew ring bearing grease contains MOLYBDENUM DISULPHIDE then the molybdenum
contentmustnotbegreaterthan3%

OpenGearTeeth
Thiscompoundistobehighlywaterresistantandofanadhesivenature.Greasesmeetingthisrecommendationare:
Castrol* MolubͲAlloy936
Esso SurettFluid4K'
Mobil Mobiltac375NC
Shell CardiumFluidC
Sheaves
Thesheavesarefittedwithgreasenipplesorgreasedthroughsheavepin.Therootofthesheavecanbelubricated
withropelubricant.Greasesmeetingthisrecommendationare:
Castrol EPL2
Esso BeaconEP2
Mobil* MobiluxEP2
Ropes
Thetypeoflubricantandfrequencyofapplicationvarieswithropeconstruction,theoperatingconditionsandits
functionalapplication.Thelubricantmustprovideprotection,againstwear,corrosionandminimiseinternalfriction
betweenwiresandstrandswhiletheropeisinservice.
The rope must be cleaned of moisture, residual lubricant and contaminants before applying clean lubrication.
Recommendedropelubricants:
Manufacturer LubricantDesignation
Rocol* RD105
Lanotec WireRopeLube

5Ͳ15
5.4 General Rope Care
RecommendedStorageandHandlingofRopes
Whenunreelingoruncoilingrope, AVOIDtheintroductionofkinksortwistsintotherope.Thistypeofdamageis
permanentandplacesweakspotsintherope.Mountthereelonaverticalorhorizontalaxleandrotatethereelas
theropeispulledoff.
Whenpullingropeoutofacoil,thecoilshouldberolledonthegroundtoallowittouncoil.Itshouldbetreatedthe
sameasifitwerebeinguncoiledfromaspool.
Otherpointstonoteinthestorageandhandlingofropesinclude:
x Thestoredropeshallbecoveredinawellventilatedareaandawayfromexcessiveheat.Ifcoveredstorage
is not available, the rope and reel shall be covered with hemp material. This prevents humidity built up
whichwouldresultincorrosionoftherope.
x Forlongperiodsofstorage,applyalubricantcoatingtotheoutsidelayeroftheropeonthereel,andcover
theropeandreelwithhempmaterial.
x Careshallbetakenduringshippingandhandlingofthereelandropetopreventdamagetotherope.The
looseendoftheropeonthereelshallbesecuredproperlytothereel. DO NOTdriveanailthroughthe
centreofthewirerope.
FittingaNewRope
Limitsmustberesetwhennewropesarefitted.

Whenanchoringanewropeonthedrum,ensurethattheentirecrosssectionoftheropeisheldsolid;otherwise
theinnerstrandsmaydrawfromtheattachment,leavingonlytheouterstrandsanchored.Thiscanresultincore
protrusion.
Theendoftheropeshouldbebrazedortightlyservedtoensurenomovementbetweentheinnerandouterlayers
ofstrandcanoccur.
Whenwindingthenewropeonfromareel,alwayswindfromthetopofthereeltothetopofthedrumorfromthe
bottomofthereeltothebottomofthedrum.Failuretodothiswillputareversebendintheropeandshortenits
life.Checkwithreevingdiagramtoensurecorrectwinding.Followingfigureillustratesthisconcept.
Thefirstlayeronthedrummustbewoundontightandtrue.Openorwavywindingwillcauseseriousdamageto
multiplelayers.
Adjacentturnsshouldbetappedagainsteachotherwithawoodenmallet,whendrumisnotgrooved.
Thewholeropeshouldbewoundonthedrumtightlyandcorrectly.Apoorstartwillmeanpoorwindingandshort
life.Neverallowropestobecomeslack,alwaystensionaropewhenontothewinchdrum.Lowtensioncancause
incorrect coiling on the drum which may allow the rope slip between drum layers. If the rope has become slack,
checkthecoilingonthedrumbeforecontinuing.Thehoistrequires5tonneoftensionandtheluffrequires3tonne.

5Ͳ16
REEL
DRUM
CORRECT METHOD
REEL
DRUM
INCORRECT METHOD
Figure5Ͳ9–CorrectSpoolingfromReeltoDrum
CorrectReeving
Reevingofhoistorluffropesmustalwaysconformtothereevingdiagram.
Afterinstalling,runtheropethroughitsoperatingcycleseveraltimeswithalightloadandatreduced
speed.

Thiswillensurethatthenewrope:
1) Adjustsitselfgraduallytoworkingconditions,
2) Strandstobecomeseated,
3) Somestretchtooccurand
4) Diametertoreduceslightlyasthestrandsandcorearecompacted.
Byfollowingtheprocedureabovetoconditiontherope.Alongerworkinglifeoftheropecanbeachieved.
Alwaysobservethefirstspoolingontothedrumofanewrope.


5Ͳ17
RopeInspection
Allrunningropesincontinuousserviceshouldbevisuallyinspectedonceeveryworkingday.Athoroughinspection
of all ropes in use should be made at least once a month. Any rope damage should be noted and the cause
determinedandfixedbeforeloadingtherope.
Nopreciserulescanbegiventodeterminetheexacttimeforreplacementsofropes,sincemanyvariablefactorsare
involved. Safety in this respect depends largely upon the use of good judgment by an appointed or authorised
person. Conditions such as the following should be sufficient reason for questioning rope safety and for
considerationofreplacement.
Broken Wires
Thefollowingisguidanceforthenumberofbrokenwiresfoundinone(1)laylength.
1) NonrotationͲresistantrunningropes(suchasthoseusedinthemainhoistflyhoistand/ortheluff)Ͳsix(6)
randomlydistributedbrokenwireswithinone(1)laylengthorthree(3)brokenwiresinonestrandwithinone(1)
laylength.
2) RotationͲresistant ropes running ropes (such as those that may be used in the main hoist.) Ͳ four (4)
randomlydistributedbrokenwireswithinone(1)laylengthortwo(2)brokenwiresinonestrandwithinone(1)lay
length.
3) Standing ropes (such as boom pendants) Ͳ three (3) broken wires within one (1) lay length or two (2)
brokenwiresattheendconnection.
Wire Rope Wear
Replace the rope if wear of more than oneͲthird of the original diameter of the outside wires of the strand has
occurred.
Valley Break to Wire Rope
Ifone(1)valleybreakisobserved,thismayindicateinternalropedamagerequiringcloseinspectionofthissection
oftherope.Whentwo(2)ormorevalleybreaksarefoundinone(1)laylengththeropeshouldbediscarded.

Figure5Ͳ10–ValleyBreak
Wire Rope Deterioration

Replacetheropeifanykinking,crushing,birdͲcaging,oranyothertypeofdamageresultsinthedistortionofthe
ropeconstruction.
Heat Damage to Wire Rope
Thereisevidenceofanyheatdamagefromanysource.Heatcanbegeneratedbypassingaropeoverafrozenor
nonͲturningsheave,contactwithstructuralmembersofthecrane,improperlygroundedweldingleadsorlightning
strikes.

5Ͳ18
Wire Rope Diameter

Replacementofropesshouldbeconsideredwherethedifferenceintheropediameterofthelowestdiameterof
ropemeasuredinthree(3)workingareas(areaswheretheroperegularlygoesoverasheave)comparedtoanonͲ
workingarea(anareaawayfromthesheaves)isinexcessofthevaluesgiveninthetablebelow
Ropenominaldiameter MaximumReduction(mm) MaximumReduction(Inches)
Upto19mm(3/4inch) 1.19 3/64
20–30mm(7/8to1Яinch) 1.59 1/16
31–39mm(1¼to1½inch) 2.36 3/32
In general, a wire rope must be discarded if its diameter has beenreducedoverextendedareasby15%ormore
comparedtoitsnominaldiameter.
Figure5Ͳ11–CorrectMethodofMeasuringRopeDiameters
Wire Rope Length

There is an observation of the increase in the length of an individual rope lay. This increase in lay length and
accompanyingreductionindiametercanbecausedbyfailureofthecore.Thisusuallyoccursmorereadilyinropes
ofrotationͲresistantconstruction.
Wire Rope Corrosion
Extensiveexternaland/orinternalpermanentcorrosioniscauseforropereplacement.
In the case of rotation resistant ropes which consist of a number of strand layers, internal corrosion may not be
readilydetectable.Duringinspection,outerstrandsmustbeseparatedtoassessinternalropecondition.
Wiresintheropewhicharecorrosivelypittedhavegreatlyreducedflexibilityandwillbreakmuchearlierasaresult
ofropebendingoversheaves.

5Ͳ19
Rope Lubrication
Awireropeismadeupofhundredsofwireswhichmoverelativetoeachotherwhentheroperunsoversheaves.
Whenaropeismanufactureditiscompletelyfilledwithlubricant;firstly,tominimisefrictionalwear;andsecondly,
tokeepoutmoistureandresultingcorrosion.
Itisvitalthatthislubricationbepreservedtogetthemaximumlifefromtherope.Anexternalcoatingoflubricant
mustbeappliedtotheroperegularlytopreventtheescapeoftheinternallubricantandalsoreducefrictiononthe
sheaves.
Lubricatingtheropeisasimportantasgreasinganyotherpartofthecrane.Anyofthefollowingmethodscanbe
usedtolubricatetherope:
1. Pouringoflubricantontoropeasitpassesoverasheave.Wipeoffexcess.
2. Swabtheropewhennotinmotionwithlubricantsoakedrags.
3. Brushorspraywithlubricant.
4. Pressurelubrication.
Tips to Maximise Rope Life (Point to remember)
1. Neveroverload.
2. Donotshockloadtakeupanyslackcarefullyandapplythepowersmoothlyandsteadily.
3. Protectropesfromsharpedges.
4. Avoiddraggingropesfromunderloads.
5. Avoidrollingloadswithropes.
6. Avoiddroppingropesfromheights.
7. Neveruseropethathasbeencut,kinkedorcrushed.
8. Preventloopsinslacklinesfrombeingpulledtightandkinking.Aweakspotwillalwaysremainnomatter
howwellthekinkseemstohavestraightenedout.Ifaloopformsdonotpullitout,unfoldit.Avoidreverse
bends.
9. Neverwindmorethattheproperamountofropeontoanydrum.
10. Ensurethattheropeendsareproperlysized.
11. Ensurethattheropesdonotbindinthesheaves.
12. Watchforlocalwear.Prematurewearatonespotiscommon.Unevenwearcanbeminimisedbymoving
theropesothatdifferentsectionsareatcriticalwearpoints.Thewearcanbedistributedbycuttingafew
metersofropefromthedrumandreͲanchoringit.
13. Maintain the equipment over which the rope runs. Worn grooves, poor alignment of sheaves and worn
bearingscanresultinshockloadsandexcessivevibration.

5Ͳ20
Rope Defects
Mechanicaldamageduetoropemovementoversharp Localisedwearduetoabrasiononsupporting
edgewhilstunderload structure
Narrowpathofwearresultinginfatiguefractures,
Twoparallelpathsofbrokenwiresindicativeof
causedbyworkinginagrosslyoversizedgroove,or
bendingthroughanundersizegrooveinthesheave
oversmallsupportrollers
Severewearassociatedwithhightreadpressure SeverewearinLangsLay,causedbyabrasion
Protrusionofropecentreresultingfrombuildupof
Severecorrosion
turn

5Ͳ21
Rope Defects (cont’d)

Wirefracturesatthestrand,orcoreinterface,as
Typicalwirefracturesasaresultofbendfatigue
distinctfromcrownfractures

BreakupofIWRCresultingfromhighstress Loopedwireasaresultoftorsionalimbalanceand/or
shockloading
Typicalexampleoflocalisedwearanddeformation Multistrandropebirdcagedtotorsionalimbalance

Substantialwearandsevereinternalcorrosion Internalcorrosionwhilstexternalsurfaceshowslittle
evidenceofdeterioration

5Ͳ22
5.5 Service and Repair of Structural and Mechanical

Components
GearsandGearboxes
Concentrationshouldbegiventopreventivemaintenanceofgearsandgearboxcomponentsratherthancomplete
overhaul, which requires highly specialised repair equipment and skills. The gearboxes provided have a long life
expectancyiflubricatedcorrectly.
Only competent mechanical technicians authorised by FFC should be used to disassemble and reassemble
gearboxes. Where problems occur within a gearbox or a faulty gear, these should be serviced and repaired by a
competentmechanicaltechnicianprovidedbyFFCorbyunitexchangeofthecompletegearbox.
Warrantymaybevoided,andthesafeoperationofthecranemaybecompromisedifgearboxes
orgearshavebeentamperedwithordismantledandreassembledbyunauthorisedpersons

The tampering, disassembly reassembly or modification of gearboxes or gears by any person other than a
competentmechanicaltechnicianauthorisedbyFFC,maymakethecraneunsafeandposeariskofinjuryordeath
to persons, or damage to property should such work cause a malfunction of the component or the crane to
malfunction.
Itisthereforerecommendedthatarrangementsbemadeforthestockingofexchangeunits.
ArcWelding
Due to the materials used and the forces imposed on the structural components of this crane, repair or
modifications,andinparticulararcwelding,shouldonlybecarriedoutinaccordancewithFAVELLEFAVCOCRANES
PTY.LTD.Pty.Ltd.recommendedprocedures.Theseareavailableonwrittenrequest.
Intheeventthatrepairsormodificationstothesteelworkabovetheslewringrequireelectricarc
welding,theearthingduringtheactivitiesMUSTNOTBEVIATHESLEWINGRING.
Failuretoobservethisprecautioncouldresultindamagetotheslewring.
ShaftandPins
Allshaftsandpinsarefabricatedfromhightensilesteelandmustneverbereplacedwithanymaterialotherthanas
specifiedbyFAVELLEFAVCOCRANESPTY.LTD.Pty.Ltd.
Fasteners
Care should be exercised when replacing bolts or cap screws to ensure that the correct thread and bolt grade is
selectedandthecorrecttighteningtorqueisapplied.
Ingeneral,metricthreadfastenersarefitted,butotherthreadssuchasUNCandUNFmaybeusedonpumpsand
variousotherproprietarycomponents.
Wheregradeandtorqueofaboltiscritical,therequirementsareshownontherelevantdrawing.
Thefollowingisofferedasaguide:
ISOGrade8.8boltsareusedthroughoutthecrane,forcoverplates,brackets,handrailsetc.,andothernonprimary
structuralcomponents.Boltslessthan12mmareofstainlesssteeltype(SS316).
Grade 8.8 or 10.9 bolts are used mainly on winches, slew drives, slew ring, power pack, slip ring assembly (if
applicable),winchframe,bridleandmast.

5Ͳ23
HighStrengthStructuralFasteners
Retightening of high strength structural fasteners must be carried out to achieve appropriate preload within the
boltedconnection.RefertoBoltTorqueTable,SlewBoltTighteningProcedureorBoomConnectorBoltTightening
ProcedureinSection9.
StructuralRepair
ApprovalmustbeobtainedfromFFCpriortohotworkoncranestructuresincludingrepairwork.Itiscrucialtouse
appropriateandapprovedweldingprocedures,especiallyweldingofhighstrengthsteel.
Craneboomstructureismadeoutofspecialhighstrengthsteelmember,whichrequireextra
attentioninpreand/orpostweldingwork.ContactFFCforinstruction.

Iftherepairworkinvolvescriticalstructuralmember,nondestructivetestontheweldjointmayberequired.
ReinstatementofCoatings
Washingdowntoremoveallgreaseandotherforeignmatterisessentialbeforeanycoatingrepairsarecarriedout.
Ifthetopcoatsaremechanicallydamagedandrequirerepair,featherbackroughedgesandreͲapplypainttothe
recommendedthickness.Ifdamagehasaffectedtheprimer,reprimeandreͲcoatafterspotblastingormechanical
scrubbingtocleanmetal.
ContactFFCAforsuitablepaintspecificationtobeused.

5Ͳ24
5.6 Service and Repair of Fluid Components
General
Six routines must be followed in order to minimize the chances of your hydraulic equipment suffering costly,
prematurecomponentfailuresandunscheduleddowntime:
x Maintainfluidcleanliness;
x Maintainfluidtemperatureandviscositywithinoptimumlimits;
x Maintainhydraulicsystemsettingstomanufacturers'specifications;
x SchedulecomponentchangeͲoutsbeforetheyfail;
x Followcorrectcommissioningprocedures;and
x Conductfailureanalysis.
Concentrationshouldbegiventopreventivemaintenanceofhydrauliccomponentsratherthancompleteoverhaul,
which requires highly specialised repair equipment and skills. The wear rate of hydraulic pumps and motors is
negligible as long as ample boost pressure is provided and the oil is kept free from impurities and operated in a
mannerthatthetemperatureinthehydrauliccircuitdoesnotexceed70°C.
Duringcommissioningandoperation,theaxialpistonunitmustbefilledwithhydraulicfluidandairbled.Thisisalso
tobeobservedfollowingarelativelylongstandstillasthesystemmayemptyviathehydrauliclines.Inalloperating
states,thesuctionlineandcasedrainlinemustflowintothetankbelowtheminimumfluidlevel.
ThehydrauliccircuitcontainedinSection7isprovidedsolelyforinformationalandinstructionalpurposesandisnot
tobeusedforadjustinghydraulicpressuresettings.OnlycompetenthydraulicfittersauthorisedbyFFCshouldbe
used to modify, dismantle and reassemble components, or set hydraulic pressures etc. Where problems occur
withinhydrauliccomponentstheseshouldeitherbeservicedandrepairedbyacompetenthydraulicfitterprovided
byFFCorbyunitexchangeofthecompletehydrauliccomponent.
Warrantymaybevoided,andthesafeoperationofthecranemaybecompromisedifhydrauliccomponentshave
beentamperedwithordismantledandreassembledbyunauthorisedpersons.
Before removing any unit from the installation, clean areas adjacent to ports and drains.
Removepipesorhosesandcovertheseandcomponentportstopreventtheingressofdirt.

PressureOverrideonVariableDisplacementMotor
ControlDescription:VariableDisplacementMotors(whenfitted)allowremotecontrolofthemotordisplacement
until system pressure reaches the pressure setting of the pressure override (POR) valve. When this occurs,
displacementadjustsautomaticallytowardsmaximum,untiltheproductofdisplacementandset(system)pressure
satisfiestheoutputtorquedemandputonthemotor.
SystempressuregreaterthanthesetpressureofthePORvalvewillkeepthemotoratmaximumdisplacement,even
iftheHD,EP,orEZcontrolsignalissettosendthemotortominimumdisplacement.
TheintegralPORvalvehasthecapabilityofahighlowpressuresetting.Thisallowsthesystempressureatwhichthe
overridefunctionstobepresetattwodifferentpressurelevels.
Highrangeisselectedbysupplyingapressuresignalfrom“G”porttothe“G2”portofthePORvalve.Adjustment
screw“A”isusedtosetthehighPORsetting.
Lowrangeisselectedbyblockingthepressuresupplyfromthe“G”portandconnectingthe“G2”portofthePORto
tank.Adjustmentscrew“B”isusedforthelowPORsetting.

5Ͳ25
IfasinglePORsettingisrequiredforanapplication,adjustmentscrew“B”shouldbeturnedin(clockwise)untilfirm
resistanceisencountered;ports“G2”and“G”areplugged.Adjustmentscrew“A”isthenusedtosettheoverride
pressureorpressuresetting,refertothehydrauliccircuitrelevanttothiscrane.

5Ͳ26
HydraulicHosesandFittings
Properhoseinstallationisessentialforsatisfactoryperformance.Ifhoselengthisexcessive,theappearanceofthe
installation will be unsatisfactory and unnecessary cost of equipment will be involved. If hose assemblies are too
short to permit adequate flexing and changes in length due to expansion or contraction, hose service life will be
reduced.

The following diagrams show proper hose installations which provide maximum performance and cost savings.
Considertheseexamplesindetermininglengthofaspecificassembly.

Whenhoseinstallationisstraight,allowenoughslackin Adequate hose length is necessary to distribute
hose line to provide for length changes that will occur movement on flexing applications, and to avoid
whenpressureisapplied. abrasion.

When radius is below the required minimum, use an Avoid twisting of hose lines bent in two planes by
angleadaptortoavoidsharpbends. clampinghoseatchangeofplane.

Preventtwistinganddistortionbybendinghoseinsame
Use proper angle adaptors to avoid sharp twists or
plane as the motion of the boss to which hose is
bendsinthehose.
connected.

Route hose directly by using 45° and/or 90° adaptors
Reduce number of pipe thread joints by using proper
and fittings. Avoid excessive hose length to improve
hydraulicadaptorsinsteadofpipefittings.
appearance.

To allow for length changes when hose is pressurised, When installing hose, make sure it is not twisted.
donotclampatbends.Curveswillabsorbchanges.Do Pressure applied to a twisted hose can result in hose
notclamphighandlowpressurelinestogether. failureorlooseningofconnections.

5Ͳ27

High ambient temperatures shorten hose; therefore Elbowsandadaptorsshouldbeusedtorelievestrainon
ensure hose is kept away from hot parts. If this is not theassembly,andtoprovideneaterinstallationswhich
possible,insulatehose. willbemoreaccessibleforinspectionandmaintenance.

Runhoseintheinstallationsothatitavoidsrubbingand
To avoid hose collapse and flow restriction, keep hose abrasion. Often, clamps are required to support long
bend radii as large as possible. Refer to hose hoserunsortokeephoseawayfrommovingparts.Use
specificationtablesforminimumbendradii. clampsofthecorrectsize.Aclamptoolargeallowshose
tomoveinsidetheclampandcausesabrasion.
Whendeterminingthelengthofhoseassemblies,providesufficientlengthtopreventbendingstrainfromlocalising
atthebackofthecoupling.Inthediagrambelow,measurement“B”allowsforastrainsectionofhosebeyondthe
couplingtopreventconcentrationofbendingstrain.“T”designatestheamountoftravel.“A”indicatesthesmallest
diametertowhichhoseshouldbebent.
Overalllength=B+1.57A+T
(Typicaldimensionsforone&twowirebraidhose)
Hosesize
“B"constantforstraightportionincludingcoupling
DN inch Dash
6 1/4 Ͳ04 250mm(10")
10 3/8 Ͳ06 250mm(10")
12 1/2 Ͳ08 300mm(12")
19 3/4 Ͳ12 350mm(14")
25 1 Ͳ16 400mm(16")
31 1.1/4 Ͳ20 450mm(28")
38 1.1/2 Ͳ24 500mm(20")
51 2 Ͳ32 500mm(20")


5Ͳ28
5.7 Service and Repair of Electrical Components
General
Electrical components within this crane are serviceable by a competent electrician, the exception being any
electronicitems.
Aspreviouslymentioned,itisrecommendedtohaveexchangeunitsforthemostimportantpartsstockedforfast
replacement.RefertoSection8ͲRecommendedSparePartList.
All sources of electricity supply to the boom must be shut off before any piece of electrical
apparatusisserviced.

ServiceandRepairofOEMComponents
ServiceandmaintenancemanualofthefollowingcomponentsareavailableinSection10.Component/Equipment
Manual:
1. MITSUBISHIAirConditionerUnit
2. SIEMENSLowVoltageSquirrelCageElectricMotor
3. SIEMENSSIRIUS3RW40SeriesSoftstarter
4. STIEBELSplitterGearbox
5. CAVOTECSlipring
6. LINECLE7000SeriesCraneControlandSLISystem
7. ORLACOCameraSystem
8. BRAVOGreasePump

IOM–Section6.TroubleshootingGuideline
6Ͳ1
6 TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDELINE
6.1 GeneralTroubleShootingList 6Ͳ2
6.2 PlanetaryDrives 6Ͳ5
6.3 Ropes 6Ͳ7

6Ͳ2
6.1 General Trouble Shooting List

ThefollowingtablewillbeveryusefulforfindingandsolvingcausesofbreakͲdownsandcommonproblemsthat
occur during crane operation. Needless to say this list is not exhaustive, as it is impossible to set down all the
causesandtheirassociatedsolutions.
No(orVeryLow)BoostPressure[primemoverCutOut]
PROBABLECAUSE REMEDY
Faultypressuregauge Replace
Damaged/blockedboostpumpsuctionhose(s) StopimmediatelyͲcallFFC
Damageddrivecoupling/betweenprimemover
StopimmediatelyͲcallFFC(replace)
andgearbox
Checkreason.Boostpressurereliefvalveshouldmatch
Boostpressuresettingtoolow
circuit.ConsultFFC
(Faulty)antiͲcavitationswitchorsetting
Adjustorreplaceasnecessary
incorrect
NoMotions(WithprimemoverRunning)
Linesbetweencabin&winchframeconnected
Checklines.Ifindoubt,consultFFC
incorrectlygauge
Noboostpressure(orverylowboostpressure) Stopimmediately.Referabove.
Limitsaretrippedormalfunctioning ResetorreplaceasnecessaryͲConsultFFC
Cabincontrolleversnotfunctioningcorrectly Replacelevers
(Faulty)antiͲcavitationswitchorsetting
Adjustorreplaceasnecessary
incorrect
Faultyrelay Checkwiring
NoHoistUp(OtherMotionsOK)
Hoistwinchisoverloaded Reduceloadtocomplywithloadchart
Recalibrationnecessary.Temporarybypassmaybe
S.L.I.notcalibratedcorrectlyͲshowingoverload
doneonlybyqualifiedpersonnel
Checkbrakevalve&checkcabincontrollever
Brakenotreleasing
functioning
Pumpreliefvalvessetincorrectly Qualifiedpersonnelcanadjust.Checkreason
Replacecontroller.Qualifiedpersonnelto
Pumpcontrollernotfunctioningcorrectly
inspect/repair
Emergencyloweringbypassvalveopenor
Closeorreplace
leaking
Winchdrivesdamaged ConsultFFC
Qualifiedpersonnelcanbypassorresetasnecessaryif
Hoistuplimitistripped
attophoistdown
Leakageorblockinhoistupcontrollinefrom
Fixleakorreplacehoseasnecessary
lever
6Ͳ3
NoHoistDown(OtherMotionsOK)
Hoistdownlimitistripped Qualifiedpersonnelcanbypassorresetasnecessary
Brakenotreleasing
functioning
inspect/repair
Leakageorblockinhoistdowncontrolline
fromlever
LoadedHookDropsSlightlyBeforeLifting
Brakereleasingtooearly Qualifiedpersonneltoadjust
Pumpnotcorrectlyinneutral Qualifiedpersonneltoadjust
Excessiveleakageinpumpormotor ConsultFFC
EmptyHook(orLightLoad)InitiallyJumpsUpWhenHoisting
Brakereleasingtoolate Qualifiedpersonneltoadjust
Pumpnotcorrectlyinneutral Qualifiedpersonneltoadjust
NoLuffUp(OtherMotionsOK)
Luffuplimittripped Qualifiedpersonnelcanbypassorresetasnecessary
Luffindecelerationvalvetrippedor
Qualifiedpersonneltoadjustandcheck
malfunctioning
Luffratchetnotreleasing Checkcylinder
Luffwinchisoverloaded Reduceloadtocomplywithloadchart
Brakenotreleasing
functioning
Pumpreliefvalvessetincorrectly QualifiedpersonnelcanadjustͲcheckreason
Replacecontroller.Qualifiedpersonneltoinspect/
repair
Winchdrivesdamaged ConsultFFC
Leakageorblockinluffcontrollinefromlever Fixleakorreplacehoseasnecessary
LuffRatchetNotReleasing
Brakevalveshuttle(ifapplicable)problem Replaceifnecessary
ReplacecoilorvalveasnecessaryͲfaulttraceifsignal
Luffratchetsolenoid(ifapplicable)problem
notcoil
Ratchetcylindernotfunctioningproperly Checkcylinder
6Ͳ4
Brakevalvereleasepressuresetincorrectly(if Qualifiedpersonnelcanadjustasnecessary.Check
applicable) reason
Damaged/leakingcylinderline Replace/repairifasrequired
NoLuffDown(OtherMotionsOK)
Luffdownlimitistripped Qualifiedpersonnelcanbypassorresetasnecessary
CheckloadagainstS.W.L.luffuporhoistdownonly
MotioncutactivatedonS.L.I.duetooverload
permissible
Recalibrateifnecessary.Temporarybypassmaybe
S.L.I.notcalibratedcorrectlyͲshowingoverload
doneonlybyqualifiedpersonnel
Qualifiedpersonnelcanadjustasnecessary.Check
Luffratchetnotreleasing
reason
CheckbrakevalveͲcheckcabincontrollever
Brakenotreleasing
functioning
inspect/repair
Leakageorblockinluffdowncontrollinefrom
lever
CraneWillNotSlew(OtherMotionsOK)
Slewbrakeison Moveslewbrakeleverto’off’position
Slewinoppositedirection.Qualifiedpersonnel.can
Slewlimitistripped(iffitted)
bypassorresetasnecessary
Brakenotreleasing Checkbrakevalveincabin
ReplacecontrollerQualifiedpersonnel.to
inspect/repair
Cabincontrollevernotfunctioningcorrectly Replacelever.Qualifiedpersonneltoinspect/repair
Slewdrivedamaged ConsultFFC
Pumpreliefvalvessetincorrectly Qualifiedpersonnel.canadjustͲcheckreason
6Ͳ5
6.2 Planetary Drives
WithMotorRunningtheShaftOutputDoesn’tTurn
Incorrectmotorassembly Checkcouplingbetweengearunitandmotor
Internalmalfunction ContactFFCorserviceCentre
Brakeblocked Checkhydrauliccircuit
OilLeakfromBreatherDuringOperation
Leveltoohigh Loweroillevel
Incorrectbreatherposition Checkbreatherposition
Possiblewearofmultidisksealsorhydraulic
ContactFFCorserviceCentre
motor
OilLeakfromSeal
Cloggingbreatherplug Unscrewandthoroughlycleantheplug
Cleantheareaandcheckforleakageagainafterafew
Stiffeningofsealsduetoprolongedstorage
days
Damagedorwornseals ContactFFCorserviceCentre
ExcessiveNoise
Internalmalfunctions ContactFFCorserviceCentre
DiskBrakeDoesNotRelease
Residualpressureinhydrauliccircuit Checkhydrauliccircuit
ExcessiveVibrations
Gearunitincorrectlyinstalled Checktheconnectionandinlineconfiguration
ExcessiveHeating
Noventilation ContactFFCorserviceCentre
Highthermalpressure Insertoilcirculation
6Ͳ6
MultiͲDiskBrakeDoesNotRelease
Nopressuretothebrake Checkconnectionstohydrauliccircuit
Nopressureinthecircuit Checkhydrauliccircuit
MultiͲDiskBrakeDoesNotBrake
Pressuredeliveredtobrake Checkhydrauliccircuit
Worndisks ContactFFCorserviceCentre
DiskBrakeDoesNotBrake
Nopressuretothebrake Checkhydrauliccircuit
WornbrakePads Replacebrakepads
6Ͳ7
6.3 Ropes
MechanicalDamagedCausedbytheRope
Description Causes/Actions
Mechanicaldamagedcausedbytherope Generallyresultsfromoperationalconditions
contactingthestructureofthecraneonwhich Checksheaveguardsandsupports/guidessheaveto
itisoperatingoranexternalstructure–usually ensurethattheropehasnotjumpedoutofthe
ofalocalisednature. intendedreevingsystem
Reviewoperatingconditions
StrandSeparation
Checksheaveanddrumgrooveradiiusingsheave
gaugetoensurethattheyarenosmallerthannominal
roperadius+5%
Repairorreplacedrum/sheaves
Checkfeetanglesinthereevingsystem
Openingofstrandsinrotationresistant,low Checkinstallationmethod–turninducedduring
rotationandparallelclosedropes–inextreme installationcausesexcessiveroperotationresultingin
circumstancestheropemaydevelopabirdcage distortion
distortionorprotrusionofinnerstrands
Checkiftheropehasbeencutonsitepriorto
installationorcuttoremoveadamagedsection.Ifso,
wasthecorrectcuttingmethodused.Incorrectcutting
ofrotationresistant,lowrotationandparallelclosed
ropescancausedistortioninoperation
Ropemayhaveexperiencedashockload
ProblemsatRopeCrossoverPoints
Checktensiononunderlyinglayers
Brokenwiresorcrushedorflattenedropeon Reviewwireropeconstruction
lowerlayersatcrossoverpointsinmultiͲlayer Donotusedmorethannecessary
coilingsituations.
Checkdrumdiameter.Insufficientbendingratio
increasestreadpressure
WireLoopingFromStrands
Insufficientservicedressing
Consideralternativeropeconstruction
Wireloopingfromstrands Ifwiresareloopingoutoftheropeunderneatha
crossoverpoint,theremaybeinsufficienttensionon
thelowerwrapsonthedrum
Checkareasforropecrushingordistortion
6Ͳ8
PigtailorSevereSpirallinginRope
Checkthatthesheaveanddrumdiameterislarge
enough
Pigtailorseverespirallinginrope Mayindicatesthattheropehasrunoverasmallradius
orsharpedge
Checktoseeiftheropehasjumpedoffasheaveand
hasoverashaft
TwoLinesofBrokenWiresRunningAlongtheRope
Twosingleaxiallinesofbrokenwiresrunning Checksheaveanddrumgrooveradiiusingsheave
alongthelengthoftheropeapproximately120 gaugetoensurethattheyarenosmallerthannominal
degreesapartindicatingthattheropeisbeing roperadius+5%
nippedinatightsheave Repairorreplacedrum/sheaveifnecessary
OneLineofBrokenWiresRunningAlongtheRope
Onelineofbrokenwiresrunningalongthe Checktoseeifthegroovediameterisnogreaterthan
lengthoftheropeindicatinginsufficient 15%thenominalropediameter
supportfortherope,generallycausedby Repairorreplacedrum/sheavesisnecessary
oversizesheaveordrumgrooving Checkforcontactdamage
ShortenedRopeLife(EvenWear)
Fatigueinducedwirebreaksarecharacterisedbyflats
endsonthebrokenwires.
Bendingfatigueisacceleratedastheloadincreasesand
asthebendingradiusdecreases.Considerimproving
Shortropeliferesultingfromevenly/randomly theratio
distributedbendfatiguewirebreakscausedby
Checkfleetangletodrum
bendingthroughthereevingsystem.
Checkgeneralalignmentofsheavesinthereeving
system
Checkthatallsheavesareafreetorotate
Checkwireropeconstruction
Reviewropeselection
ShortenedRopeLife(LocalisedWear)
Fatigueinducedwirebreaksarecharacterisedbyflats
endsonthebrokenwires
Shortropeliferesultingfromlocalisedbend
fatiguewirebreaks. Bendingfatigueisacceleratedastheloadincreasesand
asthebendingradiusdecreases.Considerimproving
theratio
Checkwireropeconstruction
6Ͳ9
Localisedfatiguebreaksindicatecontinuousrepetitive
bendsoverashortlength.Considerwhetheritis
economictoperiodicallyshortentheropeinorderto
movetheropetothesystemandprogressivelyexpose
freshropetoseverebendingzone
BrokenRope
Corrosionofropebothinternallyorexternallycanalso
resultinasignificantlossinmetallicarea.Therope
Ropesarelikelytobreakwhensubjectedto strengthisreducedtoalevelwhereitisunableto
substantialoverloadormisuse sustainthenormalworkingload
Morelikelytooccurwhenaropehasalreadybeen
subjectedtomechanicaldamage
Reviewoperatingcondition
WaveorCorkscrewDeformations
Checksheaveanddrumradiiusingsheavegaugeto
ensurethattheyarenosmallerthannominalrope
radius+5%
Repairdrumorsheaves
NormallyassociatedwithmultiͲstrandropes
Checkfleetanglesinthereevingsystem
Checktheropehasbeensecuredinaccordancewith
manufacturesinstructions
Checkoperatingconditionsforinducedturn
RotationoftheLoadinaSingleFallSystem
Reviewropeselection
Loadspinningwhenhoistingorlowering
Consideruseofrotationresistantorlowrotationrope
RotationoftheLoadinaMultiFallSystem
Reviewropeselection
Reviewinstallationprocedureoroperatingprocedures
Resultingincablingoftherope
Possiblyduetoinducedturninstallationoroperation
Consideruseofrotationresistantorlowrotationrope
CoreProtrusionorBrokenCores
Causedbyrepetitiveshockloading–reviewoperating
Occursinasinglelayersixoreightstrandrope
conditions
6Ͳ10
RopeAccumulatingorStackingatDrumFlange
Reviewdrumdesignwithoriginalequipment
Ropeaccumulatingorstackingatdrumflange
manufacturer–consideraddingropekicker,fleeting
duetoinsufficientfleetangle
sheave
SunkenWrapsofRope
Checkcorrectropediameter
Sunkenwrapsofropeonthedrumnormally Ifgrooveddrumcheckgroovepitch
associatedwithinsufficientsupportfromlower Checktensiononunderlyinglayers
layersofropeorgrooving
Makesurethatthecorrectropelengthisbeingused.
Toomuchropemayaggravatetheproblem
ExternalCorrosion
Considerselectionofgalvanisedrope
Externalcorrosion
Reviewlevelandtypeofservicedressing
InternalCorrosion
Considerselectionofgalvanisedrope
Externalcorrosion Considerselectionplasticimpregnatedwirerope
Reviewlevelandtypeofservicedressing

IOMͲSection7.Drawings
7Ͳ1
7 DRAWINGS
7Ͳ2
No. DrawingTitle DrawingNumber Rev
1. GeneralArrangement A1.1000.610 B
2. PedestalAssembly A1.7000.150 B
3. MachineryDeckAssembly A3.2000.329 B
4. CabinAssembly A3.2100.254 D
5. SlipringAssembly A3.7300.182 B
6. RopeSpecificationPlate A3.2175.416 A
7. StarboardHoistWinchAssembly A3.2300.507 B
8. PortHoistWinchAssembly A3.2300.506 B
9. LuffWinchAssembly A3.2300.508 B
10. FlyWinchAssembly A3.2300.509 B
11. HoistStarboardDrumAssembly A3.2320.422 B
12. HoistPortDrumAssembly A3.2320.421 B
13. LuffDrumAssembly A3.2320.423 B
14. FlyDrumAssembly A3.2320.417 A
15. HoistDrumDriveAssembly A3.2390.470.MDO D
LuffDrumDriveAssembly
16. FlyDrumDriveAssembly A3.2390.469.MDO C
17. EncoderDriveAssemblyͲHoist A3.2370.438 A
EncoderDriveAssemblyͲLuff
18. FlyWinchEncoderDriveAssembly A3.2370.451 A
19. HoistLimitSwitchGearAssembly A3.2370.437 A
LuffLimitSwitchGearAssembly
20. FlyLimitSwitchAssembly A3.2370.449 A
21. LuffRatchetAssembly A3.2350.070 A
22. PowerPackAssembly A1.2400.368 B
23. PowerPackAssembly–Starboard A1.2400.372 B
24. PowerPackAssembly–Port A1.2400.373 B
25. EmergencyPowerpackAssembly A3.2400.374 A
26. SlewDriveAssembly A3.2500.213.MDO A
27. SlewRingAssembly A2.2600.183 B
28. SlewEncoderAssembly A3.2370.458 A
29. MastAssembly A1.3000.249 D
30. MastPlatformAssembly A1.3300.109 A
31. BoomBufferAssembly A3.3100.317 A
7Ͳ3
32. BoomAssembly A1.4000.326 D

33. BoomWalkwayAssembly A1.4700.268 A
34. BoomTransitionDeflectorSheaveAssembly A3.4020.117 C
35. FlyDeflectorAssembly A3Ͳ4021.124 C
36. MainandFlyDeflectorAssembly A3Ͳ4400.286 A
37. HangerBlockArrangement A3.4350.109 C
38. HangerBlockLubricationArrangement A1.4340.004 A
39. MainSLISheaveAssemblyͲPORT A3.4400.283 C
40. MainSLISheaveAssemblyͲSTBD A3.4400.284 C
41. FLYSLISheaveAssembly A4.4400.285 A
42. ReevingArrangement A3.5000.404 B
43. BridleAssembly A1.5200.195 B
44. BridlePlatformAssembly A2.4702.171 A
45. 500T/400TWLL5/4ͲFallsHookBlockAssembly A3.5300.291 A
46. 250TWLL3FallsHookBlockAssembly A3Ͳ5300.302 A
47. 50TDoubleFallHookBlockAssembly A3.5300.336 A
48. 5ͲFallsHoistHookSwivelAnchorAssembly A3.5600.234 A
49. 4ͲFallsHoistBoomSwivelAnchorAssembly A3.5600.327 A
50. 3ͲFallsHoistHookSwivelAnchorAssembly A3.5600.258 A
51. FlySwivelAnchorAssembly A3.5600.235 A
52. LuffAnchorAssembly A3.5600.313 A
53. PendantLuffBarsLinkAssembly A1.5600.315 A
54. ElectricalDCCircuit A3.6100.590 H
55. ElectricalACCircuit A3.6100.574 E
56. HydraulicCircuit A3.6200.538.MDO D
57. SheaveAssembly ͲØ1500/Ø76/Ø420 A4.9510.245.MDO A
61. TuggerWinchAssembly A3.2300.471 C
62. FixedPlatformLoadChart–1x4Falls A3Ͳ2170.1062 C
A1 FORM: F04.06.03 Material List
B
E/2 C PORT Cat Item Qty Description Reference kg
F/2 29 19 4 21 1 1 - 250MPa FFC SPEC114 291364
44 27 25 2 14 41 36 38 47 2 1 MACHINERY HOUSE ASSEMBLY WITH P'PACK A1-2010.138 36100
3 1 SLEW RING ASSEMBLY A2-2600.153 80000
8 4 1 PORT SIDE HOIST WINCH ASSEMBLY A3-2300.506 44800
5 1 STBD SIDE HOIST WINCH ASSEMBLY A3-2300.507 44800
16 6 1 LUFF WINCH ASSEMBLY A3-2300.508 45600
20 7 1 FLY WINCH ASSEMBLY A3-2300.509 7700
J/2 8 2 TUGGER WINCH ASSEMBLY A3-2300.471 1674
H 9 1 CABIN ASSEMBLY A3-2100.254 2131
28 10 1 SLIP RING ASSEMBLY A3-7300.182 1500
D/2 D/2 11 1 FLY WINCH SUPPORT A1-2310.364 2381
12 1 DECK TO PEDESTAL EXT. PLATFORM ASS'Y A1-2030.187 1353
13 1 DECK CABLE TRAY & LIGHT BRACKETS A3-2021.401 145
23 32 14 1 DECK LOWER PORT PLATFORM A3-2031.242 4322
G/2 15 1 DECK LOWER STBD PLATFORM A3-2031.243 4218
16 1 LOWER DECK TO BOOM PORT PLATFORM A3-2031.293 228
B 17 2 STEP - CABLE COVER A2021-0450 58
26 22 18 1 DECK LOWER REAR PLATFORM A3-2031.244 763
19 1 DECK UPPER PLATFORM DETAILS A3-2031.257 2746
20 1 LUFF WINCH PORT SIDE PLATFORM A3-2031.299 337
G/2 33 21 2 HOIST WINCH PLATFORM & LADDER A3-2031.271 592
6 H 22 1 DECK LOWER FRONT PLATFORM & HANDRAILS A3-2031.266 231
23 1 LUFF WINCH REAR PLATFORM & HANDRAIL A3-2031.300 277
31 24 1 DECK LOWER STBD PLATFORM HANDRAILS A3-2032.371 286
18 25 1 DECK LOWER PORT PLATFORM HANDRAIL A3-2032.370 236
26 1 DECK LOWER REAR PLATFORM HANDRAILS A3-2032.372 132
J/2 27 1 DECK UPPER PLATFORM HANDRAIL A3-2032.376 1138
28 1 SLEW WELL PLATFORM LOWER HANDRAIL A3-2032.404 107
29 2 DECK UPPER PLATFORM STAIRS A3-2030.180 520
34 30 1 STAIR - SLEW WELL UPPER A3-2030.178 224
30 43 1400 31 1 STAIR - SLEW WELL LOWER A3-2030.179 194
9 37 47 REF.
B 44 E/2 B 32 1 PEDESTAL ACCESS LADDER A3-2030.183 54
49 33 1 TANK ACCESS LADDER - INTERMEDIATE A3-2030.181 118
24 15 7 39 29 5 19 21 34 1 TANK ACCESS LADDER - UPPER A3-2030.176 55
F/2 19 17 B SECTION B-B 35 1 TANK ACCESS LADDER LOWER A3-2030.177 154
C SCALE 1:50
36 1 X29 PORT MOTOR SOFT STARTER PANEL ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 189
SECTION A-A STARBOARD
37 1 X30 STBD MOTOR SOFT STARTER PANEL ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 189
SCALE 1:75 38 1 X31 EMERGENCY PP MOTOR SOFT STARTER PANEL ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 100
39 1 X14/1 JUNCTION BOX ELEC. EQUIP SCHED. 0
7 40 1 X14/2 JUNCTION BOX ELEC. EQUIP SCHED. 0
41 41 1 X14/3 JUNCTION BOX ELEC. EQUIP SCHED. 0
13 11 42 1 X14/4 JUNCTION BOX ELEC. EQUIP SCHED. 0
43 1 X9 JUNCTION BOX ELEC. EQUIP SCHED. 0
6 27 7 9 B 44 4 STEP - DOOR WAY A2021-0449 612
A A PORT
45 1 CO2 SYSTEM A4-6112.003 300
45 46 1 FIRE EXTINGUISHER ( DRY POWDER ) COMPLETE 9kg DRY CHEMICAL 20
29 WITH WALL MOUNTING BRACKET
47 23 FLUROESCENT LIGHT ELEC. EQUIP SCHED. 136
30 48 2 SLEW DRIVE GREASE TRAY A3-2021.400 293
49 1 DUAL GPO OUTLET - LEGRAND TYPE ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 1
23 46 50 1 CRANE SLEW ALARM ELEC. EQUIP SCHED. 6
51 1 SAN ELECTRO HEATER ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 89
47 52 4 HYRAULIC TANK HEATER ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED 2
53 2 CHAIN BLOCK (NOBLES) TO SUIT 9m LIFT PART No. BRB3003 23
8 54 1 PUSH TROLLEY (NOBLES) PART No. BRTP030203 9
26 47 55 8 BOLT HEX HEAD - M30 x 150 LG CLASS 8.8 GALV 9
47
56 8 BOLT HEX HEAD - M20 x 55 LG CLASS 8.8 GALV 2
16 DETAIL VIEW 57 12 BOLT HEX HEAD - M20 x 50 LG CLASS 8.8 GALV 2
SCALE 1:25 53 58 20 BOLT HEX HEAD - M10 x 30 LG SS316 0
B B 59 8 BOLT HEX HEAD - M12 x 35 LG CLASS 8.8 GALV 0
54 60 2 BOLT HEX HEAD - M6 x 30 LG SS316 0
66 62 57 61 8 NUT HEX x M30 CLASS 8 GALV 2
18 47 62 20 NUT HEX x M20 CLASS 8 GALV 2
63 20 NUT HEX x M10 SS316 0
DETAIL VIEW 64 2 NUT HEX x M6 SS316 0
24 SCALE 1:15
53 65 8 WASHER FLAT x M30 GALVANIZED 0
1 31 66 40 WASHER FLAT x M20 GALVANIZED 0
67 8 WASHER (NORDLOCK) x M12 ZINK FLAKE COATED 0
47 48 3 68 40 WASHER FLAT x M10 SS316 0
21 69 2 WASHER FLAT x M6 SS316 0
48 47
3 10
SECTION C-C 16.10.13 ITEMS 17,44 DETETED & REPLACED, ITEM 43 & 49 RELOCATED. D.Z. B
35 SCALE 1:75 JPD E.P. E.P. 28.07.12 ORIGINAL ISSUE - HS A
50 60 64 69 Approved Eng Draft Date Revision ECN Name Issue
Checked Checked
66 62 57 Favelle Favco Cranes Pty. Ltd.

A.B.N. 29 067 562 449
A subsidiary of FAVELLE FAVCO BERHAD
DRILL 2XØ8 HOLES 57 62 66 A member of MUHIBBAH ENGINEERING BHD
12 ON PLATFORM ON ASS'Y DETAIL VIEW
1340 REF.
Project First Used On S/No.
SCALE 1:15 1814
47 DETAIL VIEW "118-331-S-DG-002.02"
DRAIN SOCKET
SCALE 1:15
13 13 Title Activity No.
200
ELEVATION (STBD) MACHINERY DECK ASSEMBLY
HYD. & SLUDGE TANK

SCALE 1:75 Scale Sheet Weight Drawing Number Issue
THIS DRAWING REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES PTY
DO NOT SCALE FROM DRAWING IF IN DOUBT ASK FFC PTY LTD ENGINEERING DEPT. C LTD AND MUST NOT BE USED OR COPIED WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION. 1:75 1 OF 2 593 T A1-2000.329 B
A1 FORM: F04.06.03
58 63 68 2
41 42
9
1
4 7 68 63 58
9 DETAIL VIEW 6 4
SCALE 1:25 27
23 27
47 47
26
24
25
12
DETAIL VIEW
SCALE 1:10
34 47
47 51 37
47
52
33 33 34
28 3
47 35
3 35 47
47 32
10 DETAIL VIEW
10 SCALE 1:25
SECTION F-F
SECTION D-D SCALE 1:75
SCALE 1:75
13
40 58 63 68
6
47
23
4 21
21
39
DETAIL VIEW 27 19 47
SCALE 1:25 47
27
16 37 47 25
13
11
26 SECTION J-J
SCALE 1:75
47
51
47
47 SECTION H-H
53 SCALE 1:50
54
47 16.10.13 SEE SHEET-1 D.Z. B
JPD E.P. E.P. 28.07.12 ORIGINAL ISSUE - HS A
12 Approved Eng Draft Revision
Checked Checked Date ECN Name Issue
Favelle Favco Cranes Pty. Ltd.

A.B.N. 29 067 562 449
48 47 47 48 A subsidiary of FAVELLE FAVCO BERHAD
A member of MUHIBBAH ENGINEERING BHD

1814
SECTION E-E SECTION G-G "118-331-S-DG-002.02"
SCALE 1:75 SCALE 1:20 Title Activity No.
200
MACHINERY DECK ASSEMBLY
Scale Sheet Weight Drawing Number Issue
DO NOT SCALE FROM DRAWING IF IN DOUBT ASK FFC PTY LTD ENGINEERING DEPT. C LTD AND MUST NOT BE USED OR COPIED WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION. 1:50 2 OF 2 SHT-1 A1-2000.329 B
A1 FORM: F04.06.03
4
7
29 25
27 9
5
6
27 19
47
6 27
25 14 23
25 14
15 24
29
17 B
26 18
12
1 12
29
3 44 B
B 44
65 61 55 2 LIGHT BRACKET
WELDED TO HOUSE
ISOMETRIC VIEW (REAR) PANELS ABOVE DOORS
SCALE 1:50
3
47
DETAIL VIEW 2 HOUSE DOOR
SCALE 1:15
3 16
DETAIL VIEW ISOMETRIC VIEW (FRONT)
SCALE 1 : 25 SCALE 1:60
16.10.13 SEE SHEET-1 D.Z. B
48 JPD E.P. E.P. 28.07.12 ORIGINAL ISSUE - HS A

Approved Eng Draft Date Revision ECN Name Issue
Checked Checked

47 A.B.N. 29 067 562 449

1 1814
32 "118-331-S-DG-002.02"
Title Activity No.
200
INVERTED ISOMETRIC VIEW MACHINERY DECK ASSEMBLY
SCALE 1:25 Scale Sheet Weight Drawing Number Issue
A3 FORM: F04.04.03
34 33
33
86
1 12 A 85
3 4 27
24
82
27 4 89
82
57 2 24
B B SECTION E-E 80
2
E 34 E 24
81 4
11 8
32 56 81 33 89
B
80 58 12 84
59 8 38
10 32
33 35 9 1
DETAIL VIEW 29
83 37
SCALE 1:15
B
14 95 D A
2445 28 28 40 36
FRONT ELEVATION 1
SECTION A-A 14
35 67 30 58 28
F
9
SECTION F-F
12.08.13 ITEM 95 ADDED 4113/4922 SK D
90 AMC EP EP 03.04.13 REFER SHEET 2,3,&4 - SK C
JPD EP EP 06.07.12 ITEM 36 AND 84 DESCRIPTION UPDATED - HS B
78 AND ITEM 89 RELOCATED
29
JPD EP EP 17.05.12 ORIGINAL ISSUE - HS A
32 8 77 Eng Draft
Approved Date Description ECN Name Issue
Checked Checked
C C Favelle Favco Cranes Pty. Ltd, Australia
A.B.N. 29 067 562 449
26 Project First Used On S/No. 1814

PC1000 "118-331-M-MR-001.05"
F Title Activity No. 210
DO NOT SCALE FROM DRAWING IF IN DOUBT ASK
83 FFC PTY LTD ENGINEERING DEPT.
CABIN ASSEMBLY
66 31 THIS DRAWING REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES PTY LTD
SECTION B-B C AND MUST NOT BE USED OR COPIED WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION. 1:30 1 OF 4 SHT-4 A3-2100.254 D
A3 FORM: F04.04.03
86
86
85
317 REF.
4
38
C 55 91
2
2
33 94
33
16 22 36
17 23 80
15 21
18 14
20
19 83
D
D
13 37
28 83 79
SECTION C-C 79
27
67
ISOMETRIC VIEW 66
D 95 SCALE 1:25
30
31
D 12
77 12.08.13 ITEM 95 ADDED 4113/4922 SK D
AMC EP EP 03/04/13 ITEM 55 MOVED TO CONTROL PANEL - SK C
78 JPD EP EP 06.07.12 REFER SHEET 1 - HS B
Approved Eng Draft Date Description ECN Name Issue
90 Checked Checked
Favelle Favco Cranes Pty. Ltd, Australia

A.B.N. 29 067 562 449
Project First Used On S/No. 1814

PC1000 "118-331-M-MR-001.05"
25 Title Activity No. 210
70 69 SECTION D-D FFC PTY LTD ENGINEERING DEPT.
CABIN ASSEMBLY
SCALE 1:30 THIS DRAWING REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES PTY LTD
C AND MUST NOT BE USED OR COPIED WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION. 1:30 2 OF 4 SHT-4 A3-2100.254 D
A3 FORM: F04.04.03
C D D 94
88 87 55 68 52 49 44 97 96 91 53 72 73 39 40 76 92 93
65 60
63
42 62
50
59
41
64 61
9
54
74 INDICATOR LIGHT CONSOLE
SCALE 1:4
75
71
CAMERA CONTROLLER
BRACKET BOLTED SUITABLY
45 51 46 48 47 43 57
12.08.13 ITEM 96 & 97 ADDED. 4113/4922 SK D

AMC EP EP 03/04/13 ITEM 55 MOVED TO CONTROL PANEL - SK C
JPD EP EP 06.07.12 REFER SHEET 1 - HS B
CONTROL PANEL JPD EP EP 17.05.12 ORIGINAL ISSUE - HS A
SCALE 1:5 Eng Draft
Approved Date Description ECN Name Issue
Checked Checked

A.B.N. 29 067 562 449

PC1000 "118-331-M-MR-001.05"
Title Activity No. 210
FFC PTY LTD ENGINEERING DEPT.
CABIN ASSEMBLY
THIS DRAWING REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES PTY LTD
C AND MUST NOT BE USED OR COPIED WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION. 1:5 3 OF 4 SHT-4 A3-2100.254 D
A3 FORM: F04.04.03 Material List Material List Material List
Cat Item Qty Description Reference kg Cat Item Qty Description Reference kg Cat Item Qty Description Reference kg
65 1 IND. LIGHT - HOIST STBD BRAKE APPLIED ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 0 32 1 BRIDGESTONE PINCHWELD SECTION PART UNIVERSAL ENGINEERS 0 1 1 CABIN DETAILS A1-2110.137 1212
66 1 HOIST STBD/ FLY / LUFF CONTROL LEVER ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 6 No.255711 x 5.6m LG 2 1 CABIN SAFETY HANDRAILS & GRILL DETAILS A3-2121.379 44
67 1 HOIST PORT / SLEW CONTROL LEVER ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 6 33 2 FLUROESCENT LIGHT ELEC. EQUIP SCHED. 13 3 1 CABIN ROOF ACCESS LADDER & SUPPORTS A3-2121.380 112
68 1 KEY- IGNITION ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 0 B 34 1 AIRCONDITIONER - MITSUBISHI (INDOOR UNIT) ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 87 4 1 CABIN ROOF HANDRAILS & SUPPORTS A3-2121.385 124
69 1 HORN ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 16 35 1 AIRCONDITIONER - MITSUBISHI (OUTDOOR UNIT) ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 1 5 1 SIDE MIRROR SUPPORT BRACKET (PORT & STBD) A3-2121.377 5
70 1 CABIN HORN COVER A3-2110.386 10 36 2 DUAL GPO OUTLET - LEGRAND TYPE ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 3 6 1 MCT PLATES A3-2121.383 9
71 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT PRESSURE GAUGE HYD. SCHED. 1 37 1 X17A - VHF JUNCTION BOX ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 5 7 1 WYNN WIPER ASSEMBLY A3.2120.073 76
72 1 SLEW PRESSURE GAUGE HYD. SCHED. 1 38 1 X17B - UHF JUNCTION BOX ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 5 8 1 CABIN DOOR DETAIL A3-2121.324 86
73 1 LUFF PRESSURE GAUGE HYD. SCHED. 1 39 1 WYNN S1000 - 2WAY WIPER CONTROLLER ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 3 9 1 CABIN CONSOLE BRACKET A3-2155.224 101
74 1 HOIST STBD PRESSURE GAUGE HYD. SCHED. 1 40 1 WYNN S1000 - 1WAY WIPER CONTROLLER ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 2 10 1 CABIN MONITOR DISPLAY BRACKET A3-2121.378 11
75 1 HOIST PORT PRESSURE GAUGE HYD. SCHED. 1 D 41 1 IND. LIGHT - MOPS HEALTHY ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 0 11 1 CABIN LIGHT MOUNTING BRACKET (EXTERNAL) A3-2121.325 1
76 1 FLY PRESSURE GAUGE HYD. SCHED. 1 42 1 IND. LIGHT - MOPS ACTIVATED ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 0 12 1 SET OF WINDOWS -ANTI GLARE TOUGHENED A3-2121.381 144
77 1 TUGGER WINCH CONTROL PEDAL ( STARBOARD) HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT 5 43 1 SEL. SWITCH - WINCH SELECTOR ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 0 SAFETY GLASS (DOUBLE GLAZED)
78 1 TUGGER WINCH CONTROL PEDAL ( PORT) HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT 5 44 1 SEL. SWITCH - SLEW TORQUE SELECTOR ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 0 13 1 CABIN INSIDE SHEETING A4-2121.384 40
79 1 FIRE EXTINGUISHER ( DRY POWDER ) COMPLETE 2kg DRY CHEMICAL 20 45 1 SEL. SWITCH - POWER PACK (4 POSITION SWITCH) ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 0 14 1 CABIN DISTRIBUTION CABINET STAND A3-2121.382 31
WITH WALL MOUNTING BRACKET 46 1 SEL. SWITCH - MAIN HOIST / FLY HOIST ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 0 15 1 LOAD CHART 97.23m BOOM - MAIN & FLY HOIST A3-2170.1039 1
80 1 ELECTRICAL CABINET (2 DOORS)- RITTAL ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 36 47 1 SEL. SWITCH - TUGGER WINCH ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 0 MAIN HOIST (3 FALL) , FLY HOIST (2 FALL)
AUSTRALIA 48 1 PUSH BUTT. - WARNING HORN ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 0 16 1 LOAD CHART 72.92m BOOM - MAIN & FLY HOIST A3-2170.1040 1
81 2 BRITAX MIRROR WEST COAST TYPE 18" PN 1421100 6 49 1 PUSH BUTT. - ESD CLIENTS SUPPLY 0 MAIN HOIST (4 FALL) , FLY HOIST (2 FALL)
82 4 BLINDS (TOP,SIDES & FRONT) COMPLETED WITH REFLECTIVE BLINDS 40 50 1 PUSH BUTT. - MGOP ( YELLOW ) C/W PROTECTIVE ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 1 17 1 LOAD CHART 60.76m BOOM - MAIN & FLY HOIST A3-2170.1041 1
ACCESSORIES COVER MAIN HOIST (5 FALL) , FLY HOIST (2 FALL)
83 1 AUTO RETURN SEAT TRIMTECH - SINGLE 430 10 51 1 PUSH BUTT. - MOTOR START ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 0 18 1 LOAD CHART 97.23m BOOM - MAIN HOIST- 4 FALL A3-2170.1062 1
B 84 1 MANUAL ALARM CALL POINT CLIENT SUPPLY 1 52 1 PUSH BUTT. - MOTOR STOP ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 0 19 1 LOAD CHART 97.23m BOOM - MAIN HOIST - 3 FALL A3-2170.1063 1
85 1 VHF ANTENNA CLIENT SUPPLY 4 53 1 PUSH BUTT. - EMERGENCY STOP ( RED ) C/W ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 1 20 1 ROPE SPECIFICATION PLATE A3-2175.416 1
86 1 UHF ANTENNA CLIENT SUPPLY 14 PROTECTIVE COVER 21 1 CRANE HAND SIGNALS IN S.S. A3-9900.858 C 1
87 1 MOTOROLA VHF RADIO C/W DASH MOUNT CLIENT SUPPLY 15 54 1 MOPS BUZZER ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 0 22 1 EMERGENCY PP OPERATION PROCEDURE A4-9900.873 C 1
88 1 MOTOROLA UHF RADIO C/W DASH MOUNT CLIENT SUPPLY 13 55 1 AIR CONDITIONER CONTROLLER ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 1 23 1 CRANE NAME PLATE A4-9900.971 1
89 1 SMOKE DETECTOR CLIENT SUPPLY 1 56 1 ORLACO CAMERA LCD MONITOR 10" ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 10 24 1 AIR CONDITIONER COVER A4-2121.363 96
90 1 FOOTSWITCH CLIENT SUPPLY 3 57 1 ORLACO CAMERA CONTROLLER C/W MOUNTING ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 3 25 1 CABIN BULK HEAD PLATES A3-6230.518 1
91 1 TELEPHONE CLIENT SUPPLY 7 BRACKET 26 1 RUBBER FLOOR MATT - ( 5TH x 2390 x 1690 ) BW P/No. 0599 6859 16
92 1 GOOSE NECK MICROPHONE CLIENT SUPPLY 5 58 1 OPERATORS DISPLAY (LINEC-INCL. ENCLOSURE) ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 20 27 1 INSULATION 50mm THICK ISOVER ULTIMATE Glass U MFN24 (A30) 17
93 1 SMALL VOICE SWITCH CLIENT SUPPLY 0 59 1 X5/3 - IND. LIGHT ENCLOSURE ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 4 Fabric Black
94 1 WINDSPEED INDICATOR - OMC OBSERVATOR CLIENT SUPPLY 5 60 1 IND. LIGHT - HOIST PORT BRAKE APPLIED ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 0 28 2 VIBRATION PADS (40 WIDE x 2445 LG) SYLOMER M25 5
139-B C/W MOUNTING BRACKET 61 1 IND. LIGHT - LUFF RATCHET ENGAGED ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 0 29 1 SEAT - HEAD REST & BUILT IN ARM PODS KAB MODEL T4 25
D 95 1 CABIN SEAT ADAPTOR PLATE SKA00-6983 7 62 1 IND. LIGHT - SLEW BRAKE APPLIED ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 0 D 30 1 PORT JOYSTICK OPERATIONAL PLATE (FFC USA) 801021 0
96 1 SEL. SWITCH - BOOM PARKING SELECTOR ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 0 63 1 IND. LIGHT - LUFF BRAKE APPLIED ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 0 D 31 1 STBD JOYSTICK OPERATIONAL PLATE (FFC USA) 801222 0
D 97 1 PUSH BUTT - SLI BYPASS ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 0 64 1 IND. LIGHT - FLY BRAKE APPLIED ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 0
12.08.13 ITEMS 95 TO 97 ADDED. ITEM 43 DESCRIPTION UPDATED4113/4922 SK D

ITEM 30-31 DESCRIPTION & REFERENCE UPDATED
AMC EP EP 03.04.13 ITEM 21 & 22, REF. DRAWING No CHANGED. - SK C
JPD EP EP 06.07.12 REFER SHEET 1 - HS B
Approved Eng Draft Date Description ECN Name Issue
Checked Checked

A.B.N. 29 067 562 449

PC1000 "118-331-M-MR-001.05"
Title Activity No. 210
FFC PTY LTD ENGINEERING DEPT.
CABIN ASSEMBLY
THIS DRAWING REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES PTY LTD
C AND MUST NOT BE USED OR COPIED WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION. 1:1 4 OF 4 2508 kg A3-2100.254 D
MATERIAL LIST
3610 REF. CAT ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION LENGTH MATERIAL kg
NOTES 1 1 SLIPRING SUPPORT - BOTTOM A3-7301.190 250
1. CABLE TRAYS & LADDERS TO BE 2 1 TORQUE ARM A4-7301.191 3
INSTALLED AS PER MANUFACTURER'S 3 1 SLIPRING ASSEMBLY KK450 RD SC 121473-IS1 CAVOTEC 750
RECOMMENDATION. 4 2 CABLE TRAY SPB-RF40-150 2300 SS - OGLAEND 5
2. CABLE INSTALLATION AS PER 5 2 CABLE LADDER LOE 100-600 1390 SS - OGLAEND 6
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS 6 1 CABLE LADDER LOE 100-300 1390 SS - OGLAEND 5
A3-6100.574 AND JUB118 7 8 BOLT (HEX HEAD) - M16 45 CLASS 8.8 GALV. 0
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 8 12 BOLT (HEX HEAD) - M12 45 CLASS 8.8 GALV. 0
MANUAL CHMI311-E0-D01-01 9 8 NUT (HEX HEAD) - M16 CLASS 8 GALV. 0
3 10 12 NUT (HEX HEAD) - M12 CLASS 8 GALV. 0
11 16 WASHER (FLAT) - M16 GALVANIZED 0
575 REF.
12 22 WASHER (FLAT) - M12 GALVANIZED 0
= 980 =
C
C
730 REF.
4 = 50 =
3480 REF.
3
5
7 9 11
752 REF.
602 REF.
6
PLAN
SECTION A-A
SCALE 1 : 20
1080 REF
ISO VIEW
8 10 12
D.Z. ITEMS 1 & 2 AMENDED 14/10/13 C
JPD Y.B. SK ITEM 4 DESCRIPTION WAS SBD-RB40-150 11/12/12 B
3 JPD EP SDQ ORIGINAL ISSUE 22/11/2012 A
App. Chk. Drw. Description Date Rev.
980 REF
3
THIS DRAWING REMAINS THE PROPERTY
OF FAVELLE FAVCO BERHAD.
AND MUST NOT BE USED OR COPIED
WITHOUT WRITEN PERMISSION.
SECTION B-B
©
2880
Model
SCALE 1 : 30 TOLERANCE UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE PC1000
FABRICATION MACHINING S/No.
1000 ±1 30 ± 0.2 1814
> 1000, 2000 ±2 > 30, 100 ± 0.3 Weight
> 2000, 3000 ±3 > 100, 300 ± 0.5
B B 1019 Kg
> 3000, 6000 ±4 > 300, 1000 ± 0.8
2 Scale
> 6000 ±5 > 1000 ± 1.2
A A ANGLE ±1° 1 : 75
A member of
FAVELLE FAVCO BERHAD

Lot 586, Jalan Batu Tiga Lama,
2356 REF
12 10 8 41300 Klang, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia.
www.favellefavco.com
1 Muhibbah Engineering (M) Bhd
SECTION C-C Title Sheet
SCALE 1 : 15 SLIP RING ASSEMBLY DETAILS 1 /1

7 9 11 Drawing Number Rev.
ELEVATION A3-7300.182 C
Cat Item Qty Description Reference kg
1 1 STARBOARD POWER PACK ASSEMBLY A2-2400.372 5110
2 1 PORT POWER PACK ASSEMBLY A2-2400.373 5158
13 3 26 15 3 1 EMERGENCY POWER PACK ASSEMBLY A2-2400.374 1431
4 1 HEADER TANK A3-2420.240 643
5 1 OIL COOLER ASSEMBLY A3-2415.089 1223
6 1 HEADER TANK SUPPORT FRAME DETAILS A3-2410.475 100
X6
7 1 X3 BOX SUPPORT FRAME DETAILS A3-2410.476 43
20 8 3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER ( DRY POWDER ) COMPLETE 9 kg DRY CHEMICAL 0
8 WITH WALL MOUNTING BRACKET
4 5 24 B 13 8 10 12 BOLT HEX HEAD - M12 x 35 LG CLASS 8.8 GALV 1
7 14 11 10 WASHER FLAT x M16 GALVANIZED 0
X3 12 12 WASHER FLAT x M12 GALVANIZED 0
13 6 FLUROESCENT LIGHT ELEC. EQUIP SCHED. 35
14 REF HYDRAULIC MANIFORD REF. HYD SCHEDULE 0
19 15 REF X6 JUNCTION BOX REF. ELEC. SCHEDULE 0
B 27 X3A
16 REF X13 JUNCTION BOX REF. ELEC. SCHEDULE 0
B 21 18 REF X4 JUNCTION BOX REF. ELEC. SCHEDULE 0
19 REF X3A JUNCTION BOX REF. ELEC. SCHEDULE 0
1 2 21 REF CONVENTIONAL OPTICAL SMOKE DETECTOR CLIENTS SUPPLY 0
SECTION E-E 811-SD-202
22 REF LOUD SPEAKER 424.01-LS CLIENTS SUPPLY 0
STARBOARD PORT
23 REF GAS DETECTOR 811-GD-201 CLIENTS SUPPLY 0
24 REF CONVENTIONAL OPTICAL SMOKE DETECTOR CLIENTS SUPPLY 0
22 20 22 B 811-SD-203
4 B 25 REF GAS DETECTOR 811-GD-202 CLIENTS SUPPLY 0
27 B 26 REF GAS DETECTOR 811-GD-203 CLIENTS SUPPLY 0
X13 27 2 SAN ELECTRO HEATER ELEC. EQUIP. SCHED. 178
X4 B
X12 28 1 X13 MOUNTING BRACKET A2400-0411 28
B
10 12 13
9 11 B
16 13 8 18 25 23 17 13
PLAN
SECTION B-B
22 B 23 24 B
21 25 13 A
D 22 B
E E
B
27 B
B 27
16
X13
4
16 X3
B
15
B
D A
3 1 B 28 20 6 7 4 SECTION A- A
SECTION D-D
ELEVATION
NOTES:
16.10.13 ITEM 22, 27-28 ADDED.ITEM 16, 21, 22 AND 24 RELOCATED 4656 SK B
1. U.N.O. ALL BOLTS ARE TIGHTENED TO FFC DWG. A4-9900.578
AMC EP EP 26.07.2012 ORIGINAL ISSUE TAKEN FROM 2400.327 - D.Z. A
2. EL. MOTOR SOFT STARTING CABINETS ARE MOUNTED Eng Draft
Approved Date Revision ECN Name Issue
IN THE SLEW WELL. REFER TO DECK ASSEMBLY Checked Checked
FOR POSITIONS AND INSTALLATIONS. Favelle Favco Cranes Pty. Ltd.

A.B.N. 29 067 562 449
3. ALSO, REFER TO ELECRICAL CIRCUIT FOR LOCATION / LAYOUT A subsidiary of FAVELLE FAVCO BERHAD
OF HOUSE LIGHTS. HERE SHOWN AS REFERENCE ONLY. A member of MUHIBBAH ENGINEERING BHD
4. LOCATION OF HYDRAULIC BLOCKS AND JUNCTION BOXES Project First Used On S/No.
1814
IS SHOWN AS REFERENCE ONLY. FOR EXACT LOCATIONS PC1000 -118-331-M-MR-001.06
REFER TO HYDRAULIC COMPONENTS LAYOUT. Title Activity No.
240
POWERPACK ASSEMBLY
DO NOT SCALE FROM DRAWING IF IN DOUBT ASK FFC PTY LTD ENGINEERING DEPT. C LTD AND MUST NOT BE USED OR COPIED WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION. 1:30 1 OF 2 17.5 T A1-2400.368 B
A1 FORM: F04.06.03
X12
X4
X3A X13
X3
X6
16.10.13 REFER SHEET 1 4656 SK B

AMC EP EP 25.07.12 SEE SHEET-1 D.Z. A
Checked Checked

A.B.N. 29 067 562 449
ISOMETRIC VIEW A member of MUHIBBAH ENGINEERING BHD

1814
PC1000 -118-331-M-MR-001.06
Title Activity No.
240
POWERPACK ASSEMBLY
        
        
Cat Item Qty Description Reference kg
B 1 1 MAST DETAILS A1-3200.317 135000
2 1 MAST ADDITIONS A1-3200.318 1104
13 15 7 13 3 1 BUFFER ASSEMBLY A3-3100.317 2325
15
4 REF AVIATION LIGHT ELEC. EQUIP.SCHED
5 1 AVIATION LIGHT BRACKET A3-3400.072 3
6 1 MAST PLATFORM ASSEMBLY A3-3300.109 6573
18 19 23 7 5 MAST SHEAVE ASSEMBLY A4-9510.245 6290
23 19 18 8 1 MAST MONORAIL & TROLLY ASSEMBLY A1-3500.067 3049
9 4 REAR LEG TOP & BOTTOM PIN A3-3050.130.002 1616
26 24 25 26 10 1 MAST HEAD SHEAVE PIN A3-3050.130.001 2690
20 7 11 2 FRONT LEG PIN A3-3050.130.003 796
12 6 END COVER Ø 315 A4-9912.142 168
10 13 13 2 END COVER Ø 420 A4-9912.159 115
6 14 1 ROPE GUARD A4-9550.124.016 33
C
D 15 2 SPACER A4-9901.682.003 26
14 16 2 FLOOD LIGHT BRACKET A3-4501.234
17 REF FLOOD LIGHT 400W ELEC. EQUIP.SCHED
18 20 BOLT HEX HEAD - M30 x 55 LG CLASS 8.8 GALV. 12
DETAIL A 17 16 19 20 WASHER NL30 - NORDLOCK ZINC FLAKE COATED
=2528= SCALE 1 : 25 20 1 LUFF ANCHOR ASSEMBLY A3-5600.313 268
5 4
B 21 2 CAMERA SUPPORT BRACKET A3-3401.028 1
S 22 REF WINCH CAMERA ELEC.EQUIP. SCHED
DETAIL A
30 29 28 23 4 GREASE BOLT M30 A4-9512.061 4
6 24 1 GREASE BOLT M42 A4-9512.068 3
25 1 M42 HEX BOLT x 100LG G.R 8.8 GALV. 3
16 17 1 26 2 WASHER NL42 NORDLOCK-ZINC FLAKE COATED 1
17 16
27 5 GREASE NIPPLE 1/4" BSP
28 2 M12 HEX BOLT x 40 LG G.R 8.8 GALV.
29 2 M12 HEX NUT G.R 8 GALV.
9 30 4 WASHER NL12 NORDLOCK-ZINC FLAKE COATED
12 18 19 12 9
2708 REF
4795 REF
4645 REF 3
25523
21 22
4590 REF
22 21
3199 REF
8
3719 REF
3672 REF
4706
17.10.13 ITEM 15 WAS A4-9901.661.016 - SK D
7706
7706
NPV EP EP 21.02.13 ITEM 14, ROPE GUARD WAS A4-9550.124.004 - S.K C
6735 REF
JPD E.P. E.P. 29.06.12 ITEM 1 & 21 DRW NO. AMENDED M.A B
JPD E.P E.P 20.06.12 ORIGINAL ISSUE FROM A1.3000.214 M.A A
523 Approved Eng Draft Date Revision ECN Name Issue
477 DECK LEVEL Checked Checked

A.B.N. 29 067 562 449
ISOMETRIC VIEW A member of MUHIBBAH ENGINEERING BHD

8395 1814
6108 REAR LEGS 19 18 12 9 PC1000 "JUB-118-331-S-DG-002.03"
11 12 18 19 Title Activity No.
6380 FRONT LEGS
300
ELEVATION VIEW
MAST ASSEMBLY
REAR VIEW THIS DRAWING REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES PTY
DO NOT SCALE FROM DRAWING IF IN DOUBT ASK FFC PTY LTD ENGINEERING DEPT. C LTD AND MUST NOT BE USED OR COPIED WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION. 1:75 1 OF 1 162 T A1-3000.249 D
A1 FORM: F04.06.03 Material List Material List
Cat Item Qty Description Reference Cat Item kg Qty Description Reference kg
69 16 WASHER FLAT x M30 (NORDLOCK) ZINC FLAKE COATED 1 0 # BOOM BOTTOM SECTION - 24.24m A1-4100.190 0
70 1 BOOM FLOODLIGHT ASSEMBLY - BOOM TOP A4-4501.241 2 31 # BOOM BOTTOM SECTION ADDITIONS - 24.24m A1-4100.234 0
71 # BOOM FLOODLIGHT ASSEMBLY A3-4500.093 3 0 # BOOM TRANSITION SECTION - 24.3m A1-4200.369 0
4 # BOOM TRANSITION SECTION ADDITIONS - 24.3m A1-4200.457 0
5 # BOOM EXTENTION SECTION - 12.155m A1-4200.367 0
PORT 6 # BOOM EXTENTION SECTION ADDITIONS -12.155m A1-4200.458 0
18 21 7 # BOOM EXTENTION SECTION - 24.3m A1-4200.396 0
19 37 8 # BOOM EXTENTION SECTION ADDITIONS -24.3m A1-4200.459 0
16 9 # BOOM TOP & FLY SECTION - 12.21m A1-4300.274 0
10 # BOOM TOP & FLY SECTION ADDITIONS-12.21m A1-4300.275 0
11 1 BOOM HANGER BLOCK ARRANGEMENT A1-4350.109 19144
12 2 BOOM HEEL PIN A4-4050.402 1036
7000
13 2 BOOM HEEL PIN LOCKING PLATE A3-4030.005 63
14 4 BUSH - BOOM PIVOT A4-9907.255 136
15 4 BOOM HEEL PIN END COVER A4-9912.133 141
495
16 1 BOOM TOP AVATION LIGHT BRACKET & ASSEMBLY A3-4501.239 15
38 71 70 45 17 1 BOOM CABLE TRAY ASSEMBLY A1-4550.006 288
20 PLAN STARBOARD
19 18 1 BOOM TRANSITION DEF. SHEAVE ASS'Y A3-4020.117 5687
97227 19 # BOOM WALKWAY ASSEMBLY A1-4700.268 0
55 64246 20 1 BOOM ANGLE INDICATOR ( STARBOARD SIDE) A3-4800.059 2
B 21 1 BRIDLE PLATFORM ASSEMBLY A1-4702.171 2248
8944 22 1 CAMERA MOUNTING BRACKET A3-4501.246 1
18 21 34 8243 23 1 CCTV CAMERA REF. ELEC. SCHEDULE 3
2
4573
36 4841 C 24 # FLOOD LIGHT FRAME ASSEMBLY A4500-0123 0
3768
4533
20 1 25 # FLOODLIGHT REF. ELEC. SCHEDULE 0
5800
2405 26 2 FLY ROPE GUARD, 1610 LONG A4-9550.124.005 7
A C A 27 1 FLY ROPE GUARD DETAILS A3-9550.128 174
B
28 1 FLY SHEAVE PIN SPACER-265 LONG A4-9901.682.007 14
31 1 FLY SLI LOAD SHEAVE ASSEMBLY A3-4400.285 139
32 1 HOIST ROPE GUARD (SIDE) A4-9550.124.013 10
24240 24310 24310 12155 33 1 HOIST ROPE GUARD (TOP) A4-9550.124.012 10
34 # INTERMEDIATE FLY DEF. SHEAVE ASS'Y A3-4021.124 0
71 35 24 35 71 35 35 # JUNCTION BOX REF. ELEC. SCHEDULE 0
71 40 25 B 36 1 MAIN & FLY DEF. SHEAVE ASS'Y A3-4400.286 5201
B 37 1 MAIN SLI ASSEMBLY PORT A3-4400.283 524
ELEVATION BOOM LENGTH 97.23m 38 1 MAIN SLI ASSEMBLY STBD A3-4400.284 546
12210 C
39 1 MAIN SLI SHEAVE BRACKET SUPPORT A3-4401.361 491
40 1 MANSAFE ASSEMBLY & DETAILS A1-4700.266 21
58 57 59 41 2 SHEAVE ASSEMBLY Ø1500/76/440 A3-9510.265 3677
42 2 SHEAVE PIN END COVER A4-9912.144 71
51mm AT TORQUING 43 - DELETED
SIDE D
25 44 1 SHEAVE PIN Ø440 A3-4050.471 4328
2 1 71 25 45 1 WIND SPEED INDICATOR BRACKET A3-3401.040 1
4 3 71 7 8 PORT 46 1 WINDSPEED INDICATOR - OBSERVATOR FREE ISSUED 0
6 5
10 9 47 1 Ø200 FLY SHEAVE PIN A4-4050.404 454
DETAIL- U 48 1 Ø200 SHEAVE PIN END COVER A4-9912.135 16
49 2 Ø440 SHEAVE PIN SPACER, 149 LONG A4-9901.664/2 65
53 1 Ø825/42/200 SHEAVE ASSEMBLY A4-9510.246 225
54 4 GREASE BOLT - M30 A4-9512.061 1
55 8 GREASE NIPPLE BSP 1/4" S.S. 316 0
25 24 STARBOARD 57 # BOOM CONNECTOR NUT A3-9260.113/2 0
15 25 24 25 71 25 71 25 24
14 58 # BOOM CONNECTOR STUD A3-9260.113/1 0
SECTION A-A 59 # BOOM CONNECTOR WASHER A3-9260.113/3 0
=2250= 60 8 NUT HEX x M20 CLASS 8 GALV 1
52 61 16 NUT HEX x M24 CLASS 8 GALV 2
=674= 62 8 BOLT HEX HEAD - M20 x 50 LG CLASS 8.8 GALV 2
788 788
12 63 2 BOLT HEX HEAD - M24 x 60 LG CLASS 8.8 GALV 1
D 64 - DELETED
15 50 49 51 26
13 65 2 BOLT HEX HEAD - M24 x 75 LG CLASS 8.8 GALV 1
42 36 53 842 66 4 BOLT HEX HEAD - M30 x 65 LG CLASS 8.8 GALV 3
69 66 26 390
54 67 16 WASHER FLAT x M20 (NORDLOCK) ZINC FLAKE COATED 0
WIRE ALL THE BOLT 29 68 38 WASHER FLAT x M24 (NORDLOCK) ZINC FLAKE COATED 0
HEADS TOGETHER
ON ASS'Y WIRE ALL THE BOLT 54 63
HEADS TOGETHER 47
ON ASS'Y
11 24.09.13 SECTION F-F DELETED. ITEM 43, 56, 72 DELETED. SECTION CC UPDATED 5023 SK D
65 JPD EP EP 08.05.13 ITEM-24 AMENDED. TOTAL WEIGHT UPDATED D.Z. C
2225
44
NV EP EP 26.11.12 SEE SHEET-3 D.Z. B
1620
63 J.D. E.P. E.P. 04.09.12 ORIGINAL ISSUE TAKEN FROM A1-4000.296 D.Z. A
WIRE ALL THE BOLT 55 Checked Checked
5055
HEADS TOGETHER
ON ASS'Y Favelle Favco Cranes Pty. Ltd.
A.B.N. 29 067 562 449
48 27 30 28 A subsidiary of FAVELLE FAVCO BERHAD
STARBOARD 600 600 PORT STARBOARD A member of MUHIBBAH ENGINEERING BHD

PORT
1814
SECTION C-C D PC1000 "118-331-S-DG-002.04"
SECTION D-D SCALE 1 : 30
Title Activity No.
SHEET-3 400
S BOOM
SCALE 1 : 30 BOOM ASSEMBLY
SECTION B-B THIS DRAWING REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES PTY
SCALE 1 : 50 DO NOT SCALE FROM DRAWING IF IN DOUBT ASK FFC PTY LTD ENGINEERING DEPT. C LTD AND MUST NOT BE USED OR COPIED WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION. 1:175 1 OF 3 REF.TABLE A1-4000.326 D
A1 FORM: F04.06.03
5000 CRS
19
H H
39780
21
K 36
J 20 L 38 J
5000 CRS
45
K L
40 35 16
35
24240 24311 12155 12211 17
72917 11
SECTION L-L
SCALE 1 : 50
ELEVATION
BOOM LENGTH 72.92m
7000 CRS
1 18 21
3 PORT
9
5000 CRS
STARBOARD
VIEW H-H
SHOWING WALKWAY ACCESS AT TOP OF BOOM
SECTION K-K
SCALE 1 : 50
37 PORT
26.09.13 SEE SHEET-1 5023 SK D
71 25 71 25 JPD EP EP 08.05.13 SEE SHEET-1 D.Z. C

25 71 70 25 NV EP EP 26.11.12 SEE SHEET-3 D.Z. B
SECTION J-J
STARBOARD J.D. E.P. E.P. 04.09.12 SEE SHEET-1 D.Z. A
SHOWING WALKWAY ACCESS AT BOTTOM OF BOOM Eng Draft
Approved Date Revision ECN Name Issue
Checked Checked

A.B.N. 29 067 562 449

1814
PC1000 "118-331-S-DG-002.04"
Title Activity No.
400
BOOM ASSEMBLY
DO NOT SCALE FROM DRAWING IF IN DOUBT ASK FFC PTY LTD ENGINEERING DEPT. C LTD AND MUST NOT BE USED OR COPIED WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION. 1:175 2 OF 3 REF.TABLE A1-4000.326 D
A1 FORM: F04.06.03 BOOM TABLE
ITEM DESCREPTION WEIGHT/ITEM BOOM LENGTH QTY. BOOM LENGTH QTY. BOOM LENGTH QTY
No. (kg) 90.23m 72.92m 60.76m
27625 1 BOOM BOTTOM SECTION - 20.24m - A1-4100.190 43367 1 1 1
M M 2 BOOM BOTTOM SECTION ADDITIONS - 20.24m - A1-4100.234 2190 1 1 1
38 3 BOOM TRANSITION SECTION - 24.3m - A1-4200.369 37988 1 1 1
37 4 BOOM TRANSITION SECTION ADDITIONS - 24.3m - A1-4200.457 3385 1 1 1
D 5 BOOM EXTENTION SECTION - 12.155m - A1-4200.367 20500 1 1 0
6 BOOM EXTENTION SECTION ADDITIONS - 12.155m - A1-4200.458 1350 1 1 0
7 BOOM EXTENTION SECTION - 24.31m - A1-4200.396 37195 1 0 0
N N 8 BOOM EXTENTION SECTION ADDITIONS - 24.31m - A1-4200.459 2281 1 0 0
9 BOOM TOP & FLY SECTION - 12.2m - A1-4300.274 37500 1 1 1
10 BOOM TOP & FLY SECTION ADDITIONS - 12.2m - A1-4300.275 1600 1 1 1
18 BOOM WALKWAY ASSEMBLY 97.23m - A1-4700.268/1 11933 1 0 0
68 24 FLOOD LIGHT FRAME ASSEMBLY - A3-4501.242 62 3 2 2
D 25 FLOOD LIGHT - ELEC. SCHEDULE 31 8 6 5
63 34 INTERMEDIATE FLY DEF. SHEAVE ASSEMBLY - A3-4021.124 2311 1 0 0
24240 24311 35 JUNCTION BOX - ELEC. SCHEDULE 5 3 3 2
61 57 BOOM CONNECTOR NUT - A3-9260.113/2 1 384 288 192
60762 58 BOOM CONNECTOR STUD - A3-9260.113/1 5 192 144 96
39 59 BOOM CONNECTOR WASHER - A3-9260.113/3 0.3 384 288 192
SECTION P-P 71 BOOM FLOOD LIGHT ASSEMBLY 30 4 3 2
ELEVATION C ALL BOOM OTHER ITEMS 43700 43700 43700
DETAIL-V SCALE 1:25
BOOM LENGTH 60.76m TOTAL WEIGHT (kg) 247.3T 203.6T 180.5T
PORT 31
67
60
536
62
STARBOARD
SECTION M-M
DETAIL-U
WALKWAY ACCESS AT TOP OF BOOM 39
25 SECTION R-R
71 25 24 25 71 SCALE 1 : 15
PORT
STARBOARD
SECTION N-N 70 25
WALKWAY ACCESS AT BOTTOM OF BOOM
25 24 P
19 37 31 16
R
17 ISOMETRIC VIEW
33 32
22
P R 26
26.09.13 SEE SHEET-1 5023 SK D
41
45 46 DPD EP EP 08.05.13 SEE SHEET-1 D.Z. C
NV EP EP 26.11.12 DRG UPDATED AS PER CLIENT', ITEM-21 WAS A1-4701.171 D.Z. B
ITEM-36 WAS A3-9510.286
J.D. E.P. E.P. 04.09.12 SEE SHEET-1 D.Z. A
DETAIL-U 11 Eng Draft
70 27 Approved Date Revision ECN Name Issue
Checked Checked
SCALE 1 : 60 Favelle Favco Cranes Pty. Ltd.
A.B.N. 29 067 562 449

1814
PC1000 "118-331-S-DG-002.04"
DETAIL-V Activity No.
Title
400
SCALE 1:60 BOOM ASSEMBLY
DO NOT SCALE FROM DRAWING IF IN DOUBT ASK FFC PTY LTD ENGINEERING DEPT. C LTD AND MUST NOT BE USED OR COPIED WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION. 1:175 3 OF 3 136882 kg A1-4000.326 D
MATERIAL LIST
CAT ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION MATERIAL/REFERENCE kg
1 1 UPPER HANGER BRACKET A3-4351.006/A 4505
3715 NOTE: 2 2 LOWER HANGER BRACKET A3-4351.006/B 2851
WIRE BOLT HEADS TOGETHER 3 6 SHEAVE ASSEMBLY Ø1500 ROOT / Ø76 A4-9510.258 7621
2250 I.P BOOM BOSSES ROPE / Ø260 PIN
4 2 HANGER BRACKET PIN A3-4050.472.001 818
5 2 HANGER BRACKET SHEAVE PIN A3-4050.472.002 541
6 5 Ø260 PIN COVER A3-4050.472.003 83
7 2 Ø260 SHEAVE PIN SPACER, 340 LG A4-9901.682.010 94
8 4 Ø260 SHEAVE PIN SPACER, 4 LG A4-9901.682.011 1
DETAIL D 9 1 HANGER GUIDE BLOCK A3-4351.006/C 1349
10 4 UPPER HANGER BRACKET BUSH A3-4050.472.004 226
DETAIL A 11 4 LOWER HANGER BRACKET BUSH A3-4050.472.005 66
NOTCH C 12
2-PLACES 13 16 GREASE BOLT - M24 A4-9512.062 5
ON ASS'Y 14 10 BOLT HEX HEAD - M24 x 80 LG CLASS 8.8 GALV 4
C 16 8 GREASE BOLT - M20 A4-9512.007 1
17 28 WASHER NL24 (NORD LOCK) ZINC FLAKE COATED 0
18 4 ROPE GUIDE ROLLER A3-4351.006/D 868
19 1 ROPE GUARD ROLLER A3-4351.006/E 250
1 C 20 10 Ø110 ROLLER SHAFT COVER A3-4351.006/38 90
1850
DETAIL E 21 4 ROPE GUARD A4-9550.124.007 48
22 8 Ø10 SPLIT PIN SS316 0
C 24 30 WASHER NL20 (NORD LOCK) ZINC FLAKE COATED 0
3 B 25 1 HANGER BLOCK LUBRICATION LAYOUT A1-4340.004 102
995
10 NOTCH
6065 O/A REF.

788 CRS
1553 REF
2-PLACES
ON ASS'Y
2050
11 3
1155
10
6
4
DETAIL B 17
2 15 10
DETAIL C
B
30° 25
30° 10 17 14
1 3
2
4 DETAIL A 7
SCALE 1 : 20
4
3
20
23 9 9
24 23
21 22
1125 1125 24
3
20 20
STARBOARD ELEVATION 6 19 23
SIDE VIEW 23
2 DETAIL B 616 REF.
5 23 24 ISO VIEW 24
SCALE 1 : 10 696 REF.
14
13 24 19
17 23 20
D.Z. ITEM-20 WAS 6 OFF,QTY OF ITEMS 16, 24 AMENDED,ITEM-12 DELETED 31/05/13 C
17 24 18 J.D. E.P. D.Z. ITEM-25 ADDED, ITEM-18 PICTORIALLY AMENDED 18/3/13 B
3340
J.D. E.P. FRZ ORIGINAL ISSUE 7/9/12 A
=675= =2250= App. Chk. Drw. DESCRIPTION Date Rev.
337 337
150 3
22 21
10
6 10
5 REF. BOOM
HEAD PIN
THIS DRAWING REMAINS THE PROPERTY
OF FAVELLE FAVCO BERHAD.
AND MUST NOT BE USED OR COPIED
WITHOUT WRITEN PERMISSION.
20
B
©
14 17 18 9
Model
TOLERANCE UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE
10 24 PC1000
FABRICATION MACHINING S/No.
13 10 20 1000 ±1 30 ± 0.2
1814
23 > 1000, 2000 ±2 > 30, 100 ± 0.3
Weight
> 2000, 3000 ±3 > 100, 300 ± 0.5
17 > 3000, 6000 ±4 > 300, 1000 ± 0.8
19397 kg
> 6000 ±5 > 1000 ± 1.2 Scale
8 ANGLE ±1° 1:50
8 A member of
1 INSIDE PIN COVER C FAVELLE FAVCO BERHAD

23 Lot 586, Jalan Batu Tiga Lama,
BOLTED ON PIN 18 41300 Klang, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia.
2 24 16 C 20
=1020= =1020= ONLY www.favellefavco.com
24 Muhibbah Engineering (M) Bhd
WIRE ALL THE OUTSIDE PIN COVER Title Sheet
DETAIL C BOLT HEADS BOLTED ON PIN &
SCALE 1 : 25 TOGETHER 1 /1
DETAIL D DETAIL E C STRUCTURE HANGERBLOCK ASSEMBLY
ON ASS'Y Drawing Number Rev.
SCALE 1 : 25 SCALE 1 : 15
A1-4530.109 C
Table Of Contents
Terminal Blocks Arrangement (X6 and X10 Junction Box) 49
Terminal Blocks Arrangement (X11 Junction Box) 50
Terminal Blocks Arrangement (X14 Junction Boxes) 51
Component List 52
Cable Termination Schedule 87
Project
PR PR PR LGL As-Built 18/10/13 H
Jack Up Barge Favelle Favco Cranes (USA) Inc.
4 Mile East, FM 106 Port of Harlingen,
118-331-M-MR-001.09 78551 Harlingen, Texas, USA.
PR PR RY Refer to Page 2 23/05/13 G (A subsidiary of Muhibbah Engineering (M) Bhd) Muhibbah Engineering (M) Bhd
Page Title
JD PR MM RY Refer to Page 2 25/03/13 F Table Of Contents
THIS DRAWING REMAINS THE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
FAVCO CRANES (USA) INC.
AND MUST NOT BE
USED OR COPIED WITHOUT
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
Serial No. Model Drawing Number Sheet Revision
Approved Eng Draft Drawn Description Rev.
Date
C
Checked Checked 1814 PC1000 A3-6100.590 2 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Table of Changes
Rev G 8.Page 3: Interconnections betwen X3 and X3A have been reviewed, defined
1.Page 3: W3029, W3030 and W3031 are renamed as W30, W40 and W60 and marked as W300 and W300A.
according to AC Drawing A36100574. Cables are set to be 19C 1.5mm2. 9.Page 3: Interconnection cable W3005 between X3 and X5 has been removed.
2.Page 3 ,4: W700, W701, W702 and W703 are renamed as W233, W233A, W233C 10.Page 3: Interconnection between X12 and X3 has been renamed as W1226 refering
W233D according to AC Drawing A36100574. Remarks have been edited accordingly. to AC drawing.
3.Page 3 ,4: W800, W801 and W802 have been according to AC Drawing 11.Page 3: Interconnection between X15 and X36 has been added, marked as W509
A36100574.
12.Page 3: Interconnection between X5 and X5/2 has been removed.
4.Page 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, 10, 14, 16: W3400, W3401, W3402 rerouted to X4A.
13.Page 3 and 4: Cable W3403 and W3404 have been added between X3 and X4.
5.Page 3, 4, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 17, 21: W400A rerouted to X3 and changed to 12c,
W400B deleted. 14.Page 3 and 4: Cable W3401 and W3402 were taken out from X3 and X4A interconnection.
Now they are connected between X3 and X4.
6.Page 3, 4, 14, 16, 17, 21, 23, 25, 26: W3403 and W3404 deleted.
15.Page 3 and 4: W400 has been renamed as W3400.
7.Page 3, 4, 17, 25, 26: W630 added between X6 and X3.
16.Page 4: Type of cables, connecting DPSs and X4A, have been changed to 3C+E
8.Page 3, 4, 23: W518 added between X6 and X15. based on the specifications of the components.
9.Page 3, 4, 8, 14, 16: W3410 added between X3 and X4B.
17.Page 4: W426B has been added between X4 and X4B for extended interconnection
10.Page 3, 4, 20: W3411 added between X3A and X4B. capacity
11.Page 4, 7, 35: W3614 rerouted to X4B. 18.Page 4: W400A, W400B and W400C have been added between X4 and X4A.
12.Page 4, 16: W441 added between X4A and X4B.
13.Page 4, 16, 27, 35: W400C and W426B deleted. 19.Page 7, 9, 10, 14, 17, 23, 25, 26, 27 and 35: Extra X4 terminations have been added for
14.Page 6, 9, 12, 17, 18, 21, 23, 25, 35: Terminals and cables between AC and interconnecting between junction boxes.
DC drawing are added. 20.Page 8: Schematic diagram of DPSs has been optimized for removing redundant
15.Page 7, 9, 10, 14, 16, 17, 23, 25, 26, 27, 35, 45: X4 extra terminals in rev F deleted interconnections. Related redundant terminations have been removed.
as revised. 21.Page 8: Remark for B31/1, B31/2 and B31/3 have been changed refering to
16.Page 8,14, 20: W426, W426B, W343 is rerouted due to changed terminals. datasheet. Accordingly, NC reference point has been switched with grounding connection.
17.Page 44: Extra Terminals added in X3B.
22.Page 15: Terminations for SV86 series have been modified according to the latest
Rev F single line diagram.
1.General: Cables and cable glands are added and modified in the drawing.
23.Page 16: Extra terminations have been added for emergency stop switches.
2.Page 3:Locations of all junction boxes are marked in the single line diagram
3.Page 3 and 4: SV 89 is rerouted to X4 in the single line diagram accroding to 24.Page 16, 27, 29 and 35: Terminations in X5/1 have been added.
schematic diagram 25.Page 20: Redundant terminations connected to DPSs have been removed.
4.Page 3, 4, 10, 14, 19, 27, 35 and 36: Type of cables of solenoid is changed 26.Page 30: X5A terminations have been removed.
to pre-wired cables from Rexroth.
27.Page 31: Extra terminations have been added for correct connection for K1/5.
5.Page 3 and 35: H35, S19, H59 and H94, as a part of MGOP control station, 28.Page 35: Extra terminations have been added for correct connection for K132.
have been included in X5/1, and rerouted via X5 to X36
29.Page 46: Mechanical block arrangement of X5/1 cabin console has been added.
6.Page 3: X5/3 has been rerouted to X5/2 30.Page 88 to 115: Cable Termination Schedule added.
7.Page 3 and 37: X10 junction box is excluded from Zone 1 Exd. 31.General: Wire number checked and amended as required.
Project
Jack Up Barge Favelle Favco Cranes (USA) Inc
118-331-M-MR-001.09 Refer to Page 2 G 78551 Harlingen, Texas, USA.
PR PR RY 23/05/13 (A subsidiary of Muhibbah Engineering (M) Bhd) Muhibbah Engineering (M) Bhd
Page Title
JD PR MM RY Refer to Page 2 25/03/13 F Table of Changes

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
Draft Serial No. Model Drawing Number Sheet Revision
Approved Eng Drawn Description Date
C
FORM: 04.23.01
Checked Checked Rev. 1814
PC1000 A3-6100.590 3 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title
JD PR MM RY Refer to Page 2 25/03/13 F Single Line

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 4 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 5 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 6 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X13DC
6
X13DC
Project
Page Title
JD PR MM RY Refer to Page 2 25/03/13 F Main Control Junction Box (X3)

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 7 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 8 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 9 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 10 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 11 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 12 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 13 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 14 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 15 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 16 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 17 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
X12.3
3
X12.3
5
X12.3
X12.3
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 18 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X13DC
6
X13DC
Project
Page Title
JD PR MM RY Refer to Page 2 25/03/13 F Secondary Control Junction Box (X4)

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 19 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 20 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 21 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 22 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 23 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X13DC
8
X13DC
Project
Page Title
JD PR MM RY Refer to Page 2 25/03/13 F Emergency PowerPack Control Junction Box (X6)

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 24 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 25 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 26 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 27 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title
JD PR MM RY Refer to Page 2 25/03/13 F Cabin Control Junction Box (X55)

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 28 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 29 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 30 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 31 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title
JD PR MM RY Refer to Page 2 25/03/13 F SLI Control Junction Box (X55)

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 32 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 33 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 34 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 35 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X13DC
8
X13DC
Project
Page Title
JD PR MM RY Refer to Page 2 25/03/13 F MGOP Control Junction Box (X36)

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 36 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title
JD PR MM RY Refer to Page 2 25/03/13 F MGOP Control Junction Box (X36)

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 37 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title
JD PR MM RY Refer to Page 2 25/03/13 F Boom Control Junction Box (X11)

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 38 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 39 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 40 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 41 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 42 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 43 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title
JD PR MM RY Refer to Page 2 25/03/13 F Terminal Blocks Arrangement (X33 Junction Box)

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 44 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 45 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 46 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 47 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 48 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title
JD PR MM RY Refer to Page 2 25/03/13 F Terminal Blocks Arrangement (X6 and X10 Junction Box)

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 49 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 50 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Project
Page Title
JD PR MM RY Refer to Page 2 25/03/13 F Terminal Blocks Arrangement (X14 Junction Boxes)

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
PC1000 A3-6100.590 51 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ITEM DESCRIPTION MODEL MANUFACTURER QTY NOTES
B7 SS Hollow Shaft Encoder 3600 Puls/Rev (w 20m cable) 2REXH-SR3600-SRN-15-66-20-SS-E Scancon 1

B25 SS Hollow Shaft Encoder 635 Puls/Rev (w 20m cable) 2REX-H-SR635-SR-N-15-66-20-SS-E Scancon 1
B26 SS Hollow Shaft Encoder 635 Puls/Rev (w 20m cable) 2REX-H-SR635-SR-N-15-66-20-SS-E Scancon 1
B27A SS Hollow Shaft Encoder 635 Puls/Rev (w 20m cable) 2REX-H-SR635-SR-N-15-66-20-SS-E Scancon 1
B27B SS Hollow Shaft Encoder 635 Puls/Rev (w 20m cable) 2REX-H-SR635-SR-N-15-66-20-SS-E Scancon 1
B31/2 Proximity Switch M12 connector NBN4-12GM60-A2-V1 Pepperl and Fuchs 1 PN: 601092
Cable, M12, 4 Pole Lumberg 1 PN: 600228
B31/3 Proximity Switch M12 connector NBN4-12GM60-A2-V1 Pepperl and Fuchs 1 PN: 601092

B50 CANBus Inclinometer MVINC-CO-1-PG9 Axiomatic 1 PN: 600661
DPS1A Plug for Hydraulic Filter Bypass K4L2-24 ID77061 Rexroth 1

DPS1B Plug for Hydraulic Filter Bypass K4L2-24 ID77061 Rexroth 1

DPS3C Plug for Hydraulic Filter Bypass K4L2-24 ID77061 Rexroth 1

DPS3D Plug for Hydraulic Filter Bypass K4L2-24 ID77061 Rexroth 1
DPS4C Plug for Hydraulic Filter Bypass K4L2-24 ID77061 Rexroth 1

DPS4D Plug for Hydraulic Filter Bypass K4L2-24 ID77061 Rexroth 1

DPS11 Plug for Hydraulic Filter Bypass K4L2-24 ID77061 Rexroth 1
DPS12 Plug for Hydraulic Filter Bypass K4L2-24 ID77061 Rexroth 1

ESX Plug for ESX - 68 pins STW Technic 1 PN: 600174
40Mhz, ESX with BBA & BBC (6 DO, 3 Enc) ESX-2 STW Technic 1 PN: 602162
Project PR PR PR LGL As-Built 18/10/13 H
Favelle Favco Cranes (USA) Inc.
Jack Up Barge 4 Mile East, FM 106 Port Of Harlingen,
Page Title
JD PR MM RY Refer to Page 2 25/03/13 F
Component List

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
Eng Draft Serial No. Model Drawing Number Sheet Revision
Approved Drawn Description Date Rev.
C
FORM: 04.25.01 Checked Checked 1814 PC1000 A3-6100.590 52 /111 H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ESX I/O ESX-IOX ESX-I/O STW Technic 1 PN: 602163

Plug for DIOM - 42 pins STW Technic 1 PN: 600173
ESX II Plug for ESX - 68 pins STW Technic 1 PN: 600174

ESX_X4 Plug for ESX - 68 pins STW Technic 1 PN: 600174


G4 DC-DC Converter IN:12-24Vdc, OUT:24Vdc MINI-PS-12-24DC/24DC/1 Phoenix Contact 1

H1 Horn 24Vdc 118dB IN21VT Seagull 1
H1/1 Industrial Audible and Visual alarm-Strobe 2.5,5 Joule YL5 Clifford & Snell 1
H1A Single LED, White Diffuse, 24VAC/DC 15mA EAO 1
Indicator, Flush mounting Plastic Green 704.006.518 EAO 1
H1B Single LED, White Diffuse, 24VAC/DC 15mA EAO 1

H2 Single LED, White Diffuse, 24VAC/DC 15mA EAO 1


Indicator, Flush mounting Green 704.202.508 EAO 1

Indicator, Flush mounting Red 704.202.208 EAO 1
H94 Buzzer, 24V, 85dB, 4kHz XB5-KSB Telemecanique 1

Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J1 Connector for JS6000 Joystick - 6 Pin Kit Sauer Danfoss 1 PN: 601687
Left Hand Joystick (4 axis) JS6000 - CANOpen - Left Sauer Danfoss 1 PN: 601383
J2 Connector for JS6000 Joystick - 6 Pin Kit Sauer Danfoss 1 PN: 601687
Right Hand Joystick (4 axis) JS6000 - CANOpen - Right Sauer Danfoss 1 PN: 601384
J4 Touch Screen Display 10.4" with CANOpen AGP3500-T1-D24 Proface 1

CANopen SLAVE UNIT for Display GP3000 Proface 1
Junction Box Stainless Steel W400xH300xD120 B&R 1
K1 Automotive Power Relay (24V-70A) VF7-41H11 Tyco Electronics 1 PN: 600645
K1/4 Automotive Power Relay (24V-70A) VF7-41H11 Tyco Electronics 1 PN: 600645
K1A 4CO, Plugin Relay, 14 pin MRC series C4-A40FX/DC24V Releco 1 PN: 601300
Socket for 4CO, Plugin Relay, 14 pin MRC series Releco 1 PN: 601167
K2 4CO, Plugin Relay, 14 pin MRC series C4-A40FX/DC24V Releco 1 PN: 601300
K2B 4CO, Plugin Relay, 14 pin MRC series C4-A40FX/DC24V Releco 1 PN: 601300
K2C 4CO, Plugin Relay, 14 pin MRC series C4-A40FX/DC24V Releco 1 PN: 601300
K33 2CO, DIN Rail Relay PRZ 8552440000 Weidmuller 1 PN: 600477
K57/1 4CO, Plugin Relay, 14 pin MRC series C4-A40FX/DC24V Releco 1 PN: 601300
Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
K62A Socket for 4CO, Plugin Relay, 14 pin MRC series Releco 1 PN: 601167
K62A1 4CO, Plugin Relay, 14 pin MRC series C4-A40FX/DC24V Releco 1 PN: 601300
K70C On Delay Timer RE11RAMU Schneider 1 DIN Track Mounted
K91B 4CO, Plugin Relay, 14 pin MRC series C4-A40FX/DC24V Releco 1 PN: 601300
K91C 4CO, Plugin Relay, 14 pin MRC series C4-A40FX/DC24V Releco 1 PN: 601300
K91E 4CO, Plugin Relay, 14 pin MRC series C4-A40FX/DC24V Releco 1 PN: 601300
LLS1/1 Refer Hydraulic Circuit Refer Hyd Circuit 1
LP1 Load Pin (10.0T) Dual ATEX 4-20mA output 1026432 Brosa 1 PN: 600865



LS1A Rotary limit switch, 4 contacts 1380-BM492-B3/IP66 Stromag 1
LS1B Rotary limit switch, 4 contacts 1380-BM492-B3/IP66 Stromag 1
LS2 Rotary limit switch, 4 contacts 1380-BM492-B3/IP66 Stromag 1

Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LS3 Rotary limit switch, 4 contacts 1380-BM492-B3/IP66 Stromag 1

LS5 Limit Switch Z4V7H 335-11Z Schmersal 1
LS13A Limit Switch Z4V7H 335-11Z Schmersal 1

LS13B Limit Switch Z4V7H 335-11Z Schmersal 1

P100 24Vdc Lightning Protector DSD120 1S 24 Critec 1 PN: 600992
P101 24Vdc Lightning Protector DSD120 1S 24 Critec 1 PN: 600992
P200 Lightning Protector Max 15V UTB15 Critec 1 PN: 600757

P201 Lightning Protector Max 15V UTB15 Critec 1 PN: 600757
P300 Barrier for Digital Signal 9001/01-252-060-141 Stahl 1 PN: 600707


P600 Barrier for Power Supply 9004/51-206-050-001 Stahl 1 PN: 601205
P601 Barrier for Analog Signal 9001/03-199-000-101 Stahl 1 PN: 601206



PS7A Refer Hydraulic Circuit Refer Hyd Circuit 1
PS7B Refer Hydraulic Circuit Refer Hyd Circuit 1

PS8 Refer Hydraulic Circuit Refer Hyd Circuit 1

Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PT1A 4-20 mA Pressure Transducer A08-HT c/w cable STW Technic 1 PN: 600227
M12 Connector for A08-HT (10m) STW Technic 1 PN: 600229
PT1B 4-20 mA Pressure Transducer A08-HT c/w cable STW Technic 1 PN: 600227
PT1C 4-20 mA Pressure Transducer A08-HT c/w cable STW Technic 1 PN: 600227
PT1D 4-20 mA Pressure Transducer A08-HT c/w cable STW Technic 1 PN: 600227
PT2C 4-20 mA Pressure Transducer A08-HT c/w cable STW Technic 1 PN: 600227
PT2D 4-20 mA Pressure Transducer A08-HT c/w cable STW Technic 1 PN: 600227


Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PT18 4-20 mA Pressure Transducer A08-HT c/w cable STW Technic 1 PN: 600227
PT20 4-20 mA Pressure Transducer A08-HT c/w cable STW Technic 1 PN: 600227
QD1 Circuit Breaker 1 Pole 63A C60H 24980 Merlin Gerin 1

QD2A Circuit Breaker 1 Pole 2A C60H 24969 Merlin Gerin 1


QD3B Circuit Breaker 1 Pole 2A C60H 24969 Merlin Gerin 1


QD6C Circuit Breaker 1 Pole 6A C60H 24972 Merlin Gerin 1

QD8/1 Circuit Breaker 1 Pole 10A C60H 24973 Merlin Gerin 1


Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8




R1 Resistor 120 Ohm 0.5W Metal Film 163-448 RS Components 1


S1 Keylock Switch 2 Position, Flush Mounting, MA 704.121.018 EAO 1
NO Contact, Hard Silver contact, Snap action switching EAO 1
S2 Red Push Button, Yellow w/Box 2NC, Maintained Action 704.064.2 EAO 1
NC Contact, Hard Silver contact, Slow-make switching EAO 1

Emergency Stop Enclosure, Yellow EAO 1
S2/1 Red Push Button, Yellow w/Box 2NC, Maintained Action 704.064.2 EAO 1



Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S2/3 Emergency Stop Enclosure, Yellow EAO 1






S2/7 Emergency Stop 1NC XB5-AS542 Telemecanique 1 PN: 600934
S3 Push Button, Flush mounting, MA 1NO 704.042.518 EAO 1
S4 Multi-step Switch 4 steps with off K2D004QCH Telemecanique 1

S4A Multi-step Switch 4 steps with off K2D004QCH Telemecanique 1
S5 Keylock Switch 2 Position, Flush Mounting, MA 704.121.018 EAO 1
S6 Push Button, Flush mounting, MA 1NC 704.042.218 EAO 1

NC Contact, Hard Silver contact, Snap action switching EAO 1
S8 Push Button, Flush mounting, MA 1NO 704.042.018 EAO 1

S9A Wiper Controller 24VDC 2 Way WY1000-024-220 WYNN 1
S9B Wiper Controller 24VDC 1 Way WY1000-024-110 WYNN 1
S19 Push Button, Yellow w/Box 1NO 704.072.4 EAO 1

NO Contact, Hard Silver contact, Slow-make switching EAO 1
1 Way Control Station L94xW94xH81 EAO 1
S21 Key Switch 2 Position Spring Return, Right to Left, 1NO E22K53+E22B2 Cutler-Hammer 1
Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S25 Black 2 Position Selector Switch, Flush mounting,MA 1NO 704.411.018 EAO 1
SV6 Plug for Hydraulic Solenoid Valve K4L24 ID77046 Rexroth 1
SV18A Plug for Hydraulic Solenoid Valve K4L24 ID77046 Rexroth 1
SV18B Plug for Hydraulic Solenoid Valve K4L24 ID77046 Rexroth 1

SV34A Junior Timer, 2 pin (AMP) R901022127 Rexroth 1

SV34B Junior Timer, 2 pin (AMP) R901022127 Rexroth 1

SV40/2 Plug for Hydraulic Solenoid Valve K4L24 ID77046 Rexroth 1

SV45/2A Plug for Hydraulic Solenoid Valve K4L24 ID77046 Rexroth 1
SV45/2B Plug for Hydraulic Solenoid Valve K4L24 ID77046 Rexroth 1


SV46C Plug for Hydraulic Solenoid Valve K4L24 ID77046 Rexroth 1
SV46D Plug for Hydraulic Solenoid Valve K4L24 ID77046 Rexroth 1

SV50/1 Plug for Hydraulic Solenoid Valve K4L24 ID77046 Rexroth 1

Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SV54A Plug for Hydraulic Analog Valve ID77041 Rexroth 1

SV54B Plug for Hydraulic Analog Valve ID77041 Rexroth 1



SV58C Plug for Hydraulic Analog Valve ID77041 Rexroth 1

SV58D Plug for Hydraulic Analog Valve ID77041 Rexroth 1






Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SV86E Plug for Hydraulic Analog Valve ID77041 Rexroth 1
SV86F Plug for Hydraulic Analog Valve ID77041 Rexroth 1

SV86G Plug for Hydraulic Analog Valve ID77041 Rexroth 1
SV86H Plug for Hydraulic Analog Valve ID77041 Rexroth 1

SV86J Plug for Hydraulic Analog Valve ID77041 Rexroth 1
SV86K Plug for Hydraulic Analog Valve ID77041 Rexroth 1
SV86L Plug for Hydraulic Analog Valve ID77041 Rexroth 1
SV86M Plug for Hydraulic Analog Valve ID77041 Rexroth 1



SV88E Plug for Hydraulic Analog Valve ID77041 Rexroth 1
SV88F Plug for Hydraulic Analog Valve ID77041 Rexroth 1


SV137C Junior Timer, 2 pin (AMP) R901022127 Rexroth 1

SV138 Junior Timer, 2 pin (AMP) R901022127 Rexroth 1

TS1A Refer Hydraulic Circuit Refer Hyd Circuit 1

Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TS1B Refer Hydraulic Circuit Refer Hyd Circuit 1

TS3 Refer Hydraulic Circuit Refer Hyd Circuit 1
W110 Cable, M12, 4 Pole RKTS 4-288/10M Lumberg 1 PN: 600228

W110A Cable, M12, 4 Pole RKTS 4-288/10M Lumberg 1 PN: 600228

W233D 2x6mm2+E Steel wire braided cable 2x6mm2+E XLPE/EVA/GSWB/EVA Draka 1

W234 2 Core x 1.5mm2 Flexible Marine BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK Triangle Cable 1
W300 RFOU 0.6/1kV 19X 1.5/27.5mm2 P1/P8 800023 Draka 1 Braided Cable
W300A RFOU 0.6/1kV 12X 1.5/24mm2 P1/P8 800022 Draka 1 Braided Cable
W316 2x1.5mm2 SV Connector Extension Cable 0079804439 Rexroth 1



W331 C/W Encoder C/W ENCODER 1

W341 10m Proximity Switch Cable C/W PROX. SWITCH Lumberg 1
W342 10m Proximity Switch Cable C/W PROX. SWITCH Lumberg 1

W343 3 Core+E x 1.5mm2 Flexible Marine BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK Triangle Cable 1

Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8









W426A RFOU 0.6/1kV 19X 1.5/27.5mm2 P1/P8 800023 Draka 1 Braided Cable

W428 4 Core+E x 1.5mm2 Flexible Marine BVA-CARD/5C1.5BK BLACK Triangle Cable 1

Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

W441 RFOU 0.6/1kV 7X 1.5/19mm2 P1/P8 800021 Draka 1 Braided Cable

W450 10m Pressure Transmitter Cable C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER Lumberg 1








W500A DeviceNet Cable 3082A T5U Belden 1

Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
W502 DeviceNet Cable 3082A T5U Belden 1

W504B RFOU 0.6/1kV 12X 1.5/24mm2 P1/P8 800022 Draka 1 Braided Cable
W505 Cable for WYNN Wiper/Washer C/W WYNN WYNN 1
W505A Cable for WYNN Wiper/Washer C/W WYNN WYNN 1


W509 2 Core x 1.5mm2 Flexible Marine BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK Triangle Cable -



W600B RFOU 0.6/1kV 19X 1.5/27.5mm2 P1/P8 800023 Draka 1 Braided Cable



Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8



W700 2x6mm2+E Steel wire braided cable 2x6mm2+E XLPE/EVA/GSWB/EVA Draka 1

W1400A RFOU 0.6/1kV 19X 1.5/27.5mm2 P1/P8 800023 Draka 1 Braided Cable
W1400C RFOU 0.6/1kV 19X 1.5/27.5mm2 P1/P8 800023 Draka 1 Braided Cable
W1400D RFOU 0.6/1kV 19X 1.5/27.5mm2 P1/P8 800023 Draka 1 Braided Cable
W1401 C/W Encoder C/W Encoder 1

W1401D RFOU 0.6/1kV 12X 1.5/24mm2 P1/P8 800022 Draka 1 Braided Cable

W1406B RFOU 0.6/1kV 7X 1.5/19mm2 P1/P8 800021 Draka 1 Braided Cable

Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
W1406C RFOU 0.6/1kV 7X 1.5/19mm2 P1/P8 800021 Draka 1 Braided Cable

W1406D RFOU 0.6/1kV 7X 1.5/19mm2 P1/P8 800021 Draka 1 Braided Cable




W1417 10m Pressure Transmitter Cable C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER Lumberg -






Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8









Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

X3 0V 5.2 mm Screw Feed Through Modular Terminal Block - Gray UT 2.5 - Quattro Phoenix Contact 12 PN: 601340
X3 AIN 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 8 PN: 601343
X3 AIN2 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 8 PN: 601343
X3 CAB 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 6 PN: 601343
5.2 mm Screw Feed Through Modular Terminal Block - Gr-Y UTTB 2.5 - Quattro PE Phoenix Contact 1 PN: 601342
X3 CAN 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 6 PN: 601343
X3 CAN2 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 6 PN: 601343
X3 CTR End Bracket, 9.5mm CLIPFIX 35 Phoenix Contact 1

End Cover, 3047293 DUTTB 2.5 - 4 Phoenix Contact 1 PN: 601334
Terminal Strip Marker Phoenix Contact 1

5.2 mm Screw Feed Through Modular Terminal Block - Gray UT 2.5 - QUATTRO Phoenix Contact 4 PN: 601340
X3 EDI 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 12 PN: 601343
X3 EDI2 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 13 PN: 601343
X3 EDO 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 12 PN: 601343
X3 EDO2 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 6 PN: 601343
X3 ENC 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 9 PN: 601343
X3 ENC2 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 9 PN: 601343
X3 ES 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 12 PN: 601343
5.2 mm Screw Feed Through Modular Terminal Block - Gr-Y UTTB 2.5 - QUATTRO PE Phoenix Contact 1 PN: 601342
X3 ESTOP End Bracket, 9.5mm CLIPFIX 35 Phoenix Contact 2

X3 EXT 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 2 PN: 601343
X3 FIL 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 10 PN: 601343
X3 FIL2 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 3 PN: 601343
X3 IL 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 3 PN: 601343
X3 MISC 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 11 PN: 601343
Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X3 POWER 6.2 mm Screw Four Universal Terminal Block - Gray UT 4 - QUATTRO Phoenix Contact 2 PN: 601345
X3 PP 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 16 PN: 601343
5.2 mm Screw Typel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 - DIODE Phoenix Contact 1 PN: 601348
X3 RS 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 2 PN: 601343
X3 RS2 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 2 PN: 601343
X3 T1 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 4 PN: 601343
X3 T3 5.2 mm Screw Feed Through Modular Terminal Block - Gray UT 2.5 - Quattro Phoenix Contact 2 PN: 601340
X3 ULT 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 4 PN: 601343
X3A End Bracket, 9.5mm CLIPFIX 35 Phoenix Contact 2

5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 16 PN: 601343
X3B End Bracket, 9.5mm CLIPFIX 35 Phoenix Contact 2

X3C End Bracket, 9.5mm CLIPFIX 35 Phoenix Contact 2

X3SV 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 19 PN: 601343
X4 End Bracket, 9.5mm CLIPFIX 35 Phoenix Contact 21

End Cover, 3047170 D-UT 2.5 - 4 Quattro Phoenix Contact 6 PN: 601341
Junction Box 760Hx600Wx210D KEL 9406.600 Rittal 1

Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X4 CAN 2 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 2 PN: 601343
X4 DDI 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 16 PN: 601343
X4 DDO 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 18 PN: 601343
X4 K1 5.2 mm Screw Feed Through Modular Terminal Block - Gray UT 2.5 - Quattro Phoenix Contact 1 PN: 601340
X4 P 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 11 PN: 601343
X4 POWER 6.2 mm Screw Four Universal Terminal Block - Gray UT 4 - Quattro Phoenix Contact 2 PN: 601345
X4A Junction Box 400W x 600H x 210D 07-56-D1-5831 Bartec 1

End Bracket, 9.5mm CLIPFIX 35 Phoenix Contact 3
X4A FIL 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 13 PN: 601343
X4B Junction Box 400W x 600H x 210D 07-56-D1-5831 Bartec 1
End Bracket, 9.5mm CLIPFIX 35 Phoenix Contact 3

X4B FIL 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 13 PN: 601343
X4T1 5.2 mm Screw Feed Through Modular Terminal Block - Gray UT 2.5 - Quattro Phoenix Contact 4 PN: 601340
X4T2 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 2 PN: 601343
Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X5 End Cover, 3047293 DUTTB 2.5 - 4 Phoenix Contact 10 PN: 601334

X5 J1 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 2 PN: 601343
X5 MGOP 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 5 PN: 601343
X5 POWER 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 8 PN: 601343
X5 SLI 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 5 PN: 601343
X5/1 Junction Box 400W x 200H x 160D 07-56-B1-1281 Bartec 1
X5/2 0V 5.2 mm Screw Feed Through Modular Terminal Block - Gray UT 2.5 - Quattro Phoenix Contact 4 PN: 601340
X5/2 PS 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 11 PN: 601343
X5/3 Junction Box 200W x 200H x 120D 07-56-B1-0434 Bartec 1

Junction Box 760Hx600Wx210D KEL 9406.600 Rittal 1

Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X6 Terminal Strip Marker Phoenix Contact 18

X6 POWER 6.2 mm Screw Four Universal Terminal Block - Gray UT 4 - Quattro Phoenix Contact 2 PN: 601345
X10 Junction Box 200W x 200H x 120D 07-56-B1-0434 Bartec 1

X10.5 End Bracket, 9.5mm CLIPFIX 35 Phoenix Contact 3

X10.11 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 3 PN: 601343
Ex-d Box Internal W500xH350xD215 EJB-15A ADS 1

Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X11 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 6 PN: 601343
X11 LP 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 12 PN: 601343
X11.1 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 13 PN: 601343
X14/1 End Bracket, 9.5mm CLIPFIX 35 Phoenix Contact 3




X14E/1 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 2 PN: 601343
Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8


X15 PWR 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 4 PN: 601343

Junction Box 1800Hx1000Wx400D IP55 TS 8080.500 Rittal 1


X36 DIODE 5.2 mm Screw Typel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 - DIODE Phoenix Contact 7 PN: 601348
Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X36 PS 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 4 PN: 601343
X36 PWR 6.2 mm Screw Four Universal Terminal Block - Gray UT 4 - Quattro Phoenix Contact 2 PN: 601345
X36 S 5.2 mm Screw Feed Through Modular Terminal Block - Gray UT 2.5 - Quattro Phoenix Contact 5 PN: 601340
X36 SW 5.2 mm Screw Multipevel Terminal Block - Gray UTTB 2.5 Phoenix Contact 7 PN: 601343
X55 Junction Box 1800Hx1000Wx400D IP55 TS 8080.500 Rittal 1

Y1A1 TypeD MkIII WiperUnit SingleBlade 24VDC Motor WY4030-000-101 WYNN 1
Y1A2 TypeD MkIII WiperUnit SingleBlade 24VDC Motor WY4030-000-101 WYNN 1
Y1B TypeD MkIII WiperUnit SingleBlade 24VDC Motor WY4030-000-101 WYNN 1
Z46 Deutsch Connector Pin Deutsch Connector 1 PN: 600060

Deutsch Connector Pin Deutsch Connector 1 PN: 600060


Deutsch 8 Pin Plug Seal Deutsch Connector 1 PN: 600057

Deutsch 8 Pin Plug Set Deutsch Connector 1 PN: 600037
Deutsch 8 Pin Receptacle Set for Diagnostic DT-04-08PA-L012 Deutsch Connector 1 PN: 600649
Deutsch 8 pin Receptacle Wedge Lock Deutsch Connector 1 PN: 600054
Deutsch 8 pin Plug Wedge Lock Deutsch Connector 1 PN: 600053

Z46A Deutsch Connector Pin Deutsch Connector 1 PN: 600060


Deutsch 8 Pin Plug Seal Deutsch Connector 1 PN: 600057

Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Z46A Deutsch 8 Pin Plug Set Deutsch Connector 1 PN: 600037

Deutsch 8 Pin Receptacle Set for Diagnostic DT-04-08PA-L012 Deutsch Connector 1 PN: 600649
Deutsch 8 pin Receptacle Wedge Lock Deutsch Connector 1 PN: 600054

Deutsch 8 pin Plug Wedge Lock Deutsch Connector 1 PN: 600053
Z110 Standard Cable Gland Nickle Plated IP68 HSK-M Hummel 1

Z110A Standard Cable Gland Nickle Plated IP68 HSK-M Hummel 1

Z233D 501/453 Universal Cable Gland Universal Cable Gland Hawke International 1
Z300 501/453 Universal Cable Gland Universal Cable Gland Hawke International 2
Z300A 501/453 Universal Cable Gland Universal Cable Gland Hawke International 2




Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8









Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8









Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Z504B 501/453 Universal Cable Gland Universal Cable Gland Hawke International 2






Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8



Z1400C 501/453 Universal Cable Gland Universal Cable Gland Hawke International 2
Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Z1406C 501/453 Universal Cable Gland Universal Cable Gland Hawke International 2



Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8









Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Page Title
Component Page

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
CABLE CORE TERMINAL POINT A WIRE POINT B TERMINAL CABLE TYPE
W110 Black X11 LP:3 X11 LP Terminal 3 739 Main Hoist Load Cell (Port) LP1:4/1 RKTS 4-288/10M
W110 Blue X11 LP:1 P601 Output 4 733 Main Hoist Load Cell (Port) LP1:3/1 RKTS 4-288/10M
W110 Brown X11 LP:5 P600 Output 3 735 Main Hoist Load Cell (Port) LP1:1/1 RKTS 4-288/10M
W110 White X11 LP:7 P601 Output 3 736 Main Hoist Load Cell (Port) LP1:2/1 RKTS 4-288/10M
W110A Black X11 LP:15 X11 LP Terminal 15 744 Main Hoist Load Cell (Port) LP1:4/2 RKTS 4-288/10M
W110A Blue X11 LP:13 P603 Output 4 743 Main Hoist Load Cell (Port) LP1:3/2 RKTS 4-288/10M
W110A Brown X11 LP:9 P602 Output 3 741 Main Hoist Load Cell (Port) LP1:1/2 RKTS 4-288/10M
W110A White X11 LP:11 P603 Output 3 742 Main Hoist Load Cell (Port) LP1:2/2 RKTS 4-288/10M
W111 Black X11 LP:4 X11 LP Terminal 4 740 Fly Hoist Load Cell LP2:4/1 RKTS 4-288/10M
W111 Blue X11 LP:2 P701 Output 4 734 Fly Hoist Load Cell LP2:3/1 RKTS 4-288/10M
W111 Brown X11 LP:6 P700 Output 3 737 Fly Hoist Load Cell LP2:1/1 RKTS 4-288/10M
W111 White X11 LP:8 P701 Output 3 738 Fly Hoist Load Cell LP2:2/1 RKTS 4-288/10M
W111A Black X11 LP:16 X11 LP Terminal 16 748 Fly Hoist Load Cell LP2:4/2 RKTS 4-288/10M
W111A Blue X11 LP:14 P703 Output 4 747 Fly Hoist Load Cell LP2:3/2 RKTS 4-288/10M
W111A Brown X11 LP:10 P702 Output 3 745 Fly Hoist Load Cell LP2:1/2 RKTS 4-288/10M
W111A White X11 LP:12 P703 Output 3 746 Fly Hoist Load Cell LP2:2/2 RKTS 4-288/10M
W112 Black X11 LP:19 X11 LP Terminal 19 839 Main Hoist Load Cell (Stb) LP3:4/1 RKTS 4-288/10M
W112 Blue X11 LP:17 P801 Output 4 833 Main Hoist Load Cell (Stb) LP3:3/1 RKTS 4-288/10M
W112 Brown X11 LP:21 P800 Output 3 835 Main Hoist Load Cell (Stb) LP3:1/1 RKTS 4-288/10M
W112 White X11 LP:23 P801 Output 3 836 Main Hoist Load Cell (Stb) LP3:2/1 RKTS 4-288/10M
W112A Black X11 LP:24 X11 LP Terminal 24 844 Main Hoist Load Cell (Stb) LP3:4/2 RKTS 4-288/10M
W112A Blue X11 LP:22 P803 Output 4 843 Main Hoist Load Cell (Stb) LP3:3/2 RKTS 4-288/10M
W112A Brown X11 LP:18 P802 Output 3 841 Main Hoist Load Cell (Stb) LP3:1/2 RKTS 4-288/10M
W112A White X11 LP:20 P803 Output 3 842 Main Hoist Load Cell (Stb) LP3:2/2 RKTS 4-288/10M
W233D 1 X13DC:7 X13 UPS JB 450 X36 PWR Terminal 1 X36 PWR:1 2x6mm2+E XLPE/EVA/GSWB/EVA
W233D 2 X13DC:8 X13 UPS JB 200 X36 PWR Terminal 2 X36 PWR:2 2x6mm2+E XLPE/EVA/GSWB/EVA
W300 1 X3 EDI2:16 Power 457 X3A Terminal 24 X3A:24 800023
W300 2 X3 EDI2:15 ESX2 Dig In Pin 36 1158 X3A Terminal 23 X3A:23 800023
W300 3 X3 EDI:3 ESX Digital In Pin 15 756 X3A Terminal 33 X3A:33 800023
W300 4 X3 EDI:4 Power 457 X3A Terminal 34 X3A:34 800023

Favelle Favco Cranes Pty. Ltd. (A.B.N. 29 067 562 449)
28 Yarrunga Street, Prestons, N.S.W. 2170
P.O. Box 456, Liverpool BC, N.S.W. 1871 Australia
Project Page Title Drawing Number

Jack Up Barge Cable Termination Schedule A3-6100.590

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
FAVCO CRANES (AUSTRALIA)
PTY. LTD. AND MUST NOT BE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
Eng Draft 118-331-M-MR-001.09 Serial No. Model Sheet Revision
C
FORM: 04.24.01 Checked Checked 1814 PC1000 87 /111 H
W300 5 X3 EDI2:22 Power 457 X3A Terminal 22 X3A:22 800023

W300 6 X3 EDI2:21 ESX2 Dig In Pin 39 1161 X3A Terminal 21 X3A:21 800023
W300 7 X3 IL:2 X3 IL Terminal 2 661 X3A IL Terminal 1 X3A:1 800023

W300 8 X3A:9 X3A Terminal 9 200 X3A Terminal 5 X3A:5 800023
W300 9 663 X3A Terminal 3 X3A:3 800023

W300 10 662 X3A Terminal 2 X3A:2 800023
W300 12 665 X3A Terminal 6 X3A:6 800023
W300 13 X3A:9 X3A Terminal 9 200 X3A Terminal 7 X3A:7 800023
W300 17 667 X3A Terminal 11 X3A:11 800023
W300 18 X3 IL:1 X3 IL Terminal 1 664 X3A Terminal12 X3A:12 800023
W300 19 X3 FIL:12 X3 FIL Terminal 12 654 X3A Terminal 15 X3A:15 800023
W300A 1 X3A:14 X3A Terminal 14 656 X3 FIL Terminal 17 X3 FIL:17 800022

W300A 2 X3A:13 X3A Terminal 13 656 X3 FIL Terminal 10 X3 FIL:10 800022
W300A 3 X3 EDO4:6 ESX 2 BBA Dig Out Pin 22 1265 X3A Terminal 30 X3A:30 800022
W300A 4 X3A:29 X3A Terminal 29 200 Ground X3 EDO4:5 800022
W300A 8 X3 EDO2:6 ESX BBA Digital Out Pin 22 865 X3A Terminal 28 X3A:28 800022
W300A 10 X3 EDO2:12 ESX BBA Digital Out Pin 44 869 X3A Terminal 26 X3A:26 800022
W300A 9 X3 EDO2:5 Ground 200 X3A Terminal 27 X3A:27 800022
W300A 11 X3 EDO2:11 Ground 200 X3A Terminal 25 X3A:25 800022
W316 Black X3 EDO:5 Ground 200 Main Hoist Brake SV (SB) SV45A:- 0079804439
W316 Red X3 EDO:6 ESX PWM Out Pin 24 853 Main Hoist Brake SV (SB) SV45A:+ 0079804439
W317 Black X3 EDO:1 Ground 200 Fly Hoist Brake SV SV40:- 0079804439
W317 Red X3 EDO:2 ESX PWM Out Pin 2 851 Fly Hoist Brake SV SV40:+ 0079804439
W318 Black X3 EDO:7 Ground 200 Luff Hoist Brake SV SV6:- 0079804439
W318 Red X3 EDO:8 ESX PWM Out Pin 25 854 Luff Hoist Brake SV SV6:+ 0079804439
W319 Black X3 EDO:3 Ground 200 Slew Brake SV SV50:- 0079804439
W319 Red X5/3:10 X5/3 Terminal 10 852 Slew Brake SV SV50:+ 0079804439
W320 Black X3 PP:33 X3 PP Terminal 33 200 Tugger On/Off Switch SV22:- 0079804439
W320 Red X3 PP:34 X3 PP Terminal 34 2260 Tugger On/Off Switch SV22:+ 0079804439
W324 Black X3 EDO3:7 Ground 200 Main Hoist Port Brake Solenoid Valve SV45B:- 0079804439



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
W324 Red X3 EDO3:8 ESX 2 PWM Out Pin 25 1254 Main Hoist Port Brake Solenoid Valve SV45B:+ 0079804439
W325 Black 14/4:35 14/4 Terminal 35 Luff Down Overspeed Protection Control Valve SV138:- 0079804439
W325 Black X3 EDO4:7 Ground 200 Stb Hoist Down Overspeed Protection Control Valve SV137B:- 0079804439
W325 Red 14/4:36 14/4 Terminal 36 Luff Down Overspeed Protection Control Valve SV138:+ 0079804439
W326 black X3 EDO4:1 Ground 200 Port Hoist Down Overspeed Protection Control Valve SV137A:- 0079804439
W326 red X3 EDO4:2 ESX 2 BBA Dig Out Pin 20 1263 Port Hoist Down Overspeed Protection Control Valve SV137A:+ 0079804439
W327 Red X3 EDO4:8 ESX 2 BBA Dig Out Pin 42 1266 Stb Hoist Down Overspeed Protection Control Valve SV137B:+ 0079804439
W328 Black X3 EDO4:3 Ground 200 Fly Hoist Down Overspeed Protection Control Valve SV137C:- 0079804439
W328 Red X3 EDO4:4 ESX 2 BBA Dig Out Pin 21 1264 Fly Hoist Down Overspeed Protection Control Valve SV137C:+ 0079804439
W331 Green X3 ENC2:4 ESX 2 Baby In Pin 10 1053 Slew Encoder B7:Green C/W ENCODER
W331 Grey 200 X3 ENC2 Terminal 1 X3 ENC2:1 C/W ENCODER
W331 Pink X3 ENC2:3 ESX 2 Baby In Pin 52 1052 Slew Encoder B7:Pink C/W ENCODER
W331 White X3 ENC2:6 X3 ENC2 Terminal 6 1054 Slew Encoder B7:White C/W ENCODER
W331 Red X3 ENC2:2 X3 ENC2 Terminal 2 1051 Slew Encoder B7:+ C/W ENCODER
W336 Blue X3A:23 X3A Terminal 23 1158 Hydraulic Oil Temp HIGH Switch TS3:C BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W336 Brown X3A:24 X3A Terminal 24 457 Hydraulic Oil Temp HIGH Switch TS3:NO BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W337 Blue X3A:33 X3A Terminal 33 756 Hyd Oil Tank Level LOW Switch LLS1/1:NC BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W337 Brown X3A:34 X3A Terminal 34 457 Hyd Oil Tank Level LOW Switch LLS1/1:C BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W341 Black X3A:8 X3A Terminal 8 666 Cooling Pump Suction Isolation I/L B31/2:4 C/W PROX. SWITCH
W341 White X3A:6 X3A Terminal 6 665 Cooling Pump Suction Isolation I/L B31/2:2 C/W PROX. SWITCH
W341 Blue X3A:7 X3A Terminal 7 200 Cooling Pump Suction Isolation I/L B31/2:3 C/W PROX. SWITCH
W341 Brown X3A:4 X3A Terminal 4 662 Cooling Pump Suction Isolation I/L B31/2:1 C/W PROX. SWITCH
W342 Black X3A:12 X3A Terminal12 664 Cooling Pump Suction 2 Isolation I/L B31/3:4 C/W PROX. SWITCH
W342 White X3A:11 X3A Terminal 11 667 Cooling Pump Suction 2 Isolation I/L B31/3:2 C/W PROX. SWITCH
W342 Blue X3A:9 X3A Terminal 9 664 Cooling Pump Suction 2 Isolation I/L B31/3:3 C/W PROX. SWITCH
W342 Brown X3A:10 X3A Terminal 10 666 Cooling Pump Suction 2 Isolation I/L B31/3:1 C/W PROX. SWITCH
W343 Grey X3 FIL2:4 Ground 200 X3A Terminal 16 X3A:16 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W343 black X3 FIL2:6 X3 FIL2 Terminal 6 X3A Terminal 17 X3A:17 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W343 brown X3 FIL2:5 X3 FIL2 Terminal 5 X3A Terminal 18 X3A:18 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W400A 2 X4A FIL:24 X4A FIL Terminal 24 200 X4 FIL:20 800022



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
W400A 5 X3 FIL2:5 X3 FIL2 Terminal 5 X4 FIL Terminal 7 X4 FIL:7 800022

W400A 9 X3 PP:30 X3 PP Terminal 30 1851 ESX4 Digital In 34 X4 DDI:1 800022
W400A 10 X3 EXT:4 X3 EXT Terminal 4 455 X4 K1:1 800022

W401 Blue X4B:31 X4B Terminal 31 200 Port Main Hoist Up PV (SB) SV54A:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W401 Brown X4B:32 X4B Terminal 32 1651 Port Main Hoist Up PV (SB) SV54A:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W402 Blue X4B:33 X4B Terminal 33 200 Port Main Hoist Down PV (SB) SV55A:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W402 Brown X4B:34 X4B Terminal 34 1652 Port Main Hoist Down PV (SB) SV55A:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W403 Blue X4B:17 X4B Terminal 17 200 Starboard Main Hoist Up PV (SB) SV56A:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W403 Brown X4B:18 X4B Terminal 18 1659 Starboard Main Hoist Up PV (SB) SV56A:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W404 Blue X4B:19 X4B Terminal 19 200 Starboard Main Hoist Down PV (SB) SV57A:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W404 Brown X4B:20 X4B Terminal 20 1660 Starboard Main Hoist Down PV (SB) SV57A:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W405 Black X4 DDO:33 Ground Main Hoist Select (SB) SV43A:- 0079804439
W405 Red X4B:14 X4B Terminal 14 Main Hoist Select (SB) SV43A:+ 0079804439
W406 Black X4B Terminal 15 X4B:15 0079804439
W406 Red X4B:16 X4B Terminal 16 Fly Hoist Select (SB) SV42A:+ 0079804439
W407 Blue X4B:5 X4B Terminal 5 200 Luff Hoist Up PV (SB1) SV59A:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W407 Brown X4B:6 X4B Terminal 6 1653 Luff Hoist Up PV (SB1) SV59A:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W408 Blue X4B:7 X4B Terminal 7 200 Luff Hoist Down PV (SB1) SV58A:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W408 Brown X4B:8 X4B Terminal 8 1654 Luff Hoist Down PV (SB1) SV58A:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W409 Blue X4B:21 X4B Terminal 21 200 Luff Hoist Up PV2 (SB2) SV59C:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W409 Brown X4B:22 X4B Terminal 22 1661 Luff Hoist Up PV2 (SB2) SV59C:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W410 Blue X4B:23 X4B Terminal 23 200 Luff Hoist Down PV2 (SB2) SV58C:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W410 Brown X4B:24 X4B Terminal 24 1662 Luff Hoist Down PV2 (SB2) SV58C:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W411 Blue X4B:9 X4B Terminal 9 200 Slew Left PV (SB) SV61A:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W411 Brown X4B:10 X4B Terminal 10 1655 Slew Left PV (SB) SV61A:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W412 Blue X4B:11 X4B Terminal 11 200 Slew Right PV (SB) SV62A:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W412 Brown X4B:12 X4B Terminal 12 1656 Slew Right PV (SB) SV62A:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W413 Black X4B FIL:1 X4B FIL Terminal 1 1751 Hoist Boost Filter (SB 1) DPS3A:2 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W413 Grey X4B FIL:16 X4B FIL Terminal 16 200 Hoist Boost Filter (SB 1) DPS3A:C BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W413 Brown X4B FIL:2 X4B FIL Terminal 2 1454 Hoist Boost Filter (SB 1) DPS3A:1 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
W414 Black X4B FIL:5 X4B FIL Terminal 5 1752 Hoist Boost Filter (SB 2) DPS3C:2 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W414 Grey X4B FIL:18 X4B FIL Terminal 18 200 Hoist Boost Filter (SB 2) DPS3C:C BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W414 Brown X4B FIL:1 X4B FIL Terminal 1 1751 Hoist Boost Filter (SB 2) DPS3C:1 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W415 Black X4B FIL:21 X4B FIL Terminal 21 1755 Luff/Slew Boost Filter (SB 1) DPS4A:2 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W415 Grey X4B FIL:15 X4B FIL Terminal 15 200 Luff/Slew Boost Filter (SB 1) DPS4A:C BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W415 Brown X4B FIL:14 X4B FIL Terminal 14 1754 Luff/Slew Boost Filter (SB 1) DPS4A:1 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W416 Black X4B FIL:17 X4B FIL Terminal 17 1756 Luff/Slew Boost Filter (SB 2) DPS4C:2 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W416 Grey X4B FIL:16 X4B FIL Terminal 16 200 Luff/Slew Boost Filter (SB 2) DPS4C:C BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W416 Brown X4B FIL:19 X4B FIL Terminal 19 1755A Luff/Slew Boost Filter (SB 2) DPS4C:1 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W417 Black X3A:17 X3A Terminal 17 1754 Cooling Filter (Starboard) DPS2A:2 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W417 Grey X3A:16 X3A Terminal 16 200 Cooling Filter (Starboard) DPS2A:C BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W417 Brown X3A:18 X3A Terminal 18 1753 Cooling Filter (Starboard) DPS2A:1 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W418 Black X4B FIL:7 X4B FIL Terminal 7 1753 Gearbox Filter (Starboard) DPS1A:2 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W418 Grey X4B FIL:9 X4B FIL Terminal 9 200 Gearbox Filter (Starboard) DPS1A:C BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W418 Brown X4B FIL:5 X4B FIL Terminal 5 1752 Gearbox Filter (Starboard) DPS1A:1 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W419 Blue X4B:29 X4B Terminal 29 1853 Temp. SW (Starboard) TS1A:C BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W419 Brown X4B:30 X4B Terminal 30 1454 Temp. SW (Starboard) TS1A:NO BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W420 Black X4B FIL:6 X4B FIL Terminal 6 660 Tugger Winch Filter (Starboard) DPS12:2 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W420 Grey X4B FIL:24 X4B FIL Terminal 24 200 Tugger Winch Filter (Starboard) DPS12:C BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W420 Brown X4B FIL:4 X4B FIL Terminal 4 658 Tugger Winch Filter (Starboard) DPS12:1 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W421 Black X4B:25 X4B Terminal 25 200 Retarding Pump Full Disp. PV (Port) SV93A:2 0079804439
W421 Red X4B:26 X4B Terminal 26 1259 Retarding Pump Full Disp. PV (Port) SV93A:1 0079804439
W422 Red X3A:30 X3A Terminal 30 1262 Retarder Pump ON Solenoid Valve (Port) SV92A:+ 0079804439
W422 black X3A:29 X3A Terminal 29 200 Retarder Pump ON Solenoid Valve (Port) SV92A:- 0079804439
W423 Black X3A:31 X3A Terminal 31 200 Cooling Pump Solenoid Valve (Port) SV34A:- 0079804439
W423 Red X3A:32 X3A Terminal 32 1262 Cooling Pump Solenoid Valve (Port) SV34A:+ 0079804439
W424 Black X4B:40 X4B Terminal 40 200 Free Slew/MGOP (Starboard) SV47A:- 0079804439
W424 Red X4B:39 X4B Terminal 39 3156 Free Slew/MGOP (Starboard) SV47A:+ 0079804439
W425 Black X4B:36 X4B Terminal 36 200 Starboard M.Hoist MGOP (Port) SV46B:- 0079804439
W425 Red X4B:35 X4B Terminal 35 3156 Starboard M.Hoist MGOP (Port) SV46B:+ 0079804439



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
W426 4 X4:18 X4 Terminal 18 1651 X4B Terminal 32 X4B:32 800023

W426 5 X4 DDO:1 Ground 200 X4B Terminal 31 X4B:31 800023



W426 16 X4 DDO:34 ESX 4 Digital Out Pin 44 1667 X4B Terminal 14 X4B:14 800023
W426 18 X4 DDO:36 ESX 4 Digital Out Pin 22 1668 X4B Terminal 16 X4B:16 800023
W426 19 X4 DDO:35 Ground X4B Terminal 15 X4B:15 800023
W426A 1 X4:34 X4 Terminal 34 1659 X4B Terminal 18 X4B:18 800023
W426A 2 X4 DDO:17 Ground 200 X4B Terminal 17 X4B:17 800023


W426A 9 X4B FIL:2 X4B FIL Terminal 2 1454 Power X4 DDI:6 800023
W426A 10 X4B FIL:17 X4B FIL Terminal 17 1756 ESX4 Digital In 35 X4 DDI:5 800023
W426A 11 X4B FIL:16 X4B FIL Terminal 16 200 Ground X4 0V:11 800023
W426A 15 X4 FIL:7 X4 FIL Terminal 7 1753 X4B FIL Terminal 7 X4B FIL:7 800023
W426A 16 X4 DDI:8 Power 1454 X4B Terminal 30 X4B:30 800023



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
W426A 17 X4 DDI:7 ESX4 Digital In 13 1853 X4B Terminal 29 X4B:29 800023

W427 Black X4B:27 X4B Terminal 27 200 Slew Normal Torque SV (Stb) SV18A:- 0079804439
W427 Red X4B:28 X4B Terminal 28 2259 Slew Normal Torque SV (Stb) SV18A:+ 0079804439
W428 Black X4B FIL:19 X4B FIL Terminal 19 1755A Luff/Slew Boost Filter (SB 2) DPS6A:2 BVA-CARD/5C1.5BK BLACK
W428 Grey X4B FIL:20 X4B FIL Terminal 20 200 Luff/Slew Boost Filter (SB 2) DPS6A:C BVA-CARD/5C1.5BK BLACK
W428 Brown X4B FIL:21 X4B FIL Terminal 21 1755 Luff/Slew Boost Filter (SB 2) DPS6A:1 BVA-CARD/5C1.5BK BLACK
W429 Black X3A:25 X3A Terminal 25 200 Main Hoist Select (Port) SV43B:- 0079804439
W429 Red X3A:26 X3A Terminal 26 869 Main Hoist Select (Port) SV43B:+ 0079804439
W430 Black X3A:27 X3A Terminal 27 200 Fly Hoist Select (Port) SV42B:- 0079804439
W430 Red X3A:28 X3A Terminal 28 865 Fly Hoist Select (Port) SV42B:+ 0079804439
W431 Black X4B:38 X4B Terminal 38 200 Starboard M.Hoist MGOP (SB) SV46A:- 0079804439
W431 Red X4B:37 X4B Terminal 37 3156 Starboard M.Hoist MGOP (SB) SV46A:+ 0079804439
W440 Blue X4 DDO:25 Ground 200 Luff Ratchet Release Solenoid Valve SV89:- BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W440 Brown X4 DDO:26 ESX 4 Digital Out Pin 42 1663 Luff Ratchet Release Solenoid Valve SV89:+ BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W441 1 X4A:33 X4A Terminal 33 1359 X4B Terminal 1 X4B:1 800021
W441 2 X4A:34 X4A Terminal 34 1360 X4B Terminal 2 X4B:2 800021
W448 1 X36:19 X36 Terminal 19 2259 X4A Terminal 30 X4A:30 800021

W448 2 X36:13 X36 Terminal 13 200 X4A Terminal 29 X4A:29 800021
W448 3 X36 S:2 Power 3156 X4A Terminal 41 X4A:41 800021
W448 4 X36 0V:4 Ground 200 X4A Terminal 42 X4A:42 800021

W450 Blue X4A:35 X4A Terminal 35 566 Boost Make-up Accum N2 Pressure Healty PT PT20:4 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W450 Brown X4A:36 X4A Terminal 36 550 Boost Make-up Accum N2 Pressure Healty PT PT20:1 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W451 Black X4A:15 X4A Terminal 15 200 Retarding Pump Full Disp. PV (Starboard) SV93B:2 0079804439
W451 Red X4A:16 X4A Terminal 16 1265 Retarding Pump Full Disp. PV (Starboard) SV93B:1 0079804439
W452 Black X4A:17 X4A Terminal 17 200 Retarder Pump ON Solenoid Valve (Stb) SV92B:- 0079804439
W452 Red X4A:18 X4A Terminal 18 1268 Retarder Pump ON Solenoid Valve (Stb) SV92B:+ 0079804439
W453 Black X4A:19 X4A Terminal 19 200 Cooling Pump Solenoid Valve (Stb) SV34B:- 0079804439
W453 Red X4A:20 X4A Terminal 20 1268 Cooling Pump Solenoid Valve (Stb) SV34B:+ 0079804439
W454 Blue X4A:3 X4A Terminal 3 200 SB Main Hoist Up PV (Port) SV56B:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W454 Brown X4A:4 X4A Terminal 4 855 SB Main Hoist Up PV (Port) SV56B:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
W455 Blue X4A:5 200 SB Main Hoist Down PV (Port) SV57B:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W455 Brown X4A:6 X4A Terminal 6 856 SB Main Hoist Down PV (Port) SV57B:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W458 Blue X4A:7 200 Luff In PV (Port1) SV59B:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK

W458 Brown X4A:8 X4A Terminal 8 862 Luff In PV (Port1) SV59B:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W459 Blue X4A:9 200 Luff Out PV (Port1) SV58B:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W459 Brown X4A:10 X4A Terminal 10 859 Luff Out PV (Port1) SV58B:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W460 Blue X4A:11 200 Slew Left PV (Port) SV61B:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W460 Brown X4A:12 X4A Terminal 12 860 Slew Left PV (Port) SV61B:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W461 Blue X4A:13 200 Slew Right PV (Port) SV62B:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W461 Brown X4A:14 X4A Terminal 14 861 Slew Right PV (Port) SV62B:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W462 Blue X4A:21 X4A Terminal 21 200 Port Main Hoist Up PV (Port) SV54B:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W462 Brown X4A:22 X4A Terminal 22 1253 Port Main Hoist Up PV (Port) SV54B:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W463 Blue X4A:23 X4A Terminal 23 200 Port Main Hoist Down PV (Port) SV55B:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W463 Brown X4A:24 X4A Terminal 24 1251 Port Main Hoist Down PV (Port) SV55B:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W464 Blue X4A:25 X4A Terminal 25 200 Luff Hoist In PV (Port2) SV59D:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W464 Brown X4A:26 X4A Terminal 26 1260 Luff Hoist In PV (Port2) SV59D:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W465 Blue X4A:27 X4A Terminal 27 200 Luff Hoist Out PV (Port2) SV58D:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W465 Brown X4A:28 X4A Terminal 28 1261 Luff Hoist Out PV (Port2) SV58D:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W466 Black X4A FIL:17 X4A FIL Terminal 17 653 Gearbox Filter (Port) DPS1B:2 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W466 Blue X4A FIL:24 X4A FIL Terminal 24 200 Gearbox Filter (Port) DPS1B:C BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W466 Brown X4A FIL:16 X4A FIL Terminal 16 652 Gearbox Filter (Port) DPS1B:1 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W467 Black X3A:14 X3A Terminal 14 656 Cooling Filter (Port) DPS2B:2 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W467 Grey X3A:13 X3A Terminal 13 200 Cooling Filter (Port) DPS2B:C BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W467 Brown X3A:15 X3A Terminal 15 654 Cooling Filter (Port) DPS2B:1 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W468 Black X4A FIL:8 X4A FIL Terminal 8 654 Luff/Slew Boost Filter (Port 2) DPS4D:2 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W468 Blue X4A FIL:22 X4A FIL Terminal 22 654 Luff/Slew Boost Filter (Port 2) DPS4D:C BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W468 Brown X4A FIL:7 X4A FIL Terminal 7 655A Luff/Slew Boost Filter (Port 2) DPS4D:1 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W469 Black X4A FIL:18 X4A FIL Terminal 18 655 Luff/Slew Boost Filter (Port 1) DPS4B:2 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W469 Blue X4A FIL:24 X4A FIL Terminal 24 200 Luff/Slew Boost Filter (Port 1) DPS4B:C BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W469 Brown X4A FIL:17 X4A FIL Terminal 17 653 Luff/Slew Boost Filter (Port 1) DPS4B:1 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
W470 Black X4A FIL:14 X4A FIL Terminal 14 652 Hoist Boost Filter (Port 2) DPS3D:2 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W470 Blue X4A FIL:22 X4A FIL Terminal 22 200 Hoist Boost Filter (Port 2) DPS3D:C BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W470 Brown X4A FIL:13 X4A FIL Terminal 13 651 Hoist Boost Filter (Port 2) DPS3D:1 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W471 Black X4A FIL:11 X4A FIL Terminal 11 651 Hoist Boost Filter (Port 1) DPS3B:2 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W471 Blue X4A FIL:20 X4A FIL Terminal 20 200 Hoist Boost Filter (Port 1) DPS3B:C BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W471 Brown X4A FIL:10 X4A FIL Terminal 10 457 Hoist Boost Filter (Port 1) DPS3B:1 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W472 Black X4A FIL:2 X4A FIL Terminal 2 658 Tugger Winch Filter (Port) DPS11:2 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W472 Blue X4A FIL:26 X4A FIL Terminal 26 200 Tugger Winch Filter (Port) DPS11:C BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W472 Brown X4A FIL:12 X4A FIL Terminal 12 657 Tugger Winch Filter (Port) DPS11:1 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W473 Blue X4A:1 764 Gearbox Oil Temp HIGH Switch (Port) TS1B:C BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W473 Brown X4A:2 457 Gearbox Oil Temp HIGH Switch (Port) TS1B:NO BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W474 Black X4A FIL:5 X4A FIL Terminal 5 655A Luff/Slew Boost Filter (Port 2) DPS6B:2 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W474 Blue X4A FIL:26 X4A FIL Terminal 26 200 Luff/Slew Boost Filter (Port 2) DPS6B:C BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W474 Brown X4A FIL:4 X4A FIL Terminal 4 655 Luff/Slew Boost Filter (Port 2) DPS6B:1 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W500 1 H1:1 Horn 959 X3 CAB Terminal 3 X3 CAB:3 800022
W500 2 X5J5:22 X5J5 Terminal 22 1152 X3 PP:6 800022
W500 3 X5J5:25 X5J5 Terminal 25 1369 Powerpack Start Control Panel X3B:1 800022
W500 4 X3 ES:3 X3 ES Terminal 3 1364 X5J5 Terminal 4 X5J5:4 800022
W500 5 X3 ES:1 X3 ES Terminal 1 1363 X5J5 Terminal 2 X5J5:2 800022
W500 6 X5J5:29 X5J5 Terminal 29 1365 Powerpack Start Control Panel X3B:29 800022
W500 7 X5 POWER:9 X5 POWER Terminal 9 1370 Powerpack Start Control Panel X3 PP:2 800022
W500 8 X5 SLI:6 X5 SLI Terminal 6 455 X3 EXT Terminal 4 X3 EXT:4 800022
W500 9 X5/3:10 X5/3 Terminal 10 852 X5/3 Terminal 8 X5/3:8 800022
W500 10 X3 0V:23 Ground 200 X5/3 Terminal 7 X5/3:7 800022
W500 11 X3 MISC:8 X3 MISC Terminal 8 1366 X5J5 Terminal 27 X5J5:27 800022

W500 12 X5T2:7 456 X5/2 PS:2 800022
W500A Black X3 CAB:1 X3 CAB Terminal 1 200 X5 POWER:1 3082A T5U
W500A Blue X5 CAN:9 CAN (-) Blue 2256 X3 CAB:9 3082A T5U
W500A White X5 CAN:10 CAN (+) White 2257 X3 CAB:10 3082A T5U
W500A Red X5 POWER:4 456 X3 CAB Terminal 4 X3 CAB:4 3082A T5U



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
W501 Blue X5:21 Horn H1:3 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK

W502 Black J1:1 200 Ground X5J1:3 3082A T5U
W502 Blue J1:4 2256 CAN (-) Blue X5J1:1 3082A T5U
W502 Red J1:2 2355 Power X5J1:4 3082A T5U
W502 White J1:3 2257 CAN (+) White X5J1:2 3082A T5U
W503 Black J2:1 200 Ground X5J2:3 3082A T5U
W503 Blue J2:4 2256 CAN (-) Blue X5J2:1 3082A T5U
W503 Red J2:2 2360 Power X5J2:4 3082A T5U
W503 White J2:3 2257 CAN (+) White X5J2:2 3082A T5U
W504 1 S6:1 Stop Switch 1366 X5J5 Terminal 27 X5J5:27 800022
W504 2 S1 Ignition Key Switch 1370 X5J5 Terminal 21 X5J5:21 800022
W504 3 S4:2 4 Pos. Switch with OFF 1369 X5J5 Terminal 25 X5J5:25 800022
W504 6 X5J5:22 X5J5 Terminal 22 1152 Start Switch S3 800022
W504 7 X5J5:2 X5J5 Terminal 2 1363 Cabin Emer Stop Button S2:1 800022
W504 8 X5J5:4 X5J5 Terminal 4 1364 Cabin Emer Stop Button S2:3 800022
W504 9 S2:2 Cabin Emer Stop Button 1365 X5J5 Terminal 29 X5J5:29 800022
W504 10 X5 POWER:5 2262 X36 Terminal 5 X36:5
W504 11 X5J5:17 Power 2451 Wiper and Washer Unit S9A:Wi+ 800022
W504A 1 X5J5:30 X5J5 Terminal 30 2258 Horn PB S8:1 800022
W504A 3 X5J5:10 X5J5 Terminal 10 2258 Slew Normal Torque SW S39:NO 800022
W504A 7 X5J5:14 X5J5 Terminal 14 2258 Main/Fly Hoist Select SW S25:NO 800022
W504A 2 S8:2 Horn PB 959 X5J5:18 800022
W504A 4 S39:NO Slew Normal Torque SW 2259 X5J5 Terminal 6 X5J5:6 800022
W504A 8 S25:NO Main/Fly Hoist Select SW 2261 X5J5 Terminal 13 X5J5:13 800022
W504A 5 X5J5:12 X5J5 Terminal 12 Tugger Winch SW S81:NO 800022
W504A 6 S81:NO Tugger Winch SW 2260 X5J5:9 800022
W504A 10 S4A:8 4 Pos. Switch with OFF X5J5 Terminal 19 X5J5:19 800022
W504A 11 X5J5:23 Power 2451 Wiper and Washer Unit S9B:V+ 800022



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
W504B 1 X5/2 PS:5 X5/2 PS Terminal 5 2555 GREEN H1A:1 800022

W504B 3 X5/2 PS:7 X5/2 PS Terminal 7 2556 GREEN H1B:1 800022
W504B 5 X5/2 PS:9 X5/2 PS Terminal 9 2557 GREEN H3:1 800022


W504B 2 H4:2 GREEN 200 Ground X5/2 0V:1 800022
W505 1 S9A:M+ Wiper and Washer Unit 2454 Wiper Motor Y1A1:+ C/W WYNN
W505 2 S9A:M- Wiper and Washer Unit 2453 Wiper Motor Y1A1:- C/W WYNN
W505 Blue2 S9A:P0V Wiper and Washer Unit 2457 Wiper Motor Y1A1:0V C/W WYNN
W505 White1 S9A:P+ Wiper and Washer Unit 2456 Wiper Motor Y1A1:+V C/W WYNN
W505 White3 S9A:PS Wiper and Washer Unit 2455 Wiper Motor Y1A1:S C/W WYNN
W505A 1 S9A:Wo+ Wiper and Washer Unit 2458 Wash Motor Y2A1:+ C/W WYNN
W505A 2 S9A:Wo- Wiper and Washer Unit 2459 Wash Motor Y2A1:- C/W WYNN
W506 1 S9A:M+ Wiper and Washer Unit 2461 Wiper Motor Y1A2:+ C/W WYNN
W506 2 S9A:M- Wiper and Washer Unit 2460 Wiper Motor Y1A2:- C/W WYNN
W506 Blue2 S9A:P0V Wiper and Washer Unit 2464 Wiper Motor Y1A2:0V C/W WYNN
W506 White1 S9A:P+ Wiper and Washer Unit 2463 Wiper Motor Y1A2:+V C/W WYNN
W506 White3 S9A:PS Wiper and Washer Unit 2462 Wiper Motor Y1A2:S C/W WYNN
W506A 1 S9A:Wo+ Wiper and Washer Unit 2465 Wash Motor Y2A2:+ C/W WYNN
W506A 2 S9A:Wo- Wiper and Washer Unit 2466 Wash Motor Y2A2:- C/W WYNN
W507 1 S9B:M+ Wiper and Washer Unit 2468 Wiper Motor Y1B:+ C/W WYNN
W507 2 S9B:M- Wiper and Washer Unit 2467 Wiper Motor Y1B:- C/W WYNN
W507 Blue2 S9B:P0V Wiper and Washer Unit 2471 Wiper Motor Y1B:0V C/W WYNN
W507 White1 S9B:P+ Wiper and Washer Unit 2470 Wiper Motor Y1B:+V C/W WYNN
W507 White3 S9B:PS Wiper and Washer Unit 2469 Wiper Motor Y1B:S C/W WYNN
W507A 1 S9B:Wo+ Wiper and Washer Unit 2472 Wash Motor Y2B:+ C/W WYNN
W507A 2 S9B:Wo- Wiper and Washer Unit 2473 Wash Motor Y2B:- C/W WYNN
W508 Blue X4A:29 X4A Terminal 29 200 Slew Normal Torque SV (Port) SV18B:- BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W508 Brown X4A:30 X4A Terminal 30 2259 Slew Normal Torque SV (Port) SV18B:+ BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
W509 Black X15 DDI:27 ESX 15 Digital In Pin 18 X36:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W509 Brown X15 DDI:28 Power X36:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W510 Black J4:3 Display 2255 DC-DC Converter G4:OUT - 3082A T5U
W510 Red J4:2 Display 2254 DC-DC Converter G4:OUT + 3082A T5U
W510 Blue J4:4 Display 2256 CAN (-) Blue X5J4:1 3082A T5U
W510 White J4:6 Display 2257 CAN (+) White X5J4:2 3082A T5U
W511 Black X3 CAB:6 X3 CAB Terminal 6 454 X5 POWER:6 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W511 Brown X3 CAB:2 X3 CAB Terminal 2 454 X5 POWER:2 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W511 Grey X3 CAB:8 X3 CAB Terminal 8 454 X5/2 PS Terminal 21 X5/2 PS:21 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W512 1 X5J5:6 X5J5 Terminal 6 2259 X36 Terminal 19 X36:19 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W512 2 X5 0V:6 Ground 200 X36 Terminal 14 X36:14 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W513 Blue X5/2 PS:7 X5/2 PS Terminal 7 2556 Hoist Brake PS (Starboard) PS7A:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W513 Brown X5/2 PS:8 Power 456 Hoist Brake PS (Starboard) PS7A:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W514 Blue X5/2 PS:5 X5/2 PS Terminal 5 2555 Hoist Brake PS (Port) PS7B:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W514 Brown X5/2 PS:6 Power 456 Hoist Brake PS (Port) PS7B:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W515 Blue X5/2 PS:9 X5/2 PS Terminal 9 2557 Fly Brake PS PS12:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W515 Brown X5/2 PS:10 Power 456 Fly Brake PS PS12:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W516 Blue X5/2 PS:11 X5/2 PS Terminal 11 2558 Luff Brake PS PS8:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W516 Brown X5/2 PS:12 Power 456 Luff Brake PS PS8:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W517 Blue X5/2 PS:13 X5/2 PS Terminal 13 2559 Slew Brake PS PS27:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W517 Brown X5/2 PS:14 Power 456 Slew Brake PS PS27:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W600A Blue X4 CAN:5 CAN (-) Blue 457 X6 CAN:1 3082A T5U
W600A White X4 CAN:6 CAN (+) White 458 X6 CAN:2 3082A T5U
W600B 1 X4 K1:3 455 X6 K1:1 800023
W600B 2 X6 DDI:13 ESX6 Digital In Pin 37 X4 Terminal 53 X4:53 800023

W600B 3 X6 ENC:18 X4:46 800023
W600B 4 X6 ENC:16 X4:47 800023
W600B 5 X6 ENC:12 X4:48 800023
W600B 6 X6 ENC:10 X4:49 800023
W600B 7 X6 ENC:6 X4:50 800023



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
W600B 8 X6 ENC:4 X4:51 800023

W600B 11 X6 DDI:11 ESX6 Digital In Pin 14 X4 Terminal 54 X4:54 800023
W601 Blue X6 DDO:1 Ground 200 Emergency PP Up/Left PV1 SV139A:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W601 Brown X6 DDO:2 ESX6 PWM Out Pin 46 2051 Emergency PP Up/Left PV1 SV139A:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W602 Blue X6 DDO:15 Ground 200 Emergency PP Up/Left PV2 SV139B:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W602 Brown X6 DDO:16 ESX6 PWM Out Pin 63 2058 Emergency PP Up/Left PV2 SV139B:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W603 Blue X6 DDO:3 Ground 200 Emergency PP Down/Right PV1 SV140A:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W603 Brown X6 DDO:4 ESX6 PWM Out Pin 47 2052 Emergency PP Down/Right PV1 SV140A:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W604 Blue X6 DDO:17 Ground 200 Emergency PP Down/Right PV2 SV140B:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W604 Brown X6 DDO:18 ESX6 PWM Out Pin 24 2059 Emergency PP Down/Right PV2 SV140B:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W605 Blue X6 DDO:23 Ground 200 Emergency PP Retarding Pump SV SV93C:- BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W605 Brown X6 DDO:24 ESX6 PWM Out Pin 3 2062 Emergency PP Retarding Pump SV SV93C:+ BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W606 Blue X6 DDO:13 Ground 200 Emergency PP Port Main Hoist Select SV78A:- BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W606 Brown X6 DDO:14 ESX6 PWM Out Pin 62 2057 Emergency PP Port Main Hoist Select SV78A:+ BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W607 Blue X6 DDO:5 Ground 200 Emergency PP Starboard Main Hoist Select SV78B:- BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W607 Brown X6 DDO:6 ESX6 PWM Out Pin 48 2053 Emergency PP Starboard Main Hoist Select SV78B:+ BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W608 Blue X6 DDO:7 Ground 200 Emergency PP Starboard Fly Hoist Select SV78C:- BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W608 Brown X6 DDO:8 ESX6 PWM Out Pin 49 2054 Emergency PP Starboard Fly Hoist Select SV78C:+ BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W609 Blue X6 DDO:9 Ground 200 Emergency PP Luff Select 1 SV79A:- BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W609 Brown X6 DDO:10 ESX6 PWM Out Pin 64 2055 Emergency PP Luff Select 1 SV79A:+ BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W610 Blue X6 DDO:19 Ground 200 Emergency PP Luff Select 2 SV79B:- BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W610 Brown X6 DDO:20 ESX6 PWM Out Pin 2 2060 Emergency PP Luff Select 2 SV79B:+ BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W611 Blue X6 DDO:11 Ground 200 Emergency PP Slew Select 1 SV80A:- BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W611 Brown X6 DDO:12 ESX6 PWM Out Pin 61 2056 Emergency PP Slew Select 1 SV80A:+ BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W612 Blue X6 DDO:21 Ground 200 Emergency PP Slew Select 2 SV80B:- BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W612 Brown X6 DDO:22 ESX6 PWM Out Pin 25 2061 Emergency PP Slew Select 2 SV80B:+ BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W613 Black X6 FIL:1 X6 FIL Terminal 1 1961 Emergency PP Filter SW1 DPS13A:2 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W613 Grey X6 FIL:3 X6 FIL Terminal 3 200 Emergency PP Filter SW1 DPS13A:C BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W613 Brown X6 FIL:2 X6 FIL Terminal 2 1954 Emergency PP Filter SW1 DPS13A:1 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W614 Black X6 FIL:5 X6 FIL Terminal 5 1962 Emergency PP Filter SW2 DPS13B:2 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
W614 Grey X6 FIL:4 X6 FIL Terminal 4 200 Emergency PP Filter SW2 DPS13B:C BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W614 Brown X6 FIL:6 X6 FIL Terminal 6 1961 Emergency PP Filter SW2 DPS13B:1 BVA-PAXD/4C1.5BK BLACK
W700 Blue X3 POWER:2 X3 POWER Terminal 2 200 X13 UPS JB X13DC:6 2x6mm2+E XLPE/EVA/GSWB/EVA
W700 Brown X3 POWER:1 X3 POWER Terminal 1 450 X13 UPS JB X13DC:5 2x6mm2+E XLPE/EVA/GSWB/EVA
W701 1 X13DC:5 X13 UPS JB 450 X4 PWR Terminal 1 X4 PWR:1 2x6mm2+E XLPE/EVA/GSWB/EVA
W800 1 X29C-1:1 X29C-1 457 Power X3 EDI:12 800023
W800 3 X29C-5:5 X29C-5 457 Power X3 EDI:2 800023
W800 2 X29C-2:2 X29C-2 1470 Powerpack Start Control Panel X3B:9 800023
W800 4 X29C-6:6 X29C-6 755 ESX Digital In Pin 14 X3 EDI:1 800023

W800 5 X29C-7:7 X29C-7 1364 X3B Terminal 18 X4 P:1 800023
W800 6 X3B:19 X3B Terminal 19 1453 X29C-8 X29C-8:8 800023
W800 7 X3B:20 X3B Terminal 20 1454 X29C-9 X29C-9:9 800023
W800 9 X29DC-2:2 X29DC-2 200 Ground X3B:32 800023
W800 10 X3B:39 Powerpack Start Control Panel 29DC X29DC-3 X29DC-3:3 800023
W800 11 X29DC-4:4 X29DC-4 200 Powerpack Start Control Panel X3B:42 800023
W800 12 X29A01-:- X29A01- 200 Ground X3 0V:42 800023
W800 13 X29A01+:+ To X29 Power meter 1064 ESX2 Analog Pin 9 X3 AIN2:7 800023
W801 1 X4 DDI:2 Power 1454 X30C-1 X30C-1:1 800023
W801 3 X4 DDI:4 Power 1454 X30C-5 X30C-5:5 800023
W801 2 X30C-2:2 X30C-2 X4 Terminal 12 X4 P:12 800023
W801 4 X30C-6:6 X30C-6 1852 ESX4 Digital In 12 X4 DDI:3 800023
W801 5 X30C-7:7 X30C-7 1364 X4 Terminal 9 X4 P:9 800023

W801 6 X4 P:10 X4 Terminal 10 1457 X30C-8 X30C-8:8 800023
W801 7 X4 P:11 X4 Terminal 11 1458 X30C-9 X30C-9:9 800023



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
W801 12 X30A01-:- X30A01- 200 Ground X3 0V:43 800023

W801 13 X30A01+:+ To X30 Power meter 1068 ESX2 Analog Pin 32 X3 AIN2:15 800023
W802 1 X6 DDI:14 Power 1954 X31C-1 X31C-1:1 800023

W802 3 X6 DDI:16 Power 1954 X31C-5 X31C-5:5 800023
W802 2 X31C-2:2 X31C-2 X6 Terminal 4 X4 P:4 800023

W802 4 X31C-6:6 X31C-6 2157 ESX6 Digital In Pin 15 X6 DDI:15 800023
W802 5 800023
W802 6 X6:6 X6 Terminal 6 1460 X31C-8 X31C-8:8 800023
W802 7 X6:7 X6 Terminal 7 1461 X31C-9 X31C-9:9 800023
W802 12 X31A01-:- X31A01- 200 Ground X3 0V:44 800023
W802 13 X31A01+:+ To X31 Power meter 1066 ESX 2 Analog Pin 30 X3 AIN2:11 800023
W1000A Black X15 PWR:3 200 X10.5:3 3082A T5U
W1000A Blue X15 CAN:3 CAN (-) Blue 515 X10.5:1 3082A T5U
W1000A White X15 CAN:4 CAN (+) White 514 X10.5:2 3082A T5U
W1000A Red X15 PWR:4 454 X10.5:4 3082A T5U
W1100A Black X10.11:3 Ground 200 X10:3 3082A T5U
W1100A Blue X10.11:1 CAN (-) Blue 402 X11:5 3082A T5U
W1100A White X10.11:2 CAN (+) White 401 X11:6 3082A T5U
W1100A Red X10:4 454 Power X10.11:4 3082A T5U
W1226 1 X12.3:1 X12 Powerpack Distribution Panel 1470 X3B Terminal 38 X3B:38 800021
W1226 4 X12.3:2 X12 Powerpack Distribution Panel 200 Ground X3B:16 800021
W1400A 1 X3 ENC:14 Power 550 X14/1 Terminal 2 X14/1:2 800023
W1400A 2 X3 ENC:13 Ground 200 X14/1:1 800023
W1400A 3 X3 AIN:2 Power 550 X14/1 Terminal 12 X14/1:12 800023



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
W1400A 4 X3 AIN:1 ESX Analog In Pin 6 567 X14/1 Terminal 11 X14/1:11 800023
W1400A 6 X3 AIN:9 ESX Analog In Pin 29 563 X14/1 Terminal 13 X14/1:13 800023
W1400A 7 X3 ULT:3 X3 ULT Terminal 3 751 X14/1 Termianl 8 X14/1:8 800023

W1400A 8 X3 ULT:2 X3 ULT Terminal 2 752 X14/1 Terminal 7 X14/1:7 800023
W1400A 9 X3 EDI2:4 Power 457 X14/1 Terminal 10 X14/1:10 800023

W1400A 10 X3 EDI2:5 ESX2 Dig In Pin 15 1153 X14/1 Terminal 9 X14/1:9 800023
W1400A 11 X3SV:8 ESX PWM Out Pin 48 858 X14/1 Terminal 22 X14/1:22 800023
W1400A 12 X3SV:7 Ground 200 X14/1 Terminal 21 X14/1:21 800023

W1400B 1 X3 ENC2:14 X3 ENC2 Terminal 14 1051 X14/2 Terminal 2 X14/2:2 800023

W1400B 3 X3 AIN2:2 Power 1051 X14/2 Terminal 12 X14/2:12 800023
W1400B 5 X3 AIN2:10 Power 1051 X14/2 Terminal 14 X14/2:14 800023
W1400B 4 X3 AIN2:1 ESX2 Analog Pin 6 1061 X14/2 Terminal 11 X14/2:11 800023
W1400B 6 X3 AIN2:9 ESX2 Analog Pin 29 1065 X14/2 Terminal 13 X14/2:13 800023
W1400B 9 X3 ULT:4 X3 ULT Terminal 4 752 X14/2 Terminal 8 X14/2:8 800023
W1400B 10 X3 ULT:5 X3 ULT Terminal 5 753 X14/2 Terminal 7 X14/2:7 800023
W1400B 11 X3 EDI2:26 Power 457 X14/2 Terminal 16 X14/2:16 800023
W1400B 12 X3 EDI2:25 ESX2 Dig In Pin 41 1163 X14/2 Terminal 15 X14/2:15 800023
W1400B 13 X3SV:2 ESX 2 PWM Out Pin 46 857 X14/2 Terminal 22 X14/2:22 800023
W1400B 14 X3SV:1 Ground 200 X14/2 Terminal 21 X14/2:21 800023



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C

W1400C 1 X3 ENC:8 Power 550 X14/3 Terminal 2 X14/3:2 800023

W1400C 2 X3 ENC:7 Ground 200 X14/3:1 800023
W1400C 3 X3 AIN:4 Power 550 X14/3 Terminal 12 X14/3:12 800023

W1400C 4 X3 AIN:3 ESX Analog In Pin 7 560 X14/3 Terminal 11 X14/3:11 800023
W1400C 6 X3 AIN:11 ESX Analog In Pin 30 564 X14/3 Terminal 13 X14/3:13 800023
W1400C 7 X3 ULT:7 X3 ULT Terminal 7 753 X14/3 Terminal 7 X14/3:7 800023
W1400C 8 X3T5:5 X3T5 Terminal 5 754 X14/3 Terminal 8 X14/3:8 800023
W1400C 9 X3 EDI2:20 Power 457 X14/3 Terminal 10 X14/3:10 800023
W1400C 10 X3 EDI2:19 ESX2 Dig In Pin 38 1160 X14/3 Terminal 9 X14/3:9 800023
W1400C 15 X3 ENC:12 X3 ENC Terminal 12 556 X14/3 Terminal 5 X14/3:5 800023
W1400C 16 X3 ENC:9 ESX Baby In Pin 50 554 X14/3 Terminal 3 X14/3:3 800023
W1400C 17 X3 ENC:10 ESX Baby In Pin 51 555 X14/3 Terminal 4 X14/3:4 800023
W1400D 1 X3 ENC:2 Power 550 X14/4 Terminal 2 X14/4:2 800023
W1400D 2 X3 ENC:1 Ground 200 X14/4:1 800023

W1400D 3 X3 AIN:6 Power 550 X14/4 Terminal 12 X14/4:12 800023
W1400D 4 X3 AIN:5 ESX Analog In Pin 8 561 X14/4 Terminal 11 X14/4:11 800023
W1400D 6 X3 AIN:13 ESX Analog In Pin 31 565 X14/4 Terminal 13 X14/4:13 800023
W1400D 7 X3T5:2 X3T5 Terminal 2 457 X14/4 Terminal 8 X14/4:8 800023
W1400D 8 X3 ULT:1 X3 ULT Terminal 1 751 X14/4 Terminal 7 X14/4:7 800023
W1400D 9 X3 EDI:16 Power 457 X14/4 Terminal 16 X14/4:16 800023
W1400D 10 X3 EDI:11 ESX Digital In Pin 38 761 X14/4 Terminal 15 X14/4:15 800023
W1400D 11 X3 EDI2:24 Power 457 X14/4 Terminal 10 X14/4:10 800023
W1400D 12 X3 EDI2:23 ESX2 Dig In Pin 40 1162 X14/4 Terminal 9 X14/4:9 800023
W1400D 13 X3SV:25 Ground 200 X14/4 Terminal 21 X14/4:21 800023



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
W1400D 14 X3SV:26 ESX 2 PWM Out Pin 48 1257 X14/4 Terminal 22 X14/4:22 800023
W1401 Green X14/1:4 X14/1 Terminal 4 558 Stb Main Hoist Encoder B27A:Green C/W Encoder
W1401 Grey B27A:- Stb Main Hoist Encoder 200 C/W Encoder
W1401 Pink X14/1:3 X14/1 Terminal 3 557 Stb Main Hoist Encoder B27A:Pink C/W Encoder
W1401 White X14/1:5 X14/1 Terminal 5 559 Stb Main Hoist Encoder B27A:White C/W Encoder
W1401 Red X14/1:2 X14/1 Terminal 2 550 Stb Main Hoist Encoder B27A:+ C/W Encoder
W1401A 1 X3SV:21 Ground 200 29 X14/1:29 800022
W1401A 4 X3 ES:21 454 X14E/1 Terminal 1 X14E/1:1 800022
W1401A 6 X3 ES:23 454 X14E/1 Terminal 2 X14E/1:2 800022
W1401A 8 X3 ENC:18 X3 ENC Terminal 18 559 X14/1 Terminal 5 X14/1:5 800022
W1401A 9 X3 ENC:15 ESX Baby In Pin 45 557 X14/1 Terminal 3 X14/1:3 800022
W1401A 10 X3 ENC:16 ESX Baby In Pin 11 558 X14/1 Terminal 4 X14/1:4 800022

W1401B 11 X3 ENC2:15 ESX 2 Baby In Pin 45 1058 X14/2 Terminal 3 X14/2:3 800023
W1401B 12 X3 ENC2:16 ESX 2 Baby In Pin 11 1059 X14/2 Terminal 4 X14/2:4 800023



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
W1401D 7 S2/7:2 E/Stop CO2 1363 X14E/4 Terminal 3 X14E/4:3 800022

W1401D 9 X3 ES:3 X3 ES Terminal 3 1364 X14E/4 Terminal 4 X14E/4:4 800022
W1401D 10 X3 ENC:6 X3 ENC Terminal 6 553 X14/4 Terminal 5 X14/4:5 800022

W1401D 11 X3 ENC:3 ESX Baby In Pin 52 551 X14/4 Terminal 3 X14/4:3 800022
W1401D 12 X3 ENC:4 ESX Baby In Pin 10 552 X14/4 Terminal 4 X14/4:4 800022
W1403 Blue X14/1:7 X14/1 Terminal 7 752 SB M.Hoist Up Ultimate Limit LS1A:21 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1403 Brown X14/1:8 X14/1 Termianl 8 751 SB M.Hoist Up Ultimate Limit LS1A:22 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1404 Blue X14/1:9 X14/1 Terminal 9 1153 SB Main Hoist Slack Rope Limit Switch LS13A:21 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1404 Brown X14/1:10 X14/1 Terminal 10 457 SB Main Hoist Slack Rope Limit Switch LS13A:22 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1405 Black X14/1:11 X14/1 Terminal 11 567 Main Hoist Up Press Transducer (Stb) PT1A:4 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1405 Red X14/1:12 X14/1 Terminal 12 550 Main Hoist Up Press Transducer (Stb) PT1A:1 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1406 Black X14/1:13 X14/1 Terminal 13 563 Main Hoist Down Press Transducer (Stb) PT2A:4 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1406 Red X14/1:14 X14/1 Terminal 14 550 Main Hoist Down Press Transducer (Stb) PT2A:1 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1406A 2 X6 AIN:1 ESX 6 Analog In Pin 6 176B X14/1 Termianl 15 X14/1:15 800021
W1406A 4 X6 AIN:9 ESX 6 Analog In Pin 29 180B X14/1 Terminal 17 X14/1:17 800021
W1406B 1 X6 AIN:8 Power 1953 X14/2 Terminal 18 X14/2:18 800021
W1406B 3 X6 AIN:16 Power 1953 X14/2 Terminal 20 X14/2:20 800021
W1406B 2 X6 AIN:7 ESX 6 Analog In Pin 9 179B X14/2 Terminal 17 X14/2:17 800021
W1406B 4 X6 AIN:15 ESX 6 Analog In Pin 32 183B X14/2 Terminal 19 X14/2:19 800021
W1406C 2 X6 AIN:3 ESX 6 Analog In Pin 7 177B X14/3 Terminal 15 X14/3:15 800021
W1406C 4 X6 AIN:11 ESX 6 Analog In Pin 30 181B X14/3 Terminal 17 X14/3:17 800021
W1406D 2 X6 AIN:5 ESX 6 Analog In Pin 8 178B X14/4 Terminal 17 X14/4:17 800021
W1406D 4 X6 AIN:13 ESX 6 Analog In Pin 31 182B X14/4 Terminal 19 X14/4:19 800021
W1407 Black X14/1:15 X14/1 Termianl 15 176B Main Hoist Up Backup Press. Transmitter (Starboard) PT1B:4 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
W1407 Red X14/1:16 X14/1 Terminal 16 1953 Main Hoist Up Backup Press. Transmitter (Starboard) PT1B:1 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1408 Black X14/1:17 X14/1 Terminal 17 180B Main Hoist Down Backup Press. Transmitter (Starboard) PT2B:4 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1408 Red X14/1:18 X14/1 Terminal 18 1953 Main Hoist Down Backup Press. Transmitter (Starboard) PT2B:1 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1409 Blue X14/1:21 X14/1 Terminal 21 200 Stb M.Hoist X-Port Ctrl Prop. Valve SV86G:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1409 Brown X14/1:22 X14/1 Terminal 22 858 Stb M.Hoist X-Port Ctrl Prop. Valve SV86G:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1410 Blue X14/1:23 X14/1 Terminal 23 200 Stb M.Hoist X-Port Ctrl Prop. Valve SV86H:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1410 Brown X14/1:24 X14/1 Terminal 24 858 Stb M.Hoist X-Port Ctrl Prop. Valve SV86H:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1411 Green X14/2:4 X14/2 Terminal 4 1059 B27B:Green C/W Encoder
W1411 Grey 200 X14/2 Terminal 1 X14/2:1 C/W Encoder
W1411 Pink X14/2:3 X14/2 Terminal 3 1058 B27B:Pink C/W Encoder
W1411 White X14/2:5 X14/2 Terminal 5 1060 B27B:White C/W Encoder
W1411 Red X14/2:2 X14/2 Terminal 2 1051 B27B:+ C/W Encoder

W1413 Blue X14/2:7 X14/2 Terminal 7 753 Port M.Hoist Up Ultimate Limit LS1B:21 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1413 Brown X14/2:8 X14/2 Terminal 8 752 Port M.Hoist Up Ultimate Limit LS1B:22 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1414 Blue X14/2:15 X14/2 Terminal 15 1163 Port Main Hoist Slack Rope Limit Switch LS13B:21 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1414 Brown X14/2:16 X14/2 Terminal 16 457 Port Main Hoist Slack Rope Limit Switch LS13B:22 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1415 Black X14/2:11 X14/2 Terminal 11 1061 Port Main Hoist Up Pressure Transducer PT1C:4 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1415 Red X14/2:12 X14/2 Terminal 12 1051 Port Main Hoist Up Pressure Transducer PT1C:1 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1416 Black X14/2:13 X14/2 Terminal 13 1065 Port Main Hoist Down Pressure Transducer PT2C:4 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1416 Red X14/2:14 X14/2 Terminal 14 1051 Port Main Hoist Down Pressure Transducer PT2C:1 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1417 Black X14/2:9 X14/2 Terminal 9 1062 N2 Boost Pressure Press. Transmitter PT18:4 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1417 Red X14/2:10 X14/2 Terminal 10 1051 N2 Boost Pressure Press. Transmitter PT18:1 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1418 Black X14/2:17 X14/2 Terminal 17 179B Main Hoist Up Backup Press. Transmitter (Port) PT1D:4 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1418 Red X14/2:18 X14/2 Terminal 18 1953 Main Hoist Up Backup Press. Transmitter (Port) PT1D:1 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1419 Black X14/2:19 X14/2 Terminal 19 183B Main Hoist Down Backup Press. Transmitter (Port) PT2D:4 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1419 Red X14/2:20 X14/2 Terminal 20 1953 Main Hoist Down Backup Press. Transmitter (Port) PT2D:1 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1420 Blue X14/2:21 X14/2 Terminal 21 200 Port M.Hoist X-Port Ctrl Prop. Valve SV86A:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1420 Brown X14/2:22 X14/2 Terminal 22 857 Port M.Hoist X-Port Ctrl Prop. Valve SV86A:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1421 Green X14/3:4 X14/3 Terminal 4 555 Fly Hoist Encoder B26:Green C/W ENCODER
W1421 Grey B26:- Fly Hoist Encoder 200 C/W ENCODER



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
W1421 Pink X14/3:3 X14/3 Terminal 3 554 Fly Hoist Encoder B26:Pink C/W ENCODER
W1421 White X14/3:5 X14/3 Terminal 5 556 Fly Hoist Encoder B26:White C/W ENCODER
W1421 Red X14/3:2 X14/3 Terminal 2 550 Fly Hoist Encoder B26:+ C/W ENCODER
W1423 Blue X14/3:7 X14/3 Terminal 7 753 Fly Hoist Up Ultimate Limit LS3:21 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1423 Brown X14/3:8 X14/3 Terminal 8 754 Fly Hoist Up Ultimate Limit LS3:22 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1424 Blue X14/3:9 X14/3 Terminal 9 1160 Fly Hoist Slack Rope Limit Switch LS15:21 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1424 Brown X14/3:10 X14/3 Terminal 10 457 Fly Hoist Slack Rope Limit Switch LS15:22 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1425 Black X14/3:11 X14/3 Terminal 11 560 Fly Hoist Up Press. Transducer PT3A:4 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1425 Red X14/3:12 X14/3 Terminal 12 550 Fly Hoist Up Press. Transducer PT3A:1 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1426 Black X14/3:13 X14/3 Terminal 13 564 Fly Hoist Down Press. Transducer PT4A:4 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1426 Red X14/3:14 X14/3 Terminal 14 550 Fly Hoist Down Press. Transducer PT4A:1 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1427 Black X14/3:15 X14/3 Terminal 15 177B Fly Hoist Up Backup Pressure Transmitter PT3B:4 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1427 Red X14/3:16 X14/3 Terminal 16 1953 Fly Hoist Up Backup Pressure Transmitter PT3B:1 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1428 Black X14/3:17 X14/3 Terminal 17 181B Fly Hoist Down Backup Pressure Transmitter PT4B:4 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1428 Red X14/3:18 X14/3 Terminal 18 1953 Fly Hoist Down Backup Pressure Transmitter PT4B:1 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1431 Green X14/4:4 X14/4 Terminal 4 552 Luff Hoist Encoder B25:Green C/W ENCODER
W1431 Grey B25:- Luff Hoist Encoder 200 C/W ENCODER

W1431 Pink X14/4:3 X14/4 Terminal 3 551 Luff Hoist Encoder B25:Pink C/W ENCODER
W1431 White X14/4:5 X14/4 Terminal 5 553 Luff Hoist Encoder B25:White C/W ENCODER
W1431 Red X14/4:2 X14/4 Terminal 2 550 Luff Hoist Encoder B25:+ C/W ENCODER
W1433 Blue X14/4:7 X14/4 Terminal 7 751 Luff In Ultimate Limit LS2:21 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1433 Brown X14/4:8 X14/4 Terminal 8 457 Luff In Ultimate Limit LS2:22 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1434 Blue X14/4:9 X14/4 Terminal 9 1162 Luff Slack Rope Limit Switch LS14:21 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1434 Brown X14/4:10 X14/4 Terminal 10 457 Luff Slack Rope Limit Switch LS14:22 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1435 Blue X14/4:15 X14/4 Terminal 15 761 Luff Ratchet Limit Switch LS5:21 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1435 Brown X14/4:16 X14/4 Terminal 16 457 Luff Ratchet Limit Switch LS5:22 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1436 Black X14/4:11 X14/4 Terminal 11 561 Luff In Pressure Transducer PT5A:4 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1436 Red X14/4:12 X14/4 Terminal 12 550 Luff In Pressure Transducer PT5A:1 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1437 Black X14/4:13 X14/4 Terminal 13 565 Luff Out Pressure Transducer PT6A:4 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1437 Red X14/4:14 X14/4 Terminal 14 550 Luff Out Pressure Transducer PT6A:1 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
W1438 Black X14/4:17 X14/4 Terminal 17 178B Luff In Backup Pressure Transmitter PT5B:4 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1438 Red X14/4:18 X14/4 Terminal 18 1953 Luff In Backup Pressure Transmitter PT5B:1 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1439 Black X14/4:19 X14/4 Terminal 19 182B Luff Out Backup Pressure Transmitter PT6B:4 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1439 Red X14/4:20 X14/4 Terminal 20 1953 Luff Out Backup Pressure Transmitter PT6B:1 C/W PRESS. TRANSMITTER
W1440 Blue X14/4:21 X14/4 Terminal 21 200 Luff X-Port Ctrl Prop Valve SV88A:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1440 Brown X14/4:22 X14/4 Terminal 22 1257 Luff X-Port Ctrl Prop Valve SV88A:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1441 Blue X14/1:25 X14/1 Terminal 25 200 Stb M.Hoist X-Port Ctrl Prop. Valve SV86J:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1441 Brown X14/1:26 X14/1 Terminal 26 858 Stb M.Hoist X-Port Ctrl Prop. Valve SV86J:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1442 Blue X14/1:27 X14/1 Terminal 27 200 Stb M.Hoist X-Port Ctrl Prop. Valve SV86K:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1442 Brown X14/1:28 X14/1 Terminal 28 1256 Stb M.Hoist X-Port Ctrl Prop. Valve SV86K:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1443 Blue X14/1:29 29 200 Stb M.Hoist X-Port Ctrl Prop. Valve SV86L:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1443 Brown X14/1:30 X14/1 Terminal 30 1256 Stb M.Hoist X-Port Ctrl Prop. Valve SV86L:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1444 Blue X14/1:31 X14/1 Terminal 31 200 Stb M.Hoist X-Port Ctrl Prop. Valve SV86M:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1444 Brown X14/1:32 X14/1 Terminal 32 1256 Stb M.Hoist X-Port Ctrl Prop. Valve SV86M:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1445 Blue X14/2:23 X14/2 Terminal 23 200 Port M.Hoist X-Port Ctrl Prop. Valve SV86B:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1445 Brown X14/2:24 X14/2 Terminal 24 857 Port M.Hoist X-Port Ctrl Prop. Valve SV86B:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1446 Blue X14/2:25 X14/2 Terminal 25 200 Port M.Hoist X-Port Ctrl Prop. Valve SV86C:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1446 Brown X14/2:26 X14/2 Terminal 26 857 Port M.Hoist X-Port Ctrl Prop. Valve SV86C:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1447 Blue X14/2:27 X14/2 Terminal 27 200 Port M.Hoist X-Port Ctrl Prop. Valve SV86D:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1447 Brown X14/2:28 X14/2 Terminal 28 1255 Port M.Hoist X-Port Ctrl Prop. Valve SV86D:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1448 Blue X14/2:29 X14/2 Terminal 29 200 Port M.Hoist X-Port Ctrl Prop. Valve SV86E:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1448 Brown X14/2:30 X14/2 Terminal 30 1255 Port M.Hoist X-Port Ctrl Prop. Valve SV86E:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1449 Blue X14/2:31 X14/2 Terminal 31 200 Port M.Hoist X-Port Ctrl Prop. Valve SV86F:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1449 Brown X14/2:32 X14/2 Terminal 32 1255 Port M.Hoist X-Port Ctrl Prop. Valve SV86F:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1450 Blue X14/4:23 X14/4 Terminal 23 200 Luff X-Port Ctrl Prop Valve SV88B:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1450 Brown X14/4:24 X14/4 Terminal 24 1257 Luff X-Port Ctrl Prop Valve SV88B:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1451 Blue X14/4:25 X14/4 Terminal 25 200 Luff X-Port Ctrl Prop Valve SV88C:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1451 Brown X14/4:26 X14/4 Terminal 26 1257 Luff X-Port Ctrl Prop Valve SV88C:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1452 Blue X14/4:27 X14/4 Terminal 27 200 Luff X-Port Ctrl Prop Valve SV88D:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1452 Brown X14/4:28 X14/4 Terminal 28 1258 Luff X-Port Ctrl Prop Valve SV88D:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
W1453 Blue X14/4:29 X14/4 Terminal 29 200 Luff X-Port Ctrl Prop Valve SV88E:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1453 Brown X14/4:30 X14/4 Terminal 30 1258 Luff X-Port Ctrl Prop Valve SV88E:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1454 Blue X14/4:31 X14/4 Terminal 31 200 Luff X-Port Ctrl Prop Valve SV88F:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W1454 Brown X14/4:32 X14/4 Terminal 32 1258 Luff X-Port Ctrl Prop Valve SV88F:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W3400 Blue X3 CAN:20 CAN (-) Blue 457 X4 CAN:1 3082A T5U
W3400 White X3 CAN:19 CAN (+) White 458 X4 CAN:2 3082A T5U
W3401 1 X3 FIL:2 X3 FIL Terminal 2 457 X4A FIL Terminal 10 X4A FIL:10 800023
W3401 2 X4A FIL:8 X4A FIL Terminal 8 654 X3 FIL Terminal 12 X3 FIL:12 800023
W3401 3 X3 AIN:16 Power 550 X4A Terminal 36 X4A:36 800023
W3401 4 X3 AIN:15 ESX Analog In Pin 32 566 X4A Terminal 35 X4A:35 800023
W3401 5 X3 EDI:22 Power 457 X4A:2 800023
W3401 7 X3 EDO:10 ESX PWM Out Pin 46 855 X4A Terminal 4 X4A:4 800023
W3401 8 X3 EDO:9 Ground 200 X4A Terminal 3 X4A:3 800023
W3401 10 X3 EDO:11 Ground 200 X4A:5 800023
W3401 9 X4A FIL:26 X4A FIL Terminal 26 200 X3C:1 800023
W3401 11 X3 EDO3:22 ESX PWM Out Pin 64 862 X4A Terminal 8 X4A:8 800023
W3401 12 X3 EDO:23 Ground 200 X4A:7 800023
W3401 14 X3 EDO:17 Ground 200 X4A:9 800023
W3401 16 X3 EDO:19 Ground 200 X4A:11 800023
W3401 18 X3 EDO:21 Ground 200 X4A:13 800023
W3401 16 X3 EDI:17 ESX Digital In Pin 41 764 X4A:1 800023

W3401 19 X3 EDO3:20 X3 EDO3 Terminal 20 1260 X4A Terminal 26 X4A:26 800023
W3402 1 X3 EDO:24 X3 EDO Terminal 24 1261 X4A Terminal 28 X4A:28 800023
W3402 3 X3 EDO3:6 ESX 2 PWM Out Pin 24 1253 X4A Terminal 22 X4A:22 800023
W3402 2 X3 EDO3:19 Ground 200 X4A Terminal 25 X4A:25 800023



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C


W3402 7 X3 EDO4:12 ESX 2 BBA Dig Out Pin 44 1268 X4A Terminal 18 X4A:18 800023

W3402 12 X3 FIL2:2 X3 FIL2 Terminal 2 457 X4A FIL Terminal 12 X4A FIL:12 800023
W3410 1 X4A FIL:2 X4A FIL Terminal 2 658 X4B FIL Terminal 4 X4B FIL:4 800021
W3410 2 X4B FIL:6 X4B FIL Terminal 6 660 X3C:3 800021
W3410 3 X4B FIL:24 X4B FIL Terminal 24 200 X3C:2 800021
W3410 4 X3 EDO3:18 ESX 2 PWM Out Pin 61 1259 X4B Terminal 26 X4B:26 800021
W3410 5 X3 EDO3:17 Ground 200 X4B Terminal 25 X4B:25 800021
W3601 Black X4A:40 X4A Terminal 40 200 Port M.Hoist MGOP (Port) SV46D:- 0079804439
W3601 Red X4A:39 X4A Terminal 39 3156 Port M.Hoist MGOP (Port) SV46D:+ 0079804439
W3602 Black X4A:42 X4A Terminal 42 200 Port M.Hoist MGOP (SB) SV46C:- 0079804439
W3602 Red X4A:41 X4A Terminal 41 3156 Port M.Hoist MGOP (SB) SV46C:+ 0079804439
W3605 Black X4A:38 X4A Terminal 38 200 Free Slew/MGOP (Port) SV47B:- 0079804439
W3605 Red X4A:37 X4A Terminal 37 3156 Free Slew/MGOP (Port) SV47B:+ 0079804439
W3607 Black X36 DIODE:2 X36 DIODE Terminal 2 200 MGOP M.Hoist Brake SV (Port) SV45/2B:- 0079804439
W3607 Red X36 DIODE:1 X36 DIODE Terminal 1 3156 MGOP M.Hoist Brake SV (Port) SV45/2B:+ 0079804439
W3608 Black X36 DIODE:4 X36 DIODE Terminal 4 200 MGOP M.Hoist Brake SV (Starboard) SV45/2A:- 0079804439
W3608 Red X36 DIODE:3 X36 DIODE Terminal 3 3156 MGOP M.Hoist Brake SV (Starboard) SV45/2A:+ 0079804439
W3609 Black X36 DIODE:6 X36 DIODE Terminal 6 200 MGOP Fly Hoist Brake SV SV40/2:- 0079804439
W3609 Red X36 DIODE:5 X36 DIODE Terminal 5 3156 MGOP Fly Hoist Brake SV SV40/2:+ 0079804439
W3610 Black X36 DIODE:8 X36 DIODE Terminal 8 200 MGOP Slew Brake SV SV50/1:- 0079804439
W3610 Red X36 DIODE:7 X36 DIODE Terminal 7 3156 MGOP Slew Brake SV SV50/1:+ 0079804439
W3611 Blue X36 PS:1 X36 PS Terminal 1 3157 Hydraulic Pressure Switch PS43:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W3611 Brown X36 PS:2 X36 PS Terminal 2 450 Hydraulic Pressure Switch PS43:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W3613 1 X36:15 X36 Terminal 15 3156 X5 MGOP Terminal 1 X5 MGOP:1 800022



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C


W3613 5 X36 SW:8 X36 SW Terminal 8 3152 X5 MGOP Terminal 5 X5 MGOP:5 800022
W3613A 1 X5 MGOP:1 X5 MGOP Terminal 1 3156 MGOP Activated Indicator H59:1 800022
W3613A 3 X5 MGOP:3 X5 MGOP Terminal 3 3156 MGOP Buzzer H94:1 800022
W3613A 2 X5 MGOP:2 X5 MGOP Terminal 2 200 MGOP Activated Indicator H59:2 800022
W3613A 4 X5 MGOP:4 X5 MGOP Terminal 4 200 MGOP Buzzer H94:2 800022
W3613A 5 X5 MGOP:5 X5 MGOP Terminal 5 3152 MGOP Health Indicator H35:1 800022
W3613A 7 X5 MGOP:7 X5 MGOP Terminal 7 3152 MGOP Button S19:1 800022
W3613A 6 X5 MGOP:6 X5 MGOP Terminal 6 3154 MGOP Health Indicator H35:2 800022
W3613A 8 X5 MGOP:8 X5 MGOP Terminal 8 3153 MGOP Button S19:2 800022
W3614 2 X36:20 2259 X4B Terminal 28 X4B:28 800022

W3614 7 X36 S:4 Power 3156 X4B Terminal 37 X4B:37 800022
W3614 8 X36 0V:6 Ground 200 X4B Terminal 36 X4B:36 800022
W3615 Blue X36 PS:3 X36 PS Terminal 3 3158 GOP N2 Pressure Switch PS20:2 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK
W3615 Brown X36 PS:4 X36 PS Terminal 4 3157 GOP N2 Pressure Switch PS20:1 BVA-PAXD/2C1.5BK BLACK



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
Table Of Contents
Table of Changes 2
Single Line Drawing (POWER) 3
Slipring Interface 5
Cabin Panel X8 in X55 7
Powerpack Panel X12 10
Slew well Distribution Panel X9 13
Power Supply Panel X13 14
Motor 1 Control Panel X29 15
Motor 2 Control Panel X30 17
Emer.Motor Control Panel X31 19
Terminal Layout 21
X8A, X8B, X8C, X9 Layout 24
X12 JB Arrangement 25
X13 JB Arrangement 26
X55 Panel Layout 27
800kW Motor Starter Panel 28
EPP Motor Starter Panel 29
Electrical Equipment Schedule 31
Cable Termination Schedule 50
RY Refer to Page 2 14/10/13 D

Client comment updated and ECN 4452 24/10/12 B P.O. Box 456, Liverpool BC, N.S.W. 1871 Australia
JPD EP MM AT (A subsidiary of Muhibbah Engineering (M) Bhd) Muhibbah Engineering (M) Bhd

JPD EP MM EO Original Issue 25/06/12 A A3-6100.574
JACK UP BARGE Table Of Contents

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
Approved Drawn Description Date
C
Checked Checked Rev. POWER
1814 PC1000 1 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Table of Changes
Rev C
1.Page 3, 14: W233C and W233D added for UPS power supply to X6 and X36. W233A
has been rerouted to X4 for UPS power supply. Cables are set to be 2C+E 6mm2 for
W233, W233A, W233C and W233D. Refer to DC drawing A36100590.
2.Page 4, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20: W30, W40 and W60 are all rerouted to X3 for
signals from soft-starter and motor control panel. Refer to DC drawing
A36100590.
3.Page 10: W1226 are connected for signals from run meters to DC circuit refering
to A36100590.
Rev D
1.Page 19: Power meter connection to DC circuit added.
2.Page 15 and 17: Motor connection revised as per site mark up.
3.Page 51: Cable termination updated for Item1.
4.Page 3.11 and 14.13: CO2 system is added.
5.Page 9.7: Power supply G9 and G10 are added.
6.Page 16.7, 18.7 and 20.7: XC-1 and XC-2 are now connected to R3 (Top of Ramp)
instead of R1.


JACK UP BARGE Table of Changes

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
Eng Draft 118-331-M-MR-001.09 Serial No. Model PC1000 Sheet Revision
C
1814 2 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
W801 Cabin Light
E1/1 2X18W
3C+E 4mm
Internal Machinery W1201B W1201A W1201
E1/8 E1/7 E1/6 W802 Outside Cabin
House Light 2X36W 3C+E 2.5mm 3C+E 2.5mm 3C+E 4mm E1/15
3C+E 2.5mm Light 2X36W
Internal Machinery W1202B W1202A W1202 W803
House Light 2X36W E1/11 E1/10 E1/9 Upper Deck Access
3C+E 2.5mm 3C+E 2.5mm 3C+E 4mm E1/18
MOUNTING PLATE 3C+E 2.5mm Ladder Light 2X36W
W1203A W1203 FOR X8 CABIN
Under Fly Winch W1203B DISTRIBUTION W804 W804A W804B External Access Ladder
Light 2X36W E1/27 3C+E 2.5mm
E1/17 3C+E 2.5mm E1/16 3C+E 4mm PANEL E1/38 E1/39 E1/40
3C+E 4.0mm 3C+E 2.5mm 3C+E 2.5mm Fluor Light 2x36W
Ext.Front Machinery Ext.Front Machinery Air Conditioner
House Light 2X36W House Light 2X36W Y3/3 Romote Controller
MOUNTING PLATE
W1204E W1204D W1204C W1204B W1204A W1204 FOR CONTROL W805A
E1/26 E1/25 E1/24 E1/23 E1/22 E1/21 CIRCUIT 2C 0.75mm
3C+E 2.5mm 3C+E 2.5mm 3C+E 2.5mm 3C+E 2.5mm 3C+E 2.5mm 3C+E 4mm INTERFACE W805
Ext.Rear Machinery Air Conditioner
Lower Tank Access Upper Tank Access Luff Winch Light Ext.Rear Machinery Y3/1 Indoor Unit
Lower Tank Access House Light 2X36W 2C+E 2.5mm
Platform Light Platform Light Port Side House Light 2X36W
Platform Light W808A
2X36W 2X36W 2X36W W1205
2X36W Mach. House 3C+E 2.5mm
GPO Y5A 2C+E 2.5mm W808 Air Conditioner
W1206A W1206 2C+E 2.5mm Y3/2 Outdoor Unit
Mast Floodlights
400W HPS E3/32 2C+E 2.5mm
E3/31 W806 Cabin
2C+E 4mm Y5
2C+E 4mm GPO
Mast aviation W1207
Light E4/31 2C+E 2.5mm W807 W807A Port & S'Board Hoist
3C+E 4mm E1/19 3C+E 2.5mm E1/20 Winch Light 2X36W
Hydraulic Oil Heater W1208
Header Tank 500W E41A
2C+E 2.5mm W819 W819A W819B
Hydraulic Oil Heater W1209 E3/21 E3/22 E3/23
E41B 2C+E 4mm 2C+E 2.5mm 2C+E 2.5mm
Header Tank 500W 2C+E 2.5mm Boom Butt Floodlight Boom Trans.1 Floodlight Boom Trans.2 Floodlight
Hydraulic Oil Heater W1210 W816 400W HPS 400W HPS 400W HPS
Main Tank 500W E41C 2C+E 2.5mm 2C+E 4mm 24m Ext.1
W1211 W815A
Hydraulic Oil Heater E3/24
Main Tank 500W E41D X55 W815 W1222 2C+E 2.5mm
2C+E 2.5mm To X12 X8A 24m Ext.2
Cabin Cabinet 2C+E 4mm 2C+E 2.5mm W815B
Hydraulic Oil Heater W1212 Boom Top E3/25
E41E Camera Cable Boom Top Pre-wired to Boom 2C+E 2.5mm
Main Tank 500W 2C+E 2.5mm A101 Camera
W8111 Camera Box Zoom Camera Transition J/Box
Hydraulic Oil Heater W1225
E41F Camera Cable Winch
Main Tank 500W 2C+E 2.5mm A102 Camera 1
W8112
SB G'Box Cooling W1213 Camera Cable Winch W233D To DC A36100590
W814A
W816A
W815C
M9A A103 Camera 2

2C+E 4mm
2C+E 4mm
Motor SB 2C+E 2.5mm A10 W8113 2C+E 6mm2 X36

2C+E 2.5mm
Port G'Box Cooling W1214 Camera Camera Cable X8B 12m Ext.
A104 Winch W815D
Motor PORT M9B 2C+E 2.5mm Contol Box Camera 3 W233C To DC A36100590
(In Cabin)
W8114 2C+E 2.5mm
E3/26
Camera Cable 2C+E 6mm2 X6 24 Meter
Port Motor Anti W1217 Keyboard Extension J/Box
Condensation Heater E46A B21
2C+E 2.5mm W8115
Starboard Motor Anti W1218 Camera Cable W8117 W233A To DC A36100590
E46B W8116 B20 2C+E 2.5mm X4
Condensation Heater 2C+E 2.5mm 2C+E 6mm2
Camera
W814B
W816B
Display
2C+E 4mm
Boom Floodlight 400W HPS
EPP Motor Anti W1219 W233

2C+E 2.5mm
Condensation Heater E46C X13 To DC A36100590

2C+E 2.5mm W817 2C+E 6mm2
Machinery House Space W1223 W811
X33 X8C Boom Top
E6 2C+E 2.5mm UPS/Power
Heater (Starboard) 2C+E 2.5mm W233B Boom Top
W816C
2C+E 16mm Supply JB E3/27
2C+E 2.5mm To Fire&gas 2C+E 2.5mm
Machinery House W1224
X12
W821 Boom Top
E6A
J'Box
Space Heater (Port) 2C+E 2.5mm W816D
3C+E 4mm E3/28
E15 CO2 Activated 2C+E 2.5mm
W1222 W822 Buzzer & Indicator
Power Pack
to X8A 2C 1.5mm
(In Power Pack)

2C+E 2.5mm 2C+E 4mm
H10 W814C Boom Aviation
2C+E 2.5mm
E4/21 Light (Boom Top)
2C 1.5mm
W1226
to DC X3
7C 1.5mm 2C 1.5mm CO2
A36100590
W812
Cabinet
X17 PA8 Antenna
2C+E 2.5mm X45
Slew Well Light W901A W901 W1220 VHF Radio
Upper Level 2X36W E1/35 3C+E 2.5mm
E1/34 3C+E 4mm DOOR
3C+E 4mm
SWITCH
W902B W902A W902 W1221 W818 X17A Antenna
E1/43 E1/37 E1/36 2C+E 2.5mm
PA9
3C+E 2.5mm 3C+E 2.5mm 3C+E 4mm 2C+E 4mm
Near slipring S/B Slew Port Slew UHF Radio
and access ladder 2X36W Drive 2X36W Drive 2X36W
W820 Wind Sensor
X9
Internal Platform W903A W903 2C+E 1.5mm
A11 @ Boom Tip
J'Box
Light 2X36W E1/42 3C+E 2.5mm
E1/41
3C+E 4mm Wind Speed
Slew well
Slew Well W907 Display @ Cabin
GPO Y5B 2C+E 2.5mm
W203
W201
2C+E 4mm
4C+E 25mm
Slew Well W908

Heater E6B 2C+E 2.5mm
Crane
1C 70mm
W202
Structure
W204
2C+E 4mm
N1 Slip Ring Favco Scope
of Supply
Note:
Client Scope
RFOU
BFOU
BFOU
RFOU
1. Cable Gland names follow Cable names of Supply

with a Z in place of W
1C 70mm
W101
W102
W103
W104
2C+E 4mm
2C+E 4mm
4C+E 25mm
2. Italic fonts are JUB tag numbers

3. Colour Coding inside JB/Consumer Units:
690 and 400VAC Brown(L1), Black(L2), Grey(L3), Blue(Neutral) Main Power Aviation & Aero Emergency Power
230VAC Brown(L), Black(LS-Phase Switched), Blue(Neutral) Platform
3 Phase 4 Wire Lighting 1 Phase 1 Phase 2 Wire Structure
24VDC Brown(L+), Grey(L-) with Neutral & E 230VAC 50Hz 230VAC 50Hz
Earth(PE) Green/Yellow 400VAC
50Hz


JPD EP MM EO Original Issue 25/06/12 A Single Line Drawing (POWER)A3-6100.574
JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
Draft 118-331-M-MR-001.09 Serial No. Model Sheet Revision
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 3 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Note:
A. 1 Core Cables to 800kW Motors will run using
Oglaend Cable Ladder(LOE-100-600) and Trefoil Cleats(1303431).
2 cable dia spacing between 2 trefoil runs.
Ref cables: W2901 - W2912, W2901A - W2918A
W3001 - W3012, W3001A - W3018A
B. Where single core (Otersheath colour: Black) cables are used to power
electric Motor (800kW), cable need to be heat shrinked with
Low smoke halogen free material. Colour code for heat shrink
L1: Brown, L2: Black, L3: Grey
C. 3 Core Cables to 110kW Motor will run using
Oglaend Cable Ladder(LOE-100-200) and Single Cleats(89837).
2 cable dia spacing between each cable.
Ref cables: W3101, W3101A, W3102, W3102A
M1 M2 M10
Port Motor Starboard Emergency
800KW Motor Power Pack
800KW Motor 110KW
W3101A
W3102A
(Note C)
3C 50mm
3C 50mm
(Note A & B)
(Note C)
(Note A & B)
(Soft starter to motor)

W2901A-W2909A
9 Runs of 1C 185mm
(Motor to soft starter)
W2910A-W2918A
9 Runs of 1C 185mm
(Soft starter to motor)
W3001A-W3009A
9 Runs of 1C 185mm
(Motor to soft starter)
W3010A-W3018A
9 Runs of 1C 185mm
W30 To DC X3 W40 To DC X3 W60 To DC X3
19C 1.5mm A36100590 19C 1.5mm A36100590 19C 1.5mm A36100590
X29 X30 X31

Port Motor Starboard Emergency
Control Panel Motor Motor Control
Control Panel Panel
W233B Fire PA-A Tele

To X13 2C+E 2.5mm
ESD
& Gas JB PA-B phone
W207
W206
W242E
W220A
(Note C)
W220AA
(Note A & B)
NOTE: REFER
W3101
W3102
3C 50mm
3C 50mm
TO PAGE 4
1x2x1.5 BFOU
8x2x1.5 BFOU
1x2x2.5 BFOU
1x2x2.5 BFOU
3 cables per phase
3 cables per phase
12 Runs of 1C 185mm
12 Runs of 1C 185mm
1x2x0.75 BFOU
W2901-W2912
W3001-W3012
N1 Slip Ring Favco Scope

of Supply
Client Scope
of Supply
BFOU
BFOU
BFOU
Tele
ESD
phone
1x2X0.75
PA System
241E
8x2x1.5mm
2C+E 1.5mm
Fire & Gas

1x2x2.5 BFOU
1x2x2.5 BFOU
W19-W20
W01-W09
W10-W18
2 Runs of 3C 50mm BFOU
9 Runs of 3C 95mm RFOU

9 Runs of 3C 95mm RFOU
Note:
1. Cable Gland names follow Cable names 2 cable dia spacing 2 cable dia spacing 2 cable dia spacing
with a Z in place of W between each cable between each cable between each cable
Motor 1 Supply Motor 2 Supply Emergency Motor Supply
2. Italic fonts are JUB tag numbers 3 Phase 3 Wire 3 Phase 3 Wire 3 Phase 3 Wire
400VAC 50Hz 400VAC 50Hz 400VAC 50Hz
3. Colour Coding inside JB/Consumer Units:
690 and 400VAC Brown(L1), Black(L2), Grey(L3), Blue(Neutral)
230VAC Brown(L), Black(LS-Phase Switched), Blue(Neutral)
24VDC Brown(L+), Grey(L-)
Earth(PE) Green/Yellow


JPD EP MM EO Original Issue 25/06/12 A Single Line Drawing (POWER)A3-6100.574
JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 4 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
L1A 7.1
L2A 7.1
L3A 7.1
NA 7.1
L EM 8.11
N EM 8.11
BFOU 2x2.5mm2
813
COM24V 14.13
814
COM0V 14.13
GD-201 GD-202 GD-203

AIR INTAKE AIR INTAKE AIR INTAKE
Machinery Machinery Machinery
House *-251E House *-252E House
Gas Detector Gas Detector Gas Detector
COM COM COM
LO 10-B-24
HI 10-B-25
CON CON CON CON
*-249E *-250E *-251E
S S S S
SD-202 SD-203 SD-204 SD-205
Machinery Machinery Slew Well Slew Well
House (Port) House (SB) Smoke Smoke
Smoke Smoke Detector Detector
Detector Detector
11-B-28 11-B-29 11-B-30 11-B-31
*-243E
*-248E
BFOU (I) 2x2x1.5mm2

CON
L OBS 12.9 F
FD-201 Note:
N OBS 12.9 MAC-210
Machinery House Manual Alarm - PA System Components
Heat Detector
*-244E
*-245E
Call Point@Operator Cabin
11-B-27
Free Issue By Client
*-247E
12-B-32
PE Installed by Favco
CON CON
- Jack Up Barge Cable Numbers
2
4
Q15C Are Used For Heat, Gas And
S Smoke Detector
X8 PE SD-201
Crane Cabin
Smoke
6A Detector
10kA X12
Powerpack 11-B-26
*-252E
*-246E
BFOU (I) 1x2x1.5mm2
Distribution Panel
1
3
309
310
301
302
303
304
E E
*-JB-201 331-SR-001
BFOU (I) 1x2x1.5mm2
E
X8 PE X8 PE
410
411
PE PE JUNCTION
CRANE
BOX
STRUCTURE
N1 36 37 38
N1 4 5 6 7 8 PE N1 9 10 11
*-242E
Obstruction
GROUND Lights
2C+E 2.5mm
BFOU (I) 8x2x1.5mm2
BFOU
N1 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Main Power Emergency Power
3 Phase 4 Wire 1 Phase 2 Wire
with Neutral + E 230VAC 50Hz
400VAC
50Hz Fire & Gas BFOU (I) 8x2x1.5mm2


JPD EP MM EO Original Issue 25/06/12 A Slipring Interface A3-6100.574
JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 5 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
X29L11 15.4
X29L12 15.4
X29L13 15.4
X29L14 15.4
X29L21 15.4
X29L22 15.4
X29L23 15.4
X29L24 15.4
X29L31 15.4
X29L32 15.4
X29L33 15.4
X29L34 15.4
X30L11 Note:
17.4 PA systems,telephone
X30L12 17.4 components and ESD
signal supplied by client.
X30L13 17.4 Installed by Favco.
X30L14 17.4
X30L21 17.4
X30L22 17.4
X30L23 17.4
X30L24 17.4
X30L31 17.4
X30L32 17.4
ESD
X30L33 17.4
X30L34 17.4
X31L11 19.5
LS-220A
(In Crane cabin)
X31L12 19.5
508
509
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
535
X31L21 19.5
532
536
533
534
X31L22 19.5
537
X31L31 19.5
538
X31L32 19.5
W207
W206
W220A
W220AA
N1 L1 L2 L3 N1 L4 L5 L6 N1 1 2 3 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
PA-A
To 29 Motor 1 Supply To 30 Motor 2 Supply Emergency Motor Supply
Main Power Pack 3 Phase 3 Wire Main Power Pack 3 Phase 3 Wire 3 Phase 3 Wire ESD Telephone
Motor 1 Control Panel 400VAC 50Hz 400VAC 50Hz 400VAC 50Hz PA System 2C+E 1.5mm 1x2x0.75
Motor 2 Control Panel
2C 2.5mm BFOU BFOU RFOU


JPD EP MM EO Original Issue 25/06/12 A Slipring Interface A3-6100.574
JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 6 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
301 305
5.12 L1A L1 8.1
302 306
5.12 L2A L2 8.1
303 307
5.12 L3A L3 8.1
304 308
5.12 NA N 8.1
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
Q5A Q45
1
3
5
7
Q1 Q1A 16A 2A
2A 25A Q2 6kA 6kA
6kA 6kA 16A
2
4
RCD
2
4
Q15
2
4
2
4
502
611
612
40A
2
4
504
2
4
6
8
1
S12
24 504
14
2
K100 K100
(13) (13)
21
613
11
K100
501
502
503
502
305
A1 A2
306
307 X8 X8 Distribution Panel X8

@ Cabin
308 11 12 PE 12 14 PE
X8A Boom
401
402
418
419
403
404
X8A Transition
7 8 PE J/Box
X8B X8B 24m
X8A X8B 7 8 PE Extension
X8A Boom X8B 24m J/box
1 2 PE Transition 1 2 PE Extension
J/Box J/box X8C
1 2 PE
X8 Distribution Panel X8C

@ Cabin X8 X8 X8 Boom JB
1 2 PE 5 6 PE 3 4 PE X8A X8A X8B X8C X8C Boom Top
3 4 PE 5 6 PE 3 4 PE 3 4 PE 5 6 PE
E
E
E
401
402
403
404
418
419
L N PE L N PE L N PE L N PE L N PE
614 L N PE 616 L N PE
L1
PE
N1
L S1 S1
615 Y3/1 617
L N N S2 S2 Y3/2
618
E3/24
E3/25
E3/26
E3/27
E3/28
Y3/3 S3 S3
619
PE PE Y5
Flood lights
Relay
/7
/10
8/5
Boom Floodlight
24m Ext.1
400W HPS
Boom Floodlight
24m Ext.2
400W HPS
Boom Floodlight
12m Ext.
400W HPS
Boom Floodlight
Section 6
400W HPS
Boom Floodlight
Boom Top
400W HPS
Air Conditioner
Indoor Unit
Air Conditioner
Outdoor Unit
Cabin GPO
Air Conditioner
Romote Controller

JPD EP MM EO Original Issue 25/06/12 A Cabin Panel X8 in X55 A3-6100.574
JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 7 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
305 305
7.13 L1 L1
306 306
7.13 L2 L2
307 307
7.13 L3 L3 14.1
308 308
7.13 N N 14.1
309 311
5.12 L EM L EMER 9.1
310 312
5.12 N EM N EMER 9.1
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
Q7 Q5B Q9B
10A
2
4
10A 10A Q15B

10kA 6kA 6kA 32A
10kA
2
4
2
4
2
4
Q15A
2
4 32A
718
15 16 17 18 X8.12 10kA X8 Distribution Panel
X8 X8 @ Cabin
PE PE 1 2
34 717
1
3
K100
(7/13)
31
715
716
E
719
718
X12
Powerpack
Distribution Panel
J8
X12.8 313
X12.9_L 13.1
250mA
314
To X9
J6 X12.9_N 13.1
J7
4 3
Slew Well JB
A10 X12.8
1 2
E
J1 J3
706
707
110 230Vac
~
Orlaco Camera System

12Vdc
8.5A
110 230Vac
~
313
314
12Vdc
8.5A
10.1
Camera cables are supplied by Manufacturer

Favco to supply power connection to Camera
X8 X8 X8 N X12
CAM24V
To X12
14.13 19 20 PE 21 22 PE 23 24 PE L X12 10.1

Poerpack JB
CAM0V
14.13
813
814
Boom Top
Camera Box
+ -
Pre-wired to
Zoom Camera
L N PE L N PE L N PE
B20
A101 A102 A103 A104
Camera L N PE
Zoom Winch Winch Winch Green Green
B21 Display 8 Pair 4
E3/21
E3/22
E3/23
Camera Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 A11 Black Black

Keyboard 7 3
Red Red
2 Pair 2
Black Black
1 1 A11
Wind Speed Wind Sensor

Display @ Cabin @ Boom Tip
Boom Butt Floodlight

400W HPS
Boom Trans. 1 Floodlight
400W HPS
Boom Trans. 2 Floodlight
400W HPS


JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 8 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
311
8.13 L EMER L EMER 11.1
312
8.13 N EMER N EMER 11.1
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
Q5 Q9 Q23A Q31 Q31A
10A 6A 6A
10A 10A 6kA 6kA
6kA 6kA 6kA
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
415
417
X8 EMER X8 EMER
PE PE 21 22 PE 23 24 PE
X8 Distribution Panel
L N E L N E @ Cabin
E
E
412
407
801
802
803
804
G9 G10
Power Supply Power Supply
1
1
S20 S10 + - + -
Q23 Q22 X17 J/B X17A J/B

L N E L N E
2
2
J5/21 J5/19
G6 G7
To DC X55
A36100590
To DC X55
A36100590
+ - + -
407
408
409
412
405
406
L N E L N E
G6A G7A
+ - + -
will be free issue item
Note: VHF/UHF radio unit
X8 EMER
X8 EMER
X8 EMER
X8 EMER
X8 EMER
18 19 20 PE 1 2 11 PE 3 4 13 PE 5 6 15 PE 7 8 17 PE
+
+
- -
PA8 Goose PA9
Mic Fist
L L1 N L L1 N L L1 N L L1 N L L1 N Mic
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
L L1 N L1 L1 MOTOROLA Foot MOTOROLA
PE
L N L N
PE
PE
GM 360 GM 340
RZ-760MKII
Switch
INTERFACE BOX
E1/1
E1/15
E1/18
E1/19
E1/20
E1/38
E1/39
E1/40
VHF UHF
Radio Radio
Cabin Light
2x18W
Outside Cabin
Light 2x36W
Upper Deck
Access Light
2x36W
Port Hoist
Winch Light
2x36W
S'Board Hoist
Winch Light
2x36W
External Access
Ladder Fluor light
2x36W
External Access
Ladder Fluor Lignt
2x36W
External Access
Ladder Fluor Lignt
2x36W

JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 9 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
313
8.11 L X12 L X12 12.1
314
8.11 N X12 N X12 12.1
1
3
1
3
1
3
Q26 Q3B Q41
16A 6A 10A
6kA 10kA 6kA
2
4
2
4
2
4
X3M1RUN
X3M2RUN
908
X3M10RUN
38
40
41
X3B
X3B
X3B
1470
1851
2161
1 3 5
X12.3
X12.3
X12.3
505
506
13
13
13
X12 K91F K91G K91H

POWER PACK
DISTRIBUTION PANLE K91F K91G
K91F K91G K91H
To DC Circuit
A36100590
14
14
14
(12) (12) (13) (12) (12)

2
505
16
X3X12 0V
506 X3B
907
510
507
510
E
X12.3
PE X12 PE X12 PE X12 PE

X12 X12 X12 X12 PE X12 PE X12 PE X12 PE
15 16 X12
1 13 14 17 18 21 22
2 PE 3 4 PE 5 6 PE 7 8 9 10 11 12 19 20
E
E
416
413
E
M10
M1 M2
32C 414
33C 413
E
32C 412
33C 413
1C
2C
LEGEND:
L N PE L N PE L N PE L N PE L N PE L N PE L N PE L N PE L N PE TOR=TOP OF RAMP
EPP=EMERGENCY POWERPACK
E41A E41B E41C E41D E41E E41F M9A M9B

E46A E46B E46C
SB Gearbox
Cooling Motor
0.55kW SB
Port Gearbox
Cooling Motor
0.55kW PORT
Motor 1
TOR Relay
Motor 2
TOR Relay
EPP Motor
TOR Relay
/10 /7 /11 /8 /9
Motor1
Port Motor
Anti-CON Heater
Motor2
SB Motor
Anti-CON Heater
Motor10
EPP Motor
Anti-CON Heater
Header Tank
Hyd. Oil Heater
500W
Main Tank
Hyd. Oil Heater
500W
Header Tank
Hyd. Oil Heater
500W
Main Tank
Hyd. Oil Heater
500W
Main Tank
Hyd. Oil Heater
500W
Main Tank
Hyd. Oil Heater
500W


JPD EP MM EO Original Issue 25/06/12 A Powerpack Panel X12 A3-6100.574
JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 10 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
311 311
9.13 L EMER L EMER
312 312 Note: All fluorescent lights are
9.13 N EMER N EMER
with battery back up
1
3
Q9A
10A
10kA
2
4
1
S21
2
X8 Distribution Panel
606
607
@ Cabin
X8 EMER X12
X8 EMER
15 16 17 PE POWER PACK
JB
E
X12 EMER
1 606 606 X12 EMER
L1LIGHT 13.7
607 607 3
N LIGHT 13.7
1
1
1
20
S15 S13 S11
2
2
2
610
606 606 606 X12 EMER
L LIGHT 13.7
606 10
608
607
G 13.7
610
607
609
607
610
607
PE
2 5 12 PE 4 7 14 PE 6 9 16 PE 8 11 18 PE
X12 EMER
X12 EMER
X12 EMER
X12 EMER
/
G/Y
L L1 N L L1 N L L1 N L L1 N L L1 N L L1 N
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
L L1 N L L1 N L L1 N L L1 N L L1 N L L1 N L L1 N L L1 N L L1 N
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
E1/21
E1/22
E1/23
E1/24
E1/25
E1/26
E1/9
E1/10
E1/11
E1/16
E1/17
E1/27
E1/6
E1/7
E1/8
External Rear
Machinery House Light
2 x 36W
Ext.Rear
Machinery House Light
2 x 36W
Upper Tank Access
Platform Light
2X36W
Upper Tank Access
Platform Light
2X36W
Upper Tank Access
Platform Light
2X36W
Lower Tank Access
Platform Light
2X36W
Internal Machinery
House Light 2 x 36W
Internal Machinery
House Light 2 x 36W
Ext.Rear Machinery
House Light 2 x 36W
Ext.Rear Machinery
House Light 2 x 36W
Light Under
Fly Winch
2X36W
Internal Machinery
House Light 2 x 36W
Internal Machinery
House Light 2 x 36W
Internal Machinery
House Light 2 x 36W
Internal Machinery
House Light 2 x 36W


JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 11 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
10.13
313
L X12
314
N X12
10.13
1
3
1
3
1
3
5.5 L OBS
5.5 N OBS
Q2A Q16 Q33
16A 10A 16A
RCD 10kA 6KA
2
4
2
4
2
4
603
701
702
X12.8
3
X12
X8.12 POWER PACK
3 4 PE 1 2 PE JB
7
1
X12 OBS X12 OBS
1102
1101
601
602
S16
X8
X8A Boom X8A
Panel
Transition
9 10 PE
Distribution
J/Box
X8.12
8
X8B 24m X8B
X12.8 Extension
8 J/box 9 10 PE
X8C X8C
Boom JB
604
605
9 10 PE
Boom Top
X12
E
E
701
702
701
702
X12 23 24 PE 25 26 PE 19 20 PE 19 20 PE
X12 X12
E
E
1102
1101
1102
1101
L N PE L N PE
L N PE L N PE
E4/31
E4/21
L N PE L N PE
L1
PE
N1
E6 E6A
E3/31
E3/32
Y5A
Boom
Aviation light
1 x 60W
Mast
Aviation light
1 x 60W
Machinery
House GPO
Mast Floodlight
400W HPS
Mast Floodlight
400W HPS
Machinery House
Heater
Machinery House
Heater


JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 12 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Note: All fluorescent lights are
with battery back up
8.11 X12.9_N
11.13 G
8.11 X12.9_L
E
11.13 N LIGHT
X9.12 1 11.13 L1LIGHT

2 PE
11.13 L LIGHT
1
3
703
704
705
1
3
Q34 Q2B
10A 16A
6KA RCD
2
4
X9 Slew Well J'Box
2
4
2
X9 EMER
1
S14
E
1203
1204
1201
1202
2
703
1205
705
PE
703
705
1205
1 2 PE X9 3 4 PE X9 Slew Well J/Box 1 4 9 PE 3 6 11 PE 5 8 13 PE
X9 X9 EMER X9 EMER X9 EMER
L L1 N L L1 N L L1 N L L1 N L L1 N L L1 N
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
L L1 N
PE
E
E
1201
1202
1203
1204
E1/41
E1/42
E1/34
E1/35
E1/36
E1/37
E1/43
L N PE
L1
PE
N1
@ Slew Well
E6B
@ Slew Well
Y5B
Internal Platform
Light 2 x 36W
Internal Platform
Light 2 x 36W
Port Slew Drive
2 x 36W
S/B Slew Drive
2 x 36W
Slew Well
Upper Level Light
2 x 36W
Slew Well
Upper Level Light
2 x 36W
Near slipring
and access ladder
2 x 36W
Slew Well
Heater
Slew Well
GPO

JPD EP MM EO Original Issue 25/06/12 A Slew well Distribution Panel X9A3-6100.574
JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 13 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
307 307
8.13 L3
308 308
8.13 N
X8.13
1 2
Sounder/Light X45 CO2

X13.8 809 Cabinet
1 2
X13 UPS JB
@ Pedestal
LS18
Limit Switch
@ CO2 Cabinet
Q46
10A 815
6KA
+
2.5mm2
(In X13)
Q32 +
805
806
2.5mm2
E15
H10
809
810
16A -
6KA -
1 2 (In X23) 810
X13 Alarm Sounder

L1 L2 PE PE
807
808
G8 UPS L N E
+V -V G5
+ -
7 8
2.5mm2
X13
811
812
16mm2
Q32A
63A
6KA
(In X3)
X3 POWER1 813 X13DC X13DC 813

X3 B+ COM24V 5.8
5 1
X4 PWR 1 813
X4 B+
To DC
A36100590 X6 PWR 1 813 813
X6 B+ CAM24V 8.5
7 3
X36 PWR 1 813
X36 B+
X3 POWER2 814 814

X3 B- COM0V 5.8
6 2
X4 PWR 2 814
To DC X4 B-
A36100590 X6 PWR 2 814 814
X6 B- CAM0V 8.5
8 4
X36 PWR 2 814
X36 B-


JPD EP MM EO Original Issue 25/06/12 A Power Supply Panel X13 A3-6100.574
JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 14 /62 D
BN,1.5mm2
1 2 3 4 5 BU,1.5mm2 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
2x10x50mm
BUSBAR
-F1
2P 6A -T1 -F2
MCB C/W ELCB 415/240V MCB 2P 6A
30MA (300VA) C/W ELCB 30MA
L1 F1-L1 T1-L
230VAC
N1 F1-L2 T1-N SUPPLY CONT.
OVERCURRENT RELAY
BK,2.5mm2 2x10x50mm REFER TO PAGE 15/4
(REYROLLE) BUSBAR
Q01
(AUX) -F3
13 CT-1 MCB 2P
2 15
6A C/W
4 16 ELCB 30MA L1.1N1.1
1600/5A
5P10,15VA
CT-2
19
14
8 20
1600/5A
LIMH
5P10,15VA
CT-3
7 23 SWITCH
24
1600/5A
5P10,15VA
15 E
24 27
22 28
1x10x50mm BUSBAR
7SR1102
14 PANEL VENT. SPACEHEATER
-R4 DIGITAL METER LIGHT FAN HEATER ON
13 TKG7750
X3 AIN2 7 IL1-A S1 N
To DC X3 X29 AIN+ A01+ E1
A36100590 IL1-B S2 -FA
X29 AIN- A01- E2
1600/5A
FUSE
CL1., 15VA
X3 0V 42 IL2-A S1 L
A02+ E3 (2x900A)
A02- IL2-B S2
E4
1600/5A
24VDC
CL1., 15VA
SUPPLY CONT. IL3-A S1
X1 E5
REFER TO PAGE 15/4 IL3-B S2
E6
1600/5A
CL1., 15VA
X1
F6/24V
L2
L/+
-F6 -F6 N2
N/-
2x10x50mm BUSBAR
1x10x50mm BUSBAR
2P MCB 6A 2P MCB 6A
F2.1/V1
F1
F2.2/V2
F2 -Q01
F2.3/V3 1600A 1 3 5
F3
UVT
F4
X2
I> I> I>
BK,2.5mm2
2 4 6 L1 L2 L3
-F5
3P MCB 6A
-G1
SOFTSTARTER
BK
GY
T1 T2 T3
R4
BK UVT-A
9 5
GY 2x10x50mm
BUSBAR
2x10x50mm
XDC-2/0V
BUSBAR
XDC-3
XDC-1/F3-24V
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
XDC-4/UVT
XDC: 1 2 XDC: 3 4
BN BK GY
(+) (-) (+) (-) 6.8 X29L11 U1 V1 W1
6.8 X29L12 M
32
39
42
3
6.8
X3B
X3B
X3B
X29L13
6.8 X29L14
W2 V2 U2
6.8 X29L21
X29DC-2
X29DC-3
X29DC-4
6.8 X29L22
6.8 X29L23
To
A36100575
24VDC SUPPLY 6.8 X29L24
To DC X3
A36100590 6.8 X29L31
6.8 X29L32
6.8 X29L33
6.8 X29L34


JPD EP MM EO Original Issue 25/06/12 A Motor 1 Control Panel X29 A3-6100.574
JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 15 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
01 RD1.5mm2
12
-R2
BN,1.5mm2
BU,1.5mm2
8
02
230VAC SUPPLY L2
FROM STOP A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2
PAGE 14/10 N2 P.B T1
11 11 15
02A T2
To DC X3 14 14 18
T1 T1 2T1
A36100590 XC: 7 18 X3B
24VDC SUPPLY T2 T2 2T2
FROM X29C-7 9 THERMISTOR THERMISTOR THERMISTOR
F7/24V RESET
PAGE 14/2 R5A 5 RELAY RELAY RELAY 3T1
REMOTETo DCP.B
X3 3T2
STOP A36100590
23 24 23 24 25 28
To DC X3
A36100590 19 05
X29C-8
BK,1.5mm2
GY,1.5mm2
XC: 8 X3B To DC X3
A36100590
03
01A 13
REMOTE
START 12
To DC X3 START
A36100590 P.B 20
-R5A -R5
X29C-9
XC: 9 X3B
9 04 N2
9 9 9
-R5 -R3 -R2 -R1
OPERATOR
5 5 1 A1 L+ IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 T1 T2 PANEL
1 5
PE Softstarter Contact
A2 13 14 23 24 33 34 95 96 98
13 12 06 07 08
09 11 10
L2
14 14 14
TRIP STOP RUN
-R1 -R3 -R2
(R) (G) (A) (R) (G)
13 13 13
N2
THERMISTOR TOP OF RUN TOP OF O/L
WARNING RAMP RAMP TRIP
XH-1
XH-2
XH-3
XH-4
XH-5
XH-6
-R3 -R5 -R4

-R1 -R2
6 10 3 11 6 2 8 12 8 12
XC-1
XC-2
XC-3
XC-4
XC-5
XC-6
XC-10
XC-11
XC-12
XC-13
Rd,1.5mm2
XH: 1 2 3 XH: 4 5 6 XH: 7 8 9 XH: 10 11 12 XH: 13 14 15 XC: 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13
PANEL
FIELD
To DC X3 THERMISTOR OVERCURRENT To DC X3
A36100590 STOP A36100590
2
9
2
1
TO MOTOR TO MOTOR TO MOTOR SPARE SPARE

X3 EDI
X3 EDI
WARNING TRIP
X3B
THERMISTOR THERMISTOR THERMISTOR X29C-1 X29C-6

X29C-2 X29C-5
TOP OF RAMP To DC X3 TRIP
A36100590


JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 16 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
BN,1.5mm2
BU,1.5mm2
2x10x50mm
BUSBAR
-F1
2P 6A -T1 -F2
30MA (300VA) C/W ELCB 30MA
L1 F1-L1 T1-L
230VAC
N1 F1-L2 T1-N SUPPLY CONT.
OVERCURRENT RELAY
BK,2.5mm2 2x10x50mm REFER TO PAGE 17/4
(REYROLLE) BUSBAR
Q01
(AUX) -F3
13 CT-1 MCB 2P
2 15
6A C/W
4 16 ELCB 30MA L1.1N1.1
1600/5A
5P10,15VA
CT-2
19
14
8 20
1600/5A
LIMH
5P10,15VA
CT-3
7 23 SWITCH
24
1600/5A
5P10,15VA
15 E
24 27
22 28
1x10x50mm BUSBAR
7SR1102
14 PANEL VENT. SPACEHEATER
-R4 DIGITAL METER LIGHT FAN HEATER ON
13 TKG7750
X3 AIN2 IL1-A S1 N
To DC X3 X30 AIN+ A01+ E1
A36100590 12 IL1-B S2
X30 AIN- A01- E2 -FA
1600/5A
FUSE
CL1., 15VA
X3 0V 43 IL2-A S1 L
A02+ E3 (2x900A)
IL2-B S2
A02- E4
1600/5A
24VDC
CL1., 15VA
SUPPLY CONT. IL3-A S1
A E5
REFER TO PAGE 17/4 IL3-B S2
E6
1600/5A
CL1., 15VA
X1
F6/24V
L2
L/+
-F6 -F6 N2
N/-
2x10x50mm BUSBAR
1x10x50mm BUSBAR
2P MCB 6A 2P MCB 6A
F2.1/V1
F1
F2.2/V2
F2 -Q01
F2.3/V3 1600A 1 3 5
F3
UVT
F4
X2
I> I> I>
BK,2.5mm2
2 4 6 L1 L2 L3
-F5
3P MCB 6A
-G1
SOFTSTARTER
BK
GY
T1 T2 T3
R4
BK UVT-A
9 5
GY 2x10x50mm
BUSBAR
2x10x50mm
XDC-2/0V
BUSBAR
XDC-3
XDC-1/F3-24V
L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
XDC-4/UVT
XDC: 1 2 XDC: 3 4 BN BK GY
(+) (-) (+) (-) 6.8 X30L11 U1 V1 W1
6.8 X30L12
M
34
37
43
6.8 X30L13 3
X3B
X3B
X3B
6.8 X30L14
W2 V2 U2
6.8 X30L21
6.8 X30L22
X30DC-2
X30DC-3
X30DC-4
6.8 X30L23
6.8 X30L24
To
A36100575
24VDC SUPPLY
To DC X3 6.8 X30L31
A36100590
6.8 X30L32
6.8 X30L33
6.8 X30L34


JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 17 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
01 RD1.5mm2
12
-R2
BN,1.5mm2
BU,1.5mm2
8
02
230VAC SUPPLY L2
11 11 15
02A T2
To DC X3 14 14 18
A36100590 T1 T1 2T1
XC: 7 22 X3B
X30C-7 9
FROM RESET THERMISTOR THERMISTOR THERMISTOR
PAGE 16/2 F7/24V RELAY RELAY RELAY 3T1
P.B
REMOTE To DC R5A 5
X3 3T2
STOP A36100590
23 24 23 24 25 28
To DC X3
A36100590
6
23 X3B 05
X30C-8
BK,1.5mm2
GY,1.5mm2
XC: 8 To DC X3
A36100590
03
01A 13
REMOTE
START 12
To DC X3 START
A36100590 P.B 24
-R5A -R5
X30C-9 XC: 9 X3B
9 04 N2
9 9 9
-R5 -R3 -R2 -R1
OPERATOR
1 5
A2 13 14 23 24 33 34 95 96 98
13 12 06 07 08
09 11 10
L2
14 14 14
TRIP STOP RUN
-R1 -R3 -R2
(R) (G) (A) (R) (G)
13 13 13
N2
XH-1
XH-2
XH-3
XH-4
XH-5
XH-6
-R3 -R5 -R4

-R1 -R2
6 10 3 11 6 2 8 12 8 12
XC-1
XC-2
XC-3
XC-4
XC-5
XC-6
XC-10
XC-11
XC-12
XC-13
Rd,1.5mm2
XH: 1 2 3 XH: 4 5 6 XH: 7 8 9 XH: 10 11 12 XH: 13 14 15 XC: 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13
PANEL
FIELD
To DC X3 THERMISTOR OVERCURRENT To DC X3
TO MOTOR TO MOTOR TO MOTOR SPARE SPARE A36100590 STOP A36100590
45
13
46
47
WARNING TRIP
X3B
X3B
X3B

X30C-2 X30C-5
TOP OF RAMP To DC X3 TRIP
A36100590


JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 18 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
6.8 X31L32
6.8 X31L31
6.8 X31L22
6.8 X31L21
6.8 X31L12
6.8 X31L11
-F1
-XM: 1 2 3 2P 6A -T1 -F2
DIGITAL METER R Y B C/W ELCB 30MA
BK,2.5mm2 30MA (300VA)
TKG7750 L1 F1-L1 T1-L
230VAC
X2 F2.1(6A) SUPPLY CONT.
F2.1/V1 N1 F1-L2 T1-N
V1 PAGE 19/4
F2.2/V2 F2.2(6A)
V2
-F3
F2.3/V3 F2.3(6A) MCB 2P
V3 6A C/W
ELCB 30MA L1.1N1.1
VN
F1.3-L
L/+
N 2 LIMH
N/- 2x90mm
SWITCH
-Q01
X3 AIN2 400A 1 3 5
X31 AIN+ A01+ IL1 IL1-A
To DC X3 UVT
A36100590 11
X31 AIN- A01- IL1-B
IL1
X3 0V 44 IL2-A
A02+ IL2
IL2-B I> I> I>
A02- IL2 2 4 6 PANEL VENT. SPACEHEATER
BK,2.5mm2
IL3-A
A IL3 2 LIGHT FAN HEATER ON
IL3-B 2x90mm
IL3
S1
X1 N
S2
400/5A
CL.1,15VA
S1
L
S2
400/5A
CL.1,15VA
S1
S2
400/5A
CL.1,15VA
OVERCURRENT RELAY
Q01 (REYROLLE)
Q01-Y
Q01-B
Q01-R
(AUX)
13 CT-1
2 15
4 16
400/5A
5P10,15VA
CT-2
19
14
400/5A
8 20
24VDC
5P10,15VA
CT-3
SUPPLY CONT. 7 23
PAGE 19/4
400/5A
24
5P10,15VA
15 E
24 27 -FA
F6/24V
22 28 FUSE
(400A)
-F6 -F6
2P MCB 6A 2P MCB 6A 14
FA-Y
FA-B
FA-R
-R4 R4
UVT-A
13
9 5
2
2x90mm
L1 L2 L3
-G1
Softstarter
T1 T2 T3
2
2x90mm
XDC-3
XDC-4/UVT
XDC-2/0V
XDC-1/F2-24V
XP-2/Y
XP-3/B
XP-1/R
XDC: 1 2 XDC: 3 4 -XP: 1 2 3
PANEL
FIELD (+) (-) (+) (-)
U1 V1 W1
To DC X3
A36100575 M
43
37
34
X3B
X3B
X3B
X31DC-2 3
X31DC-3 X31DC-4
To DC X3 To DC X3
A36100575 24VDC SUPPLY A36100575


JPD EP MM EO Original Issue 25/06/12 A Emer.Motor Control Panel X31A3-6100.574
JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 19 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
01 RD1.5mm2
12
-R2
BN,1.5mm2
BU,1.5mm2
8
02
230VAC SUPPLY L2
11 11 15
02A T2
To DC X3 14 14 18
A36100590 T1 T1 2T1
XC: 7 28 X3B
FROM X31C-7 9
RESET THERMISTOR THERMISTOR THERMISTOR
PAGE 18/2 F7/24V RELAY RELAY RELAY 3T1
REMOTE P.B R5A 5
STOP To DC X3
3T2
A36100590
23 24 23 24 25 28
To DC X3
A36100590 25 X3B
6 05
X31C-8
BK,1.5mm2
GY,1.5mm2
XC: 8 To DC X3
A36100590
03
01A 13
REMOTE
START 12
To DC X3 START
A36100590
P.B
X31C-9 -R5A -R5
XC: 26X3B
9 26
9 04 N2
9 9 9
-R5 -R3 -R2 -R1
OPERATOR
1 5
A2 13 14 23 24 33 34 95 96 98
13 12 06 07 08
09 11 10
L2
14 14 14
TRIP STOP RUN
-R1 -R3 -R2
(R) (G) (A) (R) (G)
13 13 13
N2
XH-1
XH-2
XH-3
XH-4
XH-5
XH-6
-R3 -R5 -R4

-R1 -R2
6 10 3 11 6 2 8 12 8 12
XC-1
XC-2
XC-3
XC-4
XC-5
XC-6
XC-10
XC-11
XC-12
XC-13
Rd,1.5mm2
XH: 1 2 3 XH: 4 5 6 XH: 7 8 9 XH: 10 11 12 XH: 13 14 15 XC: 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13
PANEL
FIELD
To DC X3 To DC X3
TO MOTOR TO MOTOR TO MOTOR SPARE SPARE A36100590 STOP THERMISTOR OVERCURRENT A36100590
48
15
49
50
WARNING TRIP
X3B
X3B
X3B

X31C-2 X31C-5
TOP OF RAMP TRIP


JPD EP MM EO Original Issue 25/06/12 A Emer.Motor Control Panel X31A3-6100.574
JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 20 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
X8A Junction Box X8B Junction Box
1 3 5 7 9 11 1 5 9
1 3 5 7 9 11 1 5 9
2 4 6 8 10 12 2 6 10
2 4 6 8 10 12 2 6 10
PE
X8A
PE
X8B
2 4 6 8 10 12 3 7 11
2 4 6 8 10 12 3 7 11
1 3 5 7 9 11 4 8 12
1 3 5 7 9 11 4 8 12
X8C Junction Box X9 Junction Box
1 3 5 7 9 11 1 5 9
1 5 9 1 3 5 7 9 13 1 5 9
2 4 6 8 10 12 2 6 10
2 6 10 2 4 6 8 10 14 2 6 10
PE
X8C
X9
PE
X9EMER
2 4 6 8 10 12 3 7 11
3 7 11 2 4 6 8 10 14 3 7 11
1 3 5 7 9 11 4 8 12
4 8 12 1 3 5 7 9 13 4 8 12
X12 Junction Box X13 Junction Box
1 3 5 7 5 7 1 3 1 3 5 7 9 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 1 3 5 7 9 13 15 17 19 21 23 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29 1 3 5 7 1 1 3 5 7
X12
X12
X12
X12
2 4 6 8 6 8 2 4 2 4 6 8 10 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 2 4 6 8 10 14 16 18 20 22 24 2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30 2 4 6 8 2 2 4 6 8
X12
X12
X12
X12
X13
1 2 3 4
X12.3
X12PE
X12PE
X12.3
X12OBS
X12OBS
X13.8
X13DC
X12EMER
X12EMER
1 2 3 4
2 4 6 8 6 8 2 4 2 4 6 8 10 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 2 4 6 8 10 14 16 18 20 22 24 3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31 2 4 6 8 2 2 4 6 8
X12
1 3 5 7 5 7 1 3 1 3 5 7 9 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 1 3 5 7 9 13 15 17 19 21 23 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 1 3 5 7 1 1 3 5 7


JPD EP MM EO Original Issue 25/06/12 A Terminal Layout A3-6100.574
JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 21 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
X55 JB
LHS
1 3 5 7 9 13 15 17 19 21 23
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27
5 7
2 4 6 8 10 14 16 18 20 22 24
X8
X8
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
X8.12
X8.12
X8.12
X8.12
6 8
X8EMER
X8
X8
X8
X8
X8
1 2 3 4
X8 X8 X8 X8 X8 X8 X8 X8 X8 X8 X8 X8 X8 X8
2 4 6 8 10 14 16 18 20 22 24
1 2 3 4 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
D-UT16
6 8
D-UTTB 2,5/4
X8
D-UTTB 2,5/4
D-UTTB 2,5/4
X8
1 3 5 7 9 13 15 17 19 21 23
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27
5 7
Q5 Q9 Q9A Q15A Q31 Q31A
X8
X8
11/44 8/34 5/24 2/14
1 5 9 13 17 21
10/42 7/32 4/22 1/12

X8PE
2 6 10 14 18 22
X8
X8PE
X8PE
X8
1
C4-A40X/AC230V
1
3 7 11 15 19 23
Q5A Q7 Q9B Q45 Q5B Q15B K100
D-UTTB 2,5/4
4 8 12 16 20 24 14/21 13/A1
12/41 9/31 6/21 3/11
X8
X8
Q1 Q1A Q2 Q15


JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 22 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
X55 JB NOTES: X55 JB

RHS (TOP) X55 JB RHS components are addressed RHS (BOTTOM)
in DC drawing A3-6100.590.
These components are not addressed
in this document equipment schedule.
1 1 5 9 13 1 5 9 13 1 3 5 E 9 11 1 5 9 13 1 3 5 7 9
2 2 2 1 3 5 7 9 2 2 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 6 10 14 2 6 10 14 2 4 6 E 10 12 2 6 10 14 2 4 6 8 10
2 4 6 8 10
G4
X5/3
0 0 0 0 0 0
X5 T3
0 0 0
X5 T1
X5 T2
X5 SLI
X15 K1
2 4 6 8 10 2 4 6 E 10 12 2 4 6 8 10
3 3 7 11 15 3 7 11 15 3 7 11 15
X15 PWR
QD3BQD5B QD6C QD8/1 QD22 QD23 QD27 QD28QD29A
2A 20A 6A 10A 16A 16A 10A 2A 2A 1 3 5 E 9 11 1 3 5 7 9
1 3 5 7 9 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 4 4 8 12 16 4 8 12 16 4 8 12 16
24969 24975 24972 24973 24974 24974 24973 24969 24969
1 5 1 5 1 5 9 E 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 1 5 9 13 17
1 5 9 13 17 21
1 3 5 7 9 E 11 13 1 3 E 1 3 E 1 3 E 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 1 5 9 13 E
2 6 2 6 2 6 10 E 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 2 6 10 14 18
2 6 10 14 18 22
2 4 6 8 10 E 12 14 2 4 E 2 4 E 2 4 E 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 2 6 10 14 E
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
X15 0V
3 7 3 7 3 7 11 E
X15 RS
X15 CAN
X15 ENC
3 7 11 15 19
X15 CAN 2
X5 0V
X5 J1
X5 J2
X5 J4
X5 J5
3 7 11 15 19 23 2 4 6 8 10 E 12 14 2 4 E 2 4 E 2 4 E 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 3 7 11 15 E
X5 CAN
X5 POWER
4 8 4 8 4 8 12 E 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17
4 8 12 16 20
4 8 12 16 20 24 1 3 5 7 9 E 11 13 1 3 E 1 3 E 1 3 E 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 4 8 12 16 E
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 1 5 1 5 9 13
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 2 6 2 6 10 14
X15T2
X15T1
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 26 28 30 32
X15 DDI
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36
X15 AIN
3 7 3 7 11 15
X15 DDO
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35
4 8 4 8 12 16


JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 23 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
X8A X8B X8C X9

Boom Junction Box Boom Junction Box Boom Junction Box Slew Well Junction Box
Boom Section 2 Boom Section 3 Boom Top Section
External Dimension: W300mm H300mm D160mm External Dimension: W300mm H300mm D160mm External Dimension: W300mm H300mm D160mm External Dimension: W300mm H300mm D160mm
1 5 9 1 3 5 7 9 13 1 5 9
1 3 5 7 9 11 1 5 9 1 3 5 7 9 11 1 5 9
1 3 5 7 9 11 1 5 9
2 6 10 2 4 6 8 10 14 2 6 10
X9
X9
X9EMER
2 4 6 8 10 12 2 6 10 2 4 6 8 10 12 2 6 10
2 4 6 8 10 12 2 6 10
3 7 11 2 4 6 8 10 14 3 7 11
D-UTTB 2,5/4 D-UTTB 2,5/4 D-UTTB 2,5/4

2 4 6 8 10 12 3 7 11 2 4 6 8 10 12 3 7 11
2 4 6 8 10 12 3 7 11
D-UTTB 2,5/4 D-UTTB 2,5/4 D-UTTB 2,5/4 D-UTTB 2,5/4
4 8 12 1 3 5 7 9 13 4 8 12
D-UTTB 2,5/4 D-UTTB 2,5/4
1 3 5 7 9 11 4 8 12 1 3 5 7 9 11 4 8 12
1 3 5 7 9 11 4 8 12
Q2B Q34
X8A PE X8B PE X8C PE X9 X9EMER PE
FOR TERMINAL DETAILS)

(NOTE: REFER TO PAGE 20

MOUNTING PLATE MOUNTING PLATE MOUNTING PLATE MOUNTING PLATE
X8A X8B X8C X9

Boom Junction Box Boom Junction Box Boom Junction Box Slew Well Junction Box
Boom Section 2 Boom Section 3 Boom Top Section
S14
240V CIRCUIT INSIDE

240V CIRCUIT INSIDE 240V CIRCUIT INSIDE 240V CIRCUIT INSIDE ISOLATE ELSEWHERE
ISOLATE ELSEWHERE ISOLATE ELSEWHERE ISOLATE ELSEWHERE BEFORE OPENING
BEFORE OPENING BEFORE OPENING BEFORE OPENING
Panel Door
Panel Door Panel Door Panel Door
50 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 50 50 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 50
50 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 50 50 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 50
60 60
60 60
M25 M20 M20 M20 M20 M25 M25 M25 M20 M20
M25 M25 M20 M20 M20 M25 M25 M20 M20 M20
DRAIN 50 DRAIN
DRAIN DRAIN 50 PLUG PLUG
50 PLUG 50 PLUG
M25 M20 M20 M20 M25 M25 M25 M20

M25 M25 M20 M20 M25 M20 M20 M20
40 40
40 40
GLAND PLATE GLAND PLATE

GLAND PLATE GLAND PLATE


JPD EP MM EO Original Issue 25/06/12 A X8A, X8B, X8C, X9 Layout A3-6100.574
JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 24 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
X12
Powerpack Distribution Panel
External Dimension: W600mm H600mm D210mm
Mounting Plate: W549mm H570mm 150 100 100 100 150
10
40
120
26861
160
Q2A Q3B Q16 Q26 Q33 Q41 Q15C 100
20
S11 S13 S15
5/22 4/12 5/22 4/12 5/22 4/12
1 3 5 7
6/24 3/14 6/24 3/14 6/24 3/14
2 4 6 8
100
X12.3
S2-S S2-S S2-S
X8
X8
X12.3
K91F K91G K91H
120
2 4 6 8
D-UTTB 2,5/4
8/21 1/11 8/21 1/11 8/21 1/11
1 3 5 7
7/A2 2/A1 7/A2 2/A1 7/A2 2/A1
K91A K91B K91C X12.3
20 100
5 7 1 3 1 3 5 7 9 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 1 3 5 7 9 13 15 17 19 21 23 1 5 9 13 17 21 25 29
X12
X12
X12
X12
6 8 2 4 2 4 6 8 10 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 2 4 6 8 10 14 16 18 20 22 24 2 6 10 14 18 22 26 30
X12
X12
X12OBS
X12OBS
X12
X12
X12EMER
X12EMER
X12PE
X12PE
1 2 3 4
120
D-UT161 2 3 4
6 8 2 4 2 4 6 8 10 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 2 4 6 8 10 14 16 18 20 22 24 3 7 11 15 19 23 27 31
X12 D-UTTB 2,5/4 D-UTTB 2,5/4 D-UTTB 2,5/4 D-UTTB 2,5/4 D-UTTB 2,5/4
5 7 1 3 1 3 5 7 9 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 1 3 5 7 9 13 15 17 19 21 23 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32
400V/240V CIRCUIT INSIDE

X12 X12 X12OBS X12 X12EMER X12PE ISOLATE ELSEWHERE
180 BEFORE OPENING
40

40
MOUNTING PLATE
534 ENCLOSURE DOOR

518
9
43
M25 M25 M25 M25 M25 M20 M20 M20 M20 M20 M20 M20
35
M25 M25 M25 M25 M20 M20 M20 M20 M20 M20 M20
133
149
35
M25 M25 M25 M20 M20 M20 M20 M20 M20 M20
36
67 30 30 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 42
GLAND PLATE
Note: Spares holes need to be blanked off with IP66 Plugs


JPD EP MM EO Original Issue 25/06/12 A X12 JB Arrangement A3-6100.574
JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 25 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
X13
UPS/Power Supply
Junction Box
G8
UPS
25803 25822
Q46 Q32 Q32A
13 14 - - -
DC
OK I<IN + + +
Output DC 24V 10A
1 3 5 7 1 1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8 2 2 4 6 8
X13
X13.8
X13DC
2 4 6 8 2 2 4 6 8
G5
1 3 5 7 1 1 3 5 7
240V CIRCUIT INSIDE
QUINT POWER
Input AC 100-240V ISOLATE ELSEWHERE
X13 X13.8 X13DC L N PE BEFORE OPENING


JPD EP MM EO Original Issue 25/06/12 A X13 JB Arrangement A3-6100.574
JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 26 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
X55
Cabin Junction Box
External Dimension: W1000mm H1800mm D400mm
Mounting Plate: W899mm H1696mm
ENCLOSURE DOOR
Note: All switches are 30.5mm hole mounting
S10 S12 S13 S16
X55 JB
RHS (TOP)
S20 S21 Spare Spare
400V/240V CIRCUIT INSIDE

ISOLATE BEFORE OPENING
External
operator
Main CB
X55 JB
LHS
Gland Plate
M32 M25 M20 M20 M25
(NOTE: REFER TO PAGE 21 &

22 FOR TERMINAL DETAILS)
X55 JB
RHS (BOTTOM)
Note: Spares holes need to be
blanked off with IP66 Plugs
Left side entries are as per
DWG A36100574. right side
entries are from DWGA36100575
and indicative only


JPD EP MM EO Original Issue 25/06/12 A X55 Panel Layout A3-6100.574
JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 27 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
1400 500 1400
PERSPEX
VENT. BUSBAR
FILTER
2x900A
FUSES
OVERCURRENT
RELAY DIGITAL
METER
DIGITAL CTs
METER
OVERCURRRENT OPERATOR
PANEL
RELAY OPERATOR
PANEL
RUN STOP TRIP TOP OFTHERMISTOR
RAMP WARNING
ON INDICATOR
HEATER ON
START STOP RESET
INDICATOR
3P MCCB START,STOP & RESET P.B.

(1600A) 3P MCCB SOFTSTARTER
RUN,STOP,TRIP,TOP OF RAMP
& THERMISTOR WARNING (1600A)
INDICATOR
2000
OPEN OPEN
PUSH PUSH
FRONT REAR
VT
XH
INCOMING MOTOR TERMINAL MOTOR 6nos. FUSES

BUSBAR OUTGOINGFOR MOTOROUTGOING
BUSBAR THERMISTORBUSBAR 5nos. RELAY
VENT. CONTROL TERMINAL

FAN EARTH
STUD (XC) & (XDC)
FRONT VIEW (EXTERNAL) SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW (INTERNAL)
REMOVABLE
GLAND PLATE REAR REAR
(3mm BRASS PLATE)
1400 1400
26 26 66 1269 66
39
59
All cable glands are M32
525
408
525
446
14,5
59
39
FRONT FRONT
SECTION A1-A1 (BOTTOM VIEW C/W REMOVABLE GLAND PLATE) SECTION A2-A2 (FOOT PRINT FOR SOFTSTARTER PANEL)


JPD EP MM EO Original Issue 25/06/12 A 800kW Motor Starter Panel A3-6100.574
JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 28 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
600 500 600
PANEL LIGHT
RELAYS
VENT.
FILTER DUCTING
3P MCCB
3P MCCB (400A) VT
(400A)
OVERCURRRENT
OVERCURRENT DIGITAL
RELAY METER
RELAY
CT MCB 2P
DIGITAL C/W ELCB
METER CT CT
OPERATOR
PANEL
OPERATOR CT
PANEL
RUN STOP TRIP TOP OF RAMP THERMISTOR WARNINGON INDICATOR
CT CT
HEATER ON
INDICATOR PERSPEX
START STOP RESET
START,STOP & RESET P.B.
1800
OPEN RUN,STOP,TRIP,TOP OF RAMP
PUSH
FRONT REAR
& THERMISTOR WARNING
400A
INDICATOR FUSES
SOFTSTARTER
SPACE
HEATER
INCOMING OUTGOING XDC

TERM. BLOCKTERM. BLOCK TERMINALS
XC
XH
XC
XDC
VENT. TERMINALS
FAN EARTH TERMINAL FOR
STUD MOTOR
THERMISTOR
EARTH
STUD
FRONT VIEW (EXTERNAL) SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW (INTERNAL)


JPD EP MM EO Original Issue 25/06/12 A EPP Motor Starter Panel A3-6100.574
JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 29 /62 D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
REAR REAR
REMOVABLE
GLAND PLATE
(3mm BRASS
PLATE)
600 600
30 270 270 30 75 450 75
45
67
Cable glands are M40 Cable gland is M32
500
366
500
410
14,5
67
45
FRONT FRONT
SECTION A1-A1 SECTION A2-A2

(BOTTOM VIEW C/W REMOVABLE GLAND PLATE) (FOOT PRINT FOR SOFTSTARTER PANEL)


JPD EP MM EO Original Issue 25/06/12 A EPP Motor Starter Panel A3-6100.574
JACK UP BARGE

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.23.01
1814 PC1000 30 /62 D
A10 Camera Control Box 0504720 Special Orlaco 1

A11 Ultrasonic Wind Sensor OMC-118 Observator Instruments 1 Free Issue Item
A11 Wind Speed Display OMC-139 Observator Instruments 1 Free Issue Item
A101 Auto Focus Zoom Camera 0103980 Orlaco 1 Haz Area Certified
A101 Oil Damped Camera Bracket 0701042 Orlaco 1

A102 CCTV Camera Type CCC* Ex-M 0181**0 Orlaco 1
B20 LCD 7in Monitor with Sun hat 0208620 Orlaco 1

B21 Auto Focus Control Panel Serial 0502610 Orlaco 1
E1/1 Fluorescent 2x18W 230V 90min Bat Backup TNAML B1218B1A Technor 1 Certified for Zone 1 and 21


JPD EP MM EO Original Issue 25/06/12 A
JACK UP BARGE Electrical Equipment Schedule A3-6100.574

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.25.01 1814 PC1000 31 /62 D
E3/21 Ex Protected PX floodlights PX0440 HS_400W Crouse Hinds/CEAG 1 Certified for Zone 1 & 21
E4/21 Aviation Light, 230VAC TAURUS IQL85 IMT 1 Oredr Code: EQNI4BGOE241
E4/31 Aviation Light, 230VAC TAURUS IQL85 IMT 1 Oredr Code: EQNI4BGOE241
E6 Electrical Heater 1000W 230V A10 SAN Electro Heat 1
E6A Electrical Heater 1000W 230V A10 SAN Electro Heat 1

E6B Electrical Heater 1000W 230V A10 SAN Electro Heat 1
E15 Sounder and Strobe Light - Strobe 809-307277 Comax 1
E41A Hydraulic Oil Heater Refer Hydraulic circuit 1

E41B Hydraulic Oil Heater Refer Hydraulic circuit 1
E41C Hydraulic Oil Heater Refer Hydraulic circuit 1
E41D Hydraulic Oil Heater Refer Hydraulic circuit 1



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.25.01 1814 PC1000 32 /62 D
E41E Hydraulic Oil Heater Refer Hydraulic circuit 1

E41F Hydraulic Oil Heater Refer Hydraulic circuit 1
E46A Motor Anti-condensation Heater Part of Motor 1

E46B Motor Anti-condensation Heater Part of Motor 1
E46C Motor Anti-condensation Heater Part of Motor 1

G5 MEANWELL RSP-2400-24 100A RSP-2400-24 MEANWELL 1
G6 Universal AC/DC power Supply N163S Sailor 1 Free Issue by Client
G6A Universal AC/DC power Supply N163S Sailor 1 Free Issue by Client
G7 Universal AC/DC power Supply N163S Sailor 1 Free Issue by Client

G7A Universal AC/DC power Supply N163S Sailor 1 Free Issue by Client
G8 Powerware 9130 2000R 2U Rack Mounted PW9130G2000R-XL2U-AU Eaton 1

G9 Interface Power Supply 24VDC/20A QUINT-PS-100-240VAC/24VDC/20 Phoenix Contact 1 Input 100VAC - 240VAC
G10 Interface Power Supply 24VDC/20A QUINT-PS-100-240VAC/24VDC/20 Phoenix Contact 1 Input 100VAC - 240VAC
H10 Sounder and Strobe Light - Sounder YL8 Comax 1
K91F 2 Pole Relay with diode Vpolarity DC24V C2-A20FX/DC24V Releco 1
K91F 2 Pole Relay Socket 2 levels S2-S Releco 1
K91G 2 Pole Relay with diode Vpolarity DC24V C2-A20FX/DC24V Releco 1

K91G 2 Pole Relay Socket 2 levels S2-S Releco 1
K91H 2 Pole Relay with diode Vpolarity DC24V C2-A20FX/DC24V Releco 1
K91H 2 Pole Relay Socket 2 levels S2-S Releco 1
K100 4 Pole Relay with Indicator AC230V C4-A40X/AC230V Releco 1

K100 4 Pole Relay Socket S4-B Releco 1
LS18 Limit Switch Snap action ZK 236-11Z Schmersal/NHP 1
M9A Gearbox oil cooling Motor Refer to G'Box Cooling Ckt 1

M9B Gearbox oil cooling Motor Refer to G'Box Cooling Ckt 1
N1 Slipring KK450 RD Specimas/Cavotec 1 1180.6360/3120.524.312.66/213S/R
Q1 Circuit Breaker C60N 2P 2A 6kA C-Curve 25812 Schneider Electric 1

Q1A Circuit Breaker C60N 2P 25A 6kA C-curve 25819 Schneider Electric 1
Q2 RCD 2P Circuit Breaker 16A, 10KA, 240VAC 26859 Schneider Electric 1
Q2A RCD 2P Circuit Breaker 16A, 10KA, 240VAC 26859 Schneider Electric 1



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.25.01 1814 PC1000 33 /62 D
Q2B RCD 2P Circuit Breaker 16A, 10KA, 240VAC 26859 Schneider Electric 1
Q3B Circuit Breaker C60H 2P 6A 10kA C-Curve 25657 Schneider Electric 1
Q5 Circuit Breaker C60N 2P 10A 6kA C-curve 25816 Schneider Electric 1

Q5B Circuit Breaker C60N 2P 10A 6kA C-curve 25816 Schneider Electric 1
Q7 Circuit Breaker C60H 2P 10A 10kA C-curve 25658 Schneider Electric 1
Q15 Circuit Breaker C60H 4P 40A 10kA C-Curve 25017 Schneider Electric 1
Q15 Padlocking device suitable for C60 MGN26380 Schneider Electric 1
Q15 Extended Rotary Handle with Door Interlooking ROTDIHANDLE Schneider Electric 1
Q15A Circuit Breaker C60H 2P 16A 10kA C-curve 25659 Schneider Electric 1
Q15A Padlocking device suitable for C60 MGN26380 Schneider Electric 1

Q15B Circuit Breaker C60H 2P 32A 10kA C-curve 25662 Schneider Electric 1
Q15C Circuit Breaker C60H 2P 6A 10kA C-Curve 25657 Schneider Electric 1
Q15C Padlocking device suitable for C60 MGN26380 Schneider Electric 1
Q31A Circuit Breaker C60N 2P 6A 6kA C-Curve 25815 Schneider Electric 1

Q32A Circuit Breaker C60N 2P 50A 6kA C-Curve 25822 Schneider Electric 1

S10 Selector Switch Actuator 2 Pos Flush Mount 704.411.018 EAO 1
S10 NO Contact, Hard Silver contact, Slow-make switching 704.910.1 EAO 1



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.25.01 1814 PC1000 34 /62 D






W201 RFOU 0.6/1kV 5G 25mm2 P1/P8 800074 Draka 1 Braided Cable
W202 BFOU 0.6/1kV 3G 4mm2 P5/P12 800250 Draka 1 Braided Cable

W204 1C 70mm2 UX 1000V P15 Earthing wire 800806 Draka 1 Flame retardant Halogen Free
W206 BFOU(I) 1 PAIR 0.75mm2 S3/S7 893200 Draka 1 Braided Cable

W207 BFOU(I) 1 PAIR 1.5mm2 S3/S7 893400 Draka 1 Braided Cable
W220A BFOU(I) 1 PAIR 2.5mm2 S3/S7 893600 Draka 1 Braided Cable
W220AA BFOU(I) 1 PAIR 2.5mm2 S3/S7 893600 Draka 1 Braided Cable

W233 2C 6mm2 XLPE/EVA/GSWB/EVA 2C 6mm2 Draka 1 Flame retardant Halogen Free
W233A 2C 6mm2 XLPE/EVA/GSWB/EVA 2C 6mm2 Draka 1 Flame retardant Halogen Free
W233B BFOU 0.6/1kV 2X 2.5/6 P5/P12 800229 Draka 1 Braided Cable



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.25.01 1814 PC1000 35 /62 D
W233C 2C 6mm2 XLPE/EVA/GSWB/EVA 2C 6mm2 Draka 1 Flame retardant Halogen Free

W233D 2C 6mm2 XLPE/EVA/GSWB/EVA 2C 6mm2 Draka 1 Flame retardant Halogen Free
W242E BFOU(I) 8 PAIR 1.5mm2 S3/S7 893430 Draka 1 Braided Cable





W802 BFOU 0.6/1kV 4G 2.5mm2 P5/P12 800233 Draka 1 Braided Cable

W804A BFOU 0.6/1kV 4G 2.5mm2 P5/P12 800233 Draka 1 Braided Cable
W804B BFOU 0.6/1kV 4G 2.5mm2 P5/P12 800233 Draka 1 Braided Cable
W805 RFOU 0.6/1kV 3G 2.5mm2 P1/P8 800030 Draka 1 Braided Cable
W805A 2C 0.75mm Olflex-Classic-110 1119802 Lapp 1


W808A RFOU 0.6/1kV 4G 2.5mm2 P1/P8 800033 Draka 1 Braided Cable




PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.25.01 1814 PC1000 36 /62 D
W814C BFOU 0.6/1kV 3G 2.5mm2 P5/P12 800230 Draka 1 Braided Cable


W815B RFOU 0.6/1kV 3G 2.5mm2 P1/P8 800030 Draka 1 Braided Cable
W815C RFOU 0.6/1kV 3G 4mm2 P1/P8 800049 Draka 1 Braided Cable

W815D RFOU 0.6/1kV 3G 2.5mm2 P1/P8 800030 Draka 1 Braided Cable
W816A RFOU 0.6/1kV 3G 4mm2 P1/P8 800049 Draka 1 Braided Cable
W816B RFOU 0.6/1kV 3G 4mm2 P1/P8 800049 Draka 1 Braided Cable

W816C RFOU 0.6/1kV 3G 2.5mm2 P1/P8 800030 Draka 1 Braided Cable
W816D RFOU 0.6/1kV 3G 2.5mm2 P1/P8 800030 Draka 1 Braided Cable


W819B RFOU 0.6/1kV 3G 2.5mm2 P1/P8 800030 Draka 1 Braided Cable







PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.25.01 1814 PC1000 37 /62 D




W1204C BFOU 0.6/1kV 4G 2.5mm2 P5/P12 800233 Draka 1 Braided Cable

W1204D BFOU 0.6/1kV 4G 2.5mm2 P5/P12 800233 Draka 1 Braided Cable
W1204E BFOU 0.6/1kV 4G 2.5mm2 P5/P12 800233 Draka 1 Braided Cable








PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.25.01 1814 PC1000 38 /62 D


W2901 RFOU 0.6/1kV 1X185/10 P1/P8 800008 Draka 1 Braided Cable








W3101 BFOU 0.6/1kV 3X 50/25mm2 P5/P12 800282 Draka 1 Braided Cable
W3101A BFOU 0.6/1kV 3X 50/25mm2 P5/P12 800282 Draka 1 Braided Cable



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.25.01 1814 PC1000 39 /62 D
W3102 BFOU 0.6/1kV 3X 50/25mm2 P5/P12 800282 Draka 1 Braided Cable

W3102A BFOU 0.6/1kV 3X 50/25mm2 P5/P12 800282 Draka 1 Braided Cable
W8111 Cable for Orlaco Camera System Orlaco Cable Orlaco 1



X8 Screwless End Bracket CLIPFIX 35 Phoenix Contact 14
X8 Cover for UT16 Terminal D-UT16 Phoenix Contact 1 Order NO.:3047206

X8 Cover for UTTB Terminal D-UTTB 2,5/4 Phoenix Contact 2 Order NO.:3047293
X8 4mm Terminal Screw Connection Double Level UTTB 4 Phoenix Contact 13 Order NO.:3044814
X8.12 16mm Terminal Screw Connection Feed-through UT16 Phoenix Contact 4 Order NO.:3044199
X8.12 4mm Terminal Screw Connection Double Level UTTB 4 Phoenix Contact 2 Order NO.:3044814
X8A Enclsoure Stainless Steel H300 W300 D160 07-56B1-0831 Bartec 1
X8A Screwless End Bracket CLIPFIX 35 Phoenix Contact 3

X8A Cover for UTTB Terminal D-UTTB 2,5/4 Phoenix Contact 2 Order NO.:3047293
X8A 4mm Terminal Screw Connection Double Level UTTB 4 Phoenix Contact 6 Order NO.:3044814
X8A 4mm Terminal Screw Type Double Level Ground UTTB 4-PE Phoenix Contact 3 Order NO.:3044759
X8B Enclsoure Stainless Steel H300 W300 D160 07-56B1-0831 Bartec 1

X8B Screwless End Bracket CLIPFIX 35 Phoenix Contact 3
X8B Cover for UTTB Terminal D-UTTB 2,5/4 Phoenix Contact 2 Order NO.:3047293
X8B 4mm Terminal Screw Connection Double Level UTTB 4 Phoenix Contact 6 Order NO.:3044814
X8B 4mm Terminal Screw Type Double Level Ground UTTB 4-PE Phoenix Contact 3 Order NO.:3044759
X8C Enclsoure Stainless Steel H300 W300 D160 07-56B1-0831 Bartec 1
X8C Screwless End Bracket CLIPFIX 35 Phoenix Contact 3

X8C Cover for UTTB Terminal D-UTTB 2,5/4 Phoenix Contact 2 Order NO.:3047293
X8C 4mm Terminal Screw Connection Double Level UTTB 4 Phoenix Contact 6 Order NO.:3044814
X8C 4mm Terminal Screw Type Double Level Ground UTTB 4-PE Phoenix Contact 3 Order NO.:3044759



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.25.01 1814 PC1000 40 /62 D
X8EMER Screwless End Bracket CLIPFIX 35 Phoenix Contact 1

X8EMER 4mm Terminal Screw Connection Double Level UTTB 4 Phoenix Contact 12 Order NO.:3044814
X8PE Screwless End Bracket CLIPFIX 35 Phoenix Contact 1

X8PE Cover for UTTB Terminal D-UTTB 2,5/4 Phoenix Contact 1 Order NO.:3047293
X8PE 16mm Terminal Screw Connection Ground UT16-PE Phoenix Contact 1 Order NO.:3044212
X8PE 4mm Terminal Screw Connection Double Level UTTB 4 Phoenix Contact 1 Order NO.:3044814
X8PE 4mm Terminal Screw Type Double Level Ground UTTB 4-PE Phoenix Contact 6 Order NO.:3044759
X9 Enclsoure Stainless Steel H400 W400 D210 07-56D1-5731 Bartec 1 Enclosure With Hinged Door

X9 4mm Terminal Screw Type Double Level Ground UTTB 4-PE Phoenix Contact 3 Order NO.:3044759
X9EMER Cover for UTTB Terminal D-UTTB 2,5/4 Phoenix Contact 2 Order NO.:3047293
X12 Enclsoure Stainless Steel H600 W600 D210 07-56D1-5931 Bartec 1 Enclosure With Hinged Door
X12 Cover for UT16 Terminal D-UT16 Phoenix Contact 1 Order NO.:3047206
X12 Cover for UTTB Terminal D-UTTB 2,5/4 Phoenix Contact 5 Order NO.:3047293
X12 16mm Terminal Screw Connection Feed-through UT16 Phoenix Contact 4 Order NO.:3044199
X12 4mm Terminal Screw Connection Double Level UTTB 4 Phoenix Contact 15 Order NO.:3044814
X12.3 4mm Terminal Screw Connection Double Level UTTB 4 Phoenix Contact 4 Order NO.:3044814
X12OBS 4mm Terminal Screw Connection Double Level UTTB 4 Phoenix Contact 2 Order NO.:3044814
X13 Earth Rail 7113.000 Rittal 1

X13 DK flatbox 15HE 700x700mm 7507.200 Rittal 1
X13 482.6mm Mounting Angle as Second Attachment Level 7507.715 Rittal 1
X13 Base/Plinths 7507.755 Rittal 1

X55 RFI earthing ribbons 2412.225 Rittal 1
X55 Plan pocket for 500mm wide door 4115.000 Rittal 1
X55 SZ system light LED 4140.810 Rittal 1



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.25.01 1814 PC1000 41 /62 D
X55 Zinc mounting plate infill 4591.700 Rittal 1

X55 TS side panels 1800x400 8184.235 Rittal 1
X55 TS plinth front&rear 8601.000 Rittal 1

X55 TS plinth side trim 8601.040 Rittal 1
X55 TS baying BRK 8800.430 Rittal 1

X55 TS/TS baying BRK 8800.500 Rittal 1
X55 Sheet Steel Enclosure W1000 H1800 D400 TS8080.500 Rittal 1
Y3/1 Air-Conditioner - Indoor Unit PLA-RP60BA Mitsubishi Electric 1
Y3/2 Air-Conditioner - Outdoor Unit PUHZ-RP60VHA4 Mitsubishi Electric 1

Y3/3 Air-Conditioner - Remote Controller PAR-30MAA Mitsubishi Electric 1
Y5 Socket Outlet Surface Mounted 250V 16A 069570 Legrand 1 Free Issue Item
Y5 Surface Mounted Housing 069668 Legrand 1 Free Issue Item
Y5A Socket Outlet Surface Mounted 250V 16A 069570 Legrand 1 Free Issue Item
Y5A Surface Mounted Housing 069668 Legrand 1 Free Issue Item
Y5B Socket Outlet Surface Mounted 250V 16A 069570 Legrand 1 Free Issue Item
Y5B Surface Mounted Housing 069668 Legrand 1 Free Issue Item
Z01 Cable gland size D thread M50 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/D/M50 Hawke 1 Cert. req'd for Zone 1



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.25.01 1814 PC1000 42 /62 D
Z19 Cable gland size C2 thread M40 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/C2/M40 Hawke 1 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
Z30 Cable gland size C thread M32 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/C/M32 Hawke 2 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
Z102 Cable gland size B thread M25 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/B/M25 Hawke 1 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
Z206 Cable gland size O thread M20 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/O/M20 Hawke 1 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
Z207 Cable gland size O thread M20 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/O/M20 Hawke 2 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
Z220A Cable gland size O thread M20 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/O/M20 Hawke 2 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
Z220AA Cable gland size O thread M20 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/O/M20 Hawke 2 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
Z233B Cable gland size A thread M20 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/A/M20 Hawke 2 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
Z241E Cable gland size C thread M32 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/C/M32 Hawke 1 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
Z242E Cable gland size C thread M32 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/C/M32 Hawke 2 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
Z243E Cable gland size A thread M20 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/A/M20 Hawke 2 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
Z246E Cable gland size O thread M20 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/O/M20 Hawke 2 Cert. req'd for Zone 1



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.25.01 1814 PC1000 43 /62 D
Z804A Cable gland size B thread M25 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/B/M25 Hawke 2 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
Z804B Cable gland size B thread M25 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/B/M25 Hawke 2 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
Z805 Cable gland size A thread M20 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/A/M20 Hawke 2 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
Z814A Cable gland size A thread M20 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/A/M20 Hawke 2 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
Z814C Cable gland size A thread M20 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/A/M20 Hawke 2 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
Z815C Cable gland size B thread M25 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/B/M25 Hawke 2 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
Z815D Cable gland size A thread M20 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/A/M20 Hawke 2 Cert. req'd for Zone 1



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.25.01 1814 PC1000 44 /62 D
Z816C Cable gland size A thread M20 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/A/M20 Hawke 2 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
Z816D Cable gland size A thread M20 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/A/M20 Hawke 2 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
Z1203D Cable gland size B thread M25 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/B/M25 Hawke 2 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
Z1203E Cable gland size B thread M25 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/B/M25 Hawke 2 Cert. req'd for Zone 1



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.25.01 1814 PC1000 45 /62 D
Z2901A Cable gland size C thread M32 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/C/M32 Hawke 2 Cert. req'd for Zone 1



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.25.01 1814 PC1000 46 /62 D



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.25.01 1814 PC1000 47 /62 D
Z3101A Cable gland size C2 thread M40 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/C2/M40 Hawke 2 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
Z3102A Cable gland size C2 thread M40 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/C2/M40 Hawke 2 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
Z-ESD Cable gland size O thread M20 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/O/M20 Hawke 1 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
Z-TELE Cable gland size O thread M20 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/O/M20 Hawke 1 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
ZD-X8A Drain Plug Exd M20 CVC1200DXN Raxton 1 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
ZD-X8A Locknut M20 GAC0012DXN Raxton 1
ZD-X8B Drain Plug Exd M20 CVC1200DXN Raxton 1 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
ZD-X8B Locknut M20 GAC0012DXN Raxton 1



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.25.01 1814 PC1000 48 /62 D
ZD-X8C Drain Plug Exd M20 CVC1200DXN Raxton 1 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
ZD-X8C Locknut M20 GAC0012DXN Raxton 1
ZD-X9 Drain Plug Exd M20 CVC1200DXN Raxton 1 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
ZD-X9 Locknut M20 GAC0012DXN Raxton 1
ZD-X12 Drain Plug Exd M20 CVC1200DXN Raxton 1 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
ZD-X12 Locknut M20 GAC0012DXN Raxton 1
ZPA Cable gland size O thread M20 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/O/M20 Hawke 1 Cert. req'd for Zone 1
ZPA1 Cable gland size O thread M20 EEx-de 501/453/UNIV/O/M20 Hawke 1 Cert. req'd for Zone 1



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.25.01 1814 PC1000 49 /62 D
W30 1 X29C:1 Motor 1 Control Panel X29 457 Refer To DC A36100590 X3 EDI:2 800023
W30 2 X29C:2 Motor 1 Control Panel X29 1470 Refer To DC A36100590 X3B:9 800023
W30 8 X29DC:2 Motor 1 Control Panel X29 200 Refer To DC A36100590 X3B:32 800023
W30 9 X29DC:3 Motor 1 Control Panel X29 29DC Refer To DC A36100590 X3B:39 800023
W30 11 X3 AIN2:7 Refer To DC A36100590 1064 Motor 1 Control Panel X29 X29A01:+ 800023
W30 12 X3 0V:42 Refer To DC A36100590 200 Motor 1 Control Panel X29 X29A01:- 800023
W40 9 X30DC:3 Motor 2 Control Panel X30 30DC Refer To DC A36100590 X3B:37 800023
W40 11 X3 AIN2:12 Refer To DC A36100590 1068 Motor 2 Control Panel X30 X30A01:+ 800023
W40 12 X3 0V:43 Refer To DC A36100590 200 Motor 2 Control Panel X30 X30A01:- 800023
W60 1 X31C:1 Emer. Motor Control Panel X31 1954 Refer To DC A36100590 X3B:48 800023


JACK UP BARGE Cable Termination Schedule

PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
FORM: 04.24.01 Checked Checked Rev. POWER
1814 PC1000 50 /62 D
W60 8 X31DC:2 Emer. Motor Control Panel X31 200 Refer To DC A36100590 X3B:34 800023
W60 9 X31DC:3 Emer. Motor Control Panel X31 31DC Refer To DC A36100590 X3B:37 800023
W60 10 X31DC:4 Emer. Motor Control Panel X31 200 Refer To DC A36100590 X3B:43 800023
W60 11 X3 AIN2:11 Emer. Motor Control Panel X31 1066 Refer To DC A36100590 800023
W60 12 X3 0V:44 Emer. Motor Control Panel X31 200 Refer To DC A36100590 800023
W201 BLACK Q15:5 40A 303 Slip ring N1:6 800074
W201 BLUE Q15:1 40A 301 Slip ring N1:4 800074
W201 BROWN Q15:3 40A 302 Slip ring N1:5 800074
W201 G/Y X8:PE X8 Distribution Panel E Slip ring N1:8 800074
W201 GREY Q15:7 40A 304 Slip ring N1:7 800074
W202 BLUE N1:36 Slip ring 410 6A 10kA Q15C:1 800250

W202 BROWN N1:37 Slip ring 411 6A 10kA Q15C:3 800250
W202 G/Y N1:38 Slip ring E X8 Distribution Panel X8:PE 800250
W203 BLUE N1:9 Slip ring 309 32A 10kA Q15A:2 800250
W203 BROWN N1:10 Slip ring 310 32A 10kA Q15A:4 800250
W203 G/Y N1:11 Slip ring E X8 Distribution Panel X8:PE 800250

W204 G/Y N1:PE Slip ring E CRANE STRUCTURE 800806
W233 1 X4 PWR:1 Refer To DC A36100590 813 X3 Control Panel X3 POWER:1 2C 6mm2
W233 2 X4 PWR:2 Refer To DC A36100590 814 X3 Control Panel X3 POWER:2 2C 6mm2

W233B BLUE X13DC:1 X13 UPS JB 813 Refer To DC A36100590 24VDC 800229
W233B BROWN X13DC:2 X13 UPS JB 814 Refer To DC A36100590 0VDC 800229
W233C 1 X36 PWR:1 Refer To DC A36100590 813 Gas Detector GD201 X6 PWR:1 2C 6mm2
W233C 2 X36 PWR:2 Refer To DC A36100590 814 Gas Detector GD201 X6 PWR:2 2C 6mm2
W801 BLACK X8 EMER:2 X8 Distribution Panel 408 Cabin Light E1/1:L1 800243
W801 BROWN X8 EMER:1 X8 Distribution Panel 407 Cabin Light E1/1:L 800243
W801 G/Y X8:PE X8 Distribution Panel E Cabin Light E1/1:PE 800243
W801 GREY X8 EMER:11 X8 Distribution Panel 409 Cabin Light E1/1:N 800243
W802 BLACK X8 EMER:4 X8 Distribution Panel 408 Outside Cabin Light E1/15:L1 800233
W802 BROWN X8 EMER:3 X8 Distribution Panel 407 Outside Cabin Light E1/15:L 800233



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1814 PC1000 51 /62 D
W802 G/Y X8:PE X8 Distribution Panel E Outside Cabin Light E1/15:PE 800233
W802 GREY X8 EMER:13 X8 Distribution Panel 409 Outside Cabin Light E1/15:N 800233
W803 BLACK X8 EMER:6 X8 Distribution Panel 408 Upper Deck Access Light E1/18:L1 800233
W803 BROWN X8 EMER:5 X8 Distribution Panel 407 Upper Deck Access Light E1/18:L 800233
W803 G/Y X8:PE X8 Distribution Panel E Upper Deck Access Light E1/18:PE 800233
W803 GREY X8 EMER:15 X8 Distribution Panel 409 Upper Deck Access Light E1/18:N 800233
W804 BLACK X8 EMER:19 X8 Distribution Panel 405 External Access Ladder Fluor Light 2x36W E1/38:L1 800243
W804 BROWN X8 EMER:18 X8 Distribution Panel 412 External Access Ladder Fluor Light 2x36W E1/38:L 800243
W804 G/Y X8:PE X8 Distribution Panel E External Access Ladder Fluor Light 2x36W E1/38:PE 800243
W804 GREY X8 EMER:20 X8 Distribution Panel 406 External Access Ladder Fluor Light 2x36W E1/38:N 800243
W804A BLACK E1/38:L1 External Access Ladder Fluor Light 2x36W 405 External Access Ladder Fluor Light 2x36W E1/39:L1 800233
W804A BROWN E1/38:L External Access Ladder Fluor Light 2x36W 412 External Access Ladder Fluor Light 2x36W E1/39:L 800233
W804A G/Y E1/38:PE External Access Ladder Fluor Light 2x36W E External Access Ladder Fluor Light 2x36W E1/39:PE 800233
W804A GREY E1/38:N External Access Ladder Fluor Light 2x36W 406 External Access Ladder Fluor Light 2x36W E1/39:N 800233
W804B BLACK E1/39:L1 External Access Ladder Fluor Light 2x36W 405 External Access Ladder Fluor Light 2x36W E1/40:L1 800233
W804B BROWN E1/39:L External Access Ladder Fluor Light 2x36W 412 External Access Ladder Fluor Light 2x36W E1/40:L 800233
W804B G/Y E1/39:PE External Access Ladder Fluor Light 2x36W E External Access Ladder Fluor Light 2x36W E1/40:PE 800233
W804B GREY E1/39:N External Access Ladder Fluor Light 2x36W 406 External Access Ladder Fluor Light 2x36W E1/40:N 800233
W805 BLUE X8:1 X8 Distribution Panel 401 Air-Con Indoor Unit Y3/1:L 800030
W805 BROWN X8:2 X8 Distribution Panel 402 Air-Con Indoor Unit Y3/1:N 800030
W805 G/Y X8:PE X8 Distribution Panel E Air-Con Indoor Unit Y3/1:PE 800030
W805A 1 Y3/1:L Air-Con Indoor Unit 614 Air-Con Remote Controller Y3/3:L 1119802
W805A 2 Y3/1:N Air-Con Indoor Unit 615 Air-Con Remote Controller Y3/3:N 1119802
W806 BLUE X8:3 X8 Distribution Panel 403 Cabin GPO Y5:L1 800049
W806 BROWN X8:4 X8 Distribution Panel 404 Cabin GPO Y5:N1 800049
W806 G/Y X8:PE X8 Distribution Panel E Cabin GPO Y5:PE 800049
W807 BLACK X8 EMER:8 X8 Distribution Panel 408 Port Hoist Winch Light E1/19:L1 800243
W807 BROWN X8 EMER:7 X8 Distribution Panel 407 Port Hoist Winch Light E1/19:L 800243
W807 G/Y X8:PE X8 Distribution Panel E Port Hoist Winch Light E1/19:PE 800243
W807 GREY X8 EMER:17 X8 Distribution Panel 409 Port Hoist Winch Light E1/19:N 800243



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1814 PC1000 52 /62 D
W807A BLACK E1/19:L1 Port Hoist Winch Light 408 S'Board Hoist Winch Light E1/20:L1 800233
W807A BROWN E1/19:L Port Hoist Winch Light 407 S'Board Hoist Winch Light E1/20:L 800233
W807A G/Y E1/19:PE Port Hoist Winch Light E S'Board Hoist Winch Light E1/20:PE 800233
W807A GREY E1/19:N Port Hoist Winch Light 409 S'Board Hoist Winch Light E1/20:N 800233
W808 BLUE X8:5 X8 Distribution Panel 418 Air-Con Outdoor Unit Y3/2:L 800030
W808 BROWN X8:6 X8 Distribution Panel 419 Air-Con Outdoor Unit Y3/2:N 800030
W808 G/Y X8:PE X8 Distribution Panel E Air-Con Outdoor Unit Y3/2:PE 800030
W808A BLACK Y3/2:S2 Air-Con Outdoor Unit 617 Air-Con Indoor Unit Y3/1:S2 800033
W808A BROWN Y3/2:S1 Air-Con Outdoor Unit 616 Air-Con Indoor Unit Y3/1:S1 800033
W808A G/Y Y3/2:PE Air-Con Outdoor Unit 619 Air-Con Indoor Unit Y3/1:PE 800033
W808A GREY Y3/2:S3 Air-Con Outdoor Unit 618 Air-Con Indoor Unit Y3/1:S3 800033
W811 BLUE X8.12:1 X8 Distribution Panel 313 X12 POWE PACK JB X12.8:1 800068
W811 BROWN X8.12:2 X8 Distribution Panel 314 X12 POWE PACK JB X12.8:2 800068
W812 BLUE X8 EMER:21 X8 Distribution Panel 801 Power Supply G6:L 800030
W812 BROWN X8 EMER:22 X8 Distribution Panel 802 Power Supply G6:N 800030
W812 G/Y X8:PE X8 Distribution Panel E Power Supply G6:E 800030
W814A BLUE X8A:9 X8A Boom Section 4 JB 701 X8B Boom Top JB X8B:9 800230
W814A BROWN X8A:10 X8A Boom Section 4 JB 702 X8B Boom Top JB X8B:10 800230
W814A G/Y X8A:PE X8A Boom Section 4 JB E X8B Boom Top JB X8B:PE 800230
W814B BLUE X8B:9 X8B Boom Top JB 701 X8B Boom Top JB X8C:9 800230
W814B BROWN X8B:10 X8B Boom Top JB 702 X8B Boom Top JB X8C:10 800230
W814B G/Y X8B:PE X8B Boom Top JB E X8B Boom Top JB X8C:PE 800230
W814C BLUE X8C:9 X8B Boom Top JB 701 Boom Aviation Light E4/21:L 800230
W814C BROWN X8C:10 X8B Boom Top JB 702 Boom Aviation Light E4/21:N 800230
W814C G/Y X8C:PE X8B Boom Top JB E Boom Aviation Light E4/21:PE 800230
W815 BLUE X8:11 X8 Distribution Panel 501 X8A Boom Section 4 JB X8A:1 800049
W815 BROWN X8:12 X8 Distribution Panel 502 X8A Boom Section 4 JB X8A:2 800049
W815 G/Y X8:PE X8 Distribution Panel E X8A Boom Section 4 JB X8A:PE 800049
W815A BLUE X8A:3 X8A Boom Section 4 JB 501 E3/24 Boom Floodlight E3/24:L 800030
W815A BROWN X8A:4 X8A Boom Section 4 JB 502 E3/24 Boom Floodlight E3/24:N 800030



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1814 PC1000 53 /62 D
W815A G/Y X8A:PE X8A Boom Section 4 JB E E3/24 Boom Floodlight E3/24:PE 800030
W815B BLUE X8A:5 X8A Boom Section 4 JB 501 E3/25 Boom Floodlight E3/25:L 800030
W815B BROWN X8A:6 X8A Boom Section 4 JB 502 E3/25 Boom Floodlight E3/25:N 800030
W815B G/Y X8A:PE X8A Boom Section 4 JB E E3/25 Boom Floodlight E3/25:PE 800030
W815C BLUE X8A:1 X8A Boom Section 4 JB 501 X8A Boom Section 4 JB X8B:1 800049
W815C BROWN X8A:2 X8A Boom Section 4 JB 502 X8A Boom Section 4 JB X8B:2 800049
W815C G/Y X8A:PE X8A Boom Section 4 JB E X8A Boom Section 4 JB X8B:PE 800049
W815D BLUE X8B:3 X8A Boom Section 4 JB 501 E3/26 Boom Floodlight E3/26:L 800030
W815D BROWN X8B:4 X8A Boom Section 4 JB 502 E3/26 Boom Floodlight E3/26:N 800030
W815D G/Y X8B:PE X8A Boom Section 4 JB E E3/26 Boom Floodlight E3/26:PE 800030
W816 BLUE X8:12 X8 Distribution Panel 503 X8A Boom Section 4 JB X8A:7 800049
W816 BROWN X8:14 X8 Distribution Panel 502 X8A Boom Section 4 JB X8A:8 800049
W816 G/Y X8:PE X8 Distribution Panel E X8A Boom Section 4 JB X8A:PE 800049
W816A BLUE X8A:7 X8A Boom Section 4 JB 503 X8A Boom Section 4 JB X8B:7 800049
W816A BROWN X8A:8 X8A Boom Section 4 JB 502 X8A Boom Section 4 JB X8B:8 800049
W816A G/Y X8A:PE X8A Boom Section 4 JB E X8A Boom Section 4 JB X8B:PE 800049
W816B BLUE X8B:7 X8A Boom Section 4 JB 503 X8A Boom Section 4 JB X8C:1 800049
W816B BROWN X8B:8 X8A Boom Section 4 JB 502 X8A Boom Section 4 JB X8C:2 800049
W816B G/Y X8B:PE X8A Boom Section 4 JB E X8A Boom Section 4 JB X8C:PE 800049
W816C BLUE X8C:3 X8A Boom Section 4 JB 503 E3/27 Boom Floodlight E3/27:L 800030
W816C BROWN X8C:4 X8A Boom Section 4 JB 502 E3/27 Boom Floodlight E3/27:N 800030
W816C G/Y X8C:PE X8A Boom Section 4 JB E E3/27 Boom Floodlight E3/27:PE 800030
W816D BLUE X8C:5 X8A Boom Section 4 JB 503 E3/28 Boom Floodlight E3/28:L 800030
W816D BROWN X8C:6 X8A Boom Section 4 JB 502 E3/28 Boom Floodlight E3/28:N 800030
W816D G/Y X8C:PE X8A Boom Section 4 JB E E3/28 Boom Floodlight E3/28:PE 800030
W817 BLUE X8.13:1 X8 Distribution Panel 307 X13 UPS JB X13.8:1 800030
W817 BROWN X8.13:2 X8 Distribution Panel 308 X13 UPS JB X13.8:2 800030
W818 BLUE X8 EMER:23 X8 Distribution Panel 803 Power Supply G7:L 800030
W818 BROWN X8 EMER:24 X8 Distribution Panel 804 Power Supply G7:N 800030
W818 G/Y X8:PE X8 Distribution Panel E Power Supply G7:E 800030



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1814 PC1000 54 /62 D
W819 BLUE X8:19 X8 Distribution Panel 719 E3/21 Boom Floodlight E3/21:L 800049
W819 BROWN X8:20 X8 Distribution Panel 718 E3/21 Boom Floodlight E3/21:N 800049
W819 G/Y X8:PE X8 Distribution Panel E E3/21 Boom Floodlight E3/21:PE 800049
W819A BLUE X8:21 X8 Distribution Panel 719 E3/22 Boom Floodlight E3/22:L 800030
W819A BROWN X8:22 X8 Distribution Panel 718 E3/22 Boom Floodlight E3/22:N 800030
W819A G/Y X8:PE X8 Distribution Panel E E3/22 Boom Floodlight E3/22:PE 800030
W819B BLUE X8:23 X8 Distribution Panel 719 E3/23 Boom Floodlight E3/23:L 800030
W819B BROWN X8:24 X8 Distribution Panel 718 E3/23 Boom Floodlight E3/23:N 800030
W819B G/Y X8:PE X8 Distribution Panel E E3/23 Boom Floodlight E3/23:PE 800030
W820 BLUE X8:17 X8 Distribution Panel 706 Wind Display A11:L 800016
W820 BROWN X8:18 X8 Distribution Panel 707 Wind Display A11:N 800016
W820 G/Y X8:PE X8 Distribution Panel E Wind Display A11:PE 800016

W821 BLACK X8 EMER:16 X8 Distribution Panel 606 X12 POWE PACK JB X12 EMER:1 800243
W821 BROWN X8 EMER:15 X8 Distribution Panel 606 X12 POWE PACK JB X12 EMER:2 800243
W821 G/Y X8:PE X8 Distribution Panel E X12 POWE PACK JB X12 EMER:PE 800243
W821 GREY X8 EMER:17 X8 Distribution Panel 607 X12 POWE PACK JB X12 EMER:12 800243
W822 BLUE X8.12:7 X8 Distribution Panel 603 X12 POWE PACK JB X12.8:3 800049
W822 BROWN X8.12:8 X8 Distribution Panel 604 X12 POWE PACK JB X12.8:8 800049
W901 BLACK X9 EMER:6 X9 Slew Well J'Box 1205 Slew well Light E1/34:L1 800243
W901 BROWN X9 EMER:3 X9 Slew Well J'Box 703 Slew well Light E1/34:L 800243
W901 G/Y X9 EMER:PE X9 Slew Well J'Box E Slew well Light E1/34:PE 800243
W901 GREY X9 EMER:11 X9 Slew Well J'Box 705 Slew well Light E1/34:N 800243
W901A BLACK E1/34:L1 Slew well Light 1205 Slew well Light E1/35:L1 800233
W901A BROWN E1/34:L Slew well Light 703 Slew well Light E1/35:L 800233
W901A G/Y E1/34:PE Slew well Light E Slew well Light E1/35:PE 800233
W901A GREY E1/34:N Slew well Light 705 Slew well Light E1/35:N 800233
W902 BLACK X9 EMER:8 X9 Slew Well J'Box 1205 Slew well Light E1/36:L1 800243
W902 BROWN X9 EMER:5 X9 Slew Well J'Box 703 Slew well Light E1/36:L 800243
W902 G/Y X9 EMER:PE X9 Slew Well J'Box E Slew well Light E1/36:PE 800243
W902 GREY X9 EMER:13 X9 Slew Well J'Box 705 Slew well Light E1/36:N 800243



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1814 PC1000 55 /62 D
W902A BLACK E1/36:L1 Slew well Light 1205 Slew well Light E1/37:L1 800233
W902A BROWN E1/36:L Slew well Light 703 Slew well Light E1/37:L 800233
W902A G/Y E1/36:PE Slew well Light E Slew well Light E1/37:PE 800233
W902A GREY E1/36:N Slew well Light 705 Slew well Light E1/37:N 800233
W902B BLACK E1/37:L1 Slew well Light 1205 Slew well Light E1/43:L1 800233
W902B BROWN E1/37:L Slew well Light 703 Slew well Light E1/43:L 800233
W902B G/Y E1/37:PE Slew well Light E Slew well Light E1/43:PE 800233
W902B GREY E1/37:N Slew well Light 705 Slew well Light E1/43:N 800233
W903 BLACK X9 EMER:4 X9 Slew Well J'Box 1205 Internal Platform Light E1/41:L1 800243
W903 BROWN X9 EMER:1 X9 Slew Well J'Box 703 Internal Platform Light E1/41:L 800243
W903 G/Y X9 EMER:PE X9 Slew Well J'Box E Internal Platform Light E1/41:PE 800243
W903 GREY X9 EMER:9 X9 Slew Well J'Box 705 Internal Platform Light E1/41:N 800243
W903A BLACK E1/41:L1 Internal Platform Light 1205 Internal Platform Light E1/42:L1 800233
W903A BROWN E1/41:L Internal Platform Light 703 Internal Platform Light E1/42:L 800233
W903A G/Y E1/41:PE Internal Platform Light E Internal Platform Light E1/42:PE 800233
W903A GREY E1/41:N Internal Platform Light 705 Internal Platform Light E1/42:N 800233
W907 BLUE X9:3 X9 Slew Well J/Box 1203 Machinery House GPO Y5B:L1 800030
W907 BLUE X9:4 X9 Slew Well J/Box 1204 Machinery House GPO Y5B:N1 800030
W907 G/Y X9:PE X9 Slew Well J/Box E Machinery House GPO Y5B:PE 800030
W908 BLUE X9:1 X9 Slew Well J/Box 1201 Slew Well Heater E6B:L 800030
W908 BROWN X9:2 X9 Slew Well J/Box 1202 Slew Well Heater E6B:N 800030
W908 G/Y X9:PE X9 Slew Well J/Box E Slew Well Heater E6B:PE 800030
W1201 BLACK X12 EMER:9 X12 POWE PACK JB 610 Machinery House Light E1/6:L1 800243
W1201 BROWN X12 EMER:6 X12 POWE PACK JB 606 Machinery House Light E1/6:L 800243
W1201 G/Y X12 EMER:PE X12 POWE PACK JB E Machinery House Light E1/6:PE 800243
W1201 GREY X12 EMER:16 X12 POWE PACK JB 607 Machinery House Light E1/6:N 800243
W1201A BLACK E1/6:L1 Machinery House Light 610 Machinery House Light E1/7:L1 800233
W1201A BROWN E1/6:L Machinery House Light 606 Machinery House Light E1/7:L 800233
W1201A G/Y E1/6:PE Machinery House Light E Machinery House Light E1/7:PE 800233
W1201A GREY E1/6:N Machinery House Light 607 Machinery House Light E1/7:N 800233



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1814 PC1000 56 /62 D
W1201B BLACK E1/7:L1 Machinery House Light 610 Machinery House Light E1/8:L1 800233
W1201B BROWN E1/7:L Machinery House Light 606 Machinery House Light E1/8:L 800233
W1201B G/Y E1/7:PE Machinery House Light E Machinery House Light E1/8:PE 800233
W1201B GREY E1/7:N Machinery House Light 607 Machinery House Light E1/8:N 800233
W1202 BLACK X12 EMER:11 X12 POWE PACK JB 610 Machinery House Light E1/9:L1 800243
W1202 BROWN X12 EMER:8 X12 POWE PACK JB 606 Machinery House Light E1/9:L 800243
W1202 G/Y X12 EMER:PE X12 POWE PACK JB E Machinery House Light E1/9:PE 800243
W1202 GREY X12 EMER:18 X12 POWE PACK JB 607 Machinery House Light E1/9:N 800243
W1202A BLACK E1/9:L1 Machinery House Light 610 Machinery House Light E1/10:L1 800233
W1202A BROWN E1/9:L Machinery House Light 606 Machinery House Light E1/10:L 800233
W1202A G/Y E1/9:PE Machinery House Light E Machinery House Light E1/10:PE 800233
W1202A GREY E1/9:N Machinery House Light 607 Machinery House Light E1/10:N 800233
W1202B BLACK E1/10:L1 Machinery House Light 610 Machinery House Light E1/11:L1 800233
W1202B BROWN E1/10:L Machinery House Light 606 Machinery House Light E1/11:L 800233
W1202B G/Y E1/10:PE Machinery House Light E Machinery House Light E1/11:PE 800233
W1202B GREY E1/10:N Machinery House Light 607 Machinery House Light E1/11:N 800233
W1203 BLACK X12 EMER:7 X12 POWE PACK JB 609 Front Machinery House Light E1/16:L1 800243
W1203 BROWN X12 EMER:4 X12 POWE PACK JB 606 Front Machinery House Light E1/16:L 800243
W1203 G/Y X12 EMER:PE X12 POWE PACK JB E Front Machinery House Light E1/16:PE 800243
W1203 GREY X12 EMER:14 X12 POWE PACK JB 607 Front Machinery House Light E1/16:N 800243
W1203A BLACK E1/16:L1 Front Machinery House Light 609 Rear Machinery House Light E1/17:L1 800233
W1203A BROWN E1/16:L Front Machinery House Light 606 Rear Machinery House Light E1/17:L 800233
W1203A G/Y E1/16:PE Front Machinery House Light E Rear Machinery House Light E1/17:PE 800233
W1203A GREY E1/16:N Front Machinery House Light 607 Rear Machinery House Light E1/17:N 800233
W1203B BLACK E1/17:L1 Rear Machinery House Light 609 Rear Machinery House Light E1/27:L1 800233
W1203B BROWN E1/17:L Rear Machinery House Light 606 Rear Machinery House Light E1/27:L 800233
W1203B G/Y E1/17:PE Rear Machinery House Light E Rear Machinery House Light E1/27:PE 800233
W1203B GREY E1/17:N Rear Machinery House Light 607 Rear Machinery House Light E1/27:N 800233
W1204 BLACK X12 EMER:5 X12 POWE PACK JB 608 Front Machinery House Light E1/21:L1 800243
W1204 BROWN X12 EMER:2 X12 POWE PACK JB 606 Front Machinery House Light E1/21:L 800243



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1814 PC1000 57 /62 D
W1204 G/Y X12 EMER:PE X12 POWE PACK JB E Front Machinery House Light E1/21:PE 800243
W1204 GREY X12 EMER:12 X12 POWE PACK JB 607 Front Machinery House Light E1/21:N 800243
W1204A BLACK E1/21:L1 Front Machinery House Light 608 Front Machinery House Light E1/22:L1 800233
W1204A BROWN E1/21:L Front Machinery House Light 606 Front Machinery House Light E1/22:L 800233
W1204A G/Y E1/21:PE Front Machinery House Light E Front Machinery House Light E1/22:PE 800233
W1204A GREY E1/21:N Front Machinery House Light 607 Front Machinery House Light E1/22:N 800233
W1204B BLACK E1/22:L1 Front Machinery House Light 608 Luff Winch Light Port Side 2X36W E1/23:L1 800233
W1204B BROWN E1/22:L Front Machinery House Light 606 Luff Winch Light Port Side 2X36W E1/23:L 800233
W1204B G/Y E1/22:PE Front Machinery House Light E Luff Winch Light Port Side 2X36W E1/23:PE 800233
W1204B GREY E1/22:N Front Machinery House Light 607 Luff Winch Light Port Side 2X36W E1/23:N 800233
W1204C BLACK E1/23:L1 Luff Winch Light Port Side 2X36W 608 Front Machinery House Light E1/24:L1 800233
W1204C BROWN E1/23:L Luff Winch Light Port Side 2X36W 606 Front Machinery House Light E1/24:L 800233
W1204C G/Y E1/23:PE Luff Winch Light Port Side 2X36W E Front Machinery House Light E1/24:PE 800233
W1204C GREY E1/23:N Luff Winch Light Port Side 2X36W 607 Front Machinery House Light E1/24:N 800233
W1204D BLACK E1/24:L1 Front Machinery House Light 608 Front Machinery House Light E1/25:L1 800233
W1204D BROWN E1/24:L Front Machinery House Light 606 Front Machinery House Light E1/25:L 800233
W1204D G/Y E1/24:PE Front Machinery House Light E Front Machinery House Light E1/25:PE 800233
W1204D GREY E1/24:N Front Machinery House Light 607 Front Machinery House Light E1/25:N 800233
W1204E BLACK E1/25:L1 Front Machinery House Light 608 Front Machinery House Light E1/26:L1 800233
W1204E BROWN E1/25:L Front Machinery House Light 606 Front Machinery House Light E1/26:L 800233
W1204E G/Y E1/25:PE Front Machinery House Light E Front Machinery House Light E1/26:PE 800233
W1204E GREY E1/25:N Front Machinery House Light 607 Front Machinery House Light E1/26:N 800233
W1205 BLUE X12:23 X12 POWE PACK JB 601 Machinery House GPO Y5A:L1 800030
W1205 BROWN X12:24 X12 POWE PACK JB 602 Machinery House GPO Y5A:N1 800030
W1205 G/Y X12:PE X12 POWE PACK JB E Machinery House GPO Y5A:PE 800030
W1206 BLUE X12:25 X12 POWE PACK JB 604 E3/31 Mast Floodlight E3/31:L 800049
W1206 BROWN X12:26 X12 POWE PACK JB 605 E3/31 Mast Floodlight E3/31:N 800049
W1206 G/Y X12:PE X12 POWE PACK JB E E3/31 Mast Floodlight E3/31:PE 800049
W1206A BLUE E3/31:L E3/31 Mast Floodlight 604 E3/32 Mast Floodlight E3/32:L 800030
W1206A BROWN E3/31:N E3/31 Mast Floodlight 605 E3/32 Mast Floodlight E3/32:N 800030



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1814 PC1000 58 /62 D
W1206A G/Y E3/31:PE E3/31 Mast Floodlight E E3/32 Mast Floodlight E3/32:PE 800030
W1207 BLUE X12 OBS:1 X12 POWE PACK JB 701 Mast Aviation Light E4/31:L 800230
W1207 BROWN X12 OBS:2 X12 POWE PACK JB 702 Mast Aviation Light E4/31:N 800230
W1207 G/Y X12:PE X12 POWE PACK JB E Mast Aviation Light E4/31:PE 800230
W1208 BLUE X12:1 X12 Power Pack J'Box 505 E41a Hydraulic Oil Heater E41A:L 800030
W1208 BROWN X12:2 X12 Power Pack J'Box 506 E41a Hydraulic Oil Heater E41A:N 800030
W1208 G/Y X12:PE X12 Power Pack J'Box E E41a Hydraulic Oil Heater E41A:PE 800030
W1209 BLUE X12:3 X12 Power Pack J'Box 505 E41b Hydraulic Oil Heater E41B:L 800030
W1209 BROWN X12:4 X12 Power Pack J'Box 506 E41b Hydraulic Oil Heater E41B:N 800030
W1209 G/Y X12:PE X12 Power Pack J'Box E E41b Hydraulic Oil Heater E41B:PE 800030
W1210 BLUE X12:5 X12 Power Pack J'Box 505 E41c Hydraulic Oil Heater E41C:L 800030
W1210 BROWN X12:6 X12 Power Pack J'Box 506 E41c Hydraulic Oil Heater E41C:N 800030
W1210 G/Y X12:PE X12 Power Pack J'Box E E41c Hydraulic Oil Heater E41C:PE 800030
W1211 BLUE X12:7 X12 Power Pack J'Box 505 E41d Hydraulic Oil Heater E41D:L 800030
W1211 BROWN X12:8 X12 Power Pack J'Box 506 E41d Hydraulic Oil Heater E41D:N 800030
W1211 G/Y X12:PE X12 Power Pack J'Box E E41d Hydraulic Oil Heater E41D:PE 800030
W1212 BLUE X12:9 X12 Power Pack J'Box 505 E41e Hydraulic Oil Heater E41E:L 800030
W1212 BROWN X12:10 X12 Power Pack J'Box 506 E41e Hydraulic Oil Heater E41E:N 800030
W1212 G/Y X12:PE X12 Power Pack J'Box E E41e Hydraulic Oil Heater E41E:PE 800030
W1213 BLUE X12:19 X12 Power Pack J'Box 507 SB Gearbox Cooling Motor 0.55kW SB M9A 800030
W1213 BROWN X12:20 X12 Power Pack J'Box 510 SB Gearbox Cooling Motor 0.55kW SB M9A 800030
W1214 BLUE X12:21 X12 Power Pack J'Box 907 Port Gearbox Cooling Motor 0.55kW PORT M9B 800030
W1214 BROWN X12:22 X12 Power Pack J'Box 510 Port Gearbox Cooling Motor 0.55kW PORT M9B 800030
W1217 BLUE X12:13 X12 Power Pack J'Box 412 M1 Port Motor J/B M1:32C 800030
W1217 BROWN X12:14 X12 Power Pack J'Box 413 M1 Port Motor J/B M1:33C 800030
W1217 G/Y X12:PE X12 Power Pack J'Box E E46A Anti CON Heater E46A:PE 800030
W1218 BLUE X12:15 X12 Power Pack J'Box 414 M2 SB Motor J/B M2:32C 800030
W1218 BROWN X12:16 X12 Power Pack J'Box 413 M2 SB Motor J/B M2:33C 800030
W1218 G/Y X12:PE X12 Power Pack J'Box E E46B Anti CON Heater E46B:PE 800030
W1219 BLUE X12:17 X12 Power Pack J'Box 416 M2 SB Motor J/B M10:1C 800030



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1814 PC1000 59 /62 D
W1219 BROWN X12:18 X12 Power Pack J'Box 413 M2 SB Motor J/B M3:2C 800030
W1219 G/Y X12:PE X12 Power Pack J'Box E E46B Anti CON Heater E46C:PE 800030
W1220 BLACK X12 EMER:3 X12 POWE PACK JB 704 X9 Slew Well J'Box X9 EMER:2 800243
W1220 G/Y X12 EMER:PE X12 POWE PACK JB E X9 Slew Well J'Box X9 EMER:PE 800243
W1220 GREY X12 EMER:20 X12 POWE PACK JB 705 X9 Slew Well J'Box X9 EMER:9 800243
W1221 BLUE X12.8:3 X12 POWE PACK JB 313 X9 Slew Well J/Box X9.12:1 800049
W1221 BROWN X12.8:4 X12 POWE PACK JB 314 X9 Slew Well J/Box X9.12:2 800049
W1221 G/Y X8:PE X8 Distribution Panel E X9 Slew Well J/Box X9:PE 800049
W1222 BLUE X12 OBS:3 X12 POWE PACK JB 701 X8A Boom Section 4 JB X8A:9 800230
W1222 BROWN X12 OBS:4 X12 POWE PACK JB 702 X8A Boom Section 4 JB X8A:10 800230
W1222 G/Y X12:PE X12 POWE PACK JB E X8A Boom Section 4 JB X8A:PE 800230
W1223 BLUE X12:19 X12 POWE PACK JB 1101 Machinery House Heater E6:L 800030
W1223 BROWN X12:20 X12 POWE PACK JB 1102 Machinery House Heater E6:N 800030
W1223 G/Y X12:PE X12 POWE PACK JB E Machinery House Heater E6:PE 800030
W1224 BLUE X12:19 X12 POWE PACK JB 1101 Machinery House Heater E6A:L 800030
W1224 BROWN X12:20 X12 POWE PACK JB 1102 Machinery House Heater E6A:N 800030
W1224 G/Y X12:PE X12 POWE PACK JB E Machinery House Heater E6A:PE 800030
W1225 BLUE X12:11 X12 Power Pack J'Box 505 E41e Hydraulic Oil Heater E41F:L 800030
W1225 BROWN X12:12 X12 Power Pack J'Box 506 E41e Hydraulic Oil Heater E41F:N 800030
W1225 G/Y X12:PE X12 Power Pack J'Box E E41e Hydraulic Oil Heater E41F:PE 800030
W1226 1 X3B:38 Powerpack Start Control Panel 1470 X12 Powerpack Distribution Panel X12.3:1 800021
W1226 4 X12.3:2 X12 Powerpack Distribution Panel 200 Powerpack Start Control Panel X3B:16 800021
W2901 BLACK N1:L1 Slip ring 508 X29 Motor Control Panel X29L1 (Busbar) 800008



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1814 PC1000 60 /62 D
W3101 BLACK N1:2 Slip ring 535 X31 Emergency Motor Control Panel XM : 2 800282
W3101 BROWN N1:1 Slip ring 533 X31 Emergency Motor Control Panel XM : 1 800282
W3101 GREY N1:3 Slip ring 537 X31 Emergency Motor Control Panel XM : 3 800282
W3102 BLACK N1:2 Slip ring 536 X31 Emergency Motor Control Panel XM : 2 800282
W3102 BROWN N1:1 Slip ring 534 X31 Emergency Motor Control Panel XM : 1 800282
W3102 GREY N1:3 Slip ring 538 X31 Emergency Motor Control Panel XM : 3 800282
W8111 1 A10 Orlaco Camera System Boom Top Camera JB Boom JB Orlaco Cable
W8112 1 A10 Orlaco Camera System Winch Camera 1 A102 Orlaco Cable
W8115 1 A10 Orlaco Camera System Keyboard B21 Orlaco Cable
W8116 1 A10 Orlaco Camera System Camera Display B20 Orlaco Cable



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1814 PC1000 61 /62 D
W8117 BLACK X8:PE X8 Distribution Panel 814 Camera Display B20:- 800030
W8117 RED X13DC:3 X13 UPS JB 813 Camera Display B20:+ 800030



PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
WRITTEN PERMISSION.
C
1814 PC1000 62 /62 D
IOMͲSection8.SparePartList
8Ͳ1
8 SPARE PART LIST

8.1 RecommendedSparePartList 8Ͳ2
8Ͳ2
8.1 Recommended Spare Part List
ComponentslistedonMainPowerpackAssembly
SPARE DESCRIPTION Refer to (A1.2400.372 and 373) Quantity on hand
Reference/ Item
Spare Description Commissioning Operational
Drawing No Number
Gearbox–Motor
1 A4.2436.084 4 0 2
Coupling
2 Gearbox Filter A4.2450.197 3 0 2
A4.2430.171 or
3 Electric Motor parts 2 0 2
172
For electric motor spare parts refer to Siemens Electric Motor manual in section 10.
ComponentslistedonPort&StbdHoistWinchAssemblies
SPARE DESCRIPTION Refer to (A2.2300.506 & 507) Quantity on hand
Reference/ Item
Spare Description Numb Commissioning Operational
Drawing No er
Drum Drive (Gearbox,
Motor and Brake
1 A3.2390.470 3 0 2
treated as single unit for
exchange)
2 Limit Switch Assembly A4.2370.473 6 0 2
Encoder Drive 5 or
3 A3.2370.438 0 2
Assembly 10
ComponentslistedonHoistDrumDriveAssembly
SPARE DESCRIPTION Refer to (A3.2390.470) Quantity on hand
Reference/ Item
Drawing No Number
Gearbox and Brake
1 2 0 2
Assembly
2 Motor Adapter 5 0 2
3 Motor 7 0 2
8Ͳ3
4 Motor Gasket 6 0 2
5 Bearing 3 0 4
6 Gearbox Seal Kit n/a 1 6
7 Motor Shaft Seal n/a 1 6
Note: It is recommended that the Drive be replaced as a unit (item 1 in the hoist winch
assembly spares list)
ComponentslistedonLuffWinchAssembly
Reference/ Item
Spare Description Numb Commissioning Operational
Drawing No er
Motor and Brake
1 A3.2390.470 3 0 1
exchange)
Encoder Drive
3 A3.2370.438 8 0 1
Assembly
ComponentslistedonLuffDrumDriveAssembly
Refer to Hoist Drum Drive Assembly
ComponentslistedonFlyWinchAssembly
Reference/ Item
Drawing No Number
Motor and Brake
1 A3.2390.469 3 0 1
exchange)
Encoder Drive
3 A3.2370.451 16 0 1
Assembly
8Ͳ4
ComponentslistedonFlyDrumDriveAssembly
Reference/ Item
Drawing No Number
Gearbox & Brake
1 1 0 1
Assembly
3 Motor 3 0 1
5 Bearing 5 0 1
6 Motor Shaft Seal n/a 1 2
7 Gearbox Seal Kit n/a 1 2
Note: It is recommended that the Drive be replaced as a unit (item 1 in the fly winch
ComponentslistedonSlewRingAssembly
Reference/ Item
Drawing No Number
Slew Drive (Gearbox,
Motor and Brake
1 A3.2500.213 2 0 2
exchange)
2 Slew Bolts inner A3.9260.351 6 4 10
3 Slew Bolts outer A3.9260.351 5 4 10
4 Slew Nuts A3.9260.351 7 8 20
5 Outer Slew Washer A3.9260.351 8 4 10
6 Inner Slew Washer A3.9260.351 9 4 10
8Ͳ5
ComponentslistedonSlewDriveAssembly
Reference/ Item
Drawing No Number
1 Gearbox 13 0 1
2 Brake 14 0 1
4 Motor 17 0 1
6 Bearing 7&8 0 2
7 Seal Kit N/A 1 2
Note: It is recommended that the Drive be replaced as a unit (item 1 in the Slew drive
ComponentslistedonHydraulicCircuit
Reference/ Item
Drawing No Number
1 Stbd Hoist/ Fly Pumps 1 0 1
2 Port Hoist Pumps 2 0 1
2 Luff Pump 6&7 0 1
3 Slew Pump 3 0 1
4 Cooling Pump 5 0 1
5 Tugger Pump 4 0 1
Emergency Powerpack
6 83 & 84 0 1
Pump
7 Hoist Pump Seal Kit n/a 2 2
8 Luff Pump Seal Kit n/a 2 2
9 Slew Pump Seal Kit n/a 2 2
10 Cooling Pump Seal Kit n/a 1 2
11 Tugger Pump Seal Kit n/a 1 2
Emergency Powerpack
12 n/a 1 2
Pump Seal Kit
8Ͳ6
15, 16,
19,28,
13 Control Valve 1 each 4 each
52, 53,
77
14 Control Manifold 17, 31 1 1
15 Motor cooling fan 10 1 1
16 Pressure Switch 48 2 6
Hoist/ Luff/ Fly Boost
17 n/a 6 21
Pump Filter Element
Slew Boost Pump Filter
18 n/a 1 4
Element
Emergency Power pack
19 n/a 1 1
Filter Element
Tugger Pump Filter
20 n/a 1 2
Element
ComponentslistedonElectricalCircuit
SPARE DESCRIPTION Refer to (A3.6100.574 & 590) Quantity on hand
Spare Description Reference/ Item Commissioning Operational
Drawing No Number
1 Aviation Light Taurus E4/21 & 31 0 1
IQL85
2 Floodlight Globe Crouse E3/21-28, 0 2
31-32,
Hinds
PX0440
3 Fluorescent 230V TNAML E1/1, 6-11, 0 4
15-27, 34-
B1236B1A 43
4 SS Hollow Shaft 2REX-H- B25, B26, 0 1
B27A,
Encoder 635 Puls/Rev SR635-SR- B27B
N-15-66-20-
SS-E
5 SS Hollow Shaft 2REX-H- B7 0 1
Encoder 3600 SR3600-
Puls/Rev SR-N-15-
66-20-SS-E
6 Proximity Switch M12 NBN4- B31/1, 0 1
B31/2,
Contactor 12GM60- B31/3
A2-V1
7 ESX Controller ESX ESX, 0 1
ESX i/O,
ESX_II,
ESX_X4,
ESX_X6,
ESX_X15
8Ͳ7
8 Green LED 704.202.508 H1A, H1B, 1 2

H2, H3, H4,
24, H35
9 Red LED 704.202.208 H59 0 1
10 Selector Switch 2 pos 704.411.018 S10, S11, 1 2
S12, S12A,
S13, S14
11 Red Pushbutton 704.064.2 S2, S2/1, 1 2
S2/2, S2/3,
S2/4 S2/5,
S2/6
12 4 Pole Relay Socket S4-B K100, 1 2
K15B, K17
13 4 Pole Relay DC24V C4-A40FX K15A, 2 4
K15B, K17
14 3 Pole + 1 NO A16-30-10 K91A, K91B, 2 4
K91C,
Contactor K92A, K92B,
K92C
15 Power Relay VF7-41H11 K1, K1/2, 2 4
K1/3, K1/4,
(24V, 70A) K57, K90
16 Plugin Relay 4CO, 14 C4- K1A, K2, 2 4
K2A, K2B,
pin A40FX/DC2 K16, K57A,
4V K62, K62A,
K62B,K91A,
K91B,K91C,
K91E, K131,
K132
17 4 Pole Relay Socket S4-B K1A, K2, 2 4
K2A, K2B,
K16, K57A,
K62, K62A,
K62B,K91A,
K91B,K91C,
K91E, K131,
K132
18 40-20mA Pressure A08-HT PT1A, 2 4
PT1B,
Transducer PY2A,
PT2B, PT3,
PT4, PT5,
PT6, PT7
19 RCD Circuit Breaker 26859 Q2, Q2A 0 2
16A 2P (10kA)
20 Circuit Breaker 16A 2P 25817 Q1, Q5a, 0 2
Q26, Q30,
(6kA) Q31A
21 Circuit Breaker 63A 2P 25823 Q32 0 2
22 Circuit Breaker 10A 2P 25816 Q3, Q3A, 0 2
Q5, Q7,
(6kA) Q9, Q9A,
Q9B, Q9C,
Q16, Q31,
Q31B,
Q41, Q46
23 Circuit Breaker 10A 2P 25658 Q15B 0 2
(10kA)
24 Circuit Breaker 6A 2P 25657 Q3B 0 1
25 Circuit Breaker 16A 2P 25659 Q15A, 0 2
(10kA)
26 Circuit Breaker 40A 4P 25017 Q15 0 2
8Ͳ8
27 Circuit Breaker 2A 1P 24969 QD2, QD2A, 0 2

QD3, QD3A,
QD3B,QD11
QD11A,
QD19,QD20
QD28,
QD29A
QD10
29 Circuit Breaker 6A 1P 24972 QD6A, 0 2
QD6B,
QD6C, Qd7,
QD7A
30 Circuit Breaker 10A 1P 24973 QD6, QD8, 0 2

QD8/1,
QD27
QD5B
32 Circuit Breaker 16A 1P 24974 QD9, QD19, 0 2

QD22,
QD23
33 Resistor 120Ohm 0.5W 163-448 R1-R4 0 2
Offshore Pedestal Crane Model PC1000 Serial No. 1814
IOM - Section 9. Reference Document
9-1
9 REFERENCE
MATERIAL
9.1 Lubrication Diagram 9-3
9.2 Fasteners Tightening Torque 9-4
9.3 Standard Crane Hand Signal 9-5
9.4 Maintenance Log Sheet 9-7
9.5 Slew Bearing Installation and Fastener Stretch Tensioning and Inspection Procedure 9-16
9.6 Slew Bearing Wear/ Clearance Measurement Procedure 9-17
9.7 Assembly Procedure for Fastening Flanged Boom Connectors 9-18
9.8 Lifting Diagrams 9-19
9.9 Commissioning Procedure 9-20
9.10 Escape Plan 9-21
9.11 CO2 System Instruction Manual 9-22
© Copyright of Favelle Favco Cranes Pty Ltd, 2013 IOM1814 CHP09 01

9-2
Figure list
FIGURE 9.1 – STANDARD HAND SIGNALS............................................................................................................. 9-5

9-3
9.1 Lubrication Diagram

9-4
9.2 Fasteners Tightening Torque

9-5
9.3 Standard Crane Hand Signal
Figure 9.1 – Standard Hand Signals

9-6
COMMANDS ACTIONS
With forearm vertical, forefinger pointing up, move hand in a small
HOIST
horizontal circle.
With arm extended downward, forefinger pointing down, move hand
LOWER
in small horizontal circles.
DOG EVERYTHING Clasp hands in front of body.
RAISE BOOM Arm extended, fingers closed, thumb pointing upward.
LOWER BOOM Arm extended, fingers closed, thumb pointing downward.
SWING Arm extended, point with finger in direction of swing.
Both arms extended, pointing down, move arms rapidly up and
EMERGENCY STOP
down.
Use one hand to give any motion signal and place other hand
MOVE SLOWLY
motionless in front of hand giving the motion signal.

9-7
9.4 Maintenance Log Sheet

This section provides standard forms for maintenance record.

9-8
Daily Maintenance Checklist
Page 1 of 2
Date
Time
Mark ‘√’ for Satisfactory;

Check Item Mark ‘X’ for Unsatisfactory;
Mark ‘-‘ where not applicable
Thur
Mon
Wed
Sun
Tue
Sat
Fri
Day
Check crane fluid level:
 Hydraulic oil tank
 Window washer water
Check crane rope condition on drum
 Port & Stbd Main hoist rope lay
 Aux hoist rope lay
 Luff hoist rope lay

Check crane control function
 Control joystick response

 Emergency stop button(s)
 LINEC System
 Window wiper
 Window washer
 Warning horn
Check crane limit function
 Hoist up deceleration & limit

 Hoist down deceleration & limit
 Luff in deceleration & limit
 Luff out deceleration & limit

9-9
Daily Maintenance Checklist
Page 2 of 2
Date
Time

Check Item Mark ‘X’ for Unsatisfactory;
Thur
Mon
Wed
Sun
Tue
Sat
Fri
Day
Overall inspection
Checked by:
Name
Certificate #
Remarks

9-10
Weekly (or every 40 working hours) Maintenance Checklist
Page 1 of 2
Week
Date
Time
Check item Mark ‘X’ for Unsatisfactory;
Oil leakage around/in cabin, powerpack and
winches
Luff ratchet engagement
Check crane fluid level:
 Electric Motors lubrication oil
 Port & STBD Main Hoist Winch drive
gearbox oil
 Luff Hoist winch drive gearbox oil
 Fly Hoist winch gearbox oil
 Pump drive gearbox oil
Rope condition
 Port & STBD Main hoist
 Aux hoist
 Luff hoist
 Tugger hoist(s)
Gearing grease
 Slew ring bearing
 Slew ring drive gear
 Port & STBD Main hoist drum gear
 Aux hoist drum gear
 Luff drum gear
Ropes grease
 Port Main hoist
 STBD Main Hoist
 Aux hoist
 Luff hoist
 Tugger hoist

9-11
Weekly (or every 40 working hours) Maintenance Checklist
Page 2 of 2
Week
Date
Time
Shafts & bearings grease
 Boom heel bush(es)
 Port & STBD Main hoist drum
 Aux hoist drum
 Luff hoist drum
 Mast head sheave(s)
 Bridle sheave(s)
 Deflector sheave(s)
 Transition Deflector Sheave(s)
 Boom head sheave(s)
 Fly jib head sheave(s)
Checked by:
Name
Certificate #
Remarks

9-12
Monthly (or every 100 working hours) Maintenance Checklist
Page 1 of 2
Month
Date
Time
Brake holding capacity
Powerpack mounting
Check the electric motor lub oil level
Check the pump drive oil level
Check the hoist brake
Inspect & grease the sheave bearings
of mast, bridle, boom and hook
Sheaves assemblies
Inspect & grease port hoist drum bearings
Inspect & grease stbd hoist drum bearings
Inspect & grease luff drum bearings
Inspect & grease fly drum bearings
Inspect & grease port hoist drum drive
bearings
Inspect & grease stbd hoist drum drive

bearings
Inspect & grease luff drum drive
bearings
Inspect & grease fly drum drive bearings
Inspect & grease slew drive bearings
Inspect the hydraulic oil tank

9-13
Monthly (or every 100 working hours) Maintenance Checklist
Page 2 of 2
Month
Date
Time
Checked by:
Name
Certificate #
Remarks

9-14
Quarterly (every 3 month, or every 250 working hours) Maintenance Checklist
Page 1 of 1
Month
Date
Time
Inspect & grease port hoist drum bearings
Inspect & grease stbd hoist drum bearings
Inspect & grease luff drum bearings
Inspect & grease fly drum bearings
Inspect & grease port hoist drum drive bearings
Inspect & grease stbd hoist drum drive bearings
Inspect & grease luff drum drive bearings
Inspect & grease fly drum drive bearings
Inspect & grease slew drive bearings
Lubrication of limit switch drives
Inspect the hydraulic oil tank

Checked by:
Name
Certificate #
Remarks

9-15
Annually (or every 1000 working hours) Maintenance Checklist
Page 1 of 1
Month
Date
Time
Inspect the slew drive splined pinions
Inspect the luff drive splined pinions
Inspect the hoist drive splined pinions
Inspect the fly drive splined pinions

Checked by:
Name
Certificate #
Remarks

9-16
9.5 Slew Bearing Installation and Fastener Stretch

Tensioning and Inspection Procedure

FAVELLE FAVCO PROCEDURE
DOCUMENT No : FP-SLEW- 033

REVISION :C
PAGE : 1 of 23
ROTHE ERDE SLEW BEARING

INSTALLATION AND FASTENER
STRETCH TENSIONING, INSPECTION
PROCEDURES
REVISION CONTROL SHEET
REV. PAGE(S) DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED CHECKED APPROVED
A 23 01/04/10 Original Issue NPV M.P M.P

B 23 31/08/10 Slew bolt tension length
measurement tol. was ± 0.001, NPV M.P G.L
pressure record req. was 0.1Bar
C 23 10/09/10 Updated as per equip. limitations
FIRST ISSUE DETAILS

Prepared by N. Vella Title Project Engineer Date 01/04/10
Checked by M. Prior Title Engineering Manager Date 01/04/10
Approved by M. Prior Title Engineering Manager Date 01/04/10
© THIS DOCUMENT, OR ANY PART THERE OF, REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
FAVCO CRANES Pty. Ltd. AND MUST NOT BE USED OR COPIED IN ANY FORM
WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES. IT IS ONLY
TO BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE FOR WHICH IT HAS BEEN ISSUED. IT MUST NOT BE
GIVEN TO ANY THIRD PARTY AND MUST BE RETURNED OR DESTROYED UPON
COMPLETION OF THE PURPOSE FOR WHICH IT WAS ISSUED.
FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES PTY. LTD.
28 Yarrunga Street,
PRESTONS NSW 2170
SYDNEY AUSTRALIA
TELEPHONE : 61 2 9608 2000
FACSIMILE : 61 2 9607 0022

2 of 23
EMAIL : favcosyd@favellefavco.com.au
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................. 3
1.1 Scope .............................................................................................................3
1.2 Introduction ...................................................................................................3
1.3 Definitions .....................................................................................................3
1.4 Safety .............................................................................................................4
1.5 Referenced Documents ................................................................................4
1.6 Tools & Materials Required ..........................................................................4
2 PRELIMINARY CHECKS AND INSPECTIONS ................................... 6
3 SLEW RING INSTALLATION .............................................................. 8
4 SLEW FASTENER INSTALLATION .................................................. 10
4.1 Procedure – Option 1 .................................................................................. 10
4.2 Procedure – Option 2 .................................................................................. 13
5 SLEW RING RE-LUBRICATION AFTER INSTALLATION ............... 16
6 RECOMMENDED INSPECTION PROCEDURE ................................ 17
6.1 Procedure .................................................................................................... 17
7 INSPECTION FOR FATIGUE CRACKING ........................................ 18
APPENDIX A INSTALLATION ELONGATION RECORD ...................... 19
APPENDIX B INSPECTION RECORD ................................................... 21
APPENDIX C PERMISSIBLE DEVIATION OF AREA SURFACE.......... 22
FP-SLEW-033C.doc
3 of 23
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Scope
This document is provided for guidance and outlines a recommended method of
performing slew ring installation, fastener stretch tensioning, the inspection and testing of
the slew bearing and associated components. This document is based on Rothe Erde
recommended practices and procedures.
Therefore the use of this procedure is strictly limited to Rothe Erde slew bearings being
installed by fasteners which are pre-tensioned by means of a stretch tensioner unless
otherwise approved in writing by the Engineering Department of Favelle Favco Cranes.
1.2 Introduction
The slew ring bearing is a critical structural element of the crane and its correct
installation is of the highest importance to ensure damage to the bearing is prevented
and that potential structural degradation of the bearing or its fasteners does not increase
the possibility of a catastrophic failure in either the bearings or securing fasteners that
could result in death or injury to personnel or damage to property.
It is assumed that pedestal flatness and levelness checks have been completed before
any part of this procedure is commenced.
1.3 Definitions
1.3.1 FFC
This abbreviation means “Favelle Favco Cranes”
1.3.2 Competent Person
A person who has acquired through training, qualification, experience or a combination
of these, the knowledge and skill enabling that person to correctly perform the required
task.
1.3.3 Bearing Ring
The circular half of the bearing race that does not contain the gear teeth.
1.3.4 Gear Ring
The circular half of the bearing race that does contain the gear teeth.
1.3.5 Ring Half
This is a generic term which can mean either the Bearing Ring or
the Gear Ring.
1.3.6 Fastener
This term is used in this procedure to mean either a bolt or a stud.
FP-SLEW-033C.doc
4 of 23
1.4 Safety
It is recommended that a full Job Safety Analysis (JSA) and Task Analysis be performed
in a joint meeting with all personnel involved in this procedure. This meeting should
identify the task analysis and those persons responsible for performing each aspect of
the task. Issues to be considered should include but not necessarily be limited to the
following:
a) A proper and thorough risk assessment identifying all potential hazards associated
with performing the procedure and the environment in which the procedure is to be
performed, and then specifying the method of hazard elimination or mitigation to be
used.
b) Check all equipment according to OHS requirements.
b) Display all warning signs as necessary, both on the equipment and within the
immediate work area.
c) Ensure that persons involved in this procedure are not affected by drugs and, or
alcohol.
d) Ensure long hair is properly restrained.
e) Do not wear any loose fitting clothing, or jewellery.
f) Identify and ensure that the proper Personal Protection Equipment is worn,
including where necessary safety boots, goggles, hearing protection, gloves and
hard hats etc.
g) Ensuring that personnel understand that they are not to do anything that may
unnecessarily risk injury to persons or damage to property.
h) Ensuring that only competent (ie appropriately qualified, trained, responsible and
experienced) personnel are involved in carrying out this procedure.
1.5 Referenced Documents
Rothe Erde Slew Bearing Catalogue (2007)
1.6 Tools & Materials Required
The specific tools and equipment required in performing this procedure include:
a) A Hydraulic Stretch Tensioner System with adequate capacity to apply the preload
tension as specified on the applicable FFC Slew Ring Assembly Drawing and
suitable for the size of slew fastener to be tensioned. The stretch tensioner system
shall have a pressure gauge installed to measure the actual pressure, be
undamaged and in good working condition with a current calibration certificate,
otherwise the system must not be used. A copy of the current calibration certificate
shall be attached to the completed report as shown in APPENDIX A.
b) A digital or dial gauge indicator with an accuracy of 0.05mm, with measuring
calliper of suitable size for measuring the length of the slew fasteners, and with
hemispherical locators on the ends of the callipers as shown in Figure 1.1. This
indicator shall have a current calibration certificate and be undamaged and in good
working condition, otherwise it shall not be used. A copy of the current calibration
certificate shall be attached to the completed report as shown in APPENDIX A.
FP-SLEW-033C.doc
5 of 23
Figure 1.1 – Micrometer with Hemispherical Domed Locators
c) A hand scraper, wire hand brush and clean rags for cleaning the mating surfaces of
the companion structures and the slew bearing.
d) Petroleum, Diesel or Grease Solvent (eg Mirobo A151) for cleaning any
preservative from the surface of the slew bearing. The preservative on the RE
bearing is typically Tectyl 502 C.
e) Adequate slew bearing lubricant of one of the types shown in Figure 5.1 to enable
re-lubrication after installation.
FP-SLEW-033C.doc
6 of 23
2 PRELIMINARY CHECKS AND INSPECTIONS

Prior to slew bearing installation the following should be should be checked:
1) Smooth Running of the Slew Bearing – Check for smooth running by rotating
about its axis the outer ring of the bearing relative to the inner ring through 720°
(i.e. 2 complete revolutions). If the bearing does not freely rotate then this situation
shall be rectified before it is permissible to continue with this procedure. Possible
causes of non-free rotation can include but are not limited to the following:
a) Bearing storage or non-use for a period of time has caused the seals to bind
on the ring. (See below for method of rectification)
b) Roller or Ball Bearing failure within the slew bearing
c) Slew Bearing twisted or otherwise permanently distorted or damaged
d) The companion structure to which the bearing is bolted is out-of-flat causing
distortion of the slew bearing.
After a long storage period slew bearing can exhibit high rotational
resistance due to suction and friction at the seal rims. To avoid this
and before checking of the bearing for smooth running, the seals
should be carefully lifted with a blunt steel object around the entire
circumference of bearing while it is repeatedly rotated through 360°
clockwise and then anti-clockwise until the bearing freely rotates.
2) Visual Inspection of Slew Bearing – Check for any damage such as corrosion,
cracking, gouges or permanent deformation of the slew bearing that may make it
unfit for use. If any such damage is found an assessment of the slew bearing shall
be performed by a competent person to determine whether or not the slew bearing
is fit for use. If damaged, deteriorated, worn out or painted slew bearing seals are
found then these shall be replaced. If it is found that water has ingressed into then
bearing then the bearing shall dismantled and cleaned to remove all such
contamination, before being re-packed with grease and re-assembled.
3) Inspection of Slew Fastener Components – The following should be checked:
a) The slew fasteners are the correct fasteners for the slew ring by reference to
the applicable FFC slew ring assembly drawing. These fasteners bear the
fastener grade markings and should be Grade 10.9. Unmarked fasteners shall
not be used.
b) The fasteners have been recently visually and Non-Destructively Tested
(NDT) for cracking, or any other damage that would render the fasteners unfit
for use. Replace and do not use damaged fasteners. Inspection and Testing
shall always be performed before the reuse of these fasteners and a record of
this inspection and testing, shall be made available to the person responsible
for performing this slew ring installation procedure.
c) That 16 of the slew fasteners have both ends machined, such that micrometer
measurements of length may be performed on these fasteners. Separate the
fasteners with machined ends from the other slew ring fasteners. Where inner
fasteners are of a different type or length to outer fasteners then 8 of the inner
and 8 of the outer fasteners should be machined for permitting length and
elongation measurements. If none of the fasteners have machined ends then
the relevant number of fasteners, may be machined with conic shaped centres
FP-SLEW-033C.doc
7 of 23
at both ends of the fastener, with a subtended angle of 60° and depth of 3mm
as shown in Figure 2.1.
Figure 2.1 – Machined End Detail of Fasteners for Micrometer Measurements
d) Stamp each of the fasteners with the machined ends with a unique ID number
that is 6mm high. The digits should start with the number 1 and be
consecutive numbers, with each fastener for a ring half having a different
number. The numbers for the bearing ring and the gear ring halves of the
bearing should each start with the number 1, i.e. the gear ring end machined
fasteners should be numbered 1, 2, 3, 4.. etc. and the bearing ring end
machined fasteners should also be numbered 1, 2, 3, 4 ... etc. If these
fasteners are bolts then stamp the number on two opposite flats of the bolt
head. If the fasteners are studs then stamp the number on both ends of the
stud such they can easily be seen even after the fastener is installed and in
service.
4) Inspection of Mating Surfaces on Companion Structures – Check for any
damage such as corrosion, cracking, gouges or permanent deformation of the
surfaces of the companion structures that may make them unfit for use. If any such
damage is found an assessment of the these surfaces shall be performed by a
competent person to determine whether or not they are fit for use as is, or whether
repair is required before use. It is important that the contact surfaces of the
companion structures are within tolerances with respect to distortion and flatness. If
there are any concerns or indications that these surfaces may exceed the levels
indicated in Appendix C, then it is recommended that measurements of the contact
area surface be measured by means of an optical, or laser measuring machine. If
the measured values are outside those in Appendix C, then a surface machine re-
work is recommended to prevent future damage to the slew ring bearing.
FP-SLEW-033C.doc
8 of 23
3 SLEW RING INSTALLATION

1) Remove the protective coating. Preservation from slew bearing and companion
structures contact surfaces using petroleum, diesel or grease solvent as necessary.
All slew ring and companion structures contact surfaces must be cleaned of
preservative, paint or any contamination until the contact surfaces are completely
clean bare metal surface. Nothing, including any preservative or paint shall be
applied to these surfaces. The protective coating preservative if present should also
be removed from the gear teeth, but if the gear is greased then the gear teeth
should not be cleaned.
When removing the preservation, take caution to prevent any solvent
from coming into contact with the bearing seal and also from entering
the bearing raceway.
2) Locate the bearing soft spots. This is designated with an “S” stamped near the
type plate or filler plug at the inner or outer diameter of each bearing ring. On the
ring gear the soft spot is marked with an “S” on its axial surface. The soft spot on
the bearing ring that is bolted to the crane deck structure must be located at either
±90q to the direction of the boom, that is on either the port or starboard side of the
deck flange to which the slew ring shall be bolted. The soft spot on the gear ring
should be located onto the pedestal or slew mount flange in a position that is
outside the main load carrying areas as indicated in Figure 3.1. The main load
carrying areas are those areas on the gear ring that fall under the longitudinal
centreline of the crane deck both front and rear when the crane is lifting a grounded
load or a load from a vessel. Ideally the soft spot on the gear ring should be located
at maximum angular separation around the gear ring from the main load carrying
areas of the gear ring.
Figure 3.1 – Soft Spot Location Relative to Predominate Working Direction
Do not paint the bearing seals

.
FP-SLEW-033C.doc
9 of 23
3) Backlash adjustment ring (eccentric). If the crane has an adjustment ring on the
slew drive assemblies and these have not already been FFC factory preset, or
these are being replaced, then the slew bearing ring fastener hole centrelines
should, as near as possible, be centred about the deck structure fastener hole
centrelines. Before setting and doweling the eccentrics, such that the backlash at
all slew drive pinions complies with FAVELLE FAVCO procedure FP-Backlash-005.
If the crane does not have slew drive eccentrics, or the eccentrics have already
been FFC factory preset, then perform backlash inspection for all slew drives using
FP-Backlash-005. If necessary move deck structure on slew bearing, until
satisfactory backlash is achieved between all slew drive pinions and the slew ring
gear. This must be done before tightening any slew fasteners between the slew
bearing ring to the crane deck structure.
4) Ensure that all slew fastener holes through the companion structure and the slew
ring will permit the slew fasteners to be inserted without force before commencing
the slew fastener installation procedure.
FP-SLEW-033C.doc
10 of 23
4 SLEW FASTENER INSTALLATION

There are many ways to correctly install slew ring fasteners. Two options are presented
for the operator to choose their preferred method. Slew fastener installation should
always be carried out by a competent person.
4.1 Procedure – Option 1
This procedure is to be performed and completed first on either the slew bearing ring or
the slew gear ring then performed on the other ring. Figure 4.1 shows a typical slew ring
assembly.
Throughout this Procedure all slew ring fasteners must be tensioned

with the same tensioning tool. If a different tensioning tool is required
then this procedure must be completely re-started.
Figure 4.1 – Typical Slew Ring Assembly
4.1.1 Determine Stretch Tensioning Pressure

Steps 1 to 20 are required to determine the precise pressure of the stretch tensioning
system being use required to achieve the correct preload of the slew fasteners. This
procedure is only performed on 8 of the fasteners in each ring half and must be carried
out for both bearing ring and gear ring fasteners.
FP-SLEW-033C.doc
11 of 23
1) Fill in all the Information requested on the Slew Installation Elongation Record
(APPENDIX A ) down to and including item C – Calculate Allowable Elongation
Range for Fasteners at Target Elongation.
2) Place all the machined slew fasteners (i.e. those to be used for performing indicator
measurements) around the slew ring following the crosswise pattern as shown in
Figure 4.2, ensuring the fastener ID number is placed in the position as indicated.
Apply the nuts and washers to these fasteners in accordance with the relevant FFC
Slew Drive Assembly Drawing and finger tighten. Place all other fasteners around
the machined fasteners and hand tighten.
Do not use any torque device (e.g. rattle gun) to these fasteners as
this may prematurely stretch the bolt assembly and give an
inaccurate initial reading.
3) Measure the initial (i.e. 0% load) length of each of these fasteners in millimetres
(mm) to 2 decimal places, using the indicator. Record the fastener ID number and
its initial 0% load length on the Record Sheet in Columns ID and D respectively.
4) Set the Stretch Tensioner to 50% of the Estimated Pressure for Fastener Preload
as recorded in B of the Record Sheet. Stretch tension all numbered fasteners
sequentially following the pattern shown in Figure 4.2 (i.e. in the same sequence as
they were inserted), to approximately 50% of their final preloaded value.
5) Calculate the estimated pressure to achieve 90% of the fastener load in BAR as
per Column E of the Record Sheet and write this value into the record sheet
against each of the fasteners. Average the values calculated in this column and
record this vale.
6) Set the Stretch Tensioner to the average calculated pressure in step 5. Stretch
tension the numbered fasteners sequentially following the pattern shown in Figure
4.2, to approximately 90% of their final preloaded value.
7) Measure the new length in millimetres to 2 decimal places, using the indicator and
record sequentially starting at number 1. Record the new length in the 90% load
(column F) of the Record Sheet.
8) For each fastener calculate the elongation as per Column G of the record sheet
and enter these values into the record sheet in mm to 2 decimal places.
9) For each fastener calculate the estimated pressure to achieve 98% of the fastener
load as per Column H of the Record Sheet and enter these value as they are
calculated into the record sheet against each of the fasteners.
10) Calculate the average value of the estimated pressure to achieve 98% of the
fastener load and enter this into the Record Sheet in Column H row average.
11) Set the Stretch Tensioner to the calculated average pressure in step 10 and as
recorded in Column H average of the Record Sheet. Stretch tension these
fasteners sequentially following the pattern shown in Figure 4.2, to approximately
98% of their final preloaded value.
12) Measure and record sequentially starting at number 1, the length (in mm and to 2
decimal places), of each of the fasteners at 98% load on the Record Sheet in
Column I.
13) For each fastener calculate the elongation as per Column J of the record sheet and
enter these values into the record sheet, in mm to 2 decimal places.
FP-SLEW-033C.doc
12 of 23
14) For each fastener calculate the estimated pressure to achieve 100% of the fastener
load, as per Column K of the Record Sheet. Enter these values as they are
calculated into the record sheet against each of the numbered fasteners.
15) Calculate the average value of the estimated pressure to achieve 100% of the
fastener load and enter this into the Record Sheet in Column K.
16) Set the Stretch Tensioner to the calculated average pressure in step 15, as
recorded in Column K of the Record Sheet. Stretch tension these fasteners
sequentially following the pattern shown in Figure 4.2, to approximately 100% of
their final preloaded value.
17) Measure using the indicator and record sequentially starting at number 1, the
length (in mm to 2 decimal places), of each of the fasteners at 100% load on the
Record Sheet in Column L.
18) For each fastener calculate the elongation as per Column M of the record sheet
and enter these values in millimetres (mm) to 2 decimal places.
19) Check that each value within Column M is within the acceptable elongation range
calculated at C of the Record Sheet. If each value falls within this range, the Stretch
Tensioner Pressure Result shall be marked as acceptable, on the Record Sheet.
Otherwise the result shall be marked as unacceptable.
20) If the result is acceptable then average pressure obtained at step 15 and included
in the Record Sheet at Column K shall be the pressure setting to be used for
tightening all the remaining fasteners in the ring half.
Figure 4.2 – Tensioning Sequence
21) If results are unacceptable the procedure should be repeated with the pressures
adjusted (up or down), until all fasteners achieve an acceptable elongation with the
same pressure setting. If it is not possible for all fasteners to be within specified
FP-SLEW-033C.doc
13 of 23
elongation, with the same pressure setting, than the batch of bolts may be
inconsistent and should be replaced.
4.1.2 Complete Stretch Tensioning
22) Set the Stretch Tensioner System to 50% of the Estimated Pressure for Fastener
Preload as recorded in C of the Record Sheet. Stretch tension all fasteners
sequentially starting at position 9, following the pattern shown in Figure 4.2.
23) Set the Stretch Tensioner System to the appropriate pressure determined in step
15 and recorded in Column K and Row Average of the Record Sheet. Stretch
tension all fasteners sequentially starting at position 9, following the pattern shown
in Figure 4.2 to approximately 100% of the preload value.
24) Wait 30 minutes and then repeat step 23 using exactly the same stretch tensioner
system pressure as used in step 23. This is necessary as when a fastener is
tensioned and then another fastener is tensioned near or adjacent to the fastener
then the former fastener will lose some of its preload.
25) Re-measure the length of all the numbered fasteners. Record the length in Column
N, in millimetres (mm), to 2 decimal places, starting with Number 1, and continuing
sequentially for all these fasteners.
26) Calculate as per Column O of the Record Sheet and record the actual final
calculated extension of each of these fasteners.
27) Check that each value within Column Q is within the acceptable elongation range
as Calculated at C of the Record Sheet. If each value falls within this range then
the Slew Fastener Installation Result shall be marked as acceptable on the Record
Sheet. Otherwise the result shall be marked as unacceptable.
4.2 Procedure – Option 2
This procedure is to be performed and completed for both gear ring and bearing ring,
one bearing half should be completed before the other is started.
Throughout this Procedure all slew ring fasteners must be tensioned

with the same tensioning tool. If a different tensioning tool is required
then this procedure must be completely re-started.
4.2.1 Determine Stretch Tensioning Pressure

Steps 1 to 13 are required to determine the precise pressure of the stretch tensioning
system being use required to achieve the correct preload of the slew fasteners. This
procedure must be carried out for 8 fasteners in the bearing ring and 8 fasteners in the
gear ring.
1) Fill in all the Information requested on the Slew Installation Elongation Record
(APPENDIX A ) down to and including item C to determine the target elongation
and pressures.
2) Place all the machined slew fasteners (i.e. those to be used for performing
micrometer measurements) around the slew ring following the crosswise pattern as
shown in Figure 4.2, ensuring the fastener ID number is placed in the position as
indicated. Fit the nuts and washers to these fasteners in accordance with the
relevant FFC Slew Drive Assembly Drawing and finger tighten. Place remaining
fasteners around the numbered fasteners and finger tighten.
FP-SLEW-033C.doc
14 of 23
Do not use any torque device (e.g. rattle gun) to these fasteners as
this may prematurely stretch the bolt assembly and give an
inaccurate initial reading.
3) Measure the initial (i.e. 0% load) length of each of these fasteners in millimetres
(mm) to 2 decimal places, using the indicator. Record the fastener ID number and
its initial 0% load length on the Record Sheet in Columns ID and D respectively.
4) Set the Stretch Tensioner System to 50% of the Estimated Pressure for Fastener
Preload as recorded in B of the Record Sheet. Stretch tension the numbered
fasteners sequentially following the pattern shown in Figure 4.2 (i.e. in the same
sequence as they were inserted) to approximately 50% of their final preloaded
value.
5) Now tension fastener in position 1 until 90% elongation is achieved. Record the
pressure in Column E and the measured length in Column F and the extension in
Column G of record sheet.
6) Repeat step 5 for all numbered fasteners. All measured fastener pressures should
be within 2% of the value calculated at C.
7) Then tension fastener in position 1 until 98% elongation is achieved. Record this
pressure in Column H, overall length in Column I and extension achieved in
Column J of record sheet.
9) Now tension fastener in position 1 until 100% elongation is achieved. Record the
pressure in Column K, measured length in Column K and the extension in Column
M of record sheet.
11) Check that each value within Column M lies within the acceptable elongation range
as Calculated at C of the Record Sheet. If each value falls within this range then
the Stretch Tensioner Pressure Result shall be marked as acceptable on the
Record Sheet. Otherwise the result shall be marked as unacceptable.
12) If the result is acceptable then average pressure from Column K shall be the
pressure setting to be used for tightening all the remaining fasteners in the ring half.
13) If results are unacceptable the procedure should be repeated with the pressures
adjusted (up or down), until all fasteners achieve an acceptable elongation with the
same pressure setting. If it is not possible for all fasteners to be within specified
elongation, with the same pressure setting, than the batch of bolts may be
inconsistent and should be replaced.
FP-SLEW-033C.doc
15 of 23
4.2.2 Complete Stretch Tensioning

14) Average the pressures from Columns E and H.
15) Set the stretch tensioner to half of the average 100% elongation pressures (Column
K). Stretch tension all fasteners sequentially starting at position 9 and following the
pattern shown in Figure 4.2.
16) Set the stretch tensioner to the average 100% elongation pressure (Column K).
Stretch tension all fasteners sequentially starting at position 9 and following the
pattern shown in Figure 4.2.
17) Wait 30 minutes and then repeat step 18 using exactly the same stretch tensioner
system pressure. This is necessary as the fastener will lose some of its preload as
the structure settles.
18) Measure the numbered fasteners and record the length in Column N.
19) Calculate the final extension for all numbered fasteners and record this in Column
O.
20) Check the final extension is within the target extension of +5% -10% (from C).
FP-SLEW-033C.doc
16 of 23
5 SLEW RING RE-LUBRICATION AFTER INSTALLATION

Immediately after the completion of Slew Ring Fastener Installation the slew bearing
should be re-lubricated. Only lubricants listed in Fig 5.1 shall be used for re-lubrication of
the bearing. These greases are solely KP 2 K Greases (ie Lithium saponified mineral oils
of NLGI Grade 2 with EP additives). The recommended grease additives shown in Fig
5.1 can be mixed together. These greases are listed in random order and not according
to quality. The grease filling is there to reduce friction, seal the bearing and provide
protection against corrosion. Therefore the bearing must always be greased liberally so
that a collar of fresh grease forms around the whole circumference of the bearing gaps
and seals. The bearing should be rotated during the re-lubrication process.
Figure 5.1 – Recommended Slew Bearing Lubricating Greases
FP-SLEW-033C.doc
17 of 23
6 RECOMMENDED INSPECTION PROCEDURE
The inspection procedure is to be performed completely on one of the bearing ring halves
before being repeated on the other bearing ring half. This inspection procedure is to be
performed at the following intervals and shall only be performed by competent persons:
1) At 50 hours of operation or one month after commissioning the crane into operation
whichever occurs first, and
2) At regular 12 months intervals, commencing 12 months after commissioning the
crane into service.
6.1 Procedure
Fill in all the Information requested on the Slew Fastener Inspection Elongation Record
Sheet as included in APPENDIX B down to and including item C –Allowable Elongation
Range. Also fill in from the Slew Fastener Installation Elongation Record Sheet the
Unique Fastener IDs and Initial Measured Length of the Fastener at 0% Load, Columns
ID and D respectively.
Using a calibrated indicator, measure the length of the numbered fasteners, in
millimetres (mm) to 2 decimal places, record these measurements in Column R of the
Record Sheet.
For each fastener calculate the elongation as per Column S of the record sheet and
enter these in millimetres (mm) to 2 decimal places.
Check that each value within Column S is within the acceptable elongation range as at C
of the Record Sheet. If each value falls within this range then the Slew Fastener
Inspection Result shall be marked as acceptable on the Record Sheet. Otherwise the
result shall be marked as unacceptable.
If the elongation has changed from the original installation procedure value such that the
Fastener Inspection Result is not acceptable then this matter shall be investigated by a
competent person. If the length is shorter then this could indicate potential loosening of
nuts on the fasteners, resulting in a consequential loss of fastener preload. If the length
is longer, this could indicate that fasteners have been overloaded and have stretched.
Depending upon the result and recommendations of this investigation, the slew ring
fasteners may need to be all re-tensioned or replaced.
FP-SLEW-033C.doc
18 of 23
7 INSPECTION FOR FATIGUE CRACKING

Every 2 years after commissioning the crane into service the 16 numbered fasteners
should be removed and inspected with Magnetic Particle Inspection for cracking. The
main area of concern along the fastener is at or near the head connection to the shank
for bolts and at or near the transition between the thread and shank for bolts and studs. If
any fasteners are found to be cracked, then all fasteners should be removed and tested.
Replace all defectives fasteners. Records of these fatigue inspections on slew ring
fasteners shall be kept with other records for the crane.
All inspection, testing and analysis of specimens are to be carried out

by / under appropriately certified bodies or under the control of
FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES Pty. Ltd.
FP-SLEW-033C.doc
19 of 23
APPENDIX A INSTALLATION ELONGATION RECORD

Report for BEARING RING / GEAR RING Fasteners 4
(NOTE: One Installation Record Sheet is required for Bearing Ring and another one is
required for Gear Ring)
Crane Model Crane Serial No.
Stretch Tensioner System Pressure
Inspector Name
Gauge S/No
Stretch Tensioner Pressure Gauge
Inspector Signature
Calibration Certificate Reference No.3
Location Micrometer S/No.
Micrometer Calibration Certificate
Date:
Reference No.3
Fastener Diameter7 M Fastener Preload7 kN
BEARING / GEAR Ring Fastener4

1, 7
A Target Elongation (mm) mm
Estimated Pressure for Fastener Preload

B 2 Bar
from Stretch Tensioner Data (Bar)
0.90 x 0.98 x
0.5 x B 100% 1.05 x•A
(A&B) (A&B)
6
C Calculate Elongation for Target Elongation --------- A
Calculate Pressure for target elongation B ---------
NOTE: This table below shall be completed when determining the stretch tensioning
pressure to be used for the fasteners of the relevant ring half
FP-SLEW-033C.doc
20 of 23
G1=F- M1=L-
ID D1 E2 F1 H2 I1 J1=I-D K2 L1 N1 O
D D
No
ID No. 90% Fastener Load 98% Fastener Load 100% Fastener Load Final
Load
Length Press. Length Exten. Press. Length Exten. Press. Length Exten. Length Exten.
(mm) (BAR) (mm) (mm) (BAR) (mm) (mm) (BAR) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
Average
Fastener Elongation Result is ACCEPTABLE / NOT ACCEPTABLE4

Notes:
1. All lengths are to be measured, calculated and recorded in millimetres (mm) to 2
decimal places.
2. All pressures to be measured and recorded in Bar.
3. Attach a copy of indicator and stretch tensioner system pressure gauge calibration
certificate. (Note: This procedure shall not be performed if these certificates are not
available)
4. Delete whichever is not applicable
5. Send a copy of these results to FFC Quality Department for inclusion in crane
Material Data Record (MDR)
6. Values for Fastener Diameter, Fastener Preload and Target Elongation shall be
obtained from the relevant Slew Ring Assembly Drawing included in the Crane
Manual.
7. The recorded value of Pressure for the fastener must have the actual measured
elongation within tolerance stated on relevant slew ring assembly drawing.
8. A copy of this completed Record Sheet should be provided to the Quality Manager
of FFC for inclusion in the crane Material Data Records
9. Option 1 formula: Column E = 0.9 x B
10. Option 1 formula: Column H = (0.98 x E x A) ÷ G
11. Option 1 formula: Column L = (H x A) ÷ J
FP-SLEW-033C.doc
21 of 23
APPENDIX B INSPECTION RECORD
Inspection type 50 hrs or 1 months / Annual4
Report for BEARING RING / GEAR RING Fasteners4
(NOTE: One Inspection Record Sheet is required for Bearing Ring and another one is
required for Gear Ring)
Crane Model Crane Serial No.
Inspector Name Micrometer S/No.
Micrometer Calibration Certificate
Inspector Signature
Reference No.3
Location Inspection Date:
BEARING / GEAR Ring Fastener4

2 1
A - Target Elongation (mm) mm
0.98•A S 1.02•A
C2 –Allowable Elongation Range S
ID D2 R1 S1, 6= R - D
Initial Length (from Calculated Extension

Fastener ID Measured Length (mm)
Installation Record) (mm)
Slew Fastener Inspection Result is ACCEPTABLE / NOT ACCEPTABLE4

1. All lengths are to be measured, calculated and recorded in millimetres (mm) to 3
decimal places.
2. Obtain values from Slew Fastener Installation Record Sheet
3. Attach a copy of micrometer calibration certificate. (Note: This procedure shall not
be performed if this certificate is not available)
4. Delete whichever is not applicable
5. A copy of this completed Record Sheet should be filed in with the crane Material
Data Records
FP-SLEW-033C.doc
22 of 23
APPENDIX C PERMISSIBLE DEVIATION OF AREA
SURFACE
Figure 7.1 – Area Plan Deviation “P” Verses Circumferential Companion Structure
Position
Figure 7.1 shows a typical result of a measurement of the area plan deviation “P” which
includes bending of the companion structure contact surface. The measurement is
performed over the full circumference (d.S) of the bearing and performed in widths of
100mm. Therefore several circumferential measurements may be required to fully cover
the area of the companion structure flange as this can only be performed in 100mm
width increments.
The allowable plan deviation for the different types of Rothe Erde Bearings is shown in
Figure 7.2
Figure 7.2 – Table of Admissible Plan Deviations
FP-SLEW-033C.doc
23 of 23
Figure 7.3 – Single Row Slew Bearing with 4 Point Contact
Figure 7.4 – Double Row Ball Bearing
Figure 7.5 – Roller Bearing
FP-SLEW-033C.doc
9-17
9.6 Slew Bearing Wear/ Clearance Measurement

Procedure

DOCUMENT No : FP-SLEW-032
REVISION :C
Slewing Bearing Wear/Clearance

Measurement Procedure
Prepared by M. Rodriguez Title Engineer Date 01/12/09
Checked by E. Krystyan Title Engineer Date 01/12/09
Approved by M. Prior Title Engineering Manager Date 01/12/09
Revision Control Sheet

Rev Date Description Prepared Checked Approved
A 01.12.09 Original Issue MR EK MP
B 10.12.09 Revision Control Sheet Added MR EK MP
Procedure renamed to FB-SLEW-032B
Procedure Updated
C 18.02.10 Appendix V Added MR
Grease Sampling Method Added
© THIS DOCUMENT, OR ANY PART THERE OF, REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES
Pty. Ltd. AND MUST NOT BE USED OR COPIED IN ANY FORM WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION
FROM FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES. IT IS ONLY TO BE USED FOR THE PURPOSE FOR WHICH IT HAS BEEN
ISSUED. IT MUST NOT BE GIVEN TO ANY THIRD PARTY. IT MUST NOT BE GIVEN TO ANY THIRD PARTY
AND MUST BE RETURNED OR DESTROYED UPON COMPLETION OF THE PURPOSE FOR WHICH IT WAS
ISSUED.

A subsidiary of Muhibbah Engineering Group
28 Yarrunga Street,
PRESTONS NSW 2170
SYDNEY AUSTRALIA
TELEPHONE : 61 2 9608 2000 or 61 2 9607 0055

FACSIMILE : 61 2 9607 0022
2
Background
This procedure has been produced to assist those who own operate and hire Favelle Favco cranes in
determining the amount of wear a slewing bearing has incurred and to ascertain whether this wear is
within permissible tolerances.
Scope
This procedure outlines suitable and approved methods for measuring wear in a slewing bearing.
Definitions
Competent Person – A Person that has acquired through training, qualification, experience or a
combination of these, the knowledge and skill enabling that person to correctly perform the required task.
FFC – Abbreviation for Favelle Favco Cranes Pty. Ltd.
MDR – Abbreviation for Material Data Record.
Person – A natural person or other legal entity.
Reference
x API Recommended Practice 2D Fifth Edition, June 2003 – Operation and Maintenance of
Offshore Cranes
x Rothe Erde Slewing Bearings Catalogue (2007)
Equipment & Documentation Required

The following documentation is required for this procedure:
x A copy of this procedure
x Where applicable a copy of appendix II or III with the relevant base measurements
x Rothe Erde Slewing Bearing Inspection Brochure (Ref Appendix V)
The following measuring equipment is required for this procedure:

x Dial gauges with an accuracy of 0.01mm
x 6” Electronic Digital Calliper with an accuracy of 0.01mm
Note: all measuring devices shall have a current calibration certificate and be in good working order. This procedure
shall not be performed with uncalibrated measuring equipment.
Procedure
This procedure shall be performed by a competent person.
For assessing the condition of a slewing bearing its normal wear rate and grease contamination must be
monitored to determine its expected service life. The wear present in the raceway shows itself by a
change in the axial motion of the bearing. Depending on actual conditions the wear measurement can be
performed in a number of ways. It is thus important to ascertain the suitable method to use for
determining wear. This procedure details four methods to measure slewing bearing wear.
FFCA recommends that the Grease Sampling Method accompanied with either the Tilt or Depression
Method be performed on an annual basis starting from the date of commissioning of the crane. Where no
base measurements are available, the Grease Sampling Method shall be accompanied with the Rotation
Method for measuring the wear rate and contamination.
The period between sampling and measurements shall be shortened if obvious metal or contaminants
are present in a grease sample or if an increased rate of wear is determined in the Tilt, Depression or
Rotation Method.
FP-SLEW-032C.doc Page 2 of 22
3
1- Tilt Method
In order to perform this procedure, it must be possible to fully

tilt the bearing forward or rearward using the counterweight
of the crane, boom etc. The objective is to measure the total
internal bearing raceway to rolling element clearance with no
substantial moment.
The first measurement should be performed when the crane

is first put into operation in order to obtain a set of base
measurements, for subsequent or repeat measurements.
The measuring points should be marked around the

circumference while the boom is kept in a specified position.
It is strongly recommended the tilt procedure be performed at 45° intervals around the circumference.
This procedure involves positioning a dial indicator between the lower mating structure and the bearing
bolted to the structure. The measurements should be taken as close to the bearing as possible in order to
minimize the effect of elastic deformations in the system.
1. If the relevant structures are not already stamped then permanently mark the position of the
respective measuring positions around the circumference of the slewing bearing, by stamping the
relevant position numbers on the outside edge of the pedestal flange just below the top machined
surface of the pedestal adaptor and an indicator arrow on the outside edge of the flange just
above the machinery deck bottom machined surface. Point 1 through point 8 shall be marked on
the outside circumference of the pedestal flange at 45° intervals.
(Note: this step is only performed when the initial set of measurements (base measurements) are
to be performed and when the structures have not been previously stamped during production.)
2. Slew until the indicator arrow on the machinery deck lines up with the first position (point 1)
number on the pedestal adaptor.
Stamp indicator arrow
External Edge of
Machinery Deck Flange
Slewing Bearing Machined Surfaces

External Edge of
Pedestal Flange
2 1
Stamp position numbers
3. Position a dial indicator under the boom & under the rear of the crane in line with the boom centre
line.
4. The boom shall then be positioned to fully tilt the bearing forward using a light hook load if
necessary.
5. The dial indicator shall then be zeroed. The boom is then raised to minimum radius to fully tilt the
bearing rearward. The bearing clearance is then measured on the dial indicator.
4
6. The bearing shall again be tilted forward to its original position to verify the accuracy of the
measurement by the dial indicator again checked to ensure it reads zero.
7. Record results on the inspection record sheet, in Appendix II.
8. Slew to till the arrow lines up with the next position and repeat steps 3 to 7 for all 8 marked
measurement points.
The difference between the values measured and the base values represents the wear that has
occurred. If the wear values have exceeded the acceptable values as shown in Appendix 1 Maximum
Permissible Increase of Bearing Clearances, then Favelle Favco Cranes Pty. Ltd. should be consulted for
advice on the safety of the crane.
CAUTION: The tilt procedure can only be used if crane has sufficient counterweight to fully tilt rearward
when the boom is raised to minimum radius. If the crane/bearing is not tilted fully, highly inaccurate and
misleading clearance measurements will result.
5
2- Depression Measurement Method (Axial Reduction Method)
This system involves the monitoring of bearing wear by

periodically measuring the distance between two machined
surfaces on the front or rear of the crane with the bearing
fully tilted forward with no excessive moment load.
In order for the procedure to be accurate, the

measurements must be taken between the exact same
surfaces at the exact same point each time with the boom
at the same position with the same moment load. The First
measurement must be performed when the bearing is new
and the crane is first put into service to obtain a base value for subsequent repeat measurement
comparisons. Without having this base value, the depression measurement method cannot be used to
determine the total wear in the bearing as the bearing is never tilted rearward.
The measuring points should be marked around the circumference while the boom is kept in a specified
position. It is strongly recommended the Depression Measurement Method be performed at a minimum
of 90° intervals around the circumference of the slewing bearing.
1. If the relevant structures are not already stamped then permanently mark the position of the
respective measuring positions around the circumference of the slewing bearing, by stamping the
relevant position numbers on the outside edge of the pedestal flange just below the top machined
surface of the pedestal adaptor and an indicator arrow on the outside edge of the machinery deck
flange just above the bottom machined surface of the machinery deck. Point 1 through point 8
shall be marked on the outside circumference of the pedestal flange at 45° intervals.
(Note: this step is only performed when the initial set of measurements (base measurements) are
to be performed and when the structures have not been previously stamped during production.)
Stamp indicator arrow
External Edge of
Machinery Deck Flange
External Edge of Slewing Bearing Machined Surfaces

Pedestal Flange
2 1
Stamp position numbers
2. Slew until the indicator arrow on the machinery deck lines up with position 1 on the pedestal
adaptor.
3. Luff the boom into minimum radius.
4. Measure the clearance between the pedestal adaptor and the bearing bolted to the machinery
deck.
5. Record results on the inspection record sheet, in Appendix III.
6
The difference between the values measured and the base values represents the wear that has
occurred. If the wear values have exceeded the acceptable values as shown in Appendix I - Maximum
Permissible Increase of Bearing Clearances, then Favelle Favco Cranes Pty. Ltd. should be consulted for
advice on the safety of the crane.
7
3- Rotation Method
When the Tilt Method cannot be used due to insufficient crane counterweight and when no base value
reading was ever taken for use with the Depression Measurement Method, a third method must be used.
One possible third method is the Rotation Method.
The Rotation Method is based on the fact that a bearing can always be fully tilted forward in the direction
of the boom and the tilt will follow the rotation of the crane. A dial indicator, with a magnetic base, can be
fixed to the crane or pedestal with the needle of the indicator positioned on a clean, rust free, machined
horizontal surface of the bearing or crane. The dial indicator should be repositioned every 90° in order to
perform four individual tests.
1. Mark with a marker pen the position of the boom and the respective measuring positions on the
circumference of the slewing bearing. Point 1 through point 8 shall be marked on the
circumference of the slew bearing at 45° intervals.
2. The dial indicator is positioned in the front or rear of the crane in line with the boom. The boom
must be luffed out until the bearing is fully tilted forward with no excessive moment load.
3. Zero the dial indicator.
4. Slowly slew 360° while recording the indicator value every marked position (45° intervals). The
dial indicator should return to zero when the crane is rotated 360° back to its original position.
5. Record the results on the inspection record sheet, in Appendix IV.
6. Move the dial indicator to position 3 and repeat steps 3 to 5.
This method may not be as precise as the tilt and depression measurement methods as the machined
surface of the bearing opposite where it contacts the crane and pedestal may not be machined perfectly
true to the rolling element raceway diameter. However, the Rotation Method does produce reasonably
accurate results when performed on a periodic, consistent basis and may be the only method that can be
used.
8
4- Grease Sample Analysis Method
Wear shall be monitored by periodic grease sample analysis. Grease samples should be collected every
twelve months as a minimum and the results of the analysis recorded. The period between analyses shall
be shortened if obvious metal or contaminants are present in a grease sample. Grease sample analysis
shall be conducted with another wear measurement procedure to accurately determine the slewing
bearing wear.
Preparation
1. Clean the raceway to minimise contamination of the sample.
2. Position the crane boom at the minimum radius to allow a full 360° rotation.
3. Use the grease that is recommended by FFC.
Collection of Sample
4. Pump grease while slowly rotating the crane 360°.
5. A sufficient bead of grease should be observed all the way around the lip seal.
6. Select eight points equally spaced to obtain sufficient sample.
7. Collect the sample in a clean container, such as a sample jar, etc.
8. Clean off excess grease after taking the sample.
Evaluation of sample
9. Take a small portion of the sample and spread it out on a light coloured material such as a white
cotton cloth, coffee filter, etc.
10. Dilute the grease sample with a solvent to expose any contaminates.
11. The grease sample shall be sent to an approved, qualified institute or FFC Service Department
for analysis. Analysis shall be conducted by looking for metal particles, sand, nylon, rust, water,
etc present in the sample. Special attention should be given to particle size, shape and quantity.
12. FFC Engineering Services department should be consulted if the sample is questionable and
further evaluation is required.
For Rothe Erde Slew Rings refer to Appendix VI for Rothe Erde approved grease sample procedure.
Note: Rothe Erde Grease Sampling Kits are available from FFC Spare Parts Department and Grease
Sample analysis is available from the FFC Engineering Services Department.
9
Appendix I – MAXIMUM PERMISSABLE INCREASE OF BEARING CLEARANCES
Double Row Ball bearing Slewing Ring
10
Single-row ball bearings (4-point bearings) double four-point contact bearings
11
Roller bearing Slewing rings
12
Appendix II – INSPECTION RECORD SHEET FOR SLEWING BEARING WEAR MEASUREMENT USING TILT METHOD
Crane Model: _____________________ Crane Serial No: ____________________ Inspector: __________________________
Date of Inspection: _________________ Location of Inspection: ________________ Measuring Instrument S/No: ____________
MEASUREMENT Base Measurement Test Measurement Remarks
Measurement Boom
Point 1 Counterweight
Measurement Boom
Measurement Boom
Measurement Boom
Measurement Boom
Measurement Boom
Measurement Boom
Measurement Boom
NOTE:
1. All measurements are in mm
2. Attach a copy of measuring calibration certificate
3. Send a copy of the results to the FFC Quality Department for inclusion in the crane MDR
13
Appendix III – INSPECTION RECORD SHEET FOR SLEWING BEARING WEAR

MEASUREMENT USING DEPRESSION MEASUREMENT METHOD
Crane Model: _____________________ Crane Serial No: ____________________
Inspector: ________________________ Date of Inspection: __________________
Location of Inspection: ______________ Boom Angle: _______________________
Measuring Instrument S/No: __________
MEASUREMENT Base Measurement Test Measurement Remarks

Measurement
Point 1
Measurement

Point 2
Measurement

Point 3
Measurement

Point 4
Measurement

Point 5
Measurement

Point 6
Measurement

Point 7
Measurement

Point 8
NOTE:
14
Appendix IV – INSPECTION RECORD SHEET FOR SLEWING BEARING WEAR MEASUREMENT USING ROTATION METHOD
Crane Model: _____________________ Crane Serial No: ____________________ Inspector: __________________________
Date of Inspection: _________________ Location of Inspection: ________________ Measuring Instrument S/No: ____________
Angle
MEASUREMENT
0r 45° 90° 135° 180° 225° 270° 315° 360°
Measurement Point 1
Remarks
Measurement Point 2
Remarks
Measurement Point 3
Remarks
Measurement Point 4
Remarks
Measurement Point 5
Remarks
Measurement Point 6
Remarks
Measurement Point 7
Remarks
Measurement Point 8
Remarks
NOTE:
15
Appendix V – ROTHE ERDE SLEWING BEARING INSPECTION BROCHURE
16
17
18
19
20
Appendix VI – ROTHE ERDE APPROVED GREASE SAMPLING PROCEDURE
21
22
9-18
9.7 Assembly Procedure for Fastening Flanged Boom

Connectors

DOCUMENT No : FP-BOOM CONNECTOR - 104

REVISION :A
ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE FOR FASTENING

FLANGED BOOM CONNECTORS
© THIS DOCUMENT, OR ANY PART THERE OF, REMAINS THE PROPERTY OF FAVELLE
FAVCO CRANES Pty. Ltd. AND MUST NOT BE USED OR COPIED IN ANY FORM WITHOUT
PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES. IT IS ONLY TO BE USED
FOR THE PURPOSE FOR WHICH IT HAS BEEN ISSUED. IT MUST NOT BE GIVEN TO ANY
THIRD PARTY AND MUST BE RETURNED OR DESTROYED UPON COMPLETION OF THE
PURPOSE FOR WHICH IT WAS ISSUED.
A subsidiary of Muhibbah Engineering Group
28 Yarrunga Street,
PRESTONS NSW 2170
SYDNEY AUSTRALIA
TELEPHONE : 61 2 9608 2000 or 61 2 9607 0055

FACSIMILE : 61 2 9607 0022
Prepared by G.Zheng Title Project Engineer Date 18/05/11
Checked by E.Pavlakis Title Project Engineer Date 18/05/11
Approved by J.Dawson Title Engineering Manager Date 18/05/11
Page 1 of 11 FP - BOOM CONNECTOR – 104A

Background
This procedure has been developed to detail the appropriate assembly method for Favelle Favco Cranes (FFC)
which has boom sections joined by bolted flanged boom connectors.
Scope
This procedure shall only be used on cranes whose booms sections are connected with flanged boom connectors
basically as shown in Figure 1 MALE AND FEMALE FLANGE CONNECTOR. This procedure is to be used on
PC150, and up to PC1000 model cranes.
Equipment Required
• Required No. of bolts/studs per flanged connector, as per applicable boom assembly drawing (Refer Figure
2 for typical details).
• Required No. of nuts per flanged connector, as per applicable boom assembly drawing (Refer Figure 2 for
typical details).
• Required No. of washers per flanged connector, as per applicable boom assembly drawing (Refer Figure 2
for typical details).
• Calibrated Hydraulic Torque Spanner capable of torquing to at least the required torque as per table on
Table 1 BOOM CONNECTOR FASTERENR TORQUE, and Drawing A4-9900.578.
• Spanner suitable to hold head of all listed bolts when they are being torqued.
• Denso Tape
• Silicone Sealant
Calibration of Equipment
The Hydraulic Torquing spanner used shall be identified by its serial number in a flanged boom connector torquing
report, and a copy of the current calibration certificate for the hydraulic torquing spanner shall be included in this
report as provided in Appendix A. This procedure shall not be performed unless there is a copy of the following
documents to attach to the FP-BOOM CONNECTOR-104 Procedure Report included in Appendix A:
1. A Pressure/Torque Curve for the Torque Spanner Check
2. A current Calibration Certificate for the Torque Spanner Check

Boom Assembly Procedure
Figure 1 MALE AND FEMALE FLANGE CONNECTOR (TYPICAL)

Procedure
1. Check the bolts/studs, nuts and washers are the correct components for the nominated nominal thickness
flanged boom connectors and that the correct quantities are available to assemble the complete boom. Refer to
Figure 2 for typical details of these components. It is imperative to verify that these components are supplied by
FFC as these are supplied with all the material and testing certificates required by the crane standards. The nut
and bolt must also have a blue colored (fluorocarbon) coating. For Dimensions refer to applicable fastener
drawings.
Figure 2 CONNECTOR BOLT/STUDS, NUT AND WASHER FOR USE WITH FLANGED BOOM CONNECTORS
2. Thoroughly clean the machined mating faces of the flanged boom connectors, and the area of the machined
back face of the flanged boom connectors upon which the hardened Washers shall bear on all boom
extensions, boom butt and boom top. There shall not be any grease, lubricant, paint, corrosion or any other
contaminant between the two mating flanged boom connectors or under the areas of the washers. These
surfaces must be clean machined steel surfaces to ensure a good bare metal to bare metal friction joint contact
is achieved.

3. Place all the boom extensions on timber support as indicated in Figure 3 and align each with the other at the
flanged boom connectors and in the sequence indicated on the relevant Boom Assembly Drawing. Note these
flanged boom connectors are male and female so it is necessary to ensure that the male end of the boom
extension is adjacent to the female end of the next boom extension.
Figure 3 BOOM EXTENSIONS ALIGNMENT
4. Starting with the first Boom Extension and its adjacent one, insert the connector bolts through the holes in the
Port Side Top Chord flanged boom connectors with a washer under the head of the bolt and a washer under
the nut and apply the nuts as shown in Figure 4. If connector studs are in use, insert the connector stud through
the holes in the flanged connectors with a washer under the nut each side and apply the nuts as shown in
Figure 4 BOOM EXTENSION FLANGES JOINT – BOLT/STUD CONNECTION
5. Repeat this process at the other 3 flanged boom connectors at the junction between the two boom extensions
in the sequence as indicated in Figure 6 TYP BOOM SQUARE.
6. Hand tighten all bolts/studs at the Port Side Top Chord flanged boom connector with suitable hand spanner in
the sequence as shown in Figure 5. If studs are in use, ensure thread-length-above-Flange is equal on both
sides of the stud, unless specified otherwise in the boom assembly drawing. Repeat this process at the other 3
flanged boom connectors at the junction between the two boom extensions in the sequence as indicated in
Figure 6.
Figure 4 BOOM EXTENSION FLANGES JOINT - BOLT/ STUD CONNECTION

7. Torque all bolts/studs in the Port Side Top Chord flanged boom connector to the final torque value as per Table
1 BOOM CONNECTOR FASTENER TORQUE and as per the requirements of the Torquing Table FFCA
Drawing No. A4-9900.578 for Fluorocarbon Coated Bolts. The sequence of torquing shall be in accordance with
Figure 5 using the Hydraulic Torque Spanner. Repeat this process at the other 3 flanged boom connectors at
the junction between the two boom extensions in the sequence as indicated in Figure 6.
NOTE: FFCA Drawing No. A4-9900.578 is included in the Crane Manual
Figure 5 BOLT TORQUING SEQUENCE FOR 8 & 12 BOLTS
8. Repeat Step 7 to ensure each bolt/stud has been tightened to the final torque value as per Table 1 and FFCA
Drawing No. A4-9900.578 Torquing table for Fluorocarbon Coated Bolts
Figure 6 TYP BOOM SQUARE
9. Repeat Steps 4 to 9 for all the connections between adjacent boom extensions until all boom extensions have
been bolted together.

10. Place the boom butt on timber as indicated in Figure 7 and align it with the first boom extension’s flanged boom
connectors as shown on the relevant Boom Assembly Drawing.
Figure 7 BOOM BOTTOM AND EXTENSION ALIGNMENT
11. Insert the required bolts/studs through the holes in

the Port Side Top Chord flanged boom connector
from the boom extension side such that the nut
shall be applied from the boom butt side. Ensure
that a washer is placed under the head of the bolt
and that a washer is also placed under the nut
and apply the nuts as shown in Figure 8.
12. Repeat step 5-9 for fastening boom bottom and

extension flange connectors; ensure each step is
performed and the final torque value as per Table
1 with the requirements of the Torquing Table
FFCA Drawing No. A4-9900.578 for Fluorocarbon
Coated Bolts has been applied
Figure 8 BOOM BOTTOM & EXTENSION

FLANGES JOINT - BOLT/ STUD CONNECTION
13. Place the boom top on timber as indicated in Figure 9 and align it with the last boom extension’s flanged boom
connectors as shown on the relevant Boom Assembly Drawing.
Figure 9 BOOM EXTENSION AND TOP ALIGNMENT

14. Insert the required bolts/studs through the
holes in the Port Side Top Chord flanged boom
connector from the boom extension side such
that the nut shall be applied from the boom top
side. Ensure that a washer is placed under the
head of the bolt and that a washer is also
placed under the nut and apply the nuts as
shown in Figure 10.
15. Repeat step 5-9 for fastening boom top and

extension flange connectors; ensure each step
is performed and the final torque value as per
Table 1 with the requirements of the Torquing
Table FFCA Drawing No. A4-9900.578 for
Fluorocarbon Coated Bolts has been applied
Figure 10 BOOM TOP & EXTENSION FLANGES JOINT -

BOLT/ STUD CONNECTION
16. Leave the assembled boom on its wooden blocks for at least 48 hours. Then repeat steps 8. (NOTE: This is an
important step to ensure that adequate time is permitted for the process of embedding and relaxation to have
occurred in the bolted joints and that the loss in bolt preload that results from these processes is recovered in
the retorquing of the bolts in this step).
17. Apply Silicone Sealant in the groove around the junction edge of all flanged boom connector to seal these
against ingress of water. Apply Denso tape over the top of this junction and around the perimeter of the flanged
boom connector to provide further protection against water ingress.
18. Apply Denso Tape to completely cover all bolt heads, washers and junctions between washers and flanged
boom connectors. Similarly apply Denso tape to completely cover nuts, the threaded ends of bolts/studs, and
junctions between washers and flanged boom connectors.
DdZ/^Z/^;>EZzd,Z^Ϳ&>hKZKZKEKd&^dEZ^
'ZϭϬ͘ϵ
&^dEZ^//Eŵŵ
Eŵ &ƚͲůďƐ
DϯϬ ϭϬϵϬ ϴϬϯ
Dϯϯ ϭϰϴϮ ϭϬϵϯ
Dϯϲ ϭϵϬϰ ϭϰϬϰ
DϰϮ ϯϬϰϴ ϮϮϰϴ
Dϰϱ ϯϴϬϱ ϮϴϬϲ
Table 1 BOOM CONNECTOR FASTENER TORQUE

Rechecking of Boom Connection Bolts/Studs in Service
19. After 100 hrs of first use of the crane, or 3 months approx, whichever occurs first, all bolts/studs on the flanged
boom connectors should have their Denso tape completely removed and should be retorqued in accordance
with Steps 8. For this purpose the boom should be supported in the boom rest to retorque the bottom chord
flanged boom connectors, and on the luff system with the boom raised no more than 100mm above the boom
rest for the top chord flanged boom connectors. After this has been completed the Denso tape shall be restored
in accordance with Step 18.
20. Every 12 Months thereafter 10% of the flanged boom connector bolts/studs should be checked for loss of
preload in accordance with Step 19. If any are found to be loose, then all flanged boom connector bolts/studs
shall be retorqued in accordance with Step 19. For this step records shall be kept of which bolts/studs are
tested, and the date of testing, to ensure that different untested bolts get tested in future.
21. End of Procedure.

APPENDIX A

REPORT
FP – BOOM CONNECTOR – 104A ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE
FOR FLANGED BOOM CONNECTORS
Crane Model:______________ Crane Serial Number:_____________
Torque Spanner Pressure Units (Bar/MPa/PSI):______________
Torque Spanner Brand:______________
Torque Spanner Model Designation:______________
Torque Spanner Serial Number:______________ (must be the same number as the Calibration Certificate)
Torque Spanner Pressure Setting To Achieve the final torque as per table-1 (from Pressure Torque
Curve for Torque
Spanner)________________
Torque Spanner Pressure Setting To Achieve the final torque of as per table-1 (from Pressure Torque
Curve for
Torque Spanner)________________
Initial torquing of all flange boom connection bolts was performed in accordance with Favco Procedure FP
– BOOM CONNECTOR – 104A to as per table-1
___________________________ ___________________ _________________
Print Name Signature Date
Retorquing of all flange boom connection bolts after 48 hours was performed in accordance with Favco
Procedure FP – BOOM CONNECTOR – 104A to as per table-1
___________________________ ___________________ _________________
Print Name Signature Date
Current Calibration Certificate for the Torque Spanner Attached Check
Pressure/Torque Curve for the Torque Spanner Attached Check
Note: A copy of this report, upon its completion, shall be sent to the Quality Manager of Favelle Favco
Cranes for inclusion in the Crane’s MDR.

9-19
9.8 Lifting Diagrams

REFERENCE DRAWING NUMBER Rev
Pedestal Assembly Lifting Diagram A3.1051.162 A
Deck Assembly Lifting Diagram SK6204 C
Mast Assembly Lifting Arrangement A1051-0159 A
Hoist Winch Lifting Arrangement A1051.177 A
Luff Winch Lifting Arrangement 1051-0178 A
Fly Winch Lifting Arrangement A1051-0179 A
Boom Assembly Lifting Diagram SK6230 A
Boom Top Lifting Arrangement A1051-0176 A
Bridle Assembly Lifting Diagram A1051-0158 A
Hangerblock Assembly Lifting Diagram A1051-0187 A

9-20
9.9 Commissioning Procedure

TEST PROCEDURE
DOCUMENT No : TP 1814 – 472

REVISION :C
PAGE : 1 of 21
SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST PROCEDURE

CRANE MODEL: PC1000 - SERIAL No. 1814
REVISION CONTROL SHEET
REV. PAGE(S) DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED CHECKED APPROVED
A All 29.01.13 Original Issue E.P. J.V. J.P.D.
Section 8.2 – Main Hoist calibration and

8.4 – Fly Hoist calibration loads amended,
B 12-15 30.05.13 Section 9.2.2 to 9.2.4 overload test at E.P. B.L. J.P.D.
60.76m boom added, Section 10 – 97.23m
boom overload test deleted
12, 13, 15,
Section 8.2-8.4, 8.6, 9.3, 9.4 and 12 Loads
C 16, 17,18, 31.05.13 E.P.
updated.
19
FIRST ISSUE DETAILS

Prepared by E. Pavlakis Title Project Engineer Date 29.01.13
Checked by J. Vorlow Title Engineer Date 29.01.13
Approved by J. Dawson Title Engineering Manager Date 29.01.13
IMPORTANT
This test procedure is a Favelle Favco Controlled Document and as such must not be photocopied in full
or in part. Further copies may be obtained from the Engineering Manager if required.
PAGE : 2 of 21
DATE OF TEST :
CLIENT : Jack Up Barge B.V.
TEST LOCATION :
CRANE MANUFACTURER : FAVELLE FAVCO Cranes
CRANE MODEL : PC1000
SERIAL No. : 1814
ATTENTION
The FAVCO Site Engineer must be informed of readiness to test prior to test commencement.
CONTENTS
1. PURPOSE ............................................................................................................................... 3
2. SCOPE .................................................................................................................................... 3
3. PRETESTING PREPARATION .............................................................................................. 3
4. LOAD TEST EQUIPMENT/ PREPERATION REQUIRED ...................................................... 4
5. FUNCTION TESTING ............................................................................................................. 5
6. CRANE SAFETY EQUIPMENT .............................................................................................. 9
7. NO LOAD TESTING ............................................................................................................... 9
8. SAFE LOAD INDICATOR (SLI) – 60.76 BOOM, 2 X 5-FALL .............................................. 12
9. LOAD TESTS – 60.76 M BOOM, 2 X 5 FALL ...................................................................... 14
10. MAINTANANCE HOIST AND LOAD TEST - 6.65 TONNE .................................................. 18
11. SLEW BEARING TILT TEST ................................................................................................ 18
12. MANUAL EMERGENCY LOAD RELEASE - HOIST (MGOP) – 6.65T ................................ 19
13. EXAMINATION ..................................................................................................................... 19
14. HYDRAULIC CLEANLINESS ............................................................................................... 19
APPENDIX A - LOAD CHART ....................................................................................................... 21
TP1814-472C
PAGE : 3 of 21
1. PURPOSE
This document is provided for testing the crane to ensure compliance with the
requirements of relevant standards. It is also intended to test the crane capabilities
required for post erection crane performance on site.
2. SCOPE
This procedure covers the crane functions and safety equipment but does not detail tests
for the crane foundations as it is assumed that such tests have been carried out as
necessary.
The crane will be tested with the 60.76m Boom reeved in 2 x 5 falls to its maximum rated
capacity including Overload as per ABS requirement.
3. PRETESTING PREPARATION
A contingency plan should be developed to identify personnel responsibilities and actions
that should be taken in the eventuality that there is a failure of a system of the crane that
may cause the load to drop, or that may cause other structural items or components of the
crane to fail (e.g. boom failure causing the boom to collapse).
The crane design, detailed analyses and risk assessment activities performed to date have
indicated that such failures should not occur but due care indicates that all precautionary
measures must be taken to ensure the safety of all personnel and protection of property in
the event of any failure.
To ensure minimisation of risks during the testing it recommended that amongst other
things the following should be considered;
x The height the test load is lifted should be an absolute minimum to achieve the objectives of
this procedure.
x All personnel are so positioned that they would not be injured should a crane component
failure occur
x The test area be cleared of property, and the crane boom be oriented for testing such that
should a crane component fail then property damage would be minimised
3.1 Foundation Test
Crane foundations have been checked and certified by a competent person. Attach copies
of certificates to SAT record.
Third Party Representative Approval of Pedestal Manufacture (covering: design, Check Present
NDT and traceability)
Flatness Report of Pedestal Upper Surface
3.2 Slew Ring Bolt Tension Check

Check tensions in slew ring bolts (inner and outer) as per Slew Ring Assembly Drawing
A2.2600.183. Attach a copy of inspection report.
INITIAL OK
All inner Slew Ring bolts are stretched to elongation value of ǻ3.484mm or
tension value of 5802 kN
All outer Slew Ring bolts are stretched to elongation value of ǻ3.824mm or
tension value of 5802 kN
Pre-testing check carried out by: ____________________________________ Date: __________
TP1814-472C
PAGE : 4 of 21
4. LOAD TEST EQUIPMENT/ PREPERATION REQUIRED

4.1 Test Loads
The following is a list of load tests requiring loads calibrated to (± 1%). For the load tests
the crane is to be configured with the 60.76m boom in 2 x 5 falls.
8. SAFE LOAD INDICATOR (SLI) – 60.76 BOOM, 2 X 5-FALL .............................................. 12
8.2 MAIN HOIST CALIBRATION STBD HOIST................................................................................ 12
8.2.2 High Load – 400 tonne ................................................................................................. 12
8.3 MAIN HOIST CALIBRATION PORT HOIST ............................................................................... 12
8.3.2 High Load – 400 tonne ................................................................................................. 12
8.4 MAIN HOIST LIMIT ALARMS – 294 TONNE .............................................................................. 13
8.5 FLY HOIST CALIBRATION ...................................................................................................... 13
8.5.2 High Load – 42.5 tonne ................................................................................................ 13
8.6 FLY HOIST LIMIT ALARMS – 55 TONNE .................................................................................. 13
9. LOAD TESTS – 60.76 M BOOM, 2 X 5 FALL ...................................................................... 14
9.1 INDIVIDUAL HOIST BRAKE TESTS (FLY HOIST 25 TONNE) ....................................................... 14
9.2 OVERLOAD TESTS 60.76M BOOM - 2 X 5 FALLS ..................................................................... 14
9.2.1 Overload Test - Maximum Load – 1100 tonne ............................................................. 14
9.2.2 Load at Maximum Moment – 411 tonne ....................................................................... 15
9.2.3 Load at Maximum Radius – 294 tonne ......................................................................... 15
9.2.4 Overload Test Fly Hoist – 55 tonne .............................................................................. 15
9.3 SPEEDS – WITH LOAD .......................................................................................................... 15
9.3.1 Main Hoist High Load – STBD Hoist – 400 tonne ......................................................... 15
9.3.2 Main Hoist High Load – PORT Hoist – 400 tonne ........................................................ 16
9.3.3 Main Hoist Light Load – 294 tonne ............................................................................... 16
9.3.4 Fly Hoist Maximum Load – 25 tonne ............................................................................ 16
9.3.5 Luff – 294 tonne ............................................................................................................ 16
9.3.6 Slew – 294 tonne .......................................................................................................... 17
9.4 EMERGENCY POWERPACK LOAD AND SPEED TESTING .......................................................... 17
9.4.1 Main Hoist Maximum Load – STBD Hoist – 400 tonne ................................................ 17
9.4.2 Main Hoist Maximum Load – Port Hoist – 400 tonne ................................................... 17
9.4.3 Fly Hoist Maximum Load – 25 tonne ............................................................................ 18
9.4.4 Luff – 294 tonne ............................................................................................................ 18
9.4.5 Slew – 294 tonne .......................................................................................................... 18
10. MAINTANANCE HOIST AND LOAD TEST - 6.65 TONNE .................................................. 18
4.2 Initialise Data Logger
INITIAL OK
Check/ Set time and date on LINEC System
Clear Data Logger Memory
4.3 Test Equipment

a) Stop watch
b) Calibrated pressure gauges
c) Documentation
i. Load charts A3-2170.1041 or APPENDIX A – Load chart
ii. Hydraulic circuit A3-6200.538
iii. Electric circuit (AC) A3-6100.574
iv. Electric circuit (DC) A3-6100.590
v. LINEC Manual
TP1814-472C
PAGE : 5 of 21
5. FUNCTION TESTING
5.1 Lubrication / Guard Check
INITIAL OK
Oil levels in winch and slew planetary gearboxes.
Brake splines and pinion splines in slew and winch drives are lubricated.
Open gears greased on winch and slew.
Pump drive splitter gearbox oil level.
Hydraulic tank & header tank oil level.
Hydraulic systems checked for leaks or damage to system.
Machine surrounds to be clean and free from oil. Inspect for leaks during and
after operational tests.
Ropes are regreased following assembly.
All grease nipple points on crane greased.
All rope guards are fitted and in place
Machinery guards in place.
Check operation on automatic greasing system for open gears
5.2 Hydraulic
INITIAL OK
Measure control oil pressure (30 Bar) ________ Bar
Measure the following valve settings:
Stbd PP - Main Hoist (PU2a) P.C.O. valve (280 Bar) ________ Bar
Stbd PP - Main Hoist (PU1a) P.C.O. valve (280 Bar) ________ Bar
Port PP - Main Hoist (PU2b) P.C.O. valve (280 Bar) ________ Bar
Port PP - Main Hoist (PU1b) P.C.O. valve (280 Bar) ________ Bar
Port PP - Luff pump (PU3d) P.C.O. valve (290 Bar) ________ Bar
Port PP - Luff pump (PU3b) P.C.O. valve (290 Bar) ________ Bar
Stbd PP - Luff pump (PU3c) P.C.O. valve (290 Bar) ________ Bar
Stbd PP - Luff pump (PU3a) P.C.O. valve (290 Bar) ________ Bar
Measure the slew relieve valves as per following test procedure
1. Lock all slew disc brakes
2. Move the joystick with 5% deflection ONLY to limit the pump displacement
3. The joystick can only move and hold within 5 seconds each time
4. Monitor the slew pressure gauge and record the reading
Stbd PP - Slew (PU4a) right pressure relief valve (220Bar) ________ Bar
Stbd PP - Slew (PU4a) left pressure relief valve (220 Bar) ________ Bar
Port PP - Slew (PU4b) right pressure relief valve (220Bar) ________ Bar
Port PP - Slew (PU4b) left pressure relief valve (220 Bar) ________ Bar
Stbd PP - Tugger Pump (PU5a) high pressure relief valve (250 Bar) _______ Bar
Port PP - Tugger Pump (PU5b) high pressure relief valve (250 Bar) _______ Bar
Stbd PP - Retarder Pump (PU9a) P.C.O. valve (320 Bar) ________ Bar
Port PP - Retarder Pump (PU9b) P.C.O. valve (320 Bar) ________ Bar
Check operation of:
Hydraulic oil cooling fan (Blower)
Hydraulic oil heater (E41A - E41F – qty 6)
Hydraulic oil Level Gauge
TP1814-472C
PAGE : 6 of 21
Hydraulic oil Temperature Gauge

Check Pre-charge on MGOP Accumulator (ACC1) and gauge (20Bar)
_______Bar
Check Pre-charge on Fly Boost Pressure Accumulator (ACC2) and gauge
(20Bar) _______Bar
Luff pawl engagement & release
Port Hoist Brakes
Stbd Hoist Brakes
Luff Brakes
Fly Brakes
Slew Brakes
5.3 Soft Starter

Check Operation of: INITIAL OK
START button
STOP button
RESET button
RUN indicator light
STOP indicator light
TRIP indicator light
TOP OF RAMP indicator light
THERMISTER WARNING indicator light
Check the following:
Voltage
Current
Frequency
5.4 Hydraulic – Emergency Powerpack

Measure the following relief valve settings: INITIAL OK
Emergency Pump (PU7a) P.C.O. valve (330Bar) ________ Bar
Emergency Pump (PU7b) P.C.O. valve (330Bar) ________ Bar
Retarding Pump (PU6) P.C.O. valve (320Bar) ________ Bar
5.5 Soft Starter – Emergency Powerpack

Check Operation of: INITIAL OK
START button
STOP button
RESET button
RUN Indicator light
STOP Indicator light
TRIP Indicator light
TOP OF RAMP Indicator light
THERMISTER WARNING Indicator light
Check the following:
Voltage
TP1814-472C
PAGE : 7 of 21
Current
Frequency
5.6 Inside Cabin
Check operation/ function of: INITIAL OK
Windscreen wiper – top ______, front up ______, front down ______
Air conditioner
Demister
LINEC display
Camera display
Wind speed indicator display (free issued)
UHF radio (free issued)
VHF radio (free issued)
Telephone (free issued)
Footswitch for PA system (free issued)
Voice control panel and speaker (free issued)
Ignition
Motor start
Motor stop
Slew torque selector
Powerpack selector (EM.PP____/ STBD____ /PORT____ /DUAL MOTOR____)
Hoist/fly selector
Personnel lift selector
MGOP push button
Check following joystick functions
Port hoist - up/down
Stbd hoist - up/down
Fly hoist - up/down
Luff hoist - in/out
Slew - left/ right
Slew brake release push button
Boom parking (luff out override) push button
Fine control slew push button
Fine control hoist port push button
Fine control luff push button
Fine control hoist stbd/ fly push button
Horn push button
Check following pressure gauges:
Hoist (port) pressure gauge
Hoist (stbd) pressure gauge
Fly pressure gauge
Slew pressure gauge
Luff pressure gauge
Control pressure gauge
TP1814-472C
PAGE : 8 of 21
Check following tugger winch functions:

Tugger winch selector
Tugger winch control pedal port
Tugger winch control pedal stbd
Check the following control panel indicator lights:
Hoist (stbd) brake applied
Hoist (port) brake applied
Fly brake applied
Luff brake applied
Luff ratchet engaged
Slew brake applied
MOPS healthy (console)
MOPS activated (console)
MOPS buzzer (console)
Simulate to check the following faults annunciation (LINEC display):
Hoist UP limits – hoist_____ fly_____
Luff OUT limit _____ IN limit_____
Boost pressure LOW
Hydraulic oil level LOW
Filter Blocked – hoist 1____ hoist 2____ luff____ slew____ cooling____
Hydraulic oil temperature HIGH
Gearbox oil temperature HIGH
Check function of following lights:
Cabin light (E1/1 - qty 1)
Outside cabin light (E1/15 - qty 1)
Upper deck access light (E1/18 - qty 1)
Crane main access ladder lights (E1/38-E1/40 - qty 3)
Sludge/ oil tank access lights (E1/24 –E1/26 - qty 3)
Winch lights (port & stbd hoist, luff, fly) (E1/19, E1/20, E1/23, E1/27 - qty 4)
Slew well lights (E1/34 – E1/37, E1/43 - qty 5)
Pedestal Internal platform lights (E1/41, E1/42 - qty 2)
Internal machinery house lights (E1/6-E1/11 - qty 6)
External machinery house lights (E1/16, E1/17, E1/21, E1/22 -qty 4)
Boom floodlights (E3/21- E3/28 - qty 6 on 60.76m Boom; 7 on 72.92m Boom; 8 on
92.23m Boom)
Mast floodlights (E3/31, E3/32 - qty. 2)
Mast aviation light (E4/31 - qty. 1)
Boom aviation light (E4/21 - qty. 1)
Check function of GPOs
Machinery house (Y5A - qty. 1)
Slew well (Y5B - qty. 1)
Cabin (Y5 - qty. 1)
Function Testing carried out by: ______________________________________ Date: __________
TP1814-472C
PAGE : 9 of 21
6. CRANE SAFETY EQUIPMENT

Check the following: INITIAL OK
All electrical items are labelled correctly.
Emergency stop push button (cabin console) (motor should shut down).
Emergency stop push button (motor should shut down).
X4A____ X4B____ (Electric motor Junction box – qty 2)
X14/1____ X14/2____ X14/3____ X14/4___(Winch Junction box-qty 4)
Slack Rope indicator main hoist port________ stbd_______
Slack Rope indicator luff hoist
Slack Rope indicator fly hoist
ESD indicator (platform signal) connection (cabin console)
Check slew operation warning ligt and alarm (external pedestal level)
6.1 F&G EQUIPMENT

Check the following Fire and Gas equipment has been installed correctly:
In Machinery house: INITIAL OK
Smoke detector SD-202 & SD-203 (qty 2)
Heat detector FD-201
Gas detector GD-201, GD-202, GD-203 (qty 3)
Loudspeaker LS-120A
In cabin:
Manual alarm call point MAC-210
Smoke detector SD-201
In slew well:
Smoke detector SD-204 & SD-205 (qty 2)
Safety Equipment Testing carried out by: ______________________________ Date: __________
7. NO LOAD TESTING
7.1 Controls
Perform these tests with no load to ensure the following motions function at slow speed.
INITIAL OK
Port Main hoist up
Port Main hoist down
Stbd Main hoist up
Stbd Main hoist down
Fly hoist up
Fly hoist down
Luff in
Luff out
Slew left
Slew right
Tugger Winch port side
Tugger Winch starboard side
TP1814-472C
PAGE : 10 of 21
7.2 Limits
This test is to check the functionality only of the crane encoders/ limits by resetting the
limits to a lower value. For this purpose there is no implication if the limits have not been
configured to the correct set points.
Reset Hoist/ Fly up limits to approx. 7.5m above boom pivot; down limit to approx. 5m
above pivot; luff in limit to approx. 28m and luff out limit to approx. 30m; slew left/ right
(approx.. 5° apart) to suit site conditions. Check motion stop, deceleration and crane shut
down occurs at the set point.
Hoist Limits (Stbd) INITIAL OK
Up limit (encoder - hoist up motion stop)
Up ultimate (encoder - motor shut down)
Up ultimate (independent Stromag limit switch - motor shut down)
Up deceleration
Down limit (encoder - hoist down motion stop)
Down deceleration
Hoist Limits (Port)
Up deceleration
Down deceleration
Fly Limits
Up deceleration
Down deceleration
Luff Limits
Luff in limit (encoder - Luff in motion stop)
Luff in ultimate (encoder - motor shut down)
Luff in ultimate (independent Stromag limit switch - motor shut down)
Luff in deceleration
Luff out limit (encoder - luff out motion stop)
Luff out deceleration
Slew Encoder
Check slew encoder connection
TP1814-472C
PAGE : 11 of 21
7.3 Limits
These are functionality tests and as such must be tested by the use of normal crane
controls hoisting or luffing as appropriate.
WARNING – Care must be taken to observe the motions of the crane when
testing limits particularly the ultimate limits if the crane moves into a area
deemed unsafe stop immediately and set the ultimate to that point before
reversing out of that position, then re-test to ensure the safety of the new
position.
Note: To test “Ultimate” limits the “Working” limit switch needs to be temporarily bridged.
Once the “Ultimate” limit is tested the “Working” limit needs to be re-enabled and tested.
Hoist Limits (Stbd) INITIAL OK
Up deceleration
Down deceleration
Hoist Limits (Port)
Up deceleration
Down deceleration
Fly Limits
Up deceleration
Down deceleration
Luff Limits
Luff in limit (encoder - Luff in motion stop)
Luff in ultimate (encoder - motor shut down)
Luff in ultimate (independent Stromag limit switch - motor shut down)
Luff in deceleration
Luff out limit (encoder - luff out motion stop)
Luff out deceleration
Slew Encoder
Check slew limits (encoder)
No load testing carried out by: _______________ Date: __________
TP1814-472C
PAGE : 12 of 21
8. SAFE LOAD INDICATOR (SLI) – 60.76 BOOM, 2 X 5-FALL

With SLI set to 60.23m boom, 2 x 5 fall mode, calibrate the LINEC SLI system with the
following loads to within + 5%. The height of lifted calibrated load should be kept at
minimum. Follow LINEC manual for detailed calibration instructions.
8.1 Boom Angle Calibration

8.1.1 Calibrate Low Boom Angle – 0 tonne
Design Actual Display INITIAL OK
Radius 63.8 m m m
Boom Angle 16.6° ° °
8.1.2 Calibrate High Boom Angle – 0 tonne

Radius 12.9 m m m
8.2 Main Hoist Calibration STBD Hoist

Lift Load of the ground and record the SLI readings
8.2.1 Zero Load – 0 tonne

Load (500 t x 0%) 0t t t
Radius 26.0 m m m
8.2.2 High Load – 400 tonne

Load (500 t x ~80%) 400 t t
Radius 26.0m m m
8.3 Main Hoist Calibration PORT Hoist

Lift Load of the ground and record the SLI readings
8.3.1 Zero Load – 0 tonne

Load (500 t x 0%) 0t t t
Radius 26.0 m m m
8.3.2 High Load – 400 tonne

Load (500 t x ~80%) 400 t t
Radius 26.0m m m
TP1814-472C
PAGE : 13 of 21
8.4 Main Hoist Limit Alarms – 294 tonne

Note the radii at which each of the alarms described below occur. INITIAL OK
Lift 294t @ 57m radius and check no alarms are activated

Luff out and note radius where visual alarm starts. Visual alarm should start at
approximately 59.6m (90% SWL). m
Luff out and note radius where continuous visual and audible alarm starts. Visual
and audible alarm should start at approximately 62.5m (100% SWL). m
Luff out to further to radius where crane is at 110% overload condition. Motion
cut should occur at 63.8m radius (110% SWL. Do not Luff out beyond 54.1m). m
8.5 Fly Hoist Calibration
8.5.1 Zero Load –0 tonne

Load 0t t t
Radius 36.6 m m m
8.5.2 High Load – 42.5 tonne

Load (50 t x 85%) 42.5t t
Radius 36.6 m m m
8.6 Fly Hoist Limit Alarms – 55 tonne

Note the radii at which each of the alarms described below occur. INITIAL OK
Attach a 55t Load @ 25m radius and check no alarms are activated
Slowly hoist up until visual alarm starts. Alarm should start at approximately 45t
(90% SWL) t
Continue to hoist up until continuous visible and audible alarm starts. Continuous
visible and audible alarm should occur at approximately 50t (100% SWL). t
Continue hoisting up until crane is at 110% overload condition. Motion cut should
occur at 55t (110% SWL). t
SLI testing carried out by: _______________ Date: __________
TP1814-472C
PAGE : 14 of 21
9. LOAD TESTS – 60.76 M BOOM, 2 X 5 FALL

Loads are to be calibrated test loads (+/- 1%).
Ensure that an Engineer/Foreman is to observe the load as it’s been lifted. The overload
test shall be only conducted no more than 25mm-50mm above the ground; Brake tests no
more than 1 metre above the ground. Loads are to be lifted slowly then held for five
minutes, after five minutes the Engineer/Foreman shall immediately give instructions to
lower the load.
9.1 Individual Hoist Brake Tests (Fly Hoist 25 tonne)

Each brake on a multi-brake hoist to be separately tested at 50% of maximum working
load limit. Each hoist brake must be tested individually with the other brakes being
disabled.
Brake One
Hold load suspended for 5 minutes with controls in neutral with brake one engaged only.
DESIGN ACTUAL INITIAL OK
Static Load (50% of 50t) 25t t
Test Radius 20 m m
Brake Two
Hold load suspended for 5 minutes with controls in neutral with brake two engaged only.
Test Radius 20 m m
Brake Three
Hold load suspended for 5 minutes with controls in neutral with brake three engaged only.
Test Radius 20 m m
Brake testing carried out by: _____________________ Date: __________
9.2 Overload Tests 60.76m Boom - 2 x 5 Falls

These tests are designed to statically test the boom components and test the brake
capacities of the hoist winch to 110% of maximum loads.
9.2.1 Overload Test - Maximum Load – 1100 tonne

Hold load suspended for 5 minutes with controls in neutral.
Static Load (1000 t + 10%) 1100 t t
Test Radius 20.0 m m
Hoist Pressure 270 Bar Bar
Hoist Drum Rope Layer 3rd
TP1814-472C
PAGE : 15 of 21
9.2.2 Load at Maximum Moment – 411 tonne

Static Load (373.8 + 411%) 411 t t
Test Radius 54 m m
9.2.3 Load at Maximum Radius – 294 tonne

Static Load (267.3t + 10%) 294 t t
Test Radius 63.8 m m
Hoist Drum Rope Layer 2nd
9.2.4 Overload Test Fly Hoist – 55 tonne

Static Load (50 t + 10%) 55 t t
Test Radius 20-50 m m
Note: Radius to be selected according to site conditions between 20m-50m to avoid obstructions.
Overload Load testing (60.76m boom) carried out by: _________ Date: __________
9.3 Speeds – With Load

Carry out hoist speed testing with a “speed chain” attached to the load. The speed chain
has marked 10m length for accurate timing of crane hoist speeds. Speeds within +/-10%
are acceptable.
9.3.1 Main Hoist High Load – STBD Hoist – 400 tonne
Lift load 10 metres using the stbd hoist only.
Load 400 t t
Number of Falls 1x 5 Fall Fall
Radius 20 m m
Time 140 sec sec
Speed (hook) 4.4 m/min m/min
Hoist rope layer 2nd
TP1814-472C
PAGE : 16 of 21
9.3.2 Main Hoist High Load – PORT Hoist – 400 tonne

Lift load 10 metres using the port hoist only.
Load 400 t t
Number of Falls 1 x 5 Fall Fall
Radius 20 m m
Time 140 sec sec
9.3.3 Main Hoist Light Load – 294 tonne

Lift load 10 metres using both (port and stbd) hoists together.
Load 294 t t
Number of Falls 2 x 5 Fall Fall
Radius 20 m m
Time 55 sec sec
9.3.4 Fly Hoist Maximum Load – 25 tonne

Lift load 10 metres.
Load 25t t
Number of Fall 2 Fall Fall
Radius 20m m
Time 23 secs secs
Hoist rope layer 3rd
9.3.5 Luff – 294 tonne

Lift at 56m radius Luff in to 25m radius.
Load 294 t t
Time ~380 secs secs
Luff pressure 270 bar +/- 30bar bar
TP1814-472C
PAGE : 17 of 21
9.3.6 Slew – 294 tonne

Slew load though 90° clockwise.
Load 294 t t
Radius 12.9m - 40m m
Time 43 secs secs
Speed 0.35 rpm rpm
Note: Radius to be selected according to site conditions between 12.9m - 40m to avoid
obstructions.
Speed testing carried out by: _______________ Date: __________
9.4 Emergency Powerpack Load and Speed Testing

Carry out hoist speed testing using Emergency Powerpack with a “speed chain” attached
to the load. The speed chain has marked 3m & 10m length for accurate timing of crane
hoist speeds.
9.4.1 Main Hoist Maximum Load – STBD Hoist – 400 tonne
Lift load 3 metres using the stbd hoist only.
Load 400 t t
Number of Fall 1 x 5 Fall Fall
Radius 20 m m
Time 7.5 min min
9.4.2 Main Hoist Maximum Load – Port Hoist – 400 tonne

Lift load 3 metres using the port hoist only.
Load 400 t t
Number of Fall 1 x 5 Fall Fall
Radius 20 m m
Time 7.5 min min
TP1814-472C
PAGE : 18 of 21
9.4.3 Fly Hoist Maximum Load – 25 tonne

Lift load 10 metres.
Load 25t t
Number of Falls 2 Fall Fall
Radius 20m m
Time 2.5 min secs
Hoist rope layer 3rd
9.4.4 Luff – 294 tonne

Lift at 40m radius Luff in to 30m radius.
Load 294 t t
Time 14min min
9.4.5 Slew – 294 tonne

Slew load though 90° clockwise.
Load 294 t t
Radius 12.9m - 40m m
Time 187 secs secs
Speed 0.08 rpm rpm
Note: Radius to be selected according to site conditions between 12.90m-40m to avoid
obstructions.
Emergency PP Load & Speed testing carried out by: _____________________ Date: __________
10. MAINTANANCE HOIST AND LOAD TEST - 6.65 TONNE

Load test maintenance hoist (Monorail). Apply dead load of 6.65 tonne (1.33 x SWL) to all
positions along length of maintenance monorail and hold for 5 minutes.
INITIAL OK
Monorail Load Test (6.65 tonne) carried out satisfactory
Monorail testing carried out by: ____________________________________ Date: __________
11. SLEW BEARING TILT TEST

Perform test to establish a base value for future assessment of slew bearing wear. Refer
to Favco Procedure FP-Slew-32.
INITIAL OK
Slew Bearing Tilt Test carried out satisfactory
Slew Bearing Tilt testing carried out by: ______________________________ Date: __________
TP1814-472C
PAGE : 19 of 21
12. MANUAL EMERGENCY LOAD RELEASE - HOIST (MGOP) – 6.65T

Luff out into safe radius, attach 6.65 tonne test load
Raise the test load 100mm above the ground by luffing the boom.
Push the MGOP load release button, the test weight should be dropped to the ground.
GOP Testing carried out by: ______________________________________ Date: ___________
13. EXAMINATION
Perform visual inspection of complete crane. Inspect all structural and mechanical
components for satisfactory condition.
REMARKS
Visual Inspection carried out by: ___________________________________ Date: __________
14. HYDRAULIC CLEANLINESS

INITIAL OK
Oil sample taken at ______°C and sent for Analysis
Oil Sample Inspection carried out by: _______________________________ Date: __________
TP1814-472C
PAGE : 20 of 21
ON COMPLETION OF TEST REPORT, TEST SUPERVISOR TO SIGN CRANE TEST

CERTIFICATE FOR INCLUSION WITH MDR.
ACCEPTANCE BY PROJECT MANAGER/CO-ORDINATOR

The Project Manager / Co-ordinator should be satisfied that the crane is working satisfactorily
with respect to smooth operation and that the crane finish is complete. If testing of the crane is
incomplete, a Punch List should be generated itemising all deficiencies and then attached to this
report. The Project Manager / Co-ordinator should be satisfied that all points on the Punch List
have been attended to before signing the Punch List.
The Project Manager / Co-ordinator is empowered to prevent dismantling of the crane before
solutions to any problems are found; therefore, approval is required from the Project Manager /
Co-ordinator before dismantling of the crane can proceed.
This activity is to be signed off below by the applicable Project Manager or appointed Project
Engineer.
Signed Date
Print Name
Project Manager / Engineer
Test Witnessed by: Favelle Favco Representative:

Name Name
Position Position
Date Date
Customer Representative Third Party Representative

(if applicable) (if applicable)
Name Name
Position Position
Date Date
TP1814-472C
PAGE : 21 of 21
APPENDIX A - LOAD CHART
Figure 1 – Load Chart 2 x 5 falls 60.76m boom
TP1814-472C
9-21
9.10 Escape Plan

POWERPACK
9-22
9.11 CO2 System Instruction Manual

IOM - Section 10. Components/ Equipment Manuals
10-1
10REFERENCE
MATERIAL
10.1 LINEC SYSTEM LE7003 Series 10-2
Linec System Operation Manual V2.0 10-3
Linec System Service Manual V2.0 10-4
10.2 SIEMENS Electric Motors 10-5

800KW -1LA8- Electric Motor – Main Powerpack 10-6
110KW -1LG4 - Electric Motor – Emergency Powerpack 10-7
10.3 SIEMENS SIRIUS 3RW44 Soft Starter 10-8

SIEMENS SIRUS 3RW44 Soft Starter System Manual 10-9
SIEMENS SIRUS 3RW44 Soft Starter Display Operating Instructions 10-10
SIEMENS SIMEAS P 7KG7750/55 POWER METER Manual 10-11
10.4 STIEBEL Splitter Gearbox Operating Instructions 10-12
10.5 Mitsubishi Air Conditioning Unit 10-13

Air Conditioning - PLA-RP BA Series- Operation Manual 10-14
Air Conditioning Indoor Unit - PLA-RP60 BA - Service Manual 10-15
Air Conditioning Outdoor Unit – PUHZ-RP60VHA4 - Service Manual 10-16
10.6 Cavotec Slipring KK450RD Instruction Manual 10-17
10.7 CEAG Floodlight PX04 Series Operating Instructions 10-18
10.8 TNAML Fluorescent Luminaire Lights Installation Manual 10-19
10.9 BRAVO Electric Lubrication Pump Operation and Maintenance Manual 10-20
10.10 ORLACO 4 Camera System User Manual 10-21
© Copyright of Favelle Favco Cranes Pty Ltd, 2013 IOM1814 CHP10. 02

10-2
10.1 LINEC SYSTEM LE7003 Series

10-3
Linec System Operation Manual

)$9(//()$9&2
/,1(&
6<67(0

/(6HULHV
2SHUDWLRQ0DQXDO

CRANE SERIAL : 1814
SYSTEM SERIAL : LE7003
MANUAL VERSION : 2.0
ii
___________________________________________________________________________
WARNING
The Favelle Favco LINEC System, LE7000 Series, is a crane device
which warns operator of impending overload conditions and of over-
hoist conditions which could cause damage to property, crane and
personnel.
The system is not a substitute for good operator judgment,

experience and safe crane operation. The operator is solely
responsible for safe operation of the crane.
The operator must, prior to operation of the crane, read this manual
carefully and thoroughly and shall ensure that all operational
instructions and warnings are well understood and complied with.
Proper system operation requires the Favelle Favco Cranes

Authorized Personnel or any Favelle Favco Cranes appointed
Service Personnel to correctly program the Favelle Favco LINEC
System to match the crane setup and working configuration.
The system is equipped with a override key (LMI Bypass- if

applicable), which bypasses alarms and motion cut function, at
which time the system can no longer warn of impending overload,
and must only be operated strictly in accordance to the crane setup
and operation procedures. Operation of this key is for authorized
personnel only, who shall be solely responsible for its use.
___________________________________________________________________________
iii
___________________________________________________________________________
Important Disclaimers, Copyrights and Legal Information
Agreement
User Agreement:
User agrees to the use of this Manual only under the following terms and conditions.
License Disclaimer:
Nothing on this Manual shall be construed as conferring any license under any intellectual property
rights owned by FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc., by any FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA)
Inc. business unit, or affiliated or associated corporation (hereinafter "business units") or by any third
party, whether by estoppels, implication, or otherwise.
Notice Specific to Information and Documents Available on This Manual:

Permission to use documents such as data sheets, white papers, technical guides, and press
releases contained within this Manual is granted on a limited use basis, provided that
(1) the following copyright notice appears in all copies of documents made from this Manual: "(c)
2006 FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc. All rights reserved.", and that both the copyright
notice and this permission notice appear thereon;
(2) use of such documents copied from this Manual is for informational and non-commercial or
personal use only and will not be copied or posted on any network computer or broadcast in any
media; and
(3) no modifications of any documents are made.
Use for any other purpose is expressly prohibited by law, and may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties. Violators will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible. "Documents," as defined
above, do not include the design or layout of the FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc. Manual or
any other site owned, operated, licensed or controlled by FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc. or
any business unit, or affiliated or associated corporation. Elements of FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES
(USA) Inc.'s Manual are protected by trade dress and other laws and may not be copied or imitated in
whole or in part. No logo, graphic, sound or image from any FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc.
Manual may be copied or retransmitted unless expressly permitted by FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES
(USA) Inc. in writing.
Unsolicited Ideas and Concepts:

Any user who desires to submit unsolicited information to FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc. or
to its strategic business units is cautioned to do so only under the procedures established by
FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc. for such unsolicited submissions. These procedures are
available from FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc. upon request. Any information provided to
FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc. or its business units in connection with any FAVELLE FAVCO
CRANES (USA) Inc. Manual outside the established procedures shall be provided by the submitter
and received by FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc. on a non-confidential basis. FAVELLE
FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc. or its business units shall be free to use such information on an
unrestricted basis and such information will become the exclusive property of FAVELLE FAVCO
CRANES (USA) Inc. to be used by it as it deems appropriate without compensation of any kind to any
other party.
Copyright Notice:
FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc., All Rights Reserved.
Trademarks:
The FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES trademark and design are registered trademarks of FAVELLE
FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc. Other trademarks owned either by FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA)
Inc. or its business units, such as the trademark and design, which are referenced on this Manual are
either trademarks or registered trademarks of FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc. or of its
business units. Additional product and company names referenced on this Manual may be
trademarks of their respective owners.
___________________________________________________________________________
iv
___________________________________________________________________________
Rights Reserved:
Any rights not expressly granted herein are reserved. FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc.
reserves the right to alter or change this Agreement at any time by revising the terms and conditions
herein. Users are responsible for regularly reviewing these terms and conditions. Continued use of
this manual following any such changes shall constitute the user's acceptance of all such changes.
This Agreement:
• Constitutes the entire Agreement, and supersedes any and all other agreements,
understandings, and communications between the parties;
• May only be amended or otherwise modified by a written instrument executed by an

authorized representative of FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc.
___________________________________________________________________________
1
Table of Content
Cover ........................................................................................................................ ………………...i
Warning .................................................................................................................... …………………ii
Important Disclaimers, Copyrights and Legal Information Agreement .................... …………………iii
Table of Content ....................................................................................................... …………………1
Operation Display Flowchart .................................................................................... …………………2
1.0 Definitions
1.1 Button Description ...................................................................................... …………………3
1.2 Alarm Indicator ........................................................................................... …………………8
1.3 Switch Selection ......................................................................................... ........................9
2.0 Loading Screen .................................................................................................. …………………10
3.0 Crane Configuration Confirmation Screen ......................................................... …………………11
4.0 SLI Screen ......................................................................................................... …………………12
5.0 Annunciator Panel Screen ................................................................................. …………………15
5.1 Reeving Confirmation Screen ..................................................................... …………………17
6.0 Crane Status Screen
6.1 Hoist Status Screen .................................................................................... …………………18
6.2 Luff Status Screen....................................................................................... …………………22
6.3 Slew Status Screen ..................................................................................... …………………25
6.4 Motor Status Screen ................................................................................... …………………27
6.5 System Status Screen ................................................................................ …………………28
7.0 Hydraulic Alarm Status Screen…………………………………………………………………….…..31
8.0 Crane Alarm Status Screen ............................................................................... …………………33
9.0 Emergency Powerpack Screen .......................................................................... …………………36
10.0 Retarder System Status ................................................................................... …………………38
11.0 Password Screen ............................................................................................. …………………40
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
2
Operation Display Flowchart

^ĞƚƵƉ ^ĞƌǀŝĐĞWĂŐĞ >ŽŐŝŶ ^ĞĐƵƌŝƚǇ ^ĞƚƚŝŶŐWĂŐĞ
ĐĐĞƐƐ
DĂŝŶ,ŽŝƐƚ^ƚĂƚƵƐ
WĂŐĞ;WŽƌƚͿ
,ŽŝƐƚ^ƚĂƚƵƐ
WĂŐĞ
^ůĞǁ^ƚĂƚƵƐWĂŐĞ
WŽƌƚDĂŝŶ,ŽŝƐƚ
>ŽĂĚŝŶŐWĂŐĞ ŽŶĨŝƌŵĂƚŝŽŶ >ƵĨĨ^ƚĂƚƵƐWĂŐĞ
WĂŐĞ
^ƚĂƌďŽĂƌĚDĂŝŶ
ZĞƚĂƌĚĞƌ^ƚĂƚƵƐ ,ŽŝƐƚ
WĂŐĞ
DŽƚŽƌ^ƚĂƚƵƐ &ůǇ,ŽŝƐƚ
WĂŐĞ
^ƚĂƚƵƐ^ĐƌĞĞŶ ^ǇƐƚĞŵ^ƚĂƚƵƐ >ƵĨĨ

WĂŐĞ
ĐĐĞƉƚ ^>/^ĐƌĞĞŶ
ŵĞƌŐĞŶĐǇ ŵĞƌŐĞŶĐǇ ^ůĞǁ
WŽǁĞƌƉĂĐŬ WŽǁĞƌƉĂĐŬWĂŐĞ
^ĞƚƚŝŶŐƐ
^ƚĂƌďŽĂƌĚDĂŝŶ
,ŽŝƐƚ^ĞƚƚŝŶŐƐ
ŵĞƌŐĞŶĐǇWŽǁĞƌ
ƉĂĐŬ^ĞƚƚŝŶŐƐ
&ůǇ,ŽŝƐƚ^ĞƚƚŝŶŐƐ
^ůĞǁ^ĞƚƚŝŶŐƐ
>ƵĨĨ,ŽŝƐƚ
^ĞƚƚŝŶŐƐ
^ǇƐƚĞŵŽŶĨŝŐ
,ŽŝƐƚ>ŝŶĞWƵůů
^ĞŶƐŽƌ^ĞƚƚŝŶŐ
ĂƚĞΘdŝŵĞ^Ğƚ
^ĞƚƚŝŶŐWĂŐĞ
^>/^ĞƚƚŝŶŐ
ůĂƌŵ>ŝƐƚ
ůĂƌŵ>ŝƐƚ
^ǇƐƚĞŵ^ĞƚƚŝŶŐƐ
ƌĂŶĞ'ĞŽŵĞƚƌǇ
WŽƌƚD,>ŽĂĚ
ĞůůĂůŝďƌĂƚŝŽŶ
^ƚďD,>ŽĂĚĞůů
ĂůŝďƌĂƚŝŽŶ
&ůǇ,ŽŝƐƚ>ŽĂĚ
ĞůůĂůŝďƌĂƚŝŽŶ
Figure 1: Operation Display Flowchart
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
3
1.0 Definitions
1.1 Button Description
DESCRIPTION ICON INDICATOR
Buzzer On
Used when the operator wishes to
cancel the audible alarms.
Silent Buzzer Button
Buzzer Off
This will mute the audible alarm for
a period of 5 minutes or until
another alarm is triggered.
Reeving Button Reeving Mode OFF

If this button is pressed, the During this mode, all crane limits
display will show another will be monitored.
screen where the crane
operator/authorized
personnel need to enter
passcode to run into Reeving Mode ON
Reeving Mode. During this mode, all the Crane
The reeving mode will be Limit, Hydraulic Alarm and Engine
activated for approximately Alarm will be bypassed. It’s the
20 minutes then password operator’s responsibility to ensure
would be needed to re- the safe handling of the crane.
activate the reeving mode.
If the REEVING MODE is ON, the crane can only lifts up to a max load of 2 tonne. Note that
the SLI is not bypassed and there is no load chart shown.
CAUTION!!! All limits and alarms will be disabled. This mode should only be used during
erection. (Slack rope and Luff ratchet alarm will be also be disabled)
Accept Button
Press this button to accept a
particular setting or configuration.
General Buttons Setup Button

Pressing this button will lead to the
Password Page.
Enter Button
Press this button to enter to Setting
Page from the Password Page.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
4
SLI Button
SLI Screen of the display.
Previous Screen Button

Previous Page of the display.
Main Screen Button

Main Page of the display.
Change Button
Press this button to change the
password at the password page.
Settings Button
Setting Page of the display.
Log In Button
General Buttons Password Page of the display.
Emergency Power pack Button

Emergency Power pack page of the
display.
Port Hoist Status Button

Port Hoist Status page of the
display.
Starboard Hoist Status Button

Starboard Hoist Status page of the
display.
Luff Status Button

Luff Status page of the display.
Slew Status Button

Slew Status page of the display.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
5
Retarder Status Button

Retarder Status page of the display.
Motor Status Button

Motor Status page of the display.
Status Screen Button

Status Screen of the display.
System Status Button

System Status Page of the display.
Change Date/Time Button

Pressing this button will lead to
Change Date/Time Page.
Port Main Hoist Settings Button

General Buttons Port Main Hoist Setting Page of the
display.
Starboard Main Hoist Settings

Button
Starboard Main Hoist Setting Page
of the display.
Emergency Power pack Settings

Button
Emergency Power pack Setting
Page of the display.
Fly Hoist Settings Button

Fly Hoist Setting Screen of the
display.
Slew Settings Button

Slew Hoist Setting Screen of the
display.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
6
Luff Hoist Settings Button

Luff Hoist Settings Screen of the
display.
System Config Button

System Config Screen of the
display.
Sensors Settings Button

Sensors Settings Screen of the
display.
Alarm List Button

Alarm List Screen of the display.
General Buttons
Crane Operation State Button
Crane Operation State Screen of
the display.
System Settings Button

System Settings Screen of the
display.
Crane Geometry Button

Crane Geometry Screen of the
display.
Port Main Load Cell Calibration

Button
Screen of the display.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
7
Stb Main Load Cell Calibration

Button
Starboard Main Load Cell
Calibration Screen of the display.
General Buttons
Fly Hoist Load Cell Calibration
Button
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
8
1.2 Alarm Indicators

Indicates that there is a

HYDRAULIC ALARM. If an alarm
pertaining hydraulic alarm is
triggered, this icon turns into a
Hydraulic Alarm
button which leads to a summary
page of alarms. Refer to section 7.0
for further explanation on the
summary alarm page.
Indicates that there is a CRANE

LIMIT ALARM. If an alarm
pertaining limit alarm is triggered,
this icon turns into a button which
Crane Alarm
leads to a summary page of alarms.
Refer to section 8.0 for further
explanation on the summary alarm
page.
Display on the annunciator panel

Emergency Mode
screen and indicates that the crane
Alarm
is in emergency mode.

Reeving Mode Alarm screen and indicates that the crane
is in reeving mode.

Synchronized Lift
is in synchronized lift mode. This is
Mode Alarm
activated by a push of a button on
the right hand joystick.
Wrong Password Indicates that a wrong password is

Alarm being entered.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
9
1.3 Key Switch Selection
Selector - Winches Powerpack Function

Port and Port Starboard
Port Starboard Personal Fly Sync Port Starboard Fly Luff Slew
Starboard Winch Winch
X X X N/A N/A X X
X X X N/A N/A X X
X X X X N/A N/A X X
X X N/A X N/A X X
X X N/A X N/A X X
X X X N/A X N/A X X
X X X N/A N/A X X X
X X X N/A N/A X X X
X X X X N/A N/A X X X
X X X X N/A X X
X X X X N/A X X
X X X X X N/A X X
X X X X N/A X X X
X X X X N/A X X X
X X X X X N/A X X X
X X N/A N/A X X X
X X N/A N/A X X X
X X X N/A N/A X X X
X X X N/A N/A X X X
X X X N/A N/A X X X
X X X X N/A N/A X X X
X X X X X N/A X X
X X X X X N/A X X
X X X X X X N/A X X
Fly Hoist is disable during sync lift.

This matrix is not applicable when using Emergency Power Pack. Selections are done on the display when Emergency Power Pack is used.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
10
2.0 Loading Screen
Figure 2: Loading Screen
When ignition key is switched on, this Loading screen will appear for few seconds showing the display
is trying to establish communication with the controller.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
11
3.0 Crane Configuration Confirmation Screen
Figure 3: System Configuration Confirmation Screen
Once the communication establishes successfully and all the stored data has been loaded, the
display will jump into this screen. Here, the crane operator is responsible to ensure the current crane
configuration is being set correctly by pressing the ACCEPT Button. If there is a need to change the
current crane configuration, SETUP Button is press to go into setting page.
Please only press ACCEPT when all configuration are shown on the screen.
NOTE:
Password is required to change the system settings. System settings should only be change by
Favelle Favco Cranes Authorized Personnel.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
12
4.0 SLI Screen
Figure 4: SLI Screen
After the crane configuration is accepted, a SLI screen will appear to indicate the overall SLI status of
the crane and the overall operation data of each crane function.
This value shows the chart number

Chart Number that has been selected for each of
the particular hoist.
This value shows the actual load

Act. Load
that is being lifted by the crane.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
13
This value shows the maximum

allowable load of either the Main
Hoist or the Fly Hoist at that
particular radius.
Max. Load
If there is no value shown, that
means an invalid load chart is
selected. Please check crane
operation state configuration.
This value shows the Hook Radius

Hook Radius of either the Main Hoist or the Fly
Hoist.
This value shows the boom angle of

the crane. (Positive means above
Boom Angle
the deck level and negative means
below deck level)
This value shows the slew angle of

Slew Angle the crane. 0° to 360° in clockwise
manner.
This value shows the absolute tilt

Tilt Angle angle of the crane.
Not installed on this crane.
This value shows the list angle of

List Angle the crane.
Not applicable on this crane.
This value shows the heel angle of

Heel Angle the crane.
Not applicable on this crane.
This column shows the Lifting Mode

of the crane. There are 3 types of
Lifting Mode modes to choose from, ONBOARD,
OFFBOARD and PERSONNEL
mode.
This shows the maximum list angle

Max. List Angle allowed for the safe operation of the
crane.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
14
This shows the significant wave

Sig. Wave Height height allowed for the safe operation
of the crane.
This value shows the date, day and

Date, Day and Time
time of the controller.
The values show the capacity and

the radius in Sync Mode. It also
shows Port and Starboard Main
Hoist actual load individually.
Total Capacity in
Sync Mode This is activated with a press of a
button (Sync Mode button)on the
right hand joystick. Press again on
the Sync mode button to deactivate
the Sync mode.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
15
5.0 Annunciator Panel Screen
Figure 5a: Annunciator Panel Screen
The Annunciator Panel Screen indicates the overall alarm/operation status of the crane and the
overall operation data of each crane function. If any of the indicators turn RED and the audible alarm
is triggered which means the system/operation status has an alarm and they require attention on it.
Press the individual indicator on this screen will lead to corresponding status page of the operation.
DESCRIPTION INDICATOR PAGE
Starboard Main Hoist Status

This indicator will change from GREY to RED if there is
A an alarm triggered in the starboard main hoist status. By
Annunciator pressing on the particular indicator, it will lead you to the
Status status page respectively.
Indicator/Buttons
Port Main Hoist Status
B an alarm triggered in the port main hoist status. By
pressing on the particular indicator, it will lead you to the
status page respectively.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
16
DESCRIPTION INDICATOR PAGE
Fly Hoist Status

C an alarm triggered in the fly hoist status. By pressing on
the particular indicator, it will lead you to the status page
respectively.
Luff Status
D an alarm triggered in the luff status. By pressing on the
particular indicator, it will lead you to the status page
respectively.
Slew Status
E an alarm triggered in the slew status. By pressing on the
particular indicator, it will lead you to the status page
respectively.
Starboard Motor Status

F This indicator will change from RED to BLUE if the
Annunciator starboard side motor is running.
Status
Indicator/Buttons
Port Motor Status
G This indicator will change from RED to BLUE if the port
side motor is running.
Emergency Motor Status

H This indicator will change from RED to BLUE if the port
side motor is running.
Hydraulic Alarm Status

This indicator will change from GREEN to RED if there is
I an alarm triggered in the hydraulic alarm status. By
pressing on the particular indicator, it will lead you to the
status page respectively.
Motor Supply Status

This indicator will turn on to GREEN if there is a supply
to the motor.
Power Meter Indicator

This value shows the power used in kW from the
selected power pack.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
17
5.1 Reeving Confirmation Screen
Figure 5b: Reeving Confirmation Screen
When the REEVING button is pressed, this screen will be displayed. Here the operator is
required to enter the passcode to operate in the Reeving Mode. Once the passcode is entered
correctly, the reeving mode is activated. If the operator accidently press the REEVING button, press
CANCEL button to cancel the reeving operation and return back to previous screen.
Procedure to enter the access code:
1. Press on the passcode data entry area until a pop up keypad appear.
2. Enter the 4-digits passcode thru the keypad on the screen.
3. Press ENT button on the keypad.
4. Then, press CONFIRM button.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
18
6.0 Crane Status Screen

6.1 Hoist Status Screen
Figure 6a: Port Main Hoist
Figure 6b: Starboard Main Hoist & Fly Hoist Status Screen
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
19
INDICATOR EXPLANATION

Anti-Cavitation cavitation in the hydraulic system. A default value is set to
0.6 MPa to activate the anti – cavitation alarm.
This indicator will change from GREEN to RED if pressure

memory reset is needed.
Pressure Memory Reset If this alarm is present, go to setting page, and select the
particular hoist function setting page and press Pressure
Memory Reset. This button can be found on the RH side of
the page.
If the load is within the maximum load at that particular

radius, this indicator should remain GREEN. Once the load
Load Limit
reaches 105% of the Rated Load on that radius, this
indicator will turn RED.
This indicator will change from GREEN to RED when slack

Slack Rope rope is detected. There would be a motion cut when the
alarm is triggered.
This indicator will change from GREEN to RED when over

speed is detected.
Over-speed
The over-speed alarm triggers when the actual speed is
higher than the norminal speed.
This indicator will remain GREEN until Low Boost Pressure

Boost Pressure is detected in the hydraulic system. A default value is set to
2.0 MPa to activate the low boost pressure alarm.
This indicator will remain GREEN until there’s an overload in

Hydraulic Overload
the hydraulic system.
This indicator will remain GREEN if the crane is operating

Ultimate Limit within the limits. Once the crane is operating out of specified
limits, the appropriate indicator will turn to RED.
Up Limit This indicator will remain GREEN if the crane is operating

within the limits. Once the crane is operating out of specified
Down Limit limits, the appropriate indicator will turn to RED.
This indicator will remain GREEN until there is a possible

Anti Two Block Two Block incident. Then it will turn to RED.
(if applicable) Two Block: - Incident where the hook block collides with the
sheave in the boom head.
Up Fine Control This indicator will remain GREEN. It will change to AMBER
once the Fine Control is activated or the crane deceleration
limit is triggered. A default is set to reduction of 50% actual
Down Fine Control speed when button is pressed.
This indicator will turn GREEN once the person present

Person Present Switch
switch on the Joystick is pressed.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
20
This value will show the displacement of the joystick in

Joystick Displacement percentage. Positive value means joystick down and
negative value means joystick up.
This value shows the drum nominal speed either for the
Drum Nom. Speed
main hoist or the fly hoist drum.
This value shows the drum actual speed either for the main
Drum Act. Speed
hoist or the fly hoist drum.
A A. Press Up
This shows the pressure in the Up
line in MPa.
Pressure Indicator
B. Press Down
This shows the pressure in the
Down line in MPa.
SV42/1
Icons above show the change over
Change Over Solenoid solenoid. When it is RED, the
solenoid stays at the initial position.
GREEN means the solenoid
change over.
This indicator shows the motor

status. GREEN means the motor is
Motor Status
running while RED means it is
stalled.
This indicator shows the gearbox

temperature. Under normal
Gearbox Temperature
operation this indicator should
Status
remain GREEN. RED shows high
temperature is detected.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
21
This indicator shows the tank

interlock valve status. This indicator
Tank Interlock Valve should be GREEN for the crane to
Status (If applicable) work properly. ie. The interlock
valves are all opened. RED shows
the valve is closed.
This indicator shows the hydraulic

filter status. Under normal operation
Hydraulic Filter Status this indicator should remain
GREEN. RED shows the filter is
blocked.
This value shows the encoder

Encoder (Count) (count) of either the Main Hoist or
the Fly Hoist.
This indicator shows the brake

status of the hydraulic motor. RED
Brake Status means the brake is engaged and
GREEN means the brake is
disengaged.
This indicator shows which

operation is selected either the
Drum Selector Main Hoist or the Fly Hoist. GREEN
means it is being selected while
RED means it is not selected.
This indicator shows the current (in

Current Indicator
percentage) to the motor or pump.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
22
6.2 Luff Status Screen
Figure 6c: Luff Status Screen
This indicator will change from GREEN to RED if pressure

memory reset is needed.
Pressure Memory Reset If this alarm is present, go to setting page, and select the
particular hoist function setting page and press Pressure
Memory Reset. This button can be found on the RH side of
the page.
This indicator shows the load limit of the crane. Under

Load Limit normal condition, it will remain GREEN. RED indicates over
the load limit.
This indicator will change from GREEN to RED when over

speed is detected.
Over-speed
The over-speed alarm triggers when the actual speed is
This indicator will remain GREEN until low Boost Pressure is

Boost Pressure detected in the hydraulic system. A default value is set to
2.0 MPa to activate the low boost pressure alarm.

Anti-Cavitation cavitation in the hydraulic system. A default value is set to
0.6 MPa to activate the anti – cavitation alarm.
This indicator will change from GREEN to RED when slack

Slack Rope rope is detected. There would be a motion cut when the
alarm is triggered.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
23
This indicator will remain GREEN until there’s an overload in

Hydraulic Overload
the hydraulic system.
Up Limit, Down Limit This indicator will remain GREEN if the crane is operating
Up Ultimate Limit limits, the appropriate indicator will turn into RED.
This indicator will turn GREEN once the present present

switch on the Joystick is pressed.
Up Fine Control This indicator will remain GREEN. It will change to AMBER
Down Fine Control speed when button is pressed.
This value will show the displacement of the joystick in

Joystick Displacement percentage. Positive value means joystick up and negative
value means joystick down.
Angle This value shows the angle of the boom in degree.
Drum Nom. Speed This value shows the drum nominal speed of the luff drum.
Drum Act. Speed This value shows the drum actual speed of the luff drum.
This indicator will change from RED

to GREEN if the luff ratchet has
Luff Ratchet been disengaged.
NOTE: Luff function will be disabled
if this status is RED.
A
A. Press Up
This shows the pressure in the Up
line in Mpa.
Pressure Indicator
B. Press Down
This shows the pressure in the
Down line in MPa.
B
Motor Status
stalled.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
24

Gearbox Temperature
Status


blocked.
This value shows the encoder

Encoder (Count)
(count) of the luff.
This indicator shows the brake

status of the motor. RED means the
Brake Status hydraulic brake is engaged and
GREEN means the brake is
disengaged.

Current Indicator
percentage) to the motor or pump.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
25
6.3 Slew Status Screen
Figure 6d: Slew Status Screen
Right Limit This indicator will remain GREEN if the crane is operating
Left Limit limits, the appropriate indicator will turn into RED.
Right Fine Control This indicator will remain RED. It will change to GREEN
Left Fine Control speed when button is pressed.
This indicator will turn GREEN once the Person Persent

Switch on the Joystick is pressed.
This value shows the displacement of the joystick in

Joystick Displacement percentage. Negative value means slew right and positive
means slew left.
Angle This value shows the angle of the Slew operation. Angle
(If applicable) values goes from 0 to 360 clockwise.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
26
This indicator will turn GREEN if the

Slew Brake
Slew Brake is released.

Motor Status
stalled.

Gearbox Temperature
Status


blocked.
Encoder (Count) This value shows the encoder

(If applicable) (count) of the slew operation.

Current Indicator
percentage) to the pump.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
27
6.4 Motor Status Screen
Figure 6e: Motor Status Screen
To start the powerpack,
1. Able to select either port or starboard motor individually or both motor at the same time.
2. Select the power pack with the selector on the dashboard in the cabin.
3. During Emergency Mode, only emergency motor can be selected.
This indicator shows the Motor Running status. GREEN

Motor Running shows that the motor is running. RED shows that the motor
stalled.
This indicator shows the motor fault status. GREEN means

Motor Fault there is no fault detected while RED means fault has been
detected.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
28
6.5 System Status Screen
Figure 6f: System Status Screen
Figure 6g: System Status Screen
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
29
Right Joystick
This indicator shows the “health” of the right and left joystick.
GREEN indicates that the joysticks are working.
Left Joystick
This indicator shows the “health” of the main controller.

Main Controller
GREEN indicates that the main controller is running.
This indicator shows the “health” of the secondary controller.

Secondary Controller
GREEN indicates that the secondary controller is running.
Slave Controller X4
Slave Controller X6
This indicator shows the “health” of the slave controller.
GREEN indicates that the slave controller is running.
Slave Controller X15
Slave Controller X11
Port Main Hoist Up Pres.
Stb Main Hoist Up Pres. This indicator shows the “health” of the up pressure
transducer. GREEN indicates that the pressure transducer
Fly Hoist Up Pres. is working.
Luff Up Pres.
Port Main Hoist Down Pres.
Stb Main Hoist Down Pres. This indicator shows the “health” of the down pressure
transducer. GREEN indicates that the pressure transducer
Fly Hoist Down Pres. is working.
Luff Down Pres.
Port Main Hoist Encoder
Stb Main Hoist Encoder

This indicator shows the working condition of the encoder.
Fly Hoist Encoder Under normal operation this indicator should remain
GREEN. RED shows faulty encoder is detected.
Luff Encoder
Slew Encoder
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
30
This indicator shows the “health” of the angle sensor.

Angle Sensor
GREEN indicates that the angle sensor is working.
This indicator shows the “health” of the tilt sensor. GREEN

Tilt Sensor indicates that the tilt sensor is working.
This is not installed on this crane.
Load Pin 1A – Port Main
Load Pin 1B – Port Main
Load Pin 2A – Fly Hoist

This indicator shows the “health” of the load pin. GREEN
indicates that the load pin is working.
Load Pin 2B – Fly Hoist
Load Pin 3A – Stb Main
Load Pin 3B – Stb Main
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
31
7.0 Hydraulic Alarm Status Screen
Figure 7: Hydraulic Alarm Status Screen
Port Main Hoist Boost Press.
Starboard Main Hoist Boost Press. This indicator will remain GREEN until low Boost
Pressure is detected in the hydraulic system. A
default value is set to 2.0 MPa to activate the low
Fly Hoist Boost Press. boost pressure alarm.
Luff Hoist Boost Press.
Port Main Hoist Anti-Cav.
Starboard Main Hoist Anti-Cav. This indicator will change from GREEN to RED if
there is cavitation in the hydraulic system. A
default value is set to 0.6 MPa to activate the anti
Fly Hoist Anti-Cav. – cavitation alarm.
Luff Hoist Anti-Cav.
Port Main Hoist Hyd Overload
Starboard Main Hoist Hyd Overload

This indicator will remain GREEN until there’s an
overload in the hydraulic system.
Fly Hoist Hyd. Overload
Luff Hoist Hyd. Overload
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
32
This indicator shows the tank interlock valve

status. This indicator should be GREEN for the
Interlock Valve
crane to work properly. ie. The interlock valves are
all opened. RED shows the valve is closed.
Filter (Port)
Filter (Starboard) This indicator shows the hydraulic filter status.

Under normal operation this indicator should
Emergency Powerpack Filter remain GREEN. RED shows the filter is blocked.
Tugger Winch Filter
This indicator turns RED when the hydraulic oil

Hyd. Temp temperature is high. Under normal condition, it
should remain GREEN.

Hyd. Level Low level in hydraulic tank is low. Under normal
condition, it should remain GREEN.

level in hydraulic tank is high. Under normal
Hyd. Level High condition, it should remain GREEN.
NOTE: When hydraulic oil level high is triggered,
the whole crane will be shut down.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
33
8.0 Crane Alarm Status Screen
Figure 8: Crane Alarm Status Screen
Main Hoist Up Decel.
Main Hoist Down Decel.
Stb Main Hoist Up Decel.
Stb Main Hoist Down Decel.
Fly Hoist Up Decel. This indicator will remain GREEN. It will change to AMBER
once the crane deceleration limit is triggered or fine control
Fly Hoist Down Decel. is activated.
Slew Right Decel.
Slew Left Decel.
Luff Up Decel.
Luff Down Decel.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
34
Main Hoist Up Limit
Main Hoist Down Limit
Stb Main Hoist Up Limit
Stb Main Hoist Down Limit
Fly Hoist Up Limit This indicator will remain GREEN if the crane is operating
Fly Hoist Down Limit limits, the appropriate indicator will turn to RED.
Slew Right Limit
Slew Left Limit
Luff Up Limit
Luff Down Limit
This indicator shows the Luff Up Ultimate Limit. GREEN

means within working limit and RED means the boom has
Luff Up Ultimate Limit reach the ultimate limit.
NOTE: When Luff Up Ultimate Limit turns RED, the whole
crane will be shut down.
Main Hoist Overload

If the load is within the maximum load at that particular
radius, this indicator should remain GREEN. Once the load
Stb Main Hoist Overload
reaches 105% of the Rated Load on that radius, this
indicator will turn RED.
Fly Hoist Overload
Main Hoist ATB

This indicator will remain GREEN until there is a possible
Stb Main Hoist ATB Two Block incident. Then it will turn to RED.
These are not installed on this crane.
Fly Hoist ATB
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
35
Main Hoist Parking Limit
Stb Main Hoist Parking Limit This indicator will change from GREEN to RED when the
Parking Limit is triggered.
Fly Hoist Parking Limit Only Luff Parking Limit is available on this crane.
Luff Parking Limit
Main Hoist Overspeed

This indicator will change from GREEN to RED when the
Stb Main Hoist Overspeed overspeed alarm is triggered.
Fly Hoist Overspeed The over-speed alarm triggers when the actual speed is
Luff Overspeed
Main Hoist Slack Rope
Stb Main Hoist Slack Rope This indicator will change from GREEN to RED when the
slack rope alarm is triggered. There would be a motion cut
Fly Hoist Slack Rope when the alarm is triggered.
Luff Slack Rope
This indicator will change from RED to GREEN if the luff

Luff Ratchet Status ratchet has been disengaged.
NOTE: Luff function will be disabled if this status is RED.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
36
9.0 Emergency Powerpack Screen
Figure 9: Emergency Powerpack Screen
BUTTON EXPLANATION
When this button is pressed, Port Main Hoist operation is

allowed to be use in Emergency Mode.
When this button is pressed, Starboard Main Hoist operation

is allowed to be use in Emergency Mode.
When this button is pressed, Fly Hoist operation is allowed

to be use in Emergency Mode.
When this button is pressed, Luff operation is allowed to be

use in Emergency Mode.
When this button is pressed, Slew operation is allowed to be

use in Emergency Mode.
NOTE: In Emergency Mode, only one operation is allowed except for Port Main Hoist operation and
Starboard Main Hoist operation.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
37
This indicator shows the Motor Running status. GREEN

Motor Running shows that the motor is running. RED shows that the motor
stalled.
This indicator shows the motor fault status. GREEN means

Motor Fault there is no fault detected while RED means fault has been
detected.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
38
10.0 Retarder System Status
Figure 10: Retarder System Status Screen
These values are values from

Proportional Valve the retarder proportional valve
Indicator in percentage when the
retarder system is activated.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
39
These are values in kW from

Power Meter Indicator
the power meter.
This indicator shows the cooling

orifice solenoid valve status.
Cooling Orifice Solenoid
GREEN means there is no fault
Valve Indicator
detected while RED means fault
has been detected.
This indicator shows the relieve

valve solenoid valve status.
Relieve Valve Solenoid
GREEN means there is no fault
Valve Indicator
detected while RED means fault
has been detected.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
40
11.0 Password Screen
Figure 11: Password Screen
When the operator presses the SETUP Button, this Password screen will be displayed. Here, the
password is required to have access to the system settings section. There are different levels of
access to the system settings section. The levels are consist of level 1 which is for FFC Engineer
Level Support, level 2 which is for FFC Service or FFC Trained Service Personnel Support and level 3
(no password required) which is for Operator Level.
Press ENTER Button to confirm the password.
Procedure to enter the password:
1. Press on the password data entry area until a pop up keypad appears.
2. Enter the 8-digits passcode thru the keypad on the screen.
3. Press ENT button on the keypad.
4. Then, press ENTER button on the screen.
NOTE: The system settings should only be changed by Favelle Favco Cranes Authorized Personnel
or Favelle Favco Cranes Appointed Service Personnel.
Crane Serial, System Version, System Serial and Display Version can be found at the bottom of this
screen.
LINEC-LE7003-OM-2.0
10-4
Linec System Service Manual

)$9(//()$9&2
/,1(&
6<67(0

/(6HULHV
6HUYLFH0DQXDO

CRANE SERIAL : 1814
SYSTEM SERIAL : LE7003
MANUAL VERSION : 2.0
ii
___________________________________________________________________________
WARNING
The Favelle Favco LINEC System, LE7000 Series, is a crane device
which warns operator of impending overload conditions and of over-
hoist conditions which could cause damage to property, crane and
personnel.
The system is not a substitute for good operator judgment,

experience and safe crane operation. The operator is solely
responsible for safe operation of the crane.
The operator must, prior to operation of the crane, read this manual
carefully and thoroughly and shall ensure that all operational
instructions and warnings are well understood and complied with.
Proper system operation requires the Favelle Favco Cranes

Authorized Personnel or any Favelle Favco Cranes appointed
Service Personnel to correctly program the Favelle Favco LINEC
System to match the crane setup and working configuration.
The system is equipped with a override key (LMI Bypass- if

applicable), which bypasses alarms and motion cut function, at
which time the system can no longer warn of impending overload,
and must only be operated strictly in accordance to the crane setup
and operation procedures. Operation of this key is for authorized
personnel only, who shall be solely responsible for its use.
___________________________________________________________________________
iii
___________________________________________________________________________
Important Disclaimers, Copyrights and Legal Information
Agreement
User Agreement:
User agrees to the use of this Manual only under the following terms and conditions.
License Disclaimer:
Nothing on this Manual shall be construed as conferring any license under any intellectual property
rights owned by FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc., by any FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA)
Inc. business unit, or affiliated or associated corporation (hereinafter "business units") or by any third
party, whether by estoppels, implication, or otherwise.
Notice Specific to Information and Documents Available on This Manual:

Permission to use documents such as data sheets, white papers, technical guides, and press
releases contained within this Manual is granted on a limited use basis, provided that
(1) the following copyright notice appears in all copies of documents made from this Manual: "(c)
2006 FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc. All rights reserved.", and that both the copyright
notice and this permission notice appear thereon;
(2) use of such documents copied from this Manual is for informational and non-commercial or
personal use only and will not be copied or posted on any network computer or broadcast in any
media; and
(3) no modifications of any documents are made.
Use for any other purpose is expressly prohibited by law, and may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties. Violators will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible. "Documents," as defined
above, do not include the design or layout of the FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc. Manual or
any other site owned, operated, licensed or controlled by FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc. or
any business unit, or affiliated or associated corporation. Elements of FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES
(USA) Inc.'s Manual are protected by trade dress and other laws and may not be copied or imitated in
whole or in part. No logo, graphic, sound or image from any FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc.
Manual may be copied or retransmitted unless expressly permitted by FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES
(USA) Inc. in writing.
Unsolicited Ideas and Concepts:

Any user who desires to submit unsolicited information to FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc. or
to its strategic business units is cautioned to do so only under the procedures established by
FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc. for such unsolicited submissions. These procedures are
available from FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc. upon request. Any information provided to
FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc. or its business units in connection with any FAVELLE FAVCO
CRANES (USA) Inc. Manual outside the established procedures shall be provided by the submitter
and received by FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc. on a non-confidential basis. FAVELLE
FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc. or its business units shall be free to use such information on an
unrestricted basis and such information will become the exclusive property of FAVELLE FAVCO
CRANES (USA) Inc. to be used by it as it deems appropriate without compensation of any kind to any
other party.
Copyright Notice:
FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc., All Rights Reserved.
Trademarks:
The FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES trademark and design are registered trademarks of FAVELLE
FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc. Other trademarks owned either by FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA)
Inc. or its business units, such as the trademark and design, which are referenced on this Manual are
either trademarks or registered trademarks of FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc. or of its
business units. Additional product and company names referenced on this Manual may be
trademarks of their respective owners.
___________________________________________________________________________
iv
___________________________________________________________________________
Rights Reserved:
Any rights not expressly granted herein are reserved. FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc.
reserves the right to alter or change this Agreement at any time by revising the terms and conditions
herein. Users are responsible for regularly reviewing these terms and conditions. Continued use of
this manual following any such changes shall constitute the user's acceptance of all such changes.
This Agreement:
• Constitutes the entire Agreement, and supersedes any and all other agreements,
understandings, and communications between the parties;
• May only be amended or otherwise modified by a written instrument executed by an

authorized representative of FAVELLE FAVCO CRANES (USA) Inc.
___________________________________________________________________________
1
___________________________________________________________________________
Table of Contents
Cover .................................................................................................................................................i
Warning .............................................................................................................................................ii
Important Disclaimers, Copyrights and Legal Information Agreement .............................................iii
Table of Content ................................................................................................................................1
Service Display Flowchart .................................................................................................................2
1.0 Definitions
1.1 Button Description...........................................................................................................3
1.2 Alarm Indicator ................................................................................................................8
2.0 Service Menu .......................................................................................................................9
3.0 Settings
3.1 Hoist
3.1.1 Main Hoist Settings ................................................................................................10
3.1.2 Fly Hoist Settings ....................................................................................................15
3.2 Slew
3.2.1 Slew Settings ..........................................................................................................16
3.3 Luff
3.3.1 Luff Settings ............................................................................................................18
3.4 Emergency Powerpack
3.4.1 Emergency Powerpack Settings………………………………………………………..22
4.0 Configuration Screen ...........................................................................................................24
5.0 Sensor Settings ....................................................................................................................25
6.0 Crane Operation State Screen .............................................................................................27
7.0 System Settings Screen .......................................................................................................28
8.0 Crane Geometry Screen ......................................................................................................30
9.0 Load Cell Calibration Screen ...............................................................................................31
10.0 SLI Setting Screen ...............................................................................................................34
11.0 Date / Time Setting Screen ..................................................................................................36
12.0 Alarm List Screen .................................................................................................................37
13.0 Password and Access Code Change
13.1 Password Change Screen ............................................................................................39
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
2
___________________________________________________________________________
Service Display Flowchart
^ƚĂƌďŽĂƌĚDĂŝŶ,ŽŝƐƚ
ŵĞƌŐĞŶĐǇWŽǁĞƌƉĂĐŬ
&ůǇ,ŽŝƐƚ^ĞƚƚŝŶŐWĂŐĞ
^ůĞǁ^ĞƚƚŝŶŐWĂŐĞ
>ƵĨĨ,ŽŝƐƚ^ĞƚƚŝŶŐWĂŐĞ
^ĞƚƚŝŶŐWĂŐĞ >ŽŐ/Ŷ WĂƐƐǁŽƌĚWĂŐĞ ^ĞƚƚŝŶŐWĂŐĞ
^ǇƐƚĞŵŽŶĨŝŐWĂŐĞ
^ĞŶƐŽƌƐ^ĞƚƚŝŶŐWĂŐĞ
,ŽŝƐƚ>ŝŶĞWƵůů^ĞƚƚŝŶŐƐ
WĂŐĞ
^ǇƐƚĞŵ^ĞƚƚŝŶŐƐWĂŐĞ
ƌĂŶĞ'ĞŽŵĞƚƌǇWĂŐĞ
WŽƌƚDĂŝŶ>ŽĂĚĞůů
ĂůŝďƌĂƚŝŽŶWĂŐĞ
^ƚďDĂŝŶ>ŽĂĚĞůů
&ůǇ,ŽŝƐƚ>ŽĂĚĞůů
ĂƚĞΘdŝŵĞ^ĞƚWĂŐĞ
ůĂƌŵ>ŝƐƚWĂŐĞ
^>/^ĞƚƚŝŶŐƐWĂŐĞ
Figure 1: Service Display Flowchart
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
3
___________________________________________________________________________
1.0 Definitions
1.1 Button Description
Buzzer On
Used when the operator wishes to
cancel the audible alarms.
Silent Buzzer Button
Buzzer Off
This will mute the audible alarm for
a period of 5 minutes or until
another alarm is triggered.
Reeving Button Reeving Mode OFF

If this button is pressed, the During this mode, all crane limits
display will show another will be monitored.
screen where the crane
operator/authorized
personnel need to enter
passcode to run into Reeving Mode ON
Reeving Mode. During this mode, all the Crane
The reeving mode will be Limit, Hydraulic Alarm and Engine
activated for approximately Alarm will be bypassed. It’s the
20 minutes then password operator’s responsibility to ensure
would be needed to re- the safe handling of the crane.
activate the reeving mode.
If the REEVING MODE is ON, the crane can only lifts up to a max load of 2 tonne. Note that
the SLI is not bypassed and there is no load chart shown.
CAUTION!!! All limits and alarms will be disabled. This mode should only be used during
erection. (Slack rope and Luff ratchet alarm will be also be disabled)
Accept Button
Press this button to accept a
particular setting or configuration.
General Buttons Setup Button

Setting Page.
Enter Button
Press this button to enter to Setting
Page from the Password Page.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
4
___________________________________________________________________________
SLI Button
SLI Screen of the display.
Previous Screen Button

Previous Page of the display.
Main Screen Button

Main Page of the display.
Change Button
Press this button to change the
password at the password page.
Settings Button
Log In Button
General Buttons Pressing this button will lead to the

Password Page of the display.
Log Out Button

Press this button to log out the
Restore Password Button

Press this button to restore
password to default password.
Emergency Powerpack Button

Emergency Powerpack page of the
display.
Port Hoist Status Button

Port Hoist Status page of the
display.
Starboard Hoist Status Button

Starboard Hoist Status page of the
display.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
5
___________________________________________________________________________
Luff Status Button

Luff Status page of the display.
Slew Status Button

Slew Status page of the display.
Retarder Status Button

Retarder Status page of the display.
Motor Status Button

Motor Status page of the display.
Status Screen Button

Status Screen of the display.
System Status Button

General Buttons Pressing this button will lead to the
System Status Page of the display.
Pressure Memory Reset Button

Pressing this button will reset the
pressure memory of the selected
setting.
Set Button
Pressing this button will set the
value of selected setting.
Select Buttons
Pressing this button will allow user
to select a particular setting.
Save Button
Press this button to save data.
Change Date/Time Button

Pressing this button will lead to
Change Date/Time Page.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
6
___________________________________________________________________________
Port Main Hoist Settings Button

Port Main Hoist Setting Page of the
display.
Starboard Main Hoist Settings

Button
Starboard Main Hoist Setting Page
of the display.
Emergency Powerpack Settings

Button
Emergency Powerpack Setting
Page of the display.
Fly Hoist Settings Button

Fly Hoist Setting Page of the
display.
Slew Settings Button

Slew Hoist Setting Page of the
General Buttons
display.
Luff Hoist Settings Button

Luff Hoist Settings Page of the
display.
System Config Button

System Config Page of the display.
Sensors Settings Button

Sensors Settings Screen of the
display.
Alarm List Button

Alarm List Screen of the display.
Hoist Line Pull Button

Hoist Line Pull Screen of the
display.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
7
___________________________________________________________________________
System Settings Button

System Settings Screen of the
display.
Crane Geometry Button

Crane Geometry Screen of the
display.

Button
General Buttons
Stb Main Load Cell Calibration
Button
Starboard Main Load Cell
Calibration Screen of the display.

Button
SLI Settings Button

SLI Setting Screen of the display.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
8
___________________________________________________________________________
1.2 Alarm Indicators

Indicates that there is a

HYDRAULIC ALARM. If an alarm
pertaining hydraulic alarm is
triggered, this icon turns into a
Hydraulic Alarm
button which leads to a summary
page of alarms. Refer to section 7.0
for further explanation on the
summary alarm page.
Indicates that there is a CRANE

LIMIT ALARM. If an alarm
pertaining limit alarm is triggered,
this icon turns into a button which
Crane Alarm
leads to a summary page of alarms.
Refer to section 8.0 for further
explanation on the summary alarm
page.

Emergency Mode
Alarm
is in emergency mode.

Reeving Mode Alarm screen and indicates that the crane
is in reeving mode.

is in synchronized lift mode. Display
Synchronized Lift on the annunciator panel screen
Mode Alarm and indicates that the crane is in
synchronized lift mode. This is
activated by a push of a button on
the right hand joystick.
Wrong Password Indicates that a wrong password is

Alarm being entered.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
9
___________________________________________________________________________
2.0 Service Menu
Figure 2a: Service Page Menu
When the access is granted on the Password Page, this service menu screens will be displayed
depending on the level of password entered. Service menu level 1 is for FFC Engineering Level
Support, service menu level 2 for FFC Trained Service Personnel Support and service menu 3 for
Operator Level Access. Here, the authorized personnel for level 1 and level 2 can choose to set the
setting of the crane by pressing the respective buttons above while operator can read only.
NOTE:
All settings MUST be in Metric units, i.e. mm, kg, etc.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
10
___________________________________________________________________________
3.0 Settings
3.1 Hoist
3.1.1 Main Hoist Settings (Port & Starboard)
Figure 3a: Main Hoist Settings Screen (Port)
Figure 3b: Main Hoist Settings Screen (Starboard)
PUMP
This screen will appear if the PORT MAIN HOIST SETTING and STARBOARD MAIN HOIST
SETTING button is pressed in the Setting Page. To reset the pressure memory, press the
PRESSURE MEMORY RESET button. After every data had been entered, press the SAVE button
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
11
___________________________________________________________________________
until it changes color (from Dark Green to a Light-up Green) to save the new values into the
EEPROM.
PARAMETER PROCEDURE / DESCRIPTION
This is the value used to load the pressure memory. Lift the
maximum Safe Working Load (SWL) about 2 meters above
the ground then stop. Reduce load count to ZERO. Put
Load Counts joystick to 30% up without pressing pressure memory reset.
Slowly increase load count value until motion of drum is
achieved. Press SAVE button until it changes color (from
Dark Green to a Light-up Green) to save data.
This is the ramp time for loading pressure memory. Load

Time value is depending of the load count value. The higher
Load Time the load count, the higher the load time. Load time increase
linearly with load count. Choose a suitable Load Time
(Recommended >2.0)
This is to set the minimum current required to activate the

Hoist Up proportional valve. To set this value, move the
Imin Up
Joystick Up to about 15%. Increase the value until the winch
starts to move.
This is to set the maximum current allowed to control the

Hoist Up proportional valve. To set this value, move the
Imax Up
Joystick Up to maximum. Increase the value until the winch
speed starts to saturate.

Hoist Down proportional valve. To set this value, move the
Imin Down
Joystick Down to about 15%. Increase the value until the
winch starts to move.

Hoist Down proportional valve. To set this value, move the
Imax Down
Joystick Down to maximum. Increase the value until the
winch speed starts to saturate.
This is to set the maximum allowable current to the

proportional valves. The value should be set 20 counts
Imax Solenoid
higher than the Imax Up or Imax Down, depending on
whichever is higher.
This is the acceleration time for the Hoist Up operation.

Adjust this value until a smooth operation is achieved.
Up Rise Time
CAUTION!!! The acceleration time shall not be less than
1.5 seconds.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
12
___________________________________________________________________________
This is the deceleration time for the Hoist Up operation.

Up Fall Time
CAUTION!!! The deceleration time shall not be less than
1.5 seconds.
This is the acceleration time for the Hoist Down operation.

Down Rise Time
1.5 seconds.
This is the deceleration time for the Hoist Down operation.

Down Fall Time
1.5 seconds.
This is the percentage of maximum speed allowed for Fine

Fine Control %
Control.
This is the time required for the pump to go back to its initial
displacement. To set this value, first set the Fall Time for Up
Swivel Time and Down to ZERO. Preset the value to 1.0. Move the
Joystick to 100% and release the joystick, while decreasing
the value, until “Bang” occurs.
MOTOR (Only applicable for variable speed motor)
This is to set the maximum current required to control the

Ivg-min
Main Hoist Hydraulic Motor.

Ivg-max
Main Hoist Hydraulic Motor.
This is to set the maximum current to the proportional

Imax Solenoid valves. The value should be set 20 counts higher than the
Ivg-min.
This is the acceleration and deceleration time for the

Ramp Time
Hydraulic Motor.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
13
___________________________________________________________________________
To set Ivg-max,
1. Set the Imax Solenoid to 600.
2. Set Ivg Maximum and Ivg Minimum to 100.
3. Pull the joystick back to 100% and hold in position.
4. Check the pressure at the motor x-port.
5. Increase Ivg Minimum until 13 bar pressure is achieved at the motor x-port.
6. Transfer the value obtained in Ivg Minimum into Ivg Maximum.
7. Save data.
8. Repeat steps 1 to 6 for hoist II and luff. (If applicable)
To set Ivg-min,
1. Set Ivg Minimum to be same value of Ivg Maximum (Ivg-min = Ivg-max).
2. Pull the joystick back to 100% and hold in position.
3. Slowly increase the value of Ivg Min until achieve XY bar on the x-port of the motor.
4. Save data.
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 for hoist II and luff. (If applicable)
To get the XY bar for Ivg-min, refer to Winch Calculation.
Start of control § 13 bar (Ivg-max)

Min Load, Max Speed = Start of Control + (¨10/Q motor) x Q Winch Calculation
i.e 13 + (10bar/200cc) x 120cc = 19 bar @ Ivg-min
LIMIT SETTINGS
Here the authorized personnel can set the limits for the Main Hoist.
Encoder Counts This shows the current encoder counts.
This is the zero reference point for the encoder limit. To set
this limit, Boom to 75° and bring the hook to the Boom Pivot
Point Level. Press SET button until it changes color (from
Zero Reference Dark Green to a Light-up Green) to store the current
encoder counts.
NOTE: It is advisable to check Up Limit and Hook Parking
Limit when Zero Reference is reset.
This is the Hoist Up Deceleration limit point. When the limit

is reached, the hoist speed will reduced to the percentage
speed set in the Pump Section. To set this limit, Boom to
Up Deceleration around 15° and brings the hook to the level where the Up
Deceleration is required. Press SET button until it changes
color (from Dark Green to a Light-up Green) to store the
current encoder counts.
This is the Hoist Up limit point. When this limit is reached,

the Hoist Up operation will be disabled. To set this limit,
Boom to around 15° and brings the hook to the level where
Up Limit
the Up Limit is required. Press SET button until it changes
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
14
___________________________________________________________________________
This is the Hoist Down Deceleration limit point. When this

limit is reached, the hoist speed will reduce to the
percentage speed set in the Pump Section. To set this limit,
Down Deceleration Boom to 75° and bring the hook to the level where the Down
Deceleration is required. Press SET button until it changes
This is the Hoist Down limit point. When this limit is reached,
the Hoist Down operation will be disabled. To set this limit,
Boom to 75° and bring the hook to the level where the Down
Down Limit
Limit is required. Press SET button until it changes color
(from Dark Green to a Light-up Green) to store the current
encoder counts.
PRESSURE (MPa)
Here the authorized personnel can key in the Anti-Cavitation Pressure, Low Boost Pressure, Up
Maximum Pressure and Down Maximum Pressure for the main hoist operation.
NOTE:
Refer to Crane Specification.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
15
___________________________________________________________________________
3.1.2 Fly Hoist Settings
Figure 3c: Fly Hoist Settings Screen
If Fly Hoist is installed on the crane, perform steps accordingly as stated in section 3.1.1 (Main Hoist
Setting – Port and Starboard)
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
16
___________________________________________________________________________
3.2 Slew
3.2.1 Slew Settings
Figure 3d: Slew Settings Screen
PUMP
This screen will appear if the SLEW SETUP button is pressed in the Service Menu Screen. To reset
the pressure memory, press the PRESSURE MEMORY RESET button. After every data had been
entered, press the SAVE button until it changes color (from Dark Green to a Light-up Green) to save
the new values into the EEPROM.
This is the time for the brake to be disengaged after the

Brake Time
joystick has returned to neutral position.

Slew Left proportional valve. To set this value, move the
Imin Left
Joystick Left to about 15%. Increase the value until the
crane starts to slew.

Slew Left proportional valve. To set this value, move the
Imax Left
Joystick Left to maximum. Increase the value until the slew

Slew Right proportional valve. To set this value, move the
Imin Right
Joystick Right to about 15%. Increase the value until the
crane starts to slew.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
17
___________________________________________________________________________

Slew Right proportional valve. To set this value, move the
Imax Right
Joystick Right to maximum. Increase the value until the slew

Imax Solenoid
higher than the Imax Left or Imax Right, depending on
This is the acceleration time for the Slew Left operation.

Left Rise Time
1.5 seconds.
This is the deceleration time for the Slew Left operation.

Left Fall Time
1.5 seconds.
This is the acceleration time for the Slew Right operation.

Right Rise Time
1.5 seconds.
This is the deceleration time for the Slew Right operation.

Right Fall Time
1.5 seconds.

Fine Control %
Control.
displacement. To set this value, first set the Fall Time for
Swivel Time Left and Right to ZERO. Preset the value to 1.0. Move the
For this page, the Limit Setting Section is not applicable for this operation.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
18
___________________________________________________________________________
3.3 Luff
3.3.1 Luff Settings
Figure 3e: Luff Setting Screen
PUMP
This screen will appear if the LUFF SETUP button is pressed in the Service Menu Screen. To reset
the pressure memory, press the PRESSURE MEMORY RESET button. After every data had been
entered, press the SAVE button until it changes color (from Dark Green to a Light-up Green) to save
the new values into the EEPROM.
This is the value used to load the pressure memory. Lift the
maximum Safe Working Load (SWL) about 2 meters above
the ground then stop. Reduce load count to ZERO. Put
Load Counts joystick to 30% up without pressing pressure memory reset.
Slowly increase load count value until motion of drum is
achieved. Press SAVE button until it changes color (from
Dark Green to a Light-up Green) to save data.
This is the ramp time for loading pressure memory. Load

Time value is depending of the load count value. The higher
Load Time the load count, the higher the load time. Load time increase
linearly with load count. Choose a suitable Load Time
(Recommended >2.0)

Luff Up proportional valve. To set this value, move the
Imin Up
starts to move.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
19
___________________________________________________________________________

Luff Up proportional valve. To set this value, move the
Imax Up
Joystick Up to maximum. Increase the value until the winch

Luff Down proportional valve. To set this value, move the
Imin Down
starts to move.

Luff Down proportional valve. To set this value, move the
Imax Down
Joystick Down to maximum. Increase the value until the
winch speed starts to saturate.

Imax Solenoid
This is the acceleration time for the Luff Up operation. Adjust

this value until a smooth operation is achieved.
Up Rise Time
1.5 seconds.
This is the deceleration time for the Luff Up operation.

Up Fall Time
1.5 seconds.
This is the acceleration time for the Luff Down operation.

Down Rise Time
1.5 seconds.
This is the deceleration time for the Luff Down operation.

Down Fall Time
1.5 seconds.

Fine Control %
Control.
displacement. To set this value, first set the Fall Time for Up
Swivel Time and Down to ZERO. Preset the value to 1.0. Move the
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
20
___________________________________________________________________________
MOTOR (Only applicable for variable speed motor)
This is to set the maximum current required to control the

Ivg-min
Luff Hydraulic Motor.

Ivg-max
Luff Hydraulic Motor.
This is to set the maximum current to the proportional

Imax Solenoid valves. The value should be set 20 counts higher than the
Ivg-min.
This is the acceleration and deceleration time for the

Ramp Time
Hydraulic Motor.
Drum RPM This is the maximum allowable drum speed for luff.
LIMIT SETTINGS
Here the authorized personnel can set the limits for the Boom.
Encoder Counts This shows the current encoder counts.
This is the zero reference point for the encoder limit. To set
this limit, Boom to 45°. Press SET button until it changes
Zero Reference
This is the Boom Up Deceleration limit point. When this limit

is reached, the boom speed will be reduced to the
percentage speed set in the Limit Setting Section. To set
Up Deceleration this limit, Boom to angle where the Up Deceleration is
required. Press SET button until it changes color (from Dark
Green to a Light-up Green) to store the current encoder
counts.
This is the Boom Up limit point. When this limit is reached,

the Boom Up operation will be disabled. To set this limit,
Up Limit Boom to the point where the boom up limit is required. Press
SET button until it changes color (from Dark Green to a
Light-up Green) to store the current encoder counts.
This is the Boom Down Deceleration limit point. When this

limit is reached, the boom speed will reduce to the
percentage speed set in the Fine Tuning Section. To set this
Down Deceleration limit, Boom to the angle where the Down Deceleration is
counts.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
21
___________________________________________________________________________
This is the Boom Down limit point. When this limit is

reached, the Boom Down operation will be disabled. To set
this limit, Boom to the angle where the Down Limit is
Down Limit
counts.
PRESSURE (MPa)
Here the authorized personnel can key in the Anti-Cavitation Pressure, Low Boost Pressure, Up
Maximum Pressure and Down Maximum Pressure for the luff operation.
NOTE:
Refer to Crane Specification.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
22
___________________________________________________________________________
3.4 Emergency Powerpack

3.4.1 Emergency Powerpack Settings
Figure 3f: Emergency Powerpack Settings
PUMP
This screen will appear if the EMERGENCY POWERPACK SETTINGS button is pressed in the
Setting Page. To reset the pressure memory, press the PRESSURE MEMORY RESET button. After
every data had been keyed-in, press the SAVE button until it changes color (from Dark Green to a
Light-up Green) to save the new values into the EEPROM.

proportional valve. To set this value, move the Joystick Up
Imin Up
to about 15%. Increase the value until the winch starts to
move.

proportional valve. To set this value, move the Joystick Up
Imax Up
to maximum. Increase the value until the winch speed starts
to saturate.

proportional valve. To set this value, move the Joystick
Imin Down
Down to about 15%. Increase the value until the winch starts
to move.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
23
___________________________________________________________________________

proportional valve. To set this value, move the Joystick
Imax Down
Down to maximum. Increase the value until the winch speed
starts to saturate.

Imax Solenoid
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
24
___________________________________________________________________________
4.0 Configuration Screen
Figure 4: Configuration Screen
Here, the authorized personnel should define the current crane configuration.
Port Main Hoist Fall(s)

This specifies the number of falls on the Main Hoist. Refer
Crane General Arrangement.
Stb Main Hoist Fall(s)
This specifies the number of falls on the Fly Hoist. If there is

Fly Hoist Fall(s)
no fly hoist installed, it should be set to "ZERO".
Boom Length This specifies the current boom length installed.
Port Main Hoist Line Pull

This specifies the maximum winch capacity of the Main
Hoist.
Stb Main Hoist Line Pull
This specifies the maximum winch capacity of the Fly Hoist.

Fly Hoist Line Pull If there is no Fly Hoist installed, it should be set it to
"ZERO".
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
25
___________________________________________________________________________
. 5.0 Sensor Settings
Figure 5: Sensors Settings & Speed Limits Screen
ENCODERS
Resolution This is the resolution of the encoder.
Gear Teeth This is the number of teeth of the drum.
Pinion Teeth This is the number of teeth of the pinion.
SPEED LIMITS
This is the percentage of speed limit where the over speed

Alarm (%)
alarm will be triggered. Default setting is set to 110%.
This is the percentage of speed limit where the operation will

Stop (%)
be halt due to over speeding. Default setting is set to 130%.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
26
___________________________________________________________________________
BOOM PARKING LIMITS
Boom Encoder Counts This value shows the Boom encoder counts.
Boom Parking Limit is set here. To set, select the relevant

selector, park the crane at the crane parking position then
press SET button until it changes color (from Dark Green to
Boom Parking Limit a Light-up Green).
NOTE: Before setting this, make sure all the limits for the
boom are set.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
27
___________________________________________________________________________
6.0 Crane Operation State Screen
Figure 6: Crane Operation State Screen
Lifting Mode Here the authorized personal should choose the Lifting
Mode of the crane. There are 3 types of modes to choose
from, ONBOARD, OFFBOARD and PERSONNEL mode.
Here the authorized personnel should choose the available

List Angle maximum list angle allowable for safe operation of the
crane.
Here the authorized personnel should choose the available

Sig. Wave Height significant wave height conditions allowed for safe operation
of the crane.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
28
___________________________________________________________________________
7.0 System Settings Screen
Figure 7: Hoist Line Pull Screen
Figure 7a: System Settings Screen
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
29
___________________________________________________________________________
Here, the authorized personnel should key in the available

Line Pull line pull (winch capacity) for Main Hoist (1) and Fly Hoist (1) (if
(1)
applicable). Refer to Load Chart.
Here the authorized personnel should key in the available

List Angle maximum list angle allowable for safe operation of the
crane.
Here the authorized personnel should key in the available

Sig. Wave Height significant wave height conditions allowed for safe operation
of the crane.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
30
___________________________________________________________________________
8.0 Crane Geometry Screen
Figure 8: Crane Geometry Screen
It is advisable only authorized personnel are to change the settings on this page. Incorrect setting will
affect the functionality of the crane.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
31
___________________________________________________________________________
9.0 Load Cell Calibration Screen
Figure 9a: Port Main Load Cell Calibration Screen
Figure 9b: Stb Main Load Cell Calibration Screen
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
32
___________________________________________________________________________
Figure 9c: Fly Hoist Load Cell Calibration Screen
On this screen, the authorized personnel can calibrate the load cell.
This is the Zero Reference setting for the load cell. To set
this value, boom up to minimum radius, lift the hook up to
Zero Reference
crane deck level, and press the SET button until it changes
color (from Dark Green to a Light-up Green).
This is the load reference setting for the load cell. To set this
value, with boom at minimum radius, lift a known calibrated
load, and press the SET button until it changes color (from
Set Current Load
Dark Green to a Light-up Green). The calibrated load has to
be at least 85% of the maximum safe working load of the
crane.
This is the weight of the known calibrated load used to

calibrate the load reference of the load cell. Key in the
Test Load (T)
weight of the known calibrated load and press SET button
until it changes color (from Dark Green to a Light-up Green).
This is the allowable Differential Error between the two

Differential Error (T) strain gauge sensors in the Load Cell. Key in the allowable
(If applicable) error and press SET button until it changes color (from Dark
Green to a Light-up Green).
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
33
___________________________________________________________________________
Load Reading (T) This is the load reading from the controller after calibration.
This value shows the raw data of the load cell from the
Load Pin Data
controller.
NOTE:
Load Cell 1 is for the Port Main Hoist, while the Load Cell 2 is for the Fly Hoist and Load Cell 3 is for
the Starboard Main Hoist; if fitted.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
34
___________________________________________________________________________
10.0 SLI Setting Screen
Figure 10: SLI Setting Screen
An audible warning will be present when the SLI Intermittent

SLI Intermittent Alarm Limit
Alarm Limit is triggered. No motion cut.
A continuous audible alarm will be present when the SLI

SLI Continuous Alarm Limit
Continuous Alarm Limit is triggered. No motion cut.
The crane motion will be cut out when the SLI Motion Cut
SLI Motion Cut Limit
Limit is reached. A continuous audible alarm will be present.
This value shows the boom angle of the crane. (Positive

means above the deck level and negative means below
deck level)
This value shows the chart number that has been selected
for each of the particular hoist.
This value shows the Hook Radius of either the Main Hoist
or the Fly Hoist.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
35
___________________________________________________________________________
This value shows the maximum allowable load of either the

Main Hoist or the Fly Hoist at that particular radius.
If there is no value shown, that means an invalid load chart
is selected. Please check crane operation state
configuration.
This value shows the actual load that is being lifted by the
crane.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
36
___________________________________________________________________________
11.0 Date/Time Setting Screen
Figure 11: Date & Time Settings Screen
When the DATE&TIME SET Button is pressed, this screen will appear on the display.
Here, the operator can change the date and time data on the system.
NOTE:
To change the settings, pressed on the values, and a keypad will appear. All data must be set again,
even though only one data is to be changed. After all data is set, press the SAVE button to save.
Time format is military style. I.e. 24:00 = 12.00 AM.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
37
___________________________________________________________________________
12.0 Alarm List Screen
Figure 12: Alarm List Screen
Start Button
Press this button to activate the
Alarm List Buttons.
Scroll Up Button
Press this button to scroll up alarm
list.
Scroll Down Button

Press this button to scroll down
alarm list.
General Buttons
Save to CF Button
Press this button save the alarm
lists to CF Card.
Increase
Press this button to increase the file
number.
Decrease
Press this button to decrease the
file number.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
38
___________________________________________________________________________
Previous Page
General Buttons Press this button to go to the
previous page.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
39
___________________________________________________________________________
13.0 Password and Access Code Change

13.1 Password Change Screen
Figure 13: Password Change Screen
When the CHANGE button on the Password Screen is pressed, this screen will be displayed. To
change the existing password, the technician is required to enter the first two existing passwords and
the first two new passwords. Then press SET.
___________________________________________________________________________
LINEC-LE7003-SM-2.0
10-5
10.2 SIEMENS Electric Motors

10-6
800KW -1LA8- Electric Motor – Main Powerpack

7KUHHSKDVHLQGXFWLRQPRWRU
1FRPSDFW

7\SH/$$&=
1$

3URGXFW,QIRUPDWLRQ
,QVWDOODWLRQ,QVWUXFWLRQVವ
h-compact

6KDIWFHUWLILFDWHV

)XUWKHUFHUWLILFDWHV

0DFKLQHGRFXPHQWV

1RWHV
7KUHHSKDVHLQGXFWLRQPRWRU
1FRPSDFW
/$
3URGXFW,QIRUPDWLRQ
,QVWDOODWLRQ,QVWUXFWLRQV
7KLVGRFXPHQWDWLRQSHUWDLQVWR
1$
7\SH/$$&=

(GLWLRQ
/HJDOLQIRUPDWLRQ
:DUQLQJQRWLFHV\VWHP
7KLVPDQXDOFRQWDLQVQRWLFHV\RXKDYHWRREVHUYHLQRUGHUWRHQVXUH\RXUSHUVRQDOVDIHW\DVZHOODVWRSUHYHQW
GDPDJHWRSURSHUW\7KHQRWLFHVUHIHUULQJWR\RXUSHUVRQDOVDIHW\DUHKLJKOLJKWHGLQWKHPDQXDOE\DVDIHW\DOHUW
V\PEROQRWLFHVUHIHUULQJRQO\WRSURSHUW\GDPDJHKDYHQRVDIHW\DOHUWV\PERO7KHVHQRWLFHVVKRZQEHORZDUH
JUDGHGDFFRUGLQJWRWKHGHJUHHRIGDQJHU
'$1*(5
LQGLFDWHVWKDWGHDWKRUVHYHUHSHUVRQDOLQMXU\Z
ZLOOUHVXOWLISURSHUSUHFDXWLRQVDUHQRWWDNHQ

:$51,1*
LQGLFDWHVWKDWGHDWKRUVHYHUHSHUVRQDOLQMXU\P
PD\UHVXOWLISURSHUSUHFDXWLRQVDUHQRWWDNHQ

&$87,21
ZLWKDVDIHW\DOHUWV\PEROLQGLFDWHVWKDWPLQRUSHUVRQDOLQMXU\FDQUHVXOWLISURSHUSUHFDXWLRQVDUHQRWWDNHQ

&$87,21
ZLWKRXWDVDIHW\DOHUWV\PEROLQGLFDWHVWKDWSURSHUW\GDPDJHFDQUHVXOWLISURSHUSUHFDXWLRQVDUHQRWWDNHQ

127,&(
LQGLFDWHVWKDWDQXQLQWHQGHGUHVXOWRUVLWXDWLRQFDQRFFXULIWKHFRUUHVSRQGLQJLQIRUPDWLRQLVQRWWDNHQLQWR
DFFRXQW
,IPRUHWKDQRQHGHJUHHRIGDQJHULVSUHVHQWWKHZDUQLQJQRWLFHUHSUHVHQWLQJWKHKLJKHVWGHJUHHRIGDQJHUZLOO
EHXVHG$QRWLFHZDUQLQJRILQMXU\WRSHUVRQVZLWKDVDIHW\DOHUWV\PEROPD\DOVRLQFOXGHDZDUQLQJUHODWLQJWR
SURSHUW\GDPDJH
4XDOLILHG3HUVRQQHO
7KHSURGXFWV\VWHPGHVFULEHGLQWKLVGRFXPHQWDWLRQPD\EHRSHUDWHGRQO\E\S SHUVRQQHOTXDOLILHGIRUWKHVSHFLILF
WDVNLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKHUHOHYDQWGRFXPHQWDWLRQIRUWKHVSHFLILFWDVNLQSDUWLFXODULWVZDUQLQJQRWLFHVDQG
VDIHW\LQVWUXFWLRQV4XDOLILHGSHUVRQQHODUHWKRVHZKREDVHGRQWKHLUWUDLQLQJDQGH[SHULHQFHDUHFDSDEOHRI
LGHQWLI\LQJULVNVDQGDYRLGLQJSRWHQWLDOKD]DUGVZKHQZRUNLQJZLWKWKHVHSURGXFWVV\VWHPV
3URSHUXVHRI6LHPHQVSURGXFWV
1RWHWKHIROORZLQJ
:$51,1*
6LHPHQVSURGXFWVPD\RQO\EHXVHGIRUWKHDSSOLFDWLRQVGHVFULEHGLQWKHFDWDORJDQGLQWKHUHOHYDQWWHFKQLFDO
GRFXPHQWDWLRQ,ISURGXFWVDQGFRPSRQHQWVIURPRWKHUPDQXIDFWXUHUVDUHXVHGWKHVHPXVWEHUHFRPPHQGHG
RUDSSURYHGE\6LHPHQV3URSHUWUDQVSRUWVWRUDJHLQVWDOODWLRQDVVHPEO\FRPPLVVLRQLQJRSHUDWLRQDQG
PDLQWHQDQFHDUHUHTXLUHGWRHQVXUHWKDWWKHSURGXFWVRSHUDWHVDIHO\DQGZLWKRXWDQ\SUREOHPV7KHSHUPLVVLEOH
DPELHQWFRQGLWLRQVPXVWEHDGKHUHGWR7KHLQIRUPDWLRQLQWKHUHOHYDQWGRFXPHQWDWLRQPXVWEHREVHUYHG
7UDGHPDUNV
$OOQDPHVLGHQWLILHGE\pDUHUHJLVWHUHGWUDGHPDUNVRIWKH6LHPHQV$*7KHUHPDLQLQJWUDGHPDUNVLQWKLV
SXEOLFDWLRQPD\EHWUDGHPDUNVZKRVHXVHE\WKLUGSDUWLHVIRUWKHLURZQSXUSRVHVFRXOGYLRODWHWKHULJKWVRIWKH
RZQHU
'LVFODLPHURI/LDELOLW\
:HKDYHUHYLHZHGWKHFRQWHQWVRIWKLVSXEOLFDWLRQWRHQVXUHFRQVLVWHQF\ZLWKWKHKDUGZDUHDQGVRIWZDUH
GHVFULEHG6LQFHYDULDQFHFDQQRWEHSUHFOXGHGHQWLUHO\ZHFDQQRWJXDUDQWHHIXOOFRQVLVWHQF\+RZHYHUWKH
LQIRUPDWLRQLQWKLVSXEOLFDWLRQLVUHYLHZHGUHJXODUO\DQGDQ\QHFHVVDU\FRUUHFWLRQVDUHLQFOXGHGLQVXEVHTXHQW
HGLWLRQV
6LHPHQV$* &RS\ULJKWk6LHPHQV$*

,QGXVWU\6HFWRU ࿕ 7HFKQLFDOGDWDVXEMHFWWRFKDQJH
3RVWIDFK
151%(5*
*(50$1<

7DEOHRIFRQWHQWV

6KDIWFHUWLILFDWHV
3ODQRIWHVWSURFHGXUH
6KDIWLQVSHFWLRQFHUWLILFDWH
8OWUDVRQLFWHVWUHSRUW
&HUWLILFDWHRIPDUNLQJWUDQVIHU
6XUIDFHFUDFNH[DPLQDWLRQFHUWLILFDWH
)XUWKHUFHUWLILFDWHV
/LFHQFHGRFXPHQWV
0DFKLQHGRFXPHQWV
5DWLQJSODWH
'LPHQVLRQDOGUDZLQJ
1RWHV
1$
3URGXFW,QIRUPDWLRQ1FRPSDFW/$$&=

6KDIWFHUWLILFDWHV
3ODQRIWHVWSURFHGXUH
1$
6KDIWFHUWLILFDWHV
3ODQRIWHVWSURFHGXUH
1$
6KDIWFHUWLILFDWHV
1$
6KDIWFHUWLILFDWHV
1$
6KDIWFHUWLILFDWHV
1$
6KDIWFHUWLILFDWHV
1$
6KDIWFHUWLILFDWHV
1$

)XUWKHUFHUWLILFDWHV
/LFHQFHGRFXPHQWV
1$
)XUWKHUFHUWLILFDWHV
/LFHQFHGRFXPHQWV
1$
)XUWKHUFHUWLILFDWHV
/LFHQFHGRFXPHQWV
1$

0DFKLQHGRFXPHQWV
5DWLQJSODWH
1$
0DFKLQHGRFXPHQWV
5DWLQJSODWH
1$
0DFKLQHGRFXPHQWV
'LPHQVLRQDOGUDZLQJ
'LPHQVLRQDOGUDZLQJ
1$

1RWHV
1$
1RWHV
1RWHV
1$
1RWHV
1$
1RWHV
1$
$$8/$$&=$$8/$$&=$$
8/$$&=$$8/$$&=$$
8/$$&=$$8/$$&=$$0$66%,/'/$
%$)%$8358())2/*(3/$1$%6

*000129908900001001EN01*
HQ86
Industry Sector, DT
6LHPHQV$*,'7/',2(03RVWIDFK1¾UQEHUJ 1DPH :HUQHU6SDFKP¾OOHU

BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB

'HSDUWPHQW /',2(0
7HO
,'7/'/067& )D[
6DPPHOSRVWIDFK67& (PDLO ZHUQHUVSDFKPXHOOHU#VLHPHQVFRP
9RJHOZHLKHUVWUD¡H 2XUUHI
'DWH
'1¾UQEHUJ
'RFXPHQWDWLRQIRU/$$&=
<RXURUGHUQR
$/1(&&118/'(
6W:DQU&'6W:DQU3ULQW

'HDU6LU0DGDP

0DQ\WKDQNVIRU\RXURUGHUWKHGRFXPHQWDWLRQIRUZKLFKLVHQFORVHG

<RXUVYHU\WUXO\

:HUQHU6SDFKP¾OOHU
*000129908900001001EN01*
10-7
110KW -1LG4 - Electric Motor – Emergency Powerpack

Drehstrommotoren 1LG4 1LG6
Three-Phase Motors
Moteurs triphasés 1LP4 1LP6
Motores trifásicos 1PP4 1PP6
Motori trifasi
Trefasmotorer
TĜífázové motory
Ɍɪɟɯɮɚɡɧɵɟ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɢ
Driefase motoren
Betriebsanleitung / Instructions Bestell-Nr./Order No.: 35037000000057
Ausgabe / Edition N14-1006 DEUTSCH/ENGLISH/FRANCAIS/ESPANNOL/ITALIANO/SVENSKA/ýESKY/ɉɈ ɊɍɋɋɄɂ/NEDERLANDS
BG 180M ... 315L

Baugrößen (BG)
Frame sizes (BG)
Désignation de carcasse (BG)
TamaĖos constuctivos (BG)
Grandezze (BG)
Storlekar (BG)
Konstrukþní velikosti (BG)
Ʉɨɧɫɬɪɭɤɬɢɜɧɵɟ ɪɚɡɦɟɪɵ (BG)
Huisgrootte (BG)
Bauformen / Types of construction / Formes de construction / Formas constructivas / Forme costruttive / Monteringssätt / Konstrukþní tvary /
Ʉɨɧɫɬɪɭɤɬɢɜɧɵɟ ɮɨɪɦɵ / Bouwvormen
oder
or oder
ou or
o IM V 5 IM V 6 ou
oppure o
eller IM B 35
oppure
IM B 3 nebo eller IM B 34
IM B 5 nebo IM V 1 IM V 3
IM B 6 IM B 7 IM B 8
Fig. 1
Edition N14-1006 Bestell-Nr. / Order No. 35037000000057

© Siemens AG 2000 All Rights Reserved DEUTSCH/ENGLISH/FRANCAIS/ESPANNOL/ITALIANO/SVENSKA/ýESKY/ɉɈ ɊɍɋɋɄɂ/NEDERLANDS
Siemens AG
1
DEUTSCH / ENGLISH / FRANÇAIS / ESPAĕOL / ITALIANO / SVENSKA / ýESKY / ɉɈ ɊɍɋɋɄɂ / NEDERLANDS
Zum Transport von

WARNUNG Maschinensätzen (z. B. Getriebe-,
Allgemeine Hinweise
Gebläseanbauten, ...) nur die dafür vorgesehenen
Zu beachten sind die Angaben Hebeösen bzw. -zapfen benutzen! Maschinensätze dürfen
WARNUNG und Anweisungen in allen nicht durch Anhängen an den Einzelmaschinen gehoben
gelieferten Betriebs- und sonstigen Anleitungen. Dies ist werden! Auf Tragfähigkeit dieser Hebeeinrichtung achten!
zur Vermeidung von Gefahren und Schäden unerläßlich!
Die Wälzlager sollten neu gefettet bzw. erneuert werden,
Eine zusätzliche Sicherheitsinformation (gelb) liegt bei, die wenn die Zeit von der Lieferung bis zur Motorinbetriebnahme
ergänzende Angaben zur Sicherheit für elektrische bei günstigen Bedingungen (Aufbewahrung in trockenen,
Maschinen enthält. Diese Sicherheitsinformation ist staub- und erschütterungsfreien Räumen) mehr als 3 Jahre
deshalb eine Ergänzung für alle weiteren noch gelieferten beträgt. Bei ungünstigen Bedingungen verringert sich diese
Betriebs- und sonstigen Anleitungen. Zeit wesentlich.
Weiterhin sind die jeweils geltenden nationalen, örtlichen Ggf. ist der Isolationswiderstand der Wicklung zu überprüfen,
und anlagespezifischen Bestimmungen und s. Abschnitt 2.5 .
Erfordernisse zu berücksichtigen!
Sonderausführungen und Bauvarianten können in 2.2 Aufstellung
technischen Details abweichen! Bei eventuellen
Unklarheiten wird dringend empfohlen, unter Angabe von Eingeschraubte Hebeösen sind nach dem Aufstellen
Typbezeichnung und Fabriknummer beim Hersteller festanzuziehen oder zu entfernen!
rückzufragen, oder die Instandhaltungsarbeiten von einem Bei Motoren mit Wellenende nach oben oder unten (z.B.
der SIEMENS - Servicezentren durchführenzulassen. IMV5, IMV6 - s. Fig. 1) muß gewährleistet sein, daß kein
Wasser in das obere Lager eindringen kann.
Das Klemmenkastenoberteil kann bei einem Klemmenbrett
HINWEIS: Fig. 2 ... (Ersatzteile) s. Anhang auf Seite 35-36 mit 6 Anschlußklemmen um 4x90 Grad und bei einem
Klemmenbrett mit 9 Anschlußklemmen um 180 Grad gedreht
1 Beschreibung werden.
1.1 Anwendungsbereich Laufruhe
Stabile Fundamentgestaltung oder An- und
Die Motoren können in staubiger oder feuchter Umgebung Einbauverhältnisse, genaues Ausrichten der Motoren sowie
aufgestellt werden. Die Isolierung ist tropenfest. Bei ein gut ausgewuchtetes Abtriebselement sind Voraussetzung
sachgemäßer Lagerung oder sachgemäßer Aufstellung im für einen ruhigen schwingungsarmen Lauf. Vor Beginn der
Freien sind normalerweise gegen Witterungseinflüsse keine Montagearbeiten sind die Motorauflageflächen des
besonderen Schutzmaßnahmen an den Motoren notwendig. Fundamentes auf Ebenheit und Schmutzfreiheit zu prüfen.
Meßflächenschalldruckpegel bei 50Hz (DIN EN 21 680 Teil Um ein Verspannen der Motorfüße zu vermeiden, darf die
1) Gesamtebenheit der Auflageflächen 0,2 mm nicht
1LG4, 1LG6 ca. 60 bis 76 dB(A) überschreiten. Die meist aufgeschweißten Auflageflächen
müssen durch Schleifen, Feilen oder Schaben auf die
1.2 Aufbau und Arbeitsweise geforderte Ebenheit gebracht werden. Sind Unterlegbleche
zur Höheneinstellung und zur Vermeidung von
1LG4- und 1LG6- Motoren sind in Grundausführung Verspannungen der Motoren notwendig, sind diese aus einem
eigengekühlt mit Lüfter. Wahlweise können 1LG.-Motoren ebenen gewalzten Material in ausreichender Größe
zudem ohne Eigenlüfter (z.B. als Lüftermotoren mit Kühlung herzustellen. Ggf. kann ein komplettes Auswuchten des
durch einen auf dem Wellenende angeordneten Sonderlüfter) Läufers mit dem Abtriebselement erforderlich sein.
oder fremdbelüftet (Option G17) ausgeführt werden. 1PP4
und 1PP6-Motoren sind selbstgekühlt ohne Lüfter. 2.3 Wuchtung, Abtriebselemente
Bei Fußmotoren sind die Füße am Motorgehäuse
angegossen, wahlweise können angeschraubte Füße geliefert Das Auf- und Abziehen von Abtriebselementen (Kupplungen
werden.(Option K11 / s. Fig. 2). Riemenscheiben, Zahnrad, ...) ist mit einer geeigneten
Vorrichtung auszuführen (Fig. 7).
Ein Umsetzen der Füße am Motorgehäuse, z. B. zwecks
Veränderung der Klemmenkastenlage, ist bei den Optionen Standardmäßig sind die Läufer mit einer halben Paßfeder
K09, K10 und K11 möglich. Die dafür notwendigen Bohrungen dynamisch ausgewuchtet.
und Flächen sind bereits entsprechend bearbeitet. Die Art der Auswuchtung wird am AS-Wellenende
Bei Motoren mit Bremse (z.B. Option G26) ist zusätzlich die (Wellenstirnseite) markiert:
Bremsenbetriebsanleitung mit zu beachten! (H = Auswuchtung mit halber Paßfeder)
(F = Auswuchtung mit ganzer Paßfeder-
Diese Hinweise gelten ergänzend zur Betriebsanleitung des
Sonderausführung)
entsprechenden Motortyps. Sie gelten nicht für Motoren in
EEx e – Ausführungen. Bei Montage des Abtriebselementes auf entsprechende
Auswuchtart achten!
2 Betrieb Auswuchtung mit halber Paßfeder
Alle Arbeiten nur im elektrisch Bei Abtriebselementen mit einem Längenverhältnis von
spannungslosen Zustand der Nabenlänge l zur Länge des Wellenendes lM < 0,8 und
WARNUNG Drehzahlen > 1500/min können Laufruhestörungen auftreten
Anlage durchführen.
(s. Fig. 8).
2.1 Transport, Lagern Ggf. ist eine Nachwuchtung vorzunehmen, z. B. ist der aus
dem Abtriebselement und über der Wellenkontur
Beim Transport sind alle vorhandenen Hebeösen am Motor herausragende Teil der Paßfeder TP abzuarbeiten.
zu benutzen!

Siemens AG
2
Zu beachten sind die allgemein Es ist die Ursache hierfür zu ermitteln, ggf. sind die
WARNUNG erforderlichen Maßnahmen für den Wicklungen oder Wicklungsteile instand zusetzen, zu reinigen
Berührungsschutz der Abtriebselemente. oder zu trocknen.
Wird ein Motor ohne Abtriebselement in Betrieb
genommen, so ist die Paßfeder gegen Herausschleudern 2.6 Inbetriebnahme
zu sichern.
HINWEIS: Bei stark ungleichförmigem Drehmoment (z.B.
Antrieb eines Kolbenkompressors) wird ein nicht-
2.4 Elektrischer Anschluß sinusförmiger Motorstrom erzwungen, dessen
Netzspannung und Netzfrequenz müssen mit den Daten auf Oberschwingungen sowohl eine unzulässige
dem Leistungsschild übereinstimmen. ±5% Spannungs- oder Netzbeeinflussung als auch unzulässig hohe
Frequenzabweichung sind ohne Leistungsherabsetzung elektromagnetische Störaussendungen bewirken können.
zulässig. Anschluß und Anordnung der Schaltbügel nach dem Bei Speisung durch Umrichter können hochfrequente
im Klemmenkasten befindlichen Schaltbild vornehmen. Strom- und Spannungsoberschwingungen in den
Motorzuleitungen zu elektromagnetischen Störaussendungen
Schutzleiter an diese Klemme anschließen.
führen. Deshalb wird die Verwendung abgeschirmter
Bei Anschlußklemmen mit Klemmbügeln (z. B. nach DIN Zuleitungen empfohlen.
46282) sind die Leiter so zu verteilen, daß auf beiden
Vor Inbetriebnahme ist zu prüfen ob:
Stegseiten etwa gleiche Klemmhöhen entstehen. Diese
- die Mindestisolationswiderstände eingehalten sind
Anschlußart erfordert daher, daß ein einzelner Leiter U-
förmig gebogen werden muß oder mit einem Kabelschuh - der Läufer ohne anzustreifen gedreht werden kann
anzuschließen ist (s. Fig. 3.1). Dies gilt auch für den - der Motor ordnungsgemäß montiert und ausgerichtet ist
Schutzleiteranschluß und den äußeren Erdungsleiter (s.
- die Abtriebselemente richtige Einstellbedingungen haben
Fig. 3.2) - grüngelb .
(z. B. Riemenspannung bei Riementrieb; ...) und das
Anziehdrehmomente für Schraubenverbindungen der Abtriebselement für die Einsatzbedingungen geeignet ist
elektrischen Anschlüsse - Klemmenbrettanschlüsse (außer
- alle elektrischen Anschlüsse sowie Befestigungsschrauben
Klemmenleisten) s. Fig. 4.
und Verbindungselemente nach Vorschrift angezogen und
ausgeführt sind
2.5 Überprüfung des
- der Schutzleiter ordnungsgemäß hergestellt ist
Isolationswiderstandes
- eventuell vorhandenen Zusatzeinrichtungen (Bremse,
Vor der Erstinbetriebnahme des Motors, nach längerer Tacho, Fremdlüfter) funktionsfähig sind
Lagerung oder Stillstandzeit (ca. 6 Monate), muß der - Berührungsschutzmaßnahmen für bewegte und
Isolationswiderstand der Wicklungen ermittelt werden. spannnungsführende Teile getroffen sind
Bei und unmittelbar nach der - die Grenzdrehzahl nmax (s. Leistungsschild) nicht
WARNUNG Messung haben die Klemmen
überschritten wird;
teilweise gefährliche Spannungen
und dürfen nicht berührt werden. HINWEIS: Die Grenzdrehzahl nmax ist die höchste kurzzeitig
Isolationswiderstand zulässige Betriebsdrehzahl. Es ist zu beachten, daß sich
- Der Mindestisolationswiderstand von neuen, gereinigten hierbei das Geräusch- und Schwingungsverhalten des
oder instandgesetzten Wicklungen gegen Masse beträgt 10 Motors verschlechtert sowie die Lagerwechselfrist
MegaOhm. verringert.
- Der kritische Isolationswiderstand Rkrit wird zunächst Nach dem Anbau der Motoren ist die
VORSICHT Bremse (falls vorhanden) auf ihre
errechnet. Berechnung erfolgt durch Multiplikation der
einwandfreie Funktion zu prüfen!
Bemessungsspannung UN, z. B. AC 0,69 kV, mit dem
konstanten Faktor (0,5 MegaOhm/kV): Diese Aufzählung kann nicht vollständig sein. Zusätzliche
Prüfungen sind gegebenenfalls nötig!
Rkrit = 0,69 kV * 0,5 MegaOhm/kV = 0,345 MegaOhm
Messung
Der Mindestisolationswiderstand der Wicklungen gegen
Masse wird mit 500 V Gleichspannung gemessen. Dabei soll
die Temperatur der Wicklungen 25°C ± 15°C betragen.
Der kritische Isolationswiderstand ist bei
Betriebstemperatur der Wicklung mit 500 V Gleichspannung
zu messen.
Überprüfung
Ist bei neuer, gereinigter oder instandgesetztem Motor, der
längere Zeit gelagert wurde oder still stand, der
Mindestisolationswiderstand der Wicklung gegen Masse
kleiner 10 MegaOhm, kann die Ursache hierfür Feuchte sein.
Die Wicklungen sind dann zu trocknen.
Nach längerer Betriebsdauer kann der
Mindestisolationswiderstand auf den kritischen
Isolationswiderstand absinken. Solange der gemessene
Wert den errechneten Wert des kritischen
Isolationswiderstandes nicht unterschreitet, darf der Motor
weiter betrieben werden. Wird dieser Wert unterschritten, ist
der Motor sofort abzuschalten.

Siemens AG
3
3 Instandhaltung Verunreinigungen säubern! Wälzlager reinigen bzw. erneuern

und neu fetten.
Sicherheitsmaßnahmen Hohlräume der Wälzlager bündig mit Schmierfett füllen!
Lagerdeckel bzw. Lagerschild bleibt ohne Fettfüllung, um eine
Vor Beginn jeder Arbeit am Motor Überfettung zu vermeiden.
WARNUNG oder Gerät, besonders aber vor Wälzlager gleichmäßig auf ca. 80-100°C erwärmen und
dem Öffnen von Abdeckungen aufziehen. Harte Schläge (z. B. mit einem Hammer, ...) sind
aktiver Teile, muß der Motor vorschriftsmäßig zu vermeiden.
freigeschaltet sein. Neben den Hauptstromkreisen ist
dabei auch auf eventuell vorhandene Zusatz- oder Eventuell abgenützte Dichtelemente (z. B. Wellendichtring,
Hilfsstromkreise zu achten. usw.), sind ebenfalls zu erneuern.
Die üblichen “5 Sicherheitsregeln” lauten hierbei z. B. Sind Radial-Wellendichtringe ohne Feder eingebaut, so muß
nach DIN VDE 0105: auch das Ersatzteil ohne Feder eingesetzt werden.
- Freischalten Nachschmiereinrichtung
Bei Motoren mit Nachschmiereinrichtung sind die Angaben
- Gegen Wiedereinschalten sichern auf dem Schmierschild zubeachten!
- Spannungsfreiheit feststellen Fugenabdichtung
- Erden und Kurzschließen Beim Zusammenbau von Maschinen der Schutzart IP 55 oder
- Benachbarte unter Spannung stehende Teile abdecken höher (s. Leistungsschild) müssen die blanken
oder abschranken. Montageflächen zwischen dem Motorgehäuse und den Lager-
schilden durch eine geeignete, nicht aushärtende
Diese zuvor genannten Maßnahmen dürfen erst dann Dichtungsmasse abgedichtet werden (z. B. Hylomar, Curil).
zurückgenommen werden, wenn die
Instandhaltungsarbeiten abgeschlossen sind und der Kunststofflüfter (BG180M ... 315L)
Motor vollständig montiert ist. Kunststofflüfter haben jeweils zwei angegossene Zungen, die
als Axialfixierung in die Ringnut der Welle einrasten. Vor dem
Abziehen des Lüfters müssen die beiden Zungen ausgerastet
HINWEIS: Verschlossenen Kondenswasseröffnungen, (Schraubendreher) und in dieser Position, z.B. durch
müssen von Zeit zu Zeit geöffnet werden, damit eventuell eingeschobene Beilagen, provisorisch festgehalten werden.
angesammeltes Kondenswasser abfließen kann. Die Lüfter haben in der Tragscheibe zwei Öffnungen zum
Durchführen einer Abziehvorrichtung, die an der Nabe sind
Kondenswasseröffnungen sind stets an der tiefsten Stelle des
angreift.
Motors anzuordnen!
Die Öffnungen sind bei Auslieferung mit einer dünnen
Lagerwechsel, Fettstandzeit, Fettsorte Kunststoffhaut verschlossen, und müssen durchstoßen
werden.
Die Fettstandzeit beträgt unter normalen Zum Abziehen wie auch zum Aufziehen muß grundsätzlich
Betriebsbedingungen, bei waagerechter Motoraufstellung, eine geeignete Vorrichtung verwendet werden.
Kühlmitteltemperatur bis 40°C und einer Motordrehzahl von Hammerschläge sind hierbei unbedingt zu vermeiden, um die
- 1500/min ca. 40 000 Betriebsstunden Lager zu schützen.
- 3000/min ca. 20 000 Betriebsstunden. Es ist auf das Einrasten der Schnappnasen in der Wellennut
Unabhängig von den Betriebsstunden sollte das Fett, wegen zu achten.
der Alterung, etwa alle 3 Jahre erneuert werden. Dazu sind
die Lager zu demontieren auszuwaschen und neu zu beffeten.
Bei Ausführung mit Nachschmierung sind die
Schmierschildangaben zu beachten.
Bei besonderen Betriebsbedingungen, z. B. senkrechter
Motoraufstellung, häufigem Betrieb bei der Grenzdrehzahl
nmax, großen Schwingungs- und Stoßbelastungen, häufigem
Reversierbetrieb, reduzieren sich die vorstehend genannten
Betriebsstunden wesentlich.
Die Motoren haben standardmässig Rillenkugellager der
Reihe 62 . . oder mit Option K36 Rillenkugellager der Reihe
63 . . mit einer Deckscheibe (ZC3 Ausführung).
Die Deckscheibe ist auf der dem Motorgehäuse (Ständer)
zugewandten Lagerseite angeordnet.
HINWEIS: Beim Lagerwechsel ist auf die Anordnung der
Deckscheibe und die Lagerluft zu achten, da bei
Sonderausführungen von der Standardausführung
abgewichen werden kann!
Fettsorte bei Standardmaschinen: (Fa. ESSO ) UNIREX
N3); Fettstandzeiten und Nachschmierfristen gelten nur in
Verbindung mit dieser Fettsorte.
Das Mischen von verschiedenen Fettsorten ist zu
vermeiden!
Motor im erforderlichen Umfang zerlegen. Wälzlager mit
geeigneter Vorrichtung abziehen (s. Fig. 6). Lagerstelle von

Siemens AG
4
For lifting machine sets (such as built-on gearboxes, fan

General note units), always use the lifting eyes or lifting pegs provided!
Machine sets may not be lifted by suspending the
The data and recommendations individual machines! Check the lifting capacity of the
WARNING specified in all the instructions hoist!
supplied, and in all other related instructions, must always
If, after delivery, the motors are stored for more than 3 years
be observed in order to avoid hazardous situations and
under favourable conditions (kept in a dry place free from dust
the risk of possible injury or damage.
and vibration) prior to commissioning, the bearings should be
These instructions are augmented by supplementary regreased respectively exchanged.
instructions (yellow), which contain additional information
Under unfavourable conditions, this period is considerably
on the safety measures for electrical machines and
shorter.
devices. The latter instructions thus augment all submitted
instructions and all other related instructions. If necessary, the insulation resistance of the winding should
be checked, see Section 2.5.
Furthermore, the pertinent national, local and plant-
specific regulations and requirements should be kept
in mind! 2.2 Installation
Special designs and other versions may vary in After installation, screwed-in lifting eyes should either be
technical details! If in doubt, be sure to contact the removed or tightened down.
manufacturer, quoting the type designation and serial In the case of motors with shaft end facing upwards or
number, or have maintenance work done by one of downwards, measures must be taken to ensure that no water
SIEMENS Service Centres. can penetrate into the upper bearing.
In the case of terminal boards with 6 terminals, the top part
NOTE: Fig. 2 ... (Spare Parts) see Annex page 35-36 of the terminal box can be turned through 4 x 90 degrees. For
terminal boards with 9 terminals, it can be turned through 180
degrees.
1 Description Quiet running
1.1 Application Stable foundations or mounting conditions, exact alignment of
The motors are suitable for operation in dusty and damp the motors and a well-balanced transmission element are
environments. The insulation is tropicalized. If they are essential for quiet vibration-free running. Before starting an
properly stored or installed outdoors, special weatherproofing assembly, the contact surfaces for engine assembly should be
measures are not usually required. cleaned and checked for flatness. To avoid stress in the
engine feet, the total flatness of the contact surfaces of the
Measuring-surface sound-pressure level at 50 Hz base should not exceed 0.2 mm. The contact surfaces to be
(DIN EN 21 680 Part 1) welded should be smoothed by grinding to reach the flatness
1LG4, 1LG6 approx. 51 to 76 dB(A) required. If sheets are used for padding to set an elevation
and avoid stress in the engine, they should be made from
1.2 Construction and mode of operation rolled stock of an appropriate size. It may also be necessary
The 1LG4 and 1LG6 motors are standardly self-ventilated with to balance the rotor with transfer element.
own fans. In addition to that the 1LG motors are optionally
either without an own fan (such as fan motors with cooling by 2.3 Balancing, transmission elements
means of a separate fan arranged on the shaft end) or with A suitable device should always be used for fitting and
external coolling (option G17). The 1PP4 and 1PP6 motors removing the transmission elements (coupling halves, pulleys,
are equipped with own cooling without any fan. pinions) (Fig. 7).
The feet on foot-mounted motors are cast integrally with the As standard, the rotors are dynamically balanced with the
motor casing or they can be optionally bolted onto the casing half featherkey inserted.
(option K11 / see fig. 2).
The type of balance is marked on the drive end of the shaft
Rearranging the feet (e.g. for changing the position of the (shaft end face):
terminal box) is possible for options K09, K10 and K11. The (H = balanced with half featherkey)
bores and surfaces, necessary for this purpose, are already (F = balanced with whole featherkey)
machined in a corresponding way.
When fitting the transmission element, keep the type of
Where motors with brake are concerned (e.g. option G26), balance in mind!
take into consideration also the brake operating instructions!
Balance with half featherkey
These instructions are valid in addition to the operating Poor running characteristics can arise in the case of
instructions of the given motor type. They are not valid for transmission elements having a length ratio of hub length l to
motors of EEx e series. length of shaft end lM < 0.8 and running at speeds of > 1500
rev/min (see Fig. 8). If necessary, re-balancing should be
2 Operation carried out, e.g. the part of the featherkey Tp that protrudes
Before starting any work on the from the transmission element and above the shaft surface
machine, be sure to isolate it from
WARNING should be cut back.
the power supply.
The usual measures should be taken
WARNING to guard transmission elements from
2.1 Transport, storage touch. If a motor is started up without transmission
The motors should always be lifted at both lifting eyes during element attached, the featherkey should be secured to
transport. prevent it being thrown out.
WARNING

Siemens AG
5
2.4 Electrical connection electromagnetic interference. That is why the use of shielded
cables is recommended.
Check to see that system voltage and frequency agree with
Before commissioning, check that:
the data given on the rating plate. Voltage or frequency
- The minimum insulation resistances are adhered to
deviations of ±5% (for 1ME6, frequency deviations of ±3%)
from the rated values are permitted without the necessity of - The rotor turns freely without rubbing
derating the output. Connection and arrangement of the - The motor is properly assembled and aligned
terminal links must agree with the diagram provided in the - The transmission elements are correctly adjusted (e.g. belt
terminal box. Connect the earthing conductor to the terminal tension) and the transmission element is suitable for the
with the marking . given operating conditions
Wherever terminal clips are used (for example, to DIN - All electrical connections, mounting screws and connecting
46282), arrange the conductors so the clips are virtually elements are properly tightened and fitted
level, i.e. not tilted when tightened. This method of - All protective conductors are properly installed
connection means that the ends of single conductors
- Any auxiliaries that may be fitted (brakes, speedometer,
must be bent in the shape of a U or be fitted with a cable
separate fan) are in working order
lug (see Fig. 3.1). This also applies to the green-yellow
protective earthing conductor and the outer earthing - Touch protection guards are installed around moving and
conductor (see Fig. 3.2). live parts
Please refer to Fig. 4 for tightening torques for terminal bolts - The maximum speed nmax (see rating plate) is not exceeded.
and nuts (except for terminal strips). NOTE: The maximum speed nmax is the highest operating
speed permitted for short periods. It should be kept in mind
2.5 Checking the insulation resistance that motor noise and vibration are worse at this speed, and
The insulation resistance of the windings must be measured bearing life is reduced.
prior to initial startup of the machine, after long periods of After motor installation, the brake, if
storage or standstill (approx. 6 months). CAUTION fitted, should be checked for proper
While the measurement is being functioning.
WARNING taken and immediately afterwards, It is not possible to formulate a complete check list. Other
some of the terminals carry dangerous voltages and must checks may also be necessary!
not be touched.
Insulation resistance 3 Maintenance
- The minimum insulation resistance of new, cleaned or
repaired windings with respect to ground is 10 MOhm. Safety precautions
- The critical insulation resistance Rcrit is calculated first by
multiplying the rated voltage UN, e.g. 0.69 kV AC, with the WARNING Before starting any work on the
constant factor (0.5 MOhm/kV): motor or other equipment, particularly before opening
Rcrit = 0.69 kV * 0.5 MOhm/kV = 0.345 MOhm. covers over live or moving parts, the motor must be
properly isolated from the power supply. Besides the
Measurement main circuits, any additional or auxiliary circuits that
The minimum insulation resistance of the windings to may be present must also be isolated.
ground is measured with 500 V DC. The winding temperature
should then be 25oC ± 15 oC. The usual “5 safety rules” (as set forth in DIN VDE
0105) are:
The critical insulation resistance should be measured with
500 V DC with the winding at operating temperature. - Isolate the equipment
Checking - Take effective measures to prevent reconnection
If the minimum insulation resistance of a new, cleaned or - Verify equipment is dead
repaired machine, which has been stored or at standstill for a - Earth and short-circuit
prolonged period of time, is less than 10 MOhm, this may be
due to humidity. The windings must then be dried. - Cover or fence off adjacent live parts
After long periods of operation, the minimum insulation The precautions listed above should remain in force
resistance may drop to the critical insulation resistance. As until all maintenance work is finished and the motor
long as the measured value does not fall below the calculated has been fully assembled.
value of the critical insulation resistance, the machine may
continue in operation. If it does, the machine must be stopped
NOTE: Where motors are fitted with closed condense water
immediately.
openings, these should be opened from time to time to allow
The cause must be determined, and the windings or winding any accumulated condense water to be drained away.
sections repaired, cleaned or dried as necessary.
Condense water openings should always be at the lowest
point of the motor!
2.6 Commissioning
NOTE: Where the torque is very uneven (the drive of a piston-
type compressor, for example), the inevitable result is a non-
sinusoidal motor current, whose harmonics can lead to
excessive system perturbation or excessive electromagnetic
interference.
In the case of converter-fed motors, high-frequency current or
voltage harmonics in the motor cables can give rise to

Siemens AG
6
Fitting new bearings, grease lifetime, type of openings may be covered by a film of plastic and later on they
should be punched.
grease
A suitable device should be used for pulling the fan off and
Under normal operating conditions, with horizontally mounted pressing it back on. Hammer blows must be avoided to protect
motors and coolant temperatures up to 40 °C, the grease the bearings.
lifetime should be:
- approx. 40,000 operating hours for speeds of 1500 rpm
- approx. 20,000 operating hours for speeds of 3000 rpm
Irrespective of the number of operating hours, the grease
should be renewed every 3 years because of ageing. In this
case the bearings should be dismounted, washed and newly
greased. The modifications with additional greasing are to be
maintained according to instructions on the lubricating data
plate.
In the case of motors operating under special conditions, such
as vertical motor position, frequent operation at maximum
speed nmax, heavy vibration, sudden load changes and
frequent reversing operation, the bearing should be changed
at considerably more frequent intervals than at the operating
hours stated above.
The motors are standardly equipped with radial ball bearings
of 62 … series or with option K36 - radial ball bearings of 63
… series which are provided with a cover plate (ZC3 version).
The cover plate is arranged on that side of the bearing facing
the frame (stator).
NOTE: Notice the cover plate arrangement and the bearing
clearance when changing the bearings because standard
modifications can differ from special motors!
The cover plate material should withstand temperatures from -
20 °C to +150 °C, e.g. polyacryl-rubber (ACM).
Type of grease for standard machines: (Fa. ESSO /
UNIREX N3); grease lifetime and lubrication intervals are valid
for this type of grease only.
Avoid mixing different types of grease!
Dismantle the motor to the extent necessary. Pull off the
bearing with a suitable device (see Fig. 6). Clean the journal!
Clean the bearing, or obtain a new one, and pack it with fresh
grease.
Pack the bearing cavities flush with grease! The cover plate or
endshield is kept free of grease to prevent overgreasing.
Heat bearings evenly to about 80-100 °C and press on. Heavy
blows (such as with a hammer, ...) should be avoided.
Any worn sealing elements (such as shaft sealing ring, etc.)
should also be renewed.
If springless radial shaft sealing rings are used, the
replacement sealing rings must also be of the springless type.
Regreasing device
In the case of motors with regreasing device, take note of the
information given on the lubricating data plate!
Joint sealing
When reassembling machines with degree of protection IP55
or higher (see rating plate), the bright surfaces of the joint
between the motor frame and the endshields should be
coated with a suitable non-hardening sealing compound (such
as Hylomar, Curil).
Plastic fan (frame sizes 180M ... 315L)
Plastic fans have two cast-on tabs that snap into the ring
groove on the shaft to prevent axial movement. Before the fan
is pulled off the shaft, these two tabs must be disengaged
(screwdriver) and held temporarily in that position, e.g. by
inserting packing. In the disc at the root of the blades, there
are two openings for the claws of an extractor whose central
screw should press against the hub. On delivery, these

Siemens AG
7
2 Fonctionnement
Remarque générale Avant toute intervention sur la
Afin d’assurer la protection des ATTENTION machine, vérifier qu’elle est bien
ATTENTION personnes et d’éviter tout dégât hors tension.
matériel, il est impératif de respecter les indications
contenues dans toutes les instructions de service et dans 2.1 Transport, manutention et stockage
tous les autres éléments de documentation transmis avec
Pour la manutention, utiliser tous les oeillets de levage
le produit.
disponibles sur le moteur.
Les instructions jointes (sur papier jaune) contiennent des
règles de sécurité applicables aux matériels électriques. ATTENTION Les groupes de machines (par ex.
Ces informations relatives à la sécurité doivent Ċtre motoréducteurs, motocompresseurs, etc.) ne doivent être
utilisées en complément de l’ensemble de la manutentionnés que par les oeillets ou chevilles
documentation. d’élingage prévus à cet effet. Ils ne doivent pas être levés
Toutes les prescriptions et exigences nationales, par les machines individuelles. La charge limite du
locales ou spécifiques à l’installation doivent Ċtre dispositif de levage doit être respectée.
respectées. Dans des conditions d’entreposage favorables (dans des
Les machines de réalisation spéciale (version, forme de locaux secs, à l’abri de poussières et de trépidations),
construction) peuvent différer quant aux détails regraisser ou remplacer les roulements à billes s’il s’est
techniques. En cas de doute à ce sujet, il est instamment écoulé plus de 4 ans entre la livraision et la mise en service
recommandé de contacter l’agence Siemens compétente du moteur. Dans des conditions défavorables, cette période
en indiquant la désignation de type et le numéro de sera plus courte en conséquence.
fabrication, ou de recourir aux centres de S.A.V. Ler cas échéant, contrôler la résistance d’isolement des
Siemens pour effectuer les travaux de maintenance. enroulements (voir chap. 2.5).
NOTA Fig. 2 ...(Pièces de rechange) voir appendice pages 2.2 Installation

35-36 Après l’installation, serrer ou enlever les oeillets de levage
vissés.
1 Description Sur les moteurs à bout d’arbre vers le haut ou vers le bas,
1.1 Domaine d’application prendre les dispositions pour protéger le palier supérieur
contre la pénétration d’eau.
Les moteurs peuvent être installés en atmosphère
poussiéreuse et humide. L’isolation est tropicalisée. La partie supérieure des boîtes à bornes avec plaques de
Normalement, aucune mesure de protection particulière bornes à six bornes peut être tournée de 4 x 90°; la partie
contre les intempéries n’est nécessaire si l’on entrepose supérieure des boîtes à bornes avec plaques de bornes à 9
correctement les moteurs ou si on les monte à l’extérieur bornes peut être tournée de 180°.
selon les règles de l’art. Comportement vibratoire
Niveau de pression acoustique à 50 Hz (DIN EN 21680, La stabilité des fondations et des supports de montage, la
fasc. 1) précision de l’alignement des machines et l’équilibrage soigné
1LG4, 1LG6 env. 51 à 76 dB(A) des organes de transmission sont les conditions d’un bon
comportement vibratoire. Avant le début des travaux de
montage, les surfaces d’appui de la fondation pour le montage
1.2 Constitution et mode de du moteur doivent être nettoyées et leur planéité contrôlée.
fonctionnement Afin d‘éviter une tension dans les bases de moteur, il faut
veiller à ce que la planéité totale des surfaces d’appui ne soit
Les moteurs 1LG4 et 1LG6 en version standard sont
pas supérieure à 0,2 mm. Les surfaces d’appui soudées
autorefroidis par ventilateur. En outre, les moteurs de la série
doivent être ajustées par rectification pour avoir une planéité
1LG peuvent etre soit sans le propre ventilateur (par ex. les
demandée. Si les bases de moteur sont doublées de tôles
moteurs de ventilateur refroidis par un ventilateur spécial
permettant d’ajuster la hauteur et d’empêcher la tension dans
monté au bout de l‘arbre), soit en exécution a refroidissement
le moteur, celles-ci doivent être fabriquées à partir d’une
étranger (option G17). Les moteurs 1PP4 et 1PP6 sont
matière laminée ayant une dimension correspondante. Il peut
autorefroidis sans ventilateur.
être éventuellement souhaitable d’assurer un équilibrage du
Les pattes des moteurs sont coulées sur la carcasse, il y a rotor par rapport à l’élément de transmission.
aussi une option a pattes vissées à la carcasse (option K11 /
voir Fig. 2). 2.3 Equilibrage, organes de transmission
Les options K09, K10 et K11 permettent le déplacement des
pattes sur la carcasse, par exemple pour modifier la position L’emmanchement et l’extraction des organes de transmission
de la réglette de bornes. Il y a déja les alésages nécessaires (demi-accouplements, poulies, roues demtées,...) devront se
et les surfaces sont déja usinées de façon correspondante. faire avec les dispositifs appropriés (Fig. 7).
Pour les moteurs avec frein (par exemple option G26), il Les moteurs en version standard ont fait l’objet d’un
convient d’observer en plus les instructions de service du équilibrage dynamique avec demi-clavette.
frein! Le type d‘équilibrage est indiquépar un marquage au bout de
Ces instructions sont valables en qualité d’un complément des l‘arbre (côté de la commande – au front de l‘arbre):
instructions de service du modele correspondant du moteur. (H = équilibrage avec demi-clavette)
Elles ne concernent pas les moteurs en version EEx e. (F = équilibrage avec clavette entière-version
spéciale)

Siemens AG
8
Lors du montage de l’organe de transmission, veiller à ce que La résistance critique d’isolement doit être mesurée avec
le type d’équilibrage de ce dernier corresponde à celui du une tension d’essai continue de 500 V lorsque les
rotor. enroulements ont atteint leur température en service.
Equilibrage avec demi-clavette Contrôle
Pour les organes de transmission dont le rapport de la La résistance minimale d’isolement par rapport à la masse
longueur de moyeu à la longueur lM du bout d’arbre est < 0,8 mesurée sur les enroulements de machines ayant été
et pour des vitesses > 1500 tr/min, il peut se produire des entreposées pendant une période prolongée, ou encore sur
balourds (voir Fig. 8). des enroulements neufs, nettoyés ou remis en état peut être
inférieure à 10 Mégohms en raison de l’humidité régnant au
Effectuer le cas échéant un rééquilibrage après avoir par
niveau des enroulements. Dans ce cas, sécher les
exemple éliminé l’excédent de matière TP de la clavette qui fait
enroulements.
saillie par rapport au moyeu et à l’arbre.
Après un service prolongé, la valeur de la résistance
Prendre les mesures habituelles de minimale d’isolement peut se rapprocher de la valeur de la
ATTENTION protection des personnes contre résistance critique d’isolement. Tant qu’elle ne tombe pas
l’accès aux parties en mouvement en-dessous de cette dernière, la machine peut rester en
au niveau des organes de transmission. Lorsqu’un fonctionnement. Dans le cas contraire, la machine doit être
moteur est mis en marche sans organes de transmission, arrêtée immédiatement.
prendre les mesures nécessaires afin d’empêcher que la
clavette ne soit projetée hors de l’arbre par force Il faudra alors en déterminer la cause, et éventuellement
centrifuge. remettre en état, nettoyer ou sécher les enroulements en
totalité ou en partie.
2.4 Raccordement électrique
2.6 Mise en service
Comparer la tension et la fréquence du réseau aux indications
de la plaque signalétique. Une variation de ±5 % de la tension NOTA : Un couple très irrégulier (par ex. lors de
ou de la fréquence (pour 1MA5/1MF5 de ±3 % de la l’entraînement d’un compresseur à piston) donne lieu à un
fréquence) est admissible sans déclassement en puissance. courant moteur non sinusoćdal dont les harmoniques sont
Réaliser le branchement et disposer les barrettes de couplage susceptibles de polluer exagérément le réseau d’alimentation
conformément au schéma situé dans la boîte à bornes. ou d’émettre des perturbations électromagnétiques.
Lors de l’alimentation par convertisseurs statiques, les
Raccorder le conducteur de protection à la borne .
câbles vers le moteur peuvent être le siège d’harmoniques de
Les conducteurs raccordés à des bornes à étrier doivent courant et de tension à haute fréquence qui sont la source
être disposés de telle sorte que l’étrier repose à la même d’émissions de perturbations électromagnétiques. Ceci oblige
hauteur de part et d’autre de la vis. Lorsqu’un seul à utiliser des câbles d’alimentation blindés.
conducteur est raccordé, il doit être plié en U autour de la
Avant mise en service, vérifier les points suivants :
vis ou être muni d’une cosse (voir Fig. 3.1). Il en est de
- la résistance d’isolement minimale est respectée,
même du conducteur de protection et le conducteur de
terre externe vert jaune (voir Fig. 3.2). - le rotor peut être tourné sans qu’il frotte,
Couples de serrage des vis et écrous des bornes de la plaque - le moteur est monté et aligné correctement,
à bornes (ne concerne pas les borniers), bvoir Fig. 4. - les organes de transmission sont correctement réglés (par
ex. tension de courroie) et bien choisis pour l’emploi,
2.5 Contrôle de la résistance d’isolement - les connexions électriques sont réalisées conformément
Avant la première mise en service de la machine, après un aux prescriptions, et les vis des bornes sont serrées aux
entreposage de longue durée ou encore une interruption de couples prescrits,
service prolongée (env. 6 mois), la résistance d’isolement des - le conducteur de protection est bien raccordé,
enroulements doit être mesurée. - les dispositifs additonnels éventuels (freins, compte-tours,
ventilateur externe) sont opérationnels,
ATTENTION Durant la mesure et
immédiatement après, les bornes - les mesures de protection des personnes contre l’accès aux
sont portées en partie à une tension dangereuse et ne parties actives (sous tension) ou en mouvement ont été
doivent pas être touchées. prises,
Résistance d’isolement - la vitesse limite nmax (lorsqu’elle est indiquée, voir plaque
- La résistance minimale d’isolement mesurée par rapport signalétique) ne doit pas être dépassée.
à la masse est de 10 Mégohms pour les enroulements
neufs, nettoyés ou remis en état. NOTA : la vitesse limite nmax est la vitesse de service
- La résistance critique d’isolement Rkrit se calcule en maximale temporaire. A cette vitesse, on observe une
dégradation du comportement sonore et vibratoire ainsi
multipliant la tension assignée UN, p.ex. 0,69 kV CA, par la qu’un raccourcissement de la période de renouvellement
constante 0,5Mégohms/kV : des roulements.
Rkrit = 0,69 kV * 0,5 Mégohms/kV = 0,345 Mégohms Après montage de la machine,
ATTENTION s’assurer que le frein (si présent)
Mesure
La résistance minimale d’isolement des enroulements par est en bon état de fonctionnement.
rapport à la masse est mesurée avec une tension d’essai La présente énumération ne peut être exhaustive. Des
continue de 500 V. contrôles supplémentaires peuvent s’avérer nécessaires.
La température des enroulements en cours d’essai doit être
de 25 ± 15°C.

Siemens AG
9
3 Maintenance durée d‘usage des graisses et délais de graissage sont

valables seulement pour ce type de graisse.
Dispositions générales concernant la Eviter de mélanger différentes sortes de graisses.
sécurité Démonter le moteur dans la mesure du nécessaire.
L’extraction des roulements doit être réalisée avec un
Avant toute intervention sur le dispositif approprié (voir Fig. 6). Nettoyer les portées de
ATTENTION moteur, notamment avant d’ouvrir paliers ! Nettoyer les roulements ou les remplacer et le
ou d’enlever les recouvrements regraisser.
des parties actives, il est indispensable de mettre le Remplir à ras de graisse les espaces libres des roulements !
moteur hors tension conformément aux règlements Ne pas mettre de graisse dans les couvercles de paliers ni
de sécurité. En plus des circuits principaux, ne pas dans les flasques-paliers pour éviter un excédent de graisse.
oublier les éventuels circuits auxiliaires et
additionnels. Porter progressivement les roulements à une température
d’environ 80 à 100 °C et les emmancher sur l’arbre. Eviter les
Les “5 règles de sécurité” (par exemple selon DIN VDE coups secs (par ex.: coups de marteau).
0105) sont applicables :
Remplacer également tous les éléments d’étanchéité soumis
- mettre hors tension à usure (par exemple bagues d’étanchéité).
- condamner les appareils (contre le réenclenchement) Les bagues d’étanchéité à frottement radial sans ressort
- vérifier l’absence de tension seront remplacées par des bagues de même type (sans
- mettre à la terre et court-circuiter ressort).
- recouvrir les parties actives voisines ou en barrer Dispositif de graissage
l’accès. Pour les moteurs avec le dispositif de graissage, respecter les
indications figurant sur la plaque de graissage.
Ces mesures de sécurité ne doivent être supprimées
qu’à l’issue de l’intervention de maintenance et Pour les moteurs avec le dispositif de graissage, respecter les
lorsque tous les éléments du moteur sont remontés. indications figurant sur la plaque de graissage.
Etanchéité des jointures
NOTA : Dans la mesure oĤ le moteur doit fonctionner avec Lors du réassemblage des moteurs avec un degré de
purgeurs de condensat fermés (par ex. en degré de protection protection IP 55 ou supérieur (voir plaque signalétique), les
IP55 ou IP56), il faut ouvrir de temps en temps les purgeurs jointures en métal nu entre la carcasse et les flasques-paliers
de l’Čeau condensée pour pouvoir évacuer l’eau condensée doivent être étanchées avec un produit pâteux ne durcissant
éventuellement accumulée. pas (p. ex. Hylomar, Curil).
Les purgeurs de condensats sont toujours à installer au point Ventilateurs en matière plastique (BG180M … 315L)
le plus bas du moteur. Les ventilateurs en matière plastique comportent de moulage
deux languettes qui s’engagent dans la gorge de l’arbre à titre
Remplacement des roulements, durée d’usage d’immobilisation en translation. Avant d’extraire le ventilateur,
du lubrifiant, types des graisses de il faut dégager les deux languettes (tournevis) et les maintenir
provisoirement dans cette position par des cales. Les
lubrification ventilateurs comportent dans le disque raidisseur deux trous
Dans des conditions de service normales, avec moteur à axe pour le passage de l’arrache-moyeu qui sera fixé sur le
horizontal et température d’air de refroidissement jusqu’à 40 moyeu. A la livraison, ces trous sont obstrués par un mince
°C, la durée d‘usage du lubrifiant est de voile qu’il faut percer.
- 40 000 heures de service à 1500 tr/min, L’extraction et l’emmanchement du ventilateur doivent être
réalisés avec un dispositif approprié. Ne pas donner de coups
- 20 000 heures de service à 3000 tr/min. de marteau pour protéger les roulements.
Pour des raisons de vieillissement, la graisse devrait être Il faut s‘occuper à ce que les cliquets soient bien enfoncés
renouvelée tous les 3 ans, indépendamment du nombre dans les cannelures de l‘axe.
d’heures de service. Pour povoir le faire, il faut démonter les
roulements, les laver et graisser par la graisse neuve. Pour
les versions oĤ il faut périodiquement ajouter la graisse, suivre
les données de la plaque de graissage.
Dans les conditions d’utilisation particulières, par ex. axe
vertical, fonctionnement fréquent à la vitesse limite nmax ,
grandes sollicitations par des vibrations et chocs, inversion
fréquent du sens de marche, etc., les nombres des heures de
service indiqués ci-dessus sont beaucoup plus réduits.
Les moteurs sont équipés en version standard de roulements
à billes série 62 … ou à l‘option K36 – de roulements a billes
série 63 … avec un couvre-palier (version ZC3).
NOTA : lors du remplacement des roulements, veiller à
l’orientation du déflecteur et au jeu des roulements, vu que sur
les exécutiuons spéciales la disposition peut différer de celle
des exécutions standard!
Les déflecteurs seront en matière résistant aux températures
entre -20 °C et +150 °C, par ex. caoutchouc de polyacryle
(ACM).
Type de graisse (moteurs standards) : UNIREX N3 (Esso) ;

Siemens AG
10
2.1 Transporte, almacenamiento

Indicaciones generales Durante el transporte se utilizarán todas las anillas de
Para evitar peligros y danos, es suspensión disponibles.
PRECAUCION imprescindible observar siempre Para transportar grupos de
los datos y las indicaciones que figuran en todas las
PRECAUCION máquinas (p. ej., reductores,
instrucciones de servicio y en las demás suministradas. ventiladores adosados, ...) utilizar únicamente las anillas
Estas instrucciones de servicio llevan adjuntas otras (de o muĔones de suspensión previstos. Los grupos de
color amarillo), que contienen datos suplementarios sobre máquinas no deben elevarse colgados de las máquinas
la seguridad de las máquinas eléctricas. Son por tanto un individuales. Comprobar la capacidad de carga de estas
complemento de las demás instrucciones generales y de anillas.
servicio suministradas. Los rodamientos se volverán a engrasar o se renovarán si
Además rigen las condiciones y prescripciones han transcurrido más de 3 aĔos bajo condiciones favorables
vigentes nacionales, locales y específicas de la desde el suministro hasta la puesta en servicio (conservación
instalación. en locales secos, exentos de polvo y de trepidaciones). Si las
condiciones son desfavorables, este período se acorta
Pueden diferir los detalles técnicos de las ejecuciones considerablemente.
especiales y variantes. En caso de dudas, es perentorio
dirigirse al fabricante indicando la designación de tipo y En caso dado se comprobará la resistencia de aislamiento, v.
el número de serie, o dejar que un centro de service de apartado 2.5.
SIEMENS efectúe los trabajos de conservación.
2.2 Emplazamiento
Las anillas atornilladas se apretarán o retirarán después de
la instalación.
INDICACION: Figs. 2 ... (Piezas de recambio), v. Anexo págs.
En las máquinas de eje vertical, hay que garantizar que no
35-36
pueda entrar agua en el rodamiento superior.
La parte superior de la caja de bornes con placa de 6
1 Descripción bornes se puede girar en 4 x 90 grados y con placa de 9
1.1 Campo de aplicación bornes en 180 grados.
Los motores pueden instalarse en ambientes húmedos o Estabilidad de marcha
polvorientos. El aislamiento es resistente al clima tropical. Son condiciones previas para lograr una marcha estable, con
Normalmente no es preciso adoptar medidas de protección vibraciones reducidas, que la conformación de los cimientos o
especiales contra los efectos climatológicos, si los motores se las condiciones de adosado/empotrado sean estables, junto
almacenan o se depositan a la intemperie convenientemente. con una alineación exacta de los motores y un buen
equilibrado de los elementos de accionamiento. Antes de
Nivel de intensidad acústica en la superficie, a 50 Hz
(DIN EN 21 680, parte 1) iniciar los trabajos de montaje es necesario limpiar las
1LG4, 1LG6 aprox. 51 a 76 dB(A) superficies de contacto de la base para el montaje del motor y
revisar si están planas. Para impedir tensiones en las zapatas
del motor es necesario que la llanura total de las superficies
1.2 Funcionamiento y constitución de contacto de la base no exceda 0,2 mm. Las superficies de
Los motores 1LG4 y 1LG6 en su ejecución básica tienen contacto a soldar deben ser afiladas para lograr la llanura
autorrefrigeración por ventilador. Además los motores de la requerida. En caso de montar zapatas debajo del motor para
serie 1LG pueden o bien no tener ventilador (opción...., por ajustar la altura y evitar tensiones en el motor, las planchas
ejemplo como motores – ventiladores con refrigeración por deben ser de material laminado y con el tamaĖo
medio de un ventilador especial motado en el extremo del correspondiente. En su caso habrá que compensar el rotor
eje), o pueden tener refrigeración independiente (opción con elemento de transmisión.
G17). Los motores 1PP4 y 1PP6 son motores con
refrigeración propia sin ventilador. 2.3 Equilibrado, elementos de
En los motores con patas éstas están fundidas en la carcasa, accionamiento
al pedido se pueden suministrar con las patas atornilladas
Se han de calar y extraer los elementos de accionamiento
(opción K11 / ver Fig. 2)..
(acoplamientos, poleas de transmisión, ruedas dentadas,
El traslado de las patas en la carcasa, por ejemplo para el ...)con un dispositivo adecuado (Fig. 7).
cambio de posición de la caja de bornes (ver Fig.5), es
Los rotores están equilibrados dinámicamente con media
posible en las opciones K09, K10 y K11. Para esto ya están
chaveta de manera estándar.
adecuadamente elaboradas las superficies y las
perforaciones necesarias. ßEn los motores con freno (por A partir de las series de 1991, el tipo de equilibrado se
ejemplo la opción G26) es necesario además tener en cuenta marcará en el LA del extremo del eje:
las instrucciones de servicio del freno ! (H = equilibrado con media chaveta)
(F = equilibrado con chaveta entera ajustada –
Estas instrucciones son válidas como suplemento a las
ejecución especial)
instrucciones de servicio del tipo de motor al que se refiera.
No es válido para los motores con ejecución EEx e. Al montar el elemento de accionamiento observar que
sea adecuado el tipo de equilibrado.
2 Operación Equilibrado con media chaveta
En los motores solo se trabajará En los elementos de accionamiento con una relación de la
PRECAUCION cuando no estén bajo tensión. longitud de cuba I a la longitud del extremo del eje IM < 0,8 y
velocidades > 1500/min, pueden aparecer irregularidades en
la estabilidad de marcha (v. Fig. 8).

Siemens AG
11
En caso dado será necesario un reequilibrado, p. ej., Tras un largo período de funcionamiento la resistencia
mecanizar la parte de la chaveta Tp que sobresale del mínima del aislamiento puede bajar a la resistencia crítica.
elemento de accionamiento y del contorno del eje. Mientras el valor medido no sea menor que el calculado para
la resistencia crítica la máquina podrá seguir funcionando.
Se observarán las medidas
Si se alcanzara un valor menor habría que parar
PRECAUCION generales necesarias para la
inmediatamente la máquina.
protección contra contactos
involuntarios de los elementos de accionamiento. Hay que averiguar cuál es el motivo y en su caso reparar los
arrollamientos o sus partes, limpiarlos o secarlos.
Si se opera un motor sin elemento de accionamiento,
habrá que asegurar la chaveta contra su eyección.
2.6 Puesta en servicio
2.4 Conexión INDICACION: Cuando el par es muy irregular (p. ej.,
accionamiento de un compresor de émbolo) se fuerza la
La tensión y frecuencia de la red tienen que ser las indicadas
formación de una corriente distorsionada, cuyas oscilaciones
en la placa de características. Son admisibles desviaciones
armónicas pueden influenciar indebidamente a la red así
de tensión o de frecuencia de ±5 % como máximo (para
como también emitir perturbaciones electromagnéticas
1ME6, desviaciones máximas de frecuencia de ±3 %), sin que
inadmisiblemente altas.
por ello disminuya la potencia. Llevar a cabo el empalme y la
colocación de los estribos de maniobra según el esquema Si la alimentación es a través de un convertidor, las
que se encuentra en la caja de bornes. Empalmar el oscilaciones armónicas de tensión y corriente de alta
frecuencia en las líneas de alimentación pueden emitir
conductor de protección al borne marcado con . perturbaciones electromagnéticas. Por esta razón se
En los bornes con estribo (p. ej. según DIN 46282) los recomienda el uso de conductores blindados.
conductores se distribuirán de tal manera que resulte Antes de la puesta en servicio se comprobará si
aprox. la misma altura de conexión en ambos lados. Este - se han observado las resistencias mínimas del aislamiento
tipo de conexión requiere doblar en U uno de los
conductores, o usar un terminal (v. Fig. 3.1). Esto rige - el rotor puede girarse sin que roce
igualmente para la conexión del conductor de protección - si el motor está alineado y montado correctamente
y para el conductor de puesta a tierra exterior, de color - los elementos de accionamiento están ajustados
amarillo y verde (v. Fig. 3.2). correctamente (p. ej., la tensión de la correa en caso de
Los terminales eléctricos roscados y los bornes de conexión accionamiento por correa, ...) y que el elemento de
(exceptuando los de las regletas) estén apretados con el par accionamiento es el adecuado para la aplicación prevista
prescrito; véase la fig. 4. - todas las conexiones eléctricas, así como los tornillos y
elementos de unión están apretados y ejecutados según
2.5 Control de la resistencia del las disposiciones
aislamiento - que el conductor de protección se ha fabricado de acuerdo
a las prescripciones
Antes de la primera puesta en marcha, tras largos períodos
de almacenamiento o de parada (aprox. 6 meses) hay que - que todos los dispositivos adicionales (frenos, velocímetro,
medir la resistencia del aislamiento de los arrollamientos. ventilador externo.) están en condiciones de prestar
servicio
Durante la medición y
PRECAUCION seguidamente después de ella, - que se han tomado las medidas necesarias contra
los bornes a veces están contactos involuntarios de piezas en movimiento y bajo
sometidos a tensiones peligrosas, por lo que no deben tensión
tocarse. - que no se sobrepasa la velocidad límite nmáx (v. placa de
Resistencia del aislamiento características).
- La resistencia mínima del aislamiento contra masa de un INDICACION. La velocidad límite nmáx es la velocidad de
arrollamiento nuevo, limpio o reparado es de 10
servicio máxima admisible durante cortos períodos. Hay
Megaohmios.
que tener en cuenta que en este caso el comportamiento
- En primer lugar se calcula la resistencia del aislamiento empeora respecto al ruido y a las vibraciones del motor y
crítica Rcrít. Dicho cálculo se efectúa multiplicando la tensión que se acorta el período para el cambio de los
asignada UN, p. ej. 0,69 kV AC por el factor constante (0,5 rodamientos.
Megaohmios/kV): Tras montar los motores se
ATENCION comprobará el perfecto
Rcrít= 0,69 kV * 0,5 Megaohmios/kV = 0,345 Megaohmios.
funcionamiento de los frenos (si existen).
Medición
La resistencia mínima del aislamiento contra masa de los Esta lista no es completa. Posiblemente sean necesarias
arrollamientos se mide con 500 V c.c. Al hacerlo, la pruebas adicionales.
temperatura de los arrollamientos será de 25°C ± 15°C.
La resistencia crítica del aislamiento a la temperatura de
servicio del arrollamiento se mide con 500 V c.c.
Control
Si en una máquina nueva, limpia o tras un largo período de
almacenamiento o de paro la resistencia del aislamiento
mínima contra masa del arrollamiento fuese menor de 10
Megaohmios podría haber un exceso de humedad. En este
caso se secarán los arrollamientos.

Siemens AG
12
3 Mantenimiento Evítese la mezcla de grasas.

Despiezar el motor tanto como sea necesario. Extraer el
Medidas de seguridad rodamiento con el dispositivo adecuado (v. Fig. 6). Limpiar de
impurezas al alojamiento. Limpiar o renovar los rodamientos y
Antes de comenzar cualquier volverlos a engrasar.
PRECAUCION trabajo en el motor o en el Llenar a ras los recintos huecos del rodamiento. No se llena
aparato y, especialmente, antes de grasa la tapa o el escudo portacojinetes, para evitar un
de abrir las cubiertas de las partes activas, debe engrase excesivo.
desconectarse según las prescripciones. Tener en
cuenta los circuitos adicionales o auxiliares que Calentar uniformemente los rodamientos a aprox. 80-100°C y
pudieran haber junto con los circuitos principales. calarlos. Evitar golpes fuertes (p. ej., con un martillo, ...).
Las usuales “5 reglas de seguridad” según, p. ej., DIN También se renovarán los elementos de junta deteriorados (p.
VDE 0105 son: ej., los anillos de cierre radial de eje etc.).
- Desconectar Si los anillos de cierre radial del eje no tuvieran muelles,
tampoco se pondrán muelles en los nuevos.
- Asegurar contra la reconexión
- Comprobar si está libre de tensión Dispositivo de reengrase
- Poner a tierra y cortocircuitar En los motores con dispositivo de reengrase, se observarán
- Cubrir o delimitar las partes contiguas que estén bajo las indicaciones en la placa de características.
tensión. Sellado de juntas
Solo podrán retirarse estas medidas cuando se hayan Al montar máquinas con grado de protección IP55 o más (v.
acabado los trabajos de mantenimiento y el motor se placa de características), las superficies pulidas entre la
haya montado completamente carcasa del motor y los escudos portacojinetes deberán
hermetizarse con una pasta obturadora que no se endurece,
p. ej., Hylomar, Curil.
INDICACION: Deberán abrirse de cuando en cuando los Ventiladores de material plástico (BG180M ... 315L)
taladros para el agua de condensación en los motores en los Cada ventilador de plástico tiene dos lengüetas moldeadas
que dichos agujeros estén tapados (p. ej., grado de que encajan como fijación axial en la ranura anular del eje.
protección IP55 ó IP56, v. placa de características), para Antes de extraer el ventilador, desencajar estas dos lengüetas
permitir la salida del agua que pudiera haberse acumulado. y fijarlas provisionalmente en esta posición, p. ej., por medio
Las aberturas para el agua de condensación siempre deberán de piezas insertadas. Los ventiladores tienen en el disco
situarse en la parte más baja del motor. portador dos aberturas para poder pasar el dispositivo de
extracción que se fija en el disco. En estado de suministro las
Cambio de rodamientos, duración de la grasa, aberturas aún están cubiertas de una fina hoja de plástico que
se tiene que romper.
tipos de grasa
Tanto para calar como para extraer se utilizará siempre el
El plazo de duración de la grasa bajo condiciones normales dispositivo adecuado. Son absolutamente inadmisibles los
de servicio, montaje horizontal del motor, temperatura del martillazos para impedir el dano de los rodamientos.
medio refrigerante de hasta 40°C y con velocidades del motor Se tiene que cuidar que los pasadores encajen
de adecuadamente en las estrías del eje.
- 1500/min, es aprox. 40.000 horas de servicio
- 3000/min, es aprox. 20.000 horas de servicio.
Independientemente de las horas de servicio, se recomienda
renovar la grasa aprox. cada 3 aĔos debido a su
envejecimiento.Por ello es necesario desmontar los
rodamientos, limpiarlos y lubricarlos noc grasa nueva. En la
ejecución con reengrase se han de observar los datos en la
placa de lubricación.
Bajo condiciones de servicio especiales, p. ej., montaje
vertical, servicio frecuente a velocidades límite nmáx, con
grandes cargas por vibraciones y choques, así como con
muchos servicios con inversión de marcha, se reducen
considerablemente las horas de servicio indicadas.
Los motores tienen rodamientos radiales rígidos con un disco
de cierre (ejecución ZC3).
El disco de cierre está colocado en el lado del rodamiento
dirigido hacia la carcasa del motor (estator).
INDICACION: Al cambiar los rodamientos observar la
disposición del disco de cierre y el juego del rodamiento, ya
que en las ejecuciones especiales pueden ser diferentaes a
en las estándar.
Estos discos deberán resistir temperaturas desde -20°C hasta
+150°C, p. ej., ser de caucho poliacrílico (ACM).
Tipos de grasa en las máquinas estándar: (Fa. ESSO
/UNIREX N3); la duración de las grasas y el plazo para el
reengrase se refieren solamente a este tipo de grasa.

Siemens AG
13
Per il trasporto di gruppi di

PERICOLO macchina (ad es. azionamenti,
Avvertenze generiche
soffianti supplementari) vanno utilizzati soltanto gli
Per evitare rischi e danni è occhielli ed i perni previsti per il sollevamento. Il
PERICOLO indispensabile attenersi alle sollevamento di un gruppo di macchine non deve mai
avvertenze ed alle indicazioni avvenire aggianciando la componente supplementare alla
contenute nella presente pubblicazione e nelle istruzioni macchina principale.
supplementari in allegato (in giallo), relative alla sicurezza
Assicurarsi che la capacità di portata degli apparecchi di
nell’impiego di macchine ed apparecchi elettrici, come
sollevamento sia sufficiente.
pure quelle contenute in altri stampati attinenti.
E’ consigliabile reingrassare i cuscinetti se fra la fornitura e la
Vanno inoltre rispettate le norme ed esigenze nazionali,
messa in servizio dei motori in condizioni favorevoli
locali e specifiche dell’impianto.
(magazzinaggio in ambienti asciutti, esenti da polvere e
Esecuzioni speciali e varianti costruttive possono vibrazioni), è trascorso un periodo superiore a 3 anni. In
discostarsi in particolari tecnici. In caso di eventuali condizioni non favorevoli la durata è notevolmente piĤ breve.
difficoltà, si prega di rivolgersi al costruttore, indicando il
Eventualmente va controllata la resistenza d’isolamento degli
tipo e il numero di matricola, oppure di far eseguire i
avvolgimenti, ved. sez. 2.5.
lavori di manutenzione da uno dei centri di service della
Siemens.
2.2 Installazione
Dopo l’installazione della macchina gli occhielli di
Avvertenza: Fig. 2 ... (Parti di ricambio) , vedi appendice p. sollevamento avvitati alla carcassa vanno serrati oppure
35-36 tolti.
Nelle macchine con estremità d’albero verso l’alto e verso
1 Descrizione il basso si deve fare attenzione che non possa penetrare
1.1 Campo d’impiego acqua nel cuscinetto superiore.
I motori possono essere installati in ambienti polverosi o La parte superiore della carcassa morsetti puĖ essere
umidi. L’isolamento è in versione tropicale. Se il deposito o ruotata di 4x90 gradi, in caso di una morsettiera a 6 morsetti e
l’installazione all’aperto sono eseguiti regolarmente, non è di 180 gradi con una morsettiera a 9 morsetti.
necessario in linea di massima alcun particolare accorgimento Silenziosità di funzionamento
per proteggere i motori dalle intemperie. Per il funzionamento silenzioso ed equilibrato della macchina
Livello di pressione acustica delle superfici di misura a sono indispensabili dei fondamenti stabili e condizioni
50Hz (DIN EN 21680 parte 1) favorevoli all’installazione come anche la regolazione corretta
1LG4, 1LG6 ca. 51 a 76 dB(A) del motore e l’equilibratura precisa dell’elemento di
azionamento.
Prima di iniziare i lavori di montaggio le superfici di supporto
1.2 Costruzione e modo di funzionamento della base per il montaggio del motore devono essere pulite e
deve essere controllata la loro linearità. Per evitare la tensione
I motori 1LG4 e 1LG6 sono in esecuzione di base sui piedi del motore, la linearità totale delle superfici di
autoventilati. Inoltre i motori della serie 1LG possono essere supporto della base non deve superare 0,2 mm. Le superfici
anche senza il proprio ventilatore (per esempio come motori di supporto saldate devono essere modificate per la linearità
a ventilatori, a raffreddamento ad un ventilatore speciale richiesta con la rettifica. Nel caso in cui i piedi del motore sono
montato all‘estremità dell‘albero), oppure per mezzo di regolati per lággiustamento delláltezza e per evitare la
raffreddamento a ventilatori esterni (opzione G17). I motori tensione del motore con le lamiere, devono essere fabbricati
1PP4 e 1PP6 hanno ventilazione naturale (senza ventilatore). del materiale laminato delle dimensioni corrispondenti. Si puĖ
Nei motori a piedini i piedini fanno corpo con la carcassa per eventualmente fare léquilibratura del rotore con lélemento di
fusione oppure, in opzione, sono avvitati alla carcassa trasmissione.
(opzione K11/ved. fig. 2).
Per questa ragione un riposizionamento dei piedini sulla
2.3 Equilibratura, elementi di azionamento
carcassa del motore, p. es. per variare la posizione della Le operazioni di calettamento e di estrazione degli elementi di
cassetta morsetti, è possibile solo con le opzioni K09, K10 e trasmissione (disco di accoppiamento, puleggia, ingranaggio,
K11. Le forature necessarie ci sono già fatte e le superfici ..) devono essere sempre eseguite con le apposite
sono già lavorate in modo opportuno. attrezzature (fig.7).
Per i motori con il freno (per esempio opzione G26) bisogna Alla fornitura, i rotori sono equilibrati dinamicamente con
rispettare anche le istruzioni di servizio del freno. mezza chiavetta.
Le presenti istruzioni sono valide in qualità di un supplemento Il tipo di equilibratura è segnato all’estremità dell’albero (sul
delle istruzioni di servizio del tipo di motore corrispondente. lato dell‘azionamento – sulla fronte dell‘albero).
Non valgono per l‘esecuzione EEx e. (H = equilibratura con mezza chiavetta)
(F = equilibratura con chiavetta piena – esecuzione
2 Esercizio speciale)
Si faccia attenzione che qualunque Considerare il tipo di equilibratura prima del montaggio
PERICOLO operazione sulla macchina venga dell’elemento di azionamento!
effettuata solamente in assenza di tensione. Equilibratura con mezza chiavetta
In caso di elementi di azionamento con un rapporto di
2.1 Trasporto, deposito lunghezza di lM < 0,8 e con una velocità superiore a 1500
Il sollevamento di motori con piĤ occhielli deve avvenire giri/min., puĖ risultare compromessa la silenzionsità di
utilizzandoli tutti. funzionamento (ved. fig.8).

Siemens AG
14
Eventualmente sarà necessaria la riequilibratura, ad es. si puĖ continuare ad utilizzare la macchina. Nel momento in
riducendo la lunghezza della chiavetta TP sporgente cui il valore scende al di sotto, la macchina deve essere
dall’elemento di azionamento all’estremità dell’albero. immediatamente disinserita, e bisogna ricercare le cause;
eventualmente dovranno essere rimessi a punto, puliti o
Osservare le misure di protezione
asciugati gli avvolgimenti o le sezioni dell’avvolgimento.
PERICOLO generali contro i contatti accidentali
degli elementi di azionamento.
2.6 Messa in servizio
Se la messa in servizio di un motore avviene senza
l’elemento di azionamento, la chiavetta deve essere Avvertenza: In caso che la coppia sia fortemente
protetta contro l’espulsione. disuniforme (ad es. azionamento di compressore a stantuffi),
si forma forzatamente una corrente di macchina non
2.4 Allacciamento sinusoidale, la cui frequenza di armonica puĖ avere una
influenza non ammissibile sulla rete e puĖ essere la causa di
La tensione e la frequenza di rete devono coincidere con i dati disturbi elettromagnetici troppo forti.
riportati sulla targhetta. Sono ammessi scostamenti del ±5%
L’alimentazione tramite convertitore puĖ causare disturbi
della tensione o della frequenza (per 1ME6 ±3% della
elettromagnetici derivanti dalla corrente o da tensioni con una
frequenza), in quanto essi non causano una riduzione della
frequenza di armonica troppo elevata nei conduttori del
potenza. Il collegamento e la disposizione dei ponticelli
motore.Si raccomanda perciĖ l’impiego di conduttori
dovranno corrispondere a quelli indicati dallo schema
schermati.
applicato all’interno della cassetta morsetti. Si colleghi il
Prima della messa in servizio bisogna verificare che:
conduttore di protezione al morsetto contrassegnato da . - la resistenza d’isolamento minima sia in regola
Quando si effettuano i collegamenti con morsetti di - il rotore possa ruotare senza strisciare
serraggio (per es. secondo DIN 46282 ), si faccia
attenzione che i conduttori abbiano lo stesso spessore su - il motore sia montato ed allineato correttamente
entrambi i lati del morsetto. Questo tipo di collegamento - gli elementi di azionamento siano regolati esattamente (per
richiede quindi che i singoli conduttori vengano ripiegati es. tensione della cinghia in caso di azionamento a cinghia)
ad U o allacciati tramite capocorda. (ved. fig. 3.1). CiĖ vale e siano adatti alle condizioni d’impiego.
anche per il conduttore di protezione ed il conduttore di - utti gli allacciamenti elettrici, viti di fissaggio ed elementi di
messa a terra esterno giallo-verde (vedi Fig.3.2 ). collegamento siano eseguiti correttamente e ben serrati
Coppie di serraggio ammesse per viti e dadi dei morsetti (ad secondo le istruzioni.
eccezione di quelli della morsettiera) vedi fig. 4. - il conduttore di protezione sia in regola
- funzionino eventuali apparecchiature supplementari (freni,
2.5 Verifica della resistenza di isolamento contagiri, ventilatore esterno)
Prima della prima messa in servizio del motore dopo un lungo - siano attuati tutti i provvedimenti per la protezione contro i
periodo di magazzinaggio o di sosta (circa 6 mesi), è contatti accidentali delle parti in movimento o sotto
necessario determinare la resistenza d’isolamento degli tensione.
avvolgimenti. - che il limite max. di giri (nmax) non venga superato (vedi
Durante e subito dopo la targhetta).
PERICOLO misurazione, i morsetti sono in parte Avvertenza: Il numero max. di giri è ammesso solo per un
sotto tensione pericolosa e non
vanno quindi assolutamente toccati! breve periodo durante il funzionamento. Bisogna tener
conto che ciĖ puĖ incidere negativamente sul
Resistenza d’isolamento comportamento della macchina in quanto riguarda le
- La resistenza d’isolamento minima contro massa di vibrazioni, la rumorosità ed i gli intervalli di sostituzione dei
avvolgimenti nuovi, puliti o riparati è 10 MegaOhm cuscinetti.
- La resistenza critica d’isolamento Rkrit deve prima essere Dopo l’installazionee dei motori
calcolata. Il calcolo avviene moltiplicando la tensione di ATTENZIONE va verificato il perfetto
taratura UN, per es. 0,69 kV AC, con il fattore costante (0,5 funzionamento del freno (se
MegaOhm/kV). presente).
Rkrit = 0,69 kV * 0,5 MegaOhm/kV = 0,345 MegaOhm Questo elenco non puĖ essere completo. Possono essere
eventualmente necessarie altre prove.
Misurazione
La resistenza d’isolamento minima degli avvolgimenti
contro massa viene misurata con tensione continua di 500V.
La temperatura degli avvolgimenti dovrebbe essere 25°C ±
15°C.
La resistenza critica d’isolamento va misurata sulla
temperatura di servizio degli avvolgimenti, con tensione
continua di 500V.
Verifica
Se, nel caso di una macchina nuova , pulita o rimessa a punto
che è stata a lungo in maggazino oppure ferma, la resistenza
minima d’isolamento degli avvolgimenti contro massa è
minore di 10MegaOhm, l’umidità puĖ esserne la causa.
Bisogna quindi asciugare gli avvolgimenti.
Dopo un lungo periodo di esercizio, la resistenza minima puĖ
ridursi alla resistenza critica d’isolamento. Fintanto che il
valore non scende al di sotto di quello della resistenza critica,

Siemens AG
15
3 Manutenzione Il materiale dei dischi dovrebbe essere resistente a

temperature entro -20°C e + 150°C, per es. caucciĤ di
poliacrilio (ACM).
Indicazioni di sicurezza
Tipo di grasso per le macchine standard: UNIREX N3
Prima di iniziare qualsiasi lavoro (ESSO). La durata dell‘uso di grassi ed intervalli di
PERICOLO sulla macchina e l’impianto, in grassaggio valgono soltanto per questo tipo di grasso.
particolare prima di aprire La miscelazione di diversi tipi di grasso va evitata.
coperture e carcasse di parti in servizio, bisogna
assicurarsi che la macchina sia priva di tensione. CiĖ Smontare il motore quanto è necessario per eseguire i lavori.
riguarda non solamente i circuiti principali, ma Estrarre i cuscinetti con un attrezzo adatto (ved. fig. 6) e pulire
bisogna tener conto anche dei circuiti ausiliari e la zona di montaggio dei cuscinetti da insudiciamenti.
supplementari. Pulire i cuscinetti, sostituirli eventualmente ed eseguire la
Vanno rispettate le “5 regole di sicurezza”, ad es sec. rilubrificazione. Riempire a livello i spazi vuoti dei cuscinetti
VDE 01505: con grasso. I copricuscinetti oppure lo scudo non vengono
lubrificati per evitare un ingrassaggio eccessivo.
- togliere la tensione
Riscaldare uniformemente i cuscinetti a 80° - 100°C e
- proteggere il sistema contro la reinserzione calettarli. Non dare colpi forti (martellate)! Vanno sostituiti
- assicurarsi che la macchina sia priva di tensione anche eventuali elementi di tenuta ad usura (ad es. anelli di
- collegare a terra e cortocircuitare la macchina tenuta, ecc.). Se gli anelli di tenuta radiali sono installati senza
molla, va utilizzato anche il ricambio nuovo senza molla.
- sbarrare o coprire le parti adiacenti che portano
tensione. Ingrassatore
In caso dei mmotori con ingrassatore, osservare le indicazioni
Le misure di sicurezza sopraindicate devono essere riportati sulla targhetta.
rispettate fino alla portata a termine dei lavori di
manutenzione ed alla completa installazione della Tenute
macchina. Durante l’assemblaggio di macchine con un grado di
protezione IP55 o superiore (ved. targhetta), bisogna rendere
stagni le giunzioni nude tra la carcassa e gli scudi per mezzo
Avvertenza: In caso di macchine in esecuzione a fori chiusi di un mastice adeguato, non indurente (ad es. Hylomar, Curil).
per lo scarico di condensa (ad es. tipo di protezione IP55 o Ventilatori in materia plastica (BG180M...315L)
IP56, ved. targhetta), i fori per lo scarico di condensa devono
essere aperti da tanto in tanto per scaricare la condensa I venilatori in plastica hanno due linguette fuse che si
eventualmente ristagnata. incastrano nella cava dell’albero come fissaggio assiale.
Prima di togliere la ventola, le due linguette devono essere
I fori per la condensa devono essere situati sul fondo della disinnestate (cacciavite) e mantenute provvisoriamente in
macchina. questa posizione, per es. per mezzo di appositi spessori.
Sostituzione dei cuscinetti, durata dell’uso di grasso, tipi Sulla piastra di sostegno le ventole hanno due aperture per
di grasso l’estrattore che deve agganciarsi al mozzo. Queste aperture
La durata dell‘uso di grasso è in condizioni di funzionamento siano chiuse da un foglio di plastica per il trasporto che deve
normale, cioè installazione orizzontale della macchina, essere tolto.
temperatura del refrigerante inferiore a 40°C e un no. max. dei Per l’estrazione e l’applicazione deve venir utilizzato un
giri motore, utensile adatto. Per proteggere i cuscinetti, evitare
- 1500/min.: ca. 40 000 ore di servizio assolutamente di dare martellate!
- 3000/min.: ca. 20 000 ore di servizio Occorre verificare che i scatti siano bene posizionati nelle
Indipendentemente dal numero delle ore di servizio è scanalature dell’albero.
comunque raccomandabile sostituire il grasso al piĤ tardi
dopo 3 anni (per motivi di invecchiamento). A tale scopo
occorre smontare i cuscinetti, lavarli e d ingrassarli con il
grasso nuovo. Per le esecuzioni dove occorre regolarmente
aggiungere il grasso, procedere secondo i dati sulla targhetta
di grassaggio.
Sotto condizioni particolari, ad es. installazione verticale della
macchina, funzionamento frequente al limite dei giri nmax e
intense sollecitazioni da vibrazioni e urti, inversioni frequenti di
marcia ecc., gli intervalli per la sostituzione dei cuscinetti sono
notevolmente piĤ brevi (riduzione delle ore di servizio
sopraindicate).
I motori sono provvisti nella versione standard di cuscinetti a
sfere della serie 62 … oppure all‘opzione K36 – di cuscinetti a
sfere della serie 63 … con un coperchio (esecuzione ZC3).
Il disco di tenuta è disposto sul lato cuscinetti della carcassa
del motore (statore).
AVVERTENZA: Prima della sostituzione dei cuscinetti
bisogna assicurarsi della posizione del disco di tenuta e del
gioco del cuscinetto, poichè esistono diversi varianti speciali
rispetto all’esecuzione standard.

Siemens AG
16
Vid transport av hela

VARNING maskinuppsättningar (t.ex. med
Allmänna anvisningar
kuggväxel- eller fläktaggregat) får man bara använda
För undvikande av risker och befintliga lyftöglor eller lyfttappar. Lyft inte
VARNING skador måste de uppgifter och maskinuppsättningarna genom att hänga dem i de
anvisningar som ges i denna driftsinstruktion samt övriga enskilda maskinerna! Se till att lyftdonet har erforderlig
tillhörande driftsinstruktioner ständigt beaktas. kapacitet!
Med denna driftsinstruktion medföljer även en annan Om motorn efter leveransen måste förvaras i mera än 3 år
instruktion (gul), som innehåller kompletterande under gynnsamma förhållanden (i torrt, damm- och
säkerhetsuppgifter för elektriska maskiner och apparater. vibrationsfritt utrymme) innan den tas i drift, så måste
Denna gäller alltså som komplettering av alla övriga rullningslagren fettas in på nytt. Vid förvaring under
levererade drifts- och andra instruktioner inkl. sådana som ogynnsamma förhållanden reduceras denna tid avsevärt.
ännu ej levererats.
Kontrollera lindningens isolationsmotstånd enl. avsnitt 2.5.
Beakta dessutom alla nationella, lokala och
anläggningsspecifika bestämmelser och krav. 2.2 Installation
Specialversioner och varianter kan avvika i tekniska
detaljer. Ta alltid kontakt med tillverkaren vid eventuella Iskruvade lyftöglor dras åt eller tas bort efter installationen.
oklarheter och ange därvid typbeteckning och För motorer som monteras med axeltappen uppåt eller nedåt
tillverkningsnummer, eller låt alla reparationer utföras måste man se till att vatten ej kan tränga in i det övre lagret.
av en av SIEMENS servicecentraler. Uttagslådans överdel kan vridas 4x90 grader, när man
använder en anslutningsplint med 6 klämmor och 180 grader
när man använder en plint med 9 klämmor.
Vibrationsfri gång
OBS: Fig. 2 ... (Reservdelar) se bilagan på sid. 35-36 Förutsättningen för lugn och vibrationsfri gång är dels ett
stabilt fundament, dels även att motorerna är exakt uppriktade
1 Beskrivning och att drivdonet är väl balanserat. Innan installationsarbeten
1.1 Användningsområde påbörjas måste alla underlagets ytor som motorn ska vila på
rengöras och deras planhet kontrolleras. För att förhindra
Motorerna kan installeras i dammig eller fuktig omgivning. spänningar i motorfästena får inte basens bärande ytor ha en
Isoleringen är i tropikutförande. Vid ändamålsenlig lagring total avvikelse från planet som överstiger 0,2 mm.
eller uppställning utomhus erfordras normalt inga speciella Fastsvetsade bärande ytor måste justeras till önskad planhet
skyddsåtgärder mot väderpåverkan på motorerna. genom slipning. Om motorfästena pallas upp med plåtar för
Ljudtrycksnivå vid 50 Hz (DIN EN 21 680 del 1) att uppnå rätt höjd och förhindra spänningar måste dessa vara
1LG4, 1LG6 c:a 51 till 76 dB(A) tillverkade av valsat material med motsvarande storlek.
Eventuellt kan en balansering av rotorn och vevaxeln krävas.
1.2 Funktionssätt och konstruktion
2.3 Balansering, drivdon
Motorerna 1LG4 och 1LG6 finns till i grundutförandet med
egen kylning (fläkt). Dessutom kan motorerna i Drivdon (t.ex. kopplingar, remskivor, kugghjul ...) skall dras på
produktionsserien 1 LG väljas också utan egen fläkt (möjliga och av med lämpligt verktyg (Fig. 7).
varianter som är till finnandes är exempelvis Motorer av standardmodell är dynamiskt balanserade
ventilatormotorerna i vilka kylingen försiggår med hjälp av en med full halv kil (fullkil).
speciell fläkt som finns på axeltappen), eller är de till Sättet på vilket balanseringen bör genomföras är markerad på
förfogande också i utförandet med extern fläkt (väljbar variant axeltappen (på drivanordningens sida - på axelns panna):
G17). Motorerna 1PP4 och 1PP6 är motorer som har
självkyling utan fläkt. (H = balansering med halv kil)
(F = balansering med full dvs hel kil, specialutförandet)
I föttermotorerna är fötterna pågjutna på motorhuset; de kan
Se till att det drivdon som monteras är balanserat på samma
väljbart levereras också med fastskruvna fötter (variant K11,
sätt!
jfr avb Nr 2).
Balansering med halv kil
Det är möjligt att flytta om fötterna på motorhuset - något som
På drivdon med en navlängd I som är <0,8 av axeltappens
kan bli nödvändigt exempelvis p g av en förändring i
längd IM och med varvtal >1500/min kan rotationsstörningar
klammerns läge i varianterna K09, K10 och K11. De därtill
nödvändiga borringar och ytor är redan förberedade på det för inträffa (se Fig.8).
en sådan åtgärd bästägnade sätt. I motorerna med egna Eventuellt kan efterbalansering erfordras, t.ex. genom nedslip-
bromsar (exempelvis variant G26) bör den respektiva ning av den del av kilen TP, som sticker ut ur drivdonet och
bromsgångens driftsinstruktion respekteras! utöver axelns konturlinje.
Dessa anvisningar är giltiga som tillägg till bruksanvisningen Vidta alla allmänt erforderliga åtgärder
för den respektiva motortypen. De är inte giltiga vad motorer i VARNING för beröringsskyddav drivdonen. Om
genomförandet EExe beträffar. en motor tas i drift utan drivdon skall
kilen fixeras så att den inte kan kastas ut.
2 Drift
Vid alla arbeten på motorn måste 2.4 Elektrisk anslutning
VARNING denna vara spänningslös.
Nätspänning och nätfrekvens måste stämma överens med de
data som anges på märkplåten. En spännings- eller
2.1 Transport, förvaring frekvensavvikelse på ±5% (vid 1ME6 frekvensavvikelse på
Vid transport bör alla lyftöglor på motorn utnyttjas. ±3%) är tillåten utan att effekten behöver reduceras.

Siemens AG
17
Anslutning och kopplingen av kopplingsblecken jämförs med - drivdonen är rätt inställda (t.ex. remspänningen vid remdrift)
kopplingsschemat på insidan av locket till anslutningslådan. och lämpade för avsedd användning
Skyddsledare anslutes till denna plint . - alla elektriska anslutningar, skruvförband och
förbindelseelement är åtdragna och utförda enligt föreskrift
Vid kontaktklämmor med klämbyglar (t.ex. enl. DIN 46282)
måste ledarna fördelas så att det blir ungefär samma - skyddsledare resp. skyddsjordning utförts korrekt
klämhöjd på vardera sidan av balken. - eventuellt förekommande hjälp- tillsätsanordningar (broms,
Detta slags anslutning kräver därför att en enstaka ledare varvmätare, främmande fläkt) är funktionsdugliga
böjs i U-form, eller att att man använder en kabelsko (Fig. - beröringsskydd har ordnats för rörliga och spänningförande
3.1). Detta gäller även skyddsledaranslutningen och den detaljer
externa jordningsledaren (Fig. 3.2).
- maximivarvtalet nmax (se märkskylten), ej överskrids
Åtdragningsmomenten för elanslutningarnas skruvförband
(gäller ej plintrader), se Fig. 4. OBS: Maximivarvtalet nmax är det högsta kortvariga varvtal
som tillåts. Kom ihåg att detta försämrar motorns buller- och
2.5 Kontroll av isolationsmotståndet vibrationsegenskaper och reducerar lagerbytesintervallet.
Kontrollera att bromsen (om sådan
Innan motorn tas i drift första gången samt efter en längre tids VIKTIGT förekommer) fungerar ordentligt när
lagring (c:a 6 månader) måste man fastställa lindningarnas motorerna har monterats.
isolationsmotstånd.
Denna uppräkning kan inte vara fullständig. Ytterligare
Under och omedelbart efter kontroller kan erfordras.
VARNING mätningen ligger det delvis farliga
spänningar på klämmorna, som inte får beröras.
Isolationsmotstånd
3 Underhåll
- Minsta isolationsmotstånd gentemot jord i nya, rengjorda
eller reparerade lindningar är 10 MegaOhm. Säkerhetsåtgärder
- Det kritiska isolationsmoståndet Rkrit beräknas först Innan något arbete på motorn eller
teoretiskt. Detta gör man genom att multiplicera VARNING utrustningen påbörjas, framför allt
märkspänningen UN, t.ex. AC 0,69 kV, med konstanta innan skydden över aktiva delar
faktorn (0,5 MegaOhm/kV): öppnas, måste motorn vara skild från nätet enligt
gällande föreskrifter. Uppmärksamma förutom
Rkrit = 0,69 kV x 0,5 MegaOhm/kV = 0,345 MegaOhm
huvudströmkretsarna även eventuellt befintliga
Mätning tillsats- eller hjälpströmkretsar.
Ledningarnas minsta isolationsmotstånd gentemot jord mäts De vanligaste “5 säkerhetsreglerna” är därvid enligt
med likspänning 500 V. Därvid skall lindningarnas temperatur DIN VDE 0105:
vara 25°C ±15°C.
- Frånkoppling
Det kritiska isolationsmotståndet skall mätas med 500 V
likspänning när lindningarna har driftstemperatur. - Säkra mot återinkoppling
Kontroll - Fastställ spänningslöshet
Om lindningarna i en ny, just rengjord eller reparerad motor - Jorda och kortslut
som legat i lager eller stått stilla under en längre tid har ett - Täck över eller spärra av intilliggande delar som
minsta isolationsmotstånd gentemot jord som är mindre än 10 fortfarande står under spänning
MegaOhm, så kan det bero på fukt. Då måste lindningarna
Ovannämnda åtgärder får inte återställas förrän
torkas.
underhållsarbetena är avslutade och motorn är
Efter en längre tids driftsuppehåll kan minsta fullständigt monterad.
isolationsmotståndet sjunka ner till det kritiska
isolationsmotståndet. Så länge det uppmätta värdet för det
kritiska isolationsmotståndet inte underskrider det beräknade OBS: Stängda kondensvattenöppningar skall då och då
värdet, kan motorn fortfarande hållas i drift. Om detta värde öppnas för att det eventuellt samlade kondensvattnet kan
underskrids måste motorn omedelbart stoppas. tappas ut. Kondensvattenöppningarna skall alltid anordnas
Fastställ orsaken till detta. Eventuellt kan det bli nödvändigt att längst ned på motorn.
reparera, rengöra eller torka ut lindningar eller lindningsdelar.
Lagerbyte, smörjmaterialets livslängd,
2.6 Idrifttagning fettsorter
OBS: Vid starkt varierande vridmoment (t.ex. drivning av en Smörjmaterialets livslängd är under normala
kolvkompressor) uppstår en icke-sinusformad motorström, driftsförhållanden, vågrät motorinstallation,
vars övertoner kan medföra en otillåten påverkan på nätet och kylmedelstemperatur max 40°C och för motorvarvtalet
alstra otillåtet stora elektromagnetiska störningar. - 1500/min c:a 40 000 driftstimmar
Vid matning med omriktare kan högfrekventa ström- och - 3000/min c:a 20 000 driftstimmar
spänningsövertoner i ledningarna till motorn medföra
elektromagnetiska störningar. Därför rekommenderas Oberoende av antalet driftstimmar bör fettet bytes vart 3:e år p
skärmade ledningar. g av åldrandet. För detta ändamål är det nödvändigt att
demontera lager, tvätta dem upp och smörja dem med nytt
Kontrollera före idrifttagningen att fett. Ifall den respektiva maskinkonstruktion gör genomgående
- minsta isolationsmotstånden ej överskrids, tilläggssmörjning möjlig, är det nödvändigt att ta hänsyn till
- rotorn kan vridas runt utan att skrapa emot någonstans uppgifter som finns på smörjningstabellen.
- motorn är korrekt monterad och riktad Vid speciella driftsförhållanden - t ex lodrät motorinstallation,
ofta förekommande körning vid maximivarvtalet nMAX, stora

Siemens AG
18
vibrations- eller stötbelastningar, ofta förekommande

reverserande drift- reduceras ovannämnda intervall avsevärt.
Motorerna är standardvis utrustade med radiala kullager
(spårkullager) serien 62..., eller i väljbar variant K36 är det
radialkullager serien 63.. med en täckbricka som finns till
(genomförandet ZC3).
Täckbrickan är placerad på den lagersidan som är vänd mot
motorhuset (statorn).
OBS: Ge akt på täckbrickans placering och på lagerns
glapprum vid lagerbyte, eftersom det finns några
specialutföranden som kan ha annat arrangemang.
Fettsorter för standardmotorer (firma ESSO/UNIREX N3):
smörjmaterialets livslängd ocn tilläggssmörjningens
(eftersmörjmningens) frister är giltiga bara för den här
fettsorten.
Blanda inte olika fettsorter!
Ta isär motorn i den mån det behövs. Dra av rullningslagren
med lämpligt verktyg (se Fig. 6). Rengör lagerstället från
föroreningar. Rengör eller byt ut rullningslagren och fetta in
dem på nytt.
Fyll lagrens fettutrymmen upp till kanten! Lagerlock resp.
lagersköld får ingen fettfyllning, så att överfettning undviks.
Värm upp lagren likformigt till ca. 80-100°C. Undvik hårda slag
(t.ex. med hammare).
Ev. nedslitna tätningar (t.ex. radialtätningsring) skall också
bytas ut. Om radialtätningsringar utan fjädrar är monterade, så
får inte heller den nya ringen vara försedd med fjäder
Eftersmörjningsanordning
Närsomhelst speciella smörjfett är nödvändiga, finns det
anförd på smörjregimens skylt.
Inredning som tjäner eftersmörjningen.
I motorerna som har en inredning för eftersmörjning bör
uppgifter som står på smörjningssylten respekteras.
Fogtätning.
När man sätter ihop maskiner i kapslingsklass IP55 eller
högre (se märkskylten), så måste de blanka monteringsytorna
mellan motorhusetš och lagersköldarna tätas med en lämplig
inte hårdnande tätningsmass (t ex Hylomar, Curil).
Plastfläkt (BG 180M - 315L)
Plastfläktar har två pågjutna tungor, som snäpper in i spåret i
axeln och fixerar fläkten. Innan fläkten dras av måste båda
tungorna frigöras (skruvmejsel) och provisoriskt hållas kvar i
detta läge, t ex under användning av inskjutna mellanbrickor.
Skivan som håller fast fläkthjulen är försedd med två hål,
genom vilka man kan sätta en avdragare mot navet;
avdragaren fixeras på skivan. Vid leveransen brukar dessa hål
vara förseglade med en tunn plasthinna, som då måste
brytas.
Använd alltid lämpligt verktyg vid av- och pådragning. Slå
aldrig med hammaren; hammarslag bör undgås med hänsyn
til lagerns beskydd. Det är nödvändigt att klinkor (tungor)
riktigt smäller igen i spåren på axeln.

Siemens AG
19
UPOZORNĚNÍ Pro pĜepravu strojových souprav

VšeobecnČ
(napĜ. soupravy s pĜevodovkou, vývČvou apod.) je tĜeba
Je tĜeba dbát údajĤ a pokynĤ používat pouze k tomuto úþelu urþená závČsná oka, resp.
UPOZORNĚNÍ ve všech dodávaných þepy! Soustrojí se nesmí zvedat zavČšením pouze
provozních i ostatních návodech. To je nezbytnČ nutné jednoho stroje! Je tĜeba dbát na dodržení nosnosti
pro zabránČní rizika úrazu a poškození! zvedacího zaĜízení!
Dodatkové informace bezpeþnosti práce (žluté) jsou Valivá ložiska je tĜeba znova namazat, resp. vymČnit pouze v
pĜiloženy a obsahují doplĖující údaje k bezpeþnosti u pĜípadČ, že doba od dodávky do uvedení motoru do provozu
elektrických strojĤ. Tyto bezpeþnostní informace jsou tedy pĜi vhodných podmínkách (skladování v suchých prostorech
doplnČním k dalším dodávaným provozním a ostatním bez prachu a vibrací) je delší než tĜi roky. PĜi nevhodných
návodĤm. podmínkách se tato doba podstatnČ zkracuje. V daném
Dále je tĜeba brát na vČdomí veškeré platné národní, pĜípadČ je tĜeba pĜezkoušet izolaþní odpor vinutí, viz odst. 2.5.
místní a jiná specifická ustanovení a požadavky.
Zvláštní provedení a konstrukþní modifikace se 2.2 Instalace
mohou lišit v technických detailech. V pĜípadČ nejasností Našroubovaná závČsná oka je tĜeba po instalaci dotáhnout
se v každém pĜípadČ doporuþuje obrátit na výrobce s anebo odšroubovat!
udáním typového oznaþení a výrobního þísla, nebo
U motorĤ s koncem hĜídele nahoru nebo dolĤ je tĜeba zajistit,
veškeré úkony údržby pĜenechat servisnímu stĜedisku
aby do horního ložiska nemohla vniknout voda.
SIEMENS.
Svorkovnicový kryt u svorkové desky se 6 pĜipojovacími
svorkami se mĤže otoþit o 4x 90o a u svorkové desky s 9
POZNÁMKA: obr. 2… (náhradní díly) viz dodatek na stranČ pĜipojovacími svorkami o 180o.
35-36 Klidný chod
Stabilní podklad nebo podmínky vestavby, pĜesné vyrovnání
1. Popis motorĤ a také dobĜe vyvážený pĜenosový þlen, to jsou
1.1 Rozsah použití pĜedpoklady pro klidný chod bez vibrací. PĜed zahájením
montážních prací musí být dosedací plochy základu pro
Motory je možné instalovat v prašném nebo vlhkém prostĜedí. montáž motoru oþištČny a zkontrolována jejich rovinnost. Aby
Izolace je v tropickém provedení. PĜi pĜimČĜeném skladování se zabránilo pnutí v patkách motoru, nesmí celková rovinnost
nebo odborné instalaci na otevĜeném prostranství není tĜeba dosedacích ploch základu pĜekroþit 0,2 mm. NavaĜované
za normálních okolností pĜijímat žádná zvláštní opatĜení na dosedací plochy musí být upraveny na požedovanou
ochranu motorĤ proti povČtrnostním vlivĤm. rovinnost broušením. Podkládají-li se patky motoru pro
Hladina akustického tlaku na mČĜených plochách pĜi 50 nastavení výšky a zabránČní pnutí v motoru plechy, musí být
Hz vyrobeny z válcovaného materiálu odpovídající velikosti.
(DIN EN 21 680 þást 1) EventuelnČ mĤže být žádoucí vyvážení rotoru s pĜenosovým
1LG4, 1LG6 cca 60 až 76 dB(A) þlenem.
1.2 Konstrukþní uspoĜádání a provozní 2.3 Vyvážení, pĜenosové þleny

režim Nasazování a stahování pĜenosových þlenĤ (spojky,
Ĝemenice, ozubené kolo) je tĜeba provádČt s vhodným
Motory 1LG4 a 1LG6 mají v základním provedení vlastní zaĜízením (obr. 7).
chlazení ventilátorem. Motory 1LG. je možné dodávat bez
vlastního ventilátoru jako motory pro pohon ventilátorĤ, který StandardnČ jsou rotory vyváženy s polovinou pera.
je nasazen na konci hĜídele motoru, nebo s cizím chlazením ZpĤsob vyvážení je vyznaþen na þelní stČnČ konce hĜídele (na
(opce G17). Motory 1PP4 a 1PP6 jsou motory s vlastním stranČ pohonu):
chlazením bez ventilátoru. (H = vyvážení s polovinou pera)
U motorĤ jsou patky nality pĜímo na kostĜe statoru, motory lze (F = vyvážení s celým perem - zvláštní provedení)
dodávat s našroubovanými patkami (opce K11/viz obr. 2). PĜi montáži pĜenosových þlenĤ je tĜeba dbát na pĜíslušný
ZmČna upevnČní patek na kostĜe motoru, napĜ. z dĤvodĤ druh vyvážení!
zmČny polohy svorkovnicové skĜínČ, je možná u opce K09, Vyvážení s polovinou pera
K10 a K11. K tomuto úþelu potĜebná vrtání a plochy jsou již U pĜenosových þlenĤ s pomČrem délky náboje „l“ k délce
odpovídajícím zpĤsobem opracovány. konce hĜídele IM < 0,8 a pĜi poþtu otáþek > 1500/min se mohou
U motorĤ s brzdou (napĜ. opce G26) je tĜeba navíc vzít do projevit poruchy klidného chodu (viz. obr. 8). V daném pĜípadČ
úvahy provozní návod brzdy! je tĜeba provést vyvážení, napĜ. odstranit þást pera TP,
Tyto pokyny platí jako doplĖkové k provoznímu návodu pĜeþnívajícího pĜes obrys hĜídele.
pĜíslušného typu motoru. Neplatí pro motory v provedení EEx Je tĜeba dbát všeobecných opatĜení na ochranu pĜed
e.
dotykem pĜenosových þlenĤ. Je-
UPOZORNĚNÍ li motor uvádČn do chodu bez
2. Provoz pĜenosového þlenu, pak je tĜeba pero zajistit proti
Veškeré práce na zaĜízení je vymrštČní.
UPOZORNĚNÍ možné provádČt pouze bez
napČtí. 2.4 PĜipojení
2.1 Transport, skladování NapČtí a frekvence sítČ musí souhlasit s údaji na
výkonnostním štítku. Odchylka ±5% u napČtí nebo frekvence
PĜi transportu je tĜeba využívat veškerá závČsná oka na (u 1ME6 ±3% odchylka frekvence) je pĜípustná ještČ bez
motoru. snížení výkonu. PĜipojení a uspoĜádání propojek provádČt

Siemens AG
20
podle schéma zapojení, které se nachází ve svorkovnicové - pĜenosové þleny jsou správnČ usazeny (napĜ. napnutí
Ĝemene u Ĝemenového pĜevodu) a pĜenosový þlen je
skĜíni. Ochranný vodiþ pĜipojit na svorku .
vhodný pro dané podmínky použití
U pĜipojovacích svorek s U-tĜmeny (napĜ. podle DIN
- veškeré elektrické spoje, upevĖovací šrouby a spojovací
46282) je tĜeba vodiþe rozdČlit tak, aby na obou stranách
prvky jsou pĜedpisovČ pĜipojeny a dotaženy
tĜmenu byla stejná výška pĜipojovaného vodiþe. Tento
zpĤsob pĜipojení tedy vyžaduje, aby jednotlivé vodiþe - ochranný vodiþ je ĜádnČ pĜipojen
byly zahnuty ve tvaru U anebo pĜipojeny pomocí - pĜípadné pĜídavné zaĜízení (brzda, tachogenerátor, cizí
kabelového oka (viz obr. 3.1). To platí také pro pĜipojení ventilace) je funkþní
ochranného vodiþe a vnČjší uzemĖovací vodiþ (viz obr.
- jsou provedena opatĜení proti dotyku pohyblivých þástí a
3.2) - zelenožlutý.
dílĤ pod napČtím
Utahovací momenty pro šroubové spoje elektrických pĜipojení
- nejsou pĜekroþeny maximální pĜípustné otáþky nmax (viz
- pĜipojení svorkových desek (kromČ svorkových lišt) viz obr.
4. výkonnostní štítek)
POZNÁMKA: Maximální pĜípustné otáþky nmax jsou nejvyšší
2.5 PĜezkoušení izolaþního odporu krátkodobČ pĜípustné provozní otáþky. Je tĜeba vzít do
úvahy, že se pĜitom zhoršuje hluþnost a vibrace motoru a
PĜed prvním uvedením motoru do provozu, po delším také snižuje životnost ložisek.
skladování nebo odstavení (cca 6 mČsícĤ), se musí zjistit
izolaþní odpor vinutí. Po namontování motorĤ je tĜeba
UPOZORNĚNÍ zkontrolovat dokonalou funkci
BČhem mČĜení a bezprostĜednČ
UPOZORNĚNÍ po nČm je na svorkách þásteþnČ
brzdy (v pĜípadČ instalace)!
nebezpeþné napČtí a proto se jich nesmíte dotýkat. Tento výþet nemĤže být úplný a proto jsou rovnČž
nezbytné další kontroly.
Izolaþní odpor
- Minimální izolaþní odpor u nového, vyþištČného nebo
opraveného vinutí vĤþi kostĜe þiní 10 MOhm. 3. Údržba
- NejdĜíve je tĜeba vypoþítat kritický izolaþní odpor Rkrit.
Bezpeþnostní opatĜení
Výpoþet se provádí vynásobením jmenovitého napČtí UN,
napĜ. AC 0,69 kV, s konstantou (0,5 MOhm/kV): PĜed zahájením práce na motoru
Rkrit = 0,69 kV x 0,5 MOhm/kV = 0,345 MOhm VAROVÁNÍ nebo zaĜízení, zvláštČ pak pĜed
otevĜením krytĤ aktivních þástí, se
MČĜení musí motor pĜedpisovČ vypnout. Mimo hlavních
Minimální izolaþní odpor vinutí se mČĜí proti kostĜe proudových obvodĤ je tĜeba pĜitom dbát také na
stejnosmČrným napČtím 500 V. PĜitom teplota vinutí je 25oC pĜípadné vedlejší a pomocné proudové okruhy.
±15oC. Existuje „5 obvyklých bezpeþnostních zásad“ ve
Kritický izolaþní odpor je tĜeba mČĜit pĜi provozní teplotČ smyslu napĜ. DIN VDE 0105:
vinutí stejnosmČrným napČtím 500 V. - vypnout
PĜezkoušení - zajistit proti opČtovnému zapnutí
Jestliže u nového, vyþištČného nebo opraveného motoru,
který byl delší dobu skladován nebo odstaven, je minimální - zjistit, zda je zaĜízení bez napČtí
izolaþní odpor vinutí proti kostĜe menší než 10 MOhm, pak - zkontrolovat uzemnČní a propojení na krátko
pĜíþinou mĤže být vlhkost. Vinutí je tĜeba nejdĜíve vysušit. - zakrýt nebo pĜehradit sousední þásti pod napČtím
Po delší dobČ provozu mĤže minimální izolaþní odpor Výše uvedená opatĜení se smí zrušit teprve v pĜípadČ,
poklesnout na hodnotu kritického izolaþního odporu. Pokud když jsou veškeré servisní úkony dokonþeny a motor
namČĜená hodnota nepoklesla pod vypoþtenou hodnotu je kompletnČ smontován.
kritického izolaþního odporu, smí se motor dále provozovat.
Jakmile poklesne pod kritickou hodnotu, musí se motor
okamžitČ vypnout. POZNÁMKA: UzavĜené otvory pro odtok kondenzované vody
Je tĜeba zjistit pĜíþinu a v daném pĜípadČ vinutí nebo jeho se musí obþas otevĜít, aby se mohla vypustit nashromáždČná
þásti nechat opravit, vyþistit nebo nechat vyschnout. kondenzovaná voda.
Otvory pro odtok kondenzované vody jsou vždy v nejnižším
2.6 Uvedení do provozu místČ motoru!
POZNÁMKA: V pĜípadČ silnČ nerovnomČrného kroutícího VýmČna ložisek, životnost maziva, druhy mazacích tukĤ
momentu (napĜ. pohon pístového kompresoru) vynucený Životnost maziva þiní za normálních provozních podmínek, pĜi
motorový proud nemá sinusový tvar, pĜiþemž jeho vyšší vodorovné instalaci motoru, teplotČ chladiva do 40oC a poþtu
harmonické mohou mít nepĜípustný vliv na síĢ a také mĤže otáþek motoru
zpĤsobovat nepĜípustnČ vysoké elektromagnetické rušení. - 1500 ot/min cca. 40.000 provozních hodin
PĜi napájení mČniþem mohou vysokofrekvenþní proudy a - 3000 ot/min cca. 20.000 provozních hodin
napČtí zpĤsobit rušení v pĜívodních vodiþích motoru, proto se
doporuþuje používání odstínČných pĜívodních vedení. Nezávisle na provozních hodinách by se mazací tuk mČl z
dĤvodĤ stárnutí mČnit pĜibližnČ každé 3 roky. Za tímto úþelem
PĜed uvedením do provozu je tĜeba zkontrolovat, zda: je tĜeba ložiska demontovat, vymýt a namazat novým tukem.
- jsou dodrženy hodnoty minimálního izolaþního odporu U provedení s domazáváním je tĜeba dbát údajĤ na štítku
- rotorem lze volnČ pootoþit mazání.
- motor je ĜádnČ namontován a vyrovnán Za zvláštních provozních podmínek, napĜ. svislá instalace
motoru, pĜi þastČjším provozu s maximálním pĜípustným
poþtem otáþek nMAX, pĜi velké zátČži chvČním a rázy a pĜi

Siemens AG
21
þasté reverzaci, se výše uvedené poþty provozních hodin

podstatnČ snižují.
Ve standardním provedení mají motory radiální kuliþková
ložiska Ĝady 62 ... nebo jako opce K36 radiální kuliþková
ložiska Ĝady 63 ... s jedním krycím kroužkem (provedení ZC3).
Krycí kroužek je umístČn na stranČ ložisek, obrácené ke
kostĜe motoru (stator).
POZNÁMKA: PĜi výmČnČ ložisek je tĜeba brát ohled na
uspoĜádání krycího kroužku a vĤli ložiska, ponČvadž to se u
zvláštních provedení mĤže lišit od provedení standardních!
Mazací tuky u standardních strojĤ: (Fa. ESSO / UNIREX
N3); životnost maziv a lhĤty pro domazávání platí pouze ve
spojení s tímto druhem maziva.
Míchání rĤzných druhĤ maziv je nepĜípustné!
Motor demontovat v potĜebném rozsahu. Valivá ložiska
stahovat vhodným zaĜízením (viz obr. 6). Z místa ložiska
odstranit neþistoty! Valivá ložiska vyþistit, resp. vymČnit a
znova namazat.
Volný prostor valivých ložisek zcela naplnit mazacím tukem.
Ložiskové víko resp. ložiskový štít zĤstane bez tukové náplnČ,
aby se tak zabránilo pĜemazání.
o
Ložiska rovnomČrnČ zahĜát asi na 80-120 C a nasadit.
Nepoužívat silné údery (napĜ. kladivem).
PĜípadnČ opotĜebené tČsnicí prvky (napĜ. tČsnČní hĜídele atd.)
je tĜeba rovnČž vymČnit. Jestliže jsou namontovány radiální
hĜídelové tČsnicí kroužky bez pružiny, pak se musí použít také
náhradní díly bez pružiny.
ZaĜízení pro domazávání
U motorĤ se zaĜízením pro domazávání je tĜeba dbát údajĤ na
štítku mazání!
UtČsnČní spár
PĜi montáži strojĤ s druhem ochrany IP 55 nebo vyšším (viz
výkonnostní štítek) se musí þisté montážní plochy mezi
kostrou motoru a ložiskovým štítem utČsnit vhodnou, nikoliv
vytvrzovatelnou, tČsnicí hmotou (napĜ. Hylomar, Curil).
Plastové ventilátory (BG180M ... 315L)
Plastové ventilátory mají dva nálitky, které jako axiální fixace
zapadnou do kruhové drážky na hĜídeli. PĜed stahováním
ventilátoru se musí oba nálitky vysunout (šroubovákem) a v
této poloze pĜechodnČ podržet, napĜ. pomocí vsunutých
pĜíložek. Ventilátory mají v náboji dva otvory pro nasunutí
stahovacího pĜípravku, který se na náboj pĜipevní.
Otvory jsou pĜi dodávce uzavĜeny tenkou vrstvou z umČlé
hmoty, která se pak musí prorazit.
Pro stahování a také pro nasazování se musí zásadnČ
používat vhodný pĜípravek. PĜitom je tĜeba bezpodmíneþnČ
zabránit úderĤm kladiva, aby se nepoškodila ložiska.
Je tĜeba dbát na správné zaskoþení západek do drážky na
hĜídeli.

Siemens AG
22
ɫɨɨɬɜɟɫɬɜɭɸɳɟɝɨ ɬɢɩɚ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɹ. Ɉɧɢ ɧɟ ɢɦɟɸɬ ɫɢɥɭ ɞɥɹ

ȼɨɨɛɳɟ• ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɟɣ ɜ ɢɫɩɨɥɧɟɧɢɢ ȿȿɯ ɟ.
ɇɚɞɨ ɫɥɟɞɢɬɶ ɡɚ ɞɚɧɧɵɦɢ

ɢ ɭɤɚɡɚɧɢɹɦɢ ɜɨ ɜɫɟɯ
2. ɗɤɫɩɥɭɚɬɚɰɢɹ
ɩɨɫɬɚɜɥɹɟɦɵɯ ɢɧɫɬɪɭɤɰɢɹɯ ɩɨ ɨɛɫɥɭɠɢɜɚɧɢɸ ȼɫɟ ɪɚɛɨɬɵ ɧɚ ɭɫɬɪɨɣɫɬɜɟ
ɢ ɩɨɞɨɛɧɵɯ ɢɧɫɬɪɭɤɰɢɹɯ. ɗɬɨ ɧɟɨɛɯɨɞɢɦɨ, ɱɬɨɛɵ ɞɨɥɠɧɵ ɩɪɨɜɨɞɢɬɶɫɹ ɜɫɟɝɞɚ
ɩɪɟɞɨɬɜɪɚɬɢɬɶ ɭɝɪɨɡɭ ɧɟɫɱɚɫɬɧɵɯ ɫɥɭɱɚɟɜ ɢ ɛɟɡ ɧɚɩɪɹɠɟɧɢɹ.
ɩɨɜɪɟɠɞɟɧɢɹ!
2.1 Ɍɪɚɧɫɩɨɪɬ, ɯɪɚɧɟɧɢɟ ɜ ɫɤɥɚɞɟ
Ⱦɨɩɨɥɧɢɬɟɥɶɧɚɹ ɢɧɮɨɪɦɚɰɢɹ ɩɨ ɛɟɡɨɩɚɫɧɨɫɬɢ ɬɪɭɞɚ
(ɠɟɥɬɚɹ) ɩɪɢɥɨɠɟɧɚ. Ɉɧɚ ɫɨɞɟɪɠɢɬ ɞɨɩɨɥɧɢɬɟɥɶɧɵɟ ɉɪɢ ɬɪɚɧɫɩɨɪɬɟ ɧɚɞɨ ɩɨɥɶɡɨɜɚɬɶɫɹ ɜɫɟɦɢ ɫɟɪɶɝɚɦɢ ɧɚ
ɞɚɧɧɵɟ, ɤɚɫɚɸɳɢɟɫɹ ɛɟɡɨɩɚɫɧɨɫɬɢ ɷɥɟɤɬɪɢɱɟɫɤɢɯ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɟ.
ɦɚɲɢɧ. Ɂɧɚɱɢɬ, ɷɬɚ ɢɧɮɨɪɦɚɰɢɹ ɩɨ ɛɟɡɨɩɚɫɧɨɫɬɢ Ⱦɥɹ ɬɪɚɧɫɩɨɪɬɚ ɦɚɲɢɧɧɵɯ ɤɨɦ-
ɹɜɥɹɟɬɫɹ ɞɨɩɨɥɧɟɧɢɟɦ ɞɪɭɝɢɯ ɩɨɫɬɚɜɥɹɟɦɵɯ ɩɥɟɤɬɨɜ (ɧɚɩɪ. ɤɨɦɩɥɟɤɬɚ
ɢɧɫɬɪɭɤɰɢɣ ɩɨ ɨɛɫɥɭɠɢɜɚɧɢɸ ɢ ɩɨɞɨɛɧɵɯ ɢɧɫɬɪɭɤɰɢɣ. ɫ ɤɨɪɨɛɤɨɣ ɩɟɪɟɞɚɱ, ɜɚɤɭɭɦ–ɧɚɫɨɫɨɦ ɢɬɞ.) ɧɚɞɨ
Ⱦɚɥɟɟ ɧɚɞɨ ɩɪɢɧɢɦɚɬɶ ɜɨ ɜɧɢɦɚɧɢɟ ɜɫɟ ɩɪɢɦɟɧɹɬɶ ɬɨɥɶɤɨ ɞɥɹ ɷɬɨɣ ɰɟɥɢ ɩɪɟɞɧɚɡɧɚɱɟɧɧɵɟ
ɞɟɣɫɬɜɭɸɳɢɟ ɧɚɰɢɨɧɚɥɶɧɵɟ, ɦɟɫɬɧɵɟ ɢ ɞɪɭɝɢɟ ɫɟɪɶɝɢ ɢɥɢ ɩɚɥɶɰɵ! Ɂɚɩɪɟɳɚɟɬɫɹ ɩɨɞɧɢɦɚɬɶ ɚɝɪɟɝɚɬɵ
ɫɩɟɰɢɮɢɱɟɫɤɢɟ ɩɨɫɬɚɧɨɜɥɟɧɢɹ ɢ ɬɪɟɛɨɜɚɧɢɹ. ɩɨɞɜɟɫɤɨɣ ɥɢɲɶ ɨɞɧɨɣ ɦɚɲɢɧɵ! ɇɚɞɨ ɫɥɟɞɢɬɶ ɡɚ
Ɍɟɯɧɢɱɟɫɤɢɟ ɞɟɬɚɥɢ ɫɩɟɰɢɚɥɶɧɵɯ ɢɫɩɨɥɧɟɧɢɣ ɫɨɛɥɸɞɚɧɢɟɦ ɝɪɭɡɨɩɨɞɴɟɦɧɨɫɬɢ ɩɨɞɴɟɦɧɨɝɨ
ɢ ɤɨɧɫɬɪɭɤɬɢɜɧɵɯ ɦɨɞɢɮɢɤɚɰɢɣ ɦɨɝɭɬ ɨɬɥɢɱɚɬɶɫɹ. ɦɟɯɚɧɢɡɦɚ!
ȼ ɫɥɭɱɚɟ ɧɟɹɫɧɨɫɬɟɣ ɜɨ ɜɫɹɤɨɦ ɫɥɭɱɚɟ ɪɟɤɨɦɟɧɞɭɟɬɫɹ ɉɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɢ ɤɚɱɟɧɢɹ ɧɚɞɨ ɫɧɨɜɚ ɫɦɚɡɚɬɶ ɢɥɢ ɡɚɦɟɧɢɬɶ
ɨɛɪɚɬɢɬɶɫɹ ɤ ɩɪɨɢɡɜɨɞɢɬɟɥɸ, ɫ ɭɤɚɡɚɧɢɟɦ ɧɚɡɜɚɧɢɹ ɥɢɲɶ ɜ ɫɥɭɱɚɟ, ɱɬɨ ɜɪɟɦɹ ɫ ɩɨɫɬɚɜɤɢ ɞɨ ɜɜɟɞɟɧɢɹ
ɦɨɞɟɥɢ ɢ ɡɚɜɨɞɫɤɨɝɨ ɧɨɦɟɪɚ, ɢɥɢ ɞɨɜɟɪɢɬɶ ɜɫɟ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɹ ɜ ɷɤɫɩɥɭɚɬɚɰɢɸ ɩɪɢ ɭɞɨɛɧɵɯ ɭɫɥɨɜɢɹɯ
ɨɩɟɪɚɰɢɢ ɬɟɯɧɢɱɟɫɤɨɝɨ ɨɛɫɥɭɠɢɜɚɧɢɹ ɫɟɪɜɢɫɧɨɦɭ (ɯɪɚɧɟɧɢɟ ɜ ɫɭɯɢɯ ɩɪɨɫɬɪɚɧɫɬɜɚɯ ɛɟɡ ɩɵɥɢ ɢ ɜɢɛɪɚɰɢɣ)
ɰɟɧɬɪɭ SIEMENS. ɛɨɥɶɲɟ ɬɪɟɯ ɥɟɬ. ɉɪɢ ɧɟɭɞɨɛɧɵɯ ɭɫɥɨɜɢɹɯ ɷɬɨɬ ɫɪɨɤ
ɫɭɳɟɫɬɜɟɧɧɵɦ ɨɛɪɚɡɨɦ ɫɨɤɪɚɳɚɟɬɫɹ. ȼ ɞɚɧɧɨɦ ɫɥɭɱɚɟ
ɧɚɞɨ ɩɪɨɜɟɪɢɬɶ ɫɨɩɪɨɬɢɜɥɟɧɢɟ ɢɡɨɥɹɰɢɢ ɨɛɦɨɬɤɢ, ɫɦ.
ɉɊɂɆȿɑȺɇɂȿ: ɪɢɫ. 2… (ɡɚɩɚɫɧɵɟ ɱɚɫɬɢ) ɫɦɨɬɪɢ ɚɛɡɚɰ 2.5.
ɞɨɩɨɥɧɟɧɢɟ ɧɚ ɫɬɪɚɧɢɰɟ 35-36.
2.2 ɍɫɬɚɧɨɜɤɚ
1. Ɉɩɢɫɚɧɢɟ
ɉɨɫɥɟ ɭɫɬɚɧɨɜɤɢ ɧɚɞɨ ɧɚɜɢɧɱɟɧɧɵɟ ɫɟɪɶɝɢ ɩɨɞɜɟɪɧɭɬɶ
1.1 Ɉɛɥɚɫɬɶ ɩɪɢɦɟɧɟɧɢɹ ɢɥɢ ɨɬɜɢɧɬɢɬɶ!
ɍ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɟɣ ɫ ɧɨɫɤɨɦ ɜɚɥɚ ɜɜɟɪɯ ɢɥɢ ɜɧɢɡ ɧɚɞɨ
Ⱦɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɢ ɦɨɠɧɨ ɭɫɬɚɧɨɜɢɬɶ ɜ ɩɵɥɶɧɨɣ ɢɥɢ ɜɥɚɠɧɨɣ ɨɛɟɫɩɟɱɢɬɶ, ɱɬɨɛɵ ɜ ɜɟɪɯɧɢɣ ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤ ɧɟ ɦɨɝɥɚ
ɫɪɟɞɟ. ɂɡɨɥɹɰɢɹ ɢɫɩɨɥɧɟɧɚ ɞɥɹ ɬɪɨɩɢɱɟɫɤɢɯ ɭɫɥɨɜɢɣ. ȼ ɩɪɨɧɢɤɧɭɬɶ ɜɨɞɚ.
ɫɥɭɱɚɟ ɫɨɨɬɜɟɬɫɬɜɭɸɳɟɝɨ ɯɪɚɧɟɧɢɹ ɜ ɫɤɥɚɞɟ ɢɥɢ
ɩɪɨɮɟɫɫɢɨɧɚɥɶɧɨɣ ɭɫɬɚɧɨɜɤɢ ɧɚ ɨɬɤɪɵɬɨɣ ɩɥɨɳɚɞɤɟ ɩɪɢ Ʉɪɵɲɤɭ ɤɥɟɦɦɧɨɣ ɤɨɪɨɛɤɢ ɞɥɹ ɡɚɠɢɦɧɨɣ ɩɥɚɬɵ ɫ 6 ɫɨɟɞɢ-
ɨ
ɧɨɪɦɚɥɶɧɵɯ ɨɛɫɬɨɹɬɟɥɶɫɬɜɚɯ ɧɟ ɧɚɞɨ ɩɪɢɧɢɦɚɬɶ ɧɢɤɚɤɢɟ ɧɢɬɟɥɶɧɵɦɢ ɡɚɠɢɦɚɦɢ ɦɨɠɧɨ ɩɨɜɟɪɧɭɬɶ ɧɚ 4 ɯ 90 ɢ ɞɥɹ
ɨ
ɨɫɨɛɵɟ ɦɟɪɵ ɞɥɹ ɡɚɳɢɬɵ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɟɣ ɨɬ ɚɬɦɨɫɮɟɪɧɵɯ ɡɚɠɢɦɧɨɣ ɩɥɚɬɵ ɫ 9 ɫɨɟɞɢɧɢɬɟɥɶɧɵɦɢ ɡɚɠɢɦɚɦɢ ɧɚ 180 .
ɜɥɢɹɧɢɣ. ɋɩɨɤɨɣɧɵɣ ɯɨɞ
ɍɪɨɜɟɧɶ ɚɤɭɫɬɢɱɟɫɤɨɝɨ ɞɚɜɥɟɧɢɹ ɧɚ ɢɡɦɟɪɹɟɦɵɯ ɋɬɚɛɢɥɶɧɨɟ ɨɫɧɨɜɚɧɢɟ ɢɥɢ ɭɫɥɨɜɢɹ ɜɫɬɪɚɢɜɚɧɢɹ, ɬɨɱɧɚɹ
ɩɥɨɳɚɞɹɯ ɩɪɢ 50 ɝɰ ɛɚɥɚɧɫɢɪɨɜɤɚ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɟɣ ɢ ɬɚɤɠɟ ɯɨɪɨɲɨ
(DIN EN 21 680 ɱɚɫɬɶ 1) ɤɨɦɩɟɧɫɢɪɨɜɚɧɧɵɣ ɷɥɟɦɟɧɬ ɩɟɪɟɞɚɱɢ – ɷɬɨ ɩɪɟɫɩɨɫɵɥɤɢ
ɫɩɨɤɨɣɧɨɝɨ ɯɨɞɚ ɛɟɡ ɜɢɛɪɚɰɢɣ. ɉɟɪɟɞ ɧɚɱɚɥɨɦ ɦɨɧɬɚɠɧɵɯ
1LG4, 1LG6 ɨɤɨɥɨ 60 – 70 ɞɛ(ɚ) ɪɚɛɨɬ ɞɨɥɠɧɵ ɛɵɬɶ ɨɩɨɪɧɵɟ ɩɨɜɟɪɯɧɨɫɬɢ ɮɭɧɞɚɦɟɧɬɚ
ɞɥɹ ɦɨɧɬɚɠɚ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɹ ɨɱɢɳɟɧɵ ɢ ɩɪɨɜɟɪɟɧɚ ɢɯ
1.2 Ʉɨɧɫɬɪɭɤɬɢɜɧɨɟ ɪɚɫɩɨɥɨɠɟɧɢɟ ɢ ɩɥɨɫɤɨɫɬɧɨɫɬɶ. ɑɬɨɛɵ ɢɫɤɥɸɱɢɬɶ ɧɚɩɪɹɠɟɧɢɟ ɜ ɨɩɨɪɚɯ
ɪɟɠɢɦ ɷɤɫɩɥɭɚɬɚɰɢɢ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɹ, ɨɛɳɚɹ ɩɥɨɫɤɨɫɬɧɨɫɬɶ ɨɩɨɪɧɵɯ ɩɨɜɟɪɯɧɨɫɬɟɣ
ɮɭɧɞɚɦɟɧɬɚ ɧɟ ɞɨɥɠɧɚ ɩɪɟɜɵɲɚɬɶ 0,2 ɦɦ. ɉɪɢɜɚɪɧɵɟ
Ⱦɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɢ 1LG4 ɢ 1LG6 ɜ ɨɫɧɨɜɧɨɦ ɢɫɩɨɥɧɟɧɢɢ ɫɧɚɛɠɟɧɵ ɨɩɨɪɧɵɟ ɩɨɜɟɪɯɧɨɫɬɢ ɞɨɥɠɧɵ ɛɵɬɶ ɨɛɪɚɛɨɬɚɧɵ ɞɨ
ɫɨɛɫɬɜɟɧɧɵɦ ɨɯɥɚɠɞɟɧɢɟɦ ɜɟɧɬɢɥɹɬɨɪɨɦ. Ⱦɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɢ 1LG ɬɪɟɛɭɟɦɨɣ ɩɥɨɫɤɨɫɬɧɨɫɬɢ ɲɥɢɮɨɜɚɧɢɟɦ. ȿɫɥɢ ɨɩɨɪɵ
ɦɨɠɧɨ ɩɨɫɬɚɜɥɹɬɶ ɛɟɡ ɫɨɛɫɬɜɟɧɧɨɝɨ ɜɟɧɬɢɥɹɬɪɚ ɜ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɹ ɩɨɞɤɥɚɞɵɜɚɸɬɫɹ ɞɥɹ ɭɫɬɚɧɨɜɤɢ ɜɵɫɨɬɵ ɢ
ɤɚɱɟɫɬɜɟ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɟɣ ɞɥɹ ɩɪɢɜɨɞɚ ɜɟɧɬɢɥɹɬɨɪɨɜ, ɢɫɤɥɸɱɟɧɢɹ ɧɚɩɪɹɠɟɧɢɣ ɜ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɟ ɫɬɚɥɶɧɵɦɢ ɥɢɫɬɚɦɢ,
ɭɫɬɚɧɨɜɥɟɧɧɨɝɨ ɜ ɧɨɫɤɟ ɜɚɥɚ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɹ, ɢɥɢ ɫ ɜɧɟɲɧɢɦ ɩɨɫɥɟɞɧɢɟ ɞɨɥɠɧɵ ɛɵɬɶ ɢɡɝɨɬɨɜɥɟɧɵ ɢɡ ɩɪɨɤɚɬɧɨɝɨ
ɨɯɥɚɠɞɟɧɢɟɦ (ɨɩɰɢɨɧ G17). Ⱦɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɢ 1PP4 ɢ 1PP6 – ɦɚɬɟɪɢɚɥɚ ɫɨɨɬɜɟɬɫɬɜɭɸɳɟɝɨ ɪɚɡɦɟɪɚ. Ɍɚɤɠɟ ɠɟɥɚɬɟɥɶɧɨ
ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɢ ɫ ɫɨɛɫɬɜɟɧɧɵɦ ɨɯɥɚɠɞɟɧɢɟɦ ɛɟɡ ɜɟɧɬɢɥɹɬɨɪɚ. ɩɪɨɜɟɫɬɢ ɛɚɥɚɧɫɢɪɨɜɤɭ ɪɨɬɨɪɚ ɫ ɩɟɪɟɞɚɬɨɱɧɵɦ ɡɜɟɧɨɦ.
ɉɹɬɵ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɟɣ – ɩɪɢɛɵɥɢ ɩɪɹɦɨ ɧɚ ɤɚɪɤɚɫɟ ɫɬɚɬɨɪɚ.
Ⱦɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɢ ɦɨɠɧɨ ɩɨɫɬɚɜɥɹɬɶ ɫ ɧɚɜɢɧɱɟɧɧɵɦɢ ɩɹɬɚɦɢ 2.3 Ȼɚɥɚɧɫɢɪɨɜɤɚ, ɷɥɟɦɟɧɬɵ ɩɟɪɟɞɚɱɢ
(ɨɩɰɢɨɧ Ʉ11/ɫɦɨɬɪɢ ɪɢɫ. 2). ɂɡɦɟɧɟɧɢɟ ɩɪɢɤɪɟɩɥɟɧɢɹ ɩɹɬ
ɤ ɤɚɪɤɚɫɭ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɹ, ɧɚɩɪ. ɢɡ–ɡɚ ɢɡɦɟɧɟɧɢɹ ɩɨɥɨɠɟɧɢɹ ɍɫɬɚɧɨɜɤɭ ɢ ɫɧɹɬɢɟ ɷɥɟɦɟɧɬɨɜ ɩɟɪɟɞɚɱɢ (ɦɭɮɬɵ,
ɤɥɟɦɦɧɨɣ ɤɨɪɨɛɤɢ, ɜɨɡɦɨɠɧɨ ɭ ɨɩɰɢɨɧɚ Ʉ09, Ʉ10 ɢ Ʉ11. ɪɟɦɟɧɧɨɝɨ ɲɤɢɜɚ, ɲɟɫɬɟɪɧɢ) ɧɚɞɨ ɩɪɨɜɨɞɢɬɶ ɫ ɩɨɦɨɳɶɸ
ɇɭɠɧɵɟ ɞɥɹ ɷɬɨɝɨ ɨɬɜɟɪɫɬɢɹ ɢ ɩɥɨɳɚɞɢ ɭɠɟ ɧɚɞɥɟɠɚɳɢɦ ɭɞɨɛɧɨɝɨ ɭɫɬɪɨɣɫɬɜɚ (ɪɢɫ. 7).
ɨɛɪɚɡɨɦ ɨɛɪɚɛɨɬɚɧɵ. ɋɬɚɧɞɚɪɬɧɵɦ ɨɛɪɚɡɨɦ ɪɨɬɨɪɵ ɛɚɥɚɧɫɢɪɨɜɚɧɵ ɫ ɩɨɥɨ-
ɍ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɟɣ ɫ ɬɨɪɦɨɡɨɦ (ɧɚɩɪ. ɨɩɰɢɨɧ G26) ɧɚɞɨ ɬɚɤɠɟ ɜɢɧɨɣ ɲɩɨɧɤɢ.
ɩɪɢɧɢɦɚɬɶ ɜɨ ɜɧɢɦɚɧɢɟ ɢɧɫɬɪɭɤɰɢɸ ɩɨ ɨɛɫɥɭɠɢɜɚɧɢɸ ɋɩɨɫɨɛ ɛɚɥɚɧɫɢɪɨɜɤɢ ɨɛɨɡɧɚɱɟɧ ɧɚ ɩɟɪɟɞɧɟɣ ɫɬɟɧɟ ɧɨɫɤɚ
ɬɨɪɦɨɡɚ! ɜɚɥɚ (ɧɚ ɫɬɨɪɨɧɟ ɩɪɢɜɨɞɚ);
ɇɚɫɬɨɹɳɢɟ ɭɤɚɡɚɧɢɹ ɞɟɣɫɬɜɢɬɟɥɶɧɵ ɜ ɤɚɱɟɫɬɜɟ (H = ɛɚɥɚɧɫɢɪɨɜɤɚ ɫ ɩɨɥɨɜɢɧɨɣ ɲɩɨɧɤɢ)
ɞɨɩɨɥɧɟɧɢɣ ɤ ɢɧɫɬɪɭɤɰɢɢ ɩɨ ɨɛɫɥɭɠɢɜɚɧɢɸ

Siemens AG
23
(F = ɛɚɥɚɧɫɢɪɨɜɤɚ ɫ ɰɟɥɨɣ ɲɩɨɧɤɨɣ – ɨɫɨɛɨɟ ɢɫɩɨɥɧɟɧɢɟ) Ʉɪɢɬɢɱɟɫɤɨɟ ɫɨɩɪɨɬɢɜɥɟɧɢɟ ɢɡɨɥɹɰɢɢ ɧɚɞɨ ɢɡɦɟɪɹɬɶ
ȼ ɬɟɱɟɧɢɟ ɦɨɧɬɚɠɚ ɷɥɟɦɟɧɬɨɜ ɩɟɪɟɞɚɱɢ ɧɚɞɨ ɫɥɟɞɢɬɶ ɩɪɢ ɪɚɛɨɱɟɣ ɬɟɦɩɟɪɚɬɭɪɟ ɨɛɦɨɬɤɢ ɩɨɫɬɨɹɧɧɵɦ
ɡɚ ɫɨɨɬɜɟɬɫɬɜɭɸɳɢɦ ɜɢɞɨɦ ɛɚɥɚɧɫɢɪɨɜɤɢ! ɧɚɩɪɹɠɟɧɢɟɦ 500 ɜ.
Ȼɚɥɚɧɫɢɪɨɜɤɚ ɫ ɩɨɥɨɜɢɧɨɣ ɲɩɨɧɤɢ ɂɫɩɵɬɚɧɢɟ
ɍ ɷɥɟɦɟɧɬɨɜ ɩɟɪɟɞɚɱɢ ɫ ɨɬɧɨɲɟɧɢɟɦ ɞɥɢɧɵ ɫɬɭɩɢɰɵ „l“ ɤ ȼ ɫɥɭɱɚɟ, ɱɬɨ ɭ ɧɨɜɨɝɨ, ɨɱɢɳɟɧɧɨɝɨ ɢɥɢ
ɞɥɢɧɟ ɧɨɫɤɚ ɜɚɥɚ l < 0,8 ɢ ɩɪɢ ɱɢɫɥɟ ɨɛɨɪɨɬɨɜ > 1500/ɦɢɧ ɨɬɪɟɦɨɧɬɢɪɨɜɚɧɧɨɝɨ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɹ, ɤɨɬɨɪɵɣ ɧɚɯɨɞɢɥɫɹ
M ɩɪɨɞɨɥɠɢɬɟɥɶɧɨɟ ɜɪɟɦɹ ɜ ɫɤɥɚɞɟ ɢɥɢ ɜ ɨɫɬɚɧɨɜɟ,
ɦɨɝɭɬ ɩɪɨɹɜɢɬɶɫɹ ɧɚɪɭɲɟɧɢɹ ɫɩɨɤɨɣɧɨɝɨ ɯɨɞɚ (ɫɦɨɬɪɢ ɪɢɫ. ɦɢɧɢɦɚɥɶɧɨɟ ɫɨɩɪɨɬɢɜɥɟɧɢɟ ɢɡɨɥɹɰɢɢ ɨɛɦɨɬɤɢ ɤɨɪɩɭɫɭ
8). ȼ ɞɚɧɧɨɦ ɫɥɭɱɚɟ ɧɚɞɨ ɩɪɨɜɟɫɬɢ ɛɚɥɚɧɫɢɪɨɜɤɭ, ɧɚɩɪ. ɦɟɧɶɲɟ 10 Ɇɨɦ, ɩɨɬɨɦ ɩɪɢɱɢɧɨɣ ɦɨɠɟɬ ɛɵɬɶ ɜɥɚɠɧɨɫɬɶ.
ɭɫɬɪɚɧɢɬɶ ɱɚɫɬɶ ɲɩɨɧɤɢ Ɍ , ɜɵɫɬɭɩɚɸɳɭɸ ɱɟɪɟɡ ɝɚɛɚɪɢɬ Ɉɛɦɨɬɤɭ ɧɚɞɨ ɩɪɟɠɞɟ ɜɫɟɝɨ ɜɵɫɭɲɢɬɶ.
Ɋ
ɜɚɥɚ. ɉɨɫɥɟ ɩɪɨɞɨɥɠɢɬɟɥɶɧɨɝɨ ɜɪɟɦɟɧɢ ɷɤɫɩɥɭɚɬɚɰɢɢ ɦɨɠɟɬ
ɇɚɞɨ ɫɨɛɥɸɞɚɬɶ ɜɫɟɨɛɳɢɟ ɦɢɧɢɦɚɥɶɧɨɟ ɫɨɩɪɨɬɢɜɥɟɧɢɟ ɢɡɨɥɹɰɢɢ ɩɨɧɢɡɢɬɶɫɹ ɞɨ
ɦɟɪɨɩɪɢɹɬɢɹ ɩɨ ɡɚɳɢɬɟ ɨɬ ɡɧɚɱɟɧɢɹ ɤɪɢɬɢɱɟɫɤɨɝɨ ɫɨɩɪɨɬɢɜɥɟɧɢɹ ɢɡɨɥɹɰɢɢ. ȿɫɥɢ
ɤɨɧɬɚɤɬɚ ɷɥɟɦɟɧɬɨɜ ɩɟɪɟɞɚɱɢ. ȼ ɫɥɭɱɚɟ, ɱɬɨ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɶ ɢɡɦɟɪɟɧɧɨɟ ɡɧɚɱɟɧɢɟ ɧɟ ɩɨɧɢɡɢɥɨɫɶ ɩɨɞ ɜɵɱɢɫɥɟɧɧɨɟ
ɩɪɢɜɨɞɢɬɫɹ ɜ ɞɜɢɠɟɧɢɟ ɛɟɡ ɷɥɟɦɟɧɬɚ ɩɟɪɟɞɚɱɢ, ɧɚɞɨ ɡɧɚɱɟɧɢɟ ɤɪɢɬɢɱɟɫɤɨɝɨ ɫɨɩɪɨɬɢɜɥɟɧɢɹ ɢɡɨɥɹɰɢɢ,
ɡɚɤɪɟɩɢɬɶ ɲɩɨɧɤɭ ɨɬ ɩɨɞɫɤɨɤɚ. ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɶ ɦɨɠɧɨ ɨɫɬɚɜɢɬɶ ɜ ɷɤɫɩɥɭɚɬɚɰɢɢ. Ʉɚɤ ɬɨɥɶɤɨ
ɡɧɚɱɟɧɢɟ ɩɨɧɢɡɢɬɫɹ ɧɢɠɟ ɤɪɢɬɢɱɟɫɤɨɝɨ ɡɧɚɱɟɧɢɹ, ɧɚɞɨ
2.4. ɉɪɢɫɨɟɞɢɧɟɧɢɟ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɶ ɧɟɦɟɞɥɟɧɧɨ ɨɬɤɥɸɱɢɬɶ.
ɇɚɞɨ ɨɩɪɟɞɟɥɢɬɶ ɩɪɢɱɢɧɭ ɢ ɜ ɞɚɧɧɨɦ ɫɥɭɱɚɟ ɨɛɦɨɬɤɭ ɢɥɢ
ɇɚɩɪɹɠɟɧɢɟ ɢ ɱɚɫɬɨɬɚ ɫɟɬɢ ɞɨɥɠɧɵ ɨɬɜɟɱɚɬɶ ɞɚɧɧɵɦ ɧɚ ɟɟ ɱɚɫɬɶ ɨɬɪɟɦɨɧɬɢɪɨɜɚɬɶ, ɨɱɢɫɬɢɬɶ ɢɥɢ ɩɪɨɫɭɲɢɬɶ.
ɬɚɛɥɢɱɤɟ ɫ ɩɚɫɩɨɪɬɧɵɦɢ ɞɚɧɧɵɦɢ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɹ. Ɉɬɤɥɨɧɟɧɢɟ
±5% ɧɚɩɪɹɠɟɧɢɹ ɢɥɢ ɱɚɫɬɨɬɵ (ɞɥɹ 1ME6 ±3% ɨɬɤɥɨɧɟɧɢɟ 2.6 ȼɜɟɞɟɧɢɟ ɜ ɷɤɫɩɥɭɚɬɚɰɢɸ
ɱɚɫɬɨɬɵ) ɞɨɩɭɫɤɚɟɬɫɹ ɟɳɟ ɛɟɡ ɩɨɧɢɠɟɧɢɹ ɦɨɳɧɨɫɬɢ.
ɉɪɢɫɨɟɞɢɧɟɧɢɟ ɢ ɪɚɫɩɨɥɨɠɟɧɢɟ ɫɨɟɞɢɧɢɬɟɥɟɣ ɧɚɞɨ ɉɊɂɆȿɑȺɇɂȿ: ȼ ɫɥɭɱɚɟ ɫɢɥɶɧɨ ɧɟɪɚɜɧɨɦɟɪɧɨɝɨ
ɩɪɨɜɨɞɢɬɶ ɫɨɝɥɚɫɧɨ ɫɯɟɦɟ ɜɤɥɸɱɟɧɢɹ, ɤɨɬɨɪɚɹ ɧɚɯɨɞɢɬɫɹ ɤɪɭɬɹɳɟɝɨ ɦɨɦɟɧɬɚ (ɧɚɩɪ. ɩɪɢɜɨɞ ɩɨɪɲɧɟɜɨɝɨ
ɜ ɤɥɟɦɦɧɨɣ ɤɨɪɨɛɤɟ. Ɂɚɳɢɬɧɵɣ ɩɪɨɜɨɞ ɧɚɞɨ ɤɨɦɩɪɟɫɫɨɪɚ) ɜɵɧɭɠɞɟɧɧɵɣ ɬɨɤ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɹ ɧɟ ɢɦɟɟɬ
ɩɪɢɫɨɟɞɢɧɢɬɶ ɤ ɡɚɠɢɦɭ . ɫɢɧɭɫɧɭɸ ɮɨɪɦɭ, ɩɪɢɱɟɦ ɟɝɨ ɜɵɫɲɢɟ ɝɚɪɦɨɧɢɤɢ ɦɨɝɭɬ
ɧɟɛɥɚɝɨɩɪɢɹɬɧɨ ɩɨɜɥɢɹɬɶ ɧɚ ɫɟɬɶ ɢ ɦɨɝɭɬ ɬɚɤɠɟ ɜɵɡɜɚɬɶ
Ⱦɥɹ ɩɪɢɫɨɟɞɢɧɢɬɟɥɶɧɵɯ ɡɚɠɢɦɨɜ ɫ ɯɨɦɭɬɚɦɢ ɜ ɧɟɞɨɩɭɫɬɢɦɨɟ ɜɵɫɨɤɢɟ ɷɥɟɤɬɪɨ-ɦɚɝɧɢɬɧɵɟ ɩɨɦɟɯɢ.
ɮɨɪɦɟ U (ɧɚɩɪ. ɫɨɝɥɚɫɧɨ DIN 46282) ɧɚɞɨ
ɪɚɫɩɪɟɞɟɥɢɬɶ ɩɪɨɜɨɞɵ ɬɚɤɢɦ ɨɛɪɚɡɨɦ, ɱɬɨɛɵ ɧɚ ȼ ɫɥɭɱɚɟ ɩɢɬɚɧɢɹ ɩɪɟɨɛɪɚɡɨɜɚɬɟɥɟɦ ɦɨɝɭɬ
ɨɛɟɢɯ ɫɬɨɪɨɧɚɯ ɯɨɦɭɬɚ ɛɵɥɚ ɨɞɢɧɚɤɨɜɚɹ ɜɵɫɨɬɚ ɜɵɫɨɤɨɱɚɫɬɨɬɧɵɟ ɬɨɤɢ ɢ ɧɚɩɪɹɠɟɧɢɹ ɜɵɡɜɚɬɶ ɩɨɦɟɯɢ ɜ
ɩɪɢɫɨɟɞɢɧɹɟɦɨɝɨ ɩɪɨɜɨɞɚ. Ɂɧɚɱɢɬ, ɷɬɨɬ ɫɩɨɫɨɛ ɩɨɞɜɨɞɧɵɯ ɩɪɨɜɨɞɚɯ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɹ, ɩɨɷɬɨɦɭ ɪɟɤɨɦɟɧɞɭɟɬɫɹ
ɩɪɢɫɨɟɞɢɧɟɧɢɹ ɬɪɟɛɭɟɬ, ɱɬɨɛɵ ɨɬɞɟɥɶɧɵɟ ɩɪɨɜɨɞɵ ɩɪɢɦɟɧɹɬɶ ɷɤɪɚɧɢɪɨɜɚɧɧɭɸ ɩɨɞɜɨɞɧɭɸ ɥɢɧɢɸ.
ɛɵɥɢ ɨɛɨɝɧɭɬɵ ɜ ɮɨɪɦɟ U ɢɥɢ ɩɪɢɫɨɟɞɢɧɟɧɵ ɫ ɉɟɪɟɞ ɜɜɟɞɟɧɢɟɦ ɜ ɷɤɫɩɥɭɚɬɚɰɢɸ ɧɚɞɨ ɩɪɨɜɟɪɢɬɶ,
ɩɨɦɨɳɶɸ ɤɚɛɟɥɶɧɨɝɨ ɧɚɤɨɧɟɱɧɢɤɚ (ɫɦɨɬɪɢ ɪɢɫ. 3.1). ɟɫɥɢ:
Ɍɨ ɠɟ ɫɚɦɨɟ ɞɟɣɫɬɜɭɟɬ ɞɥɹ ɩɪɢɫɨɟɞɢɧɟɧɢɹ ɡɚɳɢɬɧɨɝɨ – ɫɨɛɥɸɞɟɧɵ ɡɧɚɱɟɧɢɹ ɦɢɧɢɦɚɥɶɧɨɝɨ ɫɨɩɪɨɬɢɜɥɟɧɢɹ
ɩɪɨɜɨɞɚ ɢ ɜɧɟɲɧɟɝɨ ɩɪɨɜɨɞɚ ɡɚɡɟɦɥɟɧɢɹ (ɫɦɨɬɪɢ ɪɢɫ. ɢɡɨɥɹɰɢɢ
3.2) – ɡɟɥɟɧɨɠɟɥɬɵɣ.
– ɪɨɬɨɪɨɦ ɦɨɠɧɨ ɫɜɨɛɨɞɧɨ ɩɨɜɨɪɚɱɢɜɚɬɶ
Ɂɚɬɹɠɧɵɟ ɦɨɦɟɧɬɵ ɞɥɹ ɜɢɧɬɨɜɵɯ ɫɨɟɞɢɧɟɧɢɣ
– ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɶ ɧɚɞɥɟɠɚɳɢɦ ɨɛɪɚɡɨɦ ɩɪɢɤɪɟɩɥɟɧ ɢ
ɷɥɟɤɬɪɢɱɟɫɤɢɯ ɩɪɢɫɨɟɞɢɧɟɧɢɣ – ɩɪɢɫɨɟɞɢɧɟɧɢɟ ɡɚɠɢɦɧɵɯ
ɛɚɥɚɧɫɢɪɨɜɚɧ
ɩɥɚɬ (ɤɪɨɦɟ ɡɚɠɢɦɧɵɯ ɩɥɚɧɨɤ) ɫɦɨɬɪɢ ɪɢɫ. 4.
– ɷɥɟɦɟɧɬɵ ɩɟɪɟɞɚɱɢ ɩɪɚɜɢɥɶɧɨ ɭɫɬɚɧɨɜɥɟɧɵ (ɧɚɩɪ.
2.5. ɂɫɩɵɬɚɧɢɟ ɫɨɩɪɨɬɢɜɥɟɧɢɹ ɢɡɨɥɹɰɢɢ ɧɚɬɹɠɤɚ ɪɟɦɧɹ ɭ ɪɟɦɟɧɧɨɣ ɩɟɪɟɞɚɱɢ) ɢ ɟɫɥɢ ɷɥɟɦɟɧɬ
ɩɟɪɟɞɚɱɢ ɭɞɨɛɧɵɣ ɞɥɹ ɞɚɧɧɵɯ ɭɫɥɨɜɢɣ ɩɪɢɦɟɧɟɧɢɹ
Ⱦɨ ɩɟɪɜɨɝɨ ɜɜɨɞɚ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɹ ɜ ɷɤɫɩɥɭɚɬɚɰɢɸ, ɩɨɫɥɟ – ɜɫɟ ɷɥɟɤɬɪɢɱɟɫɤɢɟ ɫɨɟɞɢɧɟɧɢɹ, ɫɨɟɞɢɧɢɬɟɥɶɧɵɟ ɜɢɧɬɵ
ɩɪɨɞɨɥɠɢɬɟɥɶɧɨɝɨ ɯɪɚɧɟɧɢɹ ɜ ɫɤɥɚɞɟ ɢɥɢ ɨɫɬɚɧɨɜɚ (ɨɤɨɥɨ ɢ ɷɥɟɦɟɧɬɵ ɧɚɞɥɟɠɚɳɢɦ ɨɛɪɚɡɨɦ ɩɪɢɫɨɟɞɢɧɟɧɵ ɢ
6 ɦɟɫɹɰɟɜ) ɧɚɞɨ ɭɫɬɚɧɨɜɢɬɶ ɫɨɩɪɨɬɢɜɥɟɧɢɟ ɢɡɨɥɹɰɢɢ ɡɚɬɹɧɭɬɵ
ɨɛɦɨɬɤɢ.
– ɡɚɳɢɬɧɵɣ ɩɪɨɜɨɞ ɧɚɞɥɟɠɚɳɢɦ ɨɛɪɚɡɨɦ ɩɪɢɫɨɟɞɢɧɟɧ
ȼ ɬɟɱɟɧɢɟ ɢɡɦɟɪɟɧɢɹ ɢ
ɧɟɩɨɫɪɟɞ-ɫɬɜɟɧɧɨ ɩɨɫɥɟ ɧɟɝɨ ɧɚ – ɷɜɟɧɬɭɚɥɶɧɨɟ ɞɨɩɨɥɧɢɬɟɥɶɧɨɟ ɭɫɬɪɨɣɫɬɜɨ (ɬɨɪɦɨɡ,
ɡɚɠɢɦɚɯ ɨɫɬɚɟɬɫɹ ɱɚɫɬɢɱɧɨ ɬɚɯɨɝɟɧɟɪɚɬɨɪ, ɜɧɟɲɧɹɹ ɜɟɧɬɢɥɹɰɢɹ) ɪɚɛɨɬɚɟɬ
ɨɩɚɫɧɨɟ ɧɚɩɪɹ-ɠɟɧɢɟ, ɢ ɩɨɷɬɨɦɭ ɡɚɩɪɟɳɚɟɬɫɹ – ɩɪɢɧɹɬɵ ɦɟɪɵ ɩɪɨɬɢɜ ɤɨɧɬɚɤɬɚ ɞɜɢɠɭɳɢɯɫɹ ɱɚɫɬɟɣ ɢ
ɤɚɫɚɬɶɫɹ ɢɯ. ɞɟɬɚɥɟɣ ɩɨɞ ɧɚɩɪɹɠɟɧɢɟɦ
ɋɨɩɪɨɬɢɜɥɟɧɢɟ ɢɡɨɥɹɰɢɢ – ɧɟ ɩɪɟɜɵɲɟɧɵ ɦɚɤɫɢɦɚɥɶɧɵɟ ɞɨɩɭɫɬɢɦɵɟ ɨɛɨɪɨɬɵ nmax
- Ɇɢɧɢɦɚɥɶɧɨɟ ɫɨɩɪɨɬɢɜɥɟɧɢɟ ɢɡɨɥɹɰɢɢ ɤɨɪɩɭɫɭ ɭ ɧɨɜɨɣ, (ɫɦɨɬɪɢ ɬɚɛɥɢɱɤɭ ɦɨɳɧɨɫɬɟɣ)
ɨɱɢɳɟɧɧɨɣ ɢɥɢ ɢɫɩɪɚɜɥɟɧɧɨɣ ɨɛɦɨɬɤɢ ɫɨɫɬɚɜɥɹɟɬ 10
ɉɊɂɆȿɑȺɇɂȿ: Ɇɚɤɫɢɦɚɥɶɧɵɟ ɞɨɩɭɫɬɢɦɵɟ ɨɛɨɪɨɬɵ
Ɇɨɦ.
nmax – ɫɚɦɵɟ ɜɵɫɨɤɢɟ ɤɪɚɬɤɨɫɪɨɱɧɨ ɞɨɩɭɫɬɢɦɵɟ ɪɚɛɨɱɢɟ
– ɉɪɟɠɞɟ ɜɫɟɝɨ ɧɚɞɨ ɜɵɱɢɫɥɢɬɶ ɤɪɢɬɢɱɟɫɤɨɟ ɨɛɨɪɨɬɵ. ɇɚɞɨ ɩɪɢɧɢɦɚɬɶ ɜɨ ɜɧɢɦɚɧɢɟ, ɱɬɨ ɩɪɢɬɨɦ
ɫɨɩɪɨɬɢɜɥɟɧɢɟ ɢɡɨɥɹɰɢɢ Rkrit. ȼɵɱɢɫɥɟɧɢɟ ɩɪɨɜɨɞɢɬɫɹ ɭɯɭɞɲɚɟɬɫɹ ɲɭɦɧɵɣ ɯɨɞ ɢ ɜɢɛɪɚɰɢɢ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɹ ɢ ɬɚɤɠɟ
ɭɦɧɨɠɟɧɢɟɦ ɧɨɦɢɧɚɥɶɧɨɝɨ ɧɚɩɪɹɠɟɧɢɹ UN, ɧɚɩɪ. AC ɩɨɧɢɠɚɟɬɫɹ ɫɪɨɤ ɫɥɭɠɛɵ ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɨɜ.
0,69 ɤɜ, ɫ ɤɨɧɫɬɚɧɬɨɣ (0,5 Ɇɨɦ/ɤɜ). ɉɨɫɥɟ ɩɪɢɤɪɟɩɥɟɧɢɹ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɟɣ
Rɤɪɢɬ = 0,69 ɤɜ ɯ 0,5 Ɇɨɦ/ɤɜ = 0,345 Ɇɨɦ ɧɚɞɨ ɩɪɨɜɟɪɢɬɶ ɫɨɜɟɪɲɟɧɧɭɸ
ɪɚɛɨɬɭ ɬɨɪɦɨɡɚ (ɜ ɫɥɭɱɚɟ
ɂɡɦɟɪɟɧɢɟ
ɭɫɬɚɧɨɜɤɢ)!
Ɇɢɧɢɦɚɥɶɧɨɟ ɫɨɩɪɨɬɢɜɥɟɧɢɟ ɢɡɨɥɹɰɢɢ ɨɛɦɨɬɤɢ
ɤɨɪɩɭɫɭ ɢɡɦɟɪɹɟɬɫɹ ɩɨɫɬɨɹɧɧɵɦ ɧɚɩɪɹɠɟɧɢɟɦ 500 ɜ. ɗɬɨɬ ɩɟɪɟɱɟɧɶ ɧɟ ɦɨɠɟɬ ɛɵɬɶ ɩɨɥɧɵɦ, ɢ ɩɨɷɬɨɦɭ
ɨ ɨ
ɉɪɢɬɨɦ ɬɟɦɩɟɪɚɬɭɪɚ ɨɛɦɨɬɤɢ 25 ɋ ± 15 ɋ. ɧɟɨɛɯɨɞɢɦɵ ɟɳɟ ɞɪɭɝɢɟ ɤɨɧɬɪɨɥɢ.

Siemens AG
24
3. ɍɯɨɞ ɋɦɟɲɢɜɚɧɢɟ ɪɚɡɧɵɯ ɜɢɞɨ ɫɦɚɡɨɤ ɧɟ ɞɨɩɭɫɤɚɟɬɫɹ!

Ⱦɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɶ ɪɚɡɨɛɪɚɬɶ ɜ ɧɭɠɧɨɦ ɨɛɴɟɦɟ. ɉɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɢ
Ɇɟɪɵ ɛɟɡɨɩɚɫɧɨɫɬɢ ɤɚɱɟɧɢɹ ɫɬɹɝɢɜɚɬɶ ɭɞɨɛɧɵɦ ɭɫɬɪɨɣɫɬɜɨɦ (ɫɦɨɬɪɢ ɪɢɫ. 6).
ɂɡ ɦɟɫɬɚ ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɚ ɭɫɬɪɚɧɢɬɶ ɝɪɹɡɢ! ɉɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɢ
ɉɪɟɠɞɟ ɱɟɦ ɧɚɱɚɬɶ ɪɚɛɨɬɭ ɧɚ ɤɚɱɟɧɢɹ ɨɱɢɫɬɢɬɶ, ɷɜɟɧɬ. ɡɚɦɟɧɢɬɶ ɢ ɫɧɨɜɚ ɫɦɚɡɚɬɶ.
ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɸ ɢɥɢ ɭɫɬɪɨɣɫɬɜɟ, ɋɜɨɛɨɞɧɨɟ ɩɪɨɫɬɪɚɧɫɬɜɨ ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɨɜ ɤɚɱɟɧɢɹ ɩɨɥɧɨɫɬɶɸ
ɨɫɨɛɟɧɧɨ ɩɪɟɠɞɟ ɱɟɦ ɨɬɤɪɵɬɶ ɡɚɩɨɥɧɢɬɶ ɫɦɚɡɤɨɣ. Ʉɨɠɭɯ ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɚ, ɢɥɢ
ɤɨɠɭɯɢ ɚɤɬɢɜɧɵɯ ɱɚɫɬɟɣ, ɧɚɞɨ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɶ ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɨɜɵɣ ɳɢɬ ɨɫɬɚɸɬɫɹ ɛɟɡ ɫɦɚɡɤɢ, ɱɬɨɛɵ
ɜɵɤɥɸɱɢɬɶ ɩɪɟɞɩɢɫɚɧɧɵɦ ɨɛɪɚɡɨɦ. Ʉɪɨɦɟ ɩɪɟɞɨɬɜɪɚɬɢɬɶ ɢɡɥɢɲɧɸɸ ɫɦɚɡɤɭ.
ɝɥɚɜɧɵɯ ɰɟɩɟɣ ɬɨɤɚ ɧɚɞɨ ɩɪɢɬɨɦ ɫɥɟɞɢɬɶ ɬɚɤɠɟ ɡɚ
ɜɨɡɦɨɠɧɵɦɢ ɞɨɩɨɥɧɢɬɟɥɶ-ɧɵɦɢ ɢ ɉɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɢ ɪɚɜɧɨɦɟɪɧɨ ɨɛɨɝɪɟɬɶ ɩɪɢɛɥɢɡɢɬɟɥɶɧɨ ɞɨ 80
ɨ
ɜɫɩɨɦɨɝɚɬɟɥɶɧɵɦɢ ɰɟɩɹɦɢ ɬɨɤɚ. – 120 ɋ ɢ ɭɫɬɚɧɨɜɢɬɶ. ɇɟ ɩɪɢɦɟɧɹɬɶ ɫɢɥɶɧɵɟ ɭɞɚɪɵ (ɧɚɩɪ.
ɦɨɥɨɬɨɦ).
ɋɭɳɟɫɬɜɭɟɬ ”5 ɨɛɵɤɧɨɜɟɧɧɵɯ ɩɪɢɧɰɢɩɨɜ
ɛɟɡɨɩɚɫɧɨɫɬɢ” ɜ ɫɦɵɫɥɟ ɧɚɩɪ. DIN VDE 0105: ɗɜɟɧɬɭɚɥɶɧɵɟ ɢɡɧɨɲɟɧɧɵɟ ɭɩɥɨɬɧɹɸɳɢɟ ɷɥɟɦɟɧɬɵ (ɧɚɩɪ.
ɭɩɥɨɬɧɟɧɢɟ ɜɚɥɚ ɢɬɞ.) ɧɚɞɨ ɬɚɤɠɟ ɡɚɦɟɧɢɬɶ. ȼ ɫɥɭɱɚɟ, ɱɬɨ
– ɜɵɤɥɸɱɢɬɶ
ɜɦɨɧɬɢɪɨɜɚɧɵ ɪɚɞɢɚɥɶɧɵɟ ɭɩɥɨɬɧɢɬɟɥɶɧɵɟ ɤɨɥɶɰɚ ɜɚɥɨɜ
– ɨɛɟɫɩɟɱɢɬɶ ɩɪɨɬɢɜ ɩɨɜɬɨɪɧɨɝɨ ɜɤɥɸɱɟɧɢɹ ɛɟɡ ɲɩɨɧɤɢ, ɧɚɞɨ ɩɪɢɦɟɧɢɬɶ ɡɚɩɚɫɧɵɟ ɱɚɫɬɢ ɬɚɤɠɟ ɛɟɡ
– ɩɪɨɜɟɪɢɬɶ, ɟɫɥɢ ɭɫɬɪɨɣɫɬɜɨ ɛɟɡ ɧɚɩɪɹɠɟɧɢɹ ɲɩɨɧɤɢ.
– ɩɪɨɜɟɪɢɬɶ ɡɚɡɟɦɥɟɧɢɟ ɢ ɡɚɦɵɤɚɧɢɟ ɧɚɤɨɪɨɬɤɨ ɍɫɬɪɨɣɫɬɜɨ ɞɥɹ ɞɨɩɨɥɧɢɬɟɥɶɧɨɣ ɫɦɚɡɤɢ
ɍ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɟɣ ɫ ɭɫɬɪɨɣɫɬɜɨɦ ɞɥɹ ɞɨɩɨɥɧɢɬɟɥɶɧɨɣ ɫɦɚɡɤɢ
– ɡɚɤɪɵɬɶ ɢɥɢ ɩɟɪɟɝɨɪɨɞɢɬɶ ɫɨɫɟɞɧɢɟ ɱɚɫɬɢ ɩɨɞ
ɧɚɞɨ ɫɥɟɞɢɬɶ ɡɚ ɞɚɧɧɵɦɢ ɧɚ ɬɚɛɥɢɱɤɟ ɫɦɚɡɤɢ!
ɧɚɩɪɹ-ɠɟɧɢɟɦ
ɍɩɥɨɬɧɟɧɢɟ ɡɚɡɨɪɨɜ
ȼɵɲɟɩɪɢɜɟɞɟɧɧɵɟ ɦɟɪɵ ɦɨɠɧɨ ɨɬɦɟɧɢɬɶ ɬɨɥɶɤɨ
ɉɪɢ ɫɛɨɪɤɟ ɦɚɲɢɧ ɫ ɜɢɞɨɦ ɡɚɳɢɬɵ ɂɉ 55 ɢɥɢ ɛɨɥɶɲɟ
ɜ ɫɥɭɱɚɟ, ɤɨɝɞɚ ɜɫɟ ɫɟɪɜɢɫɧɵɟ ɨɩɟɪɚɰɢɢ ɨɤɨɧɱɟɧɵ
(ɫɦɨɬɪɢ ɬɚɛɥɢɱɤɭ ɦɨɳɧɨɫɬɟɣ) ɱɢɫɬɵɟ ɦɨɧɬɚɠɧɵɟ ɩɥɨɳɚɞɢ
ɢ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɶ ɩɨɥɧɨɫɬɶɸ ɫɦɨɧɬɢɪɨɜɚɧ.
ɦɟɠɞɭ ɤɚɪɤɚɫɨɦ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɹ ɢ ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɨɜɵɦ ɳɢɬɨɦ ɧɚɞɨ
ɭɩɥɨɬɧɢɬɶ ɭɞɨɛɧɨɣ, ɧɟɨɬɜɟɪɠɞɚɸɳɟɣ ɭɩɥɨɬɧɹɸɳɟɣ
ɉɊɂɆȿɑȺɇɂȿ: Ɂɚɤɪɵɬɵɟ ɨɬɜɟɪɫɬɢɹ ɞɥɹ ɫɬɨɤɚ ɦɚɫɫɨɣ (ɧɚɩɪ. Hylomar, Curil).
ɤɨɧɞɟɧɫɢɪɨɜɚɧɧɨɣ ɜɨɞɵ ɧɚɞɨ ɜɪɟɦɹ ɨɬ ɜɪɟɦɟɧɢ ɨɬɤɪɵɬɶ, ɉɥɚɫɬɨɜɵɟ ɜɟɧɬɢɥɹɬɨɪɵ (BG180M … 315L)
ɱɬɨɛɵ ɜɨɡɦɨɠɧɨ ɛɵɥɨ ɜɵɩɭɫɬɢɬɶ ɧɚɤɨɩɥɟɧɧɭɸ ɍ ɩɥɚɫɬɨɜɵɯ ɜɟɧɬɢɥɹɬɨɪɨɜ ɞɜɟ ɩɪɢɛɵɥɢ, ɤɨɬɨɪɵɟ ɜ
ɤɨɧɞɟɧɫɢɪɨɜɚɧɧɭɸ ɜɨɞɭ. ɤɚɱɟɫɬɜɟ ɚɤɫɢɚɥɶɧɨɣ ɮɢɤɫɚɰɢɢ ɭɥɨɠɚɬɫɹ ɜ ɤɪɭɝɥɵɣ ɩɚɡ ɧɚ
Ɉɬɜɟɪɫɬɢɹ ɞɥɹ ɫɬɨɤɚ ɤɨɧɞɟɧɫɢɪɨɜɚɧɧɨɣ ɜɨɞɵ ɧɚɯɨɞɹɬɫɹ ɜɚɥɟ. ɉɪɟɠɞɟ ɱɟɦ ɫɬɹɝɢɜɚɬɶ ɜɟɧɬɢɥɹɬɨɪ, ɧɚɞɨ ɨɛɟ
ɜɫɟɝɞɚ ɜ ɫɚɦɨɦ ɧɢɡɤɨɦ ɦɟɫɬɟ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɹ! ɩɪɢɛɵɥɢ ɜɵɫɭɧɭɬɶ (ɨɬɜɟɪɬɤɨɣ) ɢ ɜ ɷɬɨɦ ɩɨɥɨɠɟɧɢɢ
ɜɪɟɦɟɧɧɨ ɩɨɞɞɟɪɠɚɬɶ, ɧɚɩɪ. ɫ ɩɨɦɨɳɶɸ ɜɫɭɧɭɬɵɯ
Ɉɛɦɟɧ ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɨɜ, ɫɪɨɤ ɫɥɭɠɛɵ ɫɦɚɡɤɢ, ɜɢɞɵ ɧɚɤɥɚɞɨɤ. ȼɨ ɜɬɭɥɤɟ ɜɟɧɬɢɥɹɬɨɪɚ ɞɜɟ ɨɬɜɟɪɫɬɢɹ ɞɥɹ
ɫɦɚɡɤɢ ɧɚɞɜɢɝɚ ɫɬɹɝɢɜɚɸɳɟɝɨ ɩɪɢɫɩɨɫɨɛɥɟɧɢɹ, ɤɨɬɨɪɨɟ
ɋɪɨɤ ɫɥɭɠɛɵ ɫɦɚɡɤɢ ɩɪɢ ɧɨɪɦɚɥɶɧɵɯ ɭɫɥɨɜɢɣ ɩɪɢɤɪɟɩɢɬɫɹ ɧɚ ɜɬɭɥɤɭ.
ɷɤɫɩɥɭɚɬɚɰɢɢ, ɩɪɢ ɝɨɪɢɡɨɧɬɚɥɶɧɨɣ ɭɫɬɚɧɨɜɤɟ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɹ, ɉɪɢ ɩɨɫɬɚɜɤɟ ɨɬɜɟɪɫɬɢɹ ɡɚɤɪɵɬɵ ɬɨɧɤɢɦ ɫɥɨɟɦ
ɨ
ɬɟɦɩɟɪɚɬɭɪɟ ɨɯɥɚɠɞɚɸɳɟɝɨ ɫɪɟɞɫɬɜɚ ɞɨ 40 ɋ ɢ ɱɢɫɥɟ ɩɥɚɫɬɦɚɫɫɵ, ɤɨɬɨɪɵɣ ɧɚɞɨ ɩɪɨɛɢɬɶ.
ɨɛɨɪɨɬɨɜ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɹ
Ⱦɥɹ ɫɬɚɝɢɜɚɧɢɹ ɢ ɬɚɤɠɟ ɞɥɹ ɭɫɬɚɧɨɜɤɢ ɧɚɞɨ ɜɫɟɝɞɚ
– 1500 ɨɛ/ɦɢɧ ɨɤɨɥɨ 40.000 ɱɚɫɨɜ ɷɤɫɩɥɭɚɬɚɰɢɢ ɩɪɢɦɟɧɹɬɶ ɭɞɨɛɧɨɟ ɩɪɢɫɩɨɫɨɛɥɟɧɢɟ. ɉɪɢɬɨɦ ɧɚɞɨ
– 3000 ɨɛ/ɦɢɧ ɨɤɨɥɨ 20.000 ɱɚɫɨɜ ɷɤɫɩɥɭɚɬɚɰɢɢ ɛɟɡɭɫɥɨɜɧɨ ɩɪɟɞɨɬ-ɜɪɚɬɢɬɶ ɭɞɚɬɵ ɦɨɥɨɬɨɦ, ɱɬɨɛɵ ɧɟ
ɩɨɜɪɟɞɢɬɶ ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɢ.
ɇɟɡɚɜɢɫɢɦɨ ɨɬ ɱɚɫɨɜ ɷɤɫɩɥɭɚɬɚɰɢɢ ɫɦɚɡɤɭ ɧɚɞɨ ɢɡ–ɡɚ ɟɟ
ɫɬɚɪɟɧɢɹ ɦɟɧɹɬɶ ɩɪɢɛɥɢɡɢɬɟɥɶɧɨ ɜɫɟɝɞɚ ɩɨɫɥɟ ɬɪɟɯ ɥɟɬ. ɇɚɞɨ ɫɥɟɞɢɬɶ ɡɚ ɬɟɦ, ɱɬɨɛɵ ɡɚɳɟɥɤɢ ɩɪɚɜɢɥɶɧɨ
Ⱦɥɹ ɷɬɨɣ ɰɟɥɢ ɧɚɞɨ ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɢ ɪɚɡɨɛɪɚɬɶ, ɜɵɦɵɬɶ ɢ ɭɥɨɠɢɥɢɫɶ ɜ ɩɚɡ ɧɚ ɜɚɥɟ.
ɫɧɨɜɚ ɫɦɚɡɚɬɶ. ȼ ɫɥɭɱɚɟ ɢɫɩɨɥɧɟɧɢɹ ɫ ɞɨɩɨɥɧɢɬɟɥɶɧɨɣ
ɫɦɚɡɤɨɣ ɧɚɞɨ ɫɨɛɥɸɞɚɬɶ ɞɚɧɧɵɟ ɧɚ ɬɚɛɥɢɱɤɟ ɫɦɚɡɤɢ.
ɉɪɢ ɨɫɨɛɵɯ ɭɫɥɨɜɢɹɯ ɷɤɫɩɥɭɚɬɚɰɢɢ, ɧɚɩɪ. ɜɟɪɬɢɤɚɥɶɧɨɣ
ɭɫɬɚɧɨɜɤɟ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɹ, ɩɪɢ ɛɨɥɟɟ ɱɚɫɬɨɣ ɷɤɫɩɥɭɚɬɚɰɢɢ
ɫ ɦɚɤɫɢɦɚɥɶɧɵɦ ɞɨɩɭɫɬɢɦɵɦ ɱɢɫɥɨɦ ɨɛɨɪɨɬɨɜ n , ɩɪɢ
max
ɛɨɥɶɲɨɣ ɧɚɝɪɭɡɤɟ ɜɢɛɪɚɰɢɟɣ ɢ ɭɞɚɪɚɦɢ ɢ ɩɪɢ ɱɚɫɬɨɦ
ɪɟɜɟɪɫɢɪɨɜɚɧɢɢ ɜɵɲɟɩɪɢɜɟɞɟɧɧɵɟ ɤɨɥɢɱɟɫɬɜɚ ɱɚɫɨɜ
ɷɤɫɩɥɭɚɬɚɰɢɢ ɡɧɚɱɢɬɟɥɶɧɨ ɩɨɧɢɠɚɸɬɫɹ.
ɍ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɟɣ ɜ ɫɬɚɧɞɚɪɬɧɨɦ ɢɫɩɨɥɧɟɧɢɢ ɪɚɞɢɚɥɶɧɵɟ
ɲɚɪɢɤɨɜɵɟ ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɢ ɫɟɪɢɢ 62 … ɢɥɢ ɜ ɤɚɱɟɫɬɜɟ
ɨɩɰɢɨɧɚ Ʉ36 ɪɚɞɢɚɥɶɧɵɟ ɲɚɪɢɤɨɜɵɟ ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɢ ɫɟɪɢɢ
63… ɫ ɨɞɧɢɦ ɡɚɳɢɬɧɵɦ ɞɢɫɤɨɦ (ɢɫɩɨɥɧɟɧɢɟ ZC3).
Ɂɚɳɢɬɧɵɣ ɞɢɫɤ ɧɚɯɨɞɢɬɫɹ ɧɚ ɫɬɨɪɨɧɟ ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɨɜ,
ɩɨɜɟɪɧɭɬɨɣ ɤ ɤɚɪɤɚɫɭ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɹ (ɫɬɚɬɨɪ).
ɉɊɂɆȿɑȺɇɂȿ: ɉɪɢ ɡɚɦɟɧɟ ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɨɜ ɧɚɞɨ ɩɪɢɧɢɦɚɬɶ
ɜɨ ɜɧɢɦɚɧɢɟ ɪɚɫɩɨɥɨɠɟɧɢɟ ɡɚɳɢɬɧɨɝɨ ɞɢɫɤɚ ɢ ɡɚɡɨɪ
ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɚ, ɩɨɬɨɦɭ ɱɬɨ ɭ ɨɫɨɛɵɯ ɢɫɩɨɥɧɟɧɢɣ ɷɬɨ ɦɨɠɟɬ
ɨɬɥɢɱɚɬɶɫɹ ɨɬ ɫɬɚɧɞɚɪɬɧɵɯ ɢɫɩɨɥɧɟɧɢɣ!
ɋɦɚɡɤɢ ɭ ɫɬɚɧɞɚɪɬɧɵɯ ɦɚɲɢɧ: (ɚ. ESSO / UNIREX N3);
ɫɪɨɤ ɫɥɭɠɛɵ ɫɦɚɡɨɤ ɢ ɫɪɨɤɢ ɞɥɹ ɞɨɩɨɥɧɢɬɟɥɶɧɨɣ ɫɦɚɡɤɢ
ɞɟɣɫɬɜɢɬɟɥɶɧɵ ɬɨɥɶɤɨ ɞɥɹ ɷɬɨɝɨ ɜɢɞɚ ɫɦɚɡɤɢ.

Siemens AG
25
motor, maar deze gelden niet voor de motoren in EExe

Algemeen uitvoering.
Het is noodzakelijk dat u

WAARSCHUWING zich strikt houdt aan alle
2. Werking
Alle werkzaamheden aan de
gegevens, Voorschriften en instructies die aangegeven zijn in WAARSCHUWING motoren mogen verricht
alle geleverde gebruiksaanwijzingen en andere
handleidingen. Dit is heel belangrijk i.v.m. het voorkomen van worden indien de motor niet onder spanning staat.
ongelukken en verwondingen!
2.1 Transport en opslag
Specifieke informaties (in gele kleur) over de veiligheid op
het werk zijn bijgevoegd en bevatten aanvullende gegevens Tijdens het hijsen moeten alle hijsogen van de motor gebruikt
over de veiligheid van elektrische machines. Deze worden.
veiligheidsvoorschriften zijn bedoelt als aanvulling van de Voor het hijsen van motoren
geleverde gebruiksaanwijzingen en andere handleidingen. WAARSCHUWING met applicatie (b.v. met een
Het is verder van groot belang dat u alle nationale, locale Reductor, vacuümpomp etc.) mogen alleen de hijsogen
en of andere specifieke bepalingen en vereisten die van en/of hijsconstructies gebruikt worden die voor dit doel
kracht zijn, in acht neemt. bestemd zijn! U dient tevens rekening te houden met het
Specifieke vervaardigingen en wijzigingen in de draagvermogen van het gebruikte hijswerktuig!
constructie kunnen in technisch details verschillen. Mocht er Rollagers moeten opnieuw doorgesmeerd en/of vervangen
toch enkele onduidelijkheden ontstaan, neem dan in ieder worden indien de periode tussen het afleveren en in bedrijf
geval contact op met de fabrikant en vermeld het type en stellen van de motor onder normale omstandigheden (opslag
het serienummer van de machine of laat alle op een droge, stofvrije plaats zonder trillingen) langer is dan 3
onderhoudswerkzaamheden aan de afdeling technische jaar. Onder minder geschikte omstandigheden is deze periode
dienst van Siemens over. aanmerkelijk korter. In dat geval moet de isolatieweerstand
van de wikkeling gecontroleerd worden (zie sub. 2.5).
NOTITIE: Afb. 2 ... (reserveonderdelen) zie aanvulling op
blz. 35-36
2.2 Installatie
Na de installatie moeten de ingeschroefde hijsogen
1. Beschrijving vastgedraaid of losgeschroefd worden!
Bij de motoren waarvan het eind van de motoras omhoog of
1.1 Gebruiksmogelijkheden omlaag gericht is moet men ervoor zorgen dat geen water in
het bovenste lager kan komen.
De motoren kunnen in een stoffige of vochtige omgeving
gebruikt worden. De motoren zijn voorzien van tropenisolatie Het klemmenkast tussendeel bij een klemmenkast met
tot 96% RV. Indien de motoren op gepaste wijze bewaard 6 aansluitklemmen mag 4 x 90° gedraaid worden en het
worden of deskundig op een open plek gećnstaleerd zijn, dan klemmenkast tussendeel bij een klemmenkast met
zijn er geen speciale maatregelen onder normale 9 aansluitklemmen mag 180° gedraaid worden.
omstandigheden nodig om de motoren tegen invloed van Stille loop
weersomstandigheden te beschermen. Een stabiele ondergrond, het inbouwen of nauwkeurig
Geluidsdrukniveau op de gemeten oppervlakten bij 50 Hz nivelleren van de motor en een goed uitgebalanceerd
(DIN EN 21 680, deel 1) overbrengingsstuk, dat zijn de voorwaarden voor een stille
loop van de machine zonder trillingen. Vóór de aanvang van
1 LG4, 1 LG6 - circa 60 tot 76 dB(A) montagewerken moeten de zitvlakken van de fundering voor
de montage van de motor worden schoongemaakt en op
1.2 Constructie, opstelling en werkmode vlakheid gecontroleerd. Om de spanning in de voetjes van de
motor te voorkomen mag de totale vlakheid van de zitvlakken
In de basisuitvoering beschikken de 1LG4 en lLG6 motoren
van de fundering 0,2 mm niet overschrijden. Op de aangelaste
over een eigen koelsysteem met behulp van ventilatoren. De
zitvlakken moet de vereiste vlakheid m.b.v. het schuren
1LG. motoren kunnen zonder een eigen ventilator geleverd
worden verkregen. Wanneer onder de voetjes van de motor
worden als motoren voor het aandrijven van ventilatoren die
voor het instellen van de hoogte en het voorkomen van de
op het eind van de motoras geplaatst zijn, of de motoren
spanning in de motor blikplaten worden gezet, moeten die uit
kunnen met een vreemd koelsysteem geleverd worden (optie
gewalst materiaal in de goede grootte worden gemaakt.
G17). De 1PP4 en 1PP6 motoren zijn motoren met een eigen
Eventueel kan de rotor met een overdragend lid worden
koelsysteem zonder ventilator.
uitgebalanceerd.
De voeten van de motoren zijn direct aan het frame van de
stator gegoten, maar de motoren kunnen tevens met 2.3 Uitbalancering, overbrengingsstukken
aangeschroefde voeten geleverd worden (optie K11 - zie afb.
2). Bij de opties K09, K10 en K11 kan de bevestiging van de Het opzetten en verwijderen van de overbrengingsstukken
voeten op het frame van de stator veranderd worden, b.v. (zoals koppeling, riemschijf, tandwiel, etc.) moet met behulp
vanwege het veranderen van de positie van de klemmenkast. van geschikt gereedschap gedaan worden (zie afb. 7).
Alle boringen en vlakken die noodzakelijk zijn voor dit doel, De rotoren zijn standaard met een halve spie
zijn op de juiste manier tijdens het vervaardigen al uitgebalanceerd. De manier van uitbalanceerden is aan de
aangebracht. kopse kant op het eind van de as (aan de kant van de
Bij de motoren die zijn uitgerust met een rem (e.g. optie G26) aandrijving) aangegeven:
dient u de gebruiksaanwijzing van de rem in acht te nemen! (H = uitbalancering met een halve spie)
Deze aanwijzingen zijn van toepassing als aanvulling op de (F = uitbalancering met een hele spie - speciale uitvoering)
gebruiksaanwijzing voor het desbetreffende type van de

Siemens AG
26
Bij het monteren van de overbrengingsstukken dient De kritische isolatieweerstand moet gemeten worden met
u rekening te houden met de desbetreffende manier van behulp van een gelijkstroomspanning van 500 V bij de
uitbalancering! bedrijfstemperatuur van de wikkeling.
Uitbalancering met een halve spie Controle
Storingen van een stille loop kunnen ontstaan bij de Indien een minimum isolatieweerstand van de wikkeling ten
overbrengingsstukken met een verhouding tussen de opzichte van het frame van 10 MOhm wordt voor een nieuwe,
naaflengte (1) en de lengte van het eind van de as (1m) van < schoongemaakte of gerepareerde motor gemeten na een
0,8 bij een toerental van > 1500 omw/min (zie afb. 8). In dat langere periode van opslag of buiten werk stelling, dan kan
geval moet uitbalancering plaatsvinden, b.v. verwijder een het door vochtigheid veroorzaakt worden. Maak de wikkeling
deel van de spie (TP) die boven de omlijning van de as eerst goed droog.
uitsteekt. Na een langere periode van werking kan de minimum
isolatieweerstand dalen tot de kritische isolatieweerstand.
WAARSCHUWING U dient zich aan de algemene Indien de gemeten waarde niet onder de berekende kritische
veiligheidsvoorschriften te houden voor uw bescherming isolatieweerstand daalt, dan mag de motor verder gebruikt
tegen het aanraken van overbrengingsstukken. Indien de worden. Indien de gemeten waarde onder de berekende
motor in werking gesteld word zonder een kritische isolatieweerstand daalt, moet de motor
overbrengingsstuk, dan moet de spie tegen het onmiddellijk gestopt worden.
uitspringen beveiligd worden. In dat geval moet de oorzaak vastgesteld worden. Laat de
wikkeling of de onderdelen ervan repareren, schoonmaken of
2.4 Aansluiting goed drogen.
De netspanning en frequentie moet met de gegevens op het
typeplaatje overeenkomen. Een afwijking van ±5% voor de 2.6 Inwerkstelling
netspanning of frequentie (een afwijking van ±3% voor de NOTITIE: In geval van zeer ongelijkmatig draaimoment (b.v.
frequentie voor de 1ME6 motoren) is toegestaan zonder dat bij de aandrijving van een zuigercompressor) is de
het vermogen afneemt. Sluit de verbindingen aan en verdeel gedwongen
ze volgens het elektrische schema dat zich in de klemmenkast
bevindt. Sluit de beschermdraad aan op de klem . motorstroom niet sinusvormig. Hogere harmonische stromen
kunnen ongeoorloofde invloed op het elektrische net hebben
In geval van de aansluitklemmen met U-beugels (b.v. een te hoge elektromagnetische storing veroorzaken.
volgens DIN 46282) moeten de draden op zo een manier
verdeeld worden dat de aangesloten draad dezelfde Indien een converter voor het voeden gebruikt wordt, dan kan
hoogte aan beide zijden van de beugel hebben. Dat de hoogfrequente stroom en spanning een storing in
betekent dat bij deze manier van aansluiting elke draad in voedingsdraden van de motor veroorzaken. Daarom is het
U-vorm moet worden gebogen of moet worden aan te bevelen om afgeschermde voedingskabels te
aangesloten met behulp van een kabelschoen (zie gebruiken.
afb.3.1). Hetzelfde geldt voor het aansluiten van de Voordat de motor in werk gesteld wordt, dient men te
beschermdraad en aarddraad (zie afb. 3.2) - groengeel. controleren of:
Het draaimoment voor schroefverbindingen van de elektrische - de waarde van de minimum isolatieweerstand is
aansluitingen - aansluiting van klemborden (met uitzondering gehandhaafd;
van aansluitstrippen) - zie afb. 4. - de rotor vrij kan worden gedraaid;
- de motor op de juiste manier is gemonteerd en
2.5 Controle van de isolatieweerstand genivelleerd;
Voordat de motor voor de eerste keer in werking wordt gesteld - de overbrengingsstukken op de juiste manier zijn geplaatst
of na langere opslag of buiten werk stelling (na circa 6 (b.v. spanning van de riem bij riemaandrijving) en geschikt
maanden) moet de isolatieweerstand van de wikkeling zijn voor bepaalde gebruiksomstandigheden;
gecontroleerd worden.
- alle elektrische aansluitingen, bevestigingsbouten en
Tijdens en direct na het verbind- verbindingsstukken volgens voorschriften zijn
WAARSCHUWING meten zijn de klemmen aangesloten en aange- draaid;
gedeeltelijk onder
- de beschermdraad goed is aangesloten;
gevaarlijke spanning. Daarom is het verboden om de
klemmen aan te raken! - eventuele accessoires (zoals een rem, tachogenerator of
vreemde ventilator) functioneel zijn;
Isolatieweerstand:
- veiligheidsmaatregelen zijn genomen om te voorkomen dat
De minimum isolatieweerstand van een nieuwe, schoon ge-
bewegende delen en onderdelen onder spanning komen te
maakte of gerepareerde wikkeling ten opzichte van het frame
staan, en worden aangeraakt
is 10 MOhm.
- het maximum toegestane toerental (nmax) (zie het
Bereken eerst de kritische isolatieweerstand (R.) door het ver-
menigvuldige van de nominale spanning (U,), b.v. AC 0,69 kV, typeplaatje) niet wordt overschreden.
met de constante (0,5 MOhm/kV) volgens de formule NOTITIE: Het maximum toegestane toerental (nmax) betekent
Rkrit = 0,69 kV x 0,5 MOhm/kV = 0,345 MOhm de hoogste, voor korte tijd toegestane omwentelingen onder
werkomstandigheden. Men moet echter niet vergeten dat het
Meting geluidniveau en trillingen van de motor daardoor verhoogd
De minimum isolatieweerstand van de wikkeling ten worden en dat de levensduur van de lagers verkort wordt.
opzichte van het frame wordt gemeten met behulp van een Nadat de motor gemonteerd
gelijkstroomspanning van 500 V bij een temperatuur van de WAARSCHUWING is, moet de juiste functie
wikkeling van 25°C ±15°C. van de rem gecontroleerd worden (indien gećnstalleerd)!

Siemens AG
27
Deze opsomming kan in geen geval volledig zijn en Smeervet voor de standaarduitvoering: (Fa. ESSO 1
daarom zijn andere controles noodzakelijk. UNIREX N3). De levensduur van smeermiddelen en de
periode voor regelmatige na smering geldt alleen voor de
3. Onderhoud hierboven genoemde soort smeermiddel.
Het mengen van verschillende soorten smeermiddelen is
Veiligheidsmaatregelen: niet toegestaan!
Demonteer de motor voor zover het noodzakelijk is. Verwijder
Voor het begin van alle de rollagers met behulp van het juiste gereedschap (zie afb.
WAARSCHUWING werkzaamheden aan de 6). Verwijder vuil uit de ruimte waar de lagers zaten! Maak de
motor of machine, (vooral rollagers schoon of vervang ze. Smeer ze opnieuw door.
voor het openen van beschermkappen van actieve
onderdelen), moet de motor volgens veiligheids- Vul de vrije ruimte van de rollagers volledig met smeervet.
voorschriften gestopt zijn. Behalve de Laat de lagerdeksel en/of lagerschild zonder smeervet om
hoofdstroomcircuits ook te hulpstroomcircuits niet overtollige smering te voorkomen.
vergeten uit te schakelen. Verwarm de lagers gelijkmatig tot een temperatuur van circa
Volgens DIN VDE 0105 zijn er 5 normale veiligheids- 80-120°C en monteer ze terug. Maak geen gebruik van harde
maatregelen. slagen (b.v. met een hamer).
- uitzetten; Alle eventueel versleten afdichtingelementen (b.v. afdichting
van de as, etc.) moeten tevens vervangen worden. Indien
- beveiligen tegen het ongewenst aanzetten; radiale keerringen zonder veer op de as gemonteerd zijn, dan
- controleren of de machine niet onder spanning staat moeten ook de nieuwe onderdelen zonder veer gebruikt
- op aardding en kortsluiting controleren. worden.
- alle nabije onderdelen onder die onder spanning staan Uitrusting die regelmatige nasmering nodig heeft
afdekken of afzetten. Bij de motoren met uitrusting die regelmatige nasmering nodig
Alle bovengenoemde veiligheidsmaatregelen mogen hebben, dient men de gegevens op het nasmeerplaatje te
opgeheven worden indien alle service werkzaamheden volgen!
voltooid zijn en de motor opnieuw compleet is gemonteerd. Afdichting van kieren
Bij de montage van machines met bescherming 1P55 of hoger
NOTITIE: Gesloten openingen voor de afvoer van (zie het typeplaatje) moeten de schone montagevlakken
condenswater moeten af en toe geopend worden zodat het tussen het frame van de motor en het lagerschild afgedicht
verzameld condenswater afgevoerd kan worden. worden met een juiste afdichtingmateriaal die niet verhard kan
worden (b.v. Hylomar, Curil).
De openingen van de afvoer voor condenswater bevinden
zich altijd op het laagste punt van de motor.
Kunststof ventilatoren (BG180M….315L)
Vervanging van de lagers, levensduur van Op de kunststof ventilatoren zijn twee uitstekels aangegoten
Smeermiddelen en soorten smeervet. die als axiale fixatie in een ronde groef op de as vallen. Voor
het verwijderen van de ventilator moeten beide uitsteeksels
De levensduur van de gebruikte smeermiddelen onder eruit getrokken worden (b.v. met een schroevendraaier) en in
normale werkomstandigheden, bij horizontale plaatsing van deze positie tijdelijk gehouden worden, b.v. met behulp van de
de motor, bij een temperatuur van koelmiddelen tot 40 °C en ingeschoven hulpstukken. In de naaf van de ventilator
een toerental van de motor van bevinden zich twee openingen voor het opzetten van
- 1500 omw./min bedraagt circa 40.000 werkuren; verwijderinggereedschap.
- 3000 omw./min bedraagt circa 20.000 werkuren. Bij aflevering van de motor zijn de openingen afgesloten met
een dun laagje van kunststof, maar later moeten de
Onafhankelijk van het aantal werkuren dient het smeervet
openingen doorgestoken worden.
ongeveer elke 3 jaar vanwege veroudering vervangen te
Demontage en montage moeten uitsluitend met behulp van
worden. Daarvoor moeten de lagers worden verwijderd,
geschikt gereedschap gedaan worden. Daarbij is het uiterst
schoongemaakt en met nieuw smeervet worden
noodzakelijk dat er geen geweld (met een hamer) gebruikt
doorgesmeerd. Bij de uitvoeringen die regelmatige na smering
wordt. Om de beschadiging van de lagers te voorkomen.
nodig hebben, dient men de gegevens op het nasmeerplaatje
te volgen. Het is van groot belang dat de uitsteeksels op de juiste manier
in de groef van de as vallen.
Onder bijzondere werkomstandigheden, b.v. bij verticale
plaatsing van de motor, bij veelvuldig gebruik van de motor bij
het maximum toegestane toerental (nmax), bij overbelasting
door trillingen en schokken of bij het regelmatig omgooien van
de motor, wordt het bovengenoemde aantal werkuren
aanmerkelijk verkort.
De motoren in standaarduitvoering zijn uitgerust met radiale
kogellagers serie 62 ... of bij optie K36 met radiale kogellagers
serie 63 ... met één afdichting (uitvoering ZC3).
De afdichting is geplaatst aan de zijde van de lagers, gedraaid
naar het frame van de motor (stator).
NOTITIE: Bij het vervangen van de lagers moet men rekening
houden met de plaatsing van de afdichting en de speling van
de lagers omdat deze bij speciale uitvoeringen van de
standaarduitvoering kan afwijken!

Siemens AG
28
1LG4, 1LG6 - BG 180M . . . 250M

ohne Nachschmierung, angegossene Füße; without relubricating device, cast frame feets;
sans système de regraissage, pattes moulées; sin reengrase, patas fundidas;
senza ingrassatore, piedi fusi; utan eftersmörjanordning, gjutna fötter;
bez domazávání, pĜilité patky;
ɛɟɡ ɫɦɚɡɨɱɧɨɜɨ ɭɫɬɪɨɣɫɬɜɚ, ɰɟɥɶɧɨɥɢɬɨɣ ɤɨɪɩɭɫ ɫ ɥɚɩɚɦɢ;
zonder nasmering, aangegoten voeten;
mit Nachschmierung, angeschraubte Füße; with relubricating device, bolted frame feets;
avec système de regraissage, pattes vissées; con reengrase, patas atornilladas;
con ingrassatore, piedi avvitati; med eftersmörjanordning, skruvade fötter;
s domazáváním, pĜišroubované patky;
ɫ ɫɦɚɡɨɱɧɵɦ ɭɫɬɪɨɣɫɬɜɨɦ, ɩɪɢɜɢɧɬɨɜɚɧɵɟ ɥɚɩɵ ɤɨɪɩɭɫɚ
met nasmering, opgeschroefde voeten;
Fig. 2 +

Siemens AG
29
1LG4, 1LG6 - BG 280S . . . 315L

mit Nachschmierung, angegossene Füße; with relubricating device, cast frame feets;
avec système de regraissage, pattes moulées; con reengrase, patas fundidas;
con ingrassatore, piedi fusi; med eftersmörjanordning, gjutna fötter;
s domazáváním, pĜilité patky;
ɫ ɫɦɚɡɨɱɧɵɦ ɭɫɬɪɨɣɫɬɜɨɦ, ɰɟɥɶɧɨɥɢɬɨɣ ɤɨɪɩɭɫ ɫ ɥɚɩɚɦɢ;
met nasmering, aangegoten voeten;
(2
(2
mit Nachschmierung, angeschraubte Füße; with relubricating device, bolted frame feets;
avec système de regraissage, pattes vissées; con reengrase, patas atornilladas;
con ingrassatore, piedi avvitati; med eftersmörjanordning, skruvade fötter;
s domazáváním, pĜišroubované patky;
ɫ ɫɦɚɡɨɱɧɵɦ ɭɫɬɪɨɣɫɬɜɨɦ, ɩɪɢɜɢɧɬɨɜɚɧɵɟ ɥɚɩɵ ɤɨɪɩɭɫɚ;
met nasmering, opgeschroefde voeten;
(2
2) Nur auf Kundenwunsch.

According to wish customer only.
Montagehinweise
1) Nur für besondere Betriebsverhältnisse.
Fitting instructions For special operating conditions.
(2
Fig. 3 +

Siemens AG
30
Normteile sind nach Abmessung, Werkstoff und Oberfläche im freien Handel zu beziehen.
Standard commercially available parts are to be purchased in accordance with the specified dimensions, material and surface finish.
Les pièces normalisées peuvent être obtenues dans le commerce d’après leurs dimensions, le matériau et l’état de surface.
Las piezas estándar se comprarán en comercios del ramo según las dimensiones, material y superficie especificados.
Le parti standard sono reperibili sul mercato secondo le dimensioni, il materiale e la finitura della superficie.
Normerade detaljer kan erhållas i öppna handeln, och skall specificeras beträffande storlek, material och ytbehandling.
Normované díly lze podle rozmČrĤ, materiálu a povrchu zakoupit volnČ v obchodech.
ɋɬɚɧɞɚɪɬɧɵɟ ɞɟɬɚɥɢ ɦɨɠɧɨ ɩɨɤɭɩɢɬɶ ɜ ɦɚɝɚɡɢɧɚɯ ɫɨɝɥɚɫɧɨ ɪɚɡɦɟɪɚɦ, ɦɚɬɟɪɢɚɥɭ ɢ ɩɨɜɟɪɯɧɨɫɬɢ.
Standaard ondedelen (genormaliseerd) kunnen afhankelijk van hun maten, materiaal en oppervlakte in gespecialiseerde winkels vrij gekocht worden.
4.38 5.78 1.49 DIN 912 3.38 DIN 6885
5.91 5.93 DIN 128 1.66 ISO 4762
4.11
6.30
6.66
3.02 DIN 471 1.50 DIN 931 DIN 933
4.39 ISO 4014 ISO 4017
5.79
5.90
6.02 DIN 472 5.92 5.66 EN 50262
5.98 5.67
5.89 DIN 7985
5.94 ISO 7048
4.04 DIN 580 DIN 625

4.40 DIN 125 1.60 Lagertyp:
6.10 Type of bearing:
Type de roulement:
Tipo de cojinete:
Tipo di cuscinetto:
Lagertyp:
Typ ložiska:•
• Ɍɢɩ ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɚ:
Type lager:
Fig. 2a
Siemens AG
31
4.38 5.78 1.49 DIN 912 3.38 DIN 6885
5.91 DIN 128 1.66 ISO 4762
4.11
6.30
6.66
3.02 DIN 471 1.50 DIN 931 DIN 933
4.39 ISO 4014 ISO 4017
5.79
5.90
5.92 5.66 EN 50262
6.02 DIN 472 5.98 5.67
5.89 DIN 7985
5.94 ISO 7048
4.04 DIN 580Ң DIN 625

Type de roulement:
Tipo de cojinete:
Tipo di cuscinetto:
Lagertyp:
Typ ložiska:•
Type lager:
Fig. 2b
Siemens AG
32
4.38 5.78 1.49 DIN 912 3.38 DIN 6885
5.91 5.93 DIN 128 1.66 ISO 4762
5.32 4.11
6.30
6.66
3.02 DIN 471 1.50 DIN 931 DIN 933 5.31 DIN 936
4.39 ISO 4014 ISO 4017 5.52 ISO 4035
5.79
5.90
5.92 5.66 EN 50262
6.02 DIN 472 5.98 5.67
5.89 DIN 7985
5.94 ISO 7048
4.04 DIN 580 DIN 625

Type de roulement:
Tipo de cojinete:
Tipo di cuscinetto:
Lagertyp:
Typ ložiska:•
Type lager:
Fig. 2c
Siemens AG
33
4.38 5.78 1.49 DIN 912 3.38 DIN 6885
5.91 5.24 DIN 128 1.66 ISO 4762
5.21 5.32 4.11
6.30
6.66
3.02 DIN 471 1.50Ң DIN 931 DIN 933 5.31 DIN 936
3.03 4.39 ISO 4014 ISO 4017 5.52 ISO 4035
5.79 5.26
5.90 5.20
5.89 5.66 EN 50262
6.02 DIN 472 5.98 5.67
5.25 DIN 7985 5.68
5.94 ISO 7048 5.69
4.04 DIN 580 DIN 625

5.36 Type de roulement:
Tipo de cojinete:
Tipo di cuscinetto:
Lagertyp:
Typ ložiska:•
Type lager:
Fig. 2d
Siemens AG
34
4.38 5.78 1.49 DIN 912 3.38 DIN 6885
5.91 5.24 DIN 128 1.66 ISO 4762
5.21 5.32 4.11
6.30
6.66
3.02 DIN 471 1.50Ң DIN 931 DIN 933 5.31 DIN 936
3.03 4.39 ISO 4014 ISO 4017 5.52 ISO 4035
5.79 5.26
5.90 5.20
5.89 5.66 EN 50262
5.98 5.67
5.25 DIN 7985 5.68
5.94 ISO 7048 5.69
4.04 DIN 580 DIN 625

Tipo de cojinete:
Tipo di cuscinetto:
Lagertyp:
Typ ložiska:•
Type lager:
Fig. 2e
Siemens AG
35
4.38 5.78 1.49 DIN 912 3.38 DIN 6885
5.91 5.24 DIN 128 1.66 ISO 4762
5.21 5.32 4.11
6.30
6.66
3.02 DIN 471 1.50Ң DIN 931 DIN 933 5.31 DIN 936
3.03 4.39 ISO 4014 ISO 4017 5.52 ISO 4035
5.79 5.26
5.90 5.20
5.89 5.66 EN 50262
5.98 5.67
5.25 DIN 7985 5.68
5.94 ISO 7048 5.69
4.04 DIN 580 DIN 625

Tipo de cojinete:
Tipo di cuscinetto:
Lagertyp:
Typ ložiska:•
Type lager:
Fig. 2f
Siemens AG
36
Anschließbare Querschnitt je nach Klemmengröße (ggf. reduziert durch Größe der Leitungseinführungen)
Conductor cross-sections connectable to the various terminals (may be reduced by size of cable entries)
Sections raccordables suivant la taille de la borne (réduction éventuelle par la taille des entrées de câbles)
Sección conectable segĤn tamaĔo del borne (en caso dado, más pequeĔa debido al tamaĔo de las entradas de linea)
Diamentri dei collegamenti a sec. delle misure dei morsetti (eventualmente sono ridotte le dimensioni delle aperture per i
conduttori)
Anslutningsbara ledarareor för olika klämstorlekar (ev. reducerat med hänsyn till genomföringens storlek)
PĜipojovací prĤĜez podle velikosti svorek (v daném pĜípadČ omezený velikostí prĤchodek vedení).•
ɋɨɟɞɢɧɢɬɟɥɶɧɨɟ ɫɟɱɟɧɢɟ ɫɨɝɥɚɫɧɨ ɪɚɡɦɟɪɭ ɡɚɠɢɦɨɜ (ɜ ɞɚɧɧɨɦ ɫɥɭɱɚɟ ɨɝɪɚɧɢɱɟɧɧɨɟ ɪɚɡɦɟɪɨɜ ɩɪɨɯɨɞɧɵɯ ɢɡɨɥɹɬɨɪɨɜ
ɥɢɧɢɢ).
De doorsnede voor aansluting volgens de maat van de klemmen (in dit geval beperkt door de maat van kabeldoorvoer).
... 25 mm2 ... 10 mm2 ... 25 mm2 ... 25 mm2
Bei Anschluß mit DIN- Kabel- Anschluß eines einzelnen Anschluß von zwei etwa gleich Bei Anschluß mit DIN- Kabel- Bei Anschulß mit DIN- Kabel-
schuh ist dieser nach unten Leiters mit Klemmbügel. dicken Leitern mit Klemmbügel. schuh unter äußerem Erdungs- schuh.
abzuwinkeln! Connecting two conductors of winkel.
If connections are made with Connecting a single conductor almost equal thidcness with a If connectionsare made with If connections are made with
DIN cable lugs, band the cable with a terminal clip. terminal clip. DIN cable lugs, under the outer DIN cable lugs.
lugs downwards. Raccordement d’un seul Deux conducteurs de diamètre earthing engle.
Lorsque le raccordement est conducteur à une Borne à étrier. à peu pré équivalents, Lorsque le raccordement est Lorsque le raccordement est
réalisé par cosses DIN, cellesci raccordés à une borne à étrier. réalisé par cosses DIN, à une réalisé par cosses DIN.
doivent être pliéss vors le bas. Conexión de un solo conductor Conexión de dos conductores équerre extérieure de mise à la
Si la conexión se efectúa con con un estribo. de diámetro aproximadamente terre. Si la conexión se efectúa con
terminales para cables DIN, igual, con un estribo. Si la conexión se efectúa con terminales para cables DIN.
habrá que doblarlos hacia Allacciamento di ogni singolo terminales para cables DIN,
Allacciamento di due conduttori
abajo. conduttore con morsetto di bajo el angular exterior de
di stesso o pressocchè Nel collegamento con
serraggio. puesta a tierra.
Nel collegamento con indentico spessore con capocorda conforme alle norme
capocorda conforme alle norme Anslutning av en enkelledare morsetto di serraggio. Nel collegamento con DIN.
DIN, questo va piegato verso il med klämbygel. Anslutning av två ungefär lika capocorda conforme alle norme
basso. tjocka ledare med klämbygel. DIN, sotto angolare di messa a Vid anslutning med kabelsko
Vid anslutning med kabelsko PĜipojení jednotlivého vodiþe U- PĜipojení dvou vodiþĤ stejného terra esterno. enl. DIN.
enl. DIN skall denna bockas tĜmenem. prĤĜezu s U-tĜmenem. Vid anslutning med kabelsko
nedåt. ɉɪɢɫɨɟɞɢɧɟɧɢɟ ɞɜɭɯ enl. DIN under extern PĜipojení kabelovým okem DIN.
ɉɪɢɫɨɟɞɢɧɟɧɢɟ ɨɬɞɟɥɶɧɨɝɨ jordningsvinkel.
PĜipojení pomocí kabelového ɩɪɨɜɨɞɨɜ ɨɞɢɧɚɤɨɜɨɝɨ
ɩɪɨɜɨɞɚ ɯɨɦɭɬɨɦ ɜ ɮɨɪɦɟ U.
oka DIN je tĜeba je ohnout ɫɟɱɟɧɢɹ ɫ ɯɨɦɭɬɨɦ ɜ ɮɨɪɦɟ U. PĜipojení kabelovým okem DIN ɉɪɢɫɨɟɞɢɧɟɧɢɟ ɤɚɛɟɥɶɧɵɦ
smČrem dolĤ. Aansluting van een enkel draad pod vnČjším uzemĖovacím ɧɚɤɨɧɟɱɧɢɤɨɦ DIN.
Aansluting van twee draden met tĜmenem.
ɉɪɢɫɨɟɞɢɧɟɧɢɟ ɫ ɩɨɦɨɳɶɸ met behulp van een U-beugel. dezelfde doorsnede met behulp
ɤɚɛɟɥɶɧɨɝɨ ɧɚɤɨɧɟɱɧɢɤɚ DIN van een U-beugel. ɉɪɢɫɨɟɞɢɧɟɧɢɟ ɤɚɛɟɥɶɧɵɦ
ɧɚɞɨ ɨɛɨɝɧɭɬɶ ɜɧɢɡ. ɧɚɤɨɧɟɱɧɢɤɨɦ DIN ɩɨɞ Aansluiting met behulp van een
Aansluiting met behulp van een ɜɧɟɲɧɢɦ ɡɚɡɟɦɥɹɸɳɢɦ kabelschoen volgens DIN.
kabelschoen volgens DIN welke ɯɨɦɭɬɨɦ.
naar beneden gebogen wordt. Aansluiting met behulp van een
kabelschoen volgens DIN welke
naar beneden gebogen wordt.
Fig. 3.1 Fig. 3.2

Anziehdrehmomente für Schraubenverbindungen der elektrischen Anschlüsse - Klemmenbrettanschlüsse (außer
Klemmenleisten)
Tightening torques for screwed electrical connections - terminal board connections (except for terminal strips)
Couples de serrages des bornes de la plaque à bornes (ne concerne pas las borniers)
Pares de apriete para uniones atornilladas de las conexiones eléctricas en la placa de bornes (exceptuando las regletas de
bornes).
Coppie di serraggio per le viti di attacco di collegamenti elettrici / dei portamorsetti (escluse morsettiere)
Åtdragningsmoment för de elektriska anslutningarnas skruvförband (utom på kontaktplintar)
Utahovací momenty pro šroubové spoje elektrických pĜipojení - pĜipojení na svorkových deskách (mimo svorkovnicové lišty).
Ɂɚɬɹɠɧɵɟ ɦɨɦɟɧɬɵ ɞɥɹ ɜɢɧɬɨɜɵɯ ɫɨɟɞɢɧɟɧɢɣ ɷɥɟɤɬɪɢɱɟɫɤɢɯ ɩɪɢɫɨɟɞɢɧɟɧɢɣ – ɩɪɢɫɨɟɞɢɧɟɧɢɟ ɧɚ ɡɚɠɢɦɧɵɯ ɩɥɚɬɚɯ
(ɤɪɨɦɟ ɡɚɠɢɦɧɨɣ ɩɥɚɧɤɢ).
Het aandraaimoment voor schroefverbindingen van de elektrische aansluitingen – aansluiting van klemmenborden (met
uitzondering van aansluitstrippen).
Gewinde- / Thread- / du filetage / de
la rosca Diametro del filetto / Gängdimeter /
M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16
Závit Ⱦɢɚɦɟɬɪ ɪɟɡɶɛɵ / Doorsnede van de
schroefdraad•
Anziehdrehmoment
Tightening torque Min. 0,8 1,8 2,7 5,5 9 14 27
Couple de serrage
Par de apriete ɦɢɧ
• Coppia di
serraggioÅtdragningsmoment
Utahovací moment Max.
Ɂɚɬɹɠɧɨɣ ɦɨɦɟɧɬ
ɦɚɤɫ 1,2 2,5 4 8 13 20 40
Aandraaimoment
Die obigen Anziehdrehmomente gelten soweit keine anderen Werte angegeben sind!
The above values of tightening torque are applicable unless alternative values are given elsewhere.
Les couples de serrage indiqués ci-dessus sont valables pour autant qu’aucune valeur spécifique ne soit donnée.
Estos pares de apriete rigen mientras no se indiquen otros.
Le coppie di serraggio indicate qui di sopra sono valide se non sono indicati altri valori.
Fig. 4 Atdragningsmoment för motorns huvudkopplingsplintar. (utom för hjälpkopplingsplintar)
Výše uvedené utahovací momenty platí, pokud nejsou uvedeny jiné hodnoty.
ȼɵɲɟɩɪɢɜɟɞɟɧɧɵɟ ɦɨɦɟɧɬɵ ɞɟɣɫɬɜɭɸɬ ɜ ɫɥɭɱɚɟ, ɱɬɨ ɧɟ ɩɪɢɜɟɞɟɧɵ ɞɪɭɝɢɟ ɡɧɚɱɟɧɢɹ.
De bovengenoemde waarden van het aandraaimoment zijn van toepassing, tenzij anders aangegeven.

Siemens AG
37
Lagerwechsel / Changing bearings / Remplacement des roulements / Cambio de cojinetes

Sostituzione del cuscinetto / Lagerbyte / VýmČna ložiska / Ɂɚɦɟɧɚ ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɚ / Vervanging van het lager
Zwischenscheibe (Schutz der Zentrierung im Wellenende)
Spacer washer (to protect centring bore in shaft end)
Rondelle (protection du centrage en bout d’arbre)
Disco intermedio (protege el centrado en el extremo del eje)
Spessore (protezione delle centratura null’estremità d’albero)
Distansbricka (skydd av centreringen I axeltappen)
Vložená podložka (ochrana stĜedícího dĤlku na konci hĜídele)
ɉɪɨɦɟɠɭɬɨɱɧɚɹ ɩɨɞɤɥɚɞɧɚɹ ɲɚɣɛɚ (ɡɚɳɢɬɚ ɰɟɧɬɪɨɜɨɝɨ ɨɬɜɟɪɫɬɢɹ ɜ ɤɨɧɰɟ ɜɚɥɚ)
Vlakke sluitring (bescherming van het centergat van de as)
Fig. 6
Auf- und Abziehen von Abtriebselementen / Pressing on and pulling off drive elements / Emmanchement et extraction
d’organes de transmission / Calado y extracción de elementos de accionamiento / Calettamento ed estrazione degli elementi
di azionamento / På och avdragning av drivdon / Nasazování a stahování pĜenosových þlenĤ / ɍɫɬɚɧɨɜɤɚ ɢ ɫɬɹɝɢɜɚɧɢɟ
ɷɥɟɦɟɧɬɨɜ ɩɟɪɟɞɚɱɢ / Montage en demontage van de overbrengingsstukken
Zwischenscheibe (Schutz der Zentrierung im Wellenende)
Spacer washer (to protect centring bore in shaft end)
Rondelle (protection du centrage en bout d’arbre)
Disco intermedio (protege el centrado en el extremo del eje)
Spessore (protezione della centratura null’estremità d’albero)
Distansbricka (skydd av centreringen I axeltappen)
Vložená podložka (ochrana stĜedícího dĤlku na konci hĜídele)
ɉɪɨɦɟɠɭɬɨɱɧɚɹ ɩɨɞɤɥɚɞɧɚɹ ɲɚɣɛɚ (ɡɚɳɢɬɚ ɰɟɧɬɪɨɜɨɝɨ
ɨɬɜɟɪɫɬɢɹ ɜ ɤɨɧɰɟ ɜɚɥɚ)
Vlakke sluitring (bescherming van het centergat van de as)
Zum Aufziehen von Abtriebselementen (Kupplung, Zahnrad, Riemenscheibe usw. ), Gewinde im Wellenende benutzen und - sofern möglich -Abtriebselemente nach Bedarf
erwärmen. Zum Abziehen geeignete Vorrichtung verwenden. Es dürfen beim Auf- und Abziehen keine Schläge (z.B. mit Hammer oder ähnlichem) oder größere als die laut Katalog
zulässigen radialen oder axialen Kräfte über das Wellenende auf die Motorlager übertragen werden.
Use the tapped hole provided in the end of the shaft for fitting drive components such as couplings, gearwheels, belt pulleys, etc. and, if possible, heat the components as
necessary. Use a suitable puller tool for removing the components. Do not strike the components, e.g. with a hammer or similar tool, when fitting or removing them and do not exert
more than the maximum value of radial or axial force - according to the catalog - transmitted to the motor bearings through the shaft extension.
Pour monter les organes de transmission (accouplements, roues dentées, poulies à courroie, etc.), utiliser le taraudage du bout d’arbre. Au besoin et lorsque cela est possible,
chauffer les organes de transmission. Pour le démontage, utiliser un dispositif approprié. Aucun coup (par ex. marteau) supérieur aux efforts axiaux et radiaux admissibles
mentionnés au catalogue ne doit être transmis par l’arbre aux roulements en cours de montage ou de démontage.
Para calar Ios elementos de accionamiento (acoplamientos, rueda dentada, polea, etc.) utilizar la rosca en el extremo del eje y - siempre que sea posible - calentar
convenientemente dichos elementos. Utilizar el dispositivo adecuado para la extracción. Durante las operaciones de calado o extracción no golpear (p. ej. con martillo o similar) ni
ejercer sobre los cojinetes del motor a través del extremo del eje fuerzas axiales o radiales superiores a las admisibles según catálogo.
Per calettare gli elementi di azionamento (giunti, ruote dentate, pulegge, ecc.), utilizzare il foro filettato nell’estremità d’albero e, se possibile, riscaldare gli elementi di azionamento.
Per l’estrazione vanno adoperati attrezzi adatti. Sono da evitare colpi o martellate, e forze radiali o assiali trasmesse dall’estremità d’albero ai cuscinetti che siano maggiori di quelle
consentite sec. il catalogo.
Använd axeltappens gänga vid pådragning av drivdon (koppling, kugghjul, remskiva etc) och värm om möjligt upp drivdonen om så behövs. Använd lämpliga verktyg för
avdragningen. Några slag (t.ex. med hammare e.dyl.) får aldrig förekomma vid på- och avdragning, och radiella och axiella krafter som är större än de som anges i katalogen får
inte överföras till motorlagren via axeltappen.
Pro nasazování pĜenosových þlenĤ (spojka, ozubené kolo, Ĝemenice atd.) používat závit na konci hĜídele a - pokud je to možné - pĜenosové þleny podle potĜeby nahĜát. Pro
stahování používat vhodný pĜípravek. PĜi nasazování a stahování se nesmí používat žádné údery (napĜ. kladivem apod.) nebo vČtší radiální nebo axiální síly, než jsou pĜípustné
podle katalogu, které se pĜenášejí pĜes konec hĜídele na ložiska motoru.
Ⱦɥɹ ɭɫɬɚɧɨɜɤɢ ɷɥɟɦɟɧɬɨɜ ɩɟɪɟɞɚɱɢ (ɦɭɮɬɚ, ɲɟɫɬɟɪɧɹ, ɪɟɦɟɧɧɵɣ ɲɤɢɜ ɢɬɞ.) ɩɪɢɦɟɧɹɬɶ ɪɟɡɶɛɭ ɜ ɧɨɫɤɟ ɜɚɥɚ ɢ – ɟɫɥɢ ɜɨɡɦɨɠɧɨ – ɩɨɞɨɝɪɟɬɶ ɷɥɟɦɟɧɬɵ ɩɟɪɟɞɚɱɢ ɩɨ
ɩɨɬɪɟɛɧɨɫɬɢ. Ⱦɥɹ ɫɬɹɝɢɜɚɧɢɹ ɩɪɢɦɟɧɹɬɶ ɭɞɨɛɧɨɟ ɩɪɢɫɩɨɫɨɛɥɟɧɢɟ. ɉɪɢ ɭɫɬɚɧɨɜɤɟ ɢ ɫɬɹɝɢɜɚɧɢɢ ɡɚɩɪɟɳɚɟɬɫɹ ɩɪɢɦɟɧɹɬɶ ɭɞɚɪɵ (ɧɚɩɪɢɦɟɪ ɦɨɥɨɬɨɦ ɢɬɩ.) ɢɥɢ ɪɚɞɢɚɥɶɧɵɟ
ɢɥɢ ɨɫɟɜɵɟ ɭɫɢɥɢɹ ɩɪɟɜɵɲɚɸɳɢɟ ɡɧɚɱɟɧɢɹ ɞɨɩɭɫɤɚɟɦɵɟ ɫɨɝɥɚɫɧɨ ɤɚɬɚɥɨɝɭ, ɤɨɬɨɪɵɟ ɩɟɪɟɞɚɸɬɫɹ ɱɟɪɟɡ ɧɨɫɨɤ ɜɚɥɚ ɜ ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɢ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɹ.
Voor het opzetten en verwijderen van de overbrengingsstukken (zoals koppeling, tandwiel, riemschijf, etc.) gebruik het schroefdraad op het eind van de as en, indien mogelijk,
verwarm de overbrengingsstukken naar behoefte. Gebruik geschikt gereedschap voor het verwijderen van de overbrengingsstukken. Maak geen gebruik van harde slagen (b.v. met
een hamer, etc.) en/of radiale of axiale krachten die groter zijn dan volgens de catalogus toegestaan is en die op de lagers van de motor via het eind van de as overgebracht
worden.
Fig. 7
Auswuchtung mit halber Paßfeder / Balancing with half featherkey / Equilibrage avec demi-clavette / Equilibrado con media
chaveta / Equilibratura con mezza chiavetta / Balansering med halv kil / Vyvážení s polovinou pera / ҏȻɚɥɚɧɫɢɪɨɜɤɚ ɫ
ɩɨɥɨɜɢɧɨɣ ɲɩɨɧɤɢ / Uitbalancering met een halve spie
Nabenlänge I / Hub length I / Longueur du moyeu I /
Longitud del cubo I
Herausragender Teil der Paßfeder TP Lunghezza mozzo I / Navlängd I / Délka náboje l /
Protruding section of featherkey TP Ⱦɥɢɧɚ ɫɬɭɩɢɰɵ l / Naaflengte ( l )
Partie saillante TP de la clavette
Parte saliente de la chaveta TP
Parte sporgente della chiavetta Tp
Nedslipning av den del av kilen TP
PĜeþnívající þást zalícovaného pera TP
ȼɵɫɬɭɩɚɸɳɚɹ ɱɚɫɬɶ ɩɪɢɝɧɚɧɧɨɣ ɌɊ
Uitstekend deel van de ingezette spie ( TP )
Länge des Wellenendes IM / Length of shaft IM / Longueur du bout d’arbre IM / Longitud

del extremo del eje IM / Lunghezza IM dell’estremitı d’albero / Axeltappens längd IM
/Délka konce hĜídele lMҏ / Ⱦɥɢɧɚ ɧɨɫɤɚ ɜɚɥɚ lM / Lengte van het aseind van de as ( lM )
Fig. 8

Siemens AG
38
DEUTSCH ENGLISH FRANÇAIS ESPAĦOL
Ersatzteile, vom Werk lieferbar Spare parts, available from the works Pièces de rechange, livrables par l’usine Piezas de recambio; suministro desde
(s. Bestellbeispiel) (see specimen orders) (voir exemple de oommande) fábrica (véase ejemplo de pedido).
1.00 Lagerung AS 1.00 Bearing assembly, drive end 1.00 Palier côté entraînement 1.00 Cojinete del LA
.40 Lagerschild .40 Endshield .40 Flasque-palier .40 Escudo portacojinetes
.43 Wellendichtring .43 Shaft sealing ring .43 Bague d’étanchéité .43 Retén
.58 Ausgleichscheibe .58 Float limiting shim .58 Rondelle de compensation .58 Disco compensador
.60 Wälzlager .60 Rolling-contact bearing .60 Roulement .60 Rodamiento
.61 Verschlußstopfen .61 Plug .61 Bauchons .61 Tapón
.65 Lagerdeckel .65 Cover of bearing .65 Couvercle de palier .65 Cubierta del cojinete
.67 Ausserer Lagerdeckel .67 Outer bearing cap .67 Couvercle extérieur de palier .67 Tapa exterior del cojinete
.68 Schleuderscheibe .68 Grease slinger .68 Disque de projection .68 Anillo de engrase
.69 Druckfeder .69 Compression springs .69 Ressort de compressôon .69 Muelles de presión
3.00 Läufer, komplett 3.00 Rotor, complete 3.00 Rotor, complet 3.00 Rotor, completo
4.00 Ständer, komplett 4.00 Stator, complete 4.00 Stator, complet 4.00 Estator, completo
.07 Gehäusefuß .07 Body footing .07 Pied du corps .07 Pedestal del cuerpo
.18 Leistungsschild .18 Rating plate .18 Plaque signalétique .18 Placa de características
.35 Scheibe .35 Disc .35 Disque .35 Arandela
.41 Erdungslasche .41 Earthing terminal .41 Borne de mise à la terre .41 Borne de puesta a tierra
5.00 Klemmenkasten, komplett 5.00 Terminal box, complete 5.00 Boîte à bornes, complète 5.00 Caja de bornes, completa
.03 Dichtung .03 Gasket .03 Joint .03 Junta
.10 Klemmenbrett, komplett .10 Terminal board, complete .10 Plaque à bornes, complète .10 Placa de bornes, completa
.12 Klemmschelle für Schutzleiter .12 Terminal clamp for protective .12 Chapeau de serrage pour .12 Abrazadera para fijar el conductor
.19 Hohe Schellenklemme conductor conducteur de protectión
.22 Klemmschelle .19 High clamp-type terminal de protection .19 Borne de abrazadera alto
.23 Niedere Schellenklemme .22 Terminal clamp .19 Borne à chapeau haute .22 Abrazadera aprisionadora
.44 Klemmenkasten-Oberteil .23 Lov clamp-type terminal .22 Chapeau de serrage .23 Borne de abrazadera bajo
.45 Gehäuse .44 Upper part of terminal box .23 Borne à chapeau basse .44 Parte superior de la caja de bornes
.47 Einführungsplatte .45 Housing .44 Partie supérieure de la boîte à .45 Carcasa
.51 Mutter .47 Cable entry plate bornes .47 Placa de entrada
.52 Schaltbügel .51 Nut .45 Boîte .51 Tuerca
.70 Klemmbügel .52 Stirrup .47 Plaque d’entrée de cábles .52 Brida
.83 Dichtung .70 Terminal clip .51 Ecrou .70 Estribo
.84 Klemmenkasten-Deckel .83 Gasket .52 Barrett droite .83 Junta
.95 Klemme .84 Cover for terminal box .70 Etrier de serrage .84 Tapa de la caja de bornes
.96 Tragschiene .95 Clip .83 Joint .95 Abrazadera
.97 Strebe komplett .96 Supporting bar .84 Couvercle de la boîte ä bornes .96 Listón de soporte
.99 Kontaktblech .97 Brace complete .95 Bornier pour circuit auxiliaire .97 Sostén completo
6.00 Lagerung BS .99 Contact washer .96 Lardon porteur .99 Plancha de contacto
.10 Wälzlager 6.00 Bearing assembly, non-drive end .97 Étai complet 6.00 Cojinete del LCA
.20 Lagerschild .10 Rolling-contact bearing .99 Tôle de contact .10 Rodamiento
.23 Wellendichtring .20 Endshield 6.00 Palier côté opposé à .20 Escudo portacojinete
.24 Lagerdeckel .23 Shaft sealing ring l’entraînement .23 Retén
.25 Schmierrohr .24 Cover of bearing .10 Roulement .24 Cubierta del cojinete
.26 Ausserer Lagerdeckel .25 Lubrication pipe .20 Flasque-palier .25 Tubo de lubricación
.65 Schmiernippel .26 Outer bearing cap .23 Bague d’étanchéité .26 Tapa exterior del cojinete
.67 Gummibuchse .65 Nipple .24 Couvercle de palier .65 Aceitera
.72 Schleuderscheibe .67 Rubber bush .25 Tube de graissage .67 Casquillo de goma
7.00 Belüftung, komplett .72 Grease slinger .26 Couvercle extérieur de palier .72 Anillo de engrase
.04 Lüfter 7.00 Ventilation accesories, complete .65 Graisseur 7.00 Ventilación, completa
.40 Lüfterhaube .04 Fan .67 Douille en caoutchouc .04 Ventilador
.41 Winkel .40 Fan cowl .72 Disque de projection .40 Tapa del ventilador
.49 Schraube .41 Angle 7.00 Ventilation, complète .41 Angular
Auf- und Abziehvorrichtungen für Wälzla- .49 Screw .04 Ventilateur .49 Tornillo
ger, Lüfter und Abtriebselemente sind Mounting and extracting devices for .40 Capot du ventilateur No se suministran Ios dispositivos para
nicht lieferbar! rolling-contact bearings, fans and out .41 Equerre extraer y calar los rodamientos, el
elements are not available. .49 Vis ventilador y Ios elementos de
Les dispositifs d’emmanchement et accionamiento.
d’extraction pour roulements, ventilateurs
et organes de tranasmission ne sont pes
livrables.
NEDERLANDS
Reserveonderdelen die door de fabrikant .23 lage aansluitklem 7.00 Koeling compleet
geleverd worden .44 klemmenkast tussendeel .04 waaier
(zie het voorbeeld van een .45 klemmenkast grondplaat .40 waaierkap
bestelformulier) .47 wartelplaap .41 bevestigingsbeugel
1.00 Lagering DE .51 moer .49 bout
.40 lagerschild .52 verbindingsstrip
.43 asafdichting .70 U-beugel
.58 golfveer .83 pakking Het gereedschap voor het opzetten en
.60 rollager .84 klemmenkast deksel verwijderen van rollagers, ventilatoren en
.61 afsluitdop .95 hulpklem overbrengingsstukken worden niet
.65 lagerdeksel binnen .96 beugel t.b.v. hulpklem meegeleverd!
.67 lagerdeksel buiten .97 beugel t.b.v. klemmenbord
.68 vetslingerschijf .99 contact plaat
.69 spiraalveer 6.00 Lagering NDE
3.00 Rotor compleet .10 rollager
4.00 Stator compleet .20 lagerschild
.07 voet van de statorhuis .23 asafdichting
.18 typeplaatje .24 lagerdeksel binnen
.35 passchijf t.b.v. voeten .25 nasmeervetpijp
.41 aardklem .26 lagerdeksel buiten
5.00 Klemmenkast compleet .65 smeernippel
.03 pakking .67 Doorvoertule t.b.v. nasmeervetpijp
.10 klemmenbord compleet .72 vetslingerschijf
.12 aardklembeugel
.19 hoge aansluitklem
.22 beugel van de aansluitklem

Siemens AG
39
ITALIANO SVENSKA ýESKY ɉɈ ɊɍɋɋɄɂ
Parti di ricambio, fornibili dalla fabbrica Reservdelar, tillgängliga från Náhradní díly, které dodává výrobce Ɂɚɩɚɫɧɵɟ ɱɚɫɬɢ, ɩɨɫɬɚɜɥɹɟɦɵɟ
(vedi esempio) fabriken (se Beställningsexempel) (viz pĜíklad objednávky) ɩɪɨɢɡɜɨ-ɞɢɬɟɥɟɦ (ɫɦɨɬɪɢ ɩɪɢɦɟɪ
1.00 Uložení AS ɡɚɤɚɡɚ)
1.00 Supporto lato comando 1.00 Lager för axeltappsidan
.40 Scudo di supporto (A-sidan), komplett .40 ložiskový štít 1.0 ɍɫɬɚɧɨɜɤɚ AS
.43 Anello torico .40 Lagersköld .43 tČsnící kroužek hĜídele .40 ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɨɜɵɣ ɳɢɬ
.58 Spessore di compensazione .43 Tätningsring .58 ložisková pružina .43 ɭɩɥɨɬɧɹɸɳɟɟ ɤɨɥɶɰɨ ɜɚɥɚ
.60 Cuscinetto a rotolamento .58 Utjämningsskiva .60 valivé ložisko .58 ɝɨɮɪɢɪɨɜɚɧɧɚɹ ɩɪɭɠɢɧɚ
.61 Tappo di chiusura .60 Rullningslager .61 uzavírací zátka .60 ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤ ɤɚɱɟɧɢɹ
.65 Copricuscinetto .61 Förseglingspropp .65 ložiskové víko .61 ɡɚɩɨɪɧɚɹ ɩɪɨɛɤɚ
.67 Copricuscinetto esterno .65 Lageröverfall .67 ložiskové víko vnČjší .65 ɤɨɥɩɚɤ ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɚ
.68 Disco centrifugo .67 Yttre lagerlock .68 odstĜikovaþ .67 ɧɚɪɭɠɧɚɹ ɤɪɢɲɤɚ ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɚ
.69 Molla de compressione .68 Avkastare .69 Tlaþná pružina .68 ɰɟɧɬɪɨɛɟɠɧɚɹ ɲɚɣɛɚ
.69 Spiralfjäder 3.00 Rotor úplný .69 ɩɪɭɠɢɧɚ ɫɠɚɬɢɹ
3.00 Rotore, completo
3.00 Rotor, komplett 4.00 Stator úplný 3.00 Ɋɨɬɨɪ ɩɨɥɧɵɣ
4.00 Statore, completo
.07 Piede del corpo 4.00 Stator, komplett .07 patka statoru 4.00 ɋɬɚɬɨɪ ɩɨɥɧɵɣ
.18 Targhetta .07 Kroppens fot .18 výkonostní štítek .07 ɩɹɬɚ ɫɬɚɬɨɪɚ
.35 Disco .18 Märkplåt .35 podložka .18 ɬɚɛɥɢɱɤɚ ɦɨɳɧɨɫɬɟɣ
.41 Morsetto di messa a terra .35 Bricka .41 uzemĖovací spojka .35 ɲɚɣɛɚ
.41 Jordledningens klammer 5.00 Svorkovnice úplná .41 ɡɚɡɟɦɥɹɸɳɚɹ ɦɭɮɬɚ
5.00 Scatola morsetti, completa
.03 Guarnizione 5.00 Uttagslåda, komplett .03 tČsnČní 5.00 Ʉɥɟɦɦɧɢɤ ɩɨɥɧɵɣ
.10 Morsettiera completa .03 Tätning .10 svorková deska úplná .03 ɧɚɛɢɜɤɚ
.12 Serrafilo per conduttore protettivo .10 Kopplingsplint, komplett .12 PĜíložka svorky ochranného vodiþe .10 ɡɚɠɢɦɧɚɹ ɩɥɚɬɚ ɩɨɥɧɚɹ
.19 Morsetto con serrafilo, alto .12 Koplingsklämma för skyddsledare .19 PĜíložková svorka vysoká .12 Ʉɥɟɦɦɧɢɤɢ ɞɥɹ ɡɚɳɢɬɧɨɝɨ
.22 Serrafilo .19 hög kopplingsklämma .22 PĜíložka svorky ɩɪɨɜɨɞɚ
.23 Morsetto con serrafilo, basso .22 Klämmbygel .23 PĜíložková svorka nízká .19 ȼɟɪɯɧɢɟ ɯɨɦɭɬɢɤɢ
.44 Parte superiore della scatola .23 låg kopplingsklämma .44 skĜíĖ svorkovnice .22 Ɂɚɠɢɦ
morsetti .44 Anslutningslåda, överdel .45 Nástavec .23 ɇɢɠɧɢɟ ɯɨɦɭɬɢɤɢ
.45 Carcassa .45 Hölje .47 stČna vývodek .44 ɤɨɪɨɛɤɚ ɤɥɟɦɦɧɢɤɚ
.47 Piastra di entrata .47 Fläns .51 matice .45 Ʉɨɪɩɭɫ
.51 Dado .51 Mutter .52 propojka .47 ȼɜɨɞɧɚɹ ɩɥɢɬɚ
.52 Ponticello diritto .52 Bygel .70 U-tĜmen .51 ɝɚɣɤɚ
.70 Morsetto di serraggio .70 Klämbygel .83 tČsnČní .52 ɫɨɟɞɢɧɢɬɟɥɶ
.83 Guarnizione .83 Tätning .84 víko skĜínČ svorkovnice .70 ɯɨɦɭɬ ɜ ɮɨɪɦɟ U
.84 Coperchio della scatola morsetti .84 Lock till uttagslåda .95 svorka .83 ɧɚɛɢɜɤɚ
.95 Morsettiera per circuito .95 Klämma .96 nosná lišta .84 ɤɨɥɩɚɤ ɤɨɪɨɛɤɢ ɤɥɟɦɦɧɢɤɚ
.96 Lista portante .96 Bärlist .97 opČrka úplná .95 ɡɚɠɢɦ
.97 Montante completo .97 Full sträva .99 kontaktní plech .96 ɧɟɫɭɳɚɹ ɩɥɚɧɤɚ
.99 Lamiera di contatto .99 Kontaktplåt 6.00 Uložení BS .97 ɩɨɞɞɟɪɠɤɚ ɩɨɥɧɚɹ
.10 valivé ložisko .99 ɤɨɧɬɚɤɬɧɵɣ ɥɢɫɬɨɜɨɣ ɦɟɬɚɥɥ
6.00 Supporto opposto al lato 6.00 Lager för fläktsidan (B-sidan)
comando .10 Rullningslager .20 ložiskový štít 6.00 ɍɫɬɚɧɨɜɤɚ BS
.10 Cuscinetto a rotolamento .20 Lagersköld .23 tČsnící kroužek hĜídele .10 ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤ ɤɚɱɟɧɢɹ
.20 Scudo di supporto .23 Axeltätning .24 ložiskové víko .20 ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɨɜɵɣ ɳɢɬ
.23 Anello torico .24 Lageröverfall .25 mazací trubka .23 ɭɩɥɨɬɧɹɸɳɟɟ ɤɨɥɶɰɨ ɜɚɥɚ
.24 Copricuscinetto .25 Smörjrör .26 ložiskové víko vnČjší .24 ɤɨɥɩɚɤ ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɚ
.25 Tubo di lubrificazione .26 Yttre lagerlock .65 mazací hlavice .25 ɫɦɚɡɨɱɧɚɹ ɬɪɭɛɤɚ
.26 Copricuscinetto esterno .65 Smörjkopp .67 gumové pouzdro .26 ɧɚɪɭɠɧɚɹ ɤɪɢɲɤɚ ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɚ
.65 Nipplo di lubrificazione .67 Gummihylsa .72 odstĜikovaþ .65 ɫɦɚɡɨɱɧɚɹ ɝɨɥɨɜɤɚ
.67 Bussola in gomma .72 Avkastare 7.00 Ventilace úplná .67 ɪɟɡɢɧɨɜɚɹ ɜɬɭɥɤɚ
.72 Disco centrifugo .04 ventilátor .72 ɰɟɧɬɪɨɛɟɠɧɚɹ ɲɚɣɛɚ
7.00 Fläktkylning, komplett
7.00 Ventilazione completa .04 Fläkt .40 kryt ventilátoru 7.00 ȼɟɧɬɢɥɹɰɢɹ ɩɨɥɧɚɹ
.04 Ventola .40 Fläktkåpa .41 úhelník .04 ɜɟɧɬɢɥɹɬɨɪ
.40 Cuffia della ventola .41 Vinkel .49 šroub .40 ɤɨɠɭɯ ɜɟɧɬɢɥɹɬɨɪɚ
.41 Angolare .49 Skruv .41 ɭɝɨɥɶɧɢɤ
.49 Vite Nasazovací a stahovací pĜípravky pro .49 ɜɢɧɬ
På- och avdragare för rullningslager, fläkt valivá ložiska, ventilátory a pĜenosové ɉɪɢɫɩɨɫɨɛɥɟɧɢɹ ɞɥɹ ɭɫɬɚɧɨɜɤɢ ɢ
Non sono fornibili i dispositivi di þleny se nedodávají!
estrazione / calettamento per i cuscinetti, och drivdon kan ej erhållas. ɫɬɹɝɢ-ɜɚɧɢɹ ɩɨɞɲɢɩɧɢɤɨɜ ɤɚɱɟɧɢɹ,
ventilatori ed azionamenti. ɜɟɧɬɢɥɹɬɨɪɵ ɢ ɷɥɟɦɟɧɬɵ ɩɟɪɟɞɚɱɢ ɧɟ
ɩɨɫɬɚɜɥɹɸɬɫɹ!
Siemens AG
Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik
Bestellbeispiel / Order example Standard Drives
Exemple de commande
Ejemplo de pedido Postfach 3269
Esempio di ordinazione
Beställningsexempel 91050 Erlangen
PĜíklad objednávky
ɉɪɢɦɟɪ ɡɚɤɚɡɚ
Voorbeeld van een bestelformulier
1LG4183-4AA60
UC 0008/012783001
1.40 Lagerschild Siemens AG
Automation & Drives
Standard Drives
Postbox 3269
91050 Erlangen

Siemens AG
40
10-8
10.3 SIEMENS SIRIUS 3RW44 Soft Starter

10-9
SIEMENS SIRUS 3RW44 Soft Starter System Manual

Table of Contents
Important Notes
Introduction 1
Configuration Instructions 2
SIRIUS
Installation, Connection and 3
Branch Layout
Soft Starter Display, Controls and Device 4

3RW44 Interfaces
Commissioning 5
System Manual Device Functions 6
Diagnosis and Messages 7
Communication Module 8
PROFIBUS DP
Circuit Examples 9
General Technical Data 10
Appendix
Configuration Data
Index
Correction Sheet
Order No.: 3ZX1012-0RW44-1AC1
Issue 04/2009
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to guarantee your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded
according to the degree of danger.
Danger
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Notice
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and operation
of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes in this
documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and label devices,
systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Prescribed Usage
Note the following:
Warning
The device may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical description and only in
connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by
Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and assembly as
well as careful operation and maintenance.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Copyright Siemens AG 2005. All rights reserved. Disclaimer of liability

This document shall not be transmitted or reproduced, nor shall its Although we have carefully checked the contents of this publication for
contents be exploited or disclosed to third persons without prior written conformity with the hardware and software described, we cannot
consent from Siemens. Infringements will be subject to damage claims. guarantee complete conformity since errors cannot be excluded. The
All rights reserved, in particular in case of a patent grant of utility model information provided in this manual is checked at regular intervals and
registration. any corrections which might become necessary will be included in the
next editions.
Siemens AG ¤ Siemens AG 2005

Automation & Drives Subject to technical changes
P.O. box 4848, 90327 Nuremberg, Germany
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 Physical Basics of the 3-phase Asynchronous Motor and Mode of Operation of the Soft Starter . 1-2
1.1.1 3-phase Asynchronous Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.1.2 Operating Mode of the SIRIUS 3RW44 Electronic Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.2 Application and Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.3 Marginal Conditions for Storage and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
2 Configuration Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2.1.1 RS 232 Serial PC Interface and Soft Starter ES Parameterization and Operating Software . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.2 Win Soft Starter Selection and Simulation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.3 Training Course for SIRIUS Soft Starters (SD-SIRIUSO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 Normal or Heavy Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2.1 Application Examples for Normal Starting (CLASS 10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2.2 Application Examples for Heavy Starting (CLASS 20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2.3 Application Examples for Very Heavy Starting (CLASS 30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.3 On-time and Switching Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.4 Installation Altitude and Ambient Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.5 Basic Factory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.6 Order Number Classification for SIRIUS 3RW44 Soft Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
3 Installation, Connection and Branch Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Installing the Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

3.1.1 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.1.2 Mounting Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.1.3 Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.1.4 Mounting Dimensions and Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2 Branch Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.2.2 Soft Starters in Standard Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.2.3 Soft Starters in Inside Delta Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.2.4 Soft Starter with Contactor Disconnector (Main Contactor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.3 Protection of the Soft Starter against Short-Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.4 Capacitors for Power Factor Improvement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.5 3RW44 in Generator Operation (with 3-Phase Asynchronous Motor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.6 Electrical Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.6.1 Control and Auxiliary Current Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.6.2 Main Current Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.6.3 Conductor Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
4 Display, Controls and Device Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Display and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4.2 Device Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.1 Local Device Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.2 PROFIBUS Interface (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.3 External Display and Control Unit (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual i

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
Table of Contents
5 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Menu Structure, Navigation, Changing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

5.1.1 Menu Structure and Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.1.2 Changing Parameters: For Example Motor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2 Switching on for the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.1 Recommendation on Procedure for 3RW44 Commissioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.2 Quick Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.3 User-specific Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.3.1 Main Menu Item "Settings" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.4 Making Settings in the Selected Parameter Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.4.1 Selecting the Parameter Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.4.2 Entering the Motor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.4.3 Specifying the Starting Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.4.4 Specifying the Stopping Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.4.5 Setting Slow Speed Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.4.6 Specifying Current Limit Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5.4.7 Parameterizing the Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.4.8 Parameterizing the Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.4.9 Selecting Motor Protection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.4.10 Selecting Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5.4.11 Specifying the Behavior of the Protective Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5.4.12 Specifying the Names on the Device Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
5.4.13 Activating the Field Bus Interface (PROFIBUS DP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
5.4.14 Saving Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
5.5 Other Device Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
5.5.1 Display measured value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
5.5.2 Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
5.5.3 Motor Control (Assigning Control Priority) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
5.5.4 Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
5.5.5 Safety (Specifying the User Level, Parameterization Protection). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
6 Device Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1 Various Parameter Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6.2 Starting Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.2.1 Voltage Ramp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.2.2 Torque Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.2.3 Breakaway Pulse in Combination with the Voltage Ramp or Torque Control Starting Mode. . . . . . 6-7
6.2.4 Current Limiting in Combination with the Voltage Ramp or Torque Control Starting Mode . . . . . . . 6-9
6.2.5 Starting Mode: Direct On Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.2.6 Starting Mode: Motor Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.3 Stopping Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.3.1 Coasting Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.3.2 Torque Control and Pump Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.3.3 DC Braking / Combined Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.4 Slow Speed Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.5 Current Limit Values for Load Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6.6 Motor Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6.7 Inherent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
7 Diagnosis and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 Diagnosis, Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

7.1.1 Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.1.2 Warnings and Group Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
ii SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
Table of Contents
7.1.3 Device Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
8 PROFIBUS DP Communication Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

8.1.1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.2 Data Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.2.1 Data Transmission Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.2.2 Communication Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.3 Installation of the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.3.1 Insertion of the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module (Field Bus Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.4 Activating the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module (Field Bus Interface) and Setting the
Station Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.4.2 Activating the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module via the Display, Setting the Station
Address and Saving the Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.4.3 Activating the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module (Field Bus Interface) and Setting the
Station Address via the Device Interface using the "Soft Starter ES Premium" or the
"Soft Starter ES + SP1" Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8.5 Soft Starter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8.5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8.5.2 Configuration with the GSD File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8.5.3 Configuration with the Soft Starter ES Premium Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8.5.4 Diagnostics Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8.5.5 Soft Starter ES Parameterizing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
8.6 PROFIBUS DP Commissioning using the GSD File in STEP 7 (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
8.6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
8.6.2 Configuration using the Device Master Data (GSD) in STEP 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8.6.3 Integration into the User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
8.6.4 Switching On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
8.6.5 Flow Diagram PROFIBUS DP - Starting the Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
8.7 Process Data and Process Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
8.8 Diagnosis via LED Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
8.9 Diagnosis with STEP 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
8.9.1 Reading the Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
8.9.2 Options for Reading the Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
8.9.3 Structure of the Slave Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
8.9.4 Station Status 1 to 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
8.9.5 Master PROFIBUS Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
8.9.6 Manufacturer Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
8.9.7 Code-Based Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
8.9.8 Module Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
8.9.9 Channel-Based Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
8.10 Data Formats and Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
8.10.1 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
8.11 Identification Number (ID No.), Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
8.11.1 Identification Number (ID No.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
8.11.2 Error Codes for Negative Data Set Acknowledgement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
8.12 Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
8.12.1 Data Set 68 - Reading/Writing the Process Image of the Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
8.12.2 Data Set 69 - Reading the Process Image of the Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
8.12.3 Data Set 72 - Log List - Reading Device Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
8.12.4 Data Set 73 Log List - Reading the Trippings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
8.12.5 Data Set 75 Log List - Reading Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
8.12.6 Data Set 81 - Reading the Basic Settings of Data Set 131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual iii

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
Table of Contents
8.12.9 Data Set 92 - Reading the Device Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
8.12.10 Data Set 93 - Writing a Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
8.12.11 Data set 94 - Reading the Measured Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
8.12.12 Data Set 95 - Reading the Statistics Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57
8.12.13 Data Set 96 - Reading the Maximum Pointer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
8.12.14 Data Set 100 - Reading the Device Identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
8.12.15 Data Sets 131, 141, 151 - Technology Parameters 2: Reading/Writing Set 1, 2, 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
8.12.16 Data Sets 132, 142, 152 - Technology Parameters 3: Reading/Writing Set 1, 2, 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-66
8.12.17 Data Set 133 - Technology Parameters 4: O&M Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
8.12.18 Data Set 160 - Reading/Writing Communication Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68
8.12.19 Data Set 165 - Reading/Writing Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69
9 Circuit Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1 Connection Examples for Main and Control Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2

9.1.1 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit with Control via Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.2 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit with Line Contactor and Control via PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.1.3 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit and DC Braking Stopping Function for Device Types 3RW44 22 to
3RW44 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.1.4 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit and DC Braking Stopping Function for Device Types 3RW44 26 to
3RW44 66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.1.5 3RW44 in an Inside Delta Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.1.6 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit and Control as per Contactor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.1.7 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit with Soft Start/Stop and Additional Slow Speed Function in both
Directions of Rotation with one Parameter Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9.1.8 Activation via PROFIBUS with Switching to Manual Operation Local
(e. g. at the Control Cabinet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.1.9 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit and Reversing Operation via Main Contactors with one Parameter
Set without Soft Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.1.10 Reversing Operation with Soft Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9.1.11 Soft Starter for Pole-Changing Motor with Separate Windings and
2 Parameter Sets9-12
9.1.12 Soft Starters for Dahlander Motors with 2 Parameter Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
9.1.13 Parallel Starting of 3 Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
9.1.14 Soft Starter for Serial Starting with 3 Parameter Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
9.1.15 Soft Starter for Activation of a Motor with a Magnetic Fixing Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
9.1.16 Emergency Stop Monitoring according to EN 954-1 Category 4 with Safety Relay 3TK2823 and
3RW44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
9.1.17 Soft Starter with Direct Switching (DOL) as Emergency Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
9.1.18 Soft Starter with Star-Delta Starter as Emergency Start (3RW44 in a Standard Circuit) . . . . . . . . 9-22
9.1.19 Soft Starter and Frequency Converter on one Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
10 General Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.1 Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

10.2 Transport and Storage Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
10.3.1 Selection and Ordering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
10.3.2 Technical Data Power Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10.3.3 Technical Data Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
10.3.4 Conductor Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
10.3.5 Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
10.3.6 Utilization Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
10.3.7 Branch Component Layout (Standard Circuit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
iv SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
Table of Contents
10.3.8 Branch Component Layout (Inside Delta Circuit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

10.3.9 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
10.3.10 Spare parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
10.4 Tripping Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
10.4.1 Motor Protection Tripping Characteristics: 3RW44 with Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
10.4.2 Motor Protection Tripping Characteristics: 3RW44 with Asymmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
10.5 Dimension Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Configuration-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Index-1
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fax-1
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual v

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
Table of Contents
vi SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
Important Notes
Important Notes
Objective of this manual

This manual contains basics and tips on the application of SIRIUS 3RW44 soft
starters. The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter is an electronic motor control device for
optimized starting and stopping of 3-phase asynchronous motors.
The manual describes all the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter functions.
Target group
The manual is aimed at all users who deal with
• commissioning,
• service and maintenance,
• planning and configuration of systems
Required basic knowledge

In order to understand this manual, general knowledge in the field of general
electrical engineering is required.
Validity
This manual is valid for SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters. It contains a description of
the components that are valid at the time of publication of this manual. We
reserve the right to include an updated product information leaflet with new
components and new component versions.
Definitions
If the short form 3RW44 is used in the text, it refers to the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft
starter.
Standards and approvals

The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter complies with the IEC/EN 60947-4-2 standard.
SIRIUS 3RW44 system manual

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 vii
Important Notes
Disclaimer of liability
The manufacturer of the system or machine is responsible for ensuring the
correct overall functioning. SIEMENS AG, its branch offices and associated
companies (hereinafter referred to as "SIEMENS") cannot guarantee all
properties of a system or machine not designed by SIEMENS.
SIEMENS can also not assume liability for recommendations given or implied by
the following description. No new guarantee/warranty or liability claims in excess
of the general terms and conditions of SIEMENS can be deduced from the
following description.
Access aids
To facilitate and speed up access to special information, the manual contains the
following aids:
• A table of contents is listed at the beginning of the manual.
• The individual chapters contain subheadings to provide an overview of the
contents of the section.
• At the end of the manual, there is an extensive index to enable you to quickly
access the required information.
Always up-to-date information

For questions on motor starters, your regional contact persons for
communication-capable, low-voltage switchgear will be pleased to assist you.
You can find a list of contact persons, as well as the latest version of the manual,
on the Internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/softstarter
Please address technical questions to:
Technical Assistance: Telephone: +49 (0) 911-895-5900 (8°° - 17°° CET)

Fax: +49 (0) 911-895-5907
E-mail: technical-assistance@siemens.com
Internet: www.siemens.de/lowvoltage/technical-assistance
Correction sheet
A correction sheet is included at the end of the manual. Please enter your
suggestions for improvement, supplementation and corrections, and send the
sheet back to us. This will help us to improve the next issue.

viii GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Introduction 1
Chapter Subject Page
1.1 Physical Basics of the 3-phase Asynchronous Motor and Mode of 1-2
Operation of the Soft Starter
1.1.1 3-phase Asynchronous Motor 1-2

1.1.2 Operating Mode of the SIRIUS 3RW44 Electronic Soft Starter 1-4
1.2 Application and Use 1-7
1.3 Marginal Conditions for Storage and Operation 1-8

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05 1-1
Introduction
1.1 Physical Basics of the 3-phase Asynchronous Motor and Mode

of Operation of the Soft Starter
1.1.1 3-phase Asynchronous Motor
Applications of the Thanks to their robust, simple design and low-maintenance operation, 3-phase
3-phase asynchronous motors are used in large numbers in commercial applications,
asynchronous motor trade and industry.
Problem If switched on directly, the typical current and torque behavior of the 3-phase
asynchronous motor may negatively influence the feeding supply network and
the load machine during start-up.
Starting current 3-phase asynchronous motors have a high direct starting current I(starting).
Depending on the motor version, this current may be 3 times to 15 times the size
of the rated operating current. A typical value is 7 to 8 times the size of the motor
rated current.
Disadvantage This results in the following disadvantage

• Higher load on the electrical supply network. This means that the supply
network must be dimensioned for this higher output during motor start-up.
Motor current
I
IDirect
on-line
starting
INom
nNom Motor speed

n
001_Stromkurven ohne Sanftstarter.wmf
Figure 1-1: Typical starting current behavior of a 3-phase asynchronous motor
Start torque The start torque and the stalling torque can usually be assumed to be between 2
and 4 times the rated operating torque. For the load machine, this means that
the starting and acceleration forces in relation to rated operation result in
increased mechanical load on the machine and the conveyed material.
Disadvantages This results in the following disadvantages

• Higher load on mechanical parts of the machine
• Higher costs because of application wear and maintenance

1-2 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
Introduction
Motor
torque Mstall
M
002_Drehmomentkurven ohne Softstarter.wmf

MDirect start
Motor
MAcceleration
MNom
MLoad
. .
e.g. pump
nNom Motor speed

n
Figure 1-2: Typical starting torque behavior of a 3-phase asynchronous motor
Solution The current and torque behavior during start-up can be optimally adapted to the
requirement of the application using the SIRIUS 3RW44 electronic soft starter.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05 1-3
Introduction
1.1.2 Operating Mode of the SIRIUS 3RW44 Electronic Soft Starter
The 3RW44 soft starter has two antiparallel thyristors in each of the phases.
There is one thyristor for the positive and one thyristor for the negative half
wave.
Using phase angle control, the r.m.s. value of the motor voltage is increased
from a definable start voltage or start torque to the motor rated voltage within a
selectable starting time using various control methods.
The motor current acts proportional to the voltage applied to the motor. The
starting current is thus reduced by the factor of the voltage that is applied to the
motor.
The torque behaves quadratically in relation to the voltage applied to the motor.
The starting torque is thus reduced quadratically in relation to the voltage
applied to the motor.
Example
SIEMENS motor 1LG4253AA (55 kW)
Rated data at 400 V:

Pe : 55 kW
Ie : 100 A
IDirect on line starting : approx. 700 A
Me : 355 Nm ;
1000
Example: Me = 9.55 x 55 kW x 1480 min-1
ne : 1480 min-1
MDirect on line starting : approx. 700 Nm

Set start voltage: 50 % (1/2 line voltage)
=> IStart 1/2 of the direct on line start switch-on current (approx. 350 A)
=> MStart 1/4 of the direct on line start torque (approx. 175 Nm)
The following graphs illustrate the behavior of the starting current and torque of a
3-phase asynchronous motor in combination with a soft starter:
Motor current
I
004_Stromkurven mit Sanftstarter.wmf
IDirect
on-line
starting
ISoft starter
INom
nNom Motor speed

n
Figure 1-3: Reduced current behavior of the 3-phase asynchronous motor during start-up
with the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter

1-4 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
Introduction
Motor torque
M
005_Drehmomentkurven mit Sanftstarter.wmf

MDirect
on-line
starting
MNom
1
2
3
1 M nNom Motor speed

Soft start n
voltage ramp
2 M
Soft start
torque-controlled
3 MLoad (e.g. pump)
Figure 1-4: Reduced torque behavior of the 3-phase asynchronous motor during start-up
with the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05 1-5
Introduction
Starting This means that because the electronic soft starter controls the motor voltage
during motor start-up, it simultaneously controls the ingoing starting current and
the starting torque generated in the motor.
The same principle is also used during the stopping process. The effect is that
the torque generated in the motor is slowly reduced, thus enabling soft stopping
of the application.
During this process, the frequency remains constant and corresponds to the line
frequency, contrary to the frequency-controlled starting and stopping of a
frequency converter.
Upon completion of motor run-up, the thyristors are fully utilized, resulting in the
complete line voltage being applied to the motor terminals. Since no motor
voltage control is required during operation, the thyristors are bridged by
integrated bypass contacts. This reduces the waste heat which develops during
continuous operation and is caused by power loss of the thyristor. Therefore, the
area around the switching devices heats up less.
The following graph illustrates the mode of operation of the 3RW44 soft starter:
003_Phasenanschnitt und Thyristoren mit Bypass.dsf
L1 L2 L3
UL1-
U
L3 L1 -L3
MtM G1
D
D D
D D D
M
3~
Figure 1-5: Phase angle control and schematic layout of a soft starter with internal bypass contacts

1-6 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
Introduction
1.2 Application and Use

Applications and 3RW44 soft starters are an alternative to star-delta starters and frequency
selection criteria converters.
Their major benefits are soft starting and soft stop, uninterrupted changeover
without current peaks that would stress the power supply, and their compact
dimensions.
Numerous drives which previously could only be operated with frequency
converters can be changed over to soft starter operation using the 3RW44 soft
starter, as long as no speed control, no particularly high starting torque or
start-up with close to nominal current is required.
Applications Possible applications include:
• Conveyor belts
• Powered roller conveyors
• Compressors
• Ventilators, fans
• Pumps
• Hydraulic pumps
• Stirrers
• Centrifugal machines
• Milling machines
• Mills
• Crushers
• Circular saws/ribbon saws
• ...
Advantages Conveyor belts and transport systems:

• Jerk-free starting
• Jerk-free braking
Centrifugal pumps, reciprocating pumps:

• Water hammering is avoided
• Increased service life of the pipe system
Stirrers, mixers:
• Reduced starting current
Fans:
• Reduced stress on transmissions and V-belts

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05 1-7
Introduction
1.3 Marginal Conditions for Storage and Operation
Permissible ambient temperature for

- Storage -25 °C ... +80 °C
- Operation 0 °C ... +60 °C, from 40 °C with derating
(refer to Chapter 10.3 "Technical Data")
Permissible relative air humidity 10 ... 95 %
Maximum permissible installation 5,000 m, from 1,000 m with derating
altitude
Caution
Please ensure that no liquid, dust or conductive parts
enter the soft starter!

1-8 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
Configuration Instructions 2
2.1 Configuration 2-2

2.1.1 RS 232 Serial PC Interface and Soft Starter ES Parameterization and 2-2
Operating Software
2.1.2 Win Soft Starter Selection and Simulation Program 2-2
2.1.3 Training Course for SIRIUS Soft Starters (SD-SIRIUSO) 2-2
2.2 Normal or Heavy Starting 2-3
2.2.1 Application Examples for Normal Starting (CLASS 10) 2-3
2.2.2 Application Examples for Heavy Starting (CLASS 20) 2-3
2.2.3 Application Examples for Very Heavy Starting (CLASS 30) 2-4
2.3 On-time and Switching Frequency 2-5
2.4 Installation Altitude and Ambient Temperature 2-6
2.5 Basic Factory Settings 2-7
2.6 Order Number Classification for SIRIUS 3RW44 Soft Starters 2-8

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 2-1
Configuration Instructions
2.1 Configuration
The electronic 3RW44 soft starters are designed for normal starting. A model
with a higher output may be necessary for heavy starting or for a higher starting
frequency.
A PTC thermistor in the motor is recommended for long starting times. This also
applies to the soft stop, pump stop and DC braking stopping modes, since during
the stopping time, there is an additional current load in contrast to coasting
down.
Capacitive elements (e.g. compensation systems) must not be included in the
motor branch between the soft starter and the motor. Active filters must not be
operated in combination with soft starters.
All elements of the main circuit (such as fuses and switching devices) must be
dimensioned for direct on line starting according to the local short-circuit
conditions, and should be ordered separately.
The harmonic component load of the starting current must be taken into account
when selecting circuit breakers (release selection).
2.1.1 RS 232 Serial PC Interface and Soft Starter ES Parameterization and Operating Software
The electronic 3RW44 soft starters are equipped with a PC interface to

communicate with the Soft Starter ES software and an operating and monitoring
module (display).
2.1.2 Win Soft Starter Selection and Simulation Program
This software allows all SIEMENS soft starters to be simulated and selected
using various parameters such as network conditions, motor data, load data,
special application requirements, etc.
The software is a powerful tool which makes time-consuming and complex
manual calculations for determining the suitable soft starter a thing of the past.
The Win Soft Starter selection and simulation program can be downloaded at:
http://www.siemens.com/softstarter >Software.
2.1.3 Training Course for SIRIUS Soft Starters (SD-SIRIUSO)
Siemens offers a two-day training course on electronic SIRIUS soft starters to

keep both our customers and Siemens personnel up-to-date on configuration,
commissioning and maintenance.
If you have any questions or would like to enroll, please contact:

Erlangen Training Center
A&D PT 4
Werner-von-Siemens-Str. 65
91052 Erlangen, Germany
Phone: ++49 9131 729262
Fax: ++49 9131 728172
sibrain.industry@siemens.com
http://www.siemens.com/sitrain

2-2 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
2.2 Normal or Heavy Starting

To properly dimension a soft starter, it is important to know and take into account
the starting time (normal or heavy starting) of the application. Long starting times
mean a higher thermal load for the thyristors of the soft starter. The 3RW44 soft
starters are designed for continuous operation under normal starting conditions
(CLASS 10), an ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celsius and a fixed
switching frequency. You can also find these values in Chapter 10.3.2 "Technical
Data Power Unit". If deviations from these data occur, it may be necessary to
overdimension the soft starter. Using the Win Soft Starter selection and
simulation program from SIEMENS, you can enter your application data and
requirements, and the optimum soft starter for your application will be
dimensioned (refer to Chapter 10.3.9 "Accessories" software).
Selection criteria Note

The appropriate size of the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter must be selected on the
basis of the motor rated current
(Rated currentsoft starter tmotor rated current).
2.2.1 Application Examples for Normal Starting (CLASS 10)
Normal starting CLASS 10 (up to 20 s with 350 % In motor),

The soft starter's output can be the same as that of the implemented motor
Application Powered roller
Conveyor belts conveyors Compressors Small ventilators Pumps Hydraulic pumps
Starting parameters
• Voltage ramp and current
limiting
- Start voltage % 70 60 50 30 30 30
- Starting time s 10 10 10 10 10 10
- Current limiting value deactivated deactivated 4 x IM 4 x IM deactivated deactivated
• Torque ramp
- Start torque 60 50 40 20 10 10
- End torque 150 150 150 150 150 150
- Starting time 10 10 10 10 10 10
• Breakaway pulse deactivated (0 ms) deactivated (0 ms) deactivated (0 ms) deactivated (0 ms) deactivated (0 ms) deactivated (0 ms)
Stopping mode Soft stop Soft stop Coasting down Coasting down Pump stop Coasting down
2.2.2 Application Examples for Heavy Starting (CLASS 20)
Heavy starting CLASS 20 (up to 40 s with 350 % In motor),

The selected soft starter must have a power class that is 1 class higher than that of the implemented motor
Application Stirrers Centrifugal machines Milling machines
Starting parameters
limiting
- Start voltage % 30 30 30
- Starting time s 30 30 30
- Current limiting value 4 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM
• Torque ramp
- Start torque 30 30 30
- End torque 150 150 150
- Starting time 30 30 30
• Breakaway pulse deactivated (0 ms) deactivated (0 ms) deactivated (0 ms)
Stopping mode Coasting down Coasting down Coasting down or DC braking

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 2-3
2.2.3 Application Examples for Very Heavy Starting (CLASS 30)
Very heavy starting CLASS 30 (up to 60 s with 350 % In motor),

The selected soft starter must have a power class that is 2 classes higher than that of the implemented motor
Application Large fans Mills Crushers Circular saws/ribbon saws
Starting parameters
limiting
- Start voltage % 30 50 50 30
- Starting time s 60 60 60 60
- Current limiting value 4 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM
• Torque ramp
- Start torque 20 50 50 20
- End torque 150 150 150 150
- Starting time 60 60 60 60
• Breakaway pulse deactivated (0 ms) 80 %; 300 ms 80 %; 300 ms deactivated (0 ms)
Stopping mode Coasting down Coasting down Coasting down Coasting down
Note
These tables provide example set values and device dimensionings. They serve
as information only and are not binding. The set values are application-
dependent and must be optimized during commissioning.
Soft starter dimensioning should, if necessary, be verified with the help of the
Win Soft Starter program or via the Technical Assistance in the Chapter
"Important Notes" .

2-4 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
2.3 On-time and Switching Frequency

In terms of motor rated current and normal or heavy starting, the 3RW44 soft
starters are dimensioned for a maximum permissible switching frequency in
combination with a relative on-time. Please also refer to Chapter 10.3.2
"Technical Data Power Unit". If these values are exceeded, you may have to
select a larger soft starter.
On-time OT The relative on-time OT in % corresponds to the relationship between the load
duration and the cycle duration of loads that are frequently switched on and off.
The on-time OT can be calculated using the following formula:

ts + tb
OT = -------------------------
-
ts + tb + tp
Explanation of the formula:
OT On-time [%]
ts Starting time [s]
tb Operating time [s]
tp Idle time [s]
The following graph illustrates the procedure.

Ie
t
ts tb tp
Figure 2-1: On-time OT
Switching frequency To prevent thermal overloading of the devices, the maximum permissible
switching frequency must be adhered to under all circumstances.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 2-5
2.4 Installation Altitude and Ambient Temperature

The permissible installation altitude must not exceed 5,000 m above sea level
(above 5,000 m on request).
If the installation altitude exceeds 1,000 m, the rated operating current must be
reduced for thermal reasons.
If the installation altitude exceeds 2,000 m, the rated voltage must also be
reduced because of the limited insulation strength. For installation altitudes
between 2,000 m and 5,000 m above sea level, only rated voltages d 460 V are
allowed.
The following illustration shows the reduction in the rated device current in
relation to the installation altitude:
The rated operating current I e must be reduced when installed at 1,000 m above
sea level or higher.
Figure 2-2: Current reduction in relation to the installation altitude
Ambient temperature The 3RW44 soft starters are designed to be operated with a nominal current at
an ambient temperature of 40 ° Celsius. If this temperature is exceeded,
e.g. due to excessive heating up in the control cabinet, other loads or due to a
higher general ambient temperature, this will influence the performance of the
soft starter and must be taken into account in the dimensioning process (refer to
Chapter 10.3.2 "Technical Data Power Unit").

2-6 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
2.5 Basic Factory Settings

Apply the basic factory settings (default settings)
• in the event of faulty parameterization

• if SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters that have already been parameterized are to be
further used in other systems.
Note
If this is not done, the present parameterization might cause drives to start
running.
Soft starters already parameterized by the operator can be set back to the basic
factory settings without requiring additional auxiliary tools.
To reset to the basic factory settings, refer to "Restoring the factory settings" on
Page 5-40.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 2-7
2.6 Order Number Classification for SIRIUS 3RW44 Soft Starters

Order number classification using the 3RW44 22-6BC44 as an example
3RW4 4 22 - 6 B C 4 4
I II III IV V VI VII VIII
*Gray fields cannot be configured
I Designation of the basic unit:

Semiconductor AC motor control device (soft starter)
II Device version:
4 High End soft starter
III Rated operating power Pe (at Ue 400 V)
Rated operating current Ie (for utilization category AC-53a) (at TU 40 °C)
Pe Ie Pe Ie
22 - 15 kW 29 A 45 - 160 kW 313 A
23 - 18.5 kW 36 A 46 - 200 kW 356 A
24 - 22 kW 47 A 47 - 250 kW 432 A
25 - 30 kW 57 A 53 - 315 kW 551 A
26 - 37 kW 77 A 54 - 355 kW 615 A
27 - 45 kW 93 A 55 - 400 kW 693 A
34 - 55 kW 113 A 56 - 450 kW 780 A
35 - 75 kW 134 A 57 - 500 kW 880 A
36 - 90 kW 162 A 58 - 560 kW 970 A
43 - 110 kW 203 A 65 - 630 kW 1,076 A
44 - 132 kW 250 A 66 - 710 kW 1,214 A
IV Type of connection
1 - Standard screw connection (main/auxiliary conductor connection)
(for devices d3RW44 27)
2 - Main conductor: Busbar connection / auxiliary conductor: Spring-
type terminal (for devices > 3RW44 27)
3 - Main conductor: Screw connection / auxiliary conductor: Spring-type
terminal (for devices d3RW44 27)
6 - Main conductor: Busbar connection / auxiliary conductor: Screw-
type terminal (for devices > 3RW44 27)
V Special function:
B - With bypass
VI Number of controlled phases:
C - All 3 phases controlled
VII Rated control supply voltage U s:
3 - 115 V AC
4 - 230 V AC
VIII Rated operational voltage Ue:
4 - 200 to 460 V
5 - 400 to 600 V
6 - 400 to 690 V

2-8 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Installation, Connection and Branch Layout 3
3.1 Installing the Soft Starter 3-2

3.1.1 Unpacking 3-2
3.1.2 Mounting Position 3-2
3.1.3 Standards 3-2
3.1.4 Mounting Dimensions and Clearances 3-3
3.2 Branch Layout 3-4
3.2.1 General 3-4
3.2.2 Soft Starters in Standard Circuits 3-5
3.2.3 Soft Starters in Inside Delta Circuits 3-6
3.2.4 Soft Starter with Contactor Disconnector (Main Contactor) 3-8
3.3 Protection of the Soft Starter against Short-Circuits 3-9
3.4 Capacitors for Power Factor Improvement 3-10
3.5 3RW44 in Generator Operation (with 3-Phase Asynchronous Motor) 3-10
3.6 Electrical Connection 3-10
3.6.1 Control and Auxiliary Current Connection 3-10
3.6.2 Main Current Connection 3-11
3.6.3 Conductor Cross-Sections 3-12

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 3-1
Installation, Connection and Branch Layout
3.1 Installing the Soft Starter

3.1.1 Unpacking
Caution
Do not lift the device by the lid when unpacking it, as this may damage the
device.
3.1.2 Mounting Position
The unit should be mounted on vertical, level surfaces.
22,5° 22,5°
NSB00649
90° 90°
Figure 3-1: Mounting position
3.1.3 Standards
Degree of protection The 3RW44 soft starters comply with degree of protection IP00.
IP00 Taking into account the ambient conditions, the devices must be installed in IP54
control cabinets (degree of pollution 2).
Make sure that no liquids, dust or conductive parts can enter the soft starter.
Operation of the soft starter produces waste heat (power loss) (refer to Chapter
10 "General Technical Data").
Caution
Ensure sufficient cooling where the unit is installed to prevent the switching
device from overheating.

3-2 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
3.1.4 Mounting Dimensions and Clearances
For uninhibited cooling, aeration and de-aeration of the heat sink, it is essential
that the minimum clearance to other devices is strictly observed.
t100 mm
[t4 in]
11 3 5
t5 mm t5 mm
[t0.2 in] [t0.2 in]
2 4 6
t75 mm
[t3 in]
Figure 3-2: Clearance to other devices
Notice
Ensure that there is sufficient clearance so that air can freely circulate for
cooling. The device is ventilated from bottom to top.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 3-3
3.2 Branch Layout
Warning
Automatic restart.
May result in death, serious injury or damage to property.
The automatic reset mode must not be used in applications where the
unexpected restart of the motor may lead to personal injury or
damage to property.
The start command (e.g. by the PLC) must be reset before a reset
command is issued, since an automatic restart is executed when a
start command is pending after the reset command is issued. This
especially applies to motor protection tripping. For safety reasons, it is
recommended that the group error output (terminals 95 and 96) be
integrated into the control.
3.2.1 General
A motor branch consists of (at least) a disconnector, a switching element and

a motor.
Protection functions must include line protection against short-circuits and
overload protection for line and motor.
Disconnector The disconnecting function with line protection against overload and short-
circuits can be achieved by using, for example, a circuit breaker or a fuse
disconnector.
(For fuse and circuit breaker assignment, refer to Chapter 10.3.7 "Branch
Component Layout (Standard Circuit)" and Chapter 10.3.8 "Branch Component
Layout (Inside Delta Circuit)".
Switching element The 3RW44 soft starter performs the functions of the switching element and the
motor protection.
Danger
Dangerous voltage.
Danger to life or risk of serious injury.
If line voltage is applied to the input terminals of the
soft starter, there may be dangerous voltages at the soft starter output
even without a start command! When working on the branch, this
must be disconnected using a disconnector (open isolating distance,
e.g. with open switch disconnector)!

3-4 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
3.2.2 Soft Starters in Standard Circuits
The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter is connected in the motor branch between the
disconnector or circuit breaker and the motor.
The 3RW44 soft starter automatically detects the type of connection of the soft
starter, meaning that this does not have to be explicitly set on the device. The
detected connection type can be read on the starter under the menu item "Status
display/Type of connection". In this case, the
display reads "Star/delta". If the circuitry is faulty or the motor is not connected,
the display shows "Unknown".
3/N/PE~ 50 Hz 400 V
L1
L2
L3
PE
Q1
Q11
G1
M1
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
W2 U2 V2 W2 U2 V2
008_Standardschaltung Zeichnung mit Bildern 50%.wmf
Figure 3-3: Schematic circuit diagrams for 3RW44 soft starters in standard circuits
Notice
If a main or line contactor is used, this contactor must not be connected
between the soft starter and the motor or in the return line between the motor
and the soft starter. The soft starter would otherwise not recognize the current
circuit version (standard circuit or inside delta circuit) and would output the error
message: "Missing load phase 1-3", or ensure that the circuit is closed before
the 3RW44 is activated.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 3-5
3.2.3 Soft Starters in Inside Delta Circuits
Prerequisite A motor whose windings can be connected in a delta circuit where a line voltage
prevails.
Example
Line voltage: 400 V
Rated motor current: 40.5 A
Current via soft starter in an inside delta circuit: approx.
24 A
Selected soft starter in an inside delta circuit: 3RW44 22
typenschild.jpg
Figure 3-4: Name plate of a 22 kW motor
The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter can be dimensioned to match the current flowing
in the motor section (58 % of the conductor current) by connecting it to the delta
winding of the motor. This requires at least 6 motor lines.
The 3RW44 soft starter automatically detects how it is connected, meaning that
the connection type does not have to be explicitly set on the device. The
detected connection type can be read on the starter under the menu item "Status
display/Type of connection". In this case, the display reads "Inside delta circuit".
If the circuitry is faulty or the motor is not connected, the display shows
"Unknown".
Notice
The rated motor current given on the name plate must always be set in the quick
start menu or in the motor adjustment menu item. This setting is independent of
the type of connection of the soft starter.
Value to be set in the above example for a line voltage of 400 V, e.g. 40.5 A.

3-6 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Notice
The DC braking and combined braking device functions are no longer available
for inside delta circuits.
In order to ensure proper functioning of the soft starter, the electrical connection
of the main voltage (line and motor side) must be made according to the given
circuit examples (refer to Section Chapter 9.1 "Connection Examples for Main
and Control Circuits").
L1 3/N/PE~50 Hz 400 V L1 3/N/PE~50 Hz 400 V

L2 L2
L3 L3
PE PE
Q1 Q1
F3 F3
Q11 Q11
M1 M1
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
W2 U2 V2 W2 U2 V2
Motor rotation in phase direction Motor rotation counterclockwise to phase direction

Figure 3-5: Schematic circuit diagram of a 3RW44 soft starter in an inside delta circuit
Notice
message: "Load phases 1-3 missing".

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 3-7
3.2.4 Soft Starter with Contactor Disconnector (Main Contactor)
If galvanic decoupling is required, a motor contactor can be installed between

the soft starter and the disconnector, or a fault output relay can be used. (Refer
to Chapter 10.3 "Technical Data" for the contactor assignment)
3/N/PE~ 50 Hz 400 V
L1
L2
L3
PE
Q1
Q21
K1
011_Standardschaltung und Hauptschütz Zeichnung mit Bildern.vsd

Q11
G1
M1
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
W2 U2 V2 W2 U2 V2
Figure 3-6: Schematic circuit diagram of branch with optional main contactor / contactor
disconnector
Notice
message: "Load phases 1-3 missing".
Notice
With 3RW44 product version *E08* (FW V 1.9.0) the simultaneous and/or prior
switch-off of the main contactor and removal of the on command at the soft
starter may lead to direct on line starting behavior of the motor when restarting.
Include a tripping delay of 1 s for the main conductor or control the main
conductor via an output with parameterized "On-time" function as described in
circuit diagram 9.1.2.

3-8 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
3.3 Protection of the Soft Starter against Short-Circuits
(Utilization class 2)
The soft starter has integrated thyristor protection against overloading. In the
event of a short-circuit, e.g. due to a defect in the windings of the motor or a
short-circuit via the motor supply cable, this internal thyristor protection function
is not sufficient. Special semiconductor fuses, e.g. SITOR fuses from SIEMENS,
must be used for this purpose.
(Refer to Chapter 10.3 "Technical Data" for the fuse assignment)
3/N/PE~ 50 Hz 400 V
L1
L2
L3
PE
012_Standardschaltung und Sitor Zeichnung mit Bildern.vsd

Q1
F3
Q11
G1
M1
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
W2 U2 V2 W2 U2 V2
Figure 3-7: Schematic circuit diagram of branch with semiconductor fuses
Note
Chapter 10.3.7 "Branch Component Layout (Standard Circuit)" indicates fuses
for minimum and maximum dimensionings.
Minimum dimensioning: The fuse is optimized for the I²t value of the thyristor. If
the thyristor is cold (ambient temperature) and the starting procedure lasts a
maximum of 20 s with 3.5 times the rated device current, the fuse does not yet
trip.
Maximum dimensioning: The fuse does not trip and the thyristor is not damaged
even if the maximum permissible current for the thyristor is flowing.
Maximum dimensioning is recommended for heavy starting.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 3-9
3.4 Capacitors for Power Factor Improvement
Caution
Capacitors must not be connected to the output terminals of the
soft starter. If this occurs, the soft starter will be damaged.
Active filters, e.g. for reactive power compensation, must not be
operated in parallel while the motor control device is in operation.
If capacitors for reactive power compensation are used, they must be connected
on the line side of the device. If a contactor disconnector or a main contactor is
used in combination with the electronic soft starter, the capacitors must be
disconnected from the soft starter when the contactor is open.
3.5 3RW44 in Generator Operation (with 3-Phase Asynchronous

Motor)
The 3RW44 soft starters are suitable for generator operation.
Note
Depending on the operating speed, connect the generator to the system while in
the subsynchronous range (motor operation) and slowly move the machine into
the supersynchronous range. Connecting the generator directly in the
supersynchronous range may cause soft starter faults.
3.6 Electrical Connection

3.6.1 Control and Auxiliary Current Connection
The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter is supplied with two different connection
systems:
• Screw-type terminals
• Spring-loaded terminals
Two control voltage versions are available:

• 115 V AC
• 230 V AC

3-10 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
3.6.2 Main Current Connection
All soft starters are equipped with busbar connections for the main
current connection.
Size 3RW44 2. An additional box terminal for direct cable connection is supplied as standard
with size 3RW44 2. devices.
Sizes 3RW44 3. and For size 3RW44 3. and 3RW44 4. devices, it is possible to retrofit box terminals
3RW44 4. as optional accessories (refer to Chapter 10.3.9 "Accessories").
2.
1.
A1 A2 PE L+ L- IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 T1 T2
d.c./c.d. 24 V
1L1 50230 V
- 60 Hz
3L2 5L3
SIRIUS
ESC OK
G/031127123 *E00* LOCAL INTERFACE
Ue= 200...460V 3RW4422-1BC44
2T1 4T2 6T3
NO NO NO NC NO
13 14 23 24 33 34 95 96 98
2. 1.
1. A1, A2, PE, L+, L-, IN1, IN2, IN3, IN4, T1, T2, 13, 14, 23, 24, 33, 34, 95, 96, 98:
Control/auxiliary circuit
2. L1/L2/L3
Main circuit infeed
3. T1/T2/T3
Main circuit outgoing feeder load
Figure 3-8: Connections
Notice
The connection of the 3-phase network supply to terminals T1/T2/T3 is not
permissible.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 3-11
3.6.3 Conductor Cross-Sections
A1, A2, PE, L+, L-, IN1, IN2, IN3, IN4, T1, T2, 13, 14, 23, 24, 33, 34, 95, 96, 98
3RW44..-1.... 3RW44..-2....
3RW44..-6.... 3RW44..-3....
0.8 ... 1.2 Nm

—
5 ... 6 mm / PZ2 7 to 10.3 lb· in
10 1 x 0.5 ... 4.0 mm²

2 x 0.25 ... 1.5 mm²
2 x 0.5 ... 2.5 mm²
10 2 x 0.5 ... 1.5 mm²
2 x 0.25 ... 1.5 mm²
1 x 0.5 ... 2.5 mm²
10
— 2 x 0.25 ... 1.5 mm²
AWG 2 x 20 to 14 2 x 24 to 16
L1, L2, L3; T1, T2, T3

3RW44 2.-.... 3RW44 3.-.... 3RW44 4.-.... 3RW44 5.-.... / 3RW44 6.-....
4 ... 6 Nm 10 ... 14 Nm 14 ... 24 Nm 20 ... 35 Nm

min 22 M8x25 M10x30 M12x40
36 ... 53 lb· in 89 ... 124 lb· in 124 ... 210 lb· in 177 ... 310 lb· in
4
2 x 10 ... 70 mm² 2 x 25 ... 120 mm² 2 x 70 ... 240 mm² 2 x 70 ... 240 mm²
2 x AWG 7 ... 1/0 2 x AWG 4 ... 250 kcmil 2 x AWG 2/0 ... 500 kcmil 2 x AWG 2/0 ... 500 kcmil
2 x 10 ... 50 mm² 2 x 16 ... 95 mm² 2 x 50 ...240 mm² 2 x 50 ...240 mm²

2 x AWG 7 ... 1/0 2 x AWG 6 ... 3/0 2 x AWG 2/0 ... 500 kcmil 2 x AWG 2/0 ... 500 kcmil
min. 3 x 9 x 0.8
b bd17 mm b b d25 mm b bd60 mm
max. 10 x 15.5 x 0.8
17 2 x 2.5 ... 16 mm² — — — — — —
17 2 x 2.5 ... 35 mm²

— — — — — —
1 x 2.5 ... 50 mm²
2 x 10 ... 50 mm²
17 1 x 10 ... 70 mm²
— — — — — —
2 x AWG 10 ... 1/0
1 x AWG 10 ... 2/0

3-12 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Display, Controls and Device Interfaces 4
4.1 Display and Controls 4-2

4.2 Device Interfaces 4-3
4.2.1 Local Device Interface 4-3
4.2.2 PROFIBUS Interface (Optional) 4-3
4.3 External Display and Control Unit (Optional) 4-3

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 4-1
Display, Controls and Device Interfaces
4.1 Display and Controls

Graphic display A graphic display on the front of the device provides information about the
functions and status of the soft starter via plain text and symbols when control
voltage is applied.
1 2 3
1. Displays the control unit 2. Displays the defined 3. Displays the current
that has current control user level. motor status.
priority, i.e. that sends the Customer read No motor
control commands for the only
motor. Run up
Customer write
Display with keys Motor running
Serial interface Coasting down

Motor ready to
Control inputs start
PLC via PROFIBUS
PC via bus
? No control device
Figure 4-1: Explanation of symbols
Controls There are four keys for operating and adjusting the soft starter:
The current function, depending on the menu item, is shown as text on the
OK display above this key (e.g. select menu, change value or save settings).
The up/down arrow keys are used to navigate through the menu items or to
change number values in the settings menu item.
The ESC key is used to quit the current menu item and to jump back to the
ESC higher-level menu item.

4-2 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
4.2 Device Interfaces

4.2.1 Local Device Interface
A local device interface on the front side of the starter is provided as standard.
This interface can be used to connect either an optional external operating and
display module, or the "Soft Starter ES" operating, monitoring and
parameterizing software (refer to Chapter 10.3.9 "Accessories", Software) using
a PC and connecting cable.
4.2.2 PROFIBUS Interface (Optional)
The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter can be equipped with an optional PROFIBUS
module (only available for products delivered after 04/06). The soft starter can
be connected to PROFIBUS, operated and parameterized via the interface. The
"Soft Starter ES" operating, monitoring and parameterizing software (refer to
Chapter 10.3.9 "Accessories", Software) can also be connected to this interface
using a PC and connecting cable.
Simultaneous operation of a 3RW44 with a PROFIBUS interface is not possible
in networks where one external conductor is grounded.
4.3 External Display and Control Unit (Optional)

When de-energized, the external display and control unit can be connected to
the local device interface via a special connecting cable.
After being switched on, the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter automatically recognizes
that the external display and control unit has been connected. The 3RW44
display will be inverted and the display and control unit's display will be shown
normally.
The control keys of the 3RW44 will be inactive, meaning that normal handling is
only possible via the external display and control unit.
oFor ordering data, see Chapter 10.3.9.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 4-3

4-4 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5
5.1 Menu Structure, Navigation, Changing Parameters 5-2

5.1.1 Menu Structure and Navigation 5-2
5.1.2 Changing Parameters: For Example Motor Data 5-3
5.2 Switching on for the First Time 5-4
5.2.1 Recommendation on Procedure for 3RW44 Commissioning 5-4
5.2.2 Quick Start Menu 5-6
5.3 User-specific Commissioning 5-8
5.3.1 Main Menu Item "Settings" 5-9
5.4 Making Settings in the Selected Parameter Set 5-10
5.4.1 Selecting the Parameter Set 5-10
5.4.2 Entering the Motor Data 5-11
5.4.3 Specifying the Starting Mode 5-13
5.4.4 Specifying the Stopping Mode 5-20
5.4.5 Setting Slow Speed Parameters 5-26
5.4.6 Specifying Current Limit Values 5-27
5.4.7 Parameterizing the Inputs 5-28
5.4.8 Parameterizing the Outputs 5-29
5.4.9 Selecting Motor Protection Settings 5-31
5.4.10 Selecting Display Settings 5-33
5.4.11 Specifying the Behavior of the Protective Functions 5-34
5.4.12 Specifying the Names on the Device Display 5-35
5.4.13 Activating the Field Bus Interface (PROFIBUS DP) 5-36
5.4.14 Saving Options 5-37
5.5 Other Device Functions 5-41
5.5.1 Display measured value 5-41
5.5.2 Status Display 5-42
5.5.3 Motor Control (Assigning Control Priority) 5-43
5.5.4 Statistics 5-44
5.5.5 Safety (Specifying the User Level, Parameterization Protection) 5-48

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 5-1
Commissioning
5.1 Menu Structure, Navigation, Changing Parameters

The 3RW44 functions (parameterization, diagnosis and motor control) can be
executed using the four control keys. The menu has various sublevels which
must be handled in different ways but are self-explanatory.
5.1.1 Menu Structure and Navigation

Main menu level 1. Sub menu level 2. Sub menu level 3. Sub menu level
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value
select
ESC OK
Status 2
display
select
ESC OK
Settings
Settings 33
Parameter 1
select
select
set 1
ESC OK
select Motor 1 1
Motor 4
ESC OK
control Rated operating
1
select
Parameter 2 current Ie
select
set 2 ESC OK 29.0 A
ESC OK change
select Starting 2 ESC OK

Statistics 5
settings
ESC OK
2
Rated operating
select torque
select
select Parameter 3
100 Nm
ESC OK
ESC OK set 3 change
ESC OK
Safety 6 select Stopping 3
settings 3
ESC OK Rated operating
speed
select
select select
Inputs 4 1500
ESC OK ESC OK change
Figure 5-1: Menu structure

5-2 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.1.2 Changing Parameters: For Example Motor Data
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value
select
ESC OK
Status 2
display
select
ESC OK
Settings
Settings 33
select
select
ESC OK
Parameter 1
set 1
select
ESC OK
Motor 1 1
select
ESC OK
1
Rated operating
current Ie
29.0 A
change
ESC OK
Rated operating
current Ie
29.0 A
execute
ESC OK
Rated operating
current Ie
28.9 A
execute
ESC OK
1
Rated operating
current Ie
28.9 A
change
ESC OK
Figure 5-2: Changing values, e.g. adjusting motor data

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 5-3
Commissioning
5.2 Switching on for the First Time
Warning
Before switching the device on for the first time, verify that the main/control
side is wired properly. Make sure that the line and control voltage comply with
the device-specific requirements (Chapter 10.3 "Technical Data").
5.2.1 Recommendation on Procedure for 3RW44 Commissioning
Starting parameters Stopping parameters

Suggested setting
Starting mode: Voltage ramp and current limiting
Stopping mode Parameter
(U+current limiting)
Start Current Stopping

Starting Stopping
voltage limiting Breakaway pulse torque
time s time s
% value %
Application
Conveyor belts 70 10 deactivated deactivated (0 ms) Torque control 10 10

Powered roller
60 10 deactivated deactivated (0 ms) Torque control 10 10
conveyors
Compressors 50 10 4 x Ie deactivated (0 ms) Coasting down X X
Small ventilators 30 10 4 x Ie deactivated (0 ms) Coasting down X X
Pumps 30 10 4 x Ie deactivated (0 ms) Pump stop 10 10
Hydraulic pumps 30 10 4 x Ie deactivated (0 ms) Coasting down X X
Stirrers 30 30 4 x Ie deactivated (0 ms) Coasting down X X
Centrifugal machines 30 30 4 x Ie deactivated (0 ms) Coasting down X X
Milling machines 30 30 4 x Ie deactivated (0 ms) Coasting down X X
Large fans 30 60 4 x Ie deactivated (0 ms) Coasting down X X
Mills 50 60 4 x Ie 80 % / 300 ms Coasting down X X
Crushers 50 60 4 x Ie 80 % / 300 ms Coasting down X X

Circular saws/ribbon
30 60 4 x Ie deactivated (0 ms) Coasting down X X
saws
Notice
This table provides example set values. They are intended informational purposes only
and are non-binding. The set values depend on the particular application and must be
optimized during commissioning.

5-4 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
Quick start menu, when switching on for the Quick commissioning

first time or after executing a command 3RW44 SIRIUS soft starter
"Basic factory settings"
Wiring inspection
Information on quick start menu:
- Control unit and
After applying the control voltage for the first
- Power unit
time, you will be automatically directed to the
quick start menu. You must complete the entire
quick start menu once to commission the soft Check and connect the "Soft starter off"
starter for the first time. voltages in the control and Correct fault (for possible faults
If you confirm the last item, "Save settings?", by main circuits see Chapter 7)
entering "yes" in the quick start menu, you can
only return to this menu by resetting the device
back to its basic factory settings. (See manual or Select language Yes
Fault message
operating instructions) on display?
This overwrites all settings made up until that
point. Select application Yes No
Information on application selection: Initial parameterization

Standard parameters are recommended due to Set the rated operating
current of the motor or starter in basic
the set type of application. factory settings?
If the required load is not listed, choose a fan in
order to preselect the necessary start Set starting time No
parameters.
In general: Check set parameters in Settings > Parameter set > Motor.
The parameters are suggested settings. Set current limiting
The parameters may need to be optimized, as value Set starting and stopping parameters in Settings > Parameter
explained from Section "Start command 'Soft set > Starting or stopping settings according to the table
starter on'" onwards. "Suggested setting for commissioning" on the basis of the
Save settings respective application.
"Soft starter off"

Start command "Soft starter on" Correct fault
(for possible faults see
Chapter 7)
1. "Soft starter off" 1. "Soft starter off" 1. "Soft starter off" 1. "Soft starter off"
2. Increase starting time in 2. Reduce starting time in menu 2. Increase the start voltage or 2. Decrease the start Yes
Fault message
menu item Settings, or item Settings or if current start torque in menu item voltage or start torque in display
3. if current limiting has limiting has been set, increase Settings or in menu item Settings
been set, possibly reduce the current limiting value. 3. if current limiting has been No
current limiting value 3. If the torque control is active, set, possibly increase current
check whether the selected limiting value The motor
The motor reaches its limiting torque is high enough Does the motor
starts with a
nominal rotational (recommended ³ 150 %) No immediately start
strong
speed softly?
The motor sudden
- quicker than desired Yes
- hums and does increase in
with an excessively
not start torque
high starting current
The motor reaches immediately Motor:
- not softly Does the motor reach
its nominal rotational - does not start at
- according to the its nominal rotational
speed all No
specified ramp time if speed quickly and within
- slower than (motor stuck)
no current limiting has the desired time?
Motor: desired,
been set
- not at all
(motor stuck) Yes
Switch off soft
starter
Increase Increase DC braking Reduce DC braking Increase Increase DC braking

Decrease torque or reduce dynamic torque or increase
stopping torque or increase
stopping stopping time braking torque stopping time Which
time or stopping time Coasting down
time stopping mode
decrease
The The The is selected?
stopping No Reduce DC braking
motor motor motor
torque torque or reduce Pump stop,
continu does not comes to Yes Does the motor
stopping time
come to continue to run during the torque control,
Soft stop es to a
a braking process at a braking
Pump stop run for standstill
The motor too standstill DC braking but the constant speed (no The motor Motor
stops long. braking recognizable comes to a comes to a
abruptly, current braking effect)? standstill standstill as
not softly. continues but the desired
The water to flow. braking
Motor does not
can be (Motor current
comes to a continues to Yes
heard hums standstill, or
during when at a Combined braking flow. (Motor
continues to run at
pump standstill) hums when
a constant speed Save the changed parameters in
operation. at a
during the braking the menu item: Settings > Saving
standstill)
process options > Save settings.
Commissioning is complete.
No

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 5-5
Commissioning
5.2.2 Quick Start Menu
Important
After applying the control supply voltage for the first time, you will automatically be in the
quick start menu, which you must go through once to commission the soft starter for the
first time.
In the quick start menu, you need to enter the information needed to preset the
most important parameters of the soft starter for your application. Starting
parameters for typical types of applications are stored in the device parameters.
To achieve an optimum motor start, these parameters may need to be optimized
on the basis of the connected load using the "Settings" menu item, as described
in Chapter 5.4.3 "Specifying the Starting Mode".
If your particular load is not listed, select any load and optimize the defined
parameters, if necessary, using the "Settings" menu item as described in
Chapter 5.4.3 "Specifying the Starting Mode".
The values of the basic factory settings of the parameters, and the predefined
assignment of the control inputs and outputs, are listed in Chapter 10.3
"Technical Data".
Important
If you confirm the last item "Save settings - execute?" by entering "Yes" in the quick start
menu, you can only return to this menu by resetting the device back to its basic factory
settings (refer to "Restoring the factory settings" on Page5-40). This overwrites all
settings made up until that point.

5-6 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
Quick start menu
Language
1 English
2 Deutsch
3 Français
select
ESC OK
Language
1 English
2 Deutsch
3 Français
select
ESC OK
Application
1 Pumps
2 Fans
3 Compressors
select
ESC OK
Rated operating
1current
Pump Ie
229.0 A
3
execute
ESC OK
Starting time
10 s
10 s
execute
execute
ESC OK
Current limiting
value
450 %
execute
ESC OK
Function call
Save
settings
OK
ESC OK
Save
settings
execute?
Yes
ESC OK
SIEMENS
1mpe
3RW44
2
3
Menu
ESC OK
Figure 5-3: Quick start menu

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 5-7
Commissioning
5.3 User-specific Commissioning

If values are required that differ from the defined parameters in the quick start
menu or in the factory settings of the 3RW44, please proceed as follows:
Under the "Settings" menu item, select (refer to Chapter 5.3.1 "Main Menu Item
"Settings""):
1. Select parameter set

2. Set motor data
3. Set starting mode and parameters
4. Set stopping mode and parameters
5. Set inputs and outputs
6. Check motor protection settings
7. Save settings
Notice
The setting is buffered in a Flash EPROM memory as soon as you change a setting in the
menu and execute it using the "OK" button. It is then active in the soft starter from this
moment onwards. When the control supply voltage is switched off, this value will be
canceled and the previous value restored. In order to permanently save the settings made
in the soft starter, you must save the data as described in Chapter 5.3.1 "Main Menu Item
"Settings"" and Chapter 5.4.14 "Saving Options".

5-8 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.3.1 Main Menu Item "Settings"
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value
select 9
Name
ESC OK
Status 2
select
display
ESC OK
select
10
Fieldbus
ESC OK
3
Settings select
ESC OK
select
11
Saving
ESC OK
OK
options
1
Parameter select
set 1
ESC OK
select
ESC OK
2
Parameter
set 2
select
ESC OK
3
Parameter
set 3
select
ESC OK
4
Inputs
select
ESC OK
5
Outputs
select
ESC OK
6
Motor
protection
select
ESC OK
7
Display
settings
select
ESC OK
8
Response
to ...
select
ESC OK
Figure 5-4: Main menu item "Settings"

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 5-9
Commissioning
5.4 Making Settings in the Selected Parameter Set

5.4.1 Selecting the Parameter Set
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value
select
ESC OK
Status 2
display
select
ESC OK
3
Settings
select
ESC OK
OK
Parameter 1
set 1
select
ESC OK
1
Motor 1
select
ESC OK
2
Starting
settings
select
ESC OK
3
Stopping
settings
select
ESC OK
4
Slow speed
Parameter
select
ESC OK
5
Current limit
values
select
ESC OK
Figure 5-5: Select parameter set

5-10 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.4.2 Entering the Motor Data

SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value
select
ESC OK
Status 2
display
select
ESC OK
3
Settings
select
ESC OK
OK
Parameter 1
set 1
select
ESC OK
Motor 1 1
Adjustable
from ... to
select
ESC OK
0 ... Ie Rated operating

1
(3RW44 device current Ie

40.5 A
name plate) change
ESC OK
2
Rated operating
torque
0 ... 10,000 Nm 143 Nm
change
ESC OK
3
Rated operating
speed
500 ... 3,600 min-1 1470
change
ESC OK
Function call
Copy motor data
to PS2+3
OK
ESC OK
Copy motor data

to PS2+3
execute?
OK
ESC OK
Figure 5-6: Entering the motor data and name plate
Rated operating Notice

current Ie Always set the rated operating current of the motor stated on the motor name plate based
on the prevailing line voltage. This setting is independent of the type of connection of the
soft starter (soft starter in standard or inside delta circuit). Value to be set in the above
example for a line voltage of 400 V, e.g. 40.5 A.
The motor current of the connected drive should be set to ensure proper functioning of the
soft starter during starting and stopping, as well as in regard to motor protection.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 5-11
Commissioning
Rated operating If the rated operating torque of the motor is not indicated on the name plate, it
torque can be calculated using the following formula:
1000
M = 9.55 u P u -------------
n
Example
1000 -
9.55 u 22 kW u ----------------------------
–1
= 143 Nm
1470 min
If no value is specified, the value of the basic factory setting is active (0 Nm).
When the start command is given and the motor is connected, the required value
is automatically calculated once by the soft starter.
Notice
If a motor with rated data (current, speed, torque) that differ from the values already
entered is connected to the soft starter (e.g. for testing purposes), these rated data must
be adapted to the new motor. If 0 Nm is entered as the rated operating torque, the value is
automatically calculated once by the soft starter.

5-12 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.4.3 Specifying the Starting Mode

SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value
select
ESC OK
Status 2
display
select
ESC OK
3
Settings
select
ESC OK
OK
Parameter 1
set 1
select
ESC OK
Motor 1 1
select
ESC OK
Starting 2
settings
select
ESC OK
Starting mode 1
Voltage ramp
change
ESC OK
Starting mode
1 Voltage ramp
2 U+curr. limiting
3 Torque control
select
ESC OK
Starting mode
1 Voltage ramp
2 U+curr. limiting
3 Torque control
select
ESC OK
Starting mode
1 Voltage ramp
2 U+curr. limiting
3 Torque control
select
ESC OK
Starting mode
2 U+curr. limiting
3 Torque control
4 M+curr. limiting
select
ESC OK
Starting mode
3 Torque control
4 M+curr. limiting
5 Direct on line
select
ESC OK
Starting mode
4 M+curr. limiting
5 Direct on line
6 Motor heating
select
ESC OK
Figure 5-7: Specifying the starting mode

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 5-13
Commissioning
"Voltage ramp" starting mode
SIEMENS
Voltage in %
3RW44
Menu
ESC OK UMotor 100 %
Display mea- 1
sured value
Breakaway voltage
select
ESC OK
Status 2
display
select
ESC OK
Start voltage
3
Settings
select Time (t)

Breakaway time s
ESC OK
OK
starting time 100 % Voltage
Parameter 1 at the motor
set 1 Maximum starting time
select
ESC OK
4_1_Menü_Startart_Spannungsrampe.wmf
Motor 1 1
select
ESC OK
Starting 2
settings
select
ESC OK
Starting mode 1
Adjustable
from ... to Voltage ramp
change
ESC OK
2
Start voltage
20 ... 100 %
40.0 %
change
ESC OK
Starting time 5
0 ... 360 s 20 s
change
ESC OK
Maximum 6
starting time
1 ... 1,000 s deactivated
change
ESC OK
Breakaway 8
40 ... 100 % voltage

80 %
change
ESC OK
Breakaway time9
0 ... 2,000 ms 0 ms
change
ESC OK
Figure 5-8: "Voltage ramp" starting mode

5-14 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
"Voltage ramp with current limiting" starting mode"

SIEMENS
3RW44 Voltage in %
Menu
ESC OK
Display mea- 1 UMotor 100 %

sured value
select Breakaway voltage

ESC OK
Status 2
display
select
ESC OK
3
Settings Start voltage
select
ESC OK
OK Time (t)
Breakaway time s
Parameter 1 starting time 100 % Voltage
set 1 at the motor
Maximum starting time
select
ESC OK
4_1_Menü_Startart_Spannungsrampe.wmf
Motor 1 1
select
ESC OK
Motor current
Starting 2
I
settings I Direct
on-line
select starting
motor
ESC OK
Beginning deter-
mined by specified
Starting mode 1
starting mode, in this
case breakaway pulse
Adjustable U+curr. limiting
from ... to change I Soft starter
adjustable current
ESC OK limit value
Start voltage 2 Beginning deter-

mined by specified
20 ... 100 % starting mode, in this
40.0 %
case voltage ramp
change
ESC OK Ie Motor
Starting time 5
0 ... 360 s
20 s ne Motor Motor speed
change n
ESC OK
Maximum 6 4_2_Menü_Startart_Spannungsrampe_mit_Strombegrenzung.wmf
starting time
1 ... 1,000 s deactivated
change
ESC OK
Curr. limiting 7
value
125 ... 550 % 450 %
change
ESC OK
Breakaway 8
voltage
40 ... 100 % 80 %
change
ESC OK
Breakaway 9
time
0 ... 2,000 ms
0 ms
change
ESC OK
Figure 5-9: "Voltage ramp with current limiting" starting mode

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 5-15
Commissioning
"Torque control" starting mode

SIEMENS
Motor
3RW44 torque (M)
Nm
Menu
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value 1
select Breakaway voltage

ESC OK
Status 2
display Limiting torque
select
MNom
ESC OK
3
Start torque
Settings
select Time (t)

s
ESC OK
OK
Breakaway time
Parameter 1 Starting time
set 1
Maximum starting time
select 1 MDirect on-line starting
OK
(maximum torque to be generated)
ESC
Motor 1 1
4_3_Drehmomentrampe.wmf
select
ESC OK
Starting 2
settings
select
ESC OK
1
Adjustable Starting mode
from ... to
Torque control
change
ESC OK
Start torque 3
10 ... 100 %
50.0 %
change
ESC OK
4
Limiting
torque
Limiting torque
20 ... 200 % *
150 %
change *) Notice
ESC OK In order to start the motor, the parameter value should be set to approx.
5
Starting time 150 %. It should be high enough to ensure that the motor does not become
0 ... 360 s
20 s stuck during run-up. This ensures that enough acceleration torque is
change generated throughout the entire motor run-up phase.
ESC OK
Maximum 6
1 ... 1,000 s starting time
deactivated
change
ESC OK
Breakaway 8
voltage
40 ... 100 % 80 %
change
ESC OK
Breakaway 9
time
0 ... 2,000 ms 0 ms
change
ESC OK
Figure 5-10:"Torque control" starting mode

5-16 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
"Torque control with current limiting" starting mode

SIEMENS
Motor
3RW44 torque (M)
Nm
Menu
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value
1
select
Breakaway voltage
ESC OK
Status 2
display
Limiting torque
select
MNom
ESC OK
3
Settings Start torque
select
ESC OK
OK Time (t)
s
Parameter 1 Breakaway time
set 1
Starting time
select Maximum starting time
ESC OK
1 MDirect on-line starting
1 (maximum torque to be generated)
Motor 1
4_3_Drehmomentrampe.wmf
select
ESC OK
Starting 2
settings
select
ESC OK
Adjustable Starting mode 1 Motor current

from ... to I
M+curr. limiting I Direct
change on-line
ESC OK starting
3 motor
Start torque
Beginning deter-
10 ... 100 % mined by specified
50.0 %
change
case breakaway pulse
ESC OK
Limiting 4
I Soft starter
torque adjustable current
20 ... 200 % limit value
150 %
change Beginning deter-
mined by specified
ESC OK
Starting time 5 case torque control
0 ... 360 s 20 s Ie Motor
change
ESC OK
6
Maximum ne Motor Motor speed
starting time
1 ... 1,000 s n
deactivated
change
ESC OK 4_4_Drehmomentrampe_mit_Strombegrenzung.wmf
Current 7
limiting value
125 ... 550 % 450 %
change
ESC OK
Breakaway 8
voltage
40 ... 100 % 80 %
change
ESC OK
Breakaway 9
time
0 ... 2,000 ms 0 ms
change
ESC OK
Figure 5-11: "Torque control with current limiting" starting mode

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 5-17
Commissioning
"Direct on line
starting" starting
mode
Motor
SIEMENS torque
3RW44 M
Menu
ESC OK
MDirect
Display mea- 1
on-line
sured value
starting
select
ESC OK
Status 2
display
MNom
select
ESC OK
3
Settings
nNom Motor speed

select n
ESC OK
OK
4_5_Menü_Startart_Direktstart_Drehmoment.wmf
Parameter 1
set 1
select Motor current

ESC OK I
Motor 1 1
IDirect
on-line
select
starting
ESC OK
Starting 2
settings
select
ESC OK
OK
Starting mode 1
INom
Direct on line
change
ESC OK
nNom Motor speed
n
001_Stromkurven_ohne_Sanftstarter.wmf
Figure 5-12:"Direct on line starting" starting mode

5-18 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
"Motor heating" starting mode
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value
select
ESC OK
Status 2
display
select
ESC OK
3
Settings
select
ESC OK
OK
Parameter 1
set 1
select
ESC OK
Motor 1 1
select
ESC OK
Starting 2
settings
select
ESC OK
OK
Motor thermal capacity

Starting mode 1
Adjustable Caution
Motor heating
from ... to change
May lead to damage to property.
ESC OK The "Motor heating" starting mode is not a continuous operating mode. The
Motor ther- 10
motor must be equipped with a temperature sensor (Thermo click/PTC) to
mal capacity ensure motor protection. The motor model with integrated electronic motor
10 ... 100 % 20 % overload protection is not suitable for this kind of operation.
change
ESC OK
Figure 5-13:"Motor heating" starting mode

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 5-19
Commissioning
5.4.4 Specifying the Stopping Mode

SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value
select
ESC OK
Status 2
display
select
ESC OK
3
Settings Motor
speed
n
select
ESC OK
OK
Parameter 1
set 1
ne
select
ESC OK
Motor 1 1
select
3 1 2
ESC OK
Starting 2
settings
select
ESC OK
1 nCoasting down Time (t)

3
Stopping Stop command s
settings
2 nTorque-controlled at soft starter
stopping mode
select 3 n
DC braking
ESC OK
OK
Stopping 1 4_7_Auslaufart_allgemein.wmf
mode
Coasting down
change
ESC OK
OK
Stopping mode
1 Coasting down
2 Torque control
3 Pump stop
select
ESC OK
Stopping mode
1 Coasting down
2 Torque control
3 Pump stop
select
ESC OK
Stopping mode
1 Coasting down
2 Torque control
3 Pump stop
select
ESC OK
Stopping mode
2 Torque control
3 Pump stop
4 DC braking
select
ESC OK
Stopping mode
3 Pump stop
4 DC braking
5 Comb. braking
select
ESC OK
Figure 5-14:Specifying the stopping mode

5-20 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
"Coasting down" stopping mode
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value
select
ESC OK
Status 2
display
select
ESC OK
3
Settings
select
ESC OK
OK
Parameter 1
set 1
select
ESC OK
Motor 1 1
select
ESC OK
Starting 2
settings
select
ESC OK
Stopping 3
settings
select
ESC OK
Stopping 1
mode
Coasting down
change
ESC OK
Figure 5-15:"Coasting down" stopping mode

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 5-21
Commissioning
"Torque control" stopping mode (soft stop)
SIEMENS
3RW44 Motor
torque
Menu M
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value
select
ESC OK MNominal operation

Status 2
display
select
ESC OK
3
Settings Stopping torque
select
ESC OK
OK
Stopping time Time (t)
s
Parameter 1
set 1 Stop command
at soft starter
select
ESC OK 4_8_Menü_Auslaufart_Drehmomentregelung_Pumpenauslauf.wmf
Motor 1 1
select
ESC OK
Starting 2
settings
select
ESC OK
Stopping 3
settings
select
ESC OK
OK
Stopping 1
Adjustable mode
from ... to Torque control
change
ESC OK
Stopping time 2
0 ... 360 s 10 s
change
ESC OK
Stopping 3
torque
10 ... 100 %
40.0 %
change
ESC OK
Figure 5-16:"Torque control" stopping mode

5-22 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
"Pump stop" stopping mode
SIEMENS
3RW44 Motor
torque
Menu M
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value
select

Status 2
display
select
ESC OK
3
Settings Stopping torque
select
ESC OK
OK
s
Parameter 1
set 1 Stop command
at soft starter
select
4_8_Menü_Auslaufart_Drehmomentregelung_Pumpenauslauf.wmf
ESC OK
Motor 1 1
select
ESC OK
Starting 2
settings
select
ESC OK
Stopping 3
settings
select
ESC OK
Adjustable Stopping 1
from ... to mode

Pump stop
change
ESC OK
Stopping time 2
0 ... 360 s 10 s
change
ESC OK
Stopping 3
10 ... 100 % torque
40.0 %
change
ESC OK
Figure 5-17:"Pump stop" stopping mode

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 5-23
Commissioning
"DC braking" stopping mode
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
Motor
ESC OK
torque (M)
Display mea- 1
sured value
select
ESC OK
MNominal
Status 2
display
select
ESC OK
Time (t)
Settings
3 s
DC braking torque
select
ESC OK
OK
Stopping time
Parameter 1 Motor braking Stop command
torque
set 1 at the
soft starter
select
ESC OK
1
Motor 1
5-24 DC braking stopping mode

select
ESC OK
Starting 2
settings
select
ESC OK
Stopping 3
settings
select
ESC OK
OK
Stopping 1
mode
Adjustable DC braking
from ... to change
ESC OK
Stopping time 2
0 ... 360 s 10 s Notice

change
The DC braking / combined braking stopping function is not possible in
ESC OK
inside delta circuits.
DC braking 5
20 ... 100 % torque

50 %
change
ESC OK
Figure 5-18: "DC braking" stopping mode
Note
If the "DC braking" function is selected, the "DC braking contactor" function must be
assigned to one output of the soft starter. This output must be used to control an external
braking contactor.

5-24 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
"Combined braking" stopping mode
SIEMENS
3RW44 Motor
torque
Menu
M
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value
Stop command
at soft starter
select

Status 2
display Stopping time
select
ESC OK
Time (t)
3 s
Settings
select
DC braking torque
ESC OK
OK
1
Dynamic
Parameter braking torque
set 1
Motor
select
braking torque
ESC OK
Motor 1 1 4_10_Menue_AuslaufartKombiniertes_Bremsen (2).wmf
select
ESC OK
Starting 2
settings
select
ESC OK
Stopping 3
settings
select
ESC OK
Stopping 1
Adjustable mode
from ... to Comb. braking
change
ESC OK
Stopping time 2
0 ... 360 s
10 s
change
ESC OK
4
Dynamic
braking torque
20 ... 100 % 50 %
change
ESC OK
Notice
5
The DC braking / combined braking stopping function is not
DC braking
torque possible in inside delta circuits.
20 ... 100 % 50 %
change
ESC OK
Figure 5-19:"Combined braking" stopping mode

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 5-25
Commissioning
5.4.5 Setting Slow Speed Parameters
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value
select
ESC OK
Status 2
display
select
ESC OK
3
Settings
select
ESC OK
OK
Parameter 1
set 1
select
ESC OK
Motor 1 1
select
ESC OK
Starting 2
settings
select
ESC OK
Stopping 3
settings
select
ESC OK
Slow speed 4
parameters
Slow-speed parameters
select Note
Adjustable To operate the motor with the specified slow speed parameters, the "Slow
ESC OK
OK
OK
from ... to
1
speed" function must be assigned to one control input, and the "Motor
Slow speed
3 ... 21 factor right right PS1/2/3" or "Motor left PS1/2/3" function must at the same time be
7 assigned to the other. Also refer to the circuit suggestion in 9.1.7.
change
ESC OK
Directions of rotation:
Slow speed 2
Right: rotation in line phase direction
torque right
20 ... 100 % 80.0 % Left: rotation counter-clockwise to the line phase direction
change
ESC OK
Slow speed 3
factor left
3 ... 21 7
change
ESC OK
Slow speed 4
torque left
20 ... 100 %
80.0 %
change
ESC OK
Figure 5-20:Setting slow speed parameters

5-26 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.4.6 Specifying Current Limit Values
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value
select
ESC OK
Status 2
display
select
ESC OK
3
Settings
select
ESC OK
OK
Parameter 1
set 1
select
ESC OK
Motor 1 1
select
ESC OK
Starting 2
settings
select
ESC OK
Stopping 3
settings
select
ESC OK
OK
Slow speed 4
parameters
select
ESC OK
OK
Current limit 5
values
select
Adjustable ESC OK
OK
from ... to 1
Minimum
current limit deactivated from version *E09* V1.10.0
19 ... 100 % 19.0 % or 19 to 100 %
change
ESC OK
2
Maximum
current limit
deactivated from version *E09* V1.10.0
50 ... 150 %
113 % or 50 to 400 %
change
ESC OK
Figure 5-21:Specifying current limit values

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 5-27
Commissioning
5.4.7 Parameterizing the Inputs

SIEMENS
Notice
3RW44 If the same action is assigned to two different inputs, both
Menu Note of the inputs must also be operated in order to carry out
ESC OK An input action can only be the selected function (e.g. to obtain logical "AND" linking
Display mea- 1 altered if the respective input is for a start command, assign the "Motor right PS1"
sured value inactive. function to both input 1 and 2. A start command is only
select accepted if both inputs are active).
ESC OK
Status 2
display
Notice
If the soft starter is switched off via a motor protection or
select
inherent device protection tripping, the action cannot be
ESC OK
acknowledged using the "Trip reset" function until the
3
Settings displayed cooling time has expired.
select Explanation of the possible parameters:

1) No action:
ESC OK
OK
Input without function.

Parameter 1 2) Manual operation local:
set 1
When operated with PROFIBUS, the soft starter control can be
select transmitted to the inputs by activating the input control. The
ESC OK
control function via PROFIBUS is deactivated during this time.
3) Emergency start:
Parameter 2
set 2
Error: Current unbalance exceeded, thermal motor model
overload, temperature sensor open, temperature sensor short,
select temperature sensor overload, maximum starting time exceeded,
ESC OK current limit exceeded/undershot, ground fault detected,
Parameter 3 impermissible le / CLASS setting: In the case of these faults, the
set 3 motor can be started via the emergency start function despite a
pending group error input. An emergency start action will be
select
assigned to one input, and, for example, "Motor right >
ESC OK
parameter set 1" assigned to another. The emergency start is
Inputs 4 active as long as the input is activated. It can also be activated
Parameterization options for during operation.
control inputs 1 ... 4 4) Slow speed:
select
ESC OK
OK
The motor starts with the values set under the "Slow speed
parameters" menu item when the "Slow speed" input and the
Input 1 - 1 No action 1) "Motor right/left parameter set 1/2/3" input are activated at the
action Manual operation local 2) same time.
Motor right PS1
Emergency start 3) 5)
Quickstop:
change
Slow speed 4) If the input is activated, a normal tripping with the currently set
Quick stop 5)
ESC OK
stopping function is carried out (no group error appears). The

Input 2 - 2
Trip Reset 6) quickstop is carried out independently of the control priority.
action
No action
Motor right parameter set 1 7) 6) Trip reset:
change Motor left parameter set 1 8) Pending faults can be acknowledged after rectification.
ESC OK Motor right parameter set 2 7) 7) Motor right parameter set 1/2/3:
3
Motor left parameter set 2 8) The motor starts (with rotation in line phase direction) and stops
Input 3 -
action Motor right parameter set 3 7) with the values stored in the respective parameter set.
No action Motor left parameter set 3 8) 8) Motor left parameter set 1/2/3:
change
This function is active only when the "Slow speed" parameter is
ESC OK
active at the same time. The motor starts with the values stored
Input 4 - 4
under the "Slow speed parameters" menu item (with rotation
action
Trip Reset
counter-clockwise to the line phase direction).
change
ESC OK
Note
The "Trip Reset" input is edge-triggered, the level change from 0 to 24 V DC is analyzed at the input. All other input
functions are analyzed on top of the already pending 24 V DC level.
Figure 5-22:Parameterizing the inputs

5-28 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.4.8 Parameterizing the Outputs
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value
select
ESC OK
Status 2
display
select
ESC OK
3
Settings
select
ESC OK
OK
Parameter 1
set 1
select
ESC OK
Parameter 2
set 2
select
ESC OK
Parameter 3
set 3
select
ESC OK
Inputs 4
select
ESC OK
OK
Outputs 5
Parameterization options
for relay outputs 1 ... 3
select
ESC OK
OK No Action
1
PIO Output 1
Output 1 -
action PIO Output 2
On-time motor Input 1
change Input 2
ESC OK Input 3
Output 2 - 2 Input 4
action Run up
No action
Operation / bypass
change
Coasting down
ESC OK
On-time motor
3
Output 3 - Command motor-on
action
No action
DC braking contactor
change Group warning
ESC OK Group error
Device errors
Power on
Ready to start
Figure 5-23:Parameterizing the outputs

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 5-29
Commissioning
Status diagram of the outputs
Group error, bus error or device error occurs;

soft starter switches off and goes into error mode
Soft starter has

detected run-up
Control voltage at Soft starter has detected Automatic restart
terminal A1/A2 run-up Stop command
when reset
Ramp process of the Start command
soft starter
IN1 - IN4
Start command
Input 1-
input 4
Run up
Bypass
Operation
Stopping
On-time
Command
Function output
motor-on
Approx. 1s
DC Braking delay
Power On
Group
warning 1)
Group
error 1)
Bus error
Device error
Ready to start
Warning pending Warning / Error reset Warning pending Warning / Error-reset command
error command error
Error occurs disappears Error occurs disappears
Both of these output functions
PAA 1
can be directly controlled via
the optional Profibus.
PAA 2
ZustandAusgang.wmf
1) Note
Possible group warnings / group faults see Chapter 7.1.2 "Warnings and Group Errors".

5-30 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.4.9 Selecting Motor Protection Settings

SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value Adjustable
from ... to
select
ESC OK
Status 2
Tripping 1 None; CLASS 5(10a);
display class CLASS 10; CLASS 15;
CLASS 10
select
change
CLASS 20; CLASS 30
ESC OK
ESC OK
3
Settings 2
Current asymmetry
limit value
40.0 % 30 ... 60 %
select
change
ESC OK
OK
ESC OK
1
Parameter Prewarning limit3
set 1 tripping reserve 0 ... 500 s
200 s
select change
ESC OK ESC OK
2
Parameter Prewarning limit4
set 2 motor heat build-up 0 ... 100 %
80.0 %
select change
ESC OK ESC OK
Parameter 3 Idle time 5

set 3
deactivated deactivated; 1 ... 100 s
select change
ESC OK ESC OK
4 Pre-charge 6
Inputs
time deactivated; 60 ... 1,800 s
60 s
select change
ESC OK
OK ESC OK
5 7
Outputs Protection against
voltage failure Yes; No
Yes
select change
ESC OK
OK
OK ESC OK
6 Temperature 8
Motor Deactivated
protecin sensor
Deactivated Thermo click
select change PTC-type A
ESC OK
OK ESC OK
Figure 5-24:Selecting motor protection settings

Notice
In the case of heavy starting and set values of tripping class ³CLASS 20, we recommend setting the "Prewarning limit
tripping reserve" parameter value to 0 s (deactivated) and increasing the parameter "Prewarning limit motor heat build-
up" to 95 %. Otherwise, a warning message regarding motor protection will be issued when starting.
Notice
If a CLASS setting other than 5(10a) or 10 is selected, it may be necessary to check and adjust the set values for the
rated operating current Ie of the motor (Chapter 5.4.2 "Entering the Motor Data") in all 3 parameter sets, since otherwise
the error message "Impermissible Ie/ CLASS settings" may be issued.
For the maximum permissible set value for the rated operating current Ie of the motor based on the CLASS settings,
please refer to Chapter 10.3.2 "Technical Data Power Unit".

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 5-31
Commissioning
Notice
Use of the 3RW44 to operate motors in hazardous areas:
The 3RW44 does not have an ATEX certificate. When an ATEX-certified overload relay is
used (e.g. 3RB2 from Siemens), which affects an additional switching element
(e.g. contactor 3RT), the 3RW44 can be installed in series to this overload relay, meaning
that the ATEX requirements are met.
Important
The internal motor overload protection of the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter must be
deactivated for this kind of installation! (Set value under the menu item "Motor protection/
Tripping class": "None" and Motor protection/Temperature sensor: "Deactivated")
Circuit breaker /
fuse
3RB2
3RT
3RW
M 3~

5-32 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.4.10Selecting Display Settings
SIEMENS
Possible values
3RW44
Menu
ESC OK English
Language 1 Deutsch
Display mea- 1
Français
sured value
Deutsch
Español
change
Italiano
select
Português
ESC OK ESC OK
Status 2 2
Contrast
display
0...100 %
50 %
select change
ESC OK
ESC OK
3
Lighting 3
Settings Brightness
Response to fault
select
select Response to warning
ESC OK
OK
ESC OK
1 Reaction time 4
Parameter
set 1 keys 0...100 %
60 %
select change
ESC OK ESC OK
Parameter 2 Auto repeat 5 Time: 10...250 ms

set 2 Speed: 10...100 %
select select
ESC OK
ESC OK
3 Activity moni- 6
Parameter deactivated
set 3 toring time
30 s 30...1,800 s
select change
ESC OK
ESC OK
Inputs 4
select
ESC OK
Outputs 5
select
ESC OK
OK
Motor 6
protection
select
ESC OK
OK
Display 7
settings
select
ESC OK
OK
Figure 5-25:Selecting display settings

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 5-33
Commissioning
5.4.11 Specifying the Behavior of the Protective Functions
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value
Possible values
select
ESC OK
Status 2 Overload - therm. 1 Tripping without restart

display motor model Tripping with restart
Tripping w/o restart
Warning
select change
ESC OK ESC OK
3
Settings Overload tem- 2 Tripping without restart
perature sensor
Tripping with restart
select change Warning
ESC OK
OK ESC OK
3
1 Current limit
Parameter
value violation
Warning
set 1
Warning Tripping
change
select
ESC OK
ESC OK
2 Overload 4 Tripping without restart

Parameter
set 2
contact block Tripping with restart
change
select
ESC OK
ESC OK
5
Parameter 3 Asymmetry Warning
set 3
20 s
Warning
Tripping
change
select
ESC OK
ESC OK
Ground fault 6
4
Inputs Warning *
Warning Tripping
change
select
ESC OK
ESC OK
Outputs 5
select *) Note
ESC OK
OK The ground fault function is only active after completion of
Motor 6 run up, not during starting.
protection
select
ESC OK
OK
OK
Display 7
settings
select
ESC OK
OK
OK
Response 8
to ...
select
ESC OK
Figure 5-26:Specifying the behavior of the protective functions

5-34 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.4.12Specifying the Names on the Device Display
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value
select
ESC OK
Status 2
display
select
ESC OK
3
Settings
select
ESC OK
OK
Parameter 1
set 1
select
ESC OK
Parameter 2
set 2
select
ESC OK
Parameter 3
set 3
select
ESC OK
Inputs 4
select
ESC OK
OK
Outputs 5
select
ESC OK
OK
OK
Motor 6
protection
select
ESC OK
OK
OK
Display 7
settings
select
ESC OK
OK
OK
Response 8
to ...
select
ESC OK
OK
OK
Name 9
select
ESC OK
OK
Name 1
B S01-Z05
select
ESC OK
Figure 5-27:Specifying the names on the device display

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 5-35
Commissioning
5.4.13 Activating the Field Bus Interface (PROFIBUS DP)
For information on activating the field bus interface, please refer to Chapter 8.4
"Activating the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module (Field Bus Interface) and
Setting the Station Address".
SIEMENS
3RW44 Fieldbus 1
interface
Menu On
ESC OK select
change
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value Group diagnosis 2
Disable
select
select
select
change
ESC OK
ESC OK
Status 2
display Response to 3
CPU master stop
Substitute value
select
select
change
ESC OK
ESC OK
Settings 3
Station address 4
select
select
126
select
change
ESC OK
ESC OK
Parameter 1 Baud rate 5

set 1
12,000 kBd
select
select
ESC OK ESC OK
Saving 11
Substitute value 6
options
select
select select
select
ESC OK ESC OK
Fieldbus 10
Parameters disabled 7
CPU/Master
Off
select
select
select
change
ESC OK
ESC OK
Notice
If the parameter "Parameters disabled CPU/Master" is set to "Off" (factory setting), the
parameters set on the soft starter will be overwritten with the values stored in the GSD file
or in the OM when the bus is started. If this is not desired, the parameter must be set to
"On".

5-36 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.4.14Saving Options
Specifying the saving options
SIEMENS
3RW44 Notice
Menu As long as the connected drive is controlled by the soft starter, no
ESC OK parameter changes carried out at the same time can be saved using the
Display mea- 1 "Saving options" menu item. This is only possible after the motor has
sured value been shut off by the soft starter.
select
ESC OK
Status 2
display
select
ESC OK
3
Settings
select
ESC OK
OK
1 10
Parameter Fieldbus
set 1
select select
ESC OK ESC OK
Parameter 2
Saving 11
set 2
options
select
select
ESC OK
Parameter 3 ESC OK
OK
set 3
Function call
select Save
ESC OK settings
Inputs 4 OK
ESC OK
select Function call

ESC OK
Restore
OK
5
settings
Outputs
OK
ESC OK
select
ESC OK
OK
OK Function call
6 Restore basic
Motor
factory settings
protection
OK
select ESC OK
ESC OK
OK
OK
Display 7
settings
select
ESC OK
OK
OK
Response 8
to ...
select
ESC OK
OK
OK
Name 9
select
ESC OK
OK
Figure 5-28:Specifying the saving options

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 5-37
Commissioning
Save settings
Selected settings will be saved.
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value
select
ESC OK
Status 2
display
select
ESC OK
3
Settings
select
ESC OK
OK
1 10
Parameter Fieldbus
set 1
select select
ESC OK
ESC OK
Parameter 2
set 2 Saving 11
options
select
ESC OK select
Parameter 3 ESC OK
OK
set 3
Function call
select Save
ESC OK
settings
Inputs 4 OK
ESC OK
OK
select
Save
ESC OK
OK settings
Outputs 5 execute?
Yes
ESC OK
OK
select
ESC OK
OK
OK
Motor 6
SIEMENS
protection
3RW44
select
Menu
ESC OK
OK
OK
Display 7 ESC OK
settings
select
ESC OK
OK
OK
Response 8
to ...
select
ESC OK
OK
Name 9
select
ESC OK
OK
OK
Figure 5-29:Save settings

5-38 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
Restore settings
Selected settings which have not been saved will be discarded and the
previously saved settings will be restored.
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value
select
ESC OK
Status 2
display
select
ESC OK
3
Settings
select
ESC OK
OK
Parameter 1 10
Fieldbus
set 1
select select
ESC OK
ESC OK
Parameter 2
set 2 Saving 11
options
select
ESC OK select
Parameter 3 ESC OK
OK
set 3
Function call
select Save
ESC OK
settings
Inputs 4 OK
ESC OK

ESC OK
OK
Restore
5 settings
Outputs
OK
ESC OK
OK
select
ESC OK
OK
OK Restore
Motor 6 settings
protection execute?
Yes
select ESC OK
OK
ESC OK
OK
OK
Display 7
settings SIEMENS
3RW44
select
Menu
ESC OK
OK
OK
Response 8 ESC OK
to ...
select
ESC OK
OK
OK
Name 9
select
ESC OK
OK
OK
Figure 5-30:Restore settings

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 5-39
Commissioning
Restoring the factory settings
All settings made or saved so far will be discarded and the device will be reset to
the basic factory settings (master reset). The quick-start menu must be executed
once again.
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value
select
ESC OK
Status 2
display
select
ESC OK
3
Settings
select
ESC OK
OK
Parameter 1 10
Fieldbus
set 1
select select
ESC OK
ESC OK
Parameter 2
Saving 11
set 2
options
select
select
ESC OK
Parameter 3 ESC OK
OK
set 3
Function call
select Settings
settings
ESC OK
4 OK
Inputs
ESC OK

ESC OK
Restore
OK
settings
Outputs 5
OK
ESC OK
select
ESC OK
OK
OK Function call
6 Restore basic
Motor
factory settings
protection
OK
select ESC OK
OK
ESC OK
OK
OK
Display 7 Restore basic

settings factory settings
execute?
Yes
select
ESC OK
OK
OK ESC OK
OK
Response 8
to ...
Language
select 1 English
ESC OK
OK 2 Deutsch
9 3 Français
Name
select
ESC OK
select
ESC OK
OK
OK
Figure 5-31:Restoring factory settings

5-40 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.5 Other Device Functions

5.5.1 Display measured value
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
Note
ESC OK
OK
When using the 3RW44 soft starter in an IT system with ground fault
Display mea- 1 monitoring: 3RW44, product version d*E06* and the PROFIBUSDP
sured value communication module must not be used in this network configuration.
select
3RW44 soft starters, from product version *E07* onwards, can be used in
ESC OK
OK combination with the PROFIBUS DP communication module. However,
Phase 1 the phase voltage values (UL-N) and phase-to-phase voltage values (UL-
voltages L) may be displayed incorrectly on the measured value display of the
select
3RW44.
ESC OK
Phase-to- 2
phase voltages
select Note
ESC OK The "Phase currents" display always shows the currents in the supply
Blocking 3
voltages
cable. This means that, if the soft starter is operated in the "Inside delta
circuit" circuit type, the currents measured internally by the soft starter are
select
extrapolated to the supply cable current (phase current) by a factor of 1.73
ESC OK
Phase currents 4 and displayed.

Due to asymmetries, the phase currents displayed in the inside delta
select
circuit may deviate from the currents that are actually running through the
ESC OK
supply cables.
5
Power
0W
Standard
ESC OK
Line frequency6
0 Hz
Standard
ESC OK
Supply 7
voltage
230 V
Standard
ESC OK
Heatsink 8
temperature
22 °C
Standard
ESC OK
Motor heat 9
build-up
0%
Standard
ESC OK
10
Remaining time
for tripping
65540 s
Standard
ESC OK
Function call
Switch off
standard display
OK
ESC OK
OK
Switch off
standard display
execute?
Yes
ESC OK
OK
Figure 5-32:Display measured value

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 5-41
Commissioning
5.5.2 Status Display
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value
select
ESC OK
Status 2
display
select
ESC OK
1
Device status
select
ESC OK
Active 2
parameter set
Parameter set 1 Explanation of the messages:
select
ESC OK
Unknown/fault: No connected motor detected.
3
Type of Star/delta: Soft starter connected in a standard circuit.
connection
Unknown/fault
Inside delta: Soft starter connected in an inside delta circuit.
select
ESC OK
Direction of 4 Unknown: No line phase direction of the main voltage detected at terminals L1-L2-L3.
rotation Right: Clockwise line phase direction of the main voltage detected at terminals L1-L2-L3.
Unknown Left: Counter-clockwise line phase direction of the main voltage detected at terminals L1-L2-L3.
change
ESC OK
Inputs 5
Output 1 - 3: Function corresponds to parameterization

select Output 4: Group error
ESC OK Output 5: Internal bypass contactor connected
Outputs 6 Output 6: Device fan activated
Standard
select
ESC OK
Order number 7
3RW4435-6BC44
ESC OK
Firmware 8
information
select
ESC OK
Figure 5-33:Status display

5-42 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.5.3 Motor Control (Assigning Control Priority)
SIEMENS
Notice
3RW44
The "Standard control" menu item specifies which control device should be given
Menu
control priority when the control supply voltage is applied.
ESC OK
When the PROFIBUS communication module is activated, the setting is changed to
1
Display mea- "Automatic/None".
sured value
select Control device priority

ESC OK Only a higher-priority control device can assume and hand over the control
Status 2
priority (0 = lowest).
display
select
- 0: Automatic operation (input control through PLC via PROFIBUS)
ESC OK
- 1: PC via PROFIBUS (Soft Starter ES software required)
3
Settings - 2: Inputs
- 3: Via display keys
select
ESC OK
- 4: PC via serial interface (Soft Starter ES software required)
Motor 4
control
select
Possible values
ESC OK
Motor control 1 Activate key control?

via keys Deactivate key control?
Execute control function
select
ESC OK
Control motor 2
Activate control via inputs?
via inputs
Deactivate control via inputs?
select
ESC OK
Standard 3 Automatic / None

control Inputs
Inputs
Keys
change
ESC OK
Figure 5-34:Motor control

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 5-43
Commissioning
5.5.4 Statistics
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu Notice
ESC OK
The "Statistics" menu item is available for devices with
Display mea- 1 firmware product version *E04* or higher. The firmware
sured value
product version is listed on the front of the device below the
select petrol-colored labeling field. The "Log lists" sub-item can only
ESC OK be used in combination with "Soft Starter ES" parameterizing
Status 2
and diagnostics software. This menu item will be available in
display
the device display from 04/2006.
select
ESC OK
3
Settings
select
ESC OK
Motor 4
control
select
ESC OK
Statistics 5
select
ESC OK
Log lists 1
select
ESC OK
Maximum 2
pointer
select
ESC OK
Statistics 3
data
select
ESC OK
Figure 5-35:Statistics

5-44 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.5.4.1Log lists
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value
select
ESC OK
Status 2
display
select
ESC OK
3
Settings
select
ESC OK
Motor 4
control
select
ESC OK
Statistics 5
select
ESC OK
Log lists 1
select
ESC OK
Device errors 1
All device errors

select
are recorded and stored
ESC OK
Trips 2
All group errors
are recorded and stored
select
ESC OK
Events 3 All warnings and certain

actions are recorded and stored
select
ESC OK
Notice
The "Statistics" menu item is available for devices with firmware product version *E04* or
higher. The firmware product version is listed on the front of the device below the petrol-
colored labeling field. The "Log lists" sub-item can only be used in combination with "Soft
Starter ES" parameterizing and diagnostics software. This menu item will be available in
the device display from 04/2006.
Notice
Log lists cannot be deleted while the motor is running.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 5-45
Commissioning
5.5.4.2Maximum Pointer
(all minimum and maximum measured values are stored and displayed)
SIEMENS
3RW44 Notice
Menu The "Statistics" menu item is available for devices with firmware product version
ESC OK *E04* or higher. The firmware product version is listed on the front of the device
Display mea- 1 below the petrol-colored labeling field. The "Log lists" sub-item can only be used in
sured value
combination with "Soft Starter ES" parameterizing and diagnostics software.
select
ESC OK
Status 2
display
select
ESC OK
3
Settings
select
ESC OK
Motor 4
control
select
ESC
Statistics 5
Number of 6
overload trips
0
select Standard
ESC OK ESC OK
1 Minimum line 7
Log lists
frequency
0 Hz
select Standard
ESC OK
ESC OK
Maximum line 8
Maximum 2 frequency
pointer 0 Hz
Standard
select
ESC OK
ESC OK
Max. cooling 9
1 temperature
Currents (%)
0 °C
Standard
select ESC OK
ESC OK
Max. contact element10
Currents (rms) 2 heat build-up
0%
Standard
select ESC OK
ESC OK
Function call
3 Reset all
Phase-to- maximum pointers
phase voltages OK
select ESC OK
ESC OK
Reset all
Max. tripping 4 maximum pointers
current IA (%) execute?
0% Yes
Standard
ESC OK
ESC OK
Max. tripping 5
current IA (rms)
0%
Standard
ESC OK
Figure 5-36:Maximum pointer

5-46 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Commissioning
5.5.4.3Statistics Data
SIEMENS
3RW44 Notice
Menu
The "Statistics" menu item is available for devices with firmware product version
ESC OK
*E04* or higher. The firmware product version is listed on the front of the device
1
below the petrol-colored labeling field. The "Log lists" sub-item can only be used in
Display mea-
sured value combination with "Soft Starter ES" parameterizing and diagnostics software.
select
ESC OK
Status 2
display
select
ESC OK
3
Settings Operating hours 6
Motor
0 : 28 : 02
select Standard
Note
ESC OK ESC OK
Number of starts motor left, only possible in combination with
4 No. of starts 7
Motor
control motor right slow speed.
0
Standard
select
ESC OK
ESC OK
No. of starts 8
Statistics 5 motor left
0
Standard Note
select ESC OK Number of stops with el. brake: The value is increased by one
ESC
OK
OK Number of 9 when braking has been chosen as the stopping mode.
overload trips
Log lists 1 0%
Standard
select ESC OK
Note
ESC OK No. of stops 10 The value is increase by one when the output is activated.
with el. brake
Maximum 2 0
Standard
pointer
ESC OK
select
ESC OK No. of starts 11

Output 1
Statistics 3 0
Standard
data
ESC OK
select
ESC OK No. of starts 12

OK
Output 2
1 0
Motor current Standard
Imax (%)
0% ESC OK
Standard
No. of starts 13
ESC OK Output 3
2
0
Motor current Standard
Imax (rms)
0A ESC OK
Standard
No. of starts 14
ESC OK Output 4
0
Last trigger 3
Standard
current IA (%)
0% ESC OK
Standard
ESC OK
Last trigger 4
current IA (rms)
0A
Standard
ESC OK Note
Operating hours 5 The operating hours counter is activated as soon as control voltage is applied. Maximum
device value displayed: 99999:59:59 hours
0 : 28 : 02
Standard
ESC OK
Figure 5-37:Statistics data

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 5-47
Commissioning
5.5.5 Safety (Specifying the User Level, Parameterization Protection)
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value
select
ESC OK
SIEMENS
Status 2
3RW44 display
Menu
select
ESC OK
ESC OK
Display mea- 1 3
sured value Settings
select select
ESC OK
ESC OK
Status 2 4
Motor
display control
select
select
ESC OK
ESC OK
3
Settings Statistics 5
select
select
ESC OK
ESC OK
Motor 4
Safety 6
control
select
select
ESC OK
ESC OK
Statistics 5
Enter user 1
code
select 1000
ESC
change
OK
ESC OK
Safety 6
Enter user 1
code
select
1000
ESC OK execute
1 ESC OK
Enter user
code 1
Enter user
1000 code
change
1001
ESC OK execute
2 ESC OK
User level
User level 2
Customer write
Customer
read only
ESC OK
select
ESC OK
Figure 5-38:Safety

5-48 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Device Functions 6
6.1 Various Parameter Sets 6-2

6.2 Starting Modes 6-3
6.2.1 Voltage Ramp 6-3
6.2.2 Torque Control 6-5
6.2.3 Breakaway Pulse in Combination with the Voltage Ramp or Torque 6-7
Control Starting Mode
6.2.4 Current Limiting in Combination with the Voltage Ramp or Torque 6-9
Control Starting Mode
6.2.5 Starting Mode: Direct On Line 6-10
6.2.6 Starting Mode: Motor Heating 6-10
6.3 Stopping Modes 6-11
6.3.1 Coasting Down 6-11
6.3.2 Torque Control and Pump Stop 6-12
6.3.3 DC Braking / Combined Braking 6-13
6.4 Slow Speed Function 6-16
6.5 Current Limit Values for Load Monitoring 6-18
6.6 Motor Protection Functions 6-19
6.7 Inherent Protection 6-23

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 6-1
Device Functions
6.1 Various Parameter Sets

The soft starter provides three individually adjustable parameter sets. One
starting mode and stopping mode can be directly specified per parameter set.
Applications • Starting Dahlander motors (variable-speed drive).

• Starting an application with different load conditions (e.g. empty or full
conveyor belt).
• Separate starting of up to three drives with different run-up behavior
(e.g. compressor and pump).

6-2 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Device Functions
6.2 Starting Modes

Different starting functions can be selected thanks to the large number of
applications for which the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter can be used. The motor
start can be set optimally according to application and deployment.
6.2.1 Voltage Ramp
The simplest type of soft start with the SIRIUS 3RW44 is achieved using a
voltage ramp. The terminal voltage of the motor is increased from a
parameterizable start voltage to line voltage within an adjustable starting time.
This starting mode is preset in the quick start menu.
Start voltage The level of the start voltage determines the switch-on torque of the motor. A
smaller start voltage results in a smaller start torque and smaller starting current.
The start voltage should be high enough so that the motor starts immediately
and softly when the start command is sent to the soft starter.
Starting time The length of the starting time determines the time in which the motor voltage is
increased from the set start voltage to the line voltage. This influences the
acceleration torque of the motor, which drives the load during the run-up
procedure. A longer starting time results in a smaller acceleration torque over
the motor run-up. This results in a longer and softer motor run-up. The length of
the starting time should be selected in such a way that the motor reaches its
nominal speed within this time. If this time is too short, i.e. if the starting time
ends before the motor has run up, an extremely high starting current will occur at
that moment, reaching the value of the direct starting current at this speed. The
soft starter can, in this case, switch itself off via the internal overload protection
function and go into fault mode.
Maximum starting The "Maximum starting time" parameter can be used to determine the time after
time which the drive must have completed its run-up. If the drive is not in nominal
operation upon completion of the set time, the starting procedure is aborted and
an error message is generated.
Internal run-up The soft starter features an internal run-up recognition. If a completed motor run-
recognition up is recognized by the device, the internal bypass contacts close and the
thyristors are bridged. If this run-up recognition is performed before the set run-
up time is completed, the ramp is aborted and the motor voltage is immediately
increased to 100 % of the line voltage before the internal bypass contacts are
closed.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 6-3
Device Functions
Voltage in %
UMotor100 %
5_01_Funktionsprinzip Spannungsrampe .wmf

1
Parameterizable
start voltage
Time (t)
s
100 %
Voltage at
Parameterizable
the motor
starting time
1 Short starting time
2 Longer starting time
Figure 6-1: Function principle of voltage ramp
Motor
torque (M)
5_02_Funktionsprinzip Spannungsrampe_Drehmomentverlauf.wmf
Nm
MDirect on-line starting

(maximum torque
that can be generated)
MNom 1
Acceleration
Parameterizable 2 torque
start voltage
3
Speed (n)
min-1
Motor has run up and is

Parameterizable
in nominal operation (nNom).
torque starting time
The runup is detected and the
1 MSoft start bypass contacts close.
Short ramp time
2 M Soft start
Longer ramp time
3 MLoad (e. g. Fan)
Figure 6-2: Function principle of voltage ramp / torque curve
Typical applications for voltage ramps

The voltage ramp function principle is suitable for all types of application.
If test runs with the application are carried out using motors that are smaller than
those to be used in the actual system, we recommend using the "Voltage ramp"
starting mode.
For machines requiring a breakaway pulse (inverse load response, e.g. in mills
or crushers), the breakaway pulse must be set as described in Chapter 6.2.3
"Breakaway Pulse in Combination with the Voltage Ramp or Torque Control
Starting Mode". The "Voltage ramp+current limiting (U+current limiting)" starting
mode is recommended for heavy starting.

6-4 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Device Functions
6.2.2 Torque Control
The motor speed and torque are calculated using the voltage and current r.m.s.
values, as well as the associated phase information between the line voltage and
the motor current (= cos M = sensorless control), and the motor voltage is
controlled accordingly.
Torque control means that the torque generated in the motor is linearly increased
from a parameterizable start torque up to a parameterizable end torque within an
adjustable starting time.
The advantage over the voltage ramp is the improved mechanical run-up
behavior of the machine.
The soft starter controls the torque generated at the motor continuously and
linearly according to the set parameters until the motor has completely run up.
For optimum torque control during the starting procedure, the motor data of the
motor connected to the soft starter should be entered in the selected parameter
set using the menu item "Setting".
Start torque The height of the start torque determines the switch-on torque of the motor. A
smaller start torque results in a smaller run-up torque and smaller starting
current. The start torque should be high enough so that the motor starts
immediately and softly when the start command is sent to the soft starter.
Limiting torque The level of the limiting torque determines which maximum torque should be
generated in the motor during run-up. This value can thus also act as an
adjustable torque limitation.
In order to achieve a successful run-up, the parameter value should be set to
approx. 150 %. It should, however, be at least high enough so that the motor
does not get stuck during run-up. This ensures that enough acceleration torque
is generated throughout the entire motor run-up phase.
Starting time The length of the starting time determines the time in which the start torque is
increased to the end torque.
A longer starting time results in a smaller acceleration torque over the motor run-
up. This results in a longer and softer motor run-up. The length of the starting
time should be selected in such a way that the motor accelerates softly until it
reaches its nominal speed.
If the starting time ends before the motor has completely run up, the torque is
limited to the set limiting torque until the soft starter recognizes the run-up
process and closes the internal bypass contacts.
Maximum starting The "Maximum starting time" parameter can be used to determine the time after
time which the drive must have completed its run-up. If the drive is not in nominal
operation upon completion of the set time, the starting procedure is aborted and
an error message is generated.
Internal run-up The soft starter features an internal run-up recognition. If a completed motor run-
recognition up is recognized within the set starting time, the ramp will be aborted and the
motor voltage will immediately be increased to 100 % of the line voltage. The
internal bypass contacts close and the thyristors are bridged.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 6-5
Device Functions
Note
The torque generated in the motor and controlled by the soft starter can at no
time be higher than the value of a similar direct on line start at the same speed.
Motor
torque (M)
Nm
5_03_Funktionsprinzip Drehmomentregelung .wmf

Parameterizable
limiting torque
NNom
Acceleration
Parameterizable torque
start voltage
Parameterizable Motor has run up and is

ramp time in nominal operation (nNom).
bypass contacts close.
Figure 6-3: Function principle of torque control
Typical applications for torque control

Torque control is suitable for all applications, especially in cases where a
consistent and smooth start is required. For machines requiring a breakaway
pulse (inverse load response, e.g. in mills or crushers), the breakaway pulse
must be set as described in Chapter 6.2.3 "Breakaway Pulse in Combination
with the Voltage Ramp or Torque Control Starting Mode". The "Torque
control+current limiting (M+current limiting)" starting mode is recommended for
heavy starting (refer to Chapter 6.2.4 "Current Limiting in Combination with the
Voltage Ramp or Torque Control Starting Mode").

6-6 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Device Functions
6.2.3 Breakaway Pulse in Combination with the Voltage Ramp or Torque Control Starting Mode
This function is required for load machines with inverse torque behavior. Typical
applications are mills, crushers or drives with plain bearings. In such cases, it
may be necessary to create a breakaway pulse at the beginning of the machine's
start process. The breakaway pulse is set via the breakaway voltage and the
breakaway time. Using the breakaway pulse, the high limiting friction of the load
can be overcome and the machine can be set into motion.
The breakaway pulse can be used in combination with the voltage ramp, torque
control or current limiting starting modes, and is superimposed on these during
the set breakaway time.
Breakaway voltage The breakaway voltage setting determines height of the the breakaway torque to
be generated. Its maximum value can be 100 % of the start torque generated in
direct on line starting. The pulse should be at least high enough for the motor to
start immediately when the soft starter receives the start command.
Breakaway time The breakaway time specifies how long the breakaway voltage should be
applied. Upon completion of the breakaway time, the soft starter finishes its run-
up process with the selected starting mode, e.g. voltage ramp or torque control.
The selected breakaway time should be at least long enough so that, after the
set time has elapsed, the motor does not remain stationary again but rather
directly continues to accelerate in the selected starting mode.
If 0 ms is set as the breakaway time (default), the breakaway pulse function is
deactivated.
Motor
torque (M)
5_04_Funktionsprinzip Losbrechimpuls Drehmomentregelung .wmf

Nm
1
Parameterizable
breakaway voltage
MNom
Acceleration
Parameterizable 2 torque
start torque/
start voltage 3
Time (t)
s
Parameterizable Parameterizable
breakaway voltage starting time Motor has run up and is
in nominal operation (nNom).
1 MDirect on-line starting bypass contactsclose.
(maximum torque that can begenerated)
2 MSoft start
Breakaway pulse combined with
torque regulation orvoltage ramp
3 MLoad (e. g. Crusher)
Figure 6-4: Function principle of breakaway pulse / torque control

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 6-7
Device Functions
Typical applications for breakaway pulses
Typical applications for breakaway pulses are load machines with inverse torque
behavior, e.g. crushers and mills.
Note
A breakaway pulse that is set too high may lead to the error message "Current
measurement range exceeded".
Remedy: Use larger starter dimensions or a lower breakaway voltage.
Only set the breakaway pulse when it is really required (e.g. for mills and
crushers).
A wrongly set breakaway pulse, e.g. for pumps, may lead to the error message
"Incorrect start conditions".

6-8 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Device Functions
6.2.4 Current Limiting in Combination with the Voltage Ramp or Torque Control Starting Mode
The starter continuously measures the phase current (motor current) using the
integrated current transformer.
During motor run-up, it is possible to set a current limiting value on the soft
starter.
The current limiting can be activated if "Voltage ramp+current limiting" or "Torque
control+current limiting" has been selected as the starting mode and a value has
been entered in the relevant parameter.
During the starting procedure, the phase current is limited to the set value until it
falls below this value. A set breakaway pulse is superimposed on the current
limiting during the breakaway time.
Current limiting value As a factor of the motor rated current, the current limiting value is set to the
maximum current required during the starting procedure. If the set current
limiting value is reached, the motor voltage is lowered (or regulated) by the soft
starter in such a way that the current will not exceed the set current limiting
value. The set current limiting value must be at least selected high enough for
enough torque to be created in the motor to bring the drive into rated operation.
A typical value can be 3 to 4 times the value of the rated operating current (Ie) of
the motor.
Run-up recognition The soft starter features an internal run-up recognition. If a completed motor run-
up is recognized, the motor voltage is immediately increased to 100 % of the line
voltage. The internal bypass contacts close and the thyristors are bridged.
Motor current
5_05_Strombegrenzung mit Sanftstarter.wmf

Beginning determined
by specified starting
mode, in this case
breakaway pulse
Beginning determined
by specified starting
mode, in this case
voltage ramp
n n
Figure 6-5: Current limiting with soft starter
Typical applications for current limiting

Used in applications with a large centrifugal mass (mass reactance) and hence
long starting times, e.g. large fans, in order to lighten the load on the supply
network.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 6-9
Device Functions
6.2.5 Starting Mode: Direct On Line
If the "Direct on line" starting mode is set, the motor voltage is immediately
increased to line voltage when it receives the start command. This resembles the
starting behavior with a contactor, i.e. the starting current and start torque are
not limited.
Note
Due to the high starting current of the motor, the error "Current limit exceeded"
may occur in "Direct on line" starting mode. It may be necessary for the soft
starter to be dimensioned larger.
Run-up recognition The soft starter features an internal run-up recognition. If a completed motor run-
up is recognized, the internal bypass contacts close and the thyristors are
bridged.
6.2.6 Starting Mode: Motor Heating
If IP54 motors are used outdoors, condensation occurs in the motor during
cooler periods (e.g. overnight or in the winter). This may lead to leakage currents
or short-circuits when the devices are switched on.
A pulsating DC current is fed into the motor winding to warm it up.
If the "Motor heating" starting mode is selected, a heating capacity can be
entered in the settings. This capacity should be chosen in such a way that the
motor will not be damaged. The setting range for the heating capacity extends
from 10 - 100 %. This corresponds to a motor current of approximately 5 - 30 %
of the motor rated current.
Typical applications for motor heating

Used for example in outdoor drives to minimize condensation inside the motor.
Caution
May lead to damage to property.
The motor heating starting mode is not a continuous operating mode. The motor
must be equipped with a temperature sensor (Thermo click/PTC) to ensure
motor protection. The motor model with integrated electronic motor overload
protection is not suitable for this kind of operation.

6-10 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Device Functions
6.3 Stopping Modes

Different stopping functions can be selected thanks to the large numbers of
applications for which the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter can be used. The motor
stop can be set optimally according to application and deployment.
If a start command is output during the stopping procedure, this procedure is
aborted and the motor is started up again using the specified starting mode.
Note
If guided stopping is selected as stopping mode (soft stop, pump stop or
braking), it may be necessary to select a larger dimensioned branch (soft starter,
wiring, branch protection elements and the motor), since the current exceeds the
rated motor current during the stopping procedure.
Motor
speed
n
ne
4_7_Auslaufarten_allgemein.wmf
3 1 2
1 nCoasting down Time (t)

Stop command s
2 nTorque-controlled at soft starter
stopping mode
3 n
DC braking
Figure 6-6: Stopping modes in general
6.3.1 Coasting Down
Coasting down means that when the on command to the soft starter is removed,
the energy feed to the motor via the soft starter is interrupted. The motor will
coast down freely, only driven by the mass reactance (centrifugal mass) of the
rotor and the load. This is also referred to as a natural run-down. A larger
centrifugal mass means a longer coasting-down.
Typical applications for coasting down

Coasting down is used for loads with no special requirements in terms of
stopping behavior, e.g. large fans.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 6-11
Device Functions
6.3.2 Torque Control and Pump Stop
In "Torque-controlled stopping" and "Pump stop" mode, the coasting down /

natural run-down procedure of the load is extended. This function is set if abrupt
stopping of the load is to be prevented. This is typical in applications with small
mass reactances or high counter torques.
For optimum torque control during the stopping procedure, the motor data of the
motor connected to the soft starter should be entered in the selected parameter
set using the menu item "Setting".
Stopping time and The "Stopping time" parameter of the soft starter can be used to specify for how
stopping torque long power should be fed into the motor after removal of the on command. Within
this stopping time, the torque generated in the motor is continuously and linearly
reduced to the set stopping torque and the application is smoothly stopped.
Pump stop In pump applications, so-called water hammers can occur if the drive is stopped
abruptly without using pump stop. These water hammers are caused by the
sudden stall and the accompanying pressure deviations in the pump. They
cause noise and a mechanical impact on the piping system, as well as on the
flaps and valves it contains.
Motor
torque
M
4_8_Menü_Auslaufart_Drehmomentregelung_
MNominal operation
Pumpenauslauf.wmf
Stopping torque

s
Stop command
at soft starter
Figure 6-7: Soft stop / pump stop
Typical applications for soft stop / pump stop

Use soft stop / pump stop
• in pumps to prevent water hammers.
• in conveyor belts to prevent materials from toppling.
Caution
Risk of damage to property.
For optimum motor protection, use a combination of electronic motor overload
protection and evaluation of a temperature sensor integrated into the motor.

6-12 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Device Functions
6.3.3 DC Braking / Combined Braking
In DC braking or combined braking, the coasting down / natural run-down of the

load is shortened.
The soft starter imposes a (pulsating) DC current in phases L1 and L3 on the
motor stator. This current creates a permanent magnetic field in the stator. Since
the rotor is still rotating due to its mass reactance, currents are induced into the
short-circuited rotor winding, creating a braking torque.
Notice
The DC braking / combined braking stopping function is not possible in inside
delta circuits.
Note
The pulsating DC current loads the network asymmetrically and the motor and
the branch must be dimensioned accordingly for the higher current load during
the stopping procedure. It may be necessary to overdimension the soft starter.
Note
Two braking versions are available:
Combined braking:
Use the combined braking function if applications with small mass reactances
(centrifugal masses) are to be stopped (J load dJmotor). The real stopping time
can vary during braking processes when the combined braking function is
applied. Use the function DC braking if a braking time of uniform length is to be
achieved.
DC braking:
Use the DC braking function if applications with larger mass reactances
(centrifugal masses) are to be stopped (J load d 5 xJmotor).
An external brake contactor is required for the DC braking function!
Caution
A combination of electronic motor overload protection and evaluation of a
temperature sensor integrated into the motor is recommended for optimum
motor protection.
Stopping mode: combined braking

If combined braking is selected, the dynamic braking torque, DC braking torque
and stopping time parameters can be set on the starter.
Dynamic braking The dynamic braking torque determines the extent of the braking effect at the
torque start of the braking process in order to reduce the speed of the motor. The
braking process is then continued using the DC braking function.
DC braking torque The height of the DC braking torque determines the brake force of the motor.
If the motor accelerates again during DC braking, the dynamic braking torque
must be increased.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 6-13
Device Functions
Stopping time The stopping time determines how long the braking torque should be applied to
the motor. The braking time should be long enough to bring the load to a
complete standstill.
To achieve a sufficient braking effect until standstill, the centrifugal mass (J) of
the load should not exceed that of the motor. The stopping time should be long
enough for the motor to come to a standstill. The soft starter has no standstill
recognition; if required, this must be accomplished using external measures.
Note
The real stopping time can vary during braking processes when the combined
braking function is applied.
Motor
torque
M
4_10_Menue_AuslaufartKombiniertes_Bremsen (2).wmf
Stop command
at soft starter
MNominal operation
Stopping time
Time (t)
s
DC braking torque
Dynamic
braking torque
Motor
braking torque
Figure 6-8: Combined braking
Stopping mode: DC braking

If the DC braking function is selected, the stopping time and DC braking torque
parameters can be set on the starter. With this braking type, one output of the
soft starter must be switched over to DC braking to control an external braking
contactor. Please refer to Chapter 9 for circuit suggestions.
The optimum parameters must be adjusted on the machine under appropriate
load conditions.
DC braking torque The height of the DC braking torque determines the brake force of the motor.

6-14 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Device Functions
Stopping time The stopping time determines how long the braking torque should be applied to
the motor. The braking time should be long enough to bring the load to a
complete standstill.
To achieve a sufficient braking effect until standstill, the load's mass moment of
inertia should not be higher than 5 times the motor's mass moment of inertia.
(Jloadd 5 x Jmotor).
The soft starter has no standstill recognition; if required, this must be

accomplished using external measures.
Motor
torque (M)
MNominal
operation
Time
s
DC braking torque
Stopping time
Motor braking Stop command
torque
at soft starter
Figure 6-9: DC braking
Typical applications for DC braking

Use "DC braking" in lathes (e.g. for tool changeover) and circular saws.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 6-15
Device Functions
6.4 Slow Speed Function

This function allows an asynchronous motor to be temporarily operated in both
directions at a speed that is lower than the rated operating speed.
The rated operating speed n motor of the motor is determined by its line frequency
(f) and its number of pole pairs (p).
60
n Motor = f u ------
p
A resulting slow speed frequency for the motor is defined by a specific thyristor
control. However, it is necessary for this function that only a reduced torque can
be generated in the motor. Due to the possibility of increased heating of the
motor, this function is not suitable for continuous operation.
The slow speed factor and the slow speed torque can be entered individually for
both directions of rotation.
Slow speed factor By adjusting the slow speed factor, it is possible to control the motor with a
speed (n Slow speed) that is lower than the rated operating speed either in or
against the line phase direction.
n Nom
n Slow speed = ----------------------------------------------
-
Slow speed factor
Slow speed torque The torque generated in the motor can be influenced using the slow speed
torque. The maximum torque which can be created depends on the slow speed
torque that is set. 100 % slow torque can correspond to approx. 30 % of the
motor rated operating torque.
Line frequency
Resulting "slow speed frequency"
Figure 6-10:Slow speed function
Typical applications for slow speed function

This function is suitable for applications with a low counter torque, e.g. when
machine tools are positioned.
Note
In addition to the set parameters, the motor-specific properties and the
connected load also affect the speed resulting from the slow speed function and
the slow speed torque generated in the motor.

6-16 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Device Functions
Note
To control the motor with the specified slow speed parameters, "Slow speed"
must be assigned to one control input, and "Motor right PS1/2/3" or "Motor left
PS1/2/3" must be assigned to the other. Also refer to the circuit suggestion in
Chapter 9.1.7.
Directions of rotation:
Right: rotation in line phase direction
Left: rotation counter-clockwise to the line phase direction
Notice
Due to the reduced motor speed and the accompanying reduced self-cooling of
the motor, this operating mode is not recommended for continuous operation.
Caution
For optimum motor protection, use a combination of electronic motor overload
protection and evaluation of a temperature sensor integrated into the motor.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 6-17
Device Functions
6.5 Current Limit Values for Load Monitoring

It is possible to set minimum and maximum current limit values; if these are
exceeded or undershot, a message can be output.
Minimum current The minimum current limit value can, for example, be used to indicate a V-belt
limit value break and the corresponding no-load current of the motor, or when the fan filter
is clogged.
Maximum current The maximum current limit value can be used to determine increased power loss
limit value in the application, e.g. caused by storage damage.

6-18 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Device Functions
6.6 Motor Protection Functions

The motor overload protection is based on the motor winding temperature. This
temperature is used to determine whether the motor is overloaded or is
operating within its normal rating.
The winding temperature can either be calculated using the integrated

electronic motor overload function, or be measured using a connected motor
thermistor.
Both versions must be combined (=activated) in order to obtain so-called full

motor protection. This combination is recommended for optimum motor
protection.
Motor overload The current flow is measured during motor operation using current measurement
protection via converters in the soft starter. The temperature rise of the winding is
calculated on the basis of the configured rated operating current of the motor.
Depending on the set tripping class (CLASS setting) and protection parameters,
a warning or a trip is generated when the characteristic curve is reached.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 6-19
Device Functions
Tripping class The tripping class (CLASS) indicates the maximum tripping time in which a
(electronic overload protective device must trip at a value 7.2 times that of the rated operating current
protection) in cold condition (motor protection acc. to IEC 60947). The tripping
characteristics indicate the tripping time in relation to the tripping current (refer
to Chapter 10.4 "Tripping Characteristics").
Different CLASS characteristics are available for normal or heavy starting.
Note
The rated data of the soft starters are based on normal starting (CLASS 10). For
heavy starting (> CLASS 10), it may be necessary to overdimension the soft
starter.
Current asymmetry Three-phase asynchronous motors respond to slight line voltage asymmetries
limit value with a higher asymmetrical current consumption. This increases the temperature
in the stator and rotor winding.
The asymmetric limit value is a percent value by which the motor current may
deviate in the individual phases.
The reference value for the evaluation is the maximum deviation from the
average value of the three phases.
Asymmetry is defined as a deviation of more than 40 % from the average value.
Prewarning limit If the set prewarning time limit is reached, which is based on the calculated time
tripping reserve until the motor is stopped by the motor protection function, a message can be
output.
Prewarning limit A message can be generated if the set thermal prewarning limit of the motor is
motor heat build-up reached. Tripping of the motor protection occurs at 100 %.
Idle time The idle time is a specified time for the cooling behavior of the motor model after
a normal shutdown, i.e. not after overload trips.
After this period, the "Thermal motor model" of the motor starter is set to 50 % if
the motor heat build-up is still at > 50 %, otherwise it is set to 0 %.
This enables frequent start procedures (inching). Depending on the CLASS

settings, these lead to tripping where motor protection according to IEC 60947 is
used.

6-20 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Device Functions
The following graphic illustrates the cooling behavior with and without idle time:
Motor
On
Off
t
Motor
temp. rise
Tripping limit
Without X
Idle time
Overload trip
With X Tripping limit

Idle time
No
Overload trip
t
Idle time Idle time
Figure 6-11: Idle time
The idle time can be set between 1 and 100 s.
Caution
If the idle time is changed (0 = deactivated), motor protection according to
IEC 60947 (CLASS 10A, 10, 15, 20, 30) is no longer ensured. This means that
there will be no system protection in such cases. We recommend that parallel
protection measures be taken.
Caution
The motor must be designed for such inching operation, otherwise the overload
may cause permanent damage.
Pre-charge time When the thermal motor model is tripped, a pre-charge time is started to let the
motor cool down; the motor is prevented from being restarted before the pre-
charge time has elapsed.
Protection against If protection against voltage failure is active and the control supply voltage
voltage failure breaks down while a trip is pending, the current trip condition of the thermal
motor model and the current pre-charge time are stored in the soft starter. When
the control supply voltage returns, the trip condition of the thermal motor model
before voltage failure will be restored.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 6-21
Device Functions
Temperature sensor The temperature sensor motor protection function measures the motor's stator
winding temperature directly using a measuring sensor in the motor, i.e. a motor
with a measuring sensor wound into the stator winding is required.
Two different types of measuring sensors are available for the evaluation.
• PTC type A thermistors ("Type A sensors")
• Thermo click
The wiring and the sensors are checked for wire breaks and short-circuits.
Notice
If the soft starter is switched off via a motor protection or device protection
tripping, the action cannot be acknowledged using the "Trip reset" function until
the displayed cooling time has expired.

6-22 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Device Functions
6.7 Inherent Protection

The soft starter has integrated device protection to prevent the thyristors from
becoming thermally overloaded.
This is achieved via current measurement using converters in the three phases
and, additionally, by measuring the temperature with thermosensors at the
thyristor heatsink.
If a fixed warning threshold is exceeded, a message is generated by the soft
starter. If the fixed tripping value is exceeded, the soft starter switches off
automatically.
After a trip has occurred, a fixed 30-second pre-charge time must be observed
before the starter can be restarted.
If protection against voltage failure is active and the control supply voltage
breaks down while a trip is pending, the current trip condition of the thermal
motor model and the current pre-charge time are stored in the soft starter. When
the control supply voltage returns, the trip condition of the thermal inherent
protection before voltage failure will be restored.
In order to protect the thyristors from being destroyed by short-circuits (e. g. in

the event of cable damage or a shorted coil in the motor), SITOR semiconductor
fuses must be connected upstream. The corresponding selection tables can be
found in Chapter 10.3.7 "Branch Component Layout (Standard Circuit)" and in
Chapter 10.3.8 "Branch Component Layout (Inside Delta Circuit)".
Notice
If the soft starter is switched off via a motor protection or device protection
tripping, the action cannot be acknowledged using the "Trip reset" function until
the displayed cooling time has expired.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 6-23
Device Functions

6-24 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Diagnosis and Messages 7
7.1 Diagnosis, Messages 7-2

7.1.1 Status Messages 7-2
7.1.2 Warnings and Group Errors 7-2
7.1.3 Device Errors 7-7

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 7-1
Diagnosis and Messages
7.1 Diagnosis, Messages

7.1.1 Status Messages
Message Cause / Remedy
Checking voltage Main voltage not yet applied.
Checking line phases Option 1: Main voltage is applied but the motor has not yet been connected or has been incorrectly connected.
Option 2: The motor is properly connected but there is no phase voltage.
Ready to start Device is ready to start (main voltage is applied and the motor is properly connected).
The motor will start as soon as a start command is received.
Start mode active Motor is started in the set starting mode.
Motor running Device is in bridging mode (bypass contactor). Starting completed.
Stopping mode active Motor is stopped using the set stopping mode.
Cooling time of the motor is active After overload tripping of the thermal motor model, it is impossible to start the motor for a defined period of time
(for product version < *E06* (parameter: pre-charge time) to ensure that the motor can cool down.
devices)
Contact block cooling time After overload tripping of the inherent protection, it is impossible to start the motor for 30 s to allow the device to
(for product version < *E06* cool down.
devices)
Emergency start is active The emergency start function is activated.
Quickstop active The quickstop function is activated.
7.1.2 Warnings and Group Errors

Error without restart
Error with restart

Warning
No line voltage x 1. Start command output even though the main voltage has not yet been applied.
Remedy: Switch on line voltage.
2. If this message is issued in bypass operation, it may have been mistakenly issued because
one of the following messages was generated too often: "Prewarning Limit Motor Heat
Build-Up", "Remaining Time for Tripping" or "Current limit exceeded/undershot" (can also
be traced via the entries in Log list / Events).
Remedy: See the description of the respective messages
Incorrect start conditions (for product x 1. Error occurs without motor starting.
version < *E04* devices) Cause:
- Motor has not been connected correctly.
Phase angle control failure (for product - Inside delta circuit incorrectly configured.
version t*E04* devices) - Ground fault present.
Remedy: Check and rectify wiring (see inside delta circuit wiring suggestions).
2. Error occurs during starting.
Cause:
- Start voltage too high
- Breakaway pulse set (incorrectly): instable motor start
(Only set breakaway pulse if absolutely necessary. In the case of pumps, for example, a
breakaway pulse can often cause misfiring.)
If there is an idle time of < 5 s since the last start, the 3RW44 starts with a higher start
voltage. In combination with a set breakaway pulse, this can lead to "Incorrect start
conditions".
Remedy: Adjust parameters or increase idle time.

7-2 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Error with restart

Warning
Loss of phase L1 x Option 1:Phase L1 missing, drops or fails while motor is running.
A trip occurs due to a voltage drop in the permissible rated operational voltage of >15 %
>100 ms during starting, or >200 ms in bypass operation.
Remedy: Connect L1 or rectify voltage drop.
Option 2: The connected motor is too small and the error message is issued immediately
after switching to bridging mode.
Remedy: Set rated operating current for connected motor correctly or set to minimum (if
motor current is lower than 10 % of the set Ie, the motor cannot be operated with this
starter).
Option 3: Starter used in IT system with ground fault monitoring:

3RW44, product version d *E06* and the PROFIBUS DP communication module must not
be used in this network configuration.
Remedy: Replace starter with 3RW44, product version t *E07*. This version can be used
in combination with the PROFIBUS DP communication module. However, the phase
voltage values (UL-N) and phase-to-phase voltage values (UL-L) may be displayed
incorrectly on the measured value display of the 3RW44.
Loss of phase L2 x Option 1: Phase L2 missing, drops or fails while motor is running.
Option 2: The connected motor is too small and the error message is issued immediately
after switching to bridging mode.
motor current is lower than 10 % of the configured Ie, the motor cannot be operated with
this starter).

3RW44, product version d*E06* and the PROFIBUS DP communication module must
not be used in this network configuration.
Loss of phase L3 x Option 1: Phase L3 missing, drops or fails while motor is running.
Option 2: The motor that is connected is too small and the error message is issued
immediately after switching to bridging mode.
motor current is lower than 10 % of the configured Ie, the motor cannot be operated with
this starter).

3RW44, product version d *E06* and the PROFIBUS DP communication module must not
be used in this network configuration.
Missing load phase T1 x Motor phase T1 is not connected.

Remedy: Connect motor correctly.



GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 7-3
Error with restart

Warning
Supply voltage below 75 % x Control supply voltage is below 75 % of the required nominal voltage for longer than
100 ms (voltage failure, voltage drop, wrong control supply voltage).
Remedy: Check control supply voltage.
Supply voltage below 85 % x Control supply voltage is below 85 % of the required nominal voltage for longer than 2 s
(voltage failure, voltage drop).
Supply voltage above 110 % x Control supply voltage is above 110 % of the required nominal voltage for longer than 2 s
(voltage peaks, wrong control supply voltage).
Current unbalance exceeded x x Phase currents are asymmetric (asymmetric load). Message is output when the asymmetry
is greater than the set limit (parameter: Current asymmetry limit value).
Remedy: Check load or change parameter value.
Thermal motor model overload x x x The thermal motor model has tripped. After an overload trip, restarting is blocked until the
pre-charge time has elapsed.
Remedy in the case of unwanted tripping:

- Check whether the motor rated operating current Ie is incorrectly set or
- Change CLASS setting or
- Reduce switching frequency, or
- Deactivate motor protection (CLASS OFF)
Prewarning limit motor heat build-up x Motor heat build-up is greater than the parameter value for: Prewarning limit motor heat
build-up. The thermal motor model approaches an overload trip, depending on the set
value. For heavy starting and set values of tripping class tCLASS 20, we recommend
increasing the "Prewarning Limit Motor Heat Build-Up" parameter value to 95 %.
Remaining time for tripping undershot x Time until overload tripping of the thermal motor model is shorter than the set value for the
"Prewarning limit remaining time for tripping" parameter.
For heavy starting and set values of tripping class t CLASS 20, we recommend increasing
the "Prewarning limit tripping reserve" parameter value to 0 s (deactivated).
Line overvoltage (for product version < x Applied 3-phase line voltage is not suitable for the device or longer voltage peaks occur.
*E04* devices) Tripping occurs due to the permitted rated voltage being exceeded by >10 % >500 ms.
From product version *E02* upwards, the internal tripping limit has been increased to
Line voltage too high (for product >18 % >2000 ms.
version t*E04* devices) Remedy: Apply correct voltage.
Current range exceeded x 1. A very high current has occurred (beyond the measuring range of the current transformers
integrated in the soft starter). This may happen in the case of: direct on line starting,
breakaway pulses or combined braking.
Remedy: If the "Voltage ramp"” starting mode is selected, extend the set ramp time or
lower the breakaway voltage or braking torque. The soft starter may be dimensioned too
small for the motor.
2. If this message is issued during start-up, it may have been mistakenly issued because one
of the following messages was generated too often: "Prewarning limit motor heat build-up",
"Remaining time for tripping" or "Current limit exceeded/undershot" (can also be traced via
the entries in Log list / Events).
Remedy: Refer to the description of the respective messages.
Motor stalled - switched off x A very high current suddenly occurs in bridging mode, e.g. when the motor stalls (I >
(for product version < *E07* devices 4 x IeMotor higher than 100 ms).
only) Remedy: Check motor.
Overcurrent x A current of more than 6 times the rated operating current has occurred for a long period of
(for product version < *E07* devices time.
only) Remedy: Activate current limiting or check dimensioning (device/motor).
Power unit overheated x x Overload trip of the thermal model for the power unit.
Remedy: Wait until the device has cooled down, perhaps set a lower current limit or
reduce the switching frequency (too many starts in succession).
Check whether the motor is blocked or the ambient temperature is too high in the vicinity of
the soft starter (for derating above 40 °C, refer to Chapter 10.3 "Technical Data").

7-4 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Error with restart

Warning
Power unit overtemperature x The temperature of the thermal model for the power unit is higher than the permissible
temperature for continuous operation.
Remedy: Check the motor operating current or check if the ambient temperature is too
high in the vicinity of the soft starter (for derating above 40 °C, refer to Chapter 10.3
"Technical Data").
Temperature sensor short-circuit x x x Temperature sensor is short-circuited at terminals T1 / T2.

Remedy: Check temperature sensor.
Temperature sensor open x x x Temperature sensor faulty at terminals T1 / T2, one line is not connected or no sensor is
connected at all.
Remedy: Check temperature sensor or, if none is connected: deactivate temperature
sensor.
Temperature sensor overload x x x Temperature sensor has tripped at terminals T1 / T2, motor overheated.
Remedy: Wait until the motor has cooled down and, if necessary, check motor.
Max. starting time exceeded x The set maximum starting time is shorter than the actual run-up time of the motor.
Remedy: Extend "Max. starting time" parameter, increase current limiting value or check
load connected to the motor for mechanical faults.
Current limit exceeded / undershot x x Set current limit has been exceeded or undershot, e.g. due to a clogged fan filter or by the
motor stalling.
Remedy: Check the motor / load for the reason for the current limit value violation, or
adjust the limit value according to the existing load conditions.
Ground fault detected x x One phase is connected to ground (only possible in bypass operation).
Remedy: Check connections and wiring.
Manual operation local connection x Connection to the PC has been interrupted (if PC-controlled) or (if motor is key-controlled)
break no key has been pressed for a long period of time (see Settings > Display > Activity
monitoring time in Chapter 5.4.10).
Control will be handed over to the inputs if these have requested control priority.
Remedy: Reconnect the PC or increase activity monitoring time and press a key at regular
intervals.
Impermissible Ie / CLASS settings x The set rated operating current Ie of the motor (Chapter 5.4.2 "Entering the Motor Data")
exceeds in at least one of the three parameter sets the corresponding, maximum
permissible set current, based on the selected CLASS settings (Chapter 5.4.9 "Selecting
Motor Protection Settings"). In product version t *E07* devices, the corresponding
parameter set (PS) in which the incorrect value is to be found will be displayed
For maximum permissible adjustable values, please refer to Chapter 10.3 "Technical
Data".
If the soft starter is connected in an inside delta circuit, the motor feeder may have been
incorrectly wired (Chapter 9.1.5 "3RW44 in an Inside Delta Circuit"), so that the "Status
display / Type of connection" menu item (Chapter 5.5.2 "Status Display") shows
"Unknown / fault".
Remedy: Check the set rated operating current of the motor in all 3 parameter sets,
reduce the CLASS setting or overdimension the soft starter. In the case of inside delta
circuits, check the wiring of the motor feeder to ensure that it corresponds to the specified
circuit diagrams.
If the motor is not activated, this is only a status message. However, the message
becomes an error without restart once a start command is issued.
No external start parameters received x Only when operated with PROFIBUS DP. Incorrect or non-permissible parameter values
(for product version t *E06* devices) have been sent by the PLC.
Remedy: The incorrect parameter can be read out and corrected to a permissible value via
the Soft Starter ES software.
PIO error (for product version t *E06* x PIO error (process image of the outputs faulty) is displayed:
devices) • If Motor right and Motor left have been simultaneously selected (Cause 1) or
• parameter set 4 has been selected via the PLC (Cause 2).
Remedy:
• Automatic deletion once Motor right and Motor left are deactivated again (for Cause 1),
or
• a valid parameter set (PS 1-3) is set (for Cause 2).

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 7-5
Error with restart

Warning
Bypass element protective tripping (for x A very high current occurs in bridging mode. Tripping depends on the time and strength of
product version t *E07* devices) the current. The error can only be reset after 30 s (cooling).
Remedy: Check the motor and the soft starter dimensioning.

7-6 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
7.1.3 Device Errors
Contact element damaged (for At least one bypass element is welded and/or at least one thyristor has shorted. This message is generated when
product version t*E04* devices) the control supply voltage is applied and the current flow is being measured (via the soft starter), but no start
command has been issued. 1)
Remedy: Contact your SIEMENS contact partner or Technical Assistance (see Chapter “Important Notes”)
Switching element 1 failed Thyristor in phase L1 has shorted. (This message is displayed when the start command is issued.) 1)
Remedy: Contact your SIEMENS contact partner or Technical Assistance.
Flash memory error The device memory is faulty.

Device not identified Device has not yet been identified. It must be given identification data.
Versions not matching The version does not match the firmware.
Bypass element fault The bypass contactor is welded or defective.

Heatsink thermistor open Option 1: The temperature sensor on the heatsink of the starter is not connected or is defective.
Option 2: 3RW4465 or 3RW4466 may have a defective fan on the front of the starter.
Remedy: For 3RW4465 and 3RW4466 only: Try to rectify the fault after a cooling time of approx. 30 to 60 minutes
by switching the control supply voltage off and then on again. If successful, check whether the fan on the front of
the soft starter runs when a start command is issued. If not, it may be necessary to replace the fan. (The fan on the
front of the starter and the fan on the bottom of the device must both be running in fault-free operation).
For all 3RW44 starters:
If switching the control supply voltage off and on again does not cause the error message to reset, contact your
SIEMENS contact partner or Technical Assistance.
Heatsink thermistor short The temperature sensor on the heatsink of the starter is defective.
Note
Some error messages may be incorrect (e.g. Loss of phase L1, although L2 is
missing).
Note
When using the 3RW44 soft starter in an IT system with ground fault monitoring:
3RW44, product version d*E06* and the PROFIBUS DP communication module
must not be used in this network configuration. 3RW44 soft starters from product
version *E07* onwards can be used in combination with the PROFIBUS DP
communication module. However, phase voltage values (UL-N) and phase-to-
phase voltage values (UL-L) may be displayed incorrectly on the measured
value display of the 3RW44.
1) Possible ohmic value for a defective thyristor: <2 kOhm (L-T).

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 7-7

7-8 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module 8
8.1 Introduction 8-4
8.1.1 Definitions 8-5
8.2 Data Transmission 8-6
8.2.1 Data Transmission Options 8-6
8.2.2 Communication Principle 8-6
8.3 Installation of the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module 8-7
8.3.1 Insertion of the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module (Field 8-7

Bus Interface)
8.4 Activating the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module (Field Bus 8-9

Interface) and Setting the Station Address
8.4.1 Introduction 8-9
8.4.2 Activating the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module via the 8-10

Display, Setting the Station Address and Saving the Settings
8.4.3 Activating the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module (Field Bus 8-13

Interface) and Setting the Station Address via the Device
Interface using the "Soft Starter ES Premium" or the "Soft Starter
ES + SP1" Software
8.5 Soft Starter Configuration 8-15
8.5.2 Configuration with the GSD File 8-15
8.5.3 Configuration with the Soft Starter ES Premium Software 8-16
8.5.4 Diagnostics Package 8-16
8.5.5 Soft Starter ES Parameterizing Software 8-16
8.6 PROFIBUS DP Commissioning using the GSD File in STEP 7 8-17

(Example)
8.6.2 Configuration using the Device Master Data (GSD) in STEP 7 8-19

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-1
PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
8.6.3 Integration into the User Program 8-21
8.6.4 Switching On 8-21
8.6.5 Flow Diagram PROFIBUS DP - Starting the Soft Starter 8-22
8.7 Process Data and Process Images 8-23
8.8 Diagnosis via LED Display 8-25
8.9 Diagnosis with STEP 7 8-26
8.9.1 Reading the Diagnosis 8-26
8.9.2 Options for Reading the Diagnosis 8-26
8.9.3 Structure of the Slave Diagnosis 8-27
8.9.4 Station Status 1 to 3 8-28
8.9.5 Master PROFIBUS Address 8-30
8.9.6 Manufacturer Code 8-30
8.9.7 Code-Based Diagnosis 8-31
8.9.8 Module Status 8-32
8.9.9 Channel-Based Diagnosis 8-33
8.10 Data Formats and Data Sets 8-35
8.10.1 Characteristics 8-35
8.11 Identification Number (ID No.), Error Codes 8-38
8.11.1 Identification Number (ID No.) 8-38
8.11.2 Error Codes for Negative Data Set Acknowledgement 8-38
8.12 Data Sets 8-40
8.12.1 Data Set 68 - Reading/Writing the Process Image of the Outputs 8-41
8.12.2 Data Set 69 - Reading the Process Image of the Inputs 8-42
8.12.3 Data Set 72 - Log List - Reading Device Errors 8-43
8.12.4 Data Set 73 Log List - Reading the Trippings 8-44
8.12.5 Data Set 75 Log List - Reading Events 8-44
8.12.6 Data Set 81 - Reading the Basic Settings of Data Set 131 8-48
8.12.9 Data Set 92 - Reading the Device Diagnosis 8-49
8.12.10 Data Set 93 - Writing a Command 8-55
8.12.11 Data set 94 - Reading the Measured Values 8-56
8.12.12 Data Set 95 - Reading the Statistics Data 8-57

8-2 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8.12.13 Data Set 96 - Reading the Maximum Pointer 8-58
8.12.14 Data Set 100 - Reading the Device Identification 8-44
8.12.15 Data Sets 131, 141, 151 - Technology Parameters 2: Reading/ 8-46
Writing Set 1, 2, 3
8.12.16 Data Sets 132, 142, 152 - Technology Parameters 3: Reading/ 8-48
Writing Set 1, 2, 3
8.12.17 Data Set 133 - Technology Parameters 4: O&M Module 8-67
8.12.18 Data Set 160 - Reading/Writing Communication Parameters 8-68
8.12.19 Data Set 165 - Reading/Writing Comments 8-69

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-3
8.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the PROFIBUS DP communication module for the
3RW44 soft starter.
Using the PROFIBUS DP communication module, the 3RW44 soft starter can be
linked to the Profibus branch with all its functionality.
Prerequisites
• You have configured an infeed module with integrated S7 station
e.g. with CPU315-2 DP.
• STEP 7 (V 5.1 and higher + Hotfix 2) is completely installed on your PC/PD.
• You are proficient in STEP 7.
• The PD is connected to the DP master.
Notice
The PROFIBUS DP communication module only works with 3RW44 devices of
product version "E06" or higher, implemented for devices from production date
060501 onwards.
Production location / Year / Month / Day Product version
Notice
IT systems with ground fault monitoring:
3RW44, product version d *E06* and the PROFIBUS DP communication
module must not be used in this network configuration. 3RW44 soft starters as of
product version *E07* can be used in combination with the PROFIBUS DP
communication module. However, phase voltage values (UL-N) and phase-to-
phase voltage values (UL-L) may be displayed incorrectly on the measured
value display of the 3RW44.
Notice
For 3RW44 PROFIBUS DP communication module, product version d *E03*:
Use of the 3RW44 with PROFIBUS for redundant controls and Y link:
The 3RW44 acts like a DPV0 Slave in the Y link. Parameterization can only be
carried out via the GSD file. Only cyclic data is transmitted, no data sets or
alarms.
For 3RW44 PROFIBUS DP communication module from product version *E04*
onwards: From this version onwards, DPV1 operation (read, write data set and
alarms) is also possible downstream from a Y link.
Further PROFIBUS DP documentation

Operating instructions "PROFIBUS DP Communication Module for 3RW44 Soft
Starters", order number: 3ZX1012-0RW44-0KA0.

8-4 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8.1.1 Definitions
S7 slave
An S7 slave is a slave fully integrated into STEP 7. It is embedded via OM Soft
Starter ES. It supports the S7 model (diagnosis alarms).
Writing data
Writing data means that data are transmitted to the soft starter.
Reading data
Reading data means that data are transmitted from the soft starter.
GSD
The device master file (GSD) contains DP slave descriptions in a uniform format.
Use of the GSD simplifies the configuration of the DP master and the DP slave.
See "Configuration with the GSD File" on Page 8-15.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-5
8.2 Data Transmission

8.2.1 Data Transmission Options
The following figure illustrates the data transmission options:
Master class 1 Master class 2

SIMATIC S7 with PROFIBUS DP communications processor PC or PD with
Soft Starter ES
Max. two master class

2 possible.
Data transmission to master

class 1. PROFIBUS DPV1 extension of the standard:
Parameterization,
diagnosis, controlling, signaling, testing via
PROFIBUS DPV1
PC / PD e.g. with Soft Starter ES or

Soft Starter ES Premium
Parameterization, diagnosis, controlling, signaling,
testing via system interface
Figure 8-12:Data transmission options
8.2.2 Communication Principle
The following figure illustrates the communication principle, in which different

data are transmitted depending on the operating modes of the master and slave:
Master Class 1 Master Class 2 (Max.2)
cyclic I/O acyclic PLC-CPU acyclic Acyclic

PC or PCS
e. g.
Soft Starter ES
PLC Professional
Communications processor
Configuration
GSD
Disable
starting
parameters
Sirius 3RW44 Soft Starter

Diagnosis Alarms Parameter Data sets Data sets
3RW44 DPV0
Cycl. signaling data DPV1
Cycl. control data
DPV1
Figure 8-13:Communication principle

8-6 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8.3 Installation of the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module
Warning
Dangerous electrical voltage! Can cause electric shock and burns. Before
starting work, de-energize the system or device.
Observe the information in the operating instructions "PROFIBUS DP

communication module for 3RW44 Soft Starters", order number 3ZX1012-
0RW44-0KA0.
8.3.1 Insertion of the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module (Field Bus Interface)
Caution
Before inserting the PROFIBUS DP communication module, de-energize the
3RW44 soft starter.
Notice
The PROFIBUS DP communication module only works with 3RW44 devices of
product version "E06" or higher, implemented for devices from production date
060501 onwards.
Production location / Year / Month / Day Product version

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-7
Proceed as follows:
Step Description
Insert a small screwdriver into the
opening in the cover of the 3RW44 soft
starter (1). Lightly press the screwdriver
downwards (2) and remove the cover
RW-01181
(3).
3 3
1
2
Insert the PROFIBUS DP

communication module into the device
(4).
Screw the PROFIBUS DP
RW-01182
communication module into place using

the screws included in the scope of
supply (5).
Plug the PROFIBUS connecting cable
4 into the socket of the communication
5 module (6). Screw the PROFIBUS
connecting cable firmly into place.
Switch on the supply voltage.
6 The "BUS" LED blinks yellow. This
means that the communication module
has been inserted correctly, but has not
5 yet been activated.
0.8 ... 1.2 Nm

7 ... 10.3 lbf· in

8-8 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8.4 Activating the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module (Field

Bus Interface) and Setting the Station Address
8.4.1 Introduction
Activate the PROFIBUS DP communication module (device function "Field bus")

and set the station address either via the display or via the device interface using
the "Soft Starter ES Premium" or the "Soft Starter ES + SP1" software.
Notice
After the communication module has been activated, the control priority
automatically switches from the inputs to the PROFIBUS DP communication
module.
If an input is active with the "Manual operation local" function, the control priority
does not change (refer to Chapter 5.4.7 "Parameterizing the Inputs" on Page 5-
28).
The station address of the soft starters is pre-set to 126 as the factory default.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-9
8.4.2 Activating the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module via the Display, Setting the Station
Address and Saving the Settings
1. When putting the soft starter into operation for the first time, you have to go
through the quick start menu (refer to Chapter 5.2). Also refer to the operating
instructions "3RW44 Soft Starters" (order number: 3ZX1012-0RW44-0AA0).
2. Press the respectively marked key on the device.
SIEMENS
3RW44 Fieldbus 1
interface
Menu
Off
ESC OK select
change
ESC OK
Display mea- 1
sured value Fieldbus interface

1 Off
select
select 2 On
ESC OK select
select
Status 2 ESC OK
display Fieldbus interface
1 Off
select
select 2 On
ESC OK select
select
Settings 3
ESC OK
Fieldbus 1
select
select
interface
ESC OK On
select
change
Parameter 1
ESC OK
set 1
select
select
ESC OK
Saving 11
options
select
select
ESC OK
Fieldbus 10
select
select
ESC OK
3. The "BUS" LED blinks red.

4. When the PROFIBUS icon appears on the display, the PROFIBUS DP
communication module has been activated successfully.

8-10 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
The next step is to set the desired station address for the 3RW44 as a
PROFIBUS slave.
In this example, the station address is set to "23".
Parameterization options
Fieldbus 1
interface On, Off
On
select
change
ESC OK
Group diagnosis 2
Disable, enable
Disable
select
change
ESC OK
Response to 3
CPU master stop Substitute value, last value
Substitute value
change
ESC OK
Station address 4
126
select
change
ESC OK Adjustable
from ... to Baud rate 5
Station address
12,000 kBd
126 1... 126
select
execute
ESC OK
ESC OK
Substitute value 6
Station address
23
select
select
select
execute
ESC OK
ESC OK
Parameters 7
Station address 4 disable CPU/Master
Off
23 select
change
select
change
ESC OK
ESC OK
Notice
If the parameter "Parameters disabled CPU/Master" is set to "Off" (factory setting), then
the parameters set on the soft starter will be overwritten with the values stored in the GSD
file or in the OM when the bus is started. If this is not desired, the parameter must be set
to "On".

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-11
5. In order to permanently save the settings, proceed as follows:
Station address 4
23
select
change
ESC OK
Fieldbus 10
select
select
ESC OK
Saving 11
options
select
execute
ESC OK
Function call 1
Save
settings
select
execute
ESC OK
Save 1
settings
execute?
select
Yes
ESC OK
SIEMENS
3RW44
Menu
ESC OK
Notice
If the parameter "Parameters disabled CPU/Master" is set to "Off" (factory setting) in the
menu "Field bus", the parameters set on the soft starter will be overwritten with the values
stored in the GSD data or in the OM when the bus is started. If this is not desired, the
parameter must be set to "On".

8-12 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8.4.3 Activating the PROFIBUS DP Communication Module (Field Bus Interface) and Setting the
Station Address via the Device Interface using the "Soft Starter ES Premium" or the "Soft
Starter ES + SP1" Software
Carry out the following steps to activate the communication module:

1. Use an interface cable to connect the 3RW44 soft starter to a PC on which the
"Soft Starter ES Premium" or the "Soft Starter ES + Service Pack 1" software is
installed.
2. Start the "Soft Starter ES Premium" or "Soft Starter ES + Service Pack 1"
software.
3. Select "Switching device > Open online" in the menu.
4. In the "Open online" dialog box, select the "Local device interface" option and the
desired COM port under "Interface".
5. Click "OK".
6. Select "Device configuration" on the left-hand side of the window.
7. Activate the "Field bus interface" control box on the right-hand side of the
window.
8. Select "Device parameters > Field bus" on the left-hand side of the window.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-13
9. Select your station address from the dropdown list box on the right-hand side of
the window.
10.Select the "Load to Switching Device" icon in the tool bar.

11. Confirm the station address change with "OK".
12.Confirm the activation of the PROFIBUS DP communication module with "OK".
The PROFIBUS DP communication module has been activated.
13.When the "BUS" LED on the communication module blinks red and the
PROFIBUS icon appears on the display, the communication module has
been activated successfully.
Notice
The soft starter only reads the station address automatically and permanently
saves it when the supply voltage of the soft starter is switched on (refer to
Chapter 8.6.5 "Flow Diagram PROFIBUS DP - Starting the Soft Starter" on Page
8-22) or following a "Restart" command.

8-14 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8.5 Soft Starter Configuration

8.5.1 Introduction
This section deals with the configuration and parameterization of soft starters.
• Configuring: Systematic arrangement of the individual soft starters (structure).
• Parameterization: Setting of the parameters using the configuration software.
Further information regarding parameters can be found in Chapter 8.10 "Data
Formats and Data Sets" on Page 8-35.
STEP 7
• The "Diagnose hardware" function is available with STEP 7 V5.1 from
correction version K5.1.2.0 onwards.
• Reloading of the configuration is not supported in STEP 7
(Target system o Load to PD).
• It is only possible to read the diagnosis via the CPU 315-2 DP
(using the "Diagnose hardware" function in STEP 7) up to
order number 6ES7315–2AF02.
8.5.2 Configuration with the GSD File
Definition of the GSD

The device master data (GSD) contain DP slave descriptions in a uniform
format. Use of the GSD simplifies the configuration of the DP master and the DP
slave.
Configuration with the GSD File

Soft starters are configured using the GSD file. The soft starter is embedded into
your system as a standard slave via the GSD file.
You can download the GSD file
• from the Internet at
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/113630
The following GSD files are available:

• SIEM80DE.GSG (German)
• SIEM80DE.GSE (English)
• SIEM80DE.GSF (French)
• SIEM80DE.GSI (Italian)
• SIEM80DE.GSS (Spanish)
Notice
Your configuration tool must support GSD files - Rev.3, e.g. STEP 7
V5.1+Service Pack 2 and higher.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-15
8.5.3 Configuration with the Soft Starter ES Premium Software
Sirius 3RW44 soft starters can also be configured using the

Soft Starter ES Premium software.
There are two possibilities when using PROFIBUS DP:
• Stand-alone program on a PC/PD with PROFIBUS DP connection
• Integration with the object manager (OM) in STEP 7
Detailed information regarding Soft Starter ES can be found in the program's
online help.
8.5.4 Diagnostics Package
A free diagnostics package is available for 3RW44 soft starters. It contains HMI
diagnostic screens for touch panels. The diagnostics package is available in
German and English.
You can download the diagnostics package at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/28557893
8.5.5 Soft Starter ES Parameterizing Software
Soft Starter ES is the central software for commissioning, operating and

diagnosis of the SIRIUS 3RW44 High Feature soft starter series.
You can download the Soft Starter ES parameterizing software at

http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/28323168. This is a free
14-day trial version.

8-16 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8.6 PROFIBUS DP Commissioning using the GSD File in STEP 7

(Example)
8.6.1 Introduction
The following example shows you how to commission the PROFIBUS DP

communication module.
• Installation and activation of the PROFIBUS DP communication module (field

bus interface)
• Configuration with STEP 7 using the GSD file
• Integration into the user program
• Switching on
Necessary components
• 3RW44 soft starter
• 3RW49 00-0KC00 communication module
General prerequisites
• You have configured an infeed module with integrated S7 station
e.g. with CPU315-2 DP.
• You are proficient in STEP 7.
• The PD is connected to the DP master.
Software prerequisites
Configuration
Version Explanations
software used
STEP 7 From You have integrated the GSD file of the soft starter
version into STEP 7.
V5.1+SP2
onwards
Configuration software You have integrated the GSD file of the soft starter
for the different DP into the respective configuration tool.
master used
Table 8-1: Software prerequisites for commissioning

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-17
Prerequisites for commissioning
Required actions For further information, refer to ...
1. The soft starter is installed Chapter 3 "Installation, Connection

and Branch Layout" on Page 8-1
2. The PROFIBUS DP communication module is Chapter 8.3 "Installation of the

installed PROFIBUS DP Communication
Module" on Page 8-7.
3. The station address is set on the soft starter Chapter 8.4.3 "Activating the
PROFIBUS DP Communication
Module (Field Bus Interface) and
Setting the Station Address via the
Device Interface using the "Soft
Starter ES Premium" or the "Soft
Starter ES + SP1" Software" on
Page 8-13.
4. The soft starter has been configured (configured Chapter 8.5 "Soft Starter
and parameterized) Configuration" on Page 8-15
5. The supply voltage for the DP master is DP master manual

switched on
6. The DP master is switched to the operating DP master manual

state RUN
Table 8-2: Prerequisites for commissioning

8-18 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8.6.2 Configuration using the Device Master Data (GSD) in STEP 7
Step Description
Activate the PROFIBUS DP communication module as described in Chapter

1
8.4.
2 Set the desired station address as described in Chapter 8.4.
Switch on the supply voltage for the DP master CPU 315-2 DP at the infeed
3
module.
Observe the status LEDs of the DP master CPU 315-2 DP on the infeed
4
module:
5 V DC: Lights up
SF DP: Off
BUSF: Blinking
Start the SIMATIC Manager and create a new project with a DP master
5 (e.g. CPU315-2 DP with DI 16 x24 V DC and DO 16 x24 V DC). Generate OB1
and OB82 for the project.
In HW config., call up the menu command Extras > Install new GSD file, and
integrate the GSD file of the soft starter into the configuration tool of the DP
master used. For the CPU315-2 used in the example, you can install
• the German GSD file SIEM80DE.GSG,
6 • the English GSD file SIEM80DE.GSE,
• the French GSD file SIEM80DE.GSF,
• the Spanish GSD file SIEM80DE.GSS,
• the Italian GSD file SIEM80DE.GSI
in the STEP 7 SIMATIC Manager.
7 Generate the PROFIBUS DP subnet.
Add the soft starter from the hardware catalog to the PROFIBUS under
8 PROFIBUS DP > Additional field devices > Switching devices > Motor starters
> Direct on line soft starters > Sirius 3RW44.
9 Set the station address for the soft starter to 3 (or higher).
Drag the module from the selection list of the dropdown menu to slot 1 of the
Sirius 3RW44:
Module/ O
Slot Order number I addr. Comment
DP ID addr.
10
1 192 3RW4422-*BC** 2...3*) 2...3*)
*) Depending on the structure
Open the "DP slave characteristics" dialog with a double click.

Click on "Parameterization". Set the parameters **), e.g.
..
11 Rated operating current
..
Click "OK". The configuration is completed.
12 Save the configuration.
Table 8-3: Commissioning

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-19
**) Notice
During parameterization with the GSD file, it is possible to select values that are
dependent on each other, but which are not permissible in combination. The
respective parameter is reported as an "Incorrect parameter value" in data set
92.
The following table shows which parameters are dependent on each other and
how these must be set:
Parameter Settings
Rated operating current Ie Depends on Tripping class CLASS (refer to

Chapter 10.3.2 "Technical Data
Power Unit" on Page 10-12).
Maximum current limit value Greater than Minimum current limit value Chapter
5.4.6 "Specifying Current Limit
Values" on Page 5-27.
Maximum starting time Greater than Starting time Chapter 5.4.3

"Specifying the Starting Mode" on
Page 5-13.
Limiting torque Greater than Start torque Chapter 5.4.3

"Specifying the Starting Mode" on
Page 5-13, torque control and torque
control with current limiting.
Table 8-4: Interdependent parameter settings

8-20 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8.6.3 Integration into the User Program
Step Description
Create the user program in the LAD/STL/CSF editor in OB1.

1 Example: Reading an input and controlling an output:
Cyclically copy the central DIs (switches) to the decentralized motor starter (=PAA).
Cyclically output the PAE of the motor starter to the central DOs (LED).
// PAA: read in switches 0-7 (DI 16 x 24 V DC)

// y emitir al arrancador de motor
// EB0.0 Motor - RIGHT

// EB0.1 Motor - LEFT
// EB0.2 0
// Read in the motor starter PAE
// and output to D016xDC24V
2 Save the project in the SIMATIC manager.
3 Load the configuration into the DP master.
Table 8-5: Integration into the User Program
8.6.4 Switching On
Step Description
1 Switch on the voltage supply for the soft starter.

Observe the status LEDs on the DP master CPU315-2 DP:
5 V DC: Lights up
2
SF DP: Off
BUSF: Off
Observe the status LEDs on the PROFIBUS module:
3
LED BUS: Lights up green
Table 8-6: Switching on

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-21
8.6.5 Flow Diagram PROFIBUS DP - Starting the Soft Starter
Switch on the supply voltage

for the soft starter
The soft starter sets the outputs to "0"

and accepts the set station
address
The "BUS" LED is red
The soft starter receives

the configuration data from the DP
master
Do the configuration No
data match the actual structure?
Yes
Remedy: Match the configuration

The "BUS" LED lights up green; data to the
Inputs and outputs are enabled; data structure or vice versa
exchange is possible
Ready for operation
Figure 8-14:PROFIBUS DP - starting the soft starter

8-22 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8.7 Process Data and Process Images

Definition of the process image
The process image is part of the system memory of the DP master. At the
beginning of the cyclical program, the signal statuses of the inputs are
transmitted to the process image of the inputs. At the end of the cyclical
program, the process image of the outputs is transmitted to the DP slave as a
signal status.
Soft starters with PROFIBUS DP have the following process image:

• Process image with 2 byte outputs / 2 byte inputs (16 O / 16 I)

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-23
Table
The following table contains process data and process images:
Process image:
Process data (16 O, DO 0.0 to DO 1.7)
(16 I, DI 0.0 to DI 1.7)
Outputs
DO- 0. 0 Motor RIGHT
1 Motor LEFT
2 Available
3 Trip reset
4 Emergency start
Parameter set 1
Parameter set 2
Parameter set 3
Process image error
5 Available
6 Slow speed
7 Available
DO- 1. 0 Output 1
PS1 PS2 PS3 1 Output 2
0 1 0 1 2 Parameter set Bit 0
0 0 1 1 3 Parameter set Bit 1
4 Available
5 Available
6 Available
7 Disable quick stop
Inputs
DI- 0. 0 Ready (automatic)
1 Motor on
2 Group error
3 Group warning
4 Input 1
5 Input 2
6 Input 3
7 Input 4
DI- 1. 0 Motor current Iact-bit0
1 Motor current Iact-bit1
6 Manual operation local operating mode
7 Ramp operation
Table 8-7: Process data and process images

8-24 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8.8 Diagnosis via LED Display
LED Description
BUS Red Bus error

Red blinking Parameter error
Red flickering Basic factory settings restored (red flickering
for 5 sec)
Red-green Parameter error while starting S7
toggling*)
Green Device exchanging data!
Yellow Device not initialized and bus error!
(Send in device!)
Yellow-green Device not initialized and parameter error!
blinking (Send in device!)
Off Device not exchanging data!
Specifications
Error: BE = Bus error
Frequency Blinking: 0.5 Hz
specifications:
Flickering: 8 to 10 Hz
*) Toggling: 2 to 10 Hz
Table 8-8: Diagnosis via LED display

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-25
8.9 Diagnosis with STEP 7

8.9.1 Reading the Diagnosis
Length of the diagnosis telegram

The maximum length of the telegram is 32 byte.
8.9.2 Options for Reading the Diagnosis
Automation system with Module or register in

Application Refer to ...
DP master STEP 7
SIMATIC S7/M7 SFC 13 "DP NRM_DG" Reading the slave diagnosis Chapter 8.9.3 "Structure of the
(store in data area of the user Slave Diagnosis" on Page 8-27,
program) For SFC, refer to the online help
in STEP 7
Table 8-9: Reading the diagnosis with STEP 7
Reading the S7 diagnosis with SFC 13 "DP NRM_DG" (example)

This is an example of how to read the slave diagnosis for a DP slave in the
STEP 7 user program using SFC 13.
Assumptions
The following assumptions are true for this STEP 7 user program:
• The diagnostic address is 1022 (3FE H).

• The slave diagnosis should be stored in DB82: from address 0.0,
length 32 bytes.
• The slave diagnosis consists of 32 bytes.
STEP 7 user program
STL Explanation
CALL SFC 13
REQ :=TRUE Read request

LADDR :=W#16#3FE Diagnostic address
RET_VAL :=MW0 RET_VAL of SFC 13
RECORD :=P#DB82.DBX 0.0 BYTE 32 Data compartment for diagnosis in DB82
BUSY :=M2.0 Read operation runs over several OB1
cycles

8-26 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8.9.3 Structure of the Slave Diagnosis
Byte 0
Byte 1 Station status 1 to 3
Byte 2
Byte 3 Master PROFIBUS address
Byte 4 High byte

Manufacturer code
Byte 5 Low byte
Byte 6
Byte 7 Code-based diagnosis
..
Byte 8
..
. Module status
Details
Byte 12 . (here: soft starter)
Byte 13
Byte 14
Byte 15
.. .. Channel-based diagnosis
(3 bytes per channel)
.
up to max.
.
Byte 31
Figure 8-15:Structure of the slave diagnosis
Notice
The length of the diagnosis telegram varies between 13 and 32 bytes. The
length of the diagnosis telegram last received can be seen in
STEP 7 from the RET_VAL parameter of SFC 13.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-27
8.9.4 Station Status 1 to 3
Definition
Station status 1 to 3 gives an overview of the status of a
DP slave.
Station status 1
Bit Meaning Cause/Remedy
0 1: The DP slave cannot be addressed by the • Has the station address been set correctly at the DP slave?
DP master. • Is the bus connector connected?
• Is voltage applied at the DP slave?
• Is the RS 485 repeater set correctly?
• Has a reset been carried out on the DP slave?
1 1: The DP slave is not yet ready for data
• Wait, since the DP slave is just starting up.
exchange.
2 1: The configuration data sent to the DP
• Has the correct station type or the correct structure for the
slave by the DP master do not match the
DP slave been entered into the configuration software?
structure of the DP slave.
3 1: There is an external diagnosis. (Group • Analyze the code-based diagnosis, the module status and /
diagnosis display) or the channel-related diagnosis. As soon as all errors have
been remedied, bit 3 is reset. The bit is set again when a
new diagnosis message is available in the bytes of the
above mentioned diagnoses.
4 1: The requested function is not supported
by the DP slave (e.g. changing of the • Check the configuration.
station address via software).
5 1: The DP master cannot interpret the reply
• Check the bus design.
from the DP slave.
6 1: The DP slave type does not match the • Has the correct station type been entered into the
software configuration. configuration software?
7 1: The DP slave was parameterized by a • Bit is always 1 when you are accessing the DP slave with
different DP master (not by the DP master the PD or another DP master, for example.
accessing the DP slave at the moment). The station address of the DP master which carried out the
parameterization of the DP slave can be found in the
"Master PROFIBUS Address" diagnostic byte.
Table 8-10: Station status 1 structure (byte 0)

8-28 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Station status 2
Bit Meaning
0 1: The DP slave must be newly parameterized.

1 1: There is a diagnosis message. The DP slave does not function until the error
has been remedied (static diagnosis message).
2 1: The bit is always set to "1" when a DP slave with this station address exists.
3 1: The watchdog function is activated for this DP slave.
4 1: The DP slave has received the "FREEZE" command1).
5 1: The DP slave has received the "SYNC" command1).
6 0: Bit is always "0".
7 1: The DP slave has been deactivated, i.e. it is not part of the current
processing.
1) The bit is only updated if another diagnosis message changes.

Station status 3
Bit Meaning
0 to 6 0: Bits are always "0".

7 1: • There are more diagnosis messages than the DP slave can store.
• The DP master cannot write all diagnosis messages sent by the DP
slave in its diagnosis buffer (channel-based diagnosis).

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-29
8.9.5 Master PROFIBUS Address
Definition
The master PROFIBUS address diagnostic byte stores the station address of the
DP master:
• which has carried out the parameterization of the DP slave and
• has read and write access to the DP slave.
The master PROFIBUS address is in byte 3 of the slave diagnosis.
8.9.6 Manufacturer Code
Definition
The manufacturer code contains a code describing the type of DP slave.
Manufacturer code
Byte 4 Byte 5 Manufacturer code for
80H DEH Soft starters

Table 8-13: Structure of the manufacturer code

8-30 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8.9.7 Code-Based Diagnosis
Definition
Code-based diagnosis indicates whether or not there are any faulty soft starters.
The code-based diagnosis begins with byte 6 and comprises 2 bytes.
Code-based diagnosis
The structure of the code-based diagnosis for soft starters is as follows:
7 6 5 0 Bit number
Byte 6 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 = 0x42
Length of the code-based diagnosis

including byte 6 (=2 bytes)
Code for code-based diagnosis
7 6 5 0 Bit number
Byte 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x
0: Channel-based diagnosis not available

1: Channel-based diagnosis available
Figure 8-16:Structure of the code-based diagnosis

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-31
8.9.8 Module Status
Definition
The module status reflects the status of the configured module (here: soft
starter) and represents a specification of the code-based diagnosis. The module
status starts after the code-based diagnosis and comprises 5 bytes.
Module status structure

The structure of the module status is as follows:
7 6 5 0 Bit number
Byte 8 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 = 0x05
Length of the module status

including byte 8 (=5 bytes)
Code for module status
7 0
Byte 9 82H
7 0
Byte 10 0H Not relevant
Byte 11 0H Not relevant
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number
Byte 12 0 0 0 x
00B: Soft starter OK; valid user data

01B: Soft starter error; invalid user data
Figure 8-17:Structure of the module status

8-32 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8.9.9 Channel-Based Diagnosis
Definition
The channel-based diagnosis provides information about channel errors of the
modules (here: soft starter) and represents a specification of the code-based
diagnosis. The channel-based diagnosis starts after the module status. The
maximum length is restricted to the maximum overall length of the slave
diagnosis, i.e. 31 bytes. The channel-based diagnosis does not affect the
module status.
The number of channel-based diagnosis messages is restricted to 9 (also refer
to station status 3, bit 7).
Channel-based diagnosis
The structure of the channel-based diagnosis is as follows:
7 6 5 0 Bit number
Byte 13 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Code for channel-based diagnosis
7 6 5 0 Bit number
Byte 14 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
Input/output channel
7 6 5 0 Bit number
Byte 15 0 0 0
Error type (table on the next page)
Channel type:
000B: No special channel type
Byte 16 to Next channel-based diagnosis message

Byte 18 (same assignment as byte 13 to 15)
to
max. byte 31
Figure 8-18:Structure of the channel-based diagnosis
Notice
The channel-based diagnosis is always updated up to the current diagnosis
message in the diagnosis telegram. Subsequent older diagnosis messages are
not deleted. Remedy: Analyze the valid current length of the diagnosis telegram:
• STEP 7 from the RET_VAL parameter of SFC 13.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-33
Error types
The diagnosis message is reported on channel 0.
E
Error type Meaning/Cause Delete signal bit / Acknowledgement
No.
The signal bit is deleted automatically when

00001:
E1 • Short-circuit in the temperature sensor the cause for the switch-off has been
Short-circuit
remedied and acknowledged via "Trip reset".
00100: • Overload of the temperature sensor
E4 The signal bit is updated continuously.
Overload • Overload of the thermal motor model
The signal bit is deleted automatically when
00101:
E5 • Overload of the contact block the cause for the switch-off has been
Overtemperature
remedied and acknowledged via "Trip reset".
00110:
E6 • Wire break in the temperature sensor
Line breakage
00111:
E7 Maximum limit • Ie limit value exceeded
The signal bit is updated continuously
value exceeded
01000:
E8 Minimum limit • Ie limit value undershot
value undershot
The signal bit can be deleted when the cause
01001: • Internal error/device error of the error has been remedied by
E9
Error • Contact block defective • Switching the supply voltage off/on
• Issuing the "Restart" command if possible
10000: The signal bit is always deleted after
E16 • Incorrect parameter value
Parameter error acknowledgement with "Trip reset".
10001: • Electronics supply voltage too low The signal bit is deleted when the cause for
E17 No supply or load • No supply voltage at the contact block the switch-off has been remedied or
voltage • No line voltage acknowledged automatically.
• Switch-off due to overload The signal bit is always deleted after
11000:
• Switch-off due to residual current acknowledgement with "Trip reset".
E24 Actuator switch-
• Switch-off due to asymmetry Additional acknowledgement in combination
off
• Switch-off due to ground fault with other errors.
11010: • Overload of the sensor supply The signal bit is always deleted after
E26
External error • Process image error acknowledgement with "Trip reset".
Table 8-14: Error types

8-34 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8.10 Data Formats and Data Sets

8.10.1 Characteristics
The soft starter acquires a multitude of operating, diagnostics and statistics data.
Control data
Data transmitted to the soft starter, e.g. Motor LEFT switching command, Trip
reset, etc.
Data format: Bit
Messages
Data transmitted by the soft starter indicating the current operating status, e.g.
Motor left, etc.
Data format: Bit
Diagnosis
Data transmitted by the soft starter indicating the current operating status, e.g.
Overload fault mode, etc.
Data format: Bit
Current values
Current values are coded in different current formats, in
• 6-bit current format,
• 8-bit current format and
• 9-bit current format:
9-bit current format
Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
23 22 21 20 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5
1 + 0.5 + 0.25 + 0.125 + 0.0625 + 0.03125 = 1.96875 (q 0 to 197 %)

4+2 1 + 0.5 + 0.25 + 0.125 + 0.0625 + 0.03125 = 7.97 (q 0 to 797 %)
8+4+2 1 + 0.5 + 0.25 + 0.125 + 0.0625 + 0.03125 = 15.97 (q 0 to 1597 %)
Figure 8-19:Current formats
Current values are

• Motor current Imax (6-bit current format)
• Phase currents IL1max, IL2max, IL3max (8-bit current format)
• Last trigger current (9-bit current format)
• Maximum tripping current (9-bit current format)

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-35
Statistics data for device service life

• Operating hours
The soft starter records 2 operating hour values:
– The motor operating hours.
These indicate how long the motor has been switched on.
– The device operating hours (soft starter).
These indicate how long the 115 V AC or 230 V AC supply voltage of the soft
starter has been switched on.
Both operating hour values are recorded in data set 95 - "Read statistics".
They are recorded in the "Operating hours" data field once every second.
The operating hours are recorded in the range of 0 to 232 seconds in
1-second increments.
• Number of overload trips
The soft starter counts the number of overload trips in the range of 0 to 65 535.
• Number of starts motor right / left
The soft starter counts the number of starts in the range of 0 to 232.
Example: The value is increased by 1 when current is flowing in the main
circuit following a "Motor ON" command.
• Number of starts, outputs 1 to 4
• Motor current Imax.
The soft starter measures the current in all 3 phases and indicates the current
of the phase with the highest load as a percentage [%] of the set current Ie.
Data format: 1 byte, 8-bit current format
Example: Set current I e = 60 A
Indicated motor current 110 %
corresponds to 60 A x 1.1 = 66 A
All 3 phase currents are available in data set 94
• Last trigger current
The soft starter measures the current in all 3 phases and indicates the current
flowing through the phase with the highest load at the time of the tripping as a
percentage [%] of the set current Ie and in amperes [A]
Data format: 2 byte, 9-bit current format
Example: Set current I e = 60 A
indicated motor current 455 % corresponds to 60 A x 4.55 = 273 A

8-36 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Statistics data of the maximum pointer

Maximum pointers are used for preventive diagnosis:
– The maximum measured value is stored in the device.
– The higher-level PLC can collect the measured value at any time.
– The higher-level PLC can delete the measured value at any time.
The following data are available as maximum pointers:

• Number of overload trips.
• Phase current IL1max to IL3max and IL1min to IL3min. The maximum and
minimum phase current are indicated as a percentage [%] of the set current Ie
and in amperes [A].
Data format: Each 1 byte, 8-bit current format.
The measured maximum and minimum phase current in bridging mode is
stored for each phase.
• Minimum and maximum phase-to-phase voltages U Lx - ULy as r.m.s values in
0.1 V. Minimum and maximum line frequency in 0.5 Hz resolution.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-37
8.11 Identification Number (ID No.), Error Codes

8.11.1 Identification Number (ID No.)
The identification number (ID No.) is used for the unique identification of all
information available in the soft starter (parameters, control commands,
diagnosis, commands, etc.). It can be found in the left column of the data set
table.
8.11.2 Error Codes for Negative Data Set Acknowledgement
Description
When a data set is declined, an error code is sent together with the negative
acknowledgement via the device interface as well as via the bus interface. The
error code provides information on the reason for the negative
acknowledgement.
The error codes comply with the PROFIBUS DPV1 standard in so far as they
apply to soft starters.
Analysis via the local device interface using Soft starter ES

The error codes are analyzed by the "Soft Starter ES" parameterizing and
diagnostics software and output as plain text. For further information on this
topic, please refer to the "Soft Starter ES" online help.
Analysis via PROFIBUS DP

The error codes are output via PROFIBUS DP layer 2. For further information on
this topic, please refer to the section describing the PROFIBUS DP protocol in
the respective manuals.

8-38 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Error codes
The following error codes are generated by the soft starter:
Error codes
Error message Cause
byte
High Low
00 H 00 H No error
Communication interface
80 H A0 H Negative acknowledgement • Data set can only be written
"Read data set"
80 H A1 H Negative acknowledgement • Data set can only be read
"Write data set"
80 H A2 H Protocol error • Layer 2 (field bus)
• Device interface
• Incorrect coordination
80 H A9 H This function is not supported! • DPV1 service does not
support reading/writing of the
data set
Technology access
80 H B0 H Unknown data set number • Data set number not known in
the soft starter
80 H B1 H Incorrect data set length when writing • Data set length differs from
data set length specified
80 H B2 H Incorrect slot number • Slot number not 1 or 4
80 H B6 H Communication partner declined data • Incorrect operating mode
acceptance! (automatic, manual bus,
manual operation local)
• Data set can only be read
• Parameter changes not
permissible when ON
80 H B8 H Invalid parameter • Incorrect parameter value
Device resources
80 H C2 H Temporary lack of resources in the • No available receive buffer
device! • The data set is currently being
updated
• The data set order is currently
active at another interface
Table 8-15: Error codes

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-39
8.12 Data Sets

Writing/reading data sets with STEP 7
You can access the soft starter data sets via the user program.
• Writing data sets:
S7-DPV1 master: By calling up SFB 53 "WR_REC" or SFC 58
S7 master: By calling up SFC 58
• Reading data sets:
S7-DPV1 master: By calling up SFB 52 "RD_REC" or SFC 59
S7 master: By calling up SFC 59
Further information
For further information regarding SFBs, please refer to
• the reference manual
"System software for S7-300/400, System and Standard Functions"
• in the STEP 7 online help
Byte arrangements
When data are stored which are longer than one byte, the bytes are arranged as
follows ("big endian")
Byte arrangement Data type

Byte 0 High byte High word Double word
Byte 1 Low byte
Byte 2 High byte Low word
Byte 3 Low byte
Byte 0 High byte Word

Byte 1 Low byte
Byte 0 Byte 0 Byte

Byte 1 Byte 1
Table 8-16: Byte arrangement in "big endian" format

8-40 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8.12.1 Data Set 68 - Reading/Writing the Process Image of the Outputs
Note
Please keep in mind that data set 68 is overwritten by the cyclical process image
in automatic operating mode!
Byte Meaning
Preamble
0 Writing coordination 0x20 via channel C1 (PLC)
Writing 0x30 via channel C2 (PC)
Writing 0x40 via device interface (PC)
1-3 Reserved = 0
Process image of the outputs
4 Process data DO-0.0 to DO-0.7, table below
5 Process data DO-1.0 to DO-1.7, table below
6 Reserved = 0
7 Reserved = 0
Process image:
ID No. Process data
(16 A (outputs), DO 0.0 to DO 1.7)
1001 DO- 0. 0 Motor RIGHT
1002 1 Motor LEFT
1003 2 Available
1004 3 Trip reset
1005 4 Emergency start
1006 5 Available
1007 6 Slow speed
1008 7 Available
1009 DO- 1. 0 Output 1
1010 1 Output 2
1011 2 Parameter set Bit 0
1012 3 Parameter set Bit 1
1013 4 Available
1014 5 Available
1015 6 Available
1016 7 Disable quick stop
Table 8-17: Data set 68 - reading/writing the process image of the outputs
In the "Automatic operating mode", the PLC specifies the process image of the
outputs. In this case, reading of data set 68 at the local device interface supplies
the process image of the outputs as transmitted by the PLC.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-41
8.12.2 Data Set 69 - Reading the Process Image of the Inputs
Byte Meaning
Process image of the inputs

0 Process data DI-0.0 to DI-0.7, table below
1 Process data DI-1.0 to DI-1.7, table below
2 Reserved = 0
3 Reserved = 0
ID Process image:
Process data
No. (16 I (inputs), DI 0.0 to DI 1.7)
1101 DI- 0. 0 Ready (automatic)

1102 1 Motor on
1103 2 Group error
1104 3 Group warning
1105 4 Input 1
1106 5 Input 2
1107 6 Input 3
1108 7 Input 4
1109 DI- 1. 0 Motor current Iact-bit0
1110 1 Motor current Iact-bit1
1115 6 Manual operation local operating mode
1116 7 Ramp operation
Table 8-18: Data set 69 - reading the process image of the inputs

8-42 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8.12.3 Data Set 72 - Log List - Reading Device Errors
Byte Meaning Value range Increment Comment
0-3 Operating hours - device 1 ... 232 s 1 second Oldest

entry
4-5 ID number of the device 0 ... ± 32,767 1
error
6-9 Operating hours - device 1 ... 232 s 1 second Second oldest
entry
10 - 11 ID number of the device 0 ... ± 32,767 1
error
etc.
120 - 123 Operating hours - device 1 ... 232 s 1 second Last,
newest entry
124 - 125 ID number of the tripping 0 ... ± 32,767 1
Table 8-19: Data set 72 - log list - reading device errors
This data set can record 21 entries. When all spaces are filled, the first entry is
overwritten.
Note
The latest entry is entered at the end of the data set. The remaining entries are
moved up by one entry.
The following messages can be entered:
ID No. Device error - Messages
452 Heatsink - thermistor defective

1466 Switching element 1 failed
1417 Bypass element fault

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-43
8.12.4 Data Set 73 Log List - Reading the Trippings
0-3 Operating hours - device 1 ... 232 s 1 second

4-5 ID number of the device 0 ... ± 32,767 1 Oldest entry
error
entry
10 - 11 ID number of the device 0 ... ± 32, 767 1
error
etc.
newest entry
124 - 125 ID number of the tripping 0 ... ± 32, 767 1
Table 8-20: Data set 73 - log list - reading the trippings
overwritten.
Note

8-44 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
ID No. Trippings - Messages

309 Contact block overload
317 Electronics supply voltage too low
319 No line voltage
324 Temperature sensor overload
325 Temperature sensor open
326 Temperature sensor short-circuit
327 Thermal motor model overload
334 Ie limit value exceeded
335 Ie limit value undershot
339 Motor stalled - switched off
341 Asymmetry switch-off
343 Ground fault switch-off
355 Process image error
365 Incorrect parameter value
ID number of the faulty parameter
1407 Electronics supply voltage too high
1408 No load
1409 Loss of phase L1
1421 Impermissible Ie / CLASS settings
1479 Phase angle control failure
1481 Line voltage too high
1482 Current range exceeded
Table 8-21: Log list messages - reading the trippings

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-45
8.12.5 Data Set 75 Log List - Reading Events
0-3 Operating hours - device 1 ... 232 s 1 second Oldest

entry
4-5 ID number of the device 0 ... ± 32 ,767 *) 1
error
entry
10 - 11 ID number of the device 0 ... ± 32 ,767 *) 1
error
etc.
newest
124 - 125 ID number of the tripping 0 ... ± 32 ,767 *) 1
entry
*) + coming event
– going event
Table 8-22: Data set 75 log list - reading events
overwritten.
Note

8-46 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
ID
Events - Messages Comment
No.
Warnings
324 Temperature sensor overload ± (coming/going event)
325 Temperature sensor open ± (coming/going event)
326 Temperature sensor short-circuit ± (coming/going event)
327 Thermal motor model overload ± (coming/going event)
334 Ie limit value exceeded ± (coming/going event)
335 Ie limit value undershot ± (coming/going event)
340 Asymmetry recognized ± (coming/going event)
342 Ground fault ± (coming/going event)
Actions
310 Emergency start is active ± (coming/going event)
357 Automatic operating mode + (coming event only)
358 Manual bus operating mode + (coming event only)
359 Manual operation local operating mode + (coming event only)
360 Connection break in manual operating ± (coming/going event)
mode
363 Maximum pointer deleted + (coming event only)
365 Incorrect parameter value + (coming event only)
ID number of the faulty parameter + (coming event only)
366 Parameter changes not permissible + (coming event only)
when ON
ID number of the faulty parameter + (coming event only)
368 Parameterization disable CPU/master ± (coming/going event)
active
369 Basic factory settings restored + (coming event only)
1302 Log list - trippings deleted + (coming event only)
1303 Log list - events deleted + (coming event only)
Table 8-23: Log list messages - reading events

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-47
8.12.6 Data Set 81 - Reading the Basic Settings of Data Set 131
Data set 81 matches data set 131 in structure and content. Data set 81 supplies
the default values for all parameters of data set 131.

8-48 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8.12.9 Data Set 92 - Reading the Device Diagnosis
ID E
ByteBit Signal bit Meaning/Acknowledgment
No. No.*)
Switching/controlling:
301 00 Ready (automatic) — Device ready for operation via host (e.g. PLC).
The signal bit is updated continuously.
306 01 Motor right — Contact block 1 switched on.
307 02 Motor left — Contact block 2 switched on.
309 03 Contact block overload E5, For example, power semiconductor too hot, causing the
E24 motor to switch off.
The signal bit is deleted when the cause for the switch-off
has been remedied and acknowledged via "Trip reset".
308 04 Contact block defective E9 For example, contactor welded/blocked or power
semiconductor short-circuited.
The signal bit can only be deleted by switching the supply
voltage off / on when the cause of error is remedied.
310 05 Emergency start is active — The signal bit is deleted when the emergency start is
deactivated.
302 06 Group error — At least one error is set which generates an error
number.
has been remedied and acknowledged via "Trip reset",
autoreset or OFF command.
304 07 Group warning — At least one warning is pending.
10 Reserved = 0 —
1
319 1 No line voltage E17, The signal bit is deleted when the cause for the switch-
E24 off has been remedied and acknowledged via "Trip
reset".
12 Reserved = 0 —
3
312 1 Start mode active —
313 14 Stopping mode active —
15 Reserved = 0 —
316 16 Electrical braking procedure is — The braking output is switched on by the soft starter.
active The signal bit is updated continuously.
314 17 Slow speed active — The signal bit is updated continuously.
Protective function: Motor/line/short-circuit
324 20 Temperature sensor overload E4 Overload recognized, the signal bit is updated
continuously.
325 21 Temperature sensor open E6 The thermistor circuit has been interrupted.
326 22 Temperature sensor short-circuit E1 Short-circuit in the thermistor circuit.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-49
ID E
No. No.*)
327 23 Thermal motor model overload E4 Overload recognized, the signal bit is updated
continuously.
328 24 Overload switch-off E24 The motor is switched off due to a recognized overload.
has been remedied and acknowledged via "Trip reset" /
"Autoreset".
329 25 Idle time active — The signal bit is updated continuously.
330 26 Cool-down time active — The signal bit is updated continuously.
7
2 Reserved = 0 —
30-6 Reserved = 0 —
352 37 Control input — The device receives control commands via the inputs.
340 40 Asymmetry recognized — There is asymmetry. The signal bit is updated
continuously.
341 41 Asymmetry switch-off E24 The motor is switched off due to asymmetry.
The signal bit is deleted when the cause for the switch-
off has been remedied and acknowledged via "Trip
reset".
334 42 Ie limit value exceeded E7 Limit value exceeded.
335 43 Ie limit value undershot E8 Limit value undershot.
336 44 Ie limit switch-off E24 The signal bit is deleted when the cause for the switch-
reset".
45 Reserved = 0 —
6
4 Reserved = 0 —
339 47 Motor stalled - switched off E24 Switch-off, blocking current detected longer than
permissible blocking time. The signal bit is deleted when
the cause for the switch-off has been remedied and
acknowledged via "Trip reset".
344 50 Input 1 —
Input statuses:
1
345 5 Input 2 — "1" = active, HIGH level applied
346 52 Input 3 — "0" = inactive, LOW level applied
347 53 Input 4 —
0
342 6 Ground fault — There is a ground fault.
343 61 Ground fault switch-off E24 The motor is switched off due to a ground fault.
The signal bit is deleted when the cause for the switch-
reset".

8-50 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
ID E
No. No.*)
353 62 Quick stop active E26, The motor is switched off due to a quick stop.
E24 The signal bit is deleted when the cause for the switch-
reset".
63 Reserved = 0
361 64 Trip reset carried out — The signal bit is deleted by update or "Trip reset" in
ready state.
362 65 Trip reset not possible — Cause for the switch-off is still present.
The signal bit is deleted by update (new "Trip reset") or by
"Trip reset" in ready state.
363 66 Maximum pointer deleted — The signal bit is always deleted after acknowledgement
with "Trip reset".
317 67 Electronics supply — The signal bit is deleted automatically when the cause
voltage too low for the switch-off is remedied.
Communication
303 70 Bus error — Watchdog function of the DP interface has elapsed.
356 71 CPU/master STOP — PLC program no longer processed.
357 72 Automatic operating mode — Automatic (PLC-controlled).
358 73 Manual bus operating mode — Manual operation via field bus (O&M controlled).
359 74 Manual operation local operating — Manual operation via local device interface
mode (O&M controlled). The signal bit is updated continuously.
75 Reserved = 0 —
6
360 7 Connection break — The associated communication connection was
in manual operation local operating interrupted during manual operation. The signal bit is
mode updated continuously.
355 77 Process image error E26 Process image of the outputs contains impermissible bit
E24 combinations. The signal bit is automatically deleted when
the cause for the switch-off is remedied.
Parameter
364 80 Parameterization active — The signal bit is updated continuously.
365 81 Incorrect parameter value E16 The signal bit is always deleted following an
acknowledgement with "Trip reset" or after valid
parameters have been received.
E24 Causes a switch-off during starting.
2
366 8 Parameter changes not permissible — Parameter change attempted while motor running or
when ON during the affected device function, causing a switch-off.
The signal bit is always deleted following an
acknowledgement with "Trip reset" or after valid
parameters have been received.
368 83 Parameterization disable CPU/ — The signal bit is updated continuously.
master active The soft starter ignores the parameters from the PLC.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-51
ID E
No. No.*)
Device function
0-2
9 Reserved = 0 —
369 93 Basic factory settings restored — The signal bit is always deleted after acknowledgement
with "Trip reset".
367 10 Faulty parameter number (low byte) — In connection with byte 8 1 and 82, states the ID number
of the first parameter not accepted.
11 Faulty parameter number (high —
The signal byte is always deleted after
byte)
acknowledgement with "Trip reset".
1421 122 Impermissible Ie/CLASS settings —
3-7
12 Reserved = 0 —
1449 130 Parameter set 1 active —
2
133 Reserved = 0 —
1453 134 Impermissible change of the —
parameter set
0-1
14 Reserved = 0 —
1404 142 Motor heating active —
1402 143 DC braking active —
4
1403 14 Dynamic DC braking active —
1471 145 Motor connection method star/delta —
1472 146 Motor connection method inside —
delta
1473 147 Motor connection method unknown —
0
1408 15 No load —
1409 152 Loss of phase L1 —
4
1412 155 Line phase direction right —
1413 156 Line phase direction left —
7
15 Reserved = 0 —
16 Reserved = 0 —
1435 170 Output 1 active —
1

8-52 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
ID E
No. No.*)
18 Reserved = 0 —
Switching/controlling
0
1407 19 Electronics supply voltage too high —
1470 191 Ready for motor on —
1414 192 Contact block short-circuited —
3
1417 19 Bypass element fault —
1418 194 Reserved = 0 —
1466 195 Switching element 1 failed —
6
Protective function
1422 200 Thermal motor model deactivated —
1479 203 Phase angle control failure —
4-7
20 Reserved = 0 —
1415 210 Cool-down time contact block active —
1416 211 Contact element too hot for starting —
2
1482 21 Current range exceeded —
Communication
357 220 Automatic operating mode —
(redundant to bit 7.2)
358 221 Manual bus operating mode —
(redundant to bit 7.3)
1443 222 Manual bus - PC-controlled —
359 223 Manual operation local operating —
mode (redundant to bit 7.4)
1444 224 Manual operation local - input- —
controlled
1445 225 Manual operation local - O&M- —
controlled
1446 226 Manual operation local - PC- —
controlled
23 Reserved = 0 —

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-53
ID E
No. No.*)
Prewarnings
0-1
24 Reserved = 0 —
1419 242 Prewarning limit - remaining time —
for tripping undershot
1420 243 Prewarning limit - motor heat build- —
up exceeded
25 Reserved = 0 —
26 Reserved = 0 —
27 Reserved = 0 —
28 Reserved = 0 —
29 Reserved = 0 —
Table 8-24: Data set 92 - reading the device diagnosis
*) Error numbers, PROFIBUS DP

8-54 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8.12.10 Data Set 93 - Writing a Command
Structure of the command data set
Byte Meaning Comment
Preamble
0 Coordination Writing 0x20 via channel C1 (PLC)
1-3 Reserved
Command
4 Number of commands Value range 1 ... 5
Number of subsequent valid commands
5 Command 1 For the consecutive number, refer to the table below
6 Command 2 Optional (for coding, refer to the table below)
Table 8-25: Structure of the command data set
ID No. Coding Command Meaning
1-byte commands
0 0 Reserved No function
703 1 Trip reset Reset and acknowledgement of error messages
713 2 Emergency start ON Switch on emergency start
714 3 Emergency start OFF Switch off emergency start
709 4 Automatic operating mode Transition to automatic operating mode (DP master-controlled)
710 5 Operating mode manual Transition to manual operating mode. The soft starter switches to
711 - bus manual bus or manual operation local operating mode, depending on
712 - operation local the interface via which the command is received.
701 6 Restore basic factory Restore basic factory settings of the parameters.
settings
704 7 Delete maximum pointer The measured values for the preventive diagnosis are deleted (=0).
705 13 Log list - Delete log list with recorded causes of errors.
delete trippings
706 14 Log list - Delete log list with recorded warning messages and certain actions.
delete events
702 9 Restart Trigger restarting (same as after line ON), e.g. after reassigning the
station address.
707 10 Parameterization disable No parameterization possible via the parameterizing master, or this
CPU/master ON master's parameters are ignored.
708 11 Parameterization disable Parameterization possible via the parameterizing master.
CPU/master OFF
Table 8-26: Data set 93 - writing a command

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-55
8.12.11 Data set 94 - Reading the Measured Values
ID
ByteBit Meaning Value range / [coding] Increment Comment
No.
Measured values
504 0 Phase current IL1 (%) 0 ... 797 % / [0 ... 255] 3.125 % 8-bit current
format
format
format
507 3 Reserved = 0
501 4 - 5 Remaining cool-down time of the motor 0 ... 1, 800 s / [0 ... 18 ,000] 0.1 s
60-6 Motor heat build-up 0 ... 200 % / [0 ... 100] 2%
502 67 Asymmetry t 40 % No asymmetry [0]
Asymmetry (t 40 %) [1]
503 7 Asymmetry 0 ... 100 % / [0 ...100] 1%
8 Reserved = 0
9 Reserved = 0
10 Reserved = 0
11 Reserved = 0
12 - 13 Reserved = 0
14 Reserved = 0
508 16 Output frequency 0 ... 100 Hz / [0 ... 200] 0.5 Hz
17 Reserved = 0
18 Reserved = 0
19 Reserved = 0
509 20 Line frequency 0 ... 100 Hz / [0 ... 200] 0.5 Hz
21 Reserved = 0
510 22 - 23 Phase-to-phase voltage UL1-L2 (rms) 0 ... 1, 500 V / [0 ... 15, 000] 0.1 V
513 28 - 31 Phase current IL1 (rms) 0 ... 20, 000 A / [0 ... 2, 000 ,000] 0.01 A
514 32 - 35 Phase current IL2 (rms) 0 ... 20 ,000 A / [0 ... 2 ,000 ,000] 0.01 A
515 36 - 39 Phase current IL3 (rms) 0 ... 20, 000 A / [0 ... 2 ,000, 000] 0.01 A
516 40 - 41 Electronics supply voltage 0 ... 1, 500 V / [0 ... 15, 000] 0.1 V
517 42 Heatsink temperature -40 ... 127 °C/ [-40 ... 127] 1 °C
518 43 Contact block temperature 0 ... 250 °C/ [0 ... 250] 1 °C
519 44 - 45 Remaining cool-down time of the 0 ... 1 ,800 s / [0 ... 18, 000] 0.1 s
contact block
520 46 - 47 Remaining time for tripping of the 0 ... 10, 000 s / [0 ... 10, 000] 1s
thermal motor model
521 48 - 51 Output power 0 ... 2 ,147, 483 W / [0 ... 21 ,474 ,830] 0.1 W
522 52 - 63 Reserved = 0
Table 8-27: Data set 94 - Reading the Measured Values

8-56 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8.12.12 Data Set 95 - Reading the Statistics Data
ID
ByteBit Meaning Value range / [coding] Increment Comment
No.
Statistics
609 0 Motor current Imax 0 ... 797 % / [0 ... 255] 3.125 % 8-bit current
format
1 Reserved = 0
608 2 Last trigger current IA (%) 0 ... 1, 000 % / [0 ... 320] 3.125 %
4 Operating hours - device 0 ... 2 32 32
-1 s / [0 ... 2 -1] 1s
603 8 - 11 Number of starts motor right 0 ... 232 32
-1 / [0 ... 2 -1] 1
604 12 - 15 Number of starts motor left 0 ... 232-1 / [0 ... 232-1] 1
605 16 - 17 Number of overload trips 0 ... 65 ,535 / [0 ... 65, 535] 1
18 Reserved = 0
19 Reserved = 0
607 20 Motor current Imax (rms) 0 ... 20 ,000 A / [0 ... 2, 000 ,000] 0.01 A
606 24 Last trigger current IA (rms) 0 ... 20, 000 A / [0 ...2, 000 ,000] 0.01 A
602 28 Operating hours - motor 0 ... 232-1 s / [0 ... 232-1] 1s
32 32
611 32 Operating hours - motor current 0 ... 2 -1 s / [0 ... 2 -1] 1s
18 ... 49.9 % x Ie(max)
612 36 Operating hours - motor current 0 ... 232-1 s / [0 ... 232-1] 1s
50 ... 89.9 % x Ie(max)
90 ... 119.9 % x Ie(max)
120 ... 1,000 % x Ie(max)
615 48 Reserved = 0
616 50 Number of contact block 0 ... 232-1 / [0 ... 232-1] 1
overload trips
617 52 Reserved = 0
618 54 Reserved = 0
619 56 Reserved = 0
620 60 Number of braking stops 0 ... 2 32-1 / [0 ... 232-1] 1
621 64 Number of starts - output 1 0 ... 2 32 32
-1 / [0 ... 2 -1] 1
622 68 Number of starts - output 2 0 ... 2 32 32
-1 / [0 ... 2 -1] 1
32 32
623 72 Number of starts - output 3 0 ... 2 -1 / [0 ... 2 -1] 1
624 76 Number of starts - output 4 0 ... 2 32-1 / [0 ... 232-1] 1
80 Reserved = 0
84 Reserved = 0
88 Reserved = 0
89 Reserved = 0
Table 8-28: Data set 95 - reading the statistics data

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-57
8.12.13 Data Set 96 - Reading the Maximum Pointer
ID Incre-
ByteBit Meaning Value range / [coding] Comment
No. ment
Maximum pointer
656 4 Phase current IL1 min (%) 0 ... 797 % / [0 ... 255] 3.125 % In bypass operation
7 Reserved = 0
653 8 Phase current IL1 max (%) 0 ... 797 % / [0 ... 255] 3.125 % In bypass operation
11 Reserved = 0
652 12 Maximum 0 ... 1, 000 % / 3.125 % Current during switch-off due
tripping current IA max (%) [0 ... 320] to error
651 14 Number of motor overload 0 ... 65, 535 / 1 Motor protection, temperature
trips [0 ... 65, 535] sensor, stalling
659 16 Maximum 0 ... 20 ,000 A / 0.01 A Current during switch-off due
tripping current IA max (rms) [0 ... 2 ,000 ,000] to error
660 20 Phase current IL1 min (rms) 0 ... 20, 000 A / 0.01 A In bypass operation
[0 ... 2 ,000, 000]
661 24 Phase current IL2 min (rms) 0 ... 20, 000 A / 0.01 A In bypass operation
[0 ... 2 ,000 ,000]
662 28 Phase current IL3 min (rms) 0 ... 20 ,000 A / 0.01 A In bypass operation
[0 ... 2 ,000 ,000]
663 32 Phase current IL1 max (rms) 0 ... 20, 000 A / 0.01 A In bypass operation
[0 ... 2 ,000, 000]
[0 ... 2 ,000 ,000]
[0 ... 2 ,000 ,000]
666 44 Phase-to-phase voltage 0 ... 1 ,500 V / 0.1 V
UL1 - L2min (rms) [0 ... 15 ,000]
667 46 Phase-to-phase voltage 0 ... 1,500 V / 0.1 V
UL2 - L3min (rms) [0 ... 15,000]
UL3 - L1min (rms) [0 ... 15, 000] Reset to 0 after loss of phase
or switch-off of the main
669 50 Phase-to-phase voltage 0 ... 1 ,500 V / 0.1 V voltage.
UL1 - L2max (rms) [0 ... 15 ,000]
670 52 Phase-to-phase voltage 0 ... 1, 500 V / 0.1 V
UL2 - L3max (rms) [0 ... 15, 000]
UL3 - L1max (rms) [0 ... 15, 000]
672 56 Electronics supply voltage 0 ... 1 ,500 V / 0.1 V Reset to zero during "Power
UNS min (rms) [0 ... 15, 000] on".

8-58 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
ID Incre-
ByteBit Meaning Value range / [coding] Comment
No. ment
Maximum pointer
673 58 Electronics supply voltage 0 ... 1, 500 V / 0.1 V
UNS max (rms) [0 ... 15, 000]
674 60 Maximum heatsink 1 ... -40 °C / [- 1 °C
temperature 40 ... 127]
675 61 Maximum contact block 0 ... 250 % / [0 ... 250] 1%
temperature rise
676 62 Minimum line frequency 0 ... 100 Hz / [0 ... 200] 0.5 Hz During network failure or
loss of phase = 0
677 63 Maximum line frequency 0 ... 100 Hz / [0 ... 200] 0,5 Hz
678 64 Operating hours - motor 0 ... 232-1 s / [0 ... 232- 1s
current = 18 ... 49.9 % x le 1]
current = 50 ... 89.9 % x le 1]
current = 90 ... 119.9 % x le 1]
current = 120 ... 1,000 % x le 1]
682 80 Operating hours - device 0 ... 232-1 s / [0 ... 232- 1s
1]
84 Reserved = 0
85 Reserved = 0
Table 8-29: Data set 96 - reading the maximum pointer

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-59
8.12.14 Data Set 100 - Reading the Device Identification
ID No. ByteBit Value Comment
Preamble
1-3 Reserved = 0
Device identification (TF)
*)
901 4 - 11 ... Time stamp
902 12 - 31 SIEMENS AG Manufacturer
903 32 - 55 Order number
904 56 0x01 Device family: load feeder
905 57 0x01 Device sub-family: Soft starters
906 58 0x01 Device class: e.g. direct on line starter
907 59 0x03 System: SIRIUS 3RW44
908 60 0x46 Function group
909 61 0x00 Reserved = 0
910 62 - 77 Short product description
911 78 - 81 e.g. E001 HW version (byte 0 to byte 3)
82 0x00 ID number (byte 0) (3RW44)
912
85 0xDE ID number (byte 3) (3RW44)
86 - 87 0x00 Reserved = 0
915 88 - 95 ... Service number
96 0x00 Reserved = 0
Table 8-30: Data set 100 - reading the device identification
*) Time stamp: Time of the initialization with the factory settings in the factory

8-60 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Object id_date
name
Object 8 byte
length
Bits 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Octet
1 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 0 to 59, 999 milliseconds
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
5 4 3 2 1
3 res res 2 2 2 2 2 20 0 to 59 minutes
4 SU res res 24 23 22 21 20 0 to 23 hours
SU: 0: Normal time, 1: Daylight
saving time
22 21 20 1 to 7 ; 1 = Monday, 7 = Sunday
5
24 23 22 21 20 1 to 31 days
5 24 23 22 21 20
6 res res 2 1 to 12 months
7 res 26 2 5
2 4
2 3
2 2
2 1
2 0
0 to 99 years; 0 = 2,000
8 res res res res res res res res Reserved
Table 8-31: Coding for time stamp

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-61
8.12.15 Data Sets 131, 141, 151 - Technology Parameters 2: Reading/Writing Set 1, 2, 3
ByteBit Value Comment
Preamble
1-3 Reserved = 0
Only for
ID
ByteBit Meaning data set Value range [coding] Factor
No.
131
120 4-7 Device function_2 x

1 8 - 11 Device function_1 x
130 12 Rated operating current Ie 0 ... 2 ,000 A [0 ... 200, 000] 0.01 A
3 160 Load type x 3-phase [0]
4 161 Protection against voltage failure x • No [0]
• Yes [1]
162-7 Reserved = 0
136 17 Prewarning limit - motor heat build-up x 0 ... 95 % [0 ... 19] 5%
5 180-2 Response to overload - thermal motor x • Tripping without restart [0]
model • Tripping with restart [1]
• Warning [2]
183-7 Reserved = 0
6 190-4 Tripping class x • CLASS 5 (10a) [3]
• CLASS 10 [0]
• CLASS 15 [4]
• CLASS 20 [1]
• CLASS 30 [2]
• CLASS OFF [15]
195-7 Reserved = 0
7 20 Pre-charge time x 60 ... 1 ,800 s [2 ... 60] 30 s
8 21 Idle time x 0 ... 255 s [0 ... 255] 1s
137 22-23 Prewarning limit - remaining time for x 0 ... 500 s [0 ... 500] 1s
tripping
10 240-1 Response to overload - temperature sensor x • Tripping without
restart [0]
• Tripping with restart [1]
• Warning [2]
242-3 Reserved = 0
9 244-6 Temperature sensor x • Deactivated [0]
• Thermo click [1]
• PTC - type A [2]

8-62 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Only for
ID
No.
131
12 247 Temperature sensor monitoring x • No [0]
• Yes [1]
25 -26 Reserved = 0
15 28 Minimum current limit value 18.75 ... 100 % [6 ... 32] 3.125 %
16 29 Maximum current limit value 50 ... 150 % [16 ... 48] 3.125 %
320-5 Reserved = 0
14 326 Response to current limit value violation x • Warning [0]
• Tripping [1]
327 Reserved = 0
330-1 Reserved = 0
140 332 Response to overload - contact block x • Tripping without
restart [0]
• Tripping with restart [1]
334-7 Reserved = 0
0-2
21 34 Asymmetric limit value x 30 ... 60 % [3 ... 6] 10 %
343-5 Reserved = 0
20 346 Response to asymmetry x • Warning [0]
• Tripping [1]
22 347 Response to ground fault x • Warning [0]
• Tripping [1]
47 45 Braking torque 20 ... 100 % [4 ... 20] 5%
40 48 Start voltage 20 ... 100 % [4 ... 20] 5%
49 Reserved = 0
42 50 Current limiting value • 3RW44 2, 3, 4: 3.125 %
125 ... 550 % [40 ... 176]
• 3RW44 5:
125 ... 500 % [40 ... 160]
• 3RW44 6:
125 ... 450 % [40 ... 144]
167 510-3 Starting mode • Direct on line [0]
• Voltage ramp [1]
• Torque control [2]
• Motor heating [3]
• Voltage ramp + current limiting
[5]
• Torque control + current limiting
[6]

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-63
Only for
ID
No.
131
168 514-7 Stopping mode • Coasting down [0]
• Voltage ramp [1]
• Torque control [2]
• Pump stop [3]
• DC braking [4]
• Combined braking [5]
35 52 - 53 Substitute value x
0-5
56 Reserved = 0
6
36 56 Group diagnosis x • Disable [0]
• Enable [1]
34 567 Response to CPU/master STOP x • Switch substitute value [0]
• Retain last value [1]
26 76 Input 1 - Action x • No action (default) [0]
• Group warning [5]
• Manual operation local
operating mode [6]
• Emergency start [7]
• Slow speed [10]
• Quick stop [11]
• Trip reset [12]
• Motor RIGHT with PS1 [16]
• Motor LEFT with PS1 [17]
28 77 Input 2 - Action (refer to Input 1 - Action) x

8-64 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Only for
ID
No.
131
163 96 Output 1 - Action x • No action (default) [0]
• Control source PIO-DO 1.0
output 1 [1]
• Control source PIO-DO 1.1
output 2 [2]
• Control source input 1 [6]
• Run up [10]
• Operation / bridging [11]
• Stopping [12]
• On-time motor [13]
• Control command MOTOR ON
[14]
• Fan [15]
• DC braking contactor [16]
• Device - ON [18]
• Group warning [31]
• Group error [32]
• Bus error [33]
• Device error [34]
• Ready for motor on [38]
164 97 Output 2 - Action (refer to Output 1 - Action) x
165 98 Output 3 - Action (refer to Output 1 - Action) x
166 99 Output 4 - Action
100 - Reserved = 0
111
116 112 Breakaway time 0 ... 2 s [0 ... 200] 0.01 s
117 113 Breakaway voltage 40 ... 100 % [8 ... 20] 5%
169 114 - Maximum starting time 0 ... 1, 000 s [0 ... 10, 000] 0.1 s
115
170 116 - Starting time 0 ... 360 s [0 ... 3,600] 0.1 s
117
171 118 - Stopping time 0 ... 360 s [0 ... 3,600] 0.1 s
119
172 120 Start torque 10 ... 100 % [2 ... 20] 5%
118 121 Limiting torque 20 ... 200 % [4 ... 40] 5%
173 122 Stopping torque 10 ... 100 % [2 ... 20] 5%
123 Reserved = 0
124 Reserved = 0
119 125 Motor thermal capacity 1 ... 100 % [1 ... 100] 1%
126 - Reserved = 0
129
178 130 Dynamic braking torque 20 ... 100 % [4 ... 20] 5%

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-65
Only for
ID
No.
131
43 131 Slow speed factor - clockwise rotation 3 ... 21 [3 ... 21] 1
198 132 Slow speed factor - counter-clockwise 3 ... 21 [3 ... 21] 1
rotation
44 133 Slow torque - clockwise rotation 20 ... 100 % [4 ... 20] 5%
199 134 Slow torque - counter-clockwise rotation 20 ... 100 % [4 ... 20] 5%
135 - Reserved = 0
137
Table 8-32: Data sets 131, 141, 151 - technology parameters 2: reading/writing Set 1, 2, 3
Relations
• Maximum current limit value > minimum current limit value
• DC braking can only be selected when the "DC braking contactor" function is
assigned to an output.
• Max. starting time t starting time
• Limiting torque > start torque
8.12.16 Data Sets 132, 142, 152 - Technology Parameters 3: Reading/Writing Set 1, 2, 3

Preamble
1-3 Reserved = 0
ID No. ByteBit Meaning Value range [coding] Factor
4-9 Reserved = 0
104 10 - 11 Rated operating speed 500 ... 3,600 rpm [500 ... 3,600] 1 rpm
113 19 - 20 Rated operating torque 0 ... 65,535 Nm [0 ... 65, 535] 1 Nm
Table 8-33: Data sets 132, 142, 152 - technology parameters 3: reading/writing Set 1, 2, 3

8-66 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8.12.17 Data Set 133 - Technology Parameters 4: O&M Module
Preamble
1-3 Reserved = 0
ID No. ByteBit Meaning Value range [coding] Factor
4 Reserved = 0
179 80-3 Language • English [0]
• German [1]
• French [2]
• Spanish [3]
• Italian [4]
• Portuguese [5]
181 84-7 Lighting brightness • Normal [0]
• Off with time delay [4]
• Off [5]
180 9 Contrast display 0 ... 100 % [0 ... 20] 5%
0-3
182 10 Lighting response to fault • Unchanged [0]
• On [1]
• Blinking [2]
• Flickering [3]
183 104-7 Lighting response to warning • Unchanged [0]
• On [1]
• Blinking [2]
• Flickering [3]
11 Reserved = 0
184 12 Reaction time keys 10 ... 100 % [2 ... 20] 5%
185 13 Auto repeat speed 10 ... 100 % [2 ... 20] 5%
186 14 Auto repeat time 10 ... 250 ms [2 ... 50] 5 ms
187 15 O&M keys - activity monitoring time 0 ... 1,800 s [0 ... 60] 30 s
Table 8-34: Data set 133 - technology parameters 4: O&M module

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-67
8.12.18 Data Set 160 - Reading/Writing Communication Parameters
This data set is only meant for devices with direct access to the field bus
(e.g. PROFIBUS DP) for the allocation of communication parameters.
ID Communication Value range Default

ByteBit Increment
No. parameters [coding] setting
Preamble
200 0 Coordination Writing 0x20 via channel C1 (PLC)
1 Reserved1
2-3 Reserved2
Communication
210 4 Station address 1 ...126 1 126
211 5 Baud rate 12, 000 kBd [0]
6 ,000 kBd [1]
3, 000 kBd [2]
1 ,500 kBd [3]
500 kBd [4]
187.5 kBd [5]
93.75 kBd [6]
45.45 kBd [7]
19.2 kBd [8]
9.6 kBd [9]
Available [10..14]
Automatic baud rate
detection [15]
6 - 11 Reserved = 0
Table 8-35: Data set 160 - reading/writing communication parameters
Note
3RW44 soft starters signal the current baud rate while reading. During writing,
the value entered is ignored, as the baud rate is always automatically detected
by the soft starter.

8-68 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
8.12.19 Data Set 165 - Reading/Writing Comments
You can store any text with up to 121 characters (max. 121 byte), e.g. for system
documentation, in the soft starter.
Communication Value range

ByteBit
parameters [coding]
Preamble
1 Reserved1
2-3 Reserved2
Comment
4 - 124 Comment data
Table 8-36: Data set 165 - reading/writing comments

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 8-69

8-70 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Circuit Examples
9
9.1 Connection Examples for Main and Control Circuits 9-2

9.1.1 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit with Control via Keys 9-2
9.1.2 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit with Line Contactor and Control via PLC 9-3
9.1.3 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit and DC Braking Stopping Function for 9-4
Device Types 3RW44 22 to 3RW44 25
9.1.4 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit and DC Braking Stopping Function for 9-5
Device Types 3RW44 26 to 3RW44 47
9.1.5 3RW44 in an Inside Delta Circuit 9-6
9.1.6 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit and Control as per Contactor 9-7
9.1.7 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit with Soft Start/Stop and Additional Slow 9-8
Speed Function in both Directions of Rotation with one Parameter Set
9.1.8 Activation via PROFIBUS with Switching to Manual Operation Local (e. 9-9
g. at the Control Cabinet)
9.1.9 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit and Reversing Operation via Main 9-10
Contactors with one Parameter Set without Soft Stop
9.1.10 Reversing Operation with Soft Stop 9-11
9.1.11 Soft Starter for Pole-Changing Motor with Separate Windings and 2 9-12
Parameter Sets
9.1.12 Soft Starters for Dahlander Motors with 2 Parameter Sets 9-13
9.1.13 Parallel Starting of 3 Motors 9-14
9.1.14 Soft Starter for Serial Starting with 3 Parameter Sets 9-16
9.1.15 Soft Starter for Activation of a Motor with a Magnetic Fixing Brake 9-18
9.1.16 Emergency Stop Monitoring according to EN 954-1 Category 4 with 9-19
Safety Relay 3TK2823 and 3RW44
9.1.17 Soft Starter with Direct Switching (DOL) as Emergency Start 9-21
9.1.18 Soft Starter with Star-Delta Starter as Emergency Start (3RW44 in a 9-22
Standard Circuit)
9.1.19 Soft Starter and Frequency Converter on one Motor 9-23

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 9-1
Circuit Examples
9.1 Connection Examples for Main and Control Circuits

9.1.1 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit with Control via Keys
Main circuit Control circuit

Option 1a:
Standard circuit with circuit breaker and SITOR fuse
(pure semiconductor protection)
/ 13(9$&+]
13(9$&+]
/ /
/
) 37&W\SH$
6 RU
4 6WRS
7KHUPRFOLFN
I >> I >> I >> 6 6

6WDUW 5HVHW ˽
0RWRUULJKW
1RDFWLRQ
1RDFWLRQ
5HVHW
36
6,725
)
RSWLRQ
$ / / ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7 7
/ / / 4
3( ˽
4
$

7 7 7 3( 1R 1R *URXSHUURU
9 1 DFWLRQ DFWLRQ
16%BE
&RPPDQG
8: 0RWRURQ 16%BE
0
0
a 3(
Alternative branch layout in a standard circuit

Main circuit
Option 1b: Option 1c:
Standard circuit with all-range fuse Standard circuit with line and SITOR fuse (pure
(line and semiconductor protection) semiconductor protection)
13(9$&+]
/
/ 13(9$& +]
/
/
/
/
)
)
6,725
) RSWLRQ
/ / / / / /
4 4
7 7 7 7 7 7

9 9
16%BE
16%BE
8: 8:
0 0 0
0
a 3( a 3(
1) For permissible main and control voltage values, refer to Technical Data, pages 10-12 to 10-16.

9-2 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Circuit Examples
9.1.2 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit with Line Contactor and Control via PLC

Standard circuit with optional main contactor Activation of an optional main contactor and activation via PLC
13(9$&+] 13(9$&+]

/ /
/ 9'&
) 3/&RXWSXWV 3/&LQSXWV
/
4
0 6WDUW 5HVHW
I >> I >> I >>
37&W\SH$
RU
0RWRUULJKW
7KHUPRFOLFN
1RDFWLRQ
1RDFWLRQ
) 6,725
5HVHW
RSWLRQ ˽
36
2SWLRQDOOLQHFRQWDFWRU
4 LIPRWRULVWREHVZLWFKHG
SRWHQWLDOIUHH $ / / ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7 7
/ / / 4
3( ˽
4 2QWLPH 1R 1R *URXSHUURU
DFWLRQ DFWLRQ
7 7 7 $

9 3(
16%BE
8: 8
0
0 4
a 3( 1
2SWLRQDOOLQHFRQWDFWRU
LIPRWRULVWREHVZLWFKHG 16%BE
SRWHQWLDOIUHH
2) Caution: risk of restart!

The start command (e.g. via PLC) must be reset when a group fault occurs, since an automatic restart is
executed when a start command is pending after the reset command is issued. This particularly applies to
motor protection tripping.
For safety reasons, we recommend integrating the group error output (terminals 95 and 96) into the control.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 9-3
Circuit Examples
9.1.3 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit and DC Braking3) Stopping Function for Device Types
3RW44 22 to 3RW44 25
13(9$&+] 13(9$&+]

/ (
/ 9'&
/
4
0 6WDUW 5HVHW
I >> I >> I >>
4 37&W\SH$
6,725 RU
)
0RWRUULJKW
RSWLRQ 7KHUPRFOLFN
1RDFWLRQ
1RDFWLRQ
/ / /
5HVHW
36
˽
4 4 $ / / ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7 7
7 7 7 3( ˽

4 4 2Q '&EUDNH *URXSHUURU
WLPH FRQWDFWRU 1RDFWLRQ

$

9 3(
16%B
8
0 8:
0 4 16%BE
a 3( 1
2)

The start command (e.g. by the PLC) must be reset before a reset command is issued, as an automatic
restart is executed when a start command is pending after the reset command is issued. This particularly
applies to motor protection tripping. For safety reasons, we recommend integrating the group error output
(terminals 95 and 96) into the control.
3) If the "Combined braking" stopping function is selected, no braking contactor is required.

If the "DC braking" function is selected, a braking contactor must be additionally used.
For types, refer to the "Branch component layout (standard circuit)" table on page 10-21.
The "DC braking" function is recommended for applications with larger centrifugal masses (Jload > Jmotor).
Output 2 must be set to "DC braking contactor".

9-4 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Circuit Examples
9.1.4 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit and DC Braking3) Stopping Function for Device Types 3RW44 26
to 3RW44 66
13(9$&+] 13(9$&+]

/ /
/ 9'&
/ ) 3/&RXWSXWV 3/&LQSXWV
4
0 6WDUW 5HVHW
I >> I >> I >>
.
37&W\SH$
) 6,725 RU
0RWRUULJKW
RSWLRQ
1RDFWLRQ
1RDFWLRQ
7KHUPRFOLFN
/ / /
5HVHW
36
˽
4
$ / / ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7 7
. . 4
7 7 7 3( 1R ˽
2Q '&EUDNH *URXSHUURU
4 4 WLPH FRQWDFWRU DFWLRQ
4 4
$

9 4 4 3(
16%B
. 8
8:
0 0
3( 1 16%BE
a
2)

The start command (e.g. by the PLC) must be reset before a reset command is issued, since an automatic
restart is executed when a start command is pending after the reset command is issued. This particularly
applies to motor protection tripping. For safety reasons, we recommend integrating the group error output
(terminals 95 and 96) into the control.

If the "DC braking" function is selected, a braking contactor must be additionally used. For types, refer to
the "Branch component layout (standard circuit)" table on page 10-21.
Output 2 must be set to "DC braking contactor".
4) K4 auxiliary relay, e.g.:
LZX:RT4A4T30 (230 V AC rated control supply voltage),
LZX:RT4A4S15 (115 V AC rated control supply voltage).

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 9-5
Circuit Examples
9.1.5 3RW44 in an Inside Delta Circuit
Main circuit Option 1a: Control circuit Option 1: Activation via PLC
13(9$&+] 13(9$&+]

/ /
/ 9'&
/
4 0 6WDUW 5HVHW
I >> I >> I >> 37&W\SH$

RU
0RWRUULJKW
7KHUPRFOLFN
1RDFWLRQ
1RDFWLRQ
5HVHW
4
˽
36
$ / / ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7 7
6,725 4
)
3( ˽
/ / /
2QWLPH 1R 1R *URXSHUURU
DFWLRQ DFWLRQ
4
$

3(
7 7 7 8
4
9
1
16%BE
0 8:
0
a 2SWLRQDOOLQHFRQWDFWRU
:9 LIPRWRULVWREHVZLWFKHG 16%BE
8 SRWHQWLDOIUHH
3(
Reversed direction of rotation in an inside delta circuit

Main circuit Option 1b:
13(9$&+]
/ Notice
/ Observe the wiring suggestions for the inside delta circuit on the main
/ circuit page. Faulty connection may cause breakdowns.
4
I >> I >> I >>
4
1) For permissible main and control voltage values, refer to Technical Data,
pages 10-12 to 10-16.
6,725
) 2) Caution: risk of restart!
/ / / The start command (e.g. by the PLC) must be reset before a reset
command is issued, as an automatic restart is executed when a start
4 command is pending after the reset command is issued. This
particularly applies to motor protection tripping.
7 7 7 For safety reasons, we recommend integrating the group error output
9
8: (terminals 95 and 96) into the control.
0 0
16%BE
a
:9
3( 8

9-6 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Circuit Examples
9.1.6 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit and Control as per Contactor
Control circuit Main circuit
13(9$&+]
/ 13(9$&+]
/
) /
/
*URXSHUURU
4
1RDFWLRQ
1RDFWLRQ
2QWLPH
6 4
212)) I >> I >> I >>
$FNQRZ
OHGJH
6,725
RSWLRQ )
0RWRUULJKW36
9'&RXW
/ / /

7ULS5HVHW
1RDFWLRQ
1RDFWLRQ
˽ 4
4 $ / / ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7 7 7 7 7

3( 9
˽ 8:

$ 0 0
3( ,QSXW a 3(
1 WKHUPLVWRU
SURWHFWLRQ

Note
With this circuit type, the motor start may be delayed by up to 5 s after the start command, due to the internal
run times of the soft starter. Coasting down is the only possible stopping mode.
Notice
After the control supply voltage has been switched off and before restarting, the Us
device must be allowed to cool down for at least 30 s, as this influences the ON >30 s
effectiveness of the inherent protection of the soft starter.
OFF t
This type of circuit is not recommended for higher switching frequencies as the
integrated fan cannot idle after the soft starter has been switched off, thus
reducing the switching frequency specified in the technical data.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 9-7
9-8
13(9$&+] 13(9$&+]
/ /
/
)
/
. . . 6
Circuit Examples
4
*URXSHUURU
2QWLPH
1RDFWLRQ
1RDFWLRQ
5HVHW
I >> I >> I >>
4
VORZ
ULJKW
VORZ
OHIW

6WDUWULJKW
6RIWVWDUWVWRS
6,725
RSWLRQ
(QJDJLQJ )
6 6 6 FRRUGLQDWH
6WDUW 6WDUW 6WDUW
VORZ ULJKW VZLWFK
VORZ / / /
ULJKW OHIW VRIWVWDUW HJ
6%.:
4
˽ 7 7 7
9'&RXW
0RWRUULJKW36
0RWRUOHIW36
6ORZVSHHGPRGH
7ULS5HVHW
9
4 $ / / ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7 7 $ $ $ 8:
. . . 0 0
Directions of Rotation with one Parameter Set
3( $ $ $
˽ a 3(
$
,QSXW 8 8 8 8
3(
WKHUPLVWRU
SURWHFWLRQ
1

&RQWDFWPXOWLSOLFDWLRQ
Note: parameterization
Set the control input functions to:
IN1: Motor right PS1
IN2: Motor left PS1
IN3: Slow-speed mode
IN4: Trip/reset (factory default)
The slow-speed parameters in Parameter Set 1 must be set. Motor right means rotation in line phase direction, motor left means rotation against the line
phase direction.
Notice
The slow-speed function is not suitable for continuous operation. The motor heating can become unreliable in continuous operation at slow speed.
Caution - risk of restart:
The start command must be reset before a reset command is issued, as an automatic restart is executed when a start command is pending after the reset
command is issued. This especially applies to motor protection tripping.
K1, K2, K3 = relays for contact multiplication, e.g. for 230 V AC operation: 3RS 1800-1BP00
9.1.7 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit with Soft Start/Stop and Additional Slow Speed Function in both
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05

13(9$&+]
/

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
13(9$&+] /
/
/
)
4
6HOHFWLRQVZLWFK I >> I >> I >>

(e. g. at the Control Cabinet)
0DQXDORSHUDWLRQORFDO
6 4
6,725
RSWLRQ )
6 6 4
6WDUW6WRS 5HVHW
PDQXDO PDQXDO
RSHUDWLRQORFDO RSHUDWLRQ
*URXSHUURU
IL[HGDOORFDWLRQ
2QWLPH
1RDFWLRQ
1RDFWLRQ
ORFDO / / /

4
7 7 7
3URILEXV'3
0RWRUULJKW36
2SHUDWLQJPRGH
7ULS5HVHW
1RDFWLRQ
0DQXDORSHUDWLRQORFDO
$ $ 9
$ / / ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7 7 0 8:
+ 4 8
4 $ $ 0
˽
˽
3( $ a
3(
,QSXW
9.1.8 Activation via PROFIBUS with Switching to Manual Operation Local
3( WKHUPLVWRU
)DXOW
SURWHFWLRQ
1
Circuit Examples
9-9
9-10
Notice
The "Coasting down" stopping mode must be set on the 3RW44.
Circuit Examples
13(9$&+]
/
13(9$&+]
) /
/
/
1RDFWLRQ
2QWLPH
2QWLPH
4 4 6 4
5HVHW 4
Parameter Set without Soft Stop
I >> I >> I >>
*URXS
HUURU
6,725
RSWLRQ )
6 0RWRUVWRS
4 4

4 4
/ / /
6 4 6 4
0RWRU 0RWRU 4
ULJKW OHIW
7 7 7

4 4 9
8:
0 0
˽
9'&RXW
0RWRUULJKW36
1RDFWLRQ
1RDFWLRQ
7ULS5HVHW
a
3(
4 $ / / ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7 7 $ $
+ 4 4
3( $ $
˽
$
8 8
,QSXW
9.1.9 3RW44 in a Standard Circuit and Reversing Operation via Main Contactors with one
3( WKHUPLVWRU

SURWHFWLRQ
)DXOW
0RWRUULJKW
0RWRUOHIW
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05

13(9$&+] 13(9$&+]
/ /
/
) /

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
4
)DXOW
IL[HGDOORFDWLRQ
2QWLPH
2QWLPH
1RDFWLRQ
. 6 I >> I >> I >>
5HVHW
4

4 4
9.1.10Reversing Operation with Soft Stop
/ / /

6 6 .
4 4 0RWRU 0RWRU 4

ULJKW OHIW
6 4 6 4
0RWRU 0RWRU 6 7 7 7
ULJKW OHIW 0RWRU
9
VWRS
0 8:
4 4
0
0RWRUULJKW36
)UHHO\SURJUDPPDEOH
)UHHO\SURJUDPPDEOH
˽
5HVHWVWDQGDUG
a
4 $ 4 $ 4 $ $
$ / / ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7 7 3(
+ 8 8 . 8
3( $ $ $ $
˽
$
,QSXW
3( WKHUPLVWRU
SURWHFWLRQ

0RWRUOHIW
0RWRUULJKW
)DXOW
1
Circuit Examples
9-11
13(9$&+]
9-12
/
13(9$&+]
) /
/
/
4
Circuit Examples
4
IL[HG
4 4 6
DOORFDWLRQ
,QSXW
,QSXW
*URXSHUURU
5HVHW
1RDFWLRQ
I >> I >> I >>
2 Parameter Sets

/ / /

6
0RWRU 4
VWRS
6 4 .
6WDUW 7 7 7
ORZ
URWDWLRQDO
VSHHG
6
6WDUW 4 4
KLJK
URWDWLRQDO
VSHHG
$ $ $ 4 4 9
+ + + 0 8:
9'&RXW
0RWRUULJKW36
0RWRUULJKW36
1RDFWLRQ
7ULS5HVHW
$ $ $ 0
4 $ / / ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7 7 $ $ $
˽
4 . 4 a 3(
3( $ $ $ 8:
˽
$ 9
,QSXW 8 8 8
3(
WKHUPLVWRUSURWHFWLRQ
1
9.1.11 Soft Starter for Pole-Changing Motor with Separate Windings and
)DXOW
PV
0RWRUUXQVDW
0RWRUUXQVDW
SLFNXSGHOD\
VZLWFKLQJGHOD\

0DLQFRQWDFWRUIRU
0DLQFRQWDFWRUIRU
ORZURWDWLRQDOVSHHG
ORZURWDWLRQDOVSHHG
KLJKURWDWLRQDOVSHHG
KLJKURWDWLRQDOVSHHG
$X[LOLDU\FRQWDFWRUIRU
Notice
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05

Notice
13(9$&+]
/
13(9$&+]
/ /
) /

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
4

4 I >> I >> I >>
IL[HG
DOORFDWLRQ
*URXSHUURU
,QSXW
,QSXW
1RDFWLRQ
/ / /
4
4 4 6
5HVHW 6
0RWRU 7 7 7
VWRS
6 4 .
6WDUWORZ
URWDWLRQDO 4 4
VSHHG
6
4
6WDUWKLJK
URWDWLRQDO 4
VSHHG 9
8:
9.1.12Soft Starters for Dahlander Motors with 2 Parameter Sets
.
$ $ $ 4 0
0
˽
0RWRUULJKW36
0RWRUULJKW36
1RDFWLRQ
7ULS5HVHW
+ + + a 3(
$ $ $ $ $ $ $ 8:
$ / / ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7 7
4 . 4 4 9
4 $ $ $ $
˽
3( $
,QSXW 8 8 8 8
3( WKHUPLVWRUSURWHFWLRQ
1
)DXOW
0RWRU
0RWRU
6WDUFRQWDFWRU

PVGHOD\
0DLQFRQWDFWRU
0DLQFRQWDFWRU
6ZLWFKLQJGHOD\
KLJKURWDWLRQDOVSHHG
ORZURWDWLRQDOVSHHG
ORZURWDWLRQDOVSHHG
KLJKURWDWLRQDOVSHHG
KLJKURWDWLRQDOVSHHG
Circuit Examples
9-13
Circuit Examples
9.1.13Parallel Starting of 3 Motors
Control circuit
13(9$&+]
/
SURJUDPPDEOH
SURJUDPPDEOH
)
2QWLPH
)UHHO\
)UHHO\
6 6
6WDUW 5HVHW 4
6WRS

IL[HGDOORFDWLRQ
)
)DXOW )
)
7ULS5HVHW
) ) )
6WDUWULJKW
36
4 $ / / ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7 7

3(
˽ $ $
$ + 4
$ $
SURJUDPPDEOH
SURJUDPPDEOH
,QSXW
VWDQGDUG
VWDQGDUG
WKHUPLVWRU
5HVHW
6WDUW
)UHHO\
)UHHO\
SURWHFWLRQ
)DXOW
3(

Notice
The rated output of the 3RW44 to be configured must be at least as high as the sum of the motor rated
outputs.
The loads should have similar mass moments of inertia and torque curves.

9-14 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Circuit Examples
Parallel Starting of 3 Motors
Main circuit
13(9$&+]
/
/
/
4
I >> I >> I >>
) 6,725
RSWLRQ
4
/ / /
4
7 7 7

) ) )
9 9 9
0 8: 0 8: 0 8:
0 0 0
˽
˽
˽
a 3( a 3( a 3(
Notice
The rated output of the 3RW44 to be configured must be at least as high as the sum of the motor rated
outputs.
The loads should have similar mass moments of inertia and torque curves.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 9-15
Notice
9-16
Note
In the case of increased operating sequences, the 3RW44 should be dimensioned at least one capacity
level higher than the highest connected motor output.
Circuit Examples
13(9$&+]
/
)
4

) ) )
) ) )
6 6 6

0RWRU 0RWRU 0RWRU
6WRS 6WRS 6WRS
4 4 4 6
6 4 4 4 6 4 4 4 6 4 4 4
0RWRU 0RWRU 0RWRU
6WDUW 4 6WDUW 4 6WDUW 4

9.1.14Soft Starter for Serial Starting with 3 Parameter Sets
4 4 4

2SHUDWLRQ
%\SDVVHG
2SHUDWLRQ
%\SDVVHG
2SHUDWLRQ
%\SDVVHG

4 4 4
0RWRUULJKW36
0RWRUULJKW36
0RWRUULJKW36
7ULS5HVHW
$ / / ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7 7 4 4 4
4
3(
˽
$ $ $ $ $ $ $ $
+ 4 4 4 4 4 4
,QSXW $ $ $ $ $ $ $
WKHUPLVWRU
SURWHFWLRQ 8 8 8 8 8 8
3(
1

/LQHFRQWDFWRU
0RWRU
/LQHFRQWDFWRU
0RWRU
/LQHFRQWDFWRU
0RWRU
6WDUWFRQWDFWRU
0RWRU
6WDUWFRQWDFWRU
0RWRU
6WDUWFRQWDFWRU
0RWRU
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05

)DXOW
5:RU
PRWRUSURWHFWLRQ
000
WULSSHG
Circuit Examples
Soft starter for serial starting with 3 parameter sets (deactivate soft stop and 3RW44 motor
protection)
13(9$&+]
/
/
/
) ) ) )
/ / /

4
4 4 4
7 7 7
4 4 4
) ) )
9 9 9
0 8: 0 8: 0 8:
0 0 0
˽
˽
˽
a a a

3( 3( 3(
Note
In the case of increased operating sequences, the 3RW44 should be dimensioned at least one capacity level
higher than the highest connected motor output.
Notice

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 9-17
Circuit Examples
9.1.15Soft Starter for Activation of a Motor with a Magnetic Fixing Brake
3(

I >>
/
7
8:
13(9$&+]
I >>
a
9
0
/
7
I >>
0
/
7
%UDNH
$
4
$
4
/
/
/

)UHHO\SURJUDPPDEOH

)UHHO\SURJUDPPDEOH

2QWLPH
$
$
)DXOW

IL[HGDOORFDWLRQ
+
)DXOW

WKHUPLVWRU
SURWHFWLRQ
7
4
˽
,QSXW
7
,1
5HVHWVWDQGDUG
5HVHW
6
,1
)UHHO\SURJUDPPDEOH
,1
)UHHO\SURJUDPPDEOH
13(9$&+]
,1
36
6WDUWULJKW
6WDUW
6WRS
/
6
/
3(
$
4 $
)
/
3(

9-18 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
13(9$&+]
/
/9'& )
and 3RW44

4
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05

2Q5HVHW
6 6 4
6
4
$ < < <
6WDUW6WRS
5:
5HVHW7.
5HVHW5:
6 6 6
2QWLPH
)DXOW
IL[HGDOORFDWLRQ
)UHHO\SURJUDPPDEOH
)UHHO\SURJUDPPDEOH
(0(5*(1&<6723
4
7.&%
< < $ <
4 4 4 4

4 $
0 +
$
4 $ / / ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7 7
3( $
˽
$ +
$
3(
36
)UHHO\
)UHHO\
6WDUWULJKW
,QSXW
WKHUPLVWRU
SURWHFWLRQ
5HVHW
VWDQGDUG
5:
)DXOW
(0(5*(1&<
6723
SURJUDPPDEOH
SURJUDPPDEOH
1

Notice
If a stopping function has been set (exception: "Coasting down"), a fault message may occur on the soft starter
when the Emergency Off circuit is activated (e.g. "Loss of phase L1/L2/L3" or "No line voltage").
9.1.16Emergency Stop Monitoring according to EN 954-1 Category 4 with Safety Relay 3TK2823
Circuit Examples
9-19
Circuit Examples
Emergency stop monitoring according to EN 954-1 category 4 with safety relay 3TK2823 and 3RW44
Main circuit
13(9$&+]
/
/
/
4
I >> I >> I >>
4
4
/ / /
4
7 7 7

9
0 8:
0
˽

a 3(
Notice
If a stopping function has been set (exception: "Coasting down"), a fault message may occur on the soft
starter when the Emergency Off circuit is activated (e.g."Loss of phase L1/L2/L3" or "No line voltage").

9-20 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
13(9$&+] 13(9$&+]
/ /
) /
/
6 4

6HOHFWLRQVZLWFK
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05

6RIWVWDUW I >> I >> I >>
'LUHFWVWDUW
4
6 6
2QWLPH
2QWLPH
1RDFWLRQ
6WDUW6WRS 5HVHW
*URXSHUURU
VRIWVWDUWHUV / / /
IL[HGDOORFDWLRQ

4 4
7 7 7

6
6WDUW6WRS
GLUHFWVWDUW
9
8:
0 0
˽
a 3(
0RWRUULJKW36
1RDFWLRQ
7ULS5HVHW
1RDFWLRQ
$
9.1.17Soft Starter with Direct Switching (DOL) as Emergency Start
$ / / ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7 7 $

+ 4
4 $ $
˽
3( $
,QSXW 8
3( WKHUPLVWRU
SURWHFWLRQ
1
)DXOW

FRQWDFWRU
'LUHFWVWDUW
Circuit Examples
9-21
13(9$&+]
9-22
/
/
/
4
I >> I >> I >>

Circuit Examples
13(9$&+]
/
)
6 / / /
6HOHFWLRQVZLWFK 4
4
6RIWVWDUW

6WDUGHOWDVWDUW
7 7 7
4
IL[HG
2QWLPH
4 4 4
2QWLPH
DOORFDWLRQ
*URXSHUURU
1RDFWLRQ
9
8:
0
0

˽
a 3(
8:
6 6 9
6WDUW 5HVHW
6WRS 6WDUW6WRS 6

6RIW VWDUGHOWDVWDUW
VWDUWHU
. 4 4
4
,QWHUORFN
4 4 4
0RWRUULJKW36
1RDFWLRQ
7ULS5HVHW
1RDFWLRQ
$ $ $ $ $ $
$ / / ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7 7
4 + . 4 4 4 4
˽ $ $ $ $ $ $
3( $
,QSXW 8 8 8 8 8
3( WKHUPLVWRU
SURWHFWLRQ
1

)DXOW
9.1.18Soft Starter with Star-Delta Starter as Emergency Start (3RW44 in a Standard Circuit)
6WDUGHOWD
GHOWDVWDUW
6WDUFRQWDFWRU
0DLQFRQWDFWRU
DQGLQWHUORFN
'HOWDFRQWDFWRU
VZLWFKLQJWLPH
6RIWVWDUWVWDU
%\SDVVFRQWDFWRU
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05

13(9$&+]
/
13(9$&+]
/ /
) /
6HOHFWLRQVZLWFK 4
6RIWVWDUW 6
)UHTXHQF\FRQYHUWHU I >> I >> I >>

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
6,725
4 RSWLRQ ) )
*URXSHUURU
1RDFWLRQ
1RDFWLRQ
2QWLPH
IL[HGDOORFDWLRQ
4 4

/ / / 8 9 :

4 7
4 6
$FNQRZOHGJH
6 7 7 7 8 9 :
6WDUW6WRS 4
4
IUHTXHQF\FRQYHUWHU
9.1.19Soft Starter and Frequency Converter on one Motor
9
0 8:
0
˽
a 3(
0RWRUULJKW36
1RDFWLRQ
1RDFWLRQ
7ULS5HVHW
4
$ / / ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7 7
$ $ $ $ $
˽ 4 4 7 4 4
3( $ $ $ $ $ $
,QSXW $
WKHUPLVWRU + 8 8 8 8
3(
SURWHFWLRQ $
1
)DXOW
6RIWVWDUWHU

6RIWVWDUWHU
DFWLYDWLRQ
)UHTXHQF\FRQYHUWHU
)UHTXHQF\FRQYHUWHU
)UHTXHQF\FRQYHUWHU
GHFRXSOLQJFRQWDFWRU
GHFRXSOLQJFRQWDFWRU
GHFRXSOLQJFRQWDFWRU
GHFRXSOLQJFRQWDFWRU
Circuit Examples
9-23
Circuit Examples

9-24 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
General Technical Data 10
10.1 Menu Structure 10-2
10.2 Transport and Storage Conditions 10-4
10.3 Technical Data 10-5
10.3.1 Selection and Ordering Data 10-5
10.3.2 Technical Data Power Unit 10-12
10.3.3 Technical Data Control Unit 10-16
10.3.4 Conductor Cross-Sections 10-19
10.3.5 Electromagnetic Compatibility 10-20
10.3.6 Utilization Classes 10-20
10.3.7 Branch Component Layout (Standard Circuit) 10-21
10.3.8 Branch Component Layout (Inside Delta Circuit) 10-26
10.3.9 Accessories 10-27
10.3.10 Spare parts 10-28
10.4 Tripping Characteristics 10-29
10.4.1 Motor Protection Tripping Characteristics: 3RW44 with Symmetry 10-29
10.4.2 Motor Protection Tripping Characteristics: 3RW44 with Asymmetry 10-29
10.5 Dimension Drawings 10-30

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 10-1
General Technical Data
10.1 Menu Structure

Display measured value Status display Settings
Factory Customer Factory Customer
ESC OK ESC OK ESC OK Settings Settings Settings Settings
Phase voltages Device status Parameter set 1 Outputs
UL1N Active parameter set Motor 1 Output 1 - Action
UL2N Parameter set 1 Depends on No action
UL3N Parameter set 2 Rated operating current Ie order PIO output 1
Phase-to-phase voltages Parameter set 3 number PIO output 2
UL1-L2 Type of connection Rated operating torque 0 Input 1
UL2-L3 Unknown/faulty Rated operating speed 1,500 Input 2
UL3-L1 Star/delta Copy motor data to PS2 + 3 Input 3
Blocking voltages Inside delta Starting settings Input 4
ULT1 Direction of rotation Starting mode Run up
ULT2 Unknown Voltage ramp Operation / bypass
ULT3 Clockwise Voltage ramp + current Coasting down
x
Phase currents Counter-clockwise limiting On-time motor x
IL1 Inputs Torque control Command motor-on
IL2 Status - Inputs Torque control + current DC braking contactor
limiting
IL3 Input 1 - Action Group warning
Direct on line
Power No action Group error
Motor heating
Line frequency Manual operation Bus error
local Start voltage 30 %
Supply voltage Device errors
Emergency start Start torque 10 %
Heatsink temperature Power on
Slow speed Limiting torque 150 %
Motor heat build-up Ready to start
Quick stop Starting time 10 s
Remaining time for tripping Output 2 - Action [...] No Action
Trip reset Maximum starting time 0/
Switch off standard display Output 3 - Action [...] No Action
deactivated
Motor right PS1 Motor protection
Current limiting value 400 %
Motor left PS1 ** Tripping class
Breakaway voltage 40 %
Motor right PS2 None
Breakaway time 0 ms
Motor left PS2 ** CLASS 5 (10a)
Motor thermal capacity 20 %
Motor right PS3 CLASS 10 x
Stopping settings
Motor left PS3 ** CLASS 15
Stopping mode
Input 2 - Action [...] CLASS 20
Coasting down x
Input 3 - Action [...] CLASS 30
Torque control
Input 4 - Action [...] Current asymmetry limit value 40 %
Pump stop
Outputs Prewarning limit tripping reserve 0s
DC braking
Status - Outputs Prewarning limit motor heat
Combined braking 80 %
Output 1 - Action build-up
Stopping time 10 s
No action Idle time 0s
Stopping torque 10 %
PIO output 1 Pre-charge time 60 s
Dynamic braking torque 50 %
PIO output 2 Protection against voltage failure
DC braking torque 50 %
Input 1 No
Slow speed parameters
Input 2 Yes x
Slow speed factor right 7
Input 3 Temperature sensor
Slow speed torque right 50 %
Input 4 Deactivated x
Slow speed factor left 7
Run up Thermo click
Slow speed torque left 50 %
Bypass operation PTC-type A
Current limit values
Coasting down Display settings
Minimum current limit value 18.75 %
On-time motor Language
Maximum current limit value 112.50 %
Command motor-on English x
Parameter set 2 [...]
DC braking contactor Deutsch
Parameter set 3 [...]
Group warning Français
Inputs
Group error Español
Input 1 - Action
Bus error Italiano
No action
Device errors Português
Manual operation local
Power on Nederlands
Emergency start
Ready to start ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ
Slow speed
Output 2 - Action [...] Türkçe
Quickstop
Output 3 - Action [...] Ɋɭɫɫɤɢɣ
Trip Reset
Output 4 - Action [...] Ё᭛
Motor right PS1 x
Order number Contrast 50 %
Motor left PS1 **
Firmware information Lighting
Motor right PS2
Version Brightness
Motor left PS2 **
Date Lighting on x
Motor right PS3
Off with time delay
Motor left PS3 **
Lighting off
Input 2 - Action [...] No Action
Response to fault
Input 3 - Action [...] No Action
Unchanged
Input 4 - Action [...] Trip Reset
On
** Possible only in connection with creep speed Blinking
Flickering x

10-2 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Motor control Statistics Safety

Factory Customer Factory Customer
Settings Settings ESC OK ESC OK ESC OK
Settings Settings
Response to warning Motor control via keys Log lists Enter user code 1000
Unchanged Key control Device errors User level
On activate Trips Customer read (> 1000)
Blinking x deactivate Events Customer write (1000)
Flickering Select parameter set Maximum pointer
Reaction time keys 60 % Parameter set 1 Currents (%)
Auto repeat Parameter set 2 Phase current L1 min
Time 80 ms Parameter set 3 Phase current L2 min
Speed 80 % Execute control function Phase current L3 min
Activity monitoring time 30 s Motor right Phase current L1 max
Response to ... Motor left ** Phase current L2 max
Overload - therm. motor model Slow speed Phase current L3 max
Tripping without restart x Emergency start Currents (rms)
Tripping with restart Output 1 Phase current L1 min
Warning Output 2 Phase current L2 min
Overload - temperature sensor Control motor via inputs Phase current L3 min
Tripping without restart x Control via inputs Phase current L1 max
Tripping with restart activate Phase current L2 max
Warning deactivate Phase current L3 max
Current limit value violation Standard control Phase-to-phase voltages
Warning x Automatic / None UL1 - L2 min (rms)
Tripping Inputs UL2 - L3 min (rms)
Overload - contact block Keys UL3 - L1 min (rms)
Tripping without restart x UL1 - L2 max (rms)
Tripping with restart UL2 - L3 max (rms)
Asymmetry UL3 - L1 max (rms)
Warning Maximum tripping current IA (%)
Tripping x Maximum tripping current IA (rms)
Ground fault Number of overload trips
Warning x Minimum line frequency
Tripping Maximum line frequency
Name Max. cooling temperature
Name Max. contact block temperature
Fieldbus Reset all maximum pointers
Fieldbus interface Statistics data
Off x Motor current Imax (%)
On Motor current Imax (rms)
Group diagnosis Last trigger current IA (%)
Disable x Last trigger current IA (rms)
Enable Operating hours - device
Behavior on CPU/master-stop Operating hours - motor
Substitute value x No. of starts motor right
Hold last value No. of starts motor left
Station address 126 Number of overload trips
Baud rate Number of braking stops
Substitute value No. of starts output 1
Motor right No. of starts output 2
Motor left No. of starts output 3
Slow speed No. of starts output 4
Emergency start
Output 1
Output 2
Parameter set 1
Parameter set 2
Parameter set 3
Lock quickstop
Parameters disabled CPU/Master
Off x
On
Saving options
Save settings
Restore settings
Restore basic factory settings
** Possible only in connection with creep speed

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 10-3
10.2 Transport and Storage Conditions

Transport and storage conditions
The soft starters comply with the requirements of DIN IEC 721-3-1/HD478.3.1 P1 for
transport and storage conditions. The following data apply to modules that are
transported and stored in their original packing.
Type of condition Permissible range
Temperature From -25 °C to +80 °C
Atmospheric pressure From 700 to 1,060 hPa
Relative humidity From 10 to 95 %

10-4 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
10.3 Technical Data

10.3.1 Selection and Ordering Data
Normal starting (CLASS 10) in a standard circuit

Ambient temperature 40 °C Ambient temperature 50 °C
Rated Rated Rated
Rated output of three-phase induction motors Rated output of three-phase induction
operational operating operating Order No.
for rated operational voltage Ue motors for rated operational voltage Ue
voltage Ue current Ie current Ie
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
V A kW kW kW kW A HP HP HP HP
29 5.5 15 — — 26 7.5 7.5 15 — 3RW44 22-@BC@4
36 7.5 18.5 — — 32 10 10 20 — 3RW44 23-@BC@4
47 11 22 — — 42 10 15 25 — 3RW44 24-@BC@4
200 ... 460
57 15 30 — — 51 15 15 30 — 3RW44 25-@BC@4
77 18.5 37 — — 68 20 20 50 — 3RW44 26-@BC@4
93 22 45 — — 82 25 25 60 — 3RW44 27-@BC@4
29 — 15 18.5 — 26 — — 15 20 3RW44 22-@BC@5
36 — 18.5 22 — 32 — — 20 25 3RW44 23-@BC@5
47 — 22 30 — 42 — — 25 30 3RW44 24-@BC@5
400 ...600
57 — 30 37 — 51 — — 30 40 3RW44 25-@BC@5
77 — 37 45 — 68 — — 50 50 3RW44 26-@BC@5
93 — 45 55 — 82 — — 60 75 3RW44 27-@BC@5
29 — 15 18.5 30 26 — — 15 20 3RW44 22-@BC@6
36 — 18.5 22 37 32 — — 20 25 3RW44 23-@BC@6
47 — 22 30 45 42 — — 25 30 3RW44 24-@BC@6
400 ... 690
57 — 30 37 55 51 — — 30 40 3RW44 25-@BC@6
77 — 37 45 75 68 — — 50 50 3RW44 26-@BC@6
93 — 45 55 90 82 — — 60 75 3RW44 27-@BC@6
Order No. supplement for type of connection

Screw-type terminals 1
Spring-type terminals 3
113 30 55 — — 100 30 30 75 — 3RW44 34-@BC@4
134 37 75 — — 117 30 40 75 — 3RW44 35-@BC@4
162 45 90 — — 145 40 50 100 — 3RW44 36-@BC@4
203 55 110 — — 180 50 60 125 — 3RW44 43-@BC@4
250 75 132 — — 215 60 75 150 — 3RW44 44-@BC@4
313 90 160 — — 280 75 100 200 — 3RW44 45-@BC@4
356 110 200 — — 315 100 125 250 — 3RW44 46-@BC@4
432 132 250 — — 385 125 150 300 — 3RW44 47-@BC@4
200 ... 460
551 160 315 — — 494 150 200 400 — 3RW44 53-@BC@4
615 200 355 — — 551 150 200 450 — 3RW44 54-@BC@4
693 200 400 — — 615 200 250 500 — 3RW44 55-@BC@4
780 250 450 — — 693 200 250 600 — 3RW44 56-@BC@4
880 250 500 — — 780 250 300 700 — 3RW44 57-@BC@4
970 315 560 — — 850 300 350 750 — 3RW44 58-@BC@4
1076 355 630 — — 970 350 400 850 — 3RW44 65-@BC@4
1214 400 710 — — 1076 350 450 950 — 3RW44 66-@BC@4
113 — 55 75 — 100 — — 75 75 3RW44 34-@BC@5
134 — 75 90 — 117 — — 75 100 3RW44 35-@BC@5
162 — 90 110 — 145 — — 100 125 3RW44 36-@BC@5
203 — 110 132 — 180 — — 125 150 3RW44 43-@BC@5
250 — 132 160 — 215 — — 150 200 3RW44 44-@BC@5
313 — 160 200 — 280 — — 200 250 3RW44 45-@BC@5
356 — 200 250 — 315 — — 250 300 3RW44 46-@BC@5
432 — 250 315 — 385 — — 300 400 3RW44 47-@BC@5
400 ... 600
551 — 315 355 — 494 — — 400 500 3RW44 53-@BC@5
615 — 355 400 — 551 — — 450 600 3RW44 54-@BC@5
693 — 400 500 — 615 — — 500 700 3RW44 55-@BC@5
780 — 450 560 — 693 — — 600 750 3RW44 56-@BC@5
880 — 500 630 — 780 — — 700 850 3RW44 57-@BC@5
970 — 560 710 — 850 — — 750 900 3RW44 58-@BC@5
1076 — 630 800 — 970 — — 850 1100 3RW44 65-@BC@5
1214 — 710 900 — 1076 — — 950 1200 3RW44 66-@BC@5
Order No. supplement for type of connection Screw-type terminals 6
115 V AC 3
Order No. supplement for rated control supply voltage Us 230 V AC 4

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 10-5

Rated Rated Rated
Rated output of three-phase induction motors Rated output of three-phase induction
for rated operational voltage Ue motors for rated operational voltage Ue
113 — 55 75 110 100 — — 75 75 3RW44 34-@BC@6
134 — 75 90 132 117 — — 75 100 3RW44 35-@BC@6
162 — 90 110 160 145 — — 100 125 3RW44 36-@BC@6
203 — 110 132 200 180 — — 125 150 3RW44 43-@BC@6
250 — 132 160 250 215 — — 150 200 3RW44 44-@BC@6
313 — 160 200 315 280 — — 200 250 3RW44 45-@BC@6
356 — 200 250 355 315 — — 250 300 3RW44 46-@BC@6
432 — 250 315 400 385 — — 300 400 3RW44 47-@BC@6
400 ... 690
551 — 315 355 560 494 — — 400 500 3RW44 53-@BC@6
615 — 355 400 630 551 — — 450 600 3RW44 54-@BC@6
693 — 400 500 710 615 — — 500 700 3RW44 55-@BC@6
780 — 450 560 800 693 — — 600 750 3RW44 56-@BC@6
880 — 500 630 900 780 — — 700 850 3RW44 57-@BC@6
970 — 560 710 1000 850 — — 750 900 3RW44 58-@BC@6
1076 — 630 800 1100 970 — — 850 1100 3RW44 65-@BC@6
1214 — 710 900 1200 1076 — — 950 1200 3RW44 66-@BC@6
Order No. supplement for type of connection Spring-type terminals 2

230 V AC 4

10-6 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Heavy starting (CLASS 20) in a standard circuit

Rated Rated Rated
Rated output of three-phase induction Rated output of three-phase induction
motors for rated operational voltage Ue motors for rated operational voltage Ue
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
29 5.5 15 — — 26 7.5 7.5 15 — 3RW44 22-@BC@4
36 7.5 18.5 — — 32 10 10 20 — 3RW44 23-@BC@4
200 ... 460 47 11 22 — — 42 10 15 25 — 3RW44 24-@BC@4
57 15 30 — — 51 15 15 30 — 3RW44 25-@BC@4
77 18.5 37 — — 68 20 20 50 — 3RW44 27-@BC@4
29 — 15 18.5 — 26 — — 15 20 3RW44 22-@BC@5
36 — 18.5 22 — 32 — — 20 25 3RW44 23-@BC@5
400 ...600 47 — 22 30 — 42 — — 25 30 3RW44 24-@BC@5
57 — 30 37 — 51 — — 30 40 3RW44 25-@BC@5
77 — 37 45 — 68 — — 50 50 3RW44 27-@BC@5
29 — 15 18.5 30 26 — — 15 20 3RW44 22-@BC@6
36 — 18.5 22 37 32 — — 20 25 3RW44 23-@BC@6
400 ... 690 47 — 22 30 45 42 — — 25 30 3RW44 24-@BC@6
57 — 30 37 55 51 — — 30 40 3RW44 25-@BC@6
77 — 37 45 75 68 — — 50 50 3RW44 27-@BC@6

93 22 45 — — 82 25 25 60 — 3RW44 34-@BC@4
113 30 55 — — 100 30 30 75 — 3RW44 35-@BC@4
134 37 75 — — 117 30 40 75 — 3RW44 36-@BC@4
162 45 90 — — 145 40 50 100 — 3RW44 43-@BC@4
203 55 110 — — 180 50 60 125 — 3RW44 45-@BC@4
250 75 132 — — 215 60 75 150 — 3RW44 46-@BC@4
313 90 160 — — 280 75 100 200 — 3RW44 47-@BC@4
200 ... 460 356 110 200 — — 315 100 125 250 — 3RW44 47-@BC@4
432 132 250 — — 385 125 150 300 — 3RW44 53-@BC@4
551 160 315 — — 494 150 200 400 — 3RW44 53-@BC@4
615 200 355 — — 551 150 200 450 — 3RW44 55-@BC@4
693 200 400 — — 615 200 250 500 — 3RW44 57-@BC@4
780 250 450 — — 693 200 250 600 — 3RW44 65-@BC@4
880 250 500 — — 780 250 300 700 — 3RW44 65-@BC@4
970 315 560 — — 850 300 350 750 — 3RW44 65-@BC@4
93 — 45 55 — 82 — — 60 75 3RW44 34-@BC@5
113 — 55 75 — 100 — — 75 75 3RW44 35-@BC@5
134 — 75 90 — 117 — — 75 100 3RW44 36-@BC@5
162 — 90 110 — 145 — — 100 125 3RW44 43-@BC@5
203 — 110 132 — 180 — — 125 150 3RW44 45-@BC@5
250 — 132 160 — 215 — — 150 200 3RW44 46-@BC@5
313 — 160 200 — 280 — — 200 250 3RW44 47-@BC@5
400 ... 600 356 — 200 250 — 315 — — 250 300 3RW44 47-@BC@5
432 — 250 315 — 385 — — 300 400 3RW44 53-@BC@5
551 — 315 355 — 494 — — 400 500 3RW44 53-@BC@5
615 — 355 400 — 551 — — 450 600 3RW44 54-@BC@5
693 — 400 500 — 615 — — 500 700 3RW44 57-@BC@5
780 — 450 560 — 693 — — 600 750 3RW44 55-@BC@5
880 — 500 630 — 780 — — 700 850 3RW44 65-@BC@5
970 — 560 710 — 850 — — 750 950 3RW44 65-@BC@5
93 — 45 55 90 82 — — 60 75 3RW44 34-@BC@6
113 — 55 75 110 100 — — 75 75 3RW44 35-@BC@6
134 — 75 90 132 117 — — 75 100 3RW44 36-@BC@6
162 — 90 110 160 145 — — 100 125 3RW44 43-@BC@6
203 — 110 132 200 180 — — 125 150 3RW44 45-@BC@6
250 — 132 160 250 215 — — 150 200 3RW44 46-@BC@6
313 — 160 200 315 280 — — 200 250 3RW44 47-@BC@6
400 ... 690 356 — 200 250 355 315 — — 250 300 3RW44 47-@BC@6
432 — 250 315 400 385 — — 300 400 3RW44 53-@BC@6
551 — 315 355 560 494 — — 400 500 3RW44 53-@BC@6
615 — 355 400 630 551 — — 450 600 3RW44 55-@BC@6
693 — 400 500 710 615 — — 500 700 3RW44 57-@BC@6
780 — 450 560 800 693 — — 600 750 3RW44 65-@BC@6
880 — 500 630 900 780 — — 700 850 3RW44 65-@BC@6
970 — 560 710 1000 850 — — 750 950 3RW44 65-@BC@6

230 V AC 4

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 10-7
Very heavy starting (CLASS 30) in a standard circuit

Rated Rated Rated
operational operating Rated output of three-phase induction motors operating Rated output of three-phase induction Order No.
voltage Ue current Ie for rated operational voltage Ue current Ie motors for rated operational voltage Ue
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
29 5.5 15 — — 26 7.5 7.5 15 — 3RW44 22-@BC@4
36 7.5 18.5 — — 32 10 10 20 — 3RW44 24-@BC@4
200 ... 460
47 11 22 — — 42 10 15 25 — 3RW44 25-@BC@4
57 15 30 — — 51 15 15 30 — 3RW44 25-@BC@4
29 — 15 18.5 — 26 — — 15 20 3RW44 22-@BC@5
36 — 18.5 22 — 32 — — 20 25 3RW44 24-@BC@5
400 ...600
47 — 22 30 — 42 — — 25 30 3RW44 25-@BC@5
57 — 30 37 — 51 — — 30 40 3RW44 25-@BC@5
29 — 15 18.5 30 26 — — 15 20 3RW44 22-@BC@6
36 — 18.5 22 37 32 — — 20 25 3RW44 24-@BC@6
400 ... 690
47 — 22 30 45 42 — — 25 30 3RW44 25-@BC@6
57 — 30 37 55 51 — — 30 40 3RW44 25-@BC@6

77 18,5 37 — — 68 20 20 50 — 3RW44 34-@BC@4
93 22 45 — — 82 25 25 60 — 3RW44 35-@BC@4
113 30 55 — — 100 30 30 75 — 3RW44 43-@BC@4
134 37 75 — — 117 30 40 75 — 3RW44 43-@BC@4
162 45 90 — — 145 40 50 100 — 3RW44 43-@BC@4
203 55 110 — — 180 50 60 125 — 3RW44 46-@BC@4
250 75 132 — — 215 60 75 150 — 3RW44 47-@BC@4
313 90 160 — — 280 75 100 200 — 3RW44 53-@BC@4
200 ... 460
356 110 200 — — 315 100 125 250 — 3RW44 53-@BC@4
432 132 250 — — 385 125 150 300 — 3RW44 53-@BC@4
551 160 315 — — 494 150 200 400 — 3RW44 55-@BC@4
615 200 355 — — 551 150 200 450 — 3RW44 58-@BC@4
693 200 400 — — 615 200 250 500 — 3RW44 65-@BC@4
780 250 450 — — 693 200 250 600 — 3RW44 65-@BC@4
880 250 500 — — 780 250 300 700 — 3RW44 65-@BC@4
970 315 560 — — 850 300 350 750 — 3RW44 66-@BC@4
77 — 37 45 — 68 — — 50 50 3RW44 34-@BC@5
93 — 45 55 — 82 — — 60 75 3RW44 35-@BC@5
113 — 55 75 — 100 — — 75 75 3RW44 43-@BC@5
134 — 75 90 — 117 — — 75 100 3RW44 43-@BC@5
162 — 90 110 — 145 — — 100 125 3RW44 43-@BC@5
203 — 110 132 — 180 — — 125 150 3RW44 46-@BC@5
250 — 132 160 — 215 — — 150 200 3RW44 47-@BC@5
313 — 160 200 — 280 — — 200 250 3RW44 53-@BC@5
400 ... 600
356 — 200 250 — 315 — — 250 300 3RW44 53-@BC@5
432 — 250 315 — 385 — — 300 400 3RW44 53-@BC@5
551 — 315 355 — 494 — — 400 500 3RW44 55-@BC@5
615 — 355 400 — 551 — — 450 600 3RW44 58-@BC@5
693 — 400 500 — 615 — — 500 700 3RW44 65-@BC@5
780 — 450 560 — 693 — — 600 750 3RW44 65-@BC@5
880 — 500 630 — 780 — — 700 850 3RW44 65-@BC@5
— — — — — 850 — — 750 900 3RW44 66-@BC@5
77 — 37 45 75 68 — — 50 50 3RW44 34-@BC@6
93 — 45 55 90 82 — — 60 75 3RW44 35-@BC@6
113 — 55 75 110 100 — — 75 75 3RW44 43-@BC@6
134 — 75 90 132 117 — — 75 100 3RW44 43-@BC@6
162 — 90 110 160 145 — — 100 125 3RW44 43-@BC@6
203 — 110 132 200 180 — — 125 150 3RW44 46-@BC@6
250 — 132 160 250 215 — — 150 200 3RW44 47-@BC@6
313 — 160 200 315 280 — — 200 250 3RW44 53-@BC@6
400 ... 690
356 — 200 250 355 315 — — 250 300 3RW44 53-@BC@6
432 — 250 315 400 385 — — 300 400 3RW44 53-@BC@6
551 — 315 355 560 494 — — 400 500 3RW44 55-@BC@6
615 — 355 400 630 551 — — 450 600 3RW44 58-@BC@6
693 — 400 500 710 615 — — 500 700 3RW44 65-@BC@6
780 — 450 560 800 693 — — 600 750 3RW44 65-@BC@6
880 — 500 630 900 780 — — 700 850 3RW44 65-@BC@6
— — — — — 850 — — 750 900 3RW44 66-@BC@6
115 V AC 3

10-8 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Normal starting (CLASS 10) in an inside delta circuit

Rated Rated Rated
operational operating Rated output of three-phase induction operating Rated output of three-phase induction Order No.
voltage Ue current Ie motors for rated operational voltage Ue current Ie motors for rated operational voltage Ue
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
50 15 22 — — 45 10 15 30 — 3RW44 22-@BC@4
62 18.5 30 — — 55 15 20 40 — 3RW44 23-@BC@4
81 22 45 — — 73 20 25 50 — 3RW44 24-@BC@4
200 ... 460
99 30 55 — — 88 25 30 60 — 3RW44 25-@BC@4
133 37 75 — — 118 30 40 75 — 3RW44 26-@BC@4
161 45 90 — — 142 40 50 100 — 3RW44 27-@BC@4
50 — 22 30 — 45 — — 30 40 3RW44 22-@BC@5
62 — 30 37 — 55 — — 40 50 3RW44 23-@BC@5
81 — 45 45 — 73 — — 50 60 3RW44 24-@BC@5
400 ... 600
99 — 55 55 — 88 — — 60 75 3RW44 25-@BC@5
133 — 75 90 — 118 — — 75 100 3RW44 26-@BC@5
161 — 90 110 — 142 — — 100 125 3RW44 27-@BC@5

196 55 110 — — 173 50 60 125 — 3RW44 34-@BC@4
232 75 132 — — 203 60 75 150 — 3RW44 35-@BC@4
281 90 160 — — 251 75 100 200 — 3RW44 36-@BC@4
352 110 200 — — 312 100 125 250 — 3RW44 43-@BC@4
433 132 250 — — 372 125 150 300 — 3RW44 44-@BC@4
542 160 315 — — 485 150 200 400 — 3RW44 45-@BC@4
617 200 355 — — 546 150 200 450 — 3RW44 46-@BC@4
748 250 400 — — 667 200 250 600 — 3RW44 47-@BC@4
200 ... 460
954 315 560 — — 856 300 350 750 — 3RW44 53-@BC@4
1065 355 630 — — 954 350 400 850 — 3RW44 54-@BC@4
1200 400 710 — — 1065 350 450 950 — 3RW44 55-@BC@4
1351 450 800 — — 1200 450 500 1050 — 3RW44 56-@BC@4
1524 500 900 — — 1351 450 600 1200 — 3RW44 57-@BC@4
1680 560 1000 — — 1472 550 650 1300 — 3RW44 58-@BC@4
1864 630 1100 — — 1680 650 750 1500 — 3RW44 65-@BC@4
2103 710 1200 — — 1864 700 850 1700 — 3RW44 66-@BC@4
196 — 110 132 — 173 — — 125 150 3RW44 34-@BC@5
232 — 132 160 — 203 — — 150 200 3RW44 35-@BC@5
281 — 160 200 — 251 — — 200 250 3RW44 36-@BC@5
352 — 200 250 — 312 — — 250 300 3RW44 43-@BC@5
433 — 250 315 — 372 — — 300 350 3RW44 44-@BC@5
542 — 315 355 — 485 — — 400 500 3RW44 45-@BC@5
617 — 355 450 — 546 — — 450 600 3RW44 46-@BC@5
748 — 400 500 — 667 — — 600 750 3RW44 47-@BC@5
400 ... 600
954 — 560 630 — 856 — — 750 950 3RW44 53-@BC@5
1065 — 630 710 — 954 — — 850 1050 3RW44 54-@BC@5
1200 — 710 800 — 1065 — — 950 1200 3RW44 55-@BC@5
1351 — 800 900 — 1200 — — 1050 1350 3RW44 56-@BC@5
1524 — 900 1000 — 1351 — — 1200 1500 3RW44 57-@BC@5
1680 — 1000 1200 — 1472 — — 1300 1650 3RW44 58-@BC@5
1864 — 1100 1350 — 1680 — — 1500 1900 3RW44 65-@BC@5
2103 — 1200 1500 — 1864 — — 1700 2100 3RW44 66-@BC@5

230 V AC 4

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 10-9
Heavy starting (CLASS 20) in an inside delta circuit

Rated Rated Rated
operational operating Rated output of three-phase induction operating Rated output of three-phase induction motors Order No.
voltage Ue current Ie motors for rated operational voltage Ue current Ie for rated operational voltage Ue
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
50 15 22 — — 45 10 15 30 — 3RW44 23-@BC@4
62 18.5 30 — — 55 15 20 40 — 3RW44 24-@BC@4
200 ... 460 81 22 45 — — 73 20 25 50 — 3RW44 25-@BC@4
99 30 55 — — 88 25 30 60 — 3RW44 25-@BC@4
133 37 75 — — 118 30 40 75 — 3RW44 27-@BC@4
50 — 22 30 — 45 — — 30 40 3RW44 23-@BC@5
62 — 30 37 — 55 — — 40 50 3RW44 24-@BC@5
400 ... 600 81 — 45 45 — 73 — — 50 60 3RW44 25-@BC@5
99 — 55 55 — 88 — — 60 75 3RW44 25-@BC@5
133 — 75 90 — 118 — — 75 100 3RW44 27-@BC@5
161 45 90 — — 142 40 50 100 — 3RW44 34-@BC@4
196 55 110 — — 173 50 60 125 — 3RW44 35-@BC@4
232 75 132 — — 203 60 75 150 — 3RW44 36-@BC@4
281 90 160 — — 251 75 100 200 — 3RW44 43-@BC@4
352 110 200 — — 312 100 125 250 — 3RW44 44-@BC@4
433 132 250 — — 372 125 150 300 — 3RW44 45-@BC@4
542 160 315 — — 485 150 200 400 — 3RW44 47-@BC@4
617 200 355 — — 546 150 200 450 — 3RW44 47-@BC@4
200 ... 460
748 250 400 — — 667 200 250 600 — 3RW44 53-@BC@4
954 315 560 — — 856 300 350 750 — 3RW44 53-@BC@4
1065 355 630 — — 954 350 400 850 — 3RW44 55-@BC@4
1200 400 710 — — 1065 350 450 950 — 3RW44 57-@BC@4
1351 450 800 — — 1200 450 500 1050 — 3RW44 65-@BC@4
1524 500 900 — — 1351 450 600 1200 — 3RW44 65-@BC@4
1680 560 1000 — — 1472 550 650 1300 — 3RW44 65-@BC@4
— — — — — 1680 650 750 1500 — 3RW44 66-@BC@4
161 — 90 110 — 142 — — 100 125 3RW44 34-@BC@5
196 — 110 132 — 173 — — 125 150 3RW44 35-@BC@5
232 — 132 160 — 203 — — 150 200 3RW44 36-@BC@5
281 — 160 200 — 251 — — 200 250 3RW44 43-@BC@5
352 — 200 250 — 312 — — 250 300 3RW44 44-@BC@5
433 — 250 315 — 372 — — 300 350 3RW44 45-@BC@5
542 — 315 355 — 485 — — 400 500 3RW44 47-@BC@5
617 — 355 450 — 546 — — 450 600 3RW44 47-@BC@5
400 ... 600
748 — 400 500 — 667 — — 600 750 3RW44 53-@BC@5
954 — 560 630 — 856 — — 750 950 3RW44 53-@BC@5
1065 — 630 710 — 954 — — 850 1050 3RW44 55-@BC@5
1200 — 710 800 — 1065 — — 950 1200 3RW44 57-@BC@5
1351 — 800 900 — 1200 — — 1050 1350 3RW44 65-@BC@5
1524 — 900 1000 — 1351 — — 1200 1500 3RW44 65-@BC@5
1680 — 1000 1200 — 1472 — — 1300 1650 3RW44 65-@BC@5
— — — — — 1680 — — 1500 1900 3RW44 66-@BC@5
115 V AC 3

10-10 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Very heavy starting (CLASS 30) in an inside delta circuit

Rated Rated Rated
operational operating Rated output of three-phase induction motors operating Rated output of three-phase induction Order No.
voltage Ue current Ie for rated operational voltage Ue current Ie motors for rated operational voltage Ue
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
50 15 22 — — 45 10 15 30 — 3RW44 23-@BC@4
62 18.5 30 — — 55 15 20 40 — 3RW44 24-@BC@4
200 ... 460 81 22 45 — — 73 20 25 50 — 3RW44 25-@BC@4
99 30 55 — — 88 25 30 60 — 3RW44 25-@BC@4
133 37 75 — — 118 30 40 75 — 3RW44 27-@BC@4
50 — 22 30 — 45 — — 30 40 3RW44 23-@BC@5
62 — 30 37 — 55 — — 40 50 3RW44 24-@BC@5
400 ... 600 81 — 45 45 — 73 — — 50 60 3RW44 25-@BC@5
99 — 55 55 — 88 — — 60 75 3RW44 25-@BC@5
133 — 75 90 — 118 — — 75 100 3RW44 27-@BC@5

161 45 90 — — 142 40 50 100 — 3RW44 35-@BC@4
196 55 110 — — 173 50 60 125 — 3RW44 36-@BC@4
232 75 132 — — 203 60 75 150 — 3RW44 43-@BC@4
281 90 160 — — 251 75 100 200 — 3RW44 43-@BC@4
352 110 200 — — 312 100 125 250 — 3RW44 45-@BC@4
433 132 250 — — 372 125 150 300 — 3RW44 47-@BC@4
542 160 315 — — 485 150 200 400 — 3RW44 53-@BC@4
200 ... 460 617 200 355 — — 546 150 200 450 — 3RW44 53-@BC@4
748 250 400 — — 667 200 250 600 — 3RW44 53-@BC@4
954 315 560 — — 856 300 350 750 — 3RW44 55-@BC@4
1065 355 630 — — 954 350 400 850 — 3RW44 58-@BC@4
1200 400 710 — — 1065 350 450 950 — 3RW44 65-@BC@4
1351 450 800 — — 1200 450 500 1050 — 3RW44 65-@BC@4
1524 500 900 — — 1351 450 600 1200 — 3RW44 65-@BC@4
— — — — — 1472 550 650 1300 — 3RW44 66-@BC@4
161 — 90 110 — 142 — — 100 125 3RW44 35-@BC@5
196 — 110 132 — 173 — — 125 150 3RW44 36-@BC@5
232 — 132 160 — 203 — — 150 200 3RW44 43-@BC@5
281 — 160 200 — 251 — — 200 250 3RW44 43-@BC@5
352 — 200 250 — 312 — — 250 300 3RW44 45-@BC@5
433 — 250 315 — 372 — — 300 350 3RW44 47-@BC@5
542 — 315 355 — 485 — — 400 500 3RW44 53-@BC@5
400 ... 600 617 — 355 450 — 546 — — 450 600 3RW44 53-@BC@5
748 — 400 500 — 667 — — 600 750 3RW44 53-@BC@5
954 — 560 630 — 856 — — 750 950 3RW44 55-@BC@5
1065 — 630 710 — 954 — — 850 1050 3RW44 58-@BC@5
1200 — 710 800 — 1065 — — 950 1200 3RW44 65-@BC@5
1351 — 800 900 — 1200 — — 1050 1350 3RW44 65-@BC@5
1524 — 900 1000 — 1351 — — 1200 1500 3RW44 65-@BC@5
— — — — — 1472 — — 1300 1650 3RW44 66-@BC@5
115 V AC 3
Marginal conditions
CLASS 10 (normal starting): CLASS 20 (heavy starting): CLASS 30 (very heavy starting):
Maximum starting time: 10 s 40 s 60 s
Current limiting 300 % Set to 350 % Set to 350 %
Starts/hour 5 max. 1 max. 1
General marginal conditions

On-time motor 30%
Stand-alone installation
Installation altitude max. 1,000 m / 3,280 ft
Ambient temperature kW: 40 °C / 1,104 °F hp: 50 °C / 122 °F
The motor outputs listed are only rough values. The dimensioning of the soft starter should always be carried out on the basis of the motor current (rated operating current). A model with a higher
output may be necessary for deviating conditions.
The motor output specifications are based on DIN 42973 (kW) and NEC 96/UL508 (hp).
For optimum dimensioning and/or deviations from the boundary conditions described, we recommend the use of the "Win Soft Starter" selection and simulation program, which can be
downloaded at: http://www.siemens.com/softstarter >Software

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 10-11
10.3.2 Technical Data Power Unit

Type 3RW44 ..-.BC.4 3RW44 ..-.BC.5 3RW44 ..-.BC.6
Power electronics
Rated operational voltage for standard circuit V 200 ... 460 AC 400 ... 600 AC 400 ... 690 AC
Tolerance % -15 / +10 -15 / +10 -15 / +10
Rated operational voltage for inside delta circuit V 200 ... 460 AC 400 ... 600 AC 400 ... 600 AC
Tolerance % -15 / +10 -15 / +10 -15 / +10
Maximum blocking voltage thyristor V 1400 1800 1800
Rated frequency Hz 50 ... 60
Tolerance % ±10
Continuous operation at 40 °C (% of Is) % 115
Minimum load (% of set motor current IM) % 8
Maximum cable length between soft starter and motor m 500 a)
Permissible installation height m 5000 (for derating above 1000, see characteristic curves); higher on request
Permissible mounting position
and installation type (stand-alone installation) 2 2 ,5 ° 2 2 ,5 ° ≥ 5 mm (≥ 0.2 in)
N S B 0 _ 0 0 6 4 9
9 0 ° 9 0 °
≥ 75 mm (≥ 3 in)
≥ 100 mm (≥ 4 in)
Permissible ambient temperature

Operation °C 0 ... +60; (derating above +40)
Storage °C -25 ... +80
Degree of protection IP00
a) During configuration, the voltage drop on the motor line must be taken into consideration up to the motor connection. It may be necessary to select a larger dimensioned soft starter with
regard to the rated operational voltage and/or the rated operating current.
Type 3RW44 22 3RW44 23 3RW44 24 3RW44 25 3RW44 26 3RW44 27
Power electronics
Rated operating current Ie 29 36 47 57 77 93
Carrying capacity, rated operating current Ie
• According to IEC and UL / CSA 1), for single mounting, AC-53a
- At 40 / 50 / 60 °C A 29 / 26 /23 36 /32 / 29 47 /42 / 37 57 / 51 / 45 77 / 68 / 59 93 / 82 / 72
Minimum selectable nominal motor current IM for motor overload protection A 5 7 9 11 15 18
Power loss
• Uninterrupted rated operating current after run up (40 / 50 / 60 °C) approx. W 8 / 7.5 / 7 10 / 9 / 8.5 32 / 31 / 29 36 / 34 / 31 45 / 41 / 37 55 / 51 / 47
• When starting with current limiting set at 350 % IM (40 / 50 / 60 °C) W 400 / 345 / 290 470 / 410 / 355 600 / 515 / 440 725 / 630 / 525 940 / 790 / 660 1160 / 980 / 830
Permitted rated motor current and starts per hour
• For normal starting (CLASS 5)
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 5 s A 29 / 26 / 23 36 / 32.5 / 29 47 / 42 / 37 57 / 51 / 45 77 / 68 / 59 93 / 82 / 72
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 41 34 41 41 41 41
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 10 s A 29 / 26 / 23 36 / 32.5 / 29 47 / 42 / 37 57 / 51 / 45 77 / 68 / 59 93 / 82 / 72
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 20 15 20 20 20 20
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 20 15 20 20 20 20
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 10 6 10 10 8 8
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 13 9 13 13 13 13
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 6 4 6 6 6 6
• For heavy starting (CLASS 20)
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 10 6 10 10 10 10
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 4 2 4 5 1.8 0.8
• For very heavy starting (CLASS 30)
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 6 4 6 6 6 6
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 1.8 0.8 3.3 1.5 2 1
1) Measurement at 60 °C not required according to UL/CSA.

2) Current limiting on soft starter set at 350 % IM; on-time OT = 70 %.
3) During intermittent duty S4 with on-time OT = 70 %, Tu = 40 / 50 / 60 °C, vertical stand-alone installation. The listed switching frequencies do not apply to automatic operation.
4) Maximum selectable rated motor current IM, depending on the CLASS settings.

10-12 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Type 3RW44 34 3RW44 35 3RW44 36

Power electronics
Rated operating current Ie 113 134 162
- At 40 °C A 113 134 162
- At 50 °C A 100 117 145
- At 60 °C A 88 100 125
Minimum selectable nominal motor current IM
For motor overload protection A 22 26 32
Power loss
• Uninterrupted rated operating current after run up (40 / 50 / 60 °C) approx. W 64 / 58 / 53 76 / 67 / 58 95 / 83 / 71
• When starting with current limiting set at 350 % IM (40 / 50 / 60 °C) W 1350 / 1140 / 970 1700 / 1400 / 1140 2460 / 1980 / 1620
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 5 s A 113 / 100 / 88 134 / 117 / 100 162 / 145 / 125
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 41 39 41
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 10 s A 113 / 100 / 88 134 / 117 / 100 162 / 145 / 125
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 1.5 2 1
3) During intermittent duty S4 with on-time OT = 70 %, Tu = 40/50/60 °C, vertical stand-alone installation. The listed switching frequencies do not apply to automatic operation.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 10-13
Type 3RW44 43 3RW44 44 3RW44 45 3RW44 46 3RW44 47
Power electronics
Rated operating current Ie 203 250 313 356 432
- At 40 °C A 203 250 313 356 432
- At 50 °C A 180 215 280 315 385
- At 60 °C A 156 185 250 280 335
Minimum selectable nominal motor current IM
For motor overload protection A 40 50 62 71 86
Power loss
• Uninterrupted rated operating current after run up (40 / 50 / 60 °C) approx. W 89 / 81 / 73 110 / 94 / 83 145 / 126 / 110 174 / 147 / 126 232 / 194 / 159
• When starting with current limiting set at 350 % IM (40 / 50 / 60 °C) W 3350 / 2600 / 2150 4000 / 2900 / 2350 4470 / 4000 / 3400 5350 / 4050 / 3500 5860 / 5020 / 4200
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 5 s A 203 / 180 / 156 250 / 215 / 185 313 / 280 / 250 356 / 315 / 280 432 / 385 / 335
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 41 41 41 41 39
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 10 s A 203 / 180 / 156 250 / 215 / 185 313 / 280 / 250 356 / 315 / 280 432 / 385 / 335
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 20 20 19 17 16
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 20 20 19 17 16
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 9 10 6 4 5
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 13 13 10 13 11
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 10 10 10 10 10
2) 4)
- Rated motor current IM , run-up time 40 s A 195 / 175 / 155 215 / 195 / 180 275 / 243 / 221 285 / 263 / 240 356 / 326 / 295
- Rated motor current IM 2) 4), run-up time 60 s A 162 / 148 / 134 180 / 165 / 150 220 / 201 / 182 240 / 223 / 202 285 / 260 / 235
3) During intermittent duty S4 with on-time OT = 70 %, Tu = 40/50/60 °C, vertical stand-alone installation. The listed switching frequencies do not apply to automatic operation.

10-14 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Type 3RW44 53 3RW44 54 3RW44 55 3RW44 56 3RW44 57 3RW44 58 3RW44 65 3RW44 66

Power electronics
• According to IEC and UL / CSA 1), for single mounting, AC-53a, at 40 °C A 551 615 693 780 880 970 1076 1214
Minimum selectable nominal motor current IM for motor overload protection A 110 123 138 156 176 194 215 242
Power loss
• Uninterrupted rated operating current after run up (40 °C) approx. W 159 186 220 214 250 270 510 630
• When starting with current limiting set at 350 % IM (40 °C) W 7020 8100 9500 11100 13100 15000 15000 17500
- Rated motor current IM2), run-up time 5 s, at 40 °C A 551 615 693 780 880 970 1076 1214
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 41 41 37 33 22 17 30 20
- Rated motor current IM2) 4), run-up time 10 s, at 40 °C A 551 615 693 780 880 970 1076 1214
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 20 20 16 13 8 5 10 6
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 20 20 16 13 8 5 11 6
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 10 9 6 4 0.3 0.3 3 0.5
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 13 13 11 9 8 8 7 5
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 6 4 3 1 0.4 0.5 1 1
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 10 10 7 8 8 9 7 5
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 4 2 1 1 0.4 1 1 1
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
- Starts per hour3) 1/h 2 1 1 1 1.5 1 1 1
1) Measurement at 60 °C not required according to UL / CSA.
3) During intermittent duty S4 with on-time OT = 70 %, Tu = 40 / 50 / 60 °C, vertical stand-alone installation. The listed switching frequencies do not apply to automatic operation.
4) Maximum selectable rated motor current IM, depending on theCLASS settings.
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 10-15
10.3.3 Technical Data Control Unit
Type 3RW44 ..-.BC3. 3RW44 ..-.BC4.

Terminal
Control unit
Rated values
Rated control supply voltage A1 / A2 / PE V 115 AC 230 AC
• Tolerance % -15 / +10 -15 / +10
Rated control supply current STANDBY mA 30 20
Rated control supply current ON
• 3RW44 2. mA 300 170
• 3RW44 3. mA 500 250
• 3RW44 4. mA 750 400
• 3RW44 5. mA 450 200
• 3RW44 6. mA 650 300
Maximum current (pickup bypass)
• 3RW44 2. mA 1000 500
• 3RW44 3. mA 2500 1250
• 3RW44 4. mA 6000 3000
• 3RW44 5. mA 4500 2500
• 3RW44 6. mA 4500 2500
Rated frequency Hz 50 ... 60 50 ... 60
• Tolerance % ±10 ±10
Type 3RW44 ..
Control unit Terminal Factory setting
Control inputs
Input 1 IN1 Start motor right parameter set 1
Input 2 IN2 No Action
Input 3 IN3 No Action
Input 4 IN4 Trip Reset
Supply L+ / L-
• Rated operating current mA Approx. 10 per input according to DIN 19240
Internal voltage: 24 V DC from internal supply
via terminal L+ to IN1 ... IN4. Maximum load at
• Rated operational voltage L+ L+ approx. 55 mA
External voltage: DC externalvoltage
(according to DIN 19240) via terminals L- and
IN1 ... IN4
L- (min. 12 V DC, max. 30 V DC)
Thermistor motor protection input
Input T1/T2 PTC type A or Thermo click deactivated
Relay outputs (floating auxiliary contacts)
Output 1 13/14 On-time motor
Output 2 23/24 No Action
Output 3 33/34 No Action
Output 4 95/96/98 Group error
Switching capacity of the relay outputs
230 V / AC-15 A 3 at 240 V
24 V / DC-13 A 1 at 24 V
Overvoltage protection Protection using varistor via relaycontact
4 A utilization category gL/gG;
Short-circuit protection 6 A quick (fuse not included in scope of delivery)
Protective functions
Motor protection functions
Tripping when motor is thermally overloaded
Tripping class according to IEC 60947-4-1 CLASS 5 / 10 / 15 / 20 / 30 10
Phase loss sensitivity % >40
Overload warning Yes
Reset and recovery Manual / automatic Manual
Reset option after trip Manual / automatic Manual
Pre-charge time Min. 1 ... 30 1
Device protection functions
Tripping when thyristors thermally overloaded
Reset option after trip Manual / automatic Manual
Pre-charge time Min. 0.5
Bypass protection functions
Tripping when bypass contacts thermally overloaded
Reset option after trip Manual
Pre-charge time Min. 1

10-16 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Type 3RW44 .. Factory setting

Control times and parameters
Control times
Switch-on delay (when control voltage applied) ms < 50
Switch-on delay (automatic operation) ms < 4000
Pre-charge time (ON command with active stopping mode) ms < 100
Network failure bridging time
Control supply voltage ms 100
Network failure reaction time
Load circuit ms 100
Reclosing lockout after overload trip
Motor protection tripping Min. 1 ... 30 1
Device protection tripping s 30
Setting options for starting
Voltage ramp start voltage % 20 ... 100 30
Start torque control % 10 ... 100 10
Limiting torque control % 20 ... 200 150
Starting time s 0 ... 360 20
Maximum starting time s 1 ... 1000 deactivated
Current limiting value % 125 ... 550 1) 450
Breakaway voltage % 40 ... 100 80
Breakaway time s 0 ... 2 deactivated
Motor thermal capacity % 1 ... 100 20
Slow speed mode counter-clockwise / clockwise
Speed factor in relation to nominal operating speed (n = nnominal/factor) 3 ... 21 7
Slow speed torque 2) % 20 ... 100 50
Setting options for stopping
Stopping torque control % 10 ... 100 10
Stopping time s 0 ... 360 10
Dynamic braking torque % 20 ... 100 50
DC braking torque % 20 ... 100 50
Operating messages Checking voltage
Checking line phases
Ready to start
Start mode active
Motor running
Stopping mode active
Emergency start active
Warnings / error messages No line voltage
Phase angle control failure
Phase loss
• L1 / L2 / L3
Missing load phase
• T1 / T2 / T3
Failure
• Switching element 1 (thyristor) / switching element 2 (thyristor) / switching
Flash memory error
Supply voltage
• below 75 %
• below 85 %
• above 110 %
Current unbalance exceeded
Thermal motor model overload
Prewarning limit exceeded
• Motor heat build-up
• Remaining time for tripping
Bypass element fault
Line voltage too high
Device not identified
Versions not matching
Current range exceeded
Bypass element protective tripping
Overcurrent
Motor stalling – tripping
Current limit exceeded
Power unit
• Overheated
• Overtemperature
3RW44 22 - 3RW44 47: 550 %
2)
3RW44 53 - 3RW44 57: 500 % Reference quantity depends on motor used, but in any case lower than the
1)
max. current limiting value: 3RW44 58 - 3RW44 66: 450 % rated motor torque

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 10-17
Type 3RW44 .. Factory setting

Control times and parameters
Warnings / error messages (continued)
Temperature sensor
• Overload
• Wire breakage
• Short-circuit
Ground fault
• Detected
• Tripping
Connection break in manual operating mode
Max. number of starts exceeded
Ie limit value over / undershot
Cool-down time
• Motor active
• Contact block active
Heatsink thermistor
• Wire breakage
• Short-circuit
Quick stop active
Contact block defective
Impermissible Ie / CLASS settings
No external start parameters received
PIO error
Control inputs
Input 1 Motor right parameter set 1
Input 2 No Action
Input 3 No Action
Input 4 Trip Reset
Parameterization options for control inputs 1 ... 4 No Action
Manual operation local operating mode
Emergency start
Slow speed
Quick stop
Trip Reset
Motor right parameter set 1
Motor left parameter set 1 1)
Relay outputs
Output 1 On-time motor
Output 2 No Action
Output 3 No Action
Output 4 Group error
Parameterization options for relay inputs 1 ... 3 No Action
PIO Output 1
PIO Output 2
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Run up
Bypass operation
Coasting down
On-time motor
Command motor-on
Fans
DC braking contactor
Group warning
Group error
Bus error
Device errors
Power on
Ready to start
Motor temperature sensor deactivated deactivated
Thermo click
PTC type A
1)
Parameter motor left only possible in combination with slow speed.

10-18 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
10.3.4 Conductor Cross-Sections
Type 3RW44 2. 3RW44 3. 3RW44 4. 3RW44 5.

3RW44 6.
Conductor cross-sections
Screw-type terminals Main conductor:
With box terminal 3RT19 55-4G (55 kW) 3RT19 66-4G —
Front terminal • Finely stranded with cable end sleeve mm2 2.5 ... 35 16 ... 70 70 ... 240 —
connected • Finely stranded without cable end sleeve mm2 4 ... 50 16 ... 70 70 ... 240 —
• Solid mm2 2.5 ... 16 — — —
• Stranded mm2 4 ... 70 16 ... 70 95 ... 300 —
NSB00479
• Ribbon cable (number x width x thickness) mm 6 x 9 x 0.8 min. 3 x 9 x 0.8, min. 6 x 9 x 0.8 —
max. 6 x 15.5 x 0.8 max. 20 x 24 x 0.5
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 10 ... 2/0 6 ... 2/0 3/0 ... 600 kcmil —
Rear terminal connected • Finely stranded with cable end sleeve mm2 2.5 ... 50 16 ... 70 120 ... 185 —
• Finely stranded without cable end sleeve mm2 10 ... 50 16 ... 70 120 ... 185 —
• Solid mm2 2.5 ... 16 — — —
NSB00480
• Stranded mm2 10 ... 70 16 ... 70 120 ... 240 —

• Ribbon cable (number x width x thickness) mm 6 x 9 x 0.8 min. 3 x 9 x 0.8, min. 6 x 9 x 0.8 —
max. 6 x 15.5 x 0.8 max. 20 x 24 x 0.5
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 10 ... 2/0 6 ... 2/0 250 ... 500 kcmil —
Both terminals • Finely stranded with cable end sleeve mm2 2 x (2.5 ... 35) max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70 min. 2 x 50; —
connected max. 2 x 185
2
• Finely stranded without cable end sleeve mm 2 x (4 ... 35) max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70 min. 2 x 50; —
max. 2 x 185
• Solid mm2 2 x (2.5 ... 16) — — —
NSB00481
• Stranded mm2 2 x (4 ... 50) max. 2 x 70 max. 2 x 70; —

max. 2 x 240
• Ribbon cable (number x width x thickness) mm 2 x (6 x 9 x 0.8) max. 2 x max. 2 x —
(6 x 15.5 x 0.8) (20 x 24 x 0.5)
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (10 ... 1/0) max. 2 x 1/0 min. 2 x 2/0; —
max. 2 x 500 kcmil
• Connecting screws M6 (hexagon socket, A/ M10 (hexagon socket, M12 (hexagon socket, —
F4) A/F4) A/F5)
- Tightening torque Nm 4 ... 6 10 ... 12 20 ... 22 —
lbf.in 36 ... 53 90 ... 110 180 ... 195 —
With box terminal — 3RT19 56-4G — —
Front or rear terminal • Finely stranded with cable end sleeve mm2 — 16 ... 120 — —
connected • Finely stranded without cable end sleeve mm2 — 16 ... 120 — —
• Stranded mm2 — 16 ... 120 — —
• Ribbon cable (number x width x thickness) mm — min. 3 x 9 x 0.8 — —
NSB00480
NSB00479
max. 6 x 15.5 x 0.8

• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG — 6 ... 250 kcmil — —
Both terminals • Finely stranded with cable end sleeve mm2 — max. 1 x 95, 1 x 120 — —
connected • Finely stranded without cable end sleeve mm2 — max. 1 x 95, 1 x 120 — —
• Stranded mm2 — max. 2 x 120 — —
• Ribbon cable (number x width x thickness) mm — max. 2 x — —
(10 x 15.5 x 0.8)
NSB00481
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG — max. 2 x 3/0 — —

Without box terminal / busbar connections
• Finely stranded with cable lug mm2 — 16 ... 951) 50 ... 2402) 50 ... 2402)
• Stranded with cable lug mm2 — 25 ... 1201) 70 ... 2402) 70 ... 2402)
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG — 4 ... 250 kcmil 2/0 ... 500 kcmil 2/0 ... 500 kcmil
• Connecting bar (max. width) mm — 17 25 60
• Connecting screws — M8 x 25 (A/F13) M10 x 30 (A/F17) M12 x 40
- Tightening torque Nm — 10 ... 14 14 ... 24 20 ... 35
lbf.in — 89 ... 124 124 ... 210 177 ... 310
1) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN 46235 from a conductor cross-section of 95 mm², the 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover is required to ensure phase clearance.
2) When connecting cable lugs according to DIN 46234 from a conductor cross-section of 240 mm² as well as DIN 46235 from a conductor cross-section of 185 mm², the 3RT19 66-4EA1
terminal cover is required to ensure phase clearance.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 10-19
Soft starters Type 3RW44 ..

Conductor cross-sections
Auxiliary conductor (1 or 2 conductors can be connected):
Screw-type terminals
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
• Finely stranded with cable end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
• AWG conductors
- solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 14)
- Finely stranded with cable end sleeve AWG 2 x (20 ... 16)
• Connecting screws
- Tightening torque Nm 0.8 ... 1.2
lbf.in 7 ... 10.3
Spring-type terminals
• Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
• Finely stranded with cable end sleeve mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24 ... 16)
10.3.5 Electromagnetic Compatibility
Standard Parameter
Electromagnetic Compatibility according to EN 60947-4-2
EMC interference immunity
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) EN 61000-4-2 ±4 kV contact discharge, ±8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic HF fields EN 61000-4-3 Frequency range: 80 ... 1000 MHz with 80 % at 1 kHz
Severity 3, 10 V/m
Conducted HF interference EN 61000-4-6 Frequency range: 150 kHz ... 80 MHz with 80 % at 1 kHz
Interference 10 V
HF voltages and HF currents on conductors
• Burst EN 61000-4-4 ±2 kV/5 kHz
• Surge EN 61000-4-5 ±1 kV line to line
±2 kV line to ground
EMC emission
EMC radio interference field strength EN 55011 Limit value of Class A at 30 ... 1000 MHz
Radio interference voltage EN 55011 Limit value of Class A at 0.15 ... 30 MHz
Is a radio interference suppression filter required?
Radio interference suppression A (industrial application) No
10.3.6 Utilization Classes
Regulation DIN EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660 Part 102), and/or IEC 60947-4-1
differentiate two utilization classes designated as "Utilization class 1" and "Utilization
class 2". With both utilization classes, the short-circuit to be controlled is safely
switched off. The only difference is the degree of damage to the device after a short-
circuit.
Utilization class 1 The fuseless load feeder can be inoperative after each short-circuit tripping. Damage to the contactor and the
ToC
1 overload release is permissible. With 3RA1 load feeders, the circuit breaker itself always has utilization category 2.
ToC After a short-circuit tripping, there must be no damage to the overload release or any other part. The 3RA1 fuseless
2 Utilization class 2 load feeder can be restarted without any components needing to be replaced. Only welding of the contactor contacts
is permissible, as long as they can be separated easily without any noticeable damage.
These utilization classes are highlighted in the Technical Data by an orange background.

10-20 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
10.3.7 Branch Component Layout (Standard Circuit)
Fuse assignment
The utilization class according to which the motor branch with soft starter is
dimensioned depends on the requirements of the application. Normally, a fuseless
design (combination of circuit breaker + soft starter) is sufficient. If the requirements
for utilization class 2 must be met, semiconductor fuses must be used in the motor
branch.
Standard circuit fuseless design
Q1
Q11
NS B0_01016a
M
3~
Soft starters Circuit breaker1)

ToC Nominal current 440 V +10 % Rated current
1
Q11 Q1
Type A Type A
Utilization class 12): 3RW44 22 ... 3RW44 27: Iq = 32 kA; 3RW44 34 and 3RW44 35: Iq = 16 kA; 3RW44 36 ... 3RW44 66: Iq = 65 kA
3RW44 22 29 3RV10 42-4HA10 50
3RW44 23 36 3RV10 42-4JA10 63
3RW44 24 47 3RV10 42-4KA10 75
3RW44 25 57 3RV10 42-4LA10 90
3RW44 26 77 3RV10 42-4MA10 100
3RW44 27 93 3RV10 42-4MA10 100
3RW44 34 113 3VL17 16-2DD36 160
3RW44 35 134 3VL17 16-2DD36 160
3RW44 36 162 3VL37 25-2DC36 250
3RW44 43 203 3VL47 31-3DC36 315
3RW44 44 250 3VL47 31-3DC36 315
3RW44 45 313 3VL47 40-3DC36 400
3RW44 46 356 3VL47 40-3DC36 400
3RW44 47 432 3VL57 50-3DC36 500
3RW44 53 551 3VL67 80-3AB36 800
3RW44 54 615 3VL67 80-3AB36 800
3RW44 55 693 3VL67 80-3AB36 800
3RW44 56 780 3VL77 10-3AB36 1000
3RW44 57 880 3VL77 10-3AB36 1000
3RW44 58 970 3VL77 12-3AB36 1250
3RW44 65 1076 3VL77 12-3AB36 1250
3RW44 66 1214 3VL77 12-3AB36 1250
1) The rated motor current must be taken into consideration during device selection.
2) For utilization class, see page 10-20.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 10-21
Standard circuit fused design (line protection only)
F1
Q21
Q11
NS B0_01477a
M
3~
Soft starters Line fuse, maximum Line contactor up to 400 V Braking contactor1)2)
ToC Nominal current 690 V +5 % Rated current Size (option) (Circuit suggestions from page 9-2)
1
Q11 E1 Q21 Q91 Q92
Type A Type A Type Type Type
Utilization class 13): Iq = 65 kA
3RW44 22 29 3NA3 820-6 50 00 3RT10 34 3RT15 26 —
3RW44 23 36 3NA3 822-6 63 00 3RT10 35 3RT15 26 —
3RW44 24 47 3NA3 824-6 80 00 3RT10 36 3RT15 35 —
3RW44 25 57 3NA3 830-6 100 00 3RT10 44 3RT15 35 —
3RW44 26 77 3NA3 132-6 125 1 3RT10 45 3RT10 24 3RT10 35
3RW44 27 93 3NA3 136-6 160 1 3RT10 46 3RT10 25 3RT10 36
3RW44 34 113 3NA3 244-6 250 2 3RT10 54 3RT10 34 3RT10 44
3RW44 35 134 3NA3 244-6 250 2 3RT10 55 3RT10 36 3RT10 45
3RW44 36 162 3NA3 365-6 500 3 3RT10 56 3RT10 44 3RT10 45
3RW44 43 203 2 x 3NA3 354-6 2 x 355 3 3RT10 64 3RT10 44 3RT10 54
3RW44 44 250 2 x 3NA3 354-6 2 x 355 3 3RT10 65 3RT10 44 3RT10 55
3RW44 45 313 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RT10 75 3RT10 54 3RT10 56
3RW44 46 356 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RT10 75 3RT10 54 3RT10 56
3RW44 47 432 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RT10 76 3RT10 55 3RT10 64
3RW44 53 551 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3TF68 44-0CM7 3RT10 64 3RT10 66
3RW44 54 615 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3TF68 44-0CM7 3RT10 64 3RT10 75
3RW44 55 693 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3TF69 44-0CM7 3RT10 65 3RT10 75
3RW44 56 780 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3TF69 44-0CM7 3RT10 65 3RT10 75
3RW44 57 880 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 — 2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7 3RT10 75 3RT10 76
3RW44 58 970 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3 — 3RT10 75 3RT10 76
3RW44 65 1076 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3 — 3RT10 75 3TF68
3RW44 66 1214 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3 — 3RT10 76 3TF68

If the "DC braking" function is selected, a braking contactor must be additionally used (for type, see table).
2) Additional K4 auxiliary relay:
LZX:RT4A4T30 (3RW44 soft starter with 230 V AC rated control supply voltage),
LZX:RT4A4S15 (3RW44 soft starter with 115 V AC rated control supply voltage).
3) "Utilization class 1" refers to the soft starter in combination with the protective device listed (circuit breaker/fuse), not to
other components in the branch. For utilization class, see page 10-20.

10-22 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Standard circuit fused design with SITOR 3NE1 all-range fuse (semiconductor and line protection)
For suitable fuse bases, see LV1 catalog at
"SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices for Power Distribution" –> "Switch Disconnectors"
F´1 and ET B1 Catalog at "BETA Protecting" –> "SITOR Semiconductor Fuses"
and/or at www.siemens.de/sitor
Q21
Q11
NS B0_01478b
M
3~
Soft starters All-range fuse Line contactor up to Braking contactor1)2)

400 V
ToC Nominal Rated current Voltage Size (option) (circuit suggestions from page 9-2)
2
current
Q11 E’1 Q21 Q91 Q92
Type A Type A V Type Type Type
3RW44 22 29 3NE1 020-2 80 690 +5 % 00 3RT10 34 3RT15 26 —
3RW44 23 36 3NE1 020-2 80 690 +5 % 00 3RT10 35 3RT15 26 —
3RW44 24 47 3NE1 021-2 100 690 +5 % 00 3RT10 36 3RT15 35 —
3RW44 25 57 3NE1 022-2 125 690 +5 % 00 3RT10 44 3RT15 35 —
3RW44 26 77 3NE1 022-2 125 690 +5 % 00 3RT10 45 3RT10 24 3RT10 35
3RW44 27 93 3NE1 024-2 160 690 +5 % 1 3RT10 46 3RT10 25 3RT10 36
3RW44 34 113 3NE1 225-2 200 690 +5 % 1 3RT10 54 3RT10 34 3RT10 44
3RW44 35 134 3NE1 227-2 250 690 +5 % 1 3RT10 55 3RT10 36 3RT10 45
3RW44 36 162 3NE1 227-2 250 690 +5 % 1 3RT10 56 3RT10 44 3RT10 45
3RW44 43 203 3NE1 230-2 315 600 +10 % 1 3RT10 64 3RT10 44 3RT10 54
3RW44 44 250 3NE1 331-2 350 460 +10 % 2 3RT10 65 3RT10 44 3RT10 55
3RW44 45 313 3NE1 333-2 450 690 +5 % 2 3RT10 75 3RT10 54 3RT10 56
3RW44 46 356 3NE1 334-2 500 690 +5 % 2 3RT10 75 3RT10 54 3RT10 56
3RW44 47 432 3NE1 435-2 560 690 +5 % 3 3RT10 76 3RT10 55 3RT10 64
3RW44 53 551 2 x 3NE1 334-2 500 690 +10 % 2 3TF68 44-0CM7 3RT10 64 3RT10 66
3RW44 54 615 2 x 3NE1 334-2 500 690 +10 % 2 3TF68 44-0CM7 3RT10 64 3RT10 75
3RW44 55 693 2 x 3NE1 334-2 500 690 +10 % 2 3TF69 44-0CM7 3RT10 65 3RT10 75
3RW44 56 780 2 x 3NE1 435-2 560 690 +10 % 3 3TF69 44-0CM7 3RT10 65 3RT10 75
3RW44 57 880 2 x 3NE1 435-2 560 690 +10 % 3 —2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7 3RT10 75 3RT10 76
3RW44 58 970 2 x 3NE1 435-2 560 690 +10 % 3 — 3RT10 75 3RT10 76
3RW44 65 1076 3 x 3NE1 334-2 500 690 +10 % 2 — 3RT10 75 3TF68
3RW44 66 1214 3 x 3NE1 435-2 560 690 +10 % 3 — 3RT10 76 3TF68
LZX:RT4A4T30
(3RW44 soft starter with 230 V AC rated control supply voltage),
LZX:RT4A4S15
(3RW44 soft starter with 115 V AC rated control supply voltage).

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 10-23
Standard circuit fused design with SITOR 3NE or 3NC semiconductor fuse
(semiconductor protection using fuse, line and overload protection using circuit breaker)
"SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices for Power Distribution" –>
F1 "Switch Disconnectors" and ET B1 Catalog at "BETA Protecting" –>
F3 "SITOR Semiconductor Fuses" and/or at www.siemens.de/sitor
Q21
Q1
F3
Q11
NS B0_01019a
Q11
NS B0_01479a
M
M
3~
3~
Soft starters Semiconductor fuse minimum Semiconductor fuse maximum Semiconductor fuse (cylinder)
ToC Nominal 690 V +10 % Rated current Size 690 V +10 % Rated current Size Rated current Size
2
current
Q11 E3 E3 E3
Type A Type A Type A Type A
3RW44 22 29 3NE4 120 80 0 3NE4 121 100 0 3NC2 280 80 22 x 58
3RW44 23 36 3NE4 121 100 0 3NE4 121 100 0 3NC2 200 100 22 x 58
3RW44 24 47 3NE4 121 100 0 3NE4 122 125 0 3NC2 200 100 22 x 58
3RW44 25 57 3NE4 122 125 0 3NE4 124 160 0
3RW44 26 77 3NE4 124 160 0 3NE4 124 160 0
3RW44 27 93 3NE3 224 160 1 3NE3 332-0B 400 2
3RW44 34 113 3NE3 225 200 1 3NE3 335 560 2
3RW44 35 134 3NE3 225 200 1 3NE3 335 560 2
3RW44 36 162 3NE3 227 250 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 43 203 3NE3 230-0B 315 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 44 250 3NE3 230-0B 315 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 45 313 3NE3 233 450 1 3NE3 336 630 2
3RW44 46 356 3NE3 333 450 2 3NE3 336 630 2
3RW44 47 432 3NE3 335 560 2 3NE3 338-8 800 2
3RW44 53 551 2 x 3NE3 335 560 2 3 x 3NE3 334-0B 500 2
3RW44 54 615 2 x 3NE3 335 560 2 3 x 3NE3 334-0B 500 2
3RW44 55 693 2 x 3NE3 335 560 2 3 x 3NE3 334-0B 500 2
3RW44 56 780 2 x 3NE3 336 630 2 2 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2
3RW44 57 880 2 x 3NE3 336 630 2 2 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2
3RW44 58 970 2 x 3NE3 336 630 2 2 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2
3RW44 65 1076 2 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2 3 x 3NE3 338-8 800 2
3RW44 66 1214 2 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2 3 x 3NE3 338-8 800 2

10-24 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Soft Line contactor up to Braking contactor1)2) Circuit breaker Line fuse, maximum
starters 400 V
ToC Nominal (option) (Circuit suggestions from page 9-2) 440 V +10 % Rated current 690 V +5 % Rated current Size
2
current
Q11 Q21 Q91 Q92 Q1 E1
Type A Type Type Type Type A Type A
3RW44 22 29 3RT10 34 3RT15 26 — 3RV10 41-4HA10 50 3NA3 820-6 50 00
3RW44 23 36 3RT10 35 3RT15 26 — 3RV10 41-4JA10 63 3NA3 822-6 63 00
3RW44 24 47 3RT10 36 3RT15 35 — 3RV10 41-4KA10 75 3NA3 824-6 80 00
3RW44 25 57 3RT10 44 3RT15 35 — 3RV10 41-4LA10 90 3NA3 830-6 100 00
3RW44 26 77 3RT10 45 3RT10 24 3RT10 35 3RV10 41-4MA10 100 3NA3 132-6 125 1
3RW44 27 93 3RT10 46 3RT10 25 3RT10 36 3RV10 41-4MA10 100 3NA3 136-6 160 1
3RW44 34 113 3RT10 54 3RT10 34 3RT10 44 3VL17 16-1DD36 160 3NA3 244-6 250 2
3RW44 35 134 3RT10 55 3RT10 36 3RT10 45 3VL17 16-1DD36 160 3NA3 244-6 250 2
3RW44 36 162 3RT10 56 3RT10 44 3RT10 45 3VL37 25-1DC36 250 3NA3 365-6 500 3
3RW44 43 203 3RT10 64 3RT10 44 3RT10 54 3VL47 31-1DC36 315 2 x 3NA3 354-6 2 x 355 3
3RW44 53 551 3TF68 44-0CM7 3RT10 64 3RT10 66 3VL67 80-1AB36 800 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW44 57 880 —2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7 3RT10 75 3RT10 76 3VL77 10-1AB36 1000 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW44 58 970 — 3RT10 75 3RT10 76 3VL77 12-1AB36 1250 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3
3RW44 65 1076 — 3RT10 75 3TF68 3VL77 12-1AB36 1250 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3
3RW44 66 1214 — 3RT10 76 3TF68 3VL77 12-1AB36 1250 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3
LZX:RT4A4T30 (3RW44 soft starter with 230 V AC rated control supply voltage),
LZX:RT4A4S15 (3RW44 soft starter with 115 V AC rated control supply voltage).

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 10-25
10.3.8 Branch Component Layout (Inside Delta Circuit)
Inside delta circuit fused design with SITOR 3NE or 3NC fuses (semiconductor protection using fuse, line and overload protection using circuit breaker)
"SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices for Power Distribution" –> "Switch
F1 Disconnectors" and ET B1 Catalog at "BETA Protecting" –>
Q1 "SITOR Semiconductor Fuses" and/or at www.siemens.de/sitor
Q21
F3
F3
Q11
Q11
NS B0_01596a
NS B0_01597a
M
3~ M
3~
Soft Semiconductor fuse minimum Semiconductor fuse maximum Semiconductor fuse (cylinder)
starters
ToC Nominal 690 V +10 % Rated current Size 690 V +10 % Rated current Size Rated current Size
2
current
Q11 E3 E3 E3
Type A Type A Type A Type A
Utilization class 21)
3RW44 22 50 3NE4 120 80 0 3NE4 121 100 0 3NC2 280 80 22 x 58
3RW44 23 62 3NE4 121 100 0 3NE4 121 100 0 3NC2 200 100 22 x 58
3RW44 24 81 3NE4 121 100 0 3NE4 122 125 0 3NC2 200 100 22 x 58
3RW44 25 99 3NE4 122 125 0 3NE4 124 160 0
3RW44 26 133 3NE4 124 160 0 3NE4 124 160 0
3RW44 27 161 3NE3 224 160 1 3NE3 332-0B 400 2
3RW44 34 196 3NE3 225 200 1 3NE3 335 560 2
3RW44 35 232 3NE3 225 200 1 3NE3 335 560 2
3RW44 36 281 3NE3 227 250 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 43 352 3NE3 230-0B 315 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 44 433 3NE3 230-0B 315 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 45 542 3NE3 233 450 1 3NE3 336 630 2
3RW44 46 617 3NE3 333 450 2 3NE3 336 630 2
3RW44 47 748 3NE3 335 560 2 3NE3 338-8 800 2
3RW44 53 954 2 x 3NE3 335 560 2 3 x 3NE3 334-0B 500 2
3RW44 54 1065 2 x 3NE3 335 560 2 3 x 3NE3 334-0B 500 2
3RW44 55 1200 2 x 3NE3 335 560 2 3 x 3NE3 334-0B 500 2
3RW44 56 1351 2 x 3NE3 336 630 2 2 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2
3RW44 57 1524 2 x 3NE3 336 630 2 3 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2
3RW44 58 1680 2 x 3NE3 336 630 2 3 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2
3RW44 65 1864 2 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2 3 x 3NE3 338-8 800 2
3RW44 66 2103 2 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2 3 x 3NE3 338-8 800 2
Soft starters Line contactor up to 400 V Circuit breaker Line fuse, maximum
ToC Nominal current (option) 440 V +10 % Rated current 690 V +5 % Rated current Size
2
Q11 Q21 Q1 E1
Type A Type Type A Type A
Utilization class 21)
3RW44 22 50 3RT10 36-1AP04 3RV10 42-4KA10 75 3NA3 824-6 80 00
3RW44 23 62 3RT10 44-1AP04 3RV10 42-4LA10 90 3NA3 830-6 100 00
3RW44 24 81 3RT10 46-1AP04 3RV10 42-4MA10 100 3NA3 132-6 125 1
3RW44 25 99 3RT10 54-1AP36 3VL27 16-.DC36 160 3NA3 136-6 160 1
3RW44 26 133 3RT10 55-6AP36 3VL27 16-.DC36 160 3NA3 240-6 200 2
3RW44 27 161 3RT10 56-6AP36 3VL37 20-.DC36 200 3NA3 244-6 250 2
3RW44 34 196 3RT10 64-6AP36 3VL37 25-.DC36 250 3NA3 360-6 400 3
3RW44 35 232 3RT10 65-6AP36 3VL47 31-.DC36 315 3NA3 360-6 400 3
3RW44 36 281 3RT10 66-6AP36 3VL47 40-.DC36 400 2 x 3NA3 360-6 2 x 400 3
3RW44 43 352 3RT10 75-6AP36 3VL47 40-.DC36 400 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW44 44 433 3RT10 76-6AP36 3VL57 50-.DC36 500 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW44 45 542 3TF68 44-0CM7 3VL57 63-.DC36 800 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3
3RW44 46 617 3TF68 44-0CM7 3VL67 80-.AB36 800 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3
3RW44 47 748 3TF69 3VL67 80-.AB36 800 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3
3RW44 53 954 —2 x 3TF68 44-0CM7 3VL77 10-.AB36 1000 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3
3RW44 56 1351 —2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7 3VL87 16-.AB36 1600 3 x 3NA3 372 3 x 630 3
3RW44 57 1524 —2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7 3VL87 16-.AB36 1600 3 x 3NA3 372 3 x 630 3
3RW44 58 1680 — 3WL12 20 2000 2 x 3NA3 480 2 x 1000 4
3RW44 65 1864 — 3WL12 25 2500 2 x 3NA3 482 2 x 1250 4
3RW44 66 2103 — 3WL12 25 2500 2 x 3NA3 482 2 x 1250 4
10-26 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
10.3.9 Accessories
For soft starters Version Order No.

Type
PC communication program Soft Starter ES 2007
Soft Starter ES 2007 Basic
Floating license for one user 3ZS1 313-4CC10-0YA5
E-SW, software and documentation on CD,
in 3 languages (German / English / French),
Communication via system interface
License key on USB stick, Class A, incl. CD
Soft Starter ES 2007 Standard
Communication via system interface
Soft Starter ES 2007 Premium
Communication via system interface or PROFIBUS
PC cable
for PC / PD communication with SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters 3UF7 940-0AA00-0
via the system interface, for connection
to the serial interface of the PC / PD
3UF7 940-0AA00-0
USB-to-serial adapter
For connection of the PC cable to the USB interface of the PC 3UF7 946-0AA00-0
Recommended for use in combination with 3RW44 soft starters, SIMOCODE pro 3UF7, 3RK3 modular safety system, ET 200S/
ECOFAST/ET 200pro motor starters, AS-i safety monitor, AS-i analyzer
PROFIBUS communication model
Module for insertion into the soft starter for integration of the starter into the PROFIBUS network with DPV1 slave functionality. 3RW49 00-0KC00
When connected to Y link, the soft starter only has DPV0 slave functionality.
3RW49 00-0KC00
External display and control module
For display and operation of the functions provided by the soft starter via an externally mounted display and control 3RW4 900-0AC00
module with degree of protection IP54 (e.g. in the control cabinet door)
Connecting cable
From the device interface (serial) of the 3RW44 soft starter to the external display and control module
• Length 0.5 m, flat 3UF7 932-0AA00-0
• Length 0.5 m, round 3UF7 932-0BA00-0
3RW49 00-0AC00 • Length 1.0 m, round 3UF7 937-0BA00-0
• Length 2.5 m, round 3UF7 933-0BA00-0

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 10-27

Type
Box terminal block for soft starters
Box terminal block
3RW44 2. Included in the scope of delivery
3RW44 3. • Up to 70 mm2 3RT19 55-4G
• Up to 120 mm2 3RT19 56-4G
3RW44 4. • Up to 240 mm2 3RT19 66-4G
3RT19
Covers for soft starters
Terminal covers for box terminals
Additional touch protection for mounting to the box terminals (2 covers required per device)
3RW44 2. and 3RW44 3. 3RT19 56-4EA2
3RW44 4. 3RT19 66-4EA2
3RT19.6-4EA2
Terminal cover for cable lugs and busbar connections
3RW44 2. and 3RW44 3. 3RT19 56-4EA1
3RW44 4. 3RT19 66-4EA1
Operating instructions
For 3RW44 soft starters 3ZX1012-0RW44-0AA0 on
The operating instructions are included in the scope of delivery of the soft starters. request
10.3.10Spare parts

Type
Fans
Fans
3RW44 2. and 115 V AC 3RW49 36-8VX30
3RW44 3. 230 V AC 3RW49 36-8VX40
3RW44 4. 115 V AC 3RW49 47-8VX30
230 V AC 3RW49 47-8VX40
3RW49 3RW44 5. and 115 V AC 3RW49 57-8VX30
3RW44 61) 230 V AC 3RW49 57-8VX40
3RW44 62) 115 V AC 3RW49 66-8VX30
230 V AC 3RW49 66-8VX40
1) 3RW44 6. connection on the output side.
2) For connection to the front side.

10-28 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
10.4 Tripping Characteristics

10.4.1 Motor Protection Tripping Characteristics: 3RW44 with Symmetry
10 3
NSB0_01500a
6
time t [s][s]
4 CLASS 5
Auslösezeit
CLASS 10
Tripping
2 CLASS 15
CLASS 20
10 2
CLASS 30
6
10 1
10 0
1 2 4 6 10
x e
Class 5 Class 10 Class 15 Class 20 Class 30
10.4.2 Motor Protection Tripping Characteristics: 3RW44 with Asymmetry
10 3
NSB0_01706
6
time t [s][s]
CLASS 5
4
Auslösezeit
CLASS 10
Tripping
2
CLASS 15
CLASS 20
10 2 CLASS 30
10 1
10 0
0,1 1,0 10
x e
Class 5 Class 10 Class 15 Class 20 Class 30

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 10-29
10.5 Dimension Drawings

3RW44 2
3RW44 3
3RW44 4
Type a b c d e f g h i k l m n o p q q
M6
180 170 37 11 167 100 240 270 174 148 7,5 153 7 184 6,6 10
3RW44 2 10 Nm
(7.09) (6.69) (1.46) (0.43) (6.57) (3.94) (9.45) (10.63) (6.85) (5.83) (0.30) (6.02) (0.28) (7.24) (0.26) (0.39)
(89 lbf.in)
M6
180 170 37 17 167 100 240 270 174 148 7,5 153 7 198 9 10
3RW44 3 10 Nm
(7.09) (6.69) (1.46) (0.67) (6.57) (3.94) (9.45) (10.63) (6.85) (5.83) (0.30) (6.02) (0.28) (7.80) (0.35) (0.39)
(89 lbf.in)
M8
210 210 48 25 190 140 269 298 205 166 16 166 9 230 11 10
3RW44 4 15 Nm
(8.27) (8.27) (1.89) (0.98) (7.48) (5.51) (10.59) (11.73) (8.07) (6.54) (0.63) (6.54) (0.35) (9.06) (0.43) (0.39)
(134 lbf.in)
mm (inch)

10-30 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
3RW44 5 / 3RW44 6
a 3RW44 6 Ø 13.5 mm (0.53 in)
b
c t
3RW44 5: M 12 d 35 Nm / 310 lbf·in
s
u
3RW44 6: M 12 d 35 Nm / 310 lbf·in v
r
e
1L1 3L2 5L3
3RW44 6
g
p
f
w
A1 A2 PE L+ L- IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 T1 T2
d.c./c.d. 24V
230 V 5L3
1L1 50 - 60 Hz
3RW44 6
G/031
127 *E00*
Ue=200...460V
o
2T1 4T2 6T3

NO NO NO NC NO
13 14 23 24 33 34 95 96 98
h
2T1 4T2 6T3

n
m
q
i ad
k
l
3RW44 6
Type a b c d e f g h i k l m n
76 40 14 20 15,5 638,5 590 44 470 510 16,5 105
3RW44 5 —
(3) (1.6) (0.6) (0.8) (0.7) (25.2) (9.45) (1.8) (18) (20) (0.7) (4.1)
85 50 14 667 660 160 37,5 535 576 16,5 103
3RW44 6 — —
(3.35) (1.97) (0.6) (26.3) (26) (6.3) (1.48) (21) (22.7) (0.7) (4.06)
mm (inch)
Type o p q r s t u v w ad
253 623 249 162 152
3RW44 5 — — — — 290
(10) (24.6) (9.8) (6.4) (5.9)
251 693 43,5 40 20 249 162 151,4 123
3RW44 6 290
(9.88) (27.3) (1.71) (1.6) (0.78) (9.8) (6.4) (5.96) (4.84)
mm (inch)

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 10-31
3RW44 6
ad
x
ac
ab
y
z
aa
Type x y z aa ab ac ad
290 147 173 195 118 261 290
3RW44 5 (11.4) (5.7) (6.9) (7.7) (4.6) (10.2) (11.5)
289,5 175 173 118 261 290
3RW44 6 (11.4) (6.9) (6.8)
—
(4.65) (10.28) (11.42)
mm (inch)

10-32 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
External display and control module 3RW49 00-0AC00
(3.78) (1.1)
(2.36)
(1.14)
(1.40)
92 (3.62)
55 (2.16)
Dimensions in mm (inch) Installation cutout for external display and control module 3RW49 00-0AC00

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 10-33

10-34 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Configuration Data
Configuration Data
Siemens AG
Technical Support Low-Voltage Control Systems
Tel.: +49 (0) 911-895-5900
Fax: +49 (0) 911-895-5907
1. Motor data
Siemens motor? ..............................................................................................................................
Rated output: ............................................................................................................................ kW
Rated voltage: .............................................................................................................................. V
Line frequency: .......................................................................................................................... Hz
Rated current: .............................................................................................................................. A
Inrush current: .............................................................................................................................. A
Rated operating speed: ............................................................................................................. rpm
Rated operating torque:............................................................................................................. Nm
Stall torque: .............................................................................................................................. Nm
Mass moment of inertia: ....................................................................................................... kg*m2
Speed characteristic curve / torque characteristic curve
(The differences in speed of the value pairs do not have to be identical)
nM rpm "nsyn"
MM / MB
Speed characteristic curve / current characteristic curve
nM rpm "nsyn"
IM / IB

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 Configuration-1
Configuration Data
2. Load data
Load type (e.g. pump, mill, ...):........................................................................................................
Rated operating speed: ............................................................................................................. rpm
Rated operating torque or rated output.............................................................................Nm or kW
Mass moment of inertia (load-based) .....................................................................................kg*m2
Mass moment of inertia (motor-based) ...................................................................................kg*m2
Speed characteristic curve / torque characteristic curve

nL rpm
ML / MB
3. Start conditions
Start frequency....................................................................................................................... Starts
Operating cycle: Run-up time ........................................................................................................ s
Operating time .................................................................................................... s
Idle time .............................................................................................................. s
Stopping time...................................................................................................... s
Ambient temperature................................................................................................................... °C
Yes Value
Starting current limitation? ..........................
Acceleration torque limitation? ..........................
Maximum starting time? ..........................
4. Personal data
Surname, first name:.......................................................................................................................
Company: .......................................................................................................................................
Department: ....................................................................................................................................
Street: .............................................................................................................................................
Postal code, city:.............................................................................................................................
Country: ..........................................................................................................................................
Phone.: ...........................................................................................................................................
Fax: ................................................................................................................................................
E-mail: ............................................................................................................................................

Configuration-2 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05
Index
Numerics Current limiting 6-9
3-phase asynchronous motors 1-2, 6-20 Current limiting value 6-9
3RW44 2. 3-11
3RW44 22 9-4 D
3RW44 25 9-4 Data Formats 8-35
3RW44 26 9-5 Data sets 8-40
3RW44 3. 3-11 Data transmission 8-6
3RW44 4. 3-11 DC braking 5-24, 6-13, 6-14, 9-4, 9-5
3RW44 47 9-5 DC braking torque 6-13, 6-14
Degree of protection 3-2
A Device errors 7-7
Accessories 10-27 Device interface 4-3
Ambient temperature 2-6 Diagnosis 7-2
Application examples 2-3 Diagnosis via LED display 8-25
Applications 1-7, 6-2, 6-6 Diagnosis with STEP 7 8-26
Asymmetric limit value 6-20 Dimension drawings 10-30
Asymmetry 6-20, 10-29 Direct on line starting 5-18
Atmospheric pressure 10-4 Disconnector 3-4
Automatic restart 3-4 Display measured value 5-41
Display settings 4-2, 5-33
B Display, see operating and monitoring
Branch layout 3-4 module 2-2
Breakaway pulse 6-7 Dynamic braking torque 6-13
Breakaway time 6-7
Breakaway voltage 6-7 E
Byte arrangements 8-40 Error 7-2
Error codes for negative data set
C acknowledgement 8-38
Capacitor 3-10 Error messages 7-2
CLASS 10 2-3, 6-21 Error types 8-34
CLASS 10A 6-21 External display and control module
CLASS setting 6-19, 6-20, 7-5, 10-12, 10-27, 10-33
10-13, 10-14, 10-15 External display and control unit 4-3
Clearances 3-3
Coasting down 2-3, 2-4, 5-21, 6-11 F
Combined braking 5-25, 6-13 Factory settings 5-40
Communication module PROFIBUS
DP 5-41, 7-3, 7-7, 8-1, 8-4, 8-7, 8-8, G
8-9, 8-10, 8-14, 8-17, 8-18, 8-19, 10-27 Ground fault 7-5
Communication principle 8-6 Group error 7-2
Component layout 10-21 GSD file 8-15
Conductor cross-sections 3-12
Configuration 2-2 H
Configuration with the GSD file 8-15 Heavy starting 2-3
Connection examples 9-2
Connections 3-11 I
Control circuit 9-2 Idle time 6-20, 6-21
Control voltage versions 3-10 Inching 6-20
Current asymmetry limit value 6-20 Inherent protection 6-23
Current limit values 5-27, 6-18 Inside delta circuit 3-6, 9-6
Installation altitude 2-6
SIRIUS 3RW44 system
GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05 Index-1
Internal run-up recognition 6-3, 6-5 Pump stop 5-23, 6-12
L Q
Limiting torque 6-5 Quick start menu 5-6, 5-7
Line contactor 9-3
Line voltage 3-6 R
Rated motor current 3-6
M Rated operating speed 6-16
Main circuit 9-2 Rated operating torque 5-12
Main contactor 3-8 Reduce starting current 1-2
Main current connection 3-11 Relative humidity 10-4
Maximum pointer 8-37 Restart 3-4
Maximum starting time 6-3 Restore basic factory settings 2-7, 5-40
Menu structure 5-2, 10-2 Reversed direction of rotation 9-6
Messages 7-2 Reversing operation 9-10
Motor control 5-43 Run-up recognition 6-3, 6-5, 6-9, 6-10
Motor data 5-11
motor heat build-up 6-20 S
Motor heating 5-19, 6-10 Safety 5-48
Motor overload protection 6-19 Save settings 5-38
Motor protection function 6-19 Saving options 5-37
Motor protection settings 5-31 Screw-type terminals 3-10
Motor starter configuration 8-15 Selection criteria 1-7
Mounting Dimensions 3-3 Semiconductor fuse 3-9, 6-23
Mounting position 3-2 Semiconductor protection 9-2
Settings 5-9, 5-38, 5-39
N SITOR 3-9, 6-23
Navigation 5-2 SITOR fuses 3-9
Normal or Heavy Starting 2-3 SITOR semiconductor fuse 6-23
Normal starting 2-3 Slow speed factor 6-16
Slow speed function 6-16, 9-8
O Slow speed parameters 5-26
On-time motor 2-5 Slow speed torque 6-16
Operating and monitoring module, see Soft Starter ES 10-27
display 2-2 Soft starters
Overtemperature 7-5 for high-feature applications
Box terminal block 10-28
P Covers 10-28
Parameter 5-2 Fans 10-28
Parameter sets 5-10, 6-2 PC cable 10-27
Parameterizing the inputs 5-28 Software 10-27
Parameterizing the outputs 5-29 Soft stop 5-22
PC interface 2-2 Software 2-2, 4-3
Phase loss 7-3 Spare parts 10-28
PLC 3-4, 4-2, 5-43, 7-5, 8-37, 8-41, 8-49, Spring-loaded terminals 3-10
8-51, 8-55, 8-60, 8-62, 8-66, 8-67, 8-68, Standard circuit 3-5, 9-2
8-69, 9-3 Standards 3-2
Prewarning limit 6-20 Start torque 1-2, 1-4, 6-3, 6-5, 6-7
PROFIBUS 10-27 Start voltage 6-3
Profibus 4-3 Starting 1-6
Profibus interface 4-3 Starting current 1-2
Protection against voltage failure 6-21 Starting mode 5-13
Protective functions 5-34 Starting the motor starter 8-22
PTC thermistors 6-22 Starting time 6-3, 6-5
Index-2 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
Status diagram 5-30
Stopping modes 5-20, 6-11
Stopping time 6-12, 6-14, 6-15
Stopping torque 6-12
Storage temperature 10-4
Supply voltage 7-4
Switching element 3-4
Switching frequency 2-5
Symmetry 10-29
T
Technical data 10-5
Control unit 10-16
Power unit 10-12
Temperature 10-4
Temperature sensor 6-22
Thermo click 6-22
Torque control 5-16, 5-22, 6-5
Torque control with current limiting 5-17
Transport and storage conditions 10-4
Tripping characteristics 10-29
Tripping class 6-19, 6-20
U
Unpacking 3-2
User-specific commissioning 5-8
V
Very heavy starting 2-4
Voltage ramp 5-14, 6-3, 6-4
Voltage ramp with current limiting 5-15
W
Warnings 7-2
Water hammer 6-12

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05 Index-3
Index-4 GWA 4NEB 535 2195-02 DS 05
Sender (please fill in)
Name
To Company / department
SIEMENS AG
A&D CD MM 3
Address
92220 Amberg, Germany Telephone
Fax: 09621 / 80-3337 Fax
SIRIUS 3RW44 Soft Starters System Manual
Have you noticed any errors while reading this manual?

Please use this form to inform us about any errors.
All complaints and suggestions for improvements are very welcome.

GWA 4NEB 535 2195-01 DS 05 Fax-1
10-10
SIEMENS SIRUS 3RW44 Soft Starter Display Operating Instructions

SIRIUS 3RW44
Externes Anzeige- und Bedienmodul
Module d’affichage et de pilotage 3RW4900-0AC00
Módulo externo de visualización y de manejo
Modulo di visualizzazione e comando esterno
Módulo externo de indicação e operação
Harici gösterge ve kumanda modülü
Ƚɨɠɳɨɣɤ ɧɩɟɮɦɷ ɣɨɟɣɥɛɱɣɣ ɣ ɮɪɫɛɝɦɠɨɣɺ
Betriebsanleitung Operating Instructions Instructions de service
Instructivo Istruzioni di servizio Instruções de Serviço Bestell-Nr./Order No.: 3ZX3012-0RW40-1AA1
ùûletme kÖlavuzu Ƀɨɬɭɫɮɥɱɣɺ ɪɩ ɸɥɬɪɦɮɛɭɛɱɣɣ
Vor der Installation, dem Betrieb oder der Wartung des Geräts muss diese Anleitung gelesen und verstanden werden.
Read and understand these instructions before installing, operating, or maintaining the equipment.
Ne pas installer, utiliser ou entretenir cet équipement avant d'avoir lu et assimilé ces instructions.
Leer y comprender este instructivo antes de la instalación, operación o mantenimiento del equipo.
Leggere con attenzione questi istruzioni prima di installare, utilizzare o eseguire manutenzione su questa apparecchiatura.
Ler e compreender estas instruções antes da instalação, operação ou manutenção do equipamento.
CihazÕn kurulumundan, çalÕútÕrÕlmasÕndan veya bakÕma tabi tutulmasÕndan önce, bu kÕlavuz okunmuú ve anlanmÕú olmalÕdÕr.
ɉɟɪɟɞ ɭɫɬɚɧɨɜɤɨɣ, ɜɜɨɞɨɦ ɜ ɷɤɫɩɥɭɚɬɚɰɢɸ ɢɥɢ ɨɛɫɥɭɠɢɜɚɧɢɟɦ ɭɫɬɪɨɣɫɬɜɚ ɧɟɨɛɯɨɞɢɦɨ ɩɪɨɱɟɫɬɶ ɢ ɩɨɧɹɬɶ ɞɚɧɧɨɟ ɪɭɤɨɜɨɞɫɬɜɨ.
Weitere Informationen:
For further information:
Pour de plus amples informations : SIRIUS 3RW System
!
Más información: Deutsch: 3ZX1012-0RW44-1AB1
Per ulteriori informazioni: English: 3ZX1012-0RW44-1AC1
Mais informações:
Daha fazla bilgi:
Ⱦɨɩɨɥɧɢɬɟɥɶɧɚɹ ɢɧɮɨɪɦɚɰɢɹ:
Eine sichere Gerätefunktion ist nur mit zertifizierten Komponenten gewährleistet.

Reliable functioning of the equipment is only ensured with certified components.
Le fonctionnement sûr de l'appareil n'est garanti qu'avec des composants certifiés.
El funcionamiento seguro del aparato sólo está garantizado con componentes certificados.
Il funzionamento sicuro dell'apparecchiatura viene garantito soltanto con componenti certificati.
O funcionamento seguro do aparelho apenas pode ser garantido se forem utilizados os componentes certificados.
CihazÕn güvenli çalÕúmasÕ ancak sertifikalÕ bileúenler kullanÕlmasÕ halinde garanti edilebilir.
ɇɚɞɟɠɧɨɟ ɮɭɧɤɰɢɨɧɢɪɨɜɚɧɢɟ ɭɫɬɪɨɣɫɬɜɚ ɝɚɪɚɧɬɢɪɨɜɚɧɨ ɬɨɥɶɤɨ ɩɪɢ ɡɚɞɟɣɫɬɜɨɜɚɧɢɢ ɫɟɪɬɢɮɢɰɢɪɨɜɚɧɧɵɯ ɤɨɦɩɨɧɟɧɬɨɜ.
Technical Assistance: Telephone: +49 (0) 911-895-5900 (8°° - 17°° CET) Fax: +49 (0) 911-895-5907
Internet: www.siemens.de/lowvoltage/technical-assistance
Technical Support: Telephone: +49 (0) 180 50 50 222
A5E00369307A DS 03 Last update: 09 August 2007

Externes Anzeige- und Bedienmodul
Warnung
! Schalten Sie das 3RW44 Modul immer spannungsfrei, bevor Sie das Anzeige- und Bedienmodul anschließen bzw. trennen.
An den 3RW44 kann immer nur ein Anzeige- und Bedienmodul angeschlossen werden.
Bei Nichtbeachten kann es zum Personen- und/oder Sachschaden kommen (z. B. kann der Motor anlaufen oder der 3RW44 zurück-
gesetzt werden oder das Anzeige- und Bedienmodul kann Schaden nehmen oder die gesamte Kommunikation ausfallen).
Das 3RW44 Modul erkennt nach dem Einschalten, dass das externe Anzeige- und Bedienmodul angeschlossen ist:
• Die Anzeige des 3RW44 wird invertiert dargestellt, die Anzeige am Anzeige- und Bedienmodul wird normal dargestellt.
• Die Tasten des 3RW44 Moduls sind inaktiv, alle anderen Tasten und Anzeigen der Module sind aktiv.
• Die vom 3RW44 System gewohnte Handhabung ist nun über das Anzeige- und Bedienmodul möglich.
Anzeige
LED Anzeige oben links = grün o Kommunikation mit dem 3RW44 Modul ist aktiv. Betrieb nur an 3RW44 ab Erzeugnisstand E05
LED Anzeige unten links = rot o Sammelfehler (SF) möglich!

Warning
! Always disconnect the 3RW44 module from voltage before connecting or disconnecting the display and control module.
Only one display and control module can be connected to the 3RW44 at any one time.
Failure to observe this warning may result in damage to persons and/or property (e.g., the engine can start, the 3RW44 can be reset,
the display and control module or the entire communication can fail).
After switching on the 3RW44 module, it recognizes that the external display and control module is connected:
• The 3RW44 display is shown in inverted mode; the display on the display and control module is shown in normal mode.
• The buttons on the 3RW44 module are deactivated; all other module buttons and displays are activated.
• The 3RW44 system can now be operated as usual via the display and control module.
Display
LED display upper left = green o Communication with the 3RW44 module is activated. Operation only possible on 3RW44, product
LED display lower left = red o Group error (SF) release E05 or later!
Module d’affichage et de pilotage

Avertissement
! Mettez toujours le module 3RW44 hors tension avant de brancher ou débrancher le module d’affichage et de pilotage.
Il n'est possible de connecter qu'un seul module d'affichage et de pilotage sur le 3RW44.
Une non-observation peut entraîner des blessures ou des dommages matériels (p. ex., le moteur pourrait démarrer, le 3RW44 être
remis à zéro, le module d'affichage et de pilotage subir des dommages ou l'ensemble de la communication être interrompue)
Le module 3RW44 reconnaît après la mise sous tension que le module d’affichage et de pilotage est connecté :
• L'affichage du 3RW44 est inverti, l'affichage du module d'affichage et de pilotage est normal.
• Les touches du module 3RW44 sont inactives, toutes les autres touches et affichages des modules sont actives.
• Il est maintenant possible d’utiliser le système 3RW44 comme d’habitude via le module d’affichage et de pilotage.
Affichage
Affichage LED en haut à gauche = vert o la communication avec le module 3RW44 est active. Service possible seulement sur 3RW44 à partir
Affichage LED en bas à gauche = rouge o Erreurs groupées (SF) de la version de produit E05 !
Módulo externo de visualización y de manejo

Advertencia
! Conecte el módulo 3RW44 siempre excento de tensiones, antes de conectar o desconectar el módulo de visualización y de manejo.
Solamente se puede conectar al 3RW44 un único módulo de visualización y de manejo.
En caso de no observancia se pueden producir daños personales y/o materiales (p. ej. el motor puede arrancar o el 3RW44 puede
ser reiniciado o el módulo de visualización o de manejo puede sufrir daños o la entera comunicación puede fallar).
El módulo 3RW44 reconoce después del conectado que el módulo de visualización y de manejo externo ha sido conectado:
• La visualización del 3RW44 se presenta de manera invertida, la visualización en el módulo de visualización o de manejo se presenta de manera
normal.
• Las teclas del módulo 3RW44 están inactivas, todas las otras teclas y visualizaciones de los módulos están activas.
• El manejo acostumbrado del sistema 3RW44 es ahora posible a través del módulo de visualización y de manejo.
Visualización
Visualización LED arriba izquierda = verde o comunicación con el módulo 3RW44 está activa. ¡Servicio sólo posible en 3RW44 a partir de la
Visualización LED abajo izquierda = rojo o fallo colectivo (FC) versión del producto E05!
2 3ZX3012-0RW40-1AA1
Modulo di visualizzazione e comando esterno
Attenzione
! Prima di collegare o scollegare il modulo di visualizzazione e comando esterno, staccare la tensione dal modulo 3RW44.
Al 3RW44 si può collegare sempre un solo modulo di visualizzazione e comando.
In caso contrario possono aversi danni a cose e a persone (si può ad esempio avviare un motore, resettare il 3RW44, il modulo di
visualizzazione e comando può rimanere danneggiato o può esserci un guasto all’intera comunicazione).
Dopo l’accensione, il modulo 3RW44 riconosce che il modulo di visualizzazione e comando esterno è collegato:
• La visualizzazione sul 3RW44 compare in negativo, quella sul display del modulo di visualizzazione e comando in modo normale.
• I tasti del modulo 3RW44 sono inattivi, tutti gli alti tasti e spie dei moduli sono attivi.
• La gestione finora nota del sistema 3RW44 è adesso possibile tramite il modulo di visualizzazione e comando.
Spie
Spia LED in alto a sinistra = verde o la comunicazione con il modulo 3RW44 è attiva. Funzionamento possibile solo con un 3RW44 a
Spia LED in basso a destra = rossa o errore cumulativo (SF) partire dalla versione E05!
Módulo externo de indicação e operação

Aviso
! Sempre coloque o módulo 3RW44 fora de tensão antes de conectar ou desconectar o módulo de indicação e operação.
No 3RW44 só pode ser conectado um módulo de indicação e operação cada vez.
Se isto não for obersvado, podem ocorrer lesões à pessoas ou danos materiais. (p. ex., o motor pode arrancar ou o 3RW44 pode ser
zerado ou o módulo de indicação e operação pode sofrer danos ou ainda ocorrer a falha em toda a comunicação).
O módulo 3RW44 reconhece, após ter sido ligado, que o módulo externo de indicação e operação está conectado:
• A indicação do 3RW44 é feita de forma inversa; a indicação no módulo de indicação e operação é apresentada de forma normal.
• As teclas do módulo 3RW44 estão inactivas; todas as outras teclas e indicações dos módulos estão activas.
• O manejo usual do sistema 3RW44 é então possível através do módulo de indicação e operação.
Indicação
Indicação LED acima, à esquerda = verde o comunicação com o módulo 3RW44 está activa A operação no 3RW44 só é possível a partir da
Indicação LED abaixo, à esquerda = vermelho o erro geral (EG) versão do produto E05
Harici gösterge ve kumanda modülü

UyarÖ
! Gösterge ve kumanda modülünü ba÷lamadan ya da ba÷lantÕyÕ çözmeden önce, 3RW44 modülünü daima gerilimsiz hale getiriniz.
3RW44 modülüne daima sadece bir gösterge ve kumanda modülü ba÷lanabilir.
Bu uyarÕya dikkat edilmezse, insanlara ve/veya mala zarar gelebilir (örn. motor harekete geçebilir, 3RW44 reset olabilir, gösterge ve
kumanda modülü zarar görebilir veya tüm iletiúim devre dÕúÕ kalabilir).
3RW44 modülü devreye sokulduktan sonra, harici gösterge ve kumanda modülünün ba÷lanmÕú oldu÷unu tespit eder:
• 3RW44 modülünün göstergesi tersinmiú ekran görüntüsü úeklinde görüntülenir, gösterge ve kumanda modülündeki görüntü normal görüntülenir.
• 3RW44 modülünün tuúlarÕ aktif de÷ildir, modüllerin tüm di÷er tuúlarÕ ve göstergeleri aktiftir.
• 3RW44 sisteminden bilinen ve alÕúÕlmÕú kullanÕm úimdi gösterge ve kumanda modülü üzerinden yapÕlabilir.
Gösterge
LED göstergesi üst sol = yeúil o 3RW44 modülü ile iletiúim aktif. Sadece 3RW44 ünitesinde E05 üretim
LED göstergesi alt sol = kÕrmÕzÕ o Toplam hata (SF) konumundan itibaren kullanÕlabilir!
Ƚɨɠɳɨɣɤ ɧɩɟɮɦɷ ɣɨɟɣɥɛɱɣɣ ɣ ɮɪɫɛɝɦɠɨɣɺ

Ɋɫɠɟɮɪɫɠɡɟɠɨɣɠ
! ɉɪɢ ɩɨɞɫɨɟɞɢɧɟɧɢɢ ɢɥɢ ɨɬɫɨɟɞɢɧɟɧɢɢ ɦɨɞɭɥɹ ɢɧɞɢɤɚɰɢɢ ɢ ɭɩɪɚɜɥɟɧɢɹ ɨɛɹɡɚɬɟɥɶɧɨ ɨɬɤɥɸɱɚɣɬɟ ɩɢɬɚɧɢɟ ɦɨɞɭɥɹ 3RW44.
Ʉ 3RW44 ɦɨɠɧɨ ɩɨɞɤɥɸɱɢɬɶ ɬɨɥɶɤɨ ɨɞɢɧ ɦɨɞɭɥɶ ɢɧɞɢɤɚɰɢɢ ɢ ɭɩɪɚɜɥɟɧɢɹ.
ɉɪɢ ɧɟɫɨɛɥɸɞɟɧɢɢ ɷɬɢɯ ɭɫɥɨɜɢɣ ɜɨɡɪɚɫɬɚɟɬ ɪɢɫɤ ɬɪɚɜɦɢɪɨɜɚɧɢɹ ɩɟɪɫɨɧɚɥɚ ɢɥɢ ɧɚɧɟɫɟɧɢɹ ɭɳɟɪɛɚ ɢɦɭɳɟɫɬɜɭ (ɧɚɩɪɢɦɟɪ,
ɦɨɠɟɬ ɩɪɨɢɡɨɣɬɢ ɩɭɫɤ ɞɜɢɝɚɬɟɥɹ, ɫɛɪɨɫ 3RW44 ɢɥɢ ɩɨɜɪɟɠɞɟɧɢɟ ɦɨɞɭɥɹ ɢɧɞɢɤɚɰɢɢ ɢ ɭɩɪɚɜɥɟɧɢɹ, ɬɚɤɠɟ ɦɨɠɟɬ ɢɦɟɬɶ ɦɟɫɬɨ
ɜɵɯɨɞ ɢɡ ɫɬɪɨɹ ɤɨɦɦɭɧɢɤɚɰɢɣ).
Ɇɨɞɭɥɶ 3RW44 ɩɨɫɥɟ ɜɤɥɸɱɟɧɢɹ ɨɩɪɟɞɟɥɹɟɬ, ɩɨɞɤɥɸɱɟɧ ɥɢ ɜɧɟɲɧɢɣ ɦɨɞɭɥɶ ɢɧɞɢɤɚɰɢɢ ɢ ɭɩɪɚɜɥɟɧɢɹ:
• ɂɧɞɢɤɚɬɨɪ ɧɚ 3RW44 ɪɚɛɨɬɚɟɬ ɜ ɢɧɜɟɪɬɢɪɨɜɚɧɧɨɦ ɪɟɠɢɦɟ, ɚ ɢɧɞɢɤɚɬɨɪ ɧɚ ɦɨɞɭɥɟ ɭɩɪɚɜɥɟɧɢɹ ɜ ɧɨɪɦɚɥɶɧɨɦ ɪɟɠɢɦɟ.
• Ʉɥɚɜɢɲɢ ɧɚ ɦɨɞɭɥɟ 3RW44 ɧɟɚɤɬɢɜɧɵ, ɜɫɟ ɨɫɬɚɥɶɧɵɟ ɤɥɚɜɢɲɢ ɢ ɢɧɞɢɤɚɬɨɪɵ ɧɚ ɦɨɞɭɥɹɯ ɚɤɬɢɜɧɵ.
• ɉɨɫɥɟ ɷɬɨɝɨ ɦɨɠɧɨ ɭɩɪɚɜɥɹɬɶ ɫɢɫɬɟɦɨɣ 3RW44 ɩɪɢɜɵɱɧɵɦ ɨɛɪɚɡɨɦ, ɧɨ ɭɠɟ ɫ ɩɨɦɨɳɶɸ ɦɨɞɭɥɹ ɢɧɞɢɤɚɰɢɢ ɢ ɭɩɪɚɜɥɟɧɢɹ.
Ƀɨɟɣɥɛɭɩɫ
ɋɂȾ-ɢɧɞɢɤɚɬɨɪ ɫɜɟɪɯɭ ɫɥɟɜɚ = ɡɟɥɟɧɵɣ o ɫɨɨɛɳɟɧɢɟ ɫ ɦɨɞɭɥɟɦ 3RW44 ɚɤɬɢɜɧɨ. ȼɨɡɦɨɠɧɚ ɪɚɛɨɬɚ ɬɨɥɶɤɨ ɧɚ 3RW44 ɫ ɭɪɨɜɧɹ
ɋɂȾ-ɢɧɞɢɤɚɬɨɪ ɫɧɢɡɭ ɫɥɟɜɚ = ɤɪɚɫɧɵɣ o ɨɛɳɚɹ ɨɲɢɛɤɚ (SF) ɩɪɨɞɭɤɬɚ E05!
3ZX3012-0RW40-1AA1 3
92
3UF7950-0AA00-0
3UF7900-0AA00-0
55
4x
96 28
SIRIUS 3RW44
DEVICE
60
SF
29.1
32.3
35.6
Length 0.5 m (flat) 3UF7932-0AA00-0

Length 0.5 m (round) 3UF7932-0BA00-0
1 clic
clic
2
1
4 3ZX3012-0RW40-1AA1
Beim Einsatz im Schiffbau sind folgende Maßnahmen nötig
• Die Verbindungsleitung ist mit einer Schleife durch einen Ferrit zu legen (Fa. Würth Elektronik, Bestell-Nr. 74271221).
• Der Ferrit ist nahe am Anzeige- und Bedienmodul zu platzieren. Abstand maximal 10 cm.
FP
Achtung
An die Service-Schnittstelle darf nur zu Servicezwecken belegt werden. Im Betrieb darf diese Schnittstelle nicht belegt sein, die
Abdeckung muss gesteckt sein.
The following measures are necessary for application in shipbuilding

• The connecting lead must be laid through a ferrite in a loop (Fa. Würth Elektronik, order number 74271221).
• The ferrite must be positioned close to the display and operating module, at a maximum distance of 10 cm from it.
FP
Attention
Connections are only made to the service port for servicing purposes. This port must not be assigned during operation, and the cover
must be plugged in.
Lors de la mise en oeuvre dans la construction navale, prendre les mesures suivantes
• poser la ligne de raccordement en formant une boucle pour la faire passer dans une coque en ferrite (Sté. Würth Elektronik,
N° de référence 74271221).
• Le coque en ferrite doit être placée à proximité du module d’affichage et de commande. Distance max. env. 10 cm.
FP
Attention
L'interface d’entretien ne doit être occupée que pour les besoins de l'entretien. En cours de service, cette interface ne doit pas être
occupée, le cache doit être en place.
En la aplicación en la construcción de barcos son necesarias tomar las medidas siguientes

• La línea de conexión se ha de colocar mediante bucle a través de la ferrita (Emp. Würth Elektronik, Nº de pedido. 74271221).
• La ferrita se ha de emplazar próximo al módulo de indicación y operación. Distancia máxima 10 cm.
FP
Atención
El interfaz de asistencia técnica sólo podrá ser ocupado para fines de asistencia técnica. Durante el funcionamiento normal este
interfaz deberá estar libre sin ocupar e insertada la cubrición.
3ZX3012-0RW40-1AA1 5
Nell’impiego nelle costruzioni navali sono necessarie le seguenti misure
• Il cavo di connessione va fatto passare, con un cappio, attraverso un anello di ferrite (Würth Elektronik, nr. di ordinazione 74271221).
• L’anello di ferrite va collocato vicino al modulo di comando e visualizzazione. Distanza massima 10 cm.
FP
Attenzione
L’interfaccia di servizio va usata solo per scopi di servizio. Durante il funzionamento questa interfaccia deve rimanere libera e
coperta dall’apposito tappo.
Para a utilização na construção naval, são necessárias as seguintes medidas

• A linha de conexão deve ser assente com um circuito através de um ferrite (firma Würth Elektronik, n° de pedido 74271221).
• O ferrite deve ser colocado próximo ao módulo de operação e indicação. Distância máxima: 10 cm.
FP
Atenção
A interface de serviço só deve ser ocupada para fins de serviço. Durante a operação, esta interface não deve ser ocupada, a tampa
deve estar colocada.
Gemi yapÖmÖnda kullanÖlÖrken, aûaøÖdaki önlemlerin alÖnmasÖ gerekmektedir:

• Ba÷lantÕ hattÕ alaúÕmlÕ çelikten yapÕlmÕú bir hat ile döúenmelidir (Firma Würth Elektronik, Sipariú NumarasÕ 74271221)
• AlaúÕmlÕ çelik gösterge ve kullanÕcÕ modülüne yakÕn bir yere yerleútirilmelidir. Aradaki mesafe maksimum 10 cm olmalÕdÕr.
FP
Dikkat
Servis ara yüzleri sadece servis amacÕna uygun olarak kullanÕlmalÕdÕr. øúletim esnasÕnda bu ara yüzün boú olmasÕ gerekir, örtüsü de
takÕlmÕú olmalÕdÕr.
Ɋɫɣ ɣɬɪɩɦɷɢɩɝɛɨɣɣ ɝ ɬɮɟɩɬɭɫɩɠɨɣɣ ɨɠɩɜɰɩɟɣɧɶ ɬɦɠɟɮɹɴɣɠ ɫɛɢɧɠɫɶ

• ɉɪɨɥɨɠɢɬɶ ɫɨɟɞɢɧɢɬɟɥɶɧɭɸ ɥɢɧɢɸ ɫ ɩɟɬɥɟɣ ɱɟɪɟɡ ɮɟɪɪɢɬ (ɮɢɪɦɚ Würth Elektronik, ɡɚɤɚɡɧɨɣ ʋ 74271221).
• Ɋɚɡɦɟɫɬɢɬɶ ɮɟɪɪɢɬ ɤɚɤ ɦɨɠɧɨ ɛɥɢɠɟ ɤ ɦɨɞɭɥɸ ɢɧɞɢɤɚɰɢɢ ɢ ɭɩɪɚɜɥɟɧɢɹ. Ɋɚɫɫɬɨɹɧɢɟ ɦɚɤɫɢɦɭɦ 10 ɫɦ.
FP
Ƚɨɣɧɛɨɣɠ
ɋɟɪɜɢɫɧɵɟ ɢɧɬɟɪɮɟɣɫɵ ɦɨɠɧɨ ɢɫɩɨɥɶɡɨɜɚɬɶ ɬɨɥɶɤɨ ɜ ɫɟɪɜɢɫɧɵɯ ɰɟɥɹɯ. ȼɨ ɜɪɟɦɹ ɷɤɫɩɥɭɚɬɚɰɢɢ ɷɬɨɬ ɢɧɬɟɪɮɟɣɫ
ɢɫɩɨɥɶɡɨɜɚɬɶ ɧɟɥɶɡɹ, ɨɧ ɞɨɥɠɟɧ ɛɵɬɶ ɡɚɤɪɵɬ ɤɪɵɲɤɨɣ.
Technische Änderungen vorbehalten. Zum späteren Gebrauch aufbewahren. Bestell-Nr./Order No.: 3ZX3012-0RW40-1AA1
Subject to change without prior notice. Store for use at a later date. Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
© Siemens AG 2006
10-11
SIEMENS SIMEAS P 7KG7750/55 POWER METER Manual

Foreword, Contents
Commissioning 1
Operation 2
Power Meter
Measured Quantities 3
SIMEAS P 7KG7750/55 Device Parameterization 4
Parameterization via PC Software 5
Manual
Calibration 6
Technical Data 7
E50417-B1076-C340-A3
Note
Please observe the instructions and warnings for your safety in the foreword.
Disclaimer of Liability Copyright

We have checked the contents of this document and every effort Copyright Siemens AG 2009
has been made to ensure that the descriptions of both hardware This document shall not be transmitted or reproduced, nor shall its
and software are as accurate as possible. However, since deviati- contents be exploited or disclosed to third parties without prior writ-
ons cannot be ruled out entirely, we do not accept liability for com- ten consent from Siemens. Offenders will be liable for damages. All
plete conformity or for any errors or omissions. rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a
The information in this manual is checked periodically, and neces- utility model or design, are reserved.
sary corrections will be included in future editions. We are grateful
for any improvements that you care to suggest. Registered Trademarks
SIPROTEC®, DIGSI®, OSCOP® and SIMEAS® are registered
Subject to technical alterations. trademarks of SIEMENS AG.
Document Release V01.11.01 Other designations in this manual might be trademarks whose use
Edition 01.2009 by third parties for their own purposes would infringe the rights of
the owner.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Order No.: E50417-B1076-C340-A3

Foreword
Purpose of the manual

This manual describes the commissioning, operation and parameterization of the Power Meter
SIMEAS P 7KG7750/55.
Target audience
This manual is directed to the user of the Power Meter SIMEAS P.
Validity of the manual

This manual is valid for the devices SIMEAS P 7KG7750/55.
Additional support
For any questions concerning your system, please contact your local Siemens representative.
Hotline
Our Customer Support Center provides around-the-clock service.
Phone: +49 180 5 247000
Fax: +49 180 5 242471
E-mail: support.energy@siemens.com
Internet: http://www.powerquality.de/pq_da/index_e.htm
FAQ: http://www.siemens.com/energy-support/faq-en
Further documents
SIMEAS P Power Meter 7KG775x Operating Instructions
Ordering no. E50417-B1074-C339
SIMEAS P PROFIBUS DP Manual

Power Meter SIMEAS P Modbus Manual

Power Meter SIMEAS P 7KG7750/55 Communication Protocol IEC 60870-5-103 Manual

Power Meter, SIMEAS P 7KG7750/55, Manual 3

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
Foreword
Training courses
Please ask our Training Center for information on the individual courses available:
Siemens AG
Power Transmission and Distribution
Power Training Center
Humboldtstr. 59
90459 Nuremberg
Germany
Phone: +49 911 433-7005
Fax: +49 911 433-7929
Internet: www.ptd-training.com
4 Power Meter, SIMEAS P 7KG7750/55, Manual

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
Foreword
Information for your safety

This manual does not represent a complete listing of all the safety measures required to operate
the equipment (module, device) since specific operating conditions may make further measures
necessary. However, it contains information which you have to observe in order to ensure your
personal safety and in order to avoid material damage. The information is highlighted by a warn-
ing triangle and, depending on the degree of danger, is shown as follows:
Danger
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial material damage will result if appropriate precau-
tions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial material damage may result if appropriate precau-
tions are not taken.
Caution
indicates that minor bodily injury or material damage may result if appropriate precautions are not taken.
Important
indicates that material damage may result if appropriate precautions are not taken.
Note
indicates important information about the device, its handling or the respective part of the instruction manual
to which attention should be drawn.
Qualified personnel
Commissioning and operation of the equipment (module, device) described in this manual may only be
carried out by qualified personnel. Qualified personnel in the sense of the safety instructions in this manual
are persons who are entitled to commission, enable, earth and identify devices, systems and circuits in
accordance with the standards of safety technology.
Use as prescribed
The equipment (device, module) may only be used for the applications described in the catalogue and the
technical specifications and only in combination with third party equipment recommended or approved by
Siemens.
The successful and safe operation of this device is dependent on proper handling, storage, installation,
operation, and maintenance.
Hazardous voltages are present in parts of this electrical equipment during operation. Severe personal injury
or material damage may result if the device is not handled properly.
x The device is to be earthed to the protective-earth terminal before any other connections are made.
x Hazardous voltages may occur in all the circuit parts connected to the power supply.
x Hazardous voltages may be present in the equipment even after the power supply has been removed
(capacitors may still be charged).
x Equipment with current transformer circuits must not be operated openly.
x The limit values specified in the manual or in the operating instructions must not be exceeded;
this must also be observed during testing and commissioning.
Power Meter, SIMEAS P 7KG7750/55, Manual 5

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
Foreword
Statemant of Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities
on the approximation of the laws of the member states relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Council Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical
equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC).
This conformity has been proved by tests performed according to the Council
Directives in agreement with the generic standards EN 61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4
(for EMC Directive) and with the standard EN 61010-1 (for Low Voltage Directive) by
Siemens AG.
This device was designed and produced for industrial use according to the standard
EN 61000-6-4.
The product conforms to the standards IEC 60688, EN 60688 or DIN EN 60688.
6 Power Meter, SIMEAS P 7KG7750/55, Manual

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
Contents
Contents
1 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.1 Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.2 Ordering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.2.1 SIMEAS P 7KG7750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.2.2 SIMEAS P 7KG7755 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.2.3 Parameterization Package. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.3 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.3.1 Device Variant SIMEAS P 7KG7750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.3.2 Device Variant SIMEAS P 7KG7755 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.4 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.5 Interface and Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.5.1 Terminal Assignment SIMEAS P 7KG7750/55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.5.2 Terminal Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.5.3 Assignment of the Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.5.4 Connection Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.5.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.5.4.2 Single-phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.5.4.3 Three-phase, Three-wire, Balanced. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.5.4.4 Three-phase, Three-wire, Unbalanced ( 2 I, Aron Circuit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.5.4.5 Three-phase, Four-wire, Balanced. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.5.4.6 Three-phase, Four-wire, Unbalanced (Low-voltage System). . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.5.4.7 Three-phase, Four-wire, Unbalanced (High-voltage System) . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.5.5 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.5.6 Electrical Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.1 Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

2.2 Screen Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.2.1 Screen Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.2.1.1 3 Measured Values - Digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.2.1.2 6 Measured Values - Digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.2.1.3 U, I and cos f (Phasors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.2.1.4 3 Min-Max Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2.2.2 Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3 Measured Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.1 Measured Quantities - Depend on the Connection Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

3.2 Formulas and Calculation of Derived Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.2.1 Calculation of Derived Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.2.2 Remarks to the Measuring Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Power Meter SIMEAS P 7KG7750/55, Manual 7

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
Inhaltsverzeichnis
3.3 Connection Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

3.3.1 Four-wire Three-phase Current with Any Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.3.2 Single-phase AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.3.3 Four-wire Three-phase Current with Symmetrical Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.3.4 Three-wire Three-phase Current with Symmetrical Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.3.5 Three-wire Three-phase Current with Any Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.4 View of Measured Quantities and Error Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4 Device Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.1 Operating Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

4.1.1 Button Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.1.2 Windows Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.1.3 Notes on Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.2 Overview of the Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4.3 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
4.3.1 Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
4.3.2 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
4.3.3 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
4.3.4 Date / Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
4.3.5 Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.4 Basic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.4.1 Settings Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.4.2 Connection / Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4.4.2.1 Current Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4.4.2.2 Voltage Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4.4.3 Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.4.3.1 Screen for Energy Pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.4.3.2 Screen for Limit Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.4.4 Communication Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.4.4.1 General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.4.4.2 IEC 60870-5-103 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
4.4.5 Changing the Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.4.5.1 Password of Code 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.4.5.2 Password of Code 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
4.4.6 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.4.7 Additional Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
4.4.8 Further Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
4.5 About SIMEAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.6 Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
4.7 Reset Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4.8 Parameterization Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4.9 I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4.10 Memory Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4.11 Data Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.11.1 Data Logger Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.11.2 Data Logger Limit Violation Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.11.3 Data Logger Binary States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
8 Power Meter SIMEAS P 7KG7750/55, Manual

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
Contents
4.12 Overflow of Measured Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
5 Parameterization via PC Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
5.1 Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
5.2 Overview of Parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5.2.1 Overview of Parameterization 7KG7750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5.2.2 Overview of Parameterization 7KG7755 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5.3 Date / Time Settings and Transmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
5.4 Dialog Window SIMEAS P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
5.5 Basic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5.5.1 Connection / Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5.6 Screens Setting on SIMEAS P 7KG7750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
5.6.1 Basic Screen Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
5.6.2 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
5.7 Input / Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
5.7.1 Binary / Relay Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
5.7.2 Information on Energy Pulse Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5.7.2.1 Parameterization via Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5.7.2.2 Pulse Time, Switch Off Time, Number of Pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5.7.2.3 Parameterization of Energy Pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
5.7.2.4 Parameterization of Energy Pulses via Parameterization Software. . . . . . . 91
5.7.3 Basic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
5.7.4 Analog Outputs (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5.7.5 Analog Inputs (optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
5.7.6 Binary Inputs (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.8 Additionals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
5.8.1 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.8.2 Device Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
5.8.3 Limit Value Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
5.8.4 Clock Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
5.9 Memory Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5.9.1 Splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
5.9.2 Mean Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
5.9.3 Power Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
5.9.4 Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5.9.4.1 Characteristics of „Instantaneous Values“ Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5.9.4.2 Characteristics of "RMS Value" Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5.9.5 Parameterization Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5.9.6 Limit Violation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
5.9.7 Binary States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.10 Updating the Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
5.11 Resetting Values in the Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
Inhaltsverzeichnis
5.12 Reading the Device Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

5.12.1 Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
5.12.2 Charts / Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
5.12.3 Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
5.12.4 Timestamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
5.12.5 Mean Value Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
5.12.6 Power Value Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
5.12.7 Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
5.12.8 Limit Violation Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
5.12.9 Binary States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5.12.10 Log Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5.13 Changing the Communication Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
6 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

6.2 Connection Diagrams for Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6.3 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
7 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
7.1 SIMEAS P 7KG7750. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

7.2 SIMEAS P 7KG7755. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
Commissioning 1
Contents
The following chapters describe all aspects of commissioning.
1.1 Delivery 12
1.2 Ordering Data 13
1.3 Dimensions 15
1.4 Block Diagram 19
1.5 Interface and Terminals 21

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
1
1.1 Delivery
1.1 Delivery
Delivery note
The power meter will be delivered in a cardboard box containing the SIMEAS P logo.
Contents of delivery
1 Device SIMEAS P
2 Panel mounting fittings (only 7KG7750)
1 Operating Instruction (Ordering no. E50417-B1074-C339)
1 Return Card
1 Device Test Report
1 Battery VARTA CR2032
Warning:
Servicing of the battery circuit and replacing of the battery must be performed by qualified per-
sonnel only.
Battery may explode if mistreated.
Do not reverse the polarity! Do not disassemble! Do not completely discharge! Do not throw the
battery into a fire!
Warning:
Hint on battery disposal
When discharged, or when properly secured against short-circuit, lithium batteries can be dis-
posed of through retailers or at depots run by competent organizations (e.g. in Germany GRS
collection points).
Warning:
Transport
The lithium-batteries in our equipment are subject to special provision 188/A45 of the dangerous
goods regulations of the different transport modes (as in edition 2003, lithium content and tests
of UN-Manual of Tests and Criteria).
This is only valid for the original battery or original spare batteries. For general transport security
by shipment as freight: Electric equipment is only to be sent as freight if shut off.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
1
1.2 Ordering Data
1.2 Ordering Data
1.2.1 SIMEAS P 7KG7750
Description Order No.

Power Meter
SIMEAS P 7KG7750 7KG 7 7 5 0 - 0 A 0 - 0AA

Built in device for control panels 96 mm x 96 mm
with graphic display
I/O module (optional)

Without (standard) A
2 binary outputs B
2 binary inputs C
2 analog outputs
DC 0 mA to 20 mA / DC 4 mA to 20 mA D
2 analog inputs
DC 0 mA to 20 mA E
3 relay outputs G
Front protection class

IP 41 1
IP 65 3
Communication interface and protocols

PROFIBUS DP and Modbus RTU/ASCII / RS485 0
IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU/ASCII / RS485 1

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
1
1.2 Ordering Data
1.2.2 SIMEAS P 7KG7755

Power Meter
SIMEAS P 7KG7755 7KG 7 7 5 5 - 0 A 0 0 - 0AA

Snap on mounting unit 96 mm x 96 mm, without
grafic display, front protection class IP 20
I/O Module (optional)

Without (standard) A
2 binary outputs B
2 binary inputs C
2 analog outputs
DC 0 mA to 20 mA / DC 4 mA to 20 mA D
2 analog inputs
DC 0 mA to 20 mA E
3 relay outputs G
Communication interface and protocols

PROFIBUS DP and Modbus RTU/ASCII / RS485 0
IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU/ASCII / RS485 1
1.2.3 Parameterization Package
SIMEAS P Parameterization Package 7KG 7 0 5 0 - 8 A

Software SIMEAS P PAR,
RS232/RS485 adapter
Type
RS485 / 5 V-power supply unit /
supply voltage AC 230 V / 50 Hz A
RS485 / 5 V-power supply unit /
supply voltage AC 120 V / 60 Hz B

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
1
1.3 Dimensions
1.3 Dimensions
1.3.1 Device Variant SIMEAS P 7KG7750
Note: All dimensions in mm
Fig. 1-1 SIMEAS P 7KG7750, variant IP 41

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
1
1.3 Dimensions
Fig. 1-2 SIMEAS P 7KG7750, variant IP 65

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
1
1.3 Dimensions
Fig. 1-3 SIMEAS P 7KG7750
Technical Data for Housing

Housing: Flush mounting according to IEC 61554/DIN 43700
Panel section: 92.0+0,8 mm x 92.0+0,8 mm
Protection class: front IP 41 or IP 65
terminals IP 20
for personal security IP 1x
Terminals
Terminals for power supply, voltage inputs, current inputs, binary outputs, I/O modules (optio-
nal):
Conductor cross section, rigid max.: 2.5 mm2
Conductor cross section with ferrule: 1.5 mm2
Stripping length: 9 mm
Tightening torque: 0.4 Nm to 0.5 Nm
RS485 interface 9-pole D-Sub miniature female connector

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
1
1.3 Dimensions
1.3.2 Device Variant SIMEAS P 7KG7755
Fig. 1-4 SIMEAS P 7KG7755, snap on mounting unit
Technical Data for Housing

Housing snap on mounting unit
Protection class front / terminals IP 20
for personal security IP 1x
Terminals
Terminals for power supply, voltage inputs, current inputs, binary outputs, I/O modules (optio-
nal):
Conductor cross section, rigid max.: 2.5 mm2
Conductor cross section with ferrule: 1.5 mm2
Stripping length: 9 mm
Tightening torque: 0.4 Nm to 0.5 Nm
RS485 interface 9-pole D-Sub miniature female connector

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
1.4
RS485, Modbus and
Note:
SIMEAS P 7KG775x
Fig. 1-5
IEC 60870-5-103
1 Protective Ground
3A
4 RTS
5 GND
6 +5 V
8B
PROFIBUS DP
1 Protective Ground
Measurement Auxiliary Voltage Binary Outputs 3B
4 CTRL-A
Block Diagram
E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009

5 GND
6 +5 V
Power Meter SIMEAS P 7KG7750/55, Manual

8A
Voltage Current
communication
R B2 B1
L1 L2 L3 N L1 L2 L3 N/- L/+
Block diagram SIMEAS P 7KG7750/55

J
Terminal block F Terminal block E Terminal block H Terminal block G
DC: 24 to 250 V
AC: 100 to 230 V
k l RS485
L1
RS232
L2 k l
L3 k l
The integrated battery serves to buffer the memory and the real-time clock
N
PG
1.4 Block Diagram
1
19
1
1.4 Block Diagram
A1 A2 A3 A4 A1 A2 A3 A4
+ 1 - + 2 - + 1 - + 2
50 Ohm 50 Ohm
SIMEAS P
7KG775x
2 x 0 to 20 mA/ 2 x 0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
I/O Modules
Analogue outputs Analogue inputs
slot A optional slot A optional
slot A optional slot A optional slot A optional
Binary outputs Relay outputs Binary inputs
1 2 3 R 1 R R 2
R 1 2
A1 A2 A3 A4
A1 A2 A3 A4 A1 A2 A3 A4
DC DC
Fig. 1-6 I/O modules (option)
Additional input and output modules (see ordering data, chapter 1.2) are available for the device
7KG7750/55:
x Binary inputs (2 contacts with common contact)
x Binary outputs (2 contacts with common contact)
x Relay outputs (3 contacts with common contact)
x Analog inputs (2 channels)
x Analog outputs (2 channels)

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
1
1.5 Interface and Terminals
1.5.1 Terminal Assignment SIMEAS P 7KG7750/55
Fig. 1-7 Terminal assignment SIMEAS P 7KG7750/55
Warning
Always connect the earth to the earthing terminal of the SIMEAS P 7KG7750/55.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
1
1.5.2 Terminal Assignment
Table 1-1 Terminal assignment
Terminal Function
E1 IL1 IA Phase current 1, input
E2 IL1 IA Phase current 1, output
E3 IL2 IB Phase current 2, input
E4 IL2 IB Phase current 2, output
E5 IL3 IC Phase current 3, input
E6 IL3 IC Phase current 3, output
F1 UL1 UA Phase voltage 1
F2 UL2 UB Phase voltage 2
F3 UL3 UC Phase voltage 3
F4 UN UN Star point voltage measurement
G1 Common Common Common contact for the internal binary outputs 1

contact contact and 2
G2 B2 B2 Binary output 2
G3 B1 B1 Binary output 1
H1 Protective ground
H2 N/- N/- Supply voltage -
H3 L/+ L/+ Supply voltage +
A1 to A4 Optional, see Table 1-2, I/O modules

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
1
Table 1-2 I/O modules (see Figure 1-6)
Ordering no.
Modul Type Terminal Allocation
(see chapter 1.2)
not equipped A
BO B
2 binary outputs n.c.
BO2+
BO1+
BOR
BI C
2 binary inputs BI2+
BIR
BIR
BI1+
AO D
2 analog outputs AO2-
AO2+
AO1-
AO1+
AI E
2 analog inputs AI2-
AI2+
AI1-
AI1+
RO G
3 relay outputs ROR
RO3
RO2
RO1

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
1
1.5.3 Assignment of the Interface
Table 1-3 Terminal assignment of RS485 interface
RS485 Interface
Pin No.
Modbus / IEC 60870-5-103 Profibus DP
1 Shield Shield
3 A B(RxD/TxD-P)
4 RTS CTRL-A
5 GNDEXT GNDEXT
6 +5 VEXT +5 VEXT
8 B A(RxD/TxD-N)
The housing of the RS485 interface is connected to the protective ground. We recommend using
standard connecting cables. The bus termination is accomplished via the connecting cable.
The isolated supply voltage of the interface is available at the D-Sub female connector, thus allo-
wing the data signal terminating resistors to be connected to the connecting cable.
+5 V
:
:
:
Fig. 1-8 Termination of the RS485 interface (external)

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
1
1.5.4 Connection Examples
1.5.4.1 General
The following are examples of current and voltage input connections (according to DIN 43807).
The device can be connected without current or voltage transformers as long as the maximum
voltage and current ratings of the device are not exceeded.
The voltage transformers can be connected in wye or open-delta configurations.
All input and/or output terminals not required for a particular input voltage and current configura-
tion are not used.
Terminal designation of measuring instruments for single-phase and three-phase alternating
current according to DIN 43807 / Oct. 1983:
DIN 43807 1 3 4 6 7 9 11 2 5 8
IA IA IB IB IC IC
Terninal n p n p n p
N UA UB UC
SIMEAS P E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 F4 F1 F2 F3
Caution:
The single ground connection of the instrument transformers is shown for illustration only. Actual
grounds must be installed directly at each instrument transformer.
1.5.4.2 Single-phase

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
1
1.5.4.3 Three-phase, Three-wire, Balanced
Warning:
The maximum secondary voltage is AC 480 V in this example. Care must be taken not to exceed
the maximum permissible voltage between phase and earth.
1.5.4.4 Three-phase, Three-wire, Unbalanced ( 2 I, Aron Circuit)
Warning:
The maximum secondary voltage is AC 480 V in this example. Care must be taken not to exceed
the maximum permissible voltage between phase and earth.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
1
1.5.4.5 Three-phase, Four-wire, Balanced
1.5.4.6 Three-phase, Four-wire, Unbalanced (Low-voltage System)
1.5.4.7 Three-phase, Four-wire, Unbalanced (High-voltage System)

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
1
1.5.5 Commissioning
The ratings and information on the nameplate should be checked prior to connecting the power
supply voltage. In particular, power supply voltage ratings, as well as input voltage and current
ratings should be verified. An operating period of 15 minutes is required before the device will
perform within specified accuracy limits.
The battery serves to buffer the memory and the real-time clock of the SIMEAS P. The battery
is included in the delivery scope. The battery is delivered in an isolated state. Remove the cover
of the battery slot on the top of the device and remove the battery and the isolation. Insert the
battery without isolation according to the polarity printed on the top of the device (marking shield)
and replace the battery cover.
If the battery voltage is low the battery symbol occurs in status line of the display. Please change
the battery in this case as described before. Use an isolated tool to remove the battery from the
device to avoid a short circuit!
Warning:
All electrical connections must be divided by the device before the battery change.
1.5.6 Electrical Connection
Warning:
Warning of dangerous voltages when operating an electrical device. Only qualified people shall
work on and around this device. They must be thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety
notices in this instruction manual as well as with the applicable safety steps, safety regulations,
and precautionary measures.
During electrical installation, all rules and regulations for power systems must be obser-
ved.
x Short-circuit the current transformer secondary circuits before current connections to the
device are opened.
x The protective ground terminal of the device must be connected to the protective ground of
the panel or cubicle.
x For connection of an auxiliary DC voltage, the correct polarity must be used.
x All of the terminals should be checked to verify proper connections.
x The polarities and phasing of all instrument transformers should be checked.
x Before initially energizing the device with supply voltage, it shall be situated in the operating
area for at least two hours to ensure temperature equalization and to avoid humidity and con-
densation problems.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
Operation 2
Contents
The following chapters describe the operation of the SIMEAS P 7KG7750. The operation of the
SIMEAS P 7KG7755 is not described because this device has no display.
2.1 Screen Display 30
2.2 Screen Content 30

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
2
2.1 Screen Display
2.1 Screen Display
Once the SIMEAS P has been connected and configured for its measuring task, the measured
quantities you have defined are displayed in screens.
<> Bd/Prm AP 2/10

<> Bd/Prm AP 2/10

<> Bd/Prm Min-Max AP12:30
2/10
UL1 230.11 V
UL1
UL1 UL2

233.53
228.59
V
V V
UL2
UL2 UL3

231.47
227.33
V
V V
UL3
UL3 V
233.48 V
x Specific screens can be selected via the two front arrow buttons .
x Press an arrow button once to display the next or previous screen.
x Hold an arrow button down to scroll through the screens automatically
x If desired, automatic scrolling can be programmed for normal display. When scrolling, the
screens are arranged in a loop format (i.e., the first screen follows the last in one direction,
whereas the last screen follows the first in the opposite direction, etc.).
2.2 Screen Content
The simple and individual screen design enables you to read the information relevant to your
measuring tasks at a glance. The number of screens (max. 20), the screen types and their con-
tents can be parameterized as required.
2.2.1 Screen Types
The following screen types are available:

x three measured values - digital
x six measured values - digital
x U, I, cos I
x three min-max values

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
2
2.2 Screen Content
2.2.1.1 3 Measured Values - Digital
Display of any three measured quantities from the measured quantities Table 3-1.
<> Bd/Prm AP 2/10
UL1 V
UL2 V
UL3 V
2.2.1.2 6 Measured Values - Digital
Display of any six measured quantities from the measured quantities Table 3-1.
<> Bd/Prm AP 2/10
UL1 10.12 kV
UL2 10.34 kV
UL3 10.42 kV
IL1 245.4 A
IL2 244.6 A
IL3 249.4 A
2.2.1.3 U, I and cos I (Phasors)
x fast overview of the network conditions

x digital display of all connected phases
x measured quantities: U, I, cos I
U I
10.12 kV 245.4 A
10.34 kV 244.6 A
10.42 kV 249.4 A
cos I
0.922 ind
0.923 ind
0.927 ind

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
2
2.2 Screen Content
2.2.1.4 3 Min-Max Values
x Up to three measured quantities from the measured quantities tables (except energy and
metered values) can be monitored here.
x The minimum, average and maximum values since recording was last initiated are displayed
for a specific measured quantity. The values remain valid in case of a power failure.
x Recording is initiated (date and time):
x when the device is switched on or
x via "Reset" of the Min-Max values at the programming level.
x If no date/time is set, the duration of the recording is indicated in hours and minutes. If the
time is set, the date and time of recording initiation are indicated.
<> Bd/Prm AP 2/10

29.08 Min-Max 12:30
230.11
UL1 233.53 V
228.59
UL2 231.47 V
227.33
UL3 233.48 V

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
2
2.2 Screen Content
2.2.2 Status Bar
The screens (except for U, I, cos I) have a status line that displays the status of the device.
Diagnosis of bus Status of device

Binary outputs
and device password protection
<> Bd/Prm AP 2/10
Phase rotation Receive or deliver Screen number and total

Battery symbol
indicator energy number of screens
Meaning of the symbols
Symbol Meaning
<> Serial telegram sent / receive
Bd Searching for the Profibus baud rate
Cfg Waiting for the correct configuration of Profibus
Prm Waiting for the correct parameters of Profibus
Direction of rotation from UL1 to UL2 (UA to UB)
Receive (this symbol) or delifer (resistor symbol) energy
Status of binary outputs
If the battery voltage falls below the defined threshold, then the symbol
will be displayed in the status line. Please replace the battery in this case
(see chapter 1.5.5).
If the password protection is active a lock with a closed fastener will be
displayed.
A Recording of average values active
P Recording of power values active

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
2
2.2 Screen Content

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
Measured Quantities 3
Contents
The following chapters describe the measured quantities.
3.1 Measured Quantities - Depend on the Connection Type 36
3.2 Formulas and Calculation of Derived Quantities 40
3.3 Connection Modes 45
3.4 View of Measured Quantities and Error Limits 47

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
3
3.1 Measured Quantities - Depend on the Connection Type
Table 3-1 Measured quantities that depend on the input connection type
Unbalanced (3I)
Unbalanced (2I)
Three-phase
Three-phase
AC Current
Three-phase
Three-phase
Three-phase
Three-wire
Unbalanced
No. Measured Quantity Designation
Four-wire
Balanced
Balanced
Three-wire
Three-wire
1-phase
Four-wire
1 (Space line)* X X X X X X
2 Voltage L1-N X X X U L1
3 Voltage L2-N X U L2
4 Voltage L3-N X U L3
5 Voltage L1-L2 X X X X U L12
8 Average voltage L-N* 6L-N/3 6L-N/3 6L-N/3 L1-N 6ph-N/3 U E-N
9 Current L1 X X X X X X I L1
10 Current L2 X X X I L2
11 Current L3 X X X I L3
12 Average current* X X 6I / 3 I
13 Neutral current N X X I0
14 Real power L1 X X P L1
15 Real power L2 X P L2
16 Real power L3 X P L3
17 Real power 6 X X X X X P
18 Reactive power L1 X X Q L1
19 Reactive power L2 X Q L2
20 Reactive power L3 X Q L3
21 Reactive power 6 X X X X X Q
22 Apparent power L1 X X S L1
23 Apparent power L2 X S L2
24 Apparent power L3 X S L3
25 Apparent power 6 X X X X X S
26 Active factor cos I L1 X X COS PHI L1
27 Active factor cos I L2 X COS PHI L2
28 Active factor cos I L3 X COS PHI L3
29 Active factor cos I6 X X X X X COS PHI
30 Power factor L1 X X PF L1
31 Power factor L2 X PF L2
32 Power factor L3 X PF L3
33 Power factor 6 X X X X X PF
* see Table 3-2, Explanation

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
3
Unbalanced (3I)
Unbalanced (2I)
Three-phase
Three-phase
AC Current
Three-phase
Three-phase
Three-phase
Three-wire
Unbalanced
Four-wire
Balanced
Balanced
Three-wire
Three-wire
1-phase
Four-wire
34 Phase angle L1 X X PHI L1
35 Phase angle L2 X PHI L2
36 Phase angle L3 X PHI L3
37 Phase angle 6 X X X X X PHI
38 System frequency X X X X X X f
39 Asymmetrical voltage X ASYM U
40 Asymmetrical current X ASYM I
41 THD voltage L1 X X THDU L1
42 THD voltage L2 X THDU L2
43 THD voltage L3 X THDU L3
44 THD current L1 X X THDI L1
45 THD current L2 X THDI L2
46 THD current L3 X THDI L3
47 Harmonic voltage L1* X X X X X X HU L1
5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19
48 Harmonic voltage L2* X X X HU L2
5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19
49 Harmonic voltage L3* X X X HU L3
5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19
50 Harmonic current L1* X X X X X X HI L1
5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19
51 Harmonic current L2* X X X HI L2
5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19
52 Harmonic current L3* X X X HI L3
5, 7, 11, 13, 17, 19
53 Active energy L1 demand* X X WpL1d
54 Active energy L2 demand* X WpL2d
55 Active energy L3 demand* X WpL3d
56 Active energy 6 demand* X X X X X Wp6d
57 Active energy L1 supply* X X WpL1s
58 Active energy L2 supply* X WpL2s
59 Active energy L3 supply* X WpL3s
60 Active energy 6 supply* X X X X X Wp6s
61 Active energy L1 total* X X WpL1t
62 Active energy L2 total* X WpL2t
63 Active energy L3 total* X WpL3t
64 Active energy 6 total* X Wp6t
65 Active energy (3L) demand X X X X X Wpnet
net*
* see Table 3-2, Explanation

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
3
Unbalanced (3I)
Unbalanced (2I)
Three-phase
Three-phase
AC Current
Three-phase
Three-phase
Three-phase
Three-wire
Unbalanced
Four-wire
Balanced
Balanced
Three-wire
Three-wire
1-phase
Four-wire
66 Reactive energy L1 X X WqL1i
inductive
67 Reactive energy L2 X WqL2i
inductive
68 Reactive energy L3 X WqL3i
inductive
69 Reactive energy 6 X X X X X Wq6i
inductive
70 Reactive energy L1 X X WqL1c
capacitve
71 Reactive energy L2 X WqL2c
capacitve
72 Reactive energy L3 X WqL3c
capacitve
73 Reactive energy 6 X X X X X Wq6c
capacitve
74 Reactive energy total L1* X X WqL1t
75 Reactive energy total L2* X WqL2t
76 Reactive energy total L3* X WqL3t
77 Reactive energy total 6* X X X X X Wq6t
78 Apparent energy L1 X X WL1
79 Apparent energy L2 X WL2
80 Apparent energy L3 X WL3
81 Apparent energy 6 X X X X X W6
82 Counter 1 / 2 / 3 / 4* X X X X X X Cntr. 1, 2, 3, 4
83 Binary inputs X* X* X* X* X* X*
84 Analog inputs X* X* X* X* X* X*
*
see Table 3-2, Explanation

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
3
Explanations to the Table 3-1
Table 3-2 Explanation
Name Description
(Space line) If a space line is selected as a measured quantity, the

corresponding fields remain empty on the display screens.
Average voltage The average value of the three phase-to-neutral voltages (L-N) is
displayed here. For three-wire, three-phase connection types, this
value is calculated.
Average current The average value of the three phase currents is displayed here.
Harmonics U / I For harmonics up to the 21st, the standards (IEC 61000-2-2 and
EN 50160) specify compatibility levels only for harmonics of orders
5, 7, 11, 13, 17, and 19. Those of even order and those divisible by
3 are considered irrelevant. Therefore, on the "Harmonics" screen,
selection is limited to all uneven orders up to the 21st. The selection
of single harmonics on the measured values screens is limited to the
5th, 7th, 11th, 13th, 17th and 19th.
For voltage harmonics, values are displayed as a percentage of the
first harmonic. For current harmonics, the values are displayed
directly in A.
Active energy demand The default setting (industry mode) is "Load (standard)" indicated by
a positive energy flow direction. You can configure the power supply
company mode. In this mode, a positive value indicates "Generator".
Active energy total The sum of the absolute values (without sign) of active energy
demand and active energy supply.
Active energy (3L) Net energy is equal to energy demand minus energy supply.
net demand Because this measured value can be negative and can decrease as
well as increase, it is not possible to use this measured value to
generate pulses via the output contacts.
Reactive energy total The sum of the absolute values (without sign) of inductive and
capacitve kvarh.
Counter 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 Number of limit violations
Binary inputs, optional

analog inputs

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
3
3.2 Formulas and Calculation of Derived Quantities
3.2.1 Calculation of Derived Quantities

Line Derived Quantity Formula Note
1 RMS value voltage,
1 64 2
distorted waveform included V ¦ uQ
64Q 1
2 RMS value voltage, From the Fourier coefficients a
fundamental component U1 a2 b2 and b of the fundamental
only
V1 component
2
3 RMS value current,
1 64 2
distorted waveform included I ¦ iQ
64 Q 1
4 RMS value voltage, From the Fourier coefficients a
fundamental component I1 a2 b2 and b of the fundamental
only
I1 component
2
5 Active power PStd 1 64 From sample values
P ¦ vQ iQ
64 Q 1
6 Active power PFour P Va1 Ia1 Vb1 Ib1 From the Fourier coefficients
of the fundamental component
7 Active power PDIN 21 From the Fourier coefficients
P ¦ (Va
n 1
n Ia n Vbn Ibn ) of the fundamental component
and from the harmonics.
8 Reactive power QStd 1 Standard up to now, additional
1 64 j S
Q ¦
64 Q 1
vQ iQ e 2 fault for distortions1
9 Reactive power QFour Q Va1 Ib1 Vb1 Ia1

10 Reactive power QDIN 21 From the Fourier coefficients
Qtot ¦ (Va
n 1
n Ibn Vbn Ia n ) of the fundamental component
11 Apparent power SStd S V1N I 1 V2 N I 2 V3 N I 3 From the RMS values

according to line 1 and 3
12 Apparent power SFour S V12N V22N V32N I12 I 22 I 32 From the RMS values
13 Apparent power SDIN S V12N V22N V32N I 12 I 22 I 32 From the RMS values
14 Power factor P No sign!
P1
cos M or
S S DIN
15 Power factor DIN P No sign!
cos M
S DIN
16 Power factor cos M P1 Four quadrants according to
cos M note 4
S1
17 Phase Angle Q From the fundamental
M arctan 1 component only!
P1
1 According to classic measuring devices (electrodynamic power meter)

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
3
Line Derived Quantity Formula Note

18 System frequency N Refer to note 1
f T
P
19 Active energy demand The active energy demand will
W ¦
Q
PQ
1
for P ! 0 be calculated every second.
20 Active energy supply The active energy supply will

W ¦
Q
PQ
1
for P 0 be calculated every second.
21 Active energy without sign Calculation without sign

W ¦ PQ
Q 1
22 Active energy net demand Calculation with sign
W ¦
Q
PQ
1
23 Asymmetrical voltage U or G Refer to note 2
current I V Range is 0 to f, avoid division
M by 0!
24 THD voltage, current Refer to note 3
M tot
THD 1
M1
25 Harmonics From Fourier transformation

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
3
3.2.2 Remarks to the Measuring Quantities
Note 1
N: Nominal value of the counting pulses per period at nominal value of the system frequency
T: Nominal value of the period length of the system frequency in μs
P: Counted pulses within one period
V: Asymmetry
G: Unbalanced system
M: Balanced system
Mn: Vector of the measured quantity, ULN or IL, from Fourier transformation
Note 2
No. of Equation Equation
1
G A2 B 2
2 § 2 · § 2 ·
A M 1 M 2 cos¨ M12 S ¸ M 3 cos¨ M13 S ¸
© 3 ¹ © 3 ¹
3 § 2 · § 2 ·
B M 2 sin ¨ M 12 S ¸ M 3 sin ¨ M 13 S ¸
© 3 ¹ © 3 ¹
4
M C 2 D2
5 § 2 · § 2 ·
C M 1 M 2 cos¨M12 S ¸ M 3 cos¨ M13 S ¸
© 3 ¹ © 3 ¹
6 § 2 · § 2 ·
D M 2 sin ¨ M 122 S ¸ M 3 sin ¨ M 13 S ¸
© 3 ¹ © 3 ¹

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
3
Note 3
Derivation of the formula:
Total distortion D according to IEC 61000-2-2:
Equation No. 7:
N N
1
D ¦u
n 2
2
n
M1
¦M
n 2
2
n
un: Un/U1
n Order of the harmonic
Un Voltage of the n-th harmonic
U1 Voltage of the fundamental component
N 40, for SIMEAS P: 21
Mn Harmonic (n-th order) of voltage or current
M1 Fundamental component of voltage or current
It is possible to derive the result from the harmonic M1 and the RMS value Mges of the distorted
measured quantity. With the root „H“ from equation 8:
Equation No. 8:
2
H M ges M 12
Mges: RMS value of the distorted measured quantity U or I

M1: RMS value of the fundamental component of the measured quantity
Inserting the values into the equation results in:

Equation 9:
1 1 2
THD H M ges M 12
M1 M1
Inserting 1/M1 into the root results in:
Equation 10:
2
M ges M 12 2
M ges
THD 1
M 12 M 12

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
3
Note 4
4 Quadrants
90°
II I
cos I = negative + cap cos I = positive + ind

PF+ Q+ Q+ PF+
S
I Q
180° 0°
P
Q- Q-
cos I = negative + ind cos I = positive + cap
PF+ PF+
III IV
270°
P-, active energy - P+, active energy +

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
3
3.3 Connection Modes
3.3.1 Four-wire Three-phase Current with Any Load
Depending on the measuring method some quantities to be measured are not available. For the
method according to DIN, for example the apparent power S or S1 are available; only SDIN can
be calculated.
3.3.2 Single-phase AC
The measuring path for the voltage is A-N for the voltage and A for the other quantities. This
applies also for the power values. The apparent power according to DIN, the reactive power Qtot
DIN and the asymmetry are not valid.
3.3.3 Four-wire Three-phase Current with Symmetrical Load
Current A and voltage A-N are available. You can display the same measured quantities as for
Single-phase AC. For power 6, the value calculated from U and I must be multiplied by 3. For
power, power factor, cos I, phase angle and energy only the sum is relevant. The measurement
values Asymmetrical U or I are not available. THD and harmonics can be derived for A only.
3.3.4 Three-wire Three-phase Current with Symmetrical Load
For this connection mode, an artificial neutral point is formed via resistors. Since this internal
neutral point is connected to the grounding conductor, it cannot be used here. The reactive
power (Standard) can be derived from U32 and I1:
Equation 11:
3 64
Q ¦ u32Q i1Q
64 Q 1
You have to calculate u32 from u3E - u2E. To calculate the reactive power for the fundamental
Q1, the adequate phasors are used. For the reactive power (Standard), sample points, which are
shifted by 90°, are used for the voltage.
Equation 12:
S
3 64
¦ 32Q 2 i1Q
j
P u e
64 Q 1
To calculate the active power of the fundamental P1 the adequate phasors are used. The measu-
rement values Asymmetrical U or I are not available. THD and harmonics can not be calculated.
The apparent power is the multiplication of the RMS values voltage and current, e.g.:

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
3
Equation 13:
S 3 U 32 I 1
For S1, the RMS values of the fundamental component are used; as symmetrical load is sup-
posed SDIN = S.
3.3.5 Three-wire Three-phase Current with Any Load
For this connection mode, the phase-to-ground voltages are not available. Active and reactive
powers are calculated from the formulas of the two-wattmeter (Aron) circuit:
Equation 14:
1 64 1 64
P ¦
64 Q 1
u12Q i1Q ¦ u 23Q i3Q
64 Q 1
This is also valid for the calculation via Fourier analysis. For the reactive power according to clas-
sic measuring devices (electro dynamic power meter), the following equation is valid:
Equation 15:
1 1
1 64 1 64
¦ u12Q i1Q e 2 ¦ u 23Q i3Q e 2
j S j S
Q
64 Q 1 64 Q 1
Distortions will cause an additional fault. For the apparent power (classical method), the following
equation is valid::
Equation 16:
S 3 U12 I1 U 23 I 3
For the apparent power according to DIN calculated from the phase voltages, the following equa-
tion is valid:
Equation 17:
S
1 2
3

U12 U 232 U 312 I12 I 22 I 32
In both cases, current B must be calculated from the geometrical sum of the currents -A and -C.
To do this, you can sum up the sample points or the Fourier coefficient.
The artificial neutral point does not allow measuring the voltage asymmetry exactly and is not
realized. The measured values are only exact, if you use a four-wire net with neutral point. Often
the three-wire net is used only to save the cable connection to current transformer 2. Only in this
case, it would be useful to measure the asymmetry.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
3
3.4 View of Measured Quantities and Error Limits
Table 3-3 Measured values and tolerances
Measured Values Measuring Path 1 Menu Tolerances 2
Voltage L1-N, L2-N, L3-N r0.2 %

3
Voltage L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1, 6 r0.2 %
Current L1, L2, L3, N, 6 3
r0.2 %
Active power P
+ demand, - supply L1, L2, L3, 6 r0.5 %
Reactive power Q
L1, L2, L3, 6 r0.5 %
+ cap, - ind
Apparent power S L1, L2, L3, 6 r0.5 %
4
Power factor |cosM| L1, L2, L3, 6 r0.5 %
4
Active power factor cosM L1, L2, L3, 6 r0.5 %
4
Phase angle L1, L2, L3, 6 r2°
5
System frequency L1-N r10 mHz
Active energy demand L1, L2, L3, 6 r0.5 %
Active energy supply L1, L2, L3, 6 r0.5 %
Active energy total L1, L2, L3, 6 r0.5 %
Active energy net demand 6 r0.5 %
Reactive energy cap L1, L2, L3, 6 r0.5 %
Reactive energy ind L1, L2, L3, 6 r0.5 %
Reactive energy total L1, L2, L3, 6 r0.5 %
Apparent energy L1, L2, L3, 6 r0.5 %
Unbalance voltage Four-wire system r0.5 %
Unbalance current Four-wire system r0.5 %
THD voltage L1, L2, L3 r0.5 %
THD current L1, L2, L3 r0.5 %
Harmonic voltage
L1, L2, L3 r0.5 %
5., 7., 11., 13., 17. and 19. H.
Harmonic current
L1, L2, L3 r0.5 %
5., 7., 11., 13., 17. and 19. H.
Limit violation Counter 1 to 4
6
Analog input external r0.5 %
6
Binary input external

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
3
1) Phases are displayed based on the type of connection.

2) Tolerances at reference conditions (see chapter 7) are applicable from 0.1 to 1.2 x nominal
range.
3) Average value of all phases.
4) Measuring beginning with 2 % of the internal apparent power in selected measurement range
5) Measuring beginning with 30 % of the input voltage L1-N
6) Optional
7) Limit values for the complete temperature range (see chapter 7) referring to: 0.1 to 1.2 x nomi-
nal range.
Symbol Function
Measured values can be displayed on measured value screens (only 7KG7750)
Measured values selectable over communication
Measured values selectable for list screens and oscilloscope (only 7KG7750)

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
Device Parameterization 4
Contents
The following chapters describe the device parameterization of the SIMEAS P 7KG7750 using
a graphic display. The parameterization of the SIMEAS P 7KG7755 using PC software is explai-
ned in chapter 5.
4.1 Operating Notes 50
4.2 Overview of the Levels 52
4.3 Main Menu 53
4.4 Basic Settings 56
4.5 About SIMEAS 70
4.6 Reset 70
4.7 Reset Memory 71
4.8 Parameterization Screens 71
4.9 I/O Modules 73
4.10 Memory Management 73
4.11 Data Logger 74
4.12 Overflow of Measured Values 76

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.1 Operating Notes
4.1 Operating Notes
This chapter describes all of the setting options of the SIMEAS P that are made via the front but-
tons.
ENTER
The Main Menu (programming level 2, see chapter 4.3) can be accessed :
x from the measured values screens, the min-max values screens or the screen U, I, cos I via
the ENTER button,
x from the data logger: use the arrow buttons to select the Date/Time screen and press the
ENTER button.
4.1.1 Button Functions
The following functions are performed via the buttons:

x Moving the cursor to the entry line,
x Scrolling through selection lists when entering settings,
x Selecting numbers when entering numerical values.
If the buttons are held down, the scrolling continues automatically. The buttons generally cycle
between cursor, parameters or numbers.
The selected line, setting, or number is confirmed by pressing the ENTER button.
4.1.2 Windows Structure
Selecting * and pressing ENTER moves the

cursor directly to the data entry field on the
same line. *no. screens: 10
*repeat ratio: 0Sec
Selecting > screen structure and pressing *illumination: 2Min
ENTER opens a new window for additional *contrast: 5
data entry. >screen structure
Selecting < OK and pressing ENTER con-
<ok
firms the settings and returns the user to the
<cancel
previous level.
Selecting < Cancel and pressing ENTER
cancels the setting changes just made and
returns the user to the previous level.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.1 Operating Notes
4.1.3 Notes on Parameterization
x The measured quantities offered for selection in the screens depend on the connection type
selected.
x The numbers entered are checked for plausibility and the note: "ERR" is displayed if required.
The input value is then set to the maximum value.
x If the power supply voltage is switched off during programming, the message illustrated
below appears when the device is restarted. Therefore, the power supply voltage should only
be switched off in level 1 (measuring screens).
Select No via the buttons to Attention!

retain the settings as they existed prior to the
loss of power supply voltage. Parameter incorrect
Choose Yes by pressing the ENTER button reset?
to restore the default settings.
No Yes
(arrow) (Enter)
Note:
This means, that you should always leave the parameter screens completely (OK or Cancel) until
the measurement screens are displayed again. This ensures that all parameters will be accepted
by the device.
Note:
Please check the parameters and the adjustment data afterwards, to ensure the correct function
of the SIMEAS P.
If you have adjusted the device manually (refer to chapter 6), the adjustment data will not be
overwritten by default settings.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.2 Overview of the Levels
4.2 Overview of the Levels
1. Level 2. Level 3. Level 4. Level 5. Level
2.1 3.1 4.1

Main menu Screens Data logger Date / Time
3.2 4.2
Basic screens Limit value
group
4.3
Binary states
2.2 3.3 4.4 5.1

Settings Basic Settings Current
settings overview transformer
2.3
Language about SIMEAS 3.4 Input 4.5
Voltage 5.2
connection transformer
2.4 3.5 4.6 5.3

Date / Time Reset Outputs Limit values
Energy 5.4
2.5 3.6 4.7
Log Reset Interface pulse
memory
IEC 60870-5- 5.5
Changing 4.8 103 settings

code
4.9
Calibration
Additional 4.10 Further 5.6

settings settings
3.7 4.11
Screen Screen
content structure
3.8
I/O module
Memory 3.9

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.3 Main Menu
4.3 Main Menu
The main menu is used to access various submenus.
>screens
>settings
>language
>date/ time
>log
<close
4.3.1 Screens
Use the ENTER key to switch between the displays

x Main menu
x Measured value screens
x Data logger
4.3.2 Settings
The setup masks for device parameterization can be selected from the Parameters menu.
>basic settings
>about SIMEAS
>reset
>reset memory
>screen content
>I/O module
>memory
<close

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.3 Main Menu
4.3.3 Language
Language
Here you can select the language of the SIMEAS P.
x D = German
x GB = English
Designation
Change of the conductor designations in the screens:

x a, b, c
x L1, L2, L3
*language: GB
*description:a,b,c
<ok
<cancel
4.3.4 Date / Time
SIMEAS P requires time information for the following functions:

x Oscilloscope
x Log entries
x Measured value memory
*date: 01.02.2001
*time: 10:17:57 am
*12/24h: 12
CEST: 00.00 to 00.00
binary input:BE2
<ok
<cancel
One binary input (optional) may be used for time synchronization via minute impulse.
The data for summer/winter time and the binary input can only be set via the PC software
SIMEAS P parameterization (refer to chapter 5).

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.3 Main Menu
4.3.5 Log
The screen Log displays date and time of the most recent status changes.
failure dd .mm.yy
hh:mm:ss
power on . .
: :
settings . .
: :
reset limit . .
: :
reset average . .
: :
reset power . .
: :
reset osc. . .
: :
set clock . .
: :
reset binary . .
: :

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.4 Basic Settings
4.4 Basic Settings
Here you can make the most important settings directly on the device.
>settings overview
>input connections
>output contacts
>interface
>change code
>calibration
>additional settings
<ok
4.4.1 Settings Overview
Settings Overview is where the most important settings associated with the device are displayed.
calc. mode:standard
4 wire unbalanced
current range: 1.2A
voltage range: 480V
rel 1: limit value1
rel 2: limit value2
bus adr.:111
<cancel

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.4 Basic Settings
4.4.2 Connection / Transformer
Input connection
As shown in chapter 1.5.4, the connection mode can be selected here.
x Single-phase AC
x Three-phase, four-wire, balanced
x Three-phase, four-wire, unbalanced
x Three-phase, three-wire, balanced
x Three-phase, three-wire, unbalanced ( 2 x I )
x Three-phase, three-wire, unbalanced ( 3 x I )
Three-wire, unbalanced can be selected either with the connection of two current transformers
(standard / Aron measuring circuit) or three current transformers.
input connection
*three-wire
unbalanced (3*I)
>current transformer
>voltage transformer
<ok
<cancel
4.4.2.1 Current Transformer
x Yes: Current transformers utilized (max. primary: AC 999999 A, secundary: AC 6 A)

x No: Current transformers not utilized
*current transf.: No
A/ A
*measuring range 1.2A
<ok
<cancel
Measuring range
The secondary input current measuring range is selected for the SIMEAS P as follows:
x 1.2 A: nominal input AC 1 A
x 6 A: nominal input AC 5 A

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.4 Basic Settings
Caution
x You must make these settings for a direct connection or for a connection with current trans-
formers.
x The selected measuring range must be greater than the secondary rating of the current
transformer!
x The accuracy of SIMEAS P (see table 3-3) is based on the selected measuring range.
x The determination of this range indicates the maximum current value that can be displayed
on the device.
Note:
When you change the current transformer settings, the power calculation in the device has to be
reset.
Example
CT rating: 500 / 1 A
Measuring range 1.2 A: Maximum display range: AC 0 A to 600 A
Measuring range 6 A: Maximum display range: AC 0 A to 3000 A
4.4.2.2 Voltage Transformer
x Yes: Voltage transformers are utilized (max. primary: AC 1000 kV, secundary: AC 600 V)
x No: Voltage transformers are not utilized
*voltage transf.:No
kV/ V
*meas. range L-L 480V
<ok
<cancel
Measuring range
x 132 V nominal input AC 100/110 V
x 228 V nominal input AC 190 V

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.4 Basic Settings
Selectable measuring range L-L Equivalent to measuring range L-N
AC 0 V to 132 V AC 0 V to 76.2 V
AC 0 V to 228 V AC 0 V to 132 V
AC 0 V to 480 V AC 0 V to 276 V
AC 0 V to 828 V AC 0 V to 480 V
Up to ULN = 480 V, the SIMEAS P can be connected directly without a transformer. In three- and
four-phase networks, except for three-phase networks without neutral (see the respective
notes), the SIMEAS P can also be connected directly without a transformer up to ULL = 690 V.
Caution
x You must make these settings for a direct connection or for a connection with current trans-
formers.
x The selected measuring range must be greater than the secondary rating of the voltage
transformer!
x The accuracy of SIMEAS P is based on the selected measuring range.
x The determination of this range indicates the maximum voltage value that can be displayed
on the device.
x "The frequency measurement of the SIMEAS P is initiated only when the measured voltage
is > 30 % of the maximum voltage of the measuring range.
x Measurements in three-phase networks without neutral in V-connection (1:1 transformer) are
possible up to a nominal voltage of ULL = 400 V. With this nominal voltage, the measuring
range ULL = 690 V must be parameterized.
x For measurements in three-phase networks without neutral in V-connection and a nominal
voltage of ULL = 690 V, the voltage must be transformed to ULL d 400 V. The measuring
range to be parameterized is then also ULL = 690 V.
x In IT networks, the SIMEAS P cannot be connected directly because the voltage is measured
against the PE conductor connection and the input impedance of the device causes a lea-
kage current against earth. The leakage current can cause tripping of the leakage protective
system in IT networks. Please make sure that the maximum permissible input voltage of the
SIMEAS P against earth UL-PE = 480 V is not exceeded (e.g., due to an earth fault of one
phase). Voltage transformers must be used in IT networks.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.4 Basic Settings
4.4.3 Outputs
Here, the user can determine the function of the programmable output contacts (potential-free
electronic relays). Further contacts can be assigned in devices with I/O modules of the binary
output or relay output type (option).
*relay1: limit value1

*relay2: rotation
<ok
<cancel
Selection
x Off Contact has no function
x SIMEAS P is on Contact closed if power supply voltage is present.
x Energy pulses If selected, a new window "Energy Pulses" appears.
x Limit value 1 If selected, a new window "Limit Value 1" appears.
x Direction of rotation This option allows you to output the rotation direction of the voltage.
x 1: Contact activated; direction of rotation for clockwise display
(phase sequence L1-L2-L3, clockwise rotation)
x 0: Contact deactivated; direction of rotation for anti-clockwise display
(2 phases interchanged, anti-clockwise rotation)

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.4 Basic Settings
4.4.3.1 Screen for Energy Pulses
energy pulses
*energy: WpL1 d
*value: 0.0088kWh/Imp
*pulse length:200ms
<ok
<cancel
Energy
Selection of an energy or other metered quantity from the table 3-1 (depends on the type of the
input connection).
Value
Selection of the amount of energy required to generate a pulse.
Puls length
Can be selected from 50 ms, 100 ms, 150 ms, 200 ms to 500 ms.
Note:
An explanation on power metering can be found in chapter 5.7.2.
4.4.3.2 Screen for Limit Values
limit value
*hysteresis: 1.0%
*pulse length: 1 s
*filter time: 1.0s
>further settings
<ok
<cancel
The values entered for hysteresis, pulse length and filter time are valid for all logically connected
measured quantities.
Hysteresis
x Input of 0.1 % to 10 % of rated value
x Percentage refers to nominal values

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.4 Basic Settings
Puls length
x 0.5 s, 1 s, 5 s, 10 s, 30 s, 60 s, 300 s
x (triggering for as long as a limit violation applies)
Filter time
Input of 0.0 s to 9.9 s max. (minimum time during which a limit violation must occur to launch a
triggering)
Note:
Limit violations are recorded reliably only from a duration of > 1 s.
Limit values
x Selection of any measured quantity from the table 3-1 (no energy or metered quantities)
x Selection as to whether triggering should be launched when the measured quantity exceeds
or drops below the threshold value (< >).
x Selection of the threshold value that initiates triggering.
x Additional measured quantities can be connected logically via "AND" or „OR". A maximum of
six measured quantities are possible.
Note:
You can parameterize limit value groups also in „Additional Settings“ - „Counter“ (level 4, see
chapter 4.2)!

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.4 Basic Settings
4.4.4 Communication Interface
4.4.4.1 General Settings

*bus address:112
*baudrate: 19200Bd
*parity: E
*protocol: IEC 103
>IEC 103 settings
<ok
<cancel
Bus addres
Input address 1 to 254
Baud rate
x Selection only for connection to a PC or Modbus. The following baudrates are allowed:
300 bit/s, 600 bit/s, 1200 bit/s, 2400 bit/s, 4800 bit/s, 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s, 38400 bit/s,
57600 bit/s, 115200 bit/s.
x The baud rate of the Profibus is supported automatically up to 12 Mbit/s with the selection
being performed via the master station.
Note:
The Baud rate is selected during parameterization (using SIMEAS P Par or the display). It can
be set in the range between 300 bit/s and 115200 bit/s, for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, howe-
ver, only in the range between 9600 bit/s and 38400 bit/s.
Parity
x Only for Modbus (N = None, E = Even, O = Odd)
Protocol
x SIMEAS P ASCII Protocol: PC RS485 (for connection to a PC via programming software)
x Profibus DP (with firmware version V3 only) or
IEC 60870-5-103 (with firmware version V4 only)
x Modbus RTU
x Modbus ASCII
Note:
At delivery, the following communication parameters are preset:
Address: 1
Protocol: PC-RS485
Baud rate: 9600 bit/s
Parity: No

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.4 Basic Settings
4.4.4.2 IEC 60870-5-103 Settings
*MV range: 240%

*Harmonics: no
*Counters: no
<ok
<cancel
Measuring value range (MV range)

Parameterization of the measuring value range.
Settings:
x 120 %
x 240 %
Transmit Harmonic
Parameterization of the transmission of harmonic values for the harmonics as per
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
Settings:
x yes Transmit
x no No transmit
Transmit counter values

Parameterization of the transmission of metered values (for power and pulse) as per IEC 60870-
5-103 protocol.
Settings:
x yes Transmit
x no No transmit
Note:
The IEC 60870-5-103 parameters MV range, Transmission of harmonic and Transmission of
metered values are also offered if Modbus has been selected as a protocol. The settings, howe-
ver, are then ineffective.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.4 Basic Settings
4.4.5 Changing the Password
*code1: 000000
* off
*code2: 000000
* off
<ok
<cancel
4.4.5.1 Password of Code 1
off: No function
on: Active if code 2 is active
Secured functions:
Parameterization the screens
Reset
Language / Designation
4.4.5.2 Password of Code 2
off: No function (code 1 is also deactivated )

on: Code activated
Secured functions:
Basic settings
Notes
x A password always consists of a 6-digit number.
x If you have forgotten the password, the device can also be activated by using the master
password. Please contact our hotline for the master password.
x Password 1 is only active if password 2 is also activated.
x If both password 1 and password 2 are activated, password 2 can be used to access all pro-
tected functions of password 1.
x If an identical password is chosen for password 1 and password 2, all functions of password
1 and password 2 can be activated by means of a single password.
x In Level 1, a lock displayed on the status bar indicates whether the status of the device is
password protected (lock closed) or unprotected (lock open).
x After a password has been programmed, a time of 1 minute elapses before it is activated in
level 1 (the activation can be detected when the lock closes on the status bar).

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.4 Basic Settings
x If the protected functions are called in the menu, a window for entering the password
appears.
x If a protected setting is activated by means of a password, all other settings associated with
this password are activated as well. A reactivation is required after a time of 1 minute has
elapsed in level 1.
4.4.6 Calibration
See chapter 6 "Calibration".
4.4.7 Additional Settings
>counter1-limitvalue1
>further settings
<ok
<cancel
Counter 1 to 4
Counters 1 to 4 can be displayed in the screens. Limit value groups can be assigned to these
counters. If a counter is selected, another window is opened for defining the limit value group
(see outputs).
Note:
Limit value groups can also be parameterized under Outputs - Limit value group (level 4, see
chapter 4.2)!

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.4 Basic Settings
4.4.8 Further Settings
*calc. mode: standard

*current direction: +
*direction of power:+
*zero point: 0.3000%
Uen: calculation
AO settings
<ok
<cancel
Calculation mode
x Standard
x DIN
x Fourier
The calculation mode for some measured quantities can be changed here. For further informa-
tion, see the chapter 3.1.
Current direction
x + Default setting for correct connection according to standard and back panel marking
x - Current direction is negated (change the current direction to avoid changing the connec-
tors)
Direction of power
x + positive energy flow direction = energy demand
negative energy flow direction = energy supply
x - positive energy flow direction = energy supply
negative energy flow direction = energy demand
Zero point
The zero point suppression can be changed here.
Can be selected from 0.0 % to 10.0 % of the upper limit of the measurement range (default set-
ting: 1 %)
Note:
Due to its high precision, SIMEAS P can measure voltages and currents even without measuring
values connected to the device. If you do not want this behaviour in your application, you can
suppress measuring below a certain threshold.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.4 Basic Settings
Uen
x Measurement (default setting)
x Calculation
Uen will be calculated if terminal N is grounded (standard application).
Uen has to be measured if L2 or L3 is grounded (special application).
u u u
x x x
X X X
k l k l k l
U U U
L1
K L
L2 K L
L3
K L
Figure 4-1 Network connection with grounded phase L2
Analog output setting (only visible in screen for devices with optional analog output module)
If the device is equipped with an optional analog output module (see table 1-2, order code D),
analog outputs are configured in following screen:
Analog output setting

*start value:holding
*range from: -32767
* to: 32767
*current range:0-20mA
<ok
<cancel
These seetings allow writing the transduced measured values (range 0 mA to 20 mA) to analog
ouputs of analog output module via Modbus master or IE 60870-5-103 master.
Start value
x holding
After power interruption the analog output is set to last in register saved value.
x default
After power interruption the analog output is set to current value in register.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.4 Basic Settings
Range for Modbus protocol

x from: min. -32767
x to: max. 32767
Calculation:
AO fern – from to – from

- = --------------------------------------
----------------------------------------
AO real – AO min range max – min
Example:
from: 0
to: 1000
selected range: 4-20 mA
transmitted AO value: 500
500 – 0 = 1000
---------------------------
– 0-
-------------------- = 12mA
AO real – 4 20 – 4
Current range
x 0-20 mA
x 4-20 mA

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.5 About SIMEAS
4.5 About SIMEAS
All of the device characteristics are displayed on this window.
order number: 7KG7750

BF-Nr.:BF01047653
version :03.00.06
bus-address:1
calibrated:15.09.2006
module:A
<ok
4.6 Reset
*reset device: Y
* reset energy: Y
* reset min-max: Y
* reset counter: Y
<ok
<cancel
x Reset of SIMEAS P
x Energy values
x Min / Mean / Max values
x Alarm counter (counter for limit violations)

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.7 Reset Memory
4.7 Reset Memory

*reset power values:Y
*reset mean values: N
*reset alarm log: Y
*reset binary log: N
*reset oscilloscope:N
<ok
<cancel
The following records are deleted in the memory and restarted in the event of a reset:
x Power values
x Mean values
x Alarm log: states of the limit value groups
x Binary log: states of the binary states
x Oscilloscope
4.8 Parameterization Screens
*no. screens: 4
*repeat ratio: 0Sec
*illumination: 99Min
*contrast: 4
>screen structure
<ok
<cancel
The contents and display mode of the various screens are established in this window.
Number of Screens
1 to 20: The number of screens that can be selected in level 2 via the buttons .
Screen interval (repeat ratio)

0 s to 60 s
0 s: fixed screens (only selection via buttons possible)
1 s to 60 s: scrolls automatically to the next screen after 1 s to 60 s

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.8 Parameterization Screens
Illumination
0 min to 99 min
0 min = Illumination off
99 min = Illumination on permanently
Contrast
0 to 9 (default setting: 4)
Screen structure
*screen no.: 10
*type: min-max
*1:Ua
*2:Ub
*3:Uc
<ok
<cancel
The contents of specific measuring screens are programmed on the "Screen Structure" window.
Screen
Selection of a specific screen among the number previously established. The contents of the
screen are automatically displayed when switching from one screen to the next.
Contents
The contents of the selected screen can be established or modified here as follows:
x 3 measured values digital
x 6 measured values digital
x 3 Min - Max values
x Voltages, currents, cos I, phases L1, L2, L3
If specific screen content is selected, the input fields for the corresponding characteristics are
automatically displayed.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.9 I/O Modules
4.9 I/O Modules
module state
E analog- E = 0.0 mA
input E = 0.0 mA
>ok
This screen displays the optional I/O modules together with their current state. For devices with-
out I/O modules the table remains empty.
4.10 Memory Management
memory management
*average values:20%
*power values: 20%
*oscilloscope: 20%
*limit values: 20%
*binary log: 20%
<ok
<cancel
You can partition the main memory of 1 MByte as required for the recording of mean values,
outputs, limit violations, binary state changes and oscilloscope records.
The total of the percentages entered must reach but not exceed 100%.
Notes
x For power recording, the recording time will be calculated from the number of channels to be
recorded and the period time.
x For mean values and power recording settings, you have to use the PC software SIMEAS P
Parameterization (ordering number see chapter 1.2).

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.11 Data Logger
4.11 Data Logger
The group Data logger displays the following screens:

x Date and time
x Limit value group
x Binary states
To work with the group Data logger proceed as follows:

x In the Main menu, select Screens and press two times ENTER.
x Use the buttons to access the group Data logger.
x To leave the Data logger, go back to the screen Date and Time and press ENTER to return
to the Main menu.
4.11.1 Data Logger Date and Time
Status line
15 : 34 : 12
09.03.2005
This screen shows the current time of the SIMEAS P (to set the values refer chapter 4.3.4).
4.11.2 Data Logger Limit Violation Group
<> Bd/Prm AP 2/10

limit time reason
1 10.03.05
08:19:15
ULN1 10.03.05 210.2V
08:52:26
1 10.03.05
08:53:15
This screen displays all limit violations ordered by time. You have to read the lines from bottom
to top.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.11 Data Logger
Notes
x Press ENTER to activate the arrow buttons up/down to display all messages.
x Press ENTER again to deactivate this mode. This allows you to switch to the other screens
via the arrow buttons up/down.
x Go back to the screen Date and Time and press ENTER to return to the Main menu.
4.11.3 Data Logger Binary States
status line
binary time state
In A-1 20.01.08 on
10:20:10
Out1 20.01.08 on
10:20:10
Out1 20.01.08 off
10:21:10
This screen displays all changes of the binary states ordered by time. You have to read the lines
from bottom to top.
Notes
x Press ENTER to activate the arrow buttons up/down to display all messages.
x Press ENTER again to deactivate this mode. This allows you to switch to the other screens
via the arrow buttons up/down.
x Go back to the screen Date and Time and press ENTER to return to the Main menu.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
4
4.12 Overflow of Measured Values
4.12 Overflow of Measured Values
If the measured values determined in a measurement circuit are higher than the possible values
of the parameterized measuring range, a value overflow will be displayed. In addition, this value
overflow is signalled via Modbus or IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
The overflow is displayed or transmitted if the nominal AC voltage or AC current values are
exceeded by 20 %.
Presentation of the measured value overflow in the display
<> Bd/Prm AP 2/10
UL1-N 10.12 kV
UL1-N
UL2-N ***
10.34 kV
IL1-N
UL3-N ***
10.42 kV
PL1-N
IL1 ***
245.4 A
QL1-N
IL2 ***
244.6 A
HUL1-7
IL3 ***
249.4 A
HIL1-7 ***
An overflow of the measured values AC voltage and AC current, as well as the derived quantities
such as active power, reactive power, harmonic, power, THD and cos I is displayed by ***. The
energy counting is only stopped, not reset.
Transmission of the measured value overflow using the Modbus protocol

A special Modbus register (register address 40200) has been reserved for the transmission of
the measured value overflow. For detailed information, please see the Powermeter SIMEAS P -
Modbus manual (order no. E50417-B1076-C241).
Transmission of the measured value overflow using the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
The measured value overflow is transmitted using the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol. For detailed
information, see the Power Meter SIMEAS P 7KG7750/55 - Communication Protocol IEC
60870-5-103 manual (order no. E50417-B1000-C375).

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
Parameterization via PC Software 5
Inhalt
The parameterization using a PC is described in the following chapters.
5.1 Basics 78
5.2 Overview of Parameterization 79
5.3 Date / Time Settings and Transmit 80
5.4 Dialog Window SIMEAS P 81
5.5 Basic Settings 82
5.6 Screens Setting on SIMEAS P 7KG7750 84
5.7 Input / Output Modules 87
5.8 Additionals 96
5.9 Memory Management 102
5.10 Updating the Firmware 114
5.11 Resetting Values in the Device 116
5.12 Reading the Device Memory 117
5.13 Changing the Communication Parameters 121

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.1 Basics
5.1 Basics
In order to program your SIMEAS P via the PC software SIMEAS P Parameterization you have
prepare for operation or parameterization:
Preconditions
x The device is ready to operate.
x The PC software SIMEAS P Parameterization (ordering number see chapter 1.2) is installed
on your PC.
x The parameterization cable set (ordering number see chapter 1.2) or a RS485 converter is
available.
Parameterization
1. Connect the device and the PC as described in the online help.
2. Set the connection parameters on the device:
x Select the protocol "PC-RS485".
x Select the baud rate for the connection.
3. Set the connection parameters in the PC software SIMEAS P Parameterization (Connection
o Setup connection). Make sure to use the same baud rate.
4. Load the settings from the device (Device o Connection configuration o Receive).
5. Edit the settings in the PC software.
6. Send the new settings to the device again (Device o Connection configuration o Send).
Note:
SIMEAS P Parameterization displays the parameters depending on the ordering number of the
device.
Reading the ID from the device, recognizes the device type and sets the functional scope.
Note:
All others functions of SIMEAS P Parameterization are described in the online help (key F1).

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.2 Overview of Parameterization
5.2 Overview of Parameterization
The following figures give an overview on all layers of the PC software SIMEAS P Parameteri-
zation depending on the device type.
5.2.1 Overview of Parameterization 7KG7750
5.2.2 Overview of Parameterization 7KG7755

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.3 Date / Time Settings and Transmit
5.3 Date / Time Settings and Transmit
You can set the date and time of the internal clock of the SIMEAS P using the SIMEAS P Para-
meterization PC software. You can either accept the current PC time or define and transmit a
freely selectable system time. To do this, proceed as follows:
To set the internal clock and transmit the time to a connected device, you have two options for
calling up the Send date and time dialog window:
Select the menu item Device o Setup device clock, or
click the clock symbol in the toolbar.
The Send date and time dialog window is displayed.
Send PC time
1. Click the Send PC time button to send the current PC time.
2. If the PC time has been transmitted correctly and accepted by the connected device, a con-
firmation will be displayed.
3. Click the Close button.
Send manual time setting

1. Change the entries in the fields Day to Min using your keyboard.
2. Then click Send time manually.
3. If the PC time has been transmitted correctly and accepted by the connected device, a con-
firmation will be displayed.
4. Click the Close button.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.4 Dialog Window SIMEAS P
5.4 Dialog Window SIMEAS P
In this dialog window, you select the order number of the SIMEAS P device to be parameterized.
Note:
SIMEAS P Parameterization displays the parameters depending on the order number of the
device (see chapter 1.2). Thus, the display above may be different for your device. Reading the
ID from the device recognizes the device type and sets the functional scope.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.5 Basic Settings
5.5 Basic Settings
This dialog allows you to set the network type, the measuring range and the transformer ratio
(optionally).
5.5.1 Connection / Transformer
In order to adapt the SIMEAS P to the network to be measured, enter the network properties and
the parameters for the current and voltage measurement inputs.
Network type
Select the relevant network type.

x Single-phase
x Three-wire three-phase balanced
x Three-wire three-phase unbalanced (2 current inputs ' Aron circuit)
x Three-wire three-phase unbalanced (3 current inputs)
x Three-phase four-wire balanced
x Three-phase four-wire, unbalanced

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.5 Basic Settings
Voltage inputs
Measurement range
Select the maximum voltage measurement range up to which the device should display. For Sin-
gle-phase or three-wire three-phase networks, both the core and the phase voltage are dis-
played here. The precision information for the device relates to the range selected here.
Without transformer
SIMEAS P can be operated without a voltage transformer up to a maximum of AC 690 V phase
to phase.
With transformer (L-L)

If a voltage transformer is used, enter the primary and secondary data for the transformer here.
The device measurement range is extrapolated internally by the factor of the transformation
ratio.
Current inputs
Measurement range
Select the maximum current measurement range up to which the device should display. The pre-
cision information for the device relate to the range selected here.
Without transformer
SIMEAS P can be operated without a current transformer up to a maximum of AC 6 A.
With transformer
If a current transformer is used, enter the primary and secondary data for the transformer here.
The device measurement range is extrapolated internally by the factor of the transformation
ratio.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.6 Screens Setting on SIMEAS P 7KG7750
The screens displayed in the SIMEAS P 7KG7750 (not possible with SIMEAS P 7KG7755
because no display) and their contents are defined in the following dialog windows.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.6.1 Basic Screen Settings
Here you define fundamental properties of the display on the SIMEAS P 7KG7750.
Number of screens
Select the number of screens, which can be selected using the buttons on the front of SIMEAS P.
You can enter between 1 and 20 screens.
Automatic screen interval

In SIMEAS P, you can switch between screens either manually using the buttons or automati-
cally.
x 0 s (= Off): manual switching using keys
x 1 s to 60 s: automatic switching after the period set; the device then switches automatically
from screen to screen on a loop.
Display illumination
You can enter the time the backlighting remains on in minutes here.
x 0 min (= Off): no backlighting
x 1 min to 98 min: after a button is pressed on the device, the back lighting remains on for the
time set.
x 99 min (= On): permanent backlighting
Display contrast
Here, you can adjust the contrast of the SIMEAS P display. The default value is 4.
x Input options: 0 to 9

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.6.2 Contents
Here you define the contents displayed in the individual screens.
To do this, select in field Screen contents the screen No. of the screen you wish to configure
and assign it a screen type in the Content field. Screen types are predefined display formats for
your measured values on the SIMEAS P display.
You can choose between the screen types:
x 3 Measured values digital
x 6 Measured values digital
x Min-Max values
x U, I, cos I
For each screen type, further selection options are displayed.
x If you select 3 digital measured values, 6 digital measured values or Min - Max - values,
the options are the measured values to be displayed and the measurement point.
x If you select U, I, cos phi no further settings are require in the basic version.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.7 Input / Output Modules
Two binary outputs are available in the device versions without I/O modules. As an option, the
device has been equipped with an I/O module that is parameterized in the following dialog win-
dows:
x Basic settings (see chapter 5.7.3)
x Binary / relay outputs (see chapter 5.7.1)
x Binary inputs (see chapter 5.7.6)
x Analog outputs (see chapter 5.7.4)
x Analog inputs (see chapter 5.7.5)

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.7.1 Binary / Relay Outputs
The SIMEAS P has two binary outputs. The devices are optionally equipped with a module with
3 additional relay outputs or a module with two binary outputs each.
In order to define the function of the two binary/relay outputs, select the binary output to be para-
meterized in field Binary outputs o No. In the Contents field, you can assign this binary output
a function. You can select from the following options:
x Off: binary output with no function
x Device active: The SIMEAS P active function allows you to monitor whether the device is
switched on (contact closed). If there is no contact, the device is switched off or broken.
x Limit values: Here, you can output the limit value group signals via the binary outputs. The
pulse length indicates how long the binary contact is closed by means of a signal from a limit
value group.
x Energy counter: If you assign this function to a binary output, the consumption or supply of
the selected work is output as a pulse. Select a measured value and the related measure-
ment point. Set a limit value (energy increase per pulse) for which a pulse should be trigge-
red. The parameterizable range (minimum and maximum value) can be found by entering the
max. consumer power in the field Help. The pulse duration can be selected in increments of
50 ms between 50 ms and 500 ms in the Pulse field .
You will find a description of the energy pulse measurement in chapter 5.7.2.
x Direction of rotation: output the rotation direction of the voltage
x 1: Contact activated: Direction of rotation for clockwise display (phase sequence A-B-C,
clockwise rotation)
x 0: Contact deactivated: Direction of rotation for anti-clockwise display (2 phases inter-
changed, anti-clockwise rotation)

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.7.2 Information on Energy Pulse Measurement
The binary outputs of the SIMEAS P may be used to generate impulses for energy measure-
ment: You can parameterize a specific amount of energy. When this threshold is reached, a defi-
ned pulse will be applied to the output. For energy pulse measurement, you have to adjust
several settings at the device and in the parameterization software.
5.7.2.1 Parameterization via Device
Refer to chapter 4.4.3.
5.7.2.2 Pulse Time, Switch Off Time, Number of Pulses

Pulse time Switch off time
(50 ms to 500 ms) t 50 ms
Minimum period time
x Pulse time (Pulse): Defines the "high" time of the signal at the binary output; possible values:
50 ms to 500 ms.
x Switch off time: Time during which the signal at the output of the binary contact is "low". The
switch off time depends on the power measured.
x Minimum switch off time: The minimum switch off time must not be smaller than 50 ms to
reach a defined switch off time.
x Number of pulses: The minimum pulse length and the minimum switch off time define the fol-
lowing maximum number of impulses per hour:
Pulse time Minimum switch Minimum period Max. number of

(ms) off time (ms) time (ms) pulses / h
50 t 50 100 36000
100 t 50 150 24000
150 t 50 200 18000
200 t 50 250 14400
250 t 50 300 12000
300 t 50 350 10286
350 t 50 400 9000
400 t 50 450 8000
450 t 50 500 7200
500 t 50 550 6545

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.7.2.3 Parameterization of Energy Pulses
If you want to use the binary outputs for energy measurement, you have to calculate the smallest
possible input (kWh/pulse) first. Please use the following description:
1. Select the pulse length (e.g. 200 ms). Refer to the table in chapter 5.7.2.2 for the maximum
number of pulses/h: 14400
2. Calculation of the maximum load to be connected:
Single-phase circuit: Maximum load to be connected =
(Voltage measuring range Ph-N x Transformation ratio of the voltage transformer) x (Cur-
rent measuring range x Transformation ratio of the current transformer)
e.g.: UPh-N, max = 276 V, TU = 1; Imax = 1.2 A, TI = 1
Pmax = UPh-N, max x Imax = 331.2 W
Three-phase or four-phase circuit: Maximum load to be connected = (Voltage measuring

range Ph-N x Transformation ratio of the voltage transformer) x (Current measuring range
x Transformation ratio of the current transformer) x 3
e.g.: UPh-N, max = 276 V, TU = 1; Imax = 1.2 A, TI = 1
Pmax = (UPh-N, max x Imax) x 3 = 993.6 W
3. Calculation of the minimum energy increase per pulse
Depending on the pulse length and the maximum number of pulses/h the following calcula-
tion applies:
Singl-phase circuit:
Pmax/W / 14400 puls/h = 331.2 W / 14400 puls/h =
0.023 Wh/puls = 0.000023 kWh/puls
Three-phase or four-phase circuit:
Pmax/W / 14400 puls/h = 993.6 W / 14400 puls/h =
0.069 Wh/puls = 0.000069 kWh/puls
For the example, the smallest energy increase is as follows:

Singl-phase circuit: 0.000023 kWh/puls
Three-phase or four-phase circuit: 0.000069 kWh/puls
If you use a setting higher than these values the increase of energy will be registered cor-
rectly.
Note:
The smallest possible input values only apply if the connected load is close to the threshold of
the measuring range of the device. If the connected load is smaller, the calculated values may
also be smaller.
Note:
A transformation ratio >1 has to be used in the calculation described above and in the parame-
terization of the device.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.7.2.4 Parameterization of Energy Pulses via Parameterization Software
To parameterize energy impulses via parameterization software (refer also to chapter 5.7.1),
proceed as follows:
1. Select the Measured value to be counted.

2. 2.Select the Test point for the energy measurement.
3. Select the Pulse length for the signal.
Note:
Smallest pulse length = 50 ms.
4. Calculate the smallest energy increase per pulse. Use the description in chapter 5.7.2.3 to
calculate the minimum value.
You can use the Help field in the dialog window for the calculation. For this purpose, enter
the connected consumer power in the kW in total field. Then switch over to another field of
this dialog window to update the display. The smallest possible power increase per pulse for
the connected consumer power you have entered is displayed in the Help field under Input
can be in range.
Note:
When you open the dialog for the first time, default values will be displayed. These values are
derived from the connection type (single-phase, three-phase or four-phase circuit), the voltage
and current range and the transformer ratios
The default values are only valid when you open the dialog for the first time!
5. For the value entered in the field Energy increase per pulse, a pulse will be applied to the
selected output each time when the given value will be reached

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
Note:
To ensure proper energy registration, this value must not be lower than the value calculated in
step 4.
5.7.3 Basic Settings
This dialog allows you to specify the I/O module (optionally) of your SIMEAS P.
There are two possibilities:
SIMEAS P is connected with PC (online)

1. Click the button Load slot configuration from device. The information will be loaded from
the device and displayed on the screen.
2. Parameterize the I/O modules.
3. Send the new configuration to the device.
Note:
This procedure ensures that the I/O modules displayed on the screen correspond to those in the
device.
A parameter set is prepared for a later transmission to a SIMEAS P (offline).

1. Define slot A for the corresponding I/O module.
Note:
These settings must correspond to the I/O modules in the device (refer to the ordering number,
see chapter 1.2)!

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
2. Parameterize the I/O modules.

3. Send the new configuration to the device, as soon as the connection to the device has been
established.
5.7.4 Analog Outputs (optional)
The analog outputs (optional) allow you to output internal measurement values as analog values
in the range of 0 mA to 20 mA. This feature represents a measuring transducer.
Proceed as follows:
1. Please select Slot A to configure analog outputs.
2. Activate/Deactivate one or both analog outputs by ticking the corresponding check box under
1. and/or 2.
3. For each analog output used, choose the Measured value together with the Test point and
set the signal range in the fields from and to.
4. Select the current range of the I/O module: 0..20 mA or 4..20 mA.
Note:
The output of analog values can be controlled via Modbus, IEC 60870-5-103 or Profibus proto-
col. Select output mode first in screen further setting (see chapter 4.4.8) in AO settings and
choose holding or default mode in screen Analog output settings.
Deactivate the channel which will be controlled by communication protocol in dialog Analog out-
puts.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.7.5 Analog Inputs (optional)
The analog inputs (optional) allow you to measure analog signals in the range of 0 mA to 20 mA.
Proceed as follows:
1. Activate/Deactivate one or both analog inputs by ticking the corresponding check box under
1. and/or 2.
2. For each input used, set the Designation together with the Dimension (max. 6 characters).
3. You define the range of values of the signal in the fields from and to.
4. The device display will be parameterized via screen contents, the supervision of limit values
concerning the analog inputs via limit value groups.
Note:
It is possible to save the values (together with the time information) recorded via analog inputs
to the memory for mean values (see chapter 5.9.2).

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.7.6 Binary Inputs (optional)
The binary inputs (optional) can be used for static messages and impulse inputs.
Proceed as follows:
1. Activate/Deactivate one or both binary inputs by ticking the corresponding check box under
1. and/or 2.
2. For each input used, set the Designation together with the Dimension.
3. If you want to use the input as an external counter, you have to define the Factor e.g. as
Energy increase per pulse (refer to chapter 5.7.2).
4. If you want to use the binary input to display binary information (0/1), 0 must be entered as
a factor.
5. Choose the binary input to be used for time Synchronization via minute impulses. The
device will display the designation, not the number of the Binary input.
Note:
The designation of the binary input is displayed instead of the binary input number!
6. Analog to measured values, binary inputs may be displayed on measurement screens (see
chapter 5.6.2).

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.8 Additionals
5.8 Additionals
All other settings in SIMEAS P are made in the following windows.
Options
x Regional settings, such as device language and measured value descriptor
x Type of power calculation
x Direction of current
x Power direction
x Counter assignment of digital counter in screens
x Zero point suppression
Device code
Setting device codes to secure the device settings against unauthorized changes.
Limit value groups

The 7 limit value groups for the device can be set here.
Clock Change
Here you can set the data for daylight saving time switchover.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.8 Additionals
5.8.1 Options
You can set more parameters for the SIMEAS P under Options.
Regional settings
x Language: Here, you can select what language the device display is in when you parame-
terize it using the device buttons.
x Measured value designation: The description of the conductor on device L1/L3/L3 or A/B/
C can be selected here.
Power calculation
Here, you can select the type of power calculation and the calculation for current and voltage.
The basic setting is standard. Settings options:
x Standard: All measured values are true RMS, taking all harmonics into consideration. Cal-
culation of reactive power using methods used by traditional measuring devices. (electrody-
namics power measurement)
x DIN: All measured values are true RMS, taking all harmonics into consideration. Customized
from standard: reactive power calculation, apparent power calculation, cos I and power fac-
tor, taking into consideration the new definition of apparent power in: DIN 40110-2.
x Fourier: All measured values calculated from the fundamental wave. Harmonics are not con-
sidered.
Direction of current
x Standard: Default setting for correct connection according to standard and back panel mar-
king
x Inverse: Current direction is negated (change the current direction to avoid changing the
connectors).

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.8 Additionals
Power direction
This parameter allows you to set the operating mode of the SIMEAS P:
x Load (industry mode, standard)
this means:Power positive = Energy demand
Power negative = Energy supply
x Generator (Power generation mode)
this means:Power negative = Energy demand
Power positive = Energy supply
Counter assignment
Internal counters 1 to 4 can be displayed in the digital measured value screens of the
SIMEAS P. You can assign the four internal counters to the max. 6 limit values groups here.
Zero point suppression

The zero suppression enables the definition of the measuring range start in % of the measuring
range end. Can be selected from 0.0 % to 10.0 % of the upper limit of the measurement range
(default setting: 1.000 %).
Note: Due to its high precision, SIMEAS P can measure voltages and currents even without
measuring values connected to the device. If you do not want this behaviour in your application,
you can suppress measuring below a certain threshold.
5.8.2 Device Code
Setting the device code secures the SIMEAS P against unauthorized changes.
When the code is activated, you are prompted to enter the password when you call up the para-
meterization menu from the buttons on the device. The relevant menu is only enabled if you enter
the correct password.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.8 Additionals
Note:
The software does not require a password.
Code 1
x without: no security
x with: device code 1 is only active if code 2 is activated as well.
Functions secured: screen parameterization, reset energy min / max values and changing
device language.
Code 2
x without: no security (code 1 also deactivated)
x with: code is activated
Saved functions: basic parameters (connection / transformers, outputs, interface, change
code, adjustment, other settings)
Notes:
x A password always consists of a 6-digit number.
x If you forget your password, you can activate the machine either using a master password
(available from the hotline, see Foreword) or using the SIMEAS P parameterization software.
x Device code 1 is only active if code 2 is activated as well.
x If code 1 and 2 are activated, the code 2 password can also be used to unlock all the func-
tions secured using code 1.
x If the secured parameter settings are called up in SIMEAS P, a window appears asking you
to enter a password.
x If a secured parameter is unlocked by entering a password on the device, a new password
prompt appears after a wait of 1 minute in level 1.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.8 Additionals
5.8.3 Limit Value Groups
In SIMEAS P, you can parameterize up to 7 limit value groups. For limit value group 7, only vol-
tages are allowed.
Every limit value group provides the option to monitor whether the measurements exceed (>)
or fall short of (<) a measured value that is entered. In each of the seven limit value groups, up
to six measured quantities (no power quantities) can be ANDed or ORed.
The limit value groups set can be allocated either to binary outputs or to the internal counters.
The oscilloscope can be triggered using a limit value group 1 to 6.
x Filter time: Time for which a threshold breach must remain in order to trigger an alarm. Input
from 0.0 s to 9.9 s.
Note:
To make sure that limit violations will be registered, enter a filter time t 1 s.
x Hysteresis: Entry from 0.1 % to max. 10 %. The value relates to the nominal values for the
individual measured values.
Note:
If the device provides additional analog inputs (optional), you can use external measurement sig-
nals for limit-value monitoring.
Note:
Limit value group 7 allows you to monitor the measured voltages in real-time and logs the
measured value that caused a limit violation.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.8 Additionals
5.8.4 Clock Change
Select the date (day/month) when daylight saving time will start and end.
You do not have to indicate the hour since SIMEAS P considers the fact that the time change
(Day / Mon.) will always take place at 2 a.m.
If you have not entered a date for start and end of the daylight saving time, the corresponding
field remains grayed and SIMEAS P assumes that no time change will take place in the device.
The time change will only be carried out if the corresponding date field is activated.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
In the following dialog windows, you can customize the memory of SIMEAS P according to your
requirements.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.9.1 Splitting
In this dialog window you can determine how the available memory capacity will be allocated to
the available functions.
Note:
The indicated percentages must be in the range between 1 and 96 percent and total 100 %.
Once you have entered a percent value, SIMEAS PAR displays to its right the recording time and
the number of values that will be stored for this setting. The oldest values will be overwritten if
you have selected Ring buffer = Yes for the recording or if overwriting is enabled by default. If
you have selected Ring buffer = No, the recording will be terminated when the capacity of the
associated memory area is exhausted. See the next chapters for details.
Note:
The device has a memory capacity of 1 MByte (= 1048576 Bytes). The default setting ex works
is 20 % of the total memory capacity for each of the five memory areas. With this memory parti-
tion, the theoretical memory capacity is 200 KBytes (exactly: 209715 Bytes) per memory area.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
The recording capacities will be calculated according to the following formulas:
Note:
For technical reasons (e.g., capacity for header data), the recording capacity for the individual
measured values displayed in the dialog window is slightly smaller than the capacity in the
examples.
Mean values
AllocatedMemory[ Byte] * Periodtime

t MAX [h]
((n *12) 4) Byte * 3600
n: Number of channels (max. 8)
Period time: 5 s, 10 s, 15 s, 30 s, 60 s, 600 s, 900 s, 1800 s or 3600 s
Calculation example with 20 % memory size, n = 8 channels and period time = 10 s
209715 Byte * 10
tMAX (h) = = 5.8 h
((8 * 12) + 4) Byte * 3600
Power values
AllocatedM emory [ Byte ] * Periodtime

t MAX [ d ]
(( n * 4 ) 6 ) Byte * 1440
n: Number of channels (max. 8)

Period time: 15 min, 30 min or 60 min
Calculation example with 20 % memory size, n = 8 channels and period time = 15 min
209715 Byte * 15
tMAX (d) = = 60 d
((8 * 4) + 6) Byte * 1440

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
Oscilloscope: Instantaneous values
AllocatedMemory[ Byte]
t MAX [ s ]
64 *16 Byte * 50
Calculation example with 20 % memory size
209715 Byte
tMAX (s) = = 4,1 s
64 * 16 Byte * 50
Oszilloscop: RMS values
t MAX [h]
8Byte * 3600
209715 Byte
tMAX (h) = =7h
8 Byte * 3600
Limit violations
Values
12 Byte
209715 Byte
Values = = 17476
12 Byte

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
Binary states
Values
8Byte
209715 Byte
Values = = 26214
8 Byte
5.9.2 Mean Values
In this dialog window you can specify the settings for mean value recording.
Proceed as follows:
1. Select up to eight Measured values and Test points.
2. Select a Date or one of the six Limit value groups as Start selector for the average value
recording. It is possible to combine Date and Limit value group as start selectors. The first of
the two criteria fulfilled, will launch the recording.
3. When entering a date as Start selector, you must indicate a year between 2000 and 2060.
4. The Ring buffer mode allows you to select, if the oldest values will be overwritten (= Yes) or
not (= No) when the capacity of the associated memory area is exhausted.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5. Also, you must indicate the Averaging interval (5 s, 10 s, 15 s, 30 s, 1 min, 5 min, 10 min,
15 min, 30 min, 60 min) and the Storage interval (5 s, 10 s, 15 s, 30 s, 1 min, 5 min, 10 min,
15 min, 30 min, 60 min). These parameters set the number of measured values to be used
for mean value calculation and the interval for saving the values.
Note:
If you have entered a past start date, SIMEAS P will initiated mean value recording immediately
after the setting. Manual start is not activated by configuration but can be initiated at any time.
Note:
If the device provides additional analog inputs (optional), you can record external measurement
signals.
5.9.3 Power Values
In this dialog window you can specify the settings for power recording.
Proceed as follows:
1. Select up to eight Measured values and Test points.
2. Select a Date or one of the six Limit value groups as Start selector for the power recording.
It is possible to combine Date and Limit value group as start selectors. The first of the two
criteria fulfilled, will launch the recording.
3. When entering a date as Start selector, you must indicate a year between 2000 and 2060.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
Note:
If you have entered a past start date, SIMEAS P will initiated mean value recording immediately
after the setting. Manual start is not activated by configuration but can be initiated at any time.
5. Also, you must indicate the Period time (15 min, 30 min, 60 min).

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.9.4 Oscilloscope
x The oscilloscope is parameterized using SIMEAS P Par.

x Three measured quantities are always recorded.
x Normally, 30 % of the recording is allocated to pre-triggering history.
x Only one recording is possible. When initiating a new recording, the previous one is deleted.
x When triggering the oscilloscope via limit violation, the recording can also be executed in the
background.
x Only the first of several limit violations that trigger a recording is recorded. Further violations
are ignored.
Note:
The memory range can be set by the user.
5.9.4.1 Characteristics of „Instantaneous Values“ Recording
Record length can be parameterized. The recording time to be saved in the allocated memory
(see chapter 5.9.1) is calculated according to the following formula:
t MAX [ s ]
64 *16 Byte * 50
Sampling rate
The sampling rate is adjusted such that there are 64 samples per cycle. Therefore, the sampling
rate is as follows for 50 Hz and 60 Hz respectively:
x at 50 Hz = 3.20 kHz
x at 60 Hz = 3.84 kHz
Trigger via Limit Violation

The RMS value of each half wave is calculated and tested for Max/Min violations. If a violation
is detected, recording is triggered immediately. The bandwidth and filter time settings are irrele-
vant here.
Note:
The recording type "Instantaneous value" allows to record the measurement values "current"
and "voltage" only.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.9.4.2 Characteristics of "RMS Value" Recording
x Any three measured quantities can be selected from the Table 3-1 with the exception of
energy values and counters.
Recording time
Recording time can be parameterized. The recording time to be saved in the allocated memory
(see chapter 5.9.1) is calculated according to the following formula:
t MAX [h]
8Byte * 3600
x One sample of a measured quantity is saved each second.

x Pre-trigger history is always 30 % of the selected recording time.
Note:
x Since 30 % of the recording time is always allocated to pre-trigger history, the time for recor-
ding the pre-trigger history must expire before a new recording can be triggered.
x The recording type "RMS Value" does not allow to record analog inputs (optional).

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.9.5 Parameterization Oscilloscope
The oscilloscope can be set via this dialog window.
Proceed as follows:
1. Select up to three measured quantities: An oscilloscope recording is started via the selec-
ted limit value group (groups 1 to 6 are allowed).
2. Also, you must determine whether to record Instantaneous values or RMS values.
Note:
When changing the value type (instantaneous or RMS), the present selection will be reset since
the two types of measured values have different value ranges.
4. Indicate the Storage duration in seconds.
Note:
In the submenu Memory management o Splitting you can see what storage time corresponds
to the indicated percentage for oscilloscope.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.9.6 Limit Violation
In this dialog window you can specify the limit value groups to be recorded.
Select up to six Limit value groups. A violation of the specified limits will be recorded in the
memory.
Note:
If the memory capacity for the recording of limit violations is exhausted, data within this area will
be overwritten.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.9.7 Binary States
In this dialog window you can specify the settings for recording of binary states.
Select the Binary outputs to be recorded. The states of the binary outputs will then be recorded
in the memory.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.10 Updating the Firmware
Proceed as follows to update the firmware:
1. Establish a connection to the device. From the menu bar, select ConnectionoSetup con-
nection and set the following parameters in the Setup device connection dialog:
x Device connection: Serial connection

x Device address: address 0 is valid for all devices
x Interface: e.g. COM1
x Baud rate: 9600 Baud at delivery
x depends on adapter type RS485
Note:
Make sure to set the same parameter values in SIMEAS P Parameterization and in the device.
In the device, the serial interface must be set to "PC-RS 485".
2. Confirm by clicking OK.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
3. Query the device identification once to check the connection. To do this, click the ID symbol
in the toolbar.
4. Click the Receive Identification button to retrieve data from the device. If the configuration
is correct, all lines are filled with device data. Close the dialog window.
5. From the menu bar, select Device o Send new firmware.
6. In the Send firmware dialog, enter the path to the firmware (file 7KG*.SX)
7. Click the button Transmit firmware. The transfer may take some minutes. Check the ID
again (symbol ID, see item 3). The new firmware version will be displayed.
Note:
A check sum allows to relate each firmware version to device types and hardware versions. This
ensures that no incompatible hardware and software version are updated. In this case, the trans-
fer will be terminated with the message "Timeout while waiting for reply from device". The original
firmware in the device remains unchanged.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.11 Resetting Values in the Device
5.11 Resetting Values in the Device
SIMEAS P Parameterization allows you to reset the following values:

x Energy counter
x Counters for limit violations
x Min, aver and max values
Proceed as follows:
1. Establish a connection to the device. Make sure to set the same parameter values in
SIMEAS P Parameterization and in the device. In the device, the serial interface must be set
to "PC-RS 485".
2. From the menu bar, select Device o Commands o Reset values to reset the displayed
items.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.12 Reading the Device Memory
SIMEAS P Parameterization allows you read the memory content. The available memory capa-
city (1 MByte) can be allocated by the user to the available functions (see chapter 5.9.1).
1. From the menu bar, select Device o Read Memory to select the memory area in the Read
memory dialog
2. Select a memory area.
5.12.1 Handling
Note:
Depending on the function you have selected, different buttons are displayed. Inactive buttons
are not shown.
Cancel
Click this button to interrupt the data download from the device. If a large amount of the memory
is assigned to a record, the download of data may take a few minutes (at low baud rates perhaps
some hours). The download progress is shown in the status line. If the download was successful
or interrupted by the user, this button will be renamed to Reload.
Reload
Click this button to reload measured values or data from the device.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
Close
Click this button to terminate the dialog window Read memory.
Export
Click this button to save measured values or information as CSV file (Comma separated values)
or COMTRADE file (IEEE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange). CSV files
can be read and processed, e.g., with Excel. COMTRADE files are used for exchanging measu-
red data as documented in the IEEE Std C37.111-1999. The standardization includes both the
format for measuring files and the type of media used for the exchange of fault report, test or
simulation data of power supply systems.
Delete memory area

Click this button to delete the selected memory area in the device. Optionally, you can restart the
recording immediately or with the occurring of a parameterized trigger condition (mean values,
power values, and limit violations only).
5.12.2 Charts / Diagrams
Diagrams and charts are coupled: By moving the measuring cursor in the diagram, the corres-
ponding row in the chart is marked; by activating a row in the chart, the cursor in the diagram
moves to the corresponding timestamp (mean values, power values, and binary states only).
5.12.3 Diagrams
In diagrams, zooming, measuring and other functions are available. Click the right mouse button
in diagrams to activate the functions zoom, optimize, optimize x-axis, optimize y-axis, diagrams
(fade in or blind out diagram for measured value), signals (fade in or blind out diagram for mini-
mum, mean respectively maximum value) and copy diagrams in selectable size to the clipboard
(mean values, power values, binary states, and oscilloscope data only).
5.12.4 Timestamps
All timestamps are shown in regional normal time. This avoids time gaps or overlap in data (for
example, when summer time starts or ends).
5.12.5 Mean Value Record
Mean values are represented in a chart and in diagrams. In the chart, you can select between
minimum values, mean values and maximum values in headline. For each recorded mean value
(max. 8), one column in the chart and one diagram is shown. In the diagram, the mean value and
the tolerance area limited by minimum and maximum value are drawn.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.12.6 Power Value Record
Power values are represented in a chart and in diagrams. For each recorded power value (max.
8), one column in the chart and one diagram is shown.
5.12.7 Oscilloscope
Records of oscilloscope are represented in one diagram for each value with trigger timestamp.
With the two measuring cursors measurement on signals is possible. To do this, select signals
in the table. Additional functions are available by pressing the right mouse button (see diagrams).
5.12.8 Limit Violation Record
Limit violations are represented in a chart. Limit violations of group 1 to 6 are shown when occur-
ring (ON) and disappearing (OFF). For limit violation group 7, additional information is available:
the signal on which the violation occurred and the measured value appeared.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.12.9 Binary States
Binary states are represented in a chart and in diagrams. For each recorded binary state, one
column in the chart and one diagram is shown.
5.12.10 Log Entries
Log entries are represented in a chart. For each of the following entries, date and time are
shown:
x Failure voltage supply
x Switch on auxiliary power supply
x Change of device parameter
x Reset recording limit value groups
x Reset recording mean values
x Reset recording power values
x Reset recording oscilloscope
x Set watch
Note:
For further information on "Reading the Device Memory", refer to the online help of the PC pro-
gramming software (press F1).

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
5.13 Changing the Communication Parameters
At delivery, the following communication parameters are preset:

x Address: 1
x Protocol: Serial ASCII
x Baud rate: 9600 bit/s
x Parity: No
In order to switch to another protocol, proceed as follows:

1. From the menu, select Device o Connection configuration o Edit. The dialog Device
connection parameters will open.
2. Select the combination of bus protocols supported by your device in the bus protocols in
the device field:
x PROFIBUS DP and Modbus or
x IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
5
Note:
The bus protocols provided in your device depend on the device type and the firmware ver-
sion.Therefore check the correct bus protocol combination of your device.
3. Select the required protocol type depending on the bus protocol used:
PROFIBUS DP and Modbus IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus
- Serial ASCII - Serial ASCII
- Profibus DP - IEC 60870-5-103
- Modbus ASCII - Modbus ASCII
- Modbus RTU - Modbus RTU
4. Set the Address of the device and (if required) the Baud rate and the Parity.
5. If you have selected the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, the following IEC 60870-5-103-specific
parameters are activated, where you have to choose :
x Measured values range: 120 % or 240 %
x Transmit harmonics: Yes or No
x Transmit energy and counters: Yes or No
6. Confirm your entries by clicking OK.
7. Select the menu item Deviceo Connection configuration o Send to send the new setting
to the device.
Note:
The settings will not be activated in the device unless a hardware reset has been made.
After the device has been switched on, you have got 60 seconds to establish a connection to the
parameterization tool. Once this time has elapsed, the communication protocol set will be acti-
vated automatically.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
Calibration 6
Contents
The adjustment is explained in the following chapters.
6.1 Overview 124
6.2 Connection Diagrams for Adjustment 125
6.3 Procedure 126

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
6
6.1 Overview
6.1 Overview
SIMEAS P can be adjusted either directly from the device using the buttons on the front panel or
by using the SIMEAS P programming software.
You can select the measurement range under Basic Settings o Connection / Transformer.
Only the measurement ranges selected for current and voltage inputs can be adjusted in the
Calibration menu.
Adjusting the SIMEAS P requires a single-phase adjusting device that can generate voltages
and currents to an accuracy of d 0.1 %, e.g. Omicron CMC 156. Adjustment frequency: 50 Hz or
60 Hz.
Note:
To be able to make adjustments using the software, a connection must have been established
between the PC and the SIMEAS P device.
Before adjustment, you should send the time to the SIMEAS P. This ensures that the last adjus-
tment is displayed with a date in the SIMEAS P.
When connecting the adjusting outputs to the appropriate inputs, make sure that the SIMEAS P
is correctly connected as per the Connection Diagrams for adjustment.
The following three elements should be adjusted during the adjustment process:
x Voltage inputs V
x Current inputs I

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
6
6.2 Connection Diagrams for Adjustment
6.2 Connection Diagrams for Adjustment
Correct adjustment is crucial to the accuracy of the measurements made by the SIMEAS P.
Note:
The voltage and current inputs of the SIMEAS P are not compatible with polarity reversal (i.e. if
phase and neutral terminals are connected incorrectly, the adjustment will not work correctly).
The following applies to the adjustment of current and voltage inputs of the SIMEAS P:
x Single-phase current and voltage connection.
x Frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
x There must be no phase shift between current and voltage.
x Connect the H (ground) and F4 terminals to "N" on the adjusting device.
x The SIMEAS P must be grounded.
L
U
N
Note:
The wiring diagram is a schematic presentation. Please refer to Fig. 1-7 for the correct pin
assignment.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
6
6.3 Procedure
6.3 Procedure
x First, connect the SIMEAS P as described in chapter 6.2.

x You can adjust the device manually or via programming software
Procedure at the device

x Select Basic settings o Connection / Transformer.
Select the range to be adjusted (e.g. AC 228 V).
x In the menu, select: Calibrate.
A dialog window appears.
x Enter the setpoint value for adjustment voltage and adjustment current. Default setpoints are
the nominal ranges of the measuring ranges set under Connection / Transformer. Optimal
precision can be achieved by using these default setpoint values. If the default values are not
available, make the appropriate changes.
x Switch the adjusting device on with the setpoints.
x Follow the instructions. SIMEAS P is readjusted.
Procedure for programming software
Calibration of the
selected input range.
Please follow the in-
structions in manual!
<ok
<cancel
x Establish the communication between device and programming software.

x In the menu, select: Calibration
A dialog window appears.
x Select the element you wish to adjust: U or I
x Enter the setpoints for adjustment of voltage and current. The setpoints given are the nominal
values of the measurement ranges set under Connection / Transformer. These preset set-
points ensure optimum precision. If the preset values are not correct, change them accordin-
gly.
x Switch the adjusting device on with the setpoints.
x Follow the instructions. SIMEAS P is readjusted.

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
Technical Data 7
Contents
The following chapters include the technical data of both devices.
7.1 SIMEAS P 7KG7750 128
7.2 SIMEAS P 7KG7755 132

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
7
7.1 SIMEAS P 7KG7750
Input signals Only for connection to AC systems

AC voltage inputs UI 3 voltage inputs
Max. system voltage Y 400 /' 690 V
Overload 20 %
Frequency range fi 45 Hz to 65 Hz, min. > 30 % U IN
Waveform Sinusoidal or distorted up to the
21st harmonic
Input voltage Ui AC 100 V/110 V; AC 190 V; AC 400 V;
AC 690 V (L-L)
Continuous overload capacity 1.5 x Ui
Surge withstand capability 2.0 x Ui
Input resistance (L - N) 3 phases symmetrical: 4.2 M:
1 phase: 8.4 M:
Power consumption per phase 38 mW (ULE = 400 V)
AC current inputs II 3 current inputs
Input current Ii AC 1 A; AC 5 A
Maximum voltage AC: 150 V
Continuous overload AC 10 A
Surge withstand capability AC 100 A for 1s
Power consumption per phase 83 μVA at 1 A ; 2.1 mVA at 5 A
Binary outputs Internal and optional
via isolated solid-state relay
Permissible voltage AC: 230 V; DC: 250 V
Permissible current AC/DC 100 mA continuous
AC/DC 300 mA for 100 ms
Internal resistance 50 :
Permissible operating frequency 10 Hz
Binary inputs (optional)
Max. input voltage DC 300 V
Current consumption for high level 1.8 mA
Threshold voltage low d10 V
Threshold voltage high t19 V
Signal delay Max. 3 ms
Analog inputs (optional)
Measuring range DC 0 mA to 20 mA
Input range DC 0 mA to 24 mA
Input resistance 50 : r 0.1 %
Accuracy 0.5 % of the measuring range limit
Analog outputs (optional)
Output current DC 0 mA to 20 mA
Output range DC 0 mA to 24 mA
Max. load resistance 250 :
Accuracy 0.2 % (typical); max. 0.5 % of the nominal value
Relay output contacts (optional)
Max. switching voltage AC 270 V; DC 150 V
Max. permanent current AC/DC 5 A
Min. permanent current 1 mA at DC 5 V
Rating (resistive) AC 5 A / 250 V or DC 5 A /30 V
Max. response time 10 ms
Max. release time 7 ms

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
7
Display Graphic display

Resolution (128 x 64) pixel
Dimensions 40 mm x 60 mm
Dimensions, Mass
Dimensions 96 mm x 96 mm x 90 mm
Mass approx. 0.6 kg (without I/O module)
approx. 0.65 kg (with I/O module)
Over voltage category According to IEC 61010-1

Voltage measurement
VIN to 400 V (L-L) Cat III
VIN to 690 V (L-L) Cat II
Current measurement
VIN to 150 V Cat III
Power Supply Cat II
Binary outputs, binary inputs and relay
outputs Cat II
Analog inputs and analog outputs Cat III
Auxiliary power Multi-range power supply unit AC /DC
Nominal range DC 24 V to 250 V or
AC 100 V to 230 V (45 Hz to 65 Hz)
Total range ±20 % of nominal range
Power consumption max. 6 W or 9 VA
Battery
Type VARTA CR2032
Comm unication interface

Connection 9-pole D-sub. f emale connector
Data transfer
PROFIBUS D P V1 Baud rate:
9600 bit/s to 12 Mbit/s
Data transfer
IEC 60870-5-103 Baud rate:
9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s, 38400 bit/s
Data transfer
Modbus RTU/ASCII Baud rate:
PC-RS 485 300 bit/s, 600 bit/s, 1200 bit/s, 3400 bit/s , 4800 bit/s,
9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s, 38400 bit/s, 57600 bit/s,
115200 bit /s

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
7
Is o l a ti o n t e s t IE C / E N 6 1 0 1 0 -1
T yp e t e s t R o u t in e te s t , 2 s
V o lt a g e in p u t s , b i n a r y o u t p u t s A C 3 .2 k V A C 2 .0 k V
C ur r e n t i np u ts A C 2 .2 k V A C 1 .3 5 k V
P o w e r s u p p ly D C 4 .9 k V D C 3 .1 k V
S e ri a l i n t e r f a c e AC 700 V AC 500 V
I/ O - M o d u l e ( o p t i o n a l )
B in a r y in p u t s a n d b in a r y /r e la y o u t p u t s A C 2 .2 k V A C 1 .3 5 k V
to P G
A n a lo g in p u t s a n d a n a lo g o u t p u ts t o AC 700 V AC 500 V
PG
Impulse voltage withstand test IEC/EN 61010-1

Voltage inputs 5.8 kV
Current inputs 2.5 kV
Power supply 5.8 kV
Serial interface 1.31 kV
I/O-Module (optional)
Binary inputs and binary/relay outputs to PG 1.31 kV
Analog inputs and analog outputs to PG 1.31 kV
Insulation type of inputs and outputs

Signal inputs (current) Reinforced,
AC: max. 150 V, Cat III
Signal inputs (voltage) Protective impedance,
max. AC 600 V, Cat II or
max. AC 300 V, Cat III
Power supply Reinforced,
max. AC 230 V/ max. DC 250V, Cat II
Output contacts Reinforced,
max. AC 230 V/ max. DC 250V, Cat II

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
7
The stated error limits apply for reference

Reference conditions conditions
Input current Ii IiN ± 1 %
Input voltage Ui UiN ± 1 %
Frequency fi 45 Hz to 65 Hz
Waveform Sinus, harmonic distortion d 5 %
Ambient temperature TA 23 °C ± 1 °C
Auxiliary voltage UH UHN ± 1 %
Warm-up time t 15 min
External fields no
Environmental conditions The device is designed for indoor use only

Ambient Temperature According to IEC 60688
Operating Temperature Range 32 °F to 131 °F (0 °C to 55 °C)
Storage Temperature Range -13 °F to 158 °F (-25 °C to 70 °C)
Max. relative humidity 80 % for temperatures up to 31 °C
decrease linearly to 50 % at 40 °C
Max. altitude above sea level 2000 m
Pollution degree 2, no condensation
Additional Technical Data

Internal fuse Not replaceable
Type T500mA/250V according
IEC 60127
Internal fuse, secondary Not replaceable
Type F2A/125V according
UL 248-14
Protection class according IEC 60529

Device
Front IP20, IP41 or IP 65 see ordering data
Rear IP20
Personnel protection IP1x
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Immunity IEC/EN 61000-6-2
IEC/EN 60688
Emission IEC-CISPR 11
IEC/EN 61000-6-4
Class B

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
7
Mechanical dynamic stress

Standards IEC/EN 60255-21
IEC/EN 60068
Vibration, sinusoidal IEC/EN 60255-21-1 (06.90)
for stationary application IEC/EN 60068-2-6 (03.95)
Class 1
Vibration, sinusoidal IEC/EN 60255-21-1 (06.90)
transport IEC/EN 60068-2-6 (03.95)
Class 1
Vibration on earthquake IEC/EN 60255-21-3 (06.90)
for stationary application IEC/EN 60068-2-57 (03.95)
IEC/EN 60068-3-3 (03.95)
Class 1
Shock, for stationary application IEC/EN 60255-21-2 (06.90)
IEC/EN 60068-2-27 (03.95)
Class 1
Shock, semi-sinusoidal, transport IEC/EN 60255-21-2 (06.90)
IEC/EN 60068-2-27 (03.95)
Class 1
Bump test (continuous shock), transport IEC/EN 60255-21-2 (06.90)
IEC/EN 60068-2-29 (03.95)
Class 1
With the following exceptions, the technical data of the SIMEAS P 7KG7755 correspond to the
data of the SIMEAS P 7KG7750:
The SIMEAS P 7KG7755 has no display.
Protection class according IEC/EN 60529 (VDE 0470 part 1)

Device IP20
Personnel protection IP1x

E50417-B1076-C340-A3, Edition 01.2009
10-12
10.4 STIEBEL Splitter Gearbox Operating Instructions

10-13
10.5 Mitsubishi Air Conditioning Unit

10-14
Air Conditioning - PLA-RP BA Series- Operation Manual

Air-Conditioners
Indoor unit
PLA-RP.BA Series
OPERATION MANUAL FOR USER

For safe and correct use, please read this operation manual thoroughly before operating the air-conditioner unit. English
BEDIENUNGSHANDBUCH FÜR BENUTZER

Zum sicheren und einwandfreien Gebrauch der Klimaanlage dieses Bedienungshandbuch vor Inbetriebnahme Deutsch
gründlich durchlesen.
MANUEL D’UTILISATION POUR L’UTILISATEUR

Pour une utilisation correcte sans risques, veuillez lire le manuel d’utilisation en entier avant de vous servir du Français
climatiseur.
BEDIENINGSHANDLEIDING VOOR DE GEBRUIKER

Voor een veilig en juist gebruik moet u deze bedieningshandleiding grondig doorlezen voordat u de aircondi- Nederlands
tioner gebruikt.
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES PARA EL USUARIO

Lea este manual de instrucciones hasta el final antes de poner en marcha la unidad de aire acondicionado para Español
garantizar un uso seguro y correcto.
ISTRUZIONI DI FUNZIONAMENTO PER L’UTENTE

Italiano
Leggere attentamente questi istruzioni di funzionamento prima di avviare l’unità, per un uso corretto e sicuro
della stessa.
ǼīȋǼǿȇǿǻǿȅ ȅǻǾīǿȍȃ ȋȇǾȈǼȍȈ īǿǹ ȉȅȃ ȋȇǾȈȉǾ

īȚĮ ĮıĳȐȜİȚĮ țĮȚ ıȦıĲȒ ȤȡȒıȘ, ʌĮȡĮțĮȜİȓıĲİ įȚĮȕȐıİĲİ ʌȡȠıİȤĲȚțȐ ĮȣĲȩ ĲȠ İȖȤİȚȡȓįȚȠ ȤȡȒıİȦȢ ʌȡȚȞ șȑıİĲİ ıİ ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ
ȜİȚĲȠȣȡȖȓĮ ĲȘ ȝȠȞȐįĮ țȜȚȝĮĲȚıȝȠȪ.
MANUAL DE OPERAÇÃO PARA O UTILIZADOR

Para segurança e utilização correctas, leia atentamente o manual de operação antes de pôr a funcionar a uni- Português
dade de ar condicionado.
DRIFTSMANUAL TIL BRUGER

Læs venligst denne driftsmanual grundigt før airconditionanlægget betjenes af hensyn til sikker og korrekt brug. Dansk
DRIFTSMANUAL FÖR ANVÄNDAREN

Läs denna driftsmanual noga för säkert och korrekt bruk innan luftkonditioneringen används. Svenska
Iúletme Elkitabı KULLANICI øÇøN

Emniyetli ve do÷ru biçimde nasıl kullanılaca÷ını ö÷renmek için lütfen klima cihazını iúletmeden önce bu Türkçe
elkitabını dikkatle okuyunuz.
ɊɍɄɈȼɈȾɋɌȼɈ ɉɈ ɗɄɋɉɅɍȺɌȺɐɂɂ ȾɅə ɉɈɅɖɁɈȼȺɌȿɅə

Ɋɭɫɫɤɢɣ
Ⱦɥɹ ɨɛɟɫɩɟɱɟɧɢɹ ɩɪɚɜɢɥɶɧɨɝɨ ɢ ɛɟɡɨɩɚɫɧɨɝɨ ɢɫɩɨɥɶɡɨɜɚɧɢɹ ɫɥɟɞɭɟɬ ɨɡɧɚɤɨɦɢɬɶɫɹ ɫ ɢɧɫɬɪɭɤɰɢɹɦɢ,
ɭɤɚɡɚɧɧɵɦɢ ɜ ɞɚɧɧɨɦ ɪɭɤɨɜɨɞɫɬɜɟ ɩɨ ɷɤɫɩɥɭɚɬɚɰɢɢ, ɬɳɚɬɟɥɶɧɵɦ ɨɛɪɚɡɨɦ ɞɨ ɬɨɝɨ, ɤɚɤ ɩɪɢɫɬɭɩɚɬɶ ɤ
ɢɫɩɨɥɶɡɨɜɚɧɢɸ ɤɨɧɞɢɰɢɨɧɟɪɚ.
Contents
1. Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 7. Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2. Parts Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 8. Function Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3. Screen Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 9. Emergency Operation for Wireless Remote-controller . . . . . . . . . . 18
4. Setting the Day of the Week and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 10. Care and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5. Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 11. Trouble Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
6. Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 12. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
This symbol mark is for EU countries only.

Note This symbol mark is according to the directive 2002/96/EC Article 10 Information for users and Annex IV, and/or to the di-
rective 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for end-users and Annex II.
Your MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC product is designed and manufactured with high quality materials and components which can be
recycled and/or reused. This symbol means that electrical and electronic equipment, batteries and accumulators, at their end-of-
life, should be disposed of separately from your household waste. If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol (Fig. 1), this
chemical symbol means that the battery or accumulator contains a heavy metal at a certain concentration.
This will be indicated as follows: Hg: mercury (0,0005%), Cd: cadmium (0,002%), Pb: lead (0,004%)
In the European Union there are separate collection systems for used electrical and electronic products, batteries and accumula-
Fig.1 tors.
Please, dispose of this equipment, batteries and accumulators correctly at your local community waste collection/recycling centre.
Please, help us to conserve the environment we live in!
1. Safety Precautions
ŹBefore installing the unit, make sure you read all the “Safety
Symbols used in the text
Warning:
Precautions”.
Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent danger
ŹThe “Safety Precautions” provide very important points re-
of injury or death to the user.
garding safety. Make sure you follow them.
Caution:
ŹPlease report to or take consent by the supply authority be-
Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent damage
fore connection to the system.
to the unit.
Symbols used in the illustrations

: Indicates a part which must be grounded.
Warning:
• For appliances not accessible to the general public. • When you notice exceptionally abnormal noise or vibration, stop
• The unit must not be installed by the user. Ask the dealer or an operation, turn off the power switch, and contact your dealer.
authorized company to install the unit. If the unit is installed im- • Never insert fingers, sticks etc. into the intakes or outlets.
properly, water leakage, electric shock or fire may result. • If you detect odd smells, stop using the unit, turn off the power
• Do not stand on, or place any items on the unit. switch and consult your dealer. Otherwise, a breakdown, electric
• Do not splash water over the unit and do not touch the unit with shock or fire may result.
wet hands. An electric shock may result. • This air conditioner is NOT intended for use by children or infirm
• Do not spray combustible gas close to the unit. Fire may result. persons without supervision.
• Do not place a gas heater or any other open-flame appliance • Young children must be supervised to ensure that they do not
where it will be exposed to the air discharged from the unit. In- play with the air conditioner.
complete combustion may result. • If the refrigeration gas blows out or leaks, stop the operation of
• Do not remove the front panel or the fan guard from the outdoor the air conditioner, thoroughly ventilate the room, and contact
unit when it is running. your dealer.
Caution: Disposing of the unit

• Do not use any sharp object to push the buttons, as this may When you need to dispose of the unit, consult your dealer.
damage the remote controller.
• Never block or cover the indoor or outdoor unit’s intakes or out-
lets.
2. Parts Names
Ŷ Indoor Unit
PLA-RP.BA Filter
Air outlet
Fan steps 4 steps
Vane Auto with swing
Louver –
Filter Long-life
Filter cleaning indication 2,500 hr
Vane
Air intake
2
2. Parts Names
Ŷ Wired Remote-Controller
“Sensor” indication
Display Section Displayed when the remote controller
sensor is used.
For purposes of this explanation, Day-of-Week
all parts of the display are shown. Shows the current day of the week.
During actual operation, only the
relevant items will be displayed. Time/Timer Display “Locked” indicator
Shows the current time, unless the simple or Auto Off Indicates that remote controller but-
timer is set. tons have been locked.
If the simple or Auto Off timer is set, shows the time re-
Identifies the current operation maining.
Shows the operating mode, etc. “Clean The Filter” indicator
* Multi language display is sup- Comes on when it is time to clean the
ported. filter.
TIME SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT

TIMER Hr ON
AFTER AFTER OFF Timer indicators
ERROR CODE FUNCTION The indicator comes on if the corre-
˚F˚C FILTER sponding timer is set.
“Centrally Controlled” indicator ˚F˚C WEEKLY
Indicates that operation of the re- SIMPLE
ONLY1Hr. AUTO OFF
mote controller has been prohibited
by a master controller. Fan Speed indicator
Shows the selected fan speed.
Up/Down Air Direction indi- Room Temperature display Ventilation indicator

“Timer is Off” indicator cator Shows the room temperature. The room Appears when the unit is running in
Indicates that the timer is off. temperature display range is 8–39 °C. Ventilation mode.
The indicator shows the direc-
tion of the outcoming airflow. The display blinks if the temperature is
less than 8 °C or 39 °C or more.
“One Hour Only” indicator
Louver display
Temperature Setting Displayed if the airflow is set to
low and downward during COOL Indicates the action of the swing louver.
Shows the target temperature. Does not appear if the louver is station-
or DRY mode. (Operation varies
according to model.) ary.
The indicator goes off after 1 hour
when the airflow direction also (Power On indicator)
changes. Indicates that the power is on.
Operation Section
Set Temperature buttons ON/OFF button
Down
Fan Speed button
Up
Timer Menu button

(Monitor/Set button)
Filter button
Mode button (Return button) (<Enter> button)
Test Run button

TEMP. ON/OFF
Set Time buttons Check button (Clear button)
Back MENU ON/OFF FILTER
Ahead BACK MONITOR/SET DAY CHECK TEST

Airflow Up/Down button
PAR-21MAA CLOCK OPERATION CLEAR
Timer On/Off button
(Set Day button) Louver button
( Operation button)
To return operation
Opening the number
lid
Ventilation button
( Operation button)
Built-in temperature sensor To go to next opera-

tion number
Note:
Ɣ “PLEASE WAIT” message
This message is displayed for approximately 3 minutes when power is supplied to the indoor unit or when the unit is recovering from a power fail-
ure.
Ɣ “NOT AVAILABLE” message
This message is displayed if a button is pressed to operate a function that the indoor unit does not have.
If a single remote controller is used to simultaneously operate multiple indoor units that are different models, this message will not be displayed if
any of the indoor units is equipped with the function.
3
2. Parts Names
Ŷ Wireless Remote-Controller
Transmission area
Transmission indicator
Remote controller display
Timer indicator
*For explanation purposes, all of the items
that appear in the display are shown.
*All items are displayed when the Reset but-
ton is pressed.
Operation areas
ON/OFF button
Set Temperature buttons
Fan Speed button (Changes fan speed) Timer Off button
Timer On button
Airflow button (Changes up/down airflow direction)

Hour button
Minute button
Mode button (Changes operation mode)
Set Time button (Sets the time)
Check button
Louver button (Changes left/right airflow direction)
Test Run button

Reset button
Ŷ When using the wireless remote controller, point it towards the receiver on the indoor unit. Battery installation/replacement
Ŷ If the remote controller is operated within approximately 2 minutes after power is supplied to the
indoor unit, the indoor unit may beep twice as the unit is performing the initial automatic check. 1. Remove the top cover, insert 2 AAA batter-
Ŷ The indoor unit beeps to confirm that the signal transmitted from the remote controller has been ies, and then install the top cover.
received. Signals can be received up to approximately 7 meters in a direct line from the indoor
unit in an area 45° to the left and right of the unit. However, illumination such as fluorescent
lights and strong light can affect the ability of the indoor unit to receive signals. 1
Ŷ If the operation lamp near the receiver on the indoor unit is blinking, the unit needs to be in- 2
spected. Consult your dealer for service.
Ŷ Handle the remote controller carefully! Do not drop the remote controller or subject it to strong Top cover 3
shocks. In addition, do not get the remote controller wet or leave it in a location with high hu-
midity. Two AAA batteries
Ŷ To avoid misplacing the remote controller, install the holder included with the remote controller Insert the negative (–)
on a wall and be sure to always place the remote controller in the holder after use. end of each battery first.
Install the batteries in
the correct directions
Ŷ Outdoor unit (+, –)!
2. Press the Reset button.
Power
Press the Reset button

Ref. Pipes with an object that has
Indoor-Outdoor a narrow end.
Connection wire
Earth
Service Panel
4
3. Screen Configuration
<Screen Types>
Function Selection of remote
Set Day/Time
For details on setting the language for the remote controller display, refer
controller to section 8. Function Selection.
TIME SUN
The initial language setting is English.

Ɣ Function Selection of remote controller:
Set the functions and ranges available to the

remote controller (timer functions, operating
restrictions, etc.)
Standard Control Screens Ɣ Set Day/Time: Set the current day of the week or time.
Ɣ Standard Control Screens:
˚F˚C
˚C View and set the air conditioning system’s op-
OFF ON erating status
Ɣ Timer Monitor: View the currently set timer (weekly timer,
simple timer, or Auto Off timer)
Timer Monitor Timer Setup
Ɣ Timer Setup: Set the operation of any of the timers (weekly
MON SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT
timer, simple timer, or Auto Off timer).
TIMER
OFF
<How to change the screen>
˚F˚C

WEEKLY WEEKLY
A : Hold down both the Mode button and the Timer On/Off button for 2
seconds.
B : Press the Timer Menu button.
C : Press the Mode (Return) button.
D : Press either of the Set Time buttons ( or ).
4. Setting the Day of the Week and Time
1 3 Day of the Week Setting

Day of the Week
& Time display
2 TIME SUN
TIME SUN
4 Time Setting
˚C
˚C
TEMP. ON/OFF 9
1. Press the or Set Time button 1 to show display 2.
2
MENU ON/OFF FILTER
4 2. Press the Timer On/Off (Set Day) button 9 to set the day.
BACK MONITOR/SET DAY
* Each press advances the day shown at 3 :
CHECK TEST
Sun ĺ Mon ĺ ... ĺ Fri ĺ Sat.

1 3. Press the appropriate Set Time button 1 as necessary to set the time.
* As you hold the button down, the time (at 4) will increment first in
Note: one-minute intervals, then in ten-minute intervals, and then in 1-hour
The day and time will not appear if clock use has been dis- intervals.
abled at Function Selection of remote controller. 4. After making the appropriate settings at Steps 2 and 3, press the Filter
button 4 to lock in the values.
5. Operation
6
2 4
5 2 3
3 ˚C
˚C
8 5
3 TEMP. ON/OFF 7 7
6
MENU ON/OFF FILTER
1
2 BACK MONITOR/SET DAY CHECK TEST

1
5 1 3
7 8 6
5.1. Turning ON/OFF 5
<To Start Operation>
Ŷ Press the ON/OFF button 1. 2 6
• The ON lamp 1 and the display area come on.
7
5
5. Operation
<To Stop Operation> 5.3. Temperature setting

Ŷ Press the ON/OFF button 1 again. Ź To decrease the room temperature:
• The ON lamp 1 and the display area go dark. Press button 3 to set the desired temperature.
The selected temperature is displayed 3.
Note:
Even if you press the ON/OFF button immediately after shutting down the op-
Ź To increase the room temperature:
eration is progress, the air conditioner will not start for about 3 minutes.
This is to prevent the internal components from being damaged. Press button 3 to set the desired temperature.
The selected temperature is displayed 3.
5.2. Mode select • Available temperature ranges are as follows:
Ŷ Press the operation mode ( ) button 2 and select the opera-
Cooling/Drying: 19 - 30 °C
tion mode 2.
Heating: 17 - 28 °C
Cooling mode Automatic: 19 - 28 °C
Drying mode • The display blinks either 8 °C - 39 °C to inform you if the room tem-
Fan mode perature is lower or higher than the displayed temperature.
Heating mode <Only heat pump type> (This display does not appear on the wireless remote controller.)
Automatic (cooling/heating) mode <Only heat pump type>
Ventilation mode 5.4. Fan speed setting
Ŷ Press the Fan Speed button 5 as many times as necessary while the
Only indicated on the following condition
system is running.
Wired remote controller used
• Each press changes the force. The currently selected speed is
LOSSNAY connected
shown at 5.
• The change sequence, and the available settings, are as follows.
Information for multi system air conditioner (Outdoor FAN SPEED Display
unit: MXZ series) Speed 1 Speed 2 Speed 3 Speed 4 Auto

Ź Multi system air conditioner (Outdoor unit: MXZ series) can 4-speed
+
connect two or more indoor units with one outdoor unit. Accord Auto
ing to the capacity, 2 or more units can operate simultaneously.
• When you try to operate 2 or more indoor units with 1 outdoor unit si- Note:
multaneously, one for the cooling and the other for heating, the opera- Ɣ The number of available fan speeds depends on the type of unit connect-
tion mode of the indoor unit that operates earlier is selected. The other ed.
indoor units that will start the operation later cannot operate, indicating Ɣ In the following cases, the actual fan speed generated by the unit will differ
an operation state in blinking. from the speed shown the remote controller display.
In this case, please set all the indoor units to the same operation 1. While the display is showing “STAND BY” or “DEFROST”.
mode. 2. When the temperature of the heat exchanger is low in the heating mode.
• There might be a case that the indoor unit, which is operating in (AUTO) (e.g. immediately after heating operation starts)
mode. Cannot change over to the operating mode (COOL HEAT) and 3. In HEAT mode, when room temperature is higher than the temperature
setting.
becomes a state of standby.
4. When the unit is in DRY mode.
• When indoor unit starts the operation while the defrosting of outdoor
unit is being done, it takes a few minutes (max. about 15 minutes) to
blow out the warm air. 5.5. Airflow direction setting
• In the heating operation, though indoor unit that does not operate may <To Change the Airflow’s Up/Down Direction>
get warm or the sound of refrigerant flowing may be heard, they are Ŷ With the unit running, press the Airflow Up/Down button 6 as neces-
not malfunction. The reason is that the refrigerant continuously flows sary.
into it. • Each press changes the direction. The current direction is shown at
6.
Automatic operation • The change sequence and the available settings are as follows.
Ŷ According to a set temperature, cooling operation starts if the room Remote controller Display
temperature is too hot and heating operation starts if the room tem-
perature is too cold.
Swing Auto 1 2 3 4 5
Ŷ During automatic operation, if the room temperature changes and
Wired type
remains 2 °C or more above the set temperature for 15 minutes, the
air conditioner switches to cooling mode. In the same way, if the room
temperature remains 2 °C or more below the set temperature for 15
minutes, the air conditioner switches to heating mode. Swing 1 2 3 4
Wireless type
Cooling mode 15 minutes (switches
from heating to cooling)
Set temperature +2 °C * Note that during swing operation, the directional indication on the
screen does not change in sync with the directional vanes on the
Set temperature unit.
Note:
Set temperature -2 °C
Ɣ Available directions depend on the type of unit connected.
15 minutes (switches Ɣ In the following cases, the actual air direction will differ from the direction
from cooling to heating) indicated on the remote controller display.
1. While the display is showing “STAND BY” or “DEFROST”.
2. Immediately after starting heat mode (while the system is waiting for the
Ŷ Because the room temperature is automatically adjusted in order to mode change to take effect).
maintain a fixed effective temperature, cooling operation is performed 3. In heat mode, when room temperature is higher than the temperature
a few degrees warmer and heating operation is performed a few de- setting.
grees cooler than the set room temperature once the temperature is
reached (automatic energy-saving operation).
6
5. Operation
< How to set the fixed up/down air direction (Only for
wired remote controller) > Horizontal airflow
Downward
Note:
Ɣ This function cannot be set depending on the outdoor unit to be connected. Remote controller setting Fixing
The airflow direction of The airflow direction of
• For PLA-RP.BA(2), only the particular outlet can be fixed to certain this outlet is controlled by this outlet is fixed
direction with the procedures below. Once fixed, only the set outlet the airflow direction setting of in particular direction.
remote contoller. When it is cold because of direct
is fixed every time air conditioner is turned on. (Other outlets follow
airflow, the airflow direction can
UP/DOWN air direction setting of remote controller.) be fixed horizontally to avoid
Ŷ Explanation of word direct airflow.
• "Refrigerant address No." and "Unit No." are the numbers given to
each air conditioner.
• "Outlet No." is the number given to each outlet of air conditioner. Outlet No.3 Outlet No.4
(Refer to the right.)
• "Up/Down air direction" is the direction (angle) to fix.
MITSUBISHI
ELECTRIC
label
Outlet No.2 Outlet No.1
Reset 1 2 3 4 5 Note: "0" indicates all outlets.

horizontal
Operation buttons (During the fixed airflow direction mode)
Pressing the button with either refrigerant

address No., unit No. or outlet No. blinking, ...
ON/OFF button

Resets the fixed airflow direction mode.
Fan Speed button

Press for 2 Only the air conditioner with the No. on remote
seconds to controller and its outlet are set to the setting 5.
TEMP. ON/OFF change / cancel
(Other outlets are closed.)
"Fixed airflow
MENU ON/OFF FILTER
Filter button direction mode". It is used to identify the air conditioner and
BACK MONITOR/SET DAY CHECK TEST
(<Enter> button) outlet to set.
PAR-21MAA CLOCK OPERATION CLEAR Sends the information on
remote controller display.
Check button (Clear button)
Pressing the button with
Up/Down air direction indicater blinking
·Refer to the next page for details.
Attention
Mode button (Return button)
Moves between the selected(blinking)
parts.
Only the air conditioner with the No. on Remote controller
and its outlet are fixed at "Up/Down air direction"
blinking.
Unit No. Outlet No. Up/Down air direction Refrigerant address No.
This is used only to decide direction conclusively.
Attention: Be careful not to set wrong air conditioner.
Set temperature buttons Down Up

Changes the selection(No.).
Unit No.
"1-4" Outlet No. Up/Down air direction Refrigerant address No.
"1-4"or "0" 5 steps or "00-15"
cancel
7
5. Operation
< Process for setting > [4] To cancel "Fixed airflow direction mode"
1.Press ON/OFF button 1 to cancel "Fixed airflow direction mode".
[1] To turn off air conditioner and change the remote It is also canceled by pressing Fan Speed button 2 and Filter button
controller to "Fixed airflow direction mode" 3 for more than 2 seconds simultaneously.
1.Press ON/OFF button 1 to turn off the air conditioner. 2.Do not operate remote controller for 30 seconds after the "Fixed airflow
2.Press Fan Speed button 2 and Filter button 3 for more than 2 direction mode" is canceled. It does not accept even if it is operated.
seconds simultaneously and it becomes the fixed airflow direction
mode after a while.
"Fixed airflow direction mode" display
Air blows downward after it becomes

"fixed airflow direction mode".
[2] To select and identify the outlet to set

1.Press Set Temperature button 5 to change number with the outlet No.
blinking. Select outlet No. to set.
Unit No. Up/Down air direction Refrigerant address No.

Outlet No.
Outlet No.3 Outlet No.4
MITSUBISHI
ELECTRIC
label
Outlet No.2 Outlet No.1 Note: "0" indicates

all outlets.
2.Press Filter button 3 to send the information on remote controller.

3. Wait for 15 seconds. How does the air conditioner run?
ĺOnly the air from the selected outlet blows downward.
ĺGo to step[3].
ĺAir from the wrong outlet blows downward.
ĺRepeat 1 and set again.
ĺAll outlets are closed.
ĺThe numbers of the air conditioner (refrigerant address No.,
Unit No.) are wrong. Refer to How to find air conditioner No..
[3] To fix air direction

1.Press Mode button (Return button) 4 to blink Up/Down air direction
indicater.
2.Press Set Temperature button 5 until the direction to set is chosen.
3.Press Filter button 3 to send the information on remote controller to
air conditioner.
4.Wait for 15 seconds. How does the air conditioner run?
ĺAirflow direction is set in the selected direction.
ĺThe fixed setting completed (Go to step [4].)
ĺAirflow direction is set in the wrong direction.
ĺRepeat 2. and set again.
Unit No. Outlet No. Up/Down air direction Refrigerant address No.
Air direction changes
This indicates NO FIXED SETTING(canceled)
8
5. Operation
Ŷ How to find air conditioner No.

[2] To check by changing unit No. one after the other
Each air conditioner has its own refrigerant address No. and unit No.
(Example below). (Maximum unit No. is 4)
To find air conditioner No. to set, refer to the procedures below. 1.Press Mode button (Return button) 4 and unit No. blinks.
Air conditioner No. is found by its airflow direction with the unit No.
changed one after the other.
Refrigerant Refrigerant Unit No. Outlet No. Up/Down air direction Refrigerant address No.
address address
No.”00” No.”01”
Adjust to the next unit No. with Set Temperature button 5.
(refrigerant address No.00 is remained.)
2. Press Filter button 3 to send the information on remote controller.
3. Wait for 15 seconds . How does the air conditioner run?
ĺOnly air from the outlet which No. displayed on remote controller blows
Unit No.”1” Unit No.”2” Unit No.”1” Unit No.”2”
downward.
ĺNo. displayed in remote controller is air conditioner No. (Checking
completed)
Remote controller
ĺAll outlets are closed.
ĺRepeat [1] and check. (If all the numbers are checked up to No.4
As for this air conditioner,
and is not found, go to [3].)
air conditioner No. is “Unit No.1”
ĺ"Err" is displayed on remote controller.
of refrigerant address “0”.
ĺThe refrigerant address does not have further unit No.. (Go to [3].)
Err
Check from refrigerant address 00 at first.
[3] To check Unit No. of following refrigerant address No.(Maximum

Change to unit No.1 and check Change to unit No.1 and check
refrigerant address No. is 15)
Change to unit No.2 and check Change to unit No.2 and check 1.Press Mode button (Return button) 4 to blink refrigerant address No..
Change to unit No.3 and check Change to unit No.3 and check Adjust refrigerant No. with Set Temperature button 5.
Change to unit No.4 and check Change to unit No.4 and check * By changing refrigerant address, unit No. and outlet No. turn to initial
display.
2.Go back to [2] and check Unit No. again from Unit No. 1 in order.
Change to unit No.4 and check Change to unit No.4 and check Unit No. Outlet No. Up/Down air direction Refrigerant address No.
To clear fixed setting

When "Err" is displayed, refrigerant address
does not heve further "unit No.". To clear all fixed setting(reset to initial setting), press check button(clear
botton) 6 for more than 3 seconds in fixed airflow direction mode.
Display of remote controller blinks and the set information is cleared.
Change to the next "refrigerant address No.. Note:
(Refrigerant No "00"~max. No."15")
This operation clears the fixed setting information of all air
conditioner connected to the remote controller.
5.6. Ventillation
ŹFor LOSSNAY combination
<Process to find air conditioner No.> 5.6.1. For Wired Remote-controller
[1] To check refrigerant address No.00 and unit No.1
Ɣ To run the ventilator together with the indoor unit:
1.Press Mode button (Return button) 4 and unit No. or refrigerant Ŷ Press the ON/OFF button 1 .
address No. blinks. • The Vent indication appears on the screen (at 8). The ventilator
Adjust refrigerant address No. to "00" and unit No."1" with Set will now automatically operate whenever the indoor unit is run-
Temperature button 5. ning.
Ɣ To run the ventilator independently:

Ŷ Press the Mode button 2 until appears on the display. This
will cause the ventilator to start.
Ɣ To change the ventilator force:

Unit No. Outlet No. Up/Down air direction Refrigerant address No. Ŷ Press the Ventilation button 8 as necessary.
• Each press toggles the setting, as shown below.
2. Press Filter button 3 to send the information on remote controller.
3. Wait for 15 seconds . How does the air conditioner run?
ĺOnly air from the outlet which No. displayed on remote controller Low High
blows downward.
ĺRefrigerant address No.00 and unit No.1 are the air conditioner No..
5.6.2. For Wireless Remote-controller
ĺAll outlets are closed. Ɣ The ventilator will automatically operate when the indoor unit turns on.
ĺGo to step [2]. Ɣ No indication on the wireless remote controller.
9
6. Timer
6.1. For Wired Remote-controller <Setting the Weekly Timer>

You can use Function Selection of remote controller to select which of Shows the time 5 6 Shows the selected operation (ON or OFF)
setting * Does not appear if operation is not set.
3 types of timer to use: 1 Weekly timer, 2 Simple timer, or 3 Auto Off
timer.
SUN
6.1.1. Weekly Timer ON

Shows the temperature setting
Ŷ The weekly timer can be used to set up to 8 operations for each day C
7 * Does not appear if temperature
WEEKLY
of the week. is not set.
• Each operation may consist of any of the following: ON/OFF time

together with a temperature setting, or ON/OFF time only, or tem- 5. Press the appropriate Set Time button 1 as necessary to set the de-
perature setting only. sired time (at 5).
• When the current time reaches a time set at this timer, the air condi- * As you hold the button down, the time first increments in minute in-
tioner carries out the action set by the timer. tervals, then in 10-minute intervals, and then in 1-hour intervals.
Ŷ Time setting resolution for this timer is 1 minute. 6. Press the ON/OFF button 1 to select the desired operation (ON or
Note:
OFF), at 6.
*1. Weekly Timer/Simple Timer/Auto Off Timer cannot be used at the same
* Each press changes the next setting, in the following sequence: No
time.
*2. The weekly timer will not operate when any of the following conditions is display (no setting) ĺ “ON” ĺ “OFF”
in effect. 7. Press the appropriate Set Temperature button 3 to set the desired
The timer feature is off; the system is in an malfunction state; a test run temperature (at 7).
is in progress; the remote controller is undergoing self-check or remote * Each press changes the setting, in the following sequence: No dis-
controller check; the user is in the process of setting a function; the user play (no setting) 24 25 ... 29 30 12 ... 23
is in the process of setting the timer; the user is in the process of setting No display.
the current day of the week or time; the system is under central control. (Available range: The range for the setting is 12 °C to 30 °C. The
(Specifically, the system will not carry out operations (unit on, unit off or
actual range over which the temperature can be controlled, how-
temperature setting) that are prohibited during these conditions.)
ever, will vary according to the type of the connected unit.)
Operation No. 8. After making the appropriate settings at Steps 5, 6 and 7, press the
Day Setting Filter button 4 to lock in the values.
4 2 3
To clear the currently set values for the selected operation, press and
quickly release the Check (Clear) button 0 once.
* The displayed time setting will change to “—:—”, and the On/Off
and temperature settings will all disappear.
SUN
ON
(To clear all weekly timer settings at once, hold down the Check
C
1 (Clear) button 0 for 2 seconds or more. The display will begin blink-
WEEKLY
ing, indicating that all settings have been cleared.)
TEMP.
3
ON/OFF
1 Note:
2
Your new entries will be cancelled if you press the Mode (Return) button 2
4
MENU ON/OFF FILTER
BACK MONITOR/SET DAY CHECK TEST before pressing the Filter button 4.
0 If you have set 2 or more different operations for exactly the same time,
only the operation with the highest Operation No. will be carried out.
9. Repeat Steps 3 to 8 as necessary to fill as many of the available cells

as you wish.
2 1 9 78 10.Press the mode (Return) button 2 to return to the standard control
<How to Set the Weekly Timer> screen and complete the setting procedure.
1. Be sure that you are at a standard control screen, and that the weekly 11.To activate the timer, press the Timer On/Off button 9, so that the
timer indicator 1 is shown in the display. “Timer Off” indication disappears from the screen. Be sure that the
2. Press the Timer Menu button 2, so that the “Set Up” appears on the “Timer Off” indication is no longer displayed.
screen (at 2). (Note that each press of the button toggles the display * If there are no timer settings, the “Timer Off” indication will blink on
between “Set Up” and “Monitor”.) the screen.
3. Press the Timer On/Off (Set Day) button 9 to set the day. Each press <How to View the Weekly Timer Settings>
advances the display at 3 to the next setting, in the following se-
quence: “Sun Mon Tues Wed Thurs Fri Sat” ĺ “Sun” ĺ ... ĺ “Fri” ĺ 8 9 Timer Settings
“Sat” ĺ “Sun Mon Tues Wed Thurs Fri Sat”...
4. Press the or Operation button (7 or 8) as necessary to select
SUN
TIMER ON
OFF
the appropriate operation number (1 to 8) 4. C

1
* Your inputs at Steps 3 and 4 will select one of the cells from the ma- WEEKLY
trix illustrated below.

(The remote-controller display at left shows how the display would 1. Be sure that the weekly timer indicator is visible on the screen (at 1).
appear when setting Operation 1 for Sunday to the values indicated 2. Press the Timer Menu button 2 so that “Monitor” is indicated on the
below.) screen (at 8).
3. Press the Timer On/Off (Set Day) button 9 as necessary to select the
Setup Matrix
day you wish to view.
Op No. Sunday Monday ... Saturday
4. Press the or Operation button ( 7 or 8 ) as necessary to change
• 8:30
No. 1 • ON
the timer operation shown on the display (at 9).
• 23 °C * Each press will advance to the next timer operation, in order of time
• 10:00 • 10:00 • 10:00 • 10:00 setting.
No. 2
• OFF • OFF • OFF • OFF 5. To close the monitor and return to the standard control screen, press
... the Mode (Return) button 2.
No. 8
<To Turn Off the Weekly Timer>

<Operation 1 settings for Sunday> <Operation 2 settings for every day>
Start the air conditioner at 8:30, with Turn off the air conditioner at 10:00. Press the Timer On/Off button 9 so that “Timer Off” appears at 10 .
the temperature set to 23 °C.
Note: TIME SUN
By setting the day to “Sun Mon Tues Wed Thurs Fri Sat”, you can set the
C
same operation to be carried out at the same time every day. C WEEKLY
(Example: Operation 2 above, which is the same for all days of the week.) 10
10
6. Timer
<To Turn On the Weekly Timer> 4. With “ON” or “OFF” showing at 3: Press the appropriate Set Time but-
Press the Timer On/Off button 9 so that the “Timer Off” indication (at 10 ) ton as necessary to set the hours to ON (if “ON” is displayed) or the
goes dark. hours to OFF (if “OFF” is displayed) at 4.
TIME SUN
• Available Range: 1 to 72 hours
5. To set both the ON and OFF times, repeat Steps 3 and 4.
C
C
WEEKLY
* Note that ON and OFF times cannot be set to the same value.
10 6. To clear the current ON or OFF setting: Display the ON or OFF
setting(see step 3) and then press the Check (Clear) button 0 so that
6.1.2. Simple Timer the time setting clears to “—” at 4. (If you want to use only an ON set-
Ŷ You can set the simple timer in any of 3 ways. ting or only an OFF setting, be sure that the setting you do not wish to
• Start time only: use is shown as “—”.)
The air conditioner starts when the set time has elapsed. 7. After completing steps 3 to 6 above, press the Filter button 4 to lock
• Stop time only: in the value.
The air conditioner stops when the set time has elapsed. Note:
• Start & stop times: Your new settings will be cancelled if you press the Mode (Return) button 2
The air conditioner starts and stops at the respective elapsed times. before pressing the Filter button 4.
Ŷ The simple timer (start and stop) can be set only once within a 72-hour
period. 8. Press the Mode (Return) button 2 to return to the standard control
The time setting is made in hour increments. screen.
Note: 9. Press the Timer On/Off button 9 to start the timer countdown. When
*1. Weekly Timer/Simple Timer/Auto Off Timer cannot be used at the same the timer is running, the timer value is visible on the display. Be sure
time. that the timer value is visible and appropriate.
*2. The simple timer will not operate when any of the following conditions
is in effect. <Viewing the Current Simple Timer Settings>
The timer is off; the system is in malfunction state; a test run is in prog-
ress; the remote controller is undergoing self-check or remote control- 5 6 Timer Setting
ler check; the user is in the process of selecting a function; the user is
in the process of setting the timer; the system is under central control. TIMER Hr ON
AFTER OFF
(Under these conditions, On/Off operation is prohibited.)
SIMPLE
1
1. Be sure that the simple timer indicator is visible on the screen (at 1).
2. Press the Timer Menu button 2, so that the “Monitor” appears on the
Hr ON
screen (at 5).
AFTER
• If the ON or OFF simple timer is running, the current timer value will
SIMPLE appear at 6.
TEMP. ON/OFF 1 • If ON and OFF values have both been set, the two values appear
alternately.
MENU ON/OFF FILTER
2 3. Press the Mode (Return) button 2 to close the monitor display and
4
BACK MONITOR/SET DAY CHECK TEST return to the standard control screen.
0
<To Turn Off the Simple Timer...>
Press the Timer On/Off button 9 so that the timer setting no longer ap-
pears on the screen (at 7).
7
2 1 9
˚C
˚C
SIMPLE
<How to Set the Simple Timer>
Timer Setting
2 4
<To Turn On the Simple Timer...>
Hr
AFTER
ON
3 Action (On or Off) Press the Timer On/Off button 9 so that the timer setting becomes
* “— —” is displayed if there is no
setting.
visible at 7.
SIMPLE
1 7
Hr ON
1. Be sure that you are at a standard control screen, and that the simple
AFTER
˚C
timer indicator is visible in the display (at 1). ˚C

SIMPLE
When something other than the Simple Timer is displayed, set it to

SIMPLE TIMER using the function selection of remote controller (see
8.[3] (3)) timer function setting.
2. Press the Timer Menu button 2, so that the “Set Up” appears on the
screen (at 2). (Note that each press of the button toggles the display
between “Set Up” and “Monitor”.)
3. Press the ON/OFF button 1 to display the current ON or OFF simple
timer setting. Press the button once to display the time remaining to
ON, and then again to display the time remaining to OFF. (The ON/
OFF indication appears at 3).
• “ON” timer:
The air conditioner will start operation when the specified number of
hours has elapsed.
• “OFF” timer:
The air conditioner will stop operation when the specified number of
hours has elapsed.
11
6. Timer
Examples <How to Set the Auto Off Timer>

If ON and OFF times have both been set at the simple timer, operation 2 3 Timer Setting
and display are as indicated below.
AFTER OFF
Example 1:
Start the timer with ON time set earlier than OFF time AUTO OFF 1
ON Setting: 3 hours
OFF Setting: 7 hours 1. Be sure that you are at a standard control screen, and that the Auto
Off timer indicator is visible in the display (at 1).
Hr
AFTER
ON
When something other than the Auto Off Timer is displayed, set it to
At Timer Start AUTO OFF TIMER using the function selection of remote controller
Display shows the timer’s ON setting (hours
SIMPLE
remaining to ON).
(see 8.[4]-3 (3)) timer function setting.
2. Hold down the Timer Menu button 2 for 3 seconds so that the “Set
Up” appears on the screen (at 2).
At 3 hours after timer start
Hr
AFTER OFF
(Note that each press of the button toggles the display between “Set
˚C
˚C
Display changes to show the timer’s OFF set- Up” and “Monitor”.)
SIMPLE
ting (hours remaining to OFF).
The time displayed is OFF setting (7 hours) –
3. Press the appropriate Set Time button 1 as necessary to set the OFF
ON setting (3 hours) = 4 hours. time (at 3).
4. Press the Filter button 4 to lock in the setting.
At 7 hours after timer start Note:
The air conditioner goes off, and will remain Your entry will be cancelled if you press the Mode (Return) button 2 before
SIMPLE
off until it is restarted.
pressing the Filter button 4.
5. Press the Mode (Return) button 2 to complete the setting procedure

Example 2:
and return to the standard control screen.
Start the timer with OFF time set earlier than ON time
6. If the air conditioner is already running, the timer starts countdown
ON Setting: 5 hours
immediately. Be sure to check that the timer setting appears cor-
OFF Setting: 2 hours
rectly on the display.
Hr
AFTER OFF
˚C
At Timer Start <Checking the Current Auto Off Timer Setting>
˚C Display shows the timer’s OFF setting (hours
SIMPLE
remaining to OFF). 4 5 Timer Setting
TIMER
Hr
AFTER
ON
At 2 hours after timer start AFTER OFF
Display changes to show the timer’s ON set-

SIMPLE ting (hours remaining to ON). 1 AUTO OFF
The time displayed is ON setting (5 hours) –

OFF setting (2 hours) = 3 hours.
1. Be sure that the “Auto Off” is visible on the screen (at 1 ).
2. Hold down the Timer Menu button 2 for 3 seconds so that “Monitor”
At 5 hours after timer start is indicated on the screen (at 4).
˚C
˚C
SIMPLE
The air conditioner comes on and will con- • The timer remaining to shutdown appears at 5.
tinue to run until it is turned off.
3. To close the monitor and return to the standard control screen, press
the Mode (Return) button 2.
<To Turn Off the Auto Off Timer...>

6.1.3. Auto Off Timer Ɣ Hold down the Timer On/Off button 9 for 3 seconds so that “Timer
Ŷ This timer begins countdown when the air conditioner starts and shuts Off” appears (at 6) and the timer value (at 7) disappears.
the air conditioner off when the set time has elapsed.
Ŷ Available settings run from 30 minutes to 4 hours in 30-minute intervals. 7
Note:
*1. Weekly Timer/Simple Timer/Auto Off Timer cannot be used at the same
˚C
time. ˚C
*2. The Auto Off timer will not operate when any of the following conditions 6 AUTO OFF
is in effect.
The timer is off; the system is in malfunction state; a test run is in prog-
Ɣ Alternatively, turn off the air conditioner itself. The timer value (at 7)
ress; the remote controller is undergoing self-check or remote control- will disappear from the screen.
ler check; the user is in the process of selecting a function; the user is 7
in the process of setting the timer; the system is under central control.
(Under these conditions, On/Off operation is prohibited.)
AUTO OFF
<To Turn On the Auto Off Timer...>

Ɣ Hold down the Timer On/Off button 9 for 3 seconds. The “Timer Off”
indication disappears (at 6), and the timer setting comes on the dis-
AFTER OFF
play (at 7).
AUTO OFF
Ɣ Alternatively, turn on the air conditioner. The timer value will appear at
TEMP. ON/OFF 7.
2 7
MENU ON/OFF FILTER

4
AFTER OFF
˚C
˚C
6 AUTO OFF
2 1 9
12
6. Timer
6.2. For Wireless Remote-controller
1 Press the AUTO STOP

or AUTO START
button (TIMER SET).
• Time can be set while the following symbol is blinking.
OFF timer : A is blinking.
A ON timer : A is blinking.
h min
2 Use the and buttons to set the desired time.
3 Canceling the timer.
AUTO STOP
To cancel the OFF timer, press the button.
To cancel the ON timer, press the AUTO START
button.
• It is possible to combine both OFF and ON timers.
13 • Pressing the ON/OFF button of the remote controller during timer
mode to stop the unit will cancel the timers.
• If the current time has not been set, the timer operation cannot be
2 used.
7. Other Functions
7.1. Locking the Remote Controller Buttons (Opera- <How to Lock the Buttons>
tion function limit controller) 1. While holding down the Filter button 4, press and hold down the ON/
Ŷ If you wish, you can lock the remote controller buttons. You can use OFF button 1 for 2 seconds. The “Locked” indication appears on the
the Function Selection of remote controller to select which type of lock screen (at 1), indicating that the lock is now engaged.
to use. * If locking has been disabled in Function Selection of remote control-
(For information about selecting the lock type, see section 8, item [2] ler, the screen will display the “Not Available” message when you
(1)). Specifically, you can use either of the following 2 lock types. press the buttons as described above.
1 Lock All Buttons: FUNCTION

1
˚C
Locks all of the buttons on the remote controller. ˚C
2 Lock All Except ON/OFF:
Locks all buttons other than the ON/OFF button. • If you press a locked button, the “Locked” indication (at 1) will blink
Note: on the display.
The “Locked” indicator appears on the screen to indicate that buttons are
currently locked.
FUNCTION
1
˚C
˚C
1
Lock Indicator
TIME SUN
<How to Unlock the Buttons>
˚C
FUNCTION 1. While holding down the Filter button 4, press and hold down the ON/
˚C
OFF button 1 for 2 seconds—so that the “Locked” indication disap-
TEMP. ON/OFF pears from the screen (at 1).
1
4 1
˚C
˚C
CLEAR
13
7. Other Functions
7.2. Error Codes indication
ERROR CODE
ON lamp
ON/OFF (Blinking)
Indoor Unit’s Refriger- Error Code Indoor Unit No.

ant Address
If you have entered contact number to be called in the event of a problem, the screen displays this number. Alternating Display
(You can set this up under Function Selection of remote controller. For information, refer to section 8.)
Ɣ If the ON lamp and error code are both blinking: This means that the air conditioner is out of order and operation has been stopped (and cannot re-
sume). Take note of the indicated unit number and error code, then switch off the power to the air conditioner and call your dealer or servicer.
When the Check button is pressed:
CALL:XXXX
ERROR CODE XXX:XXX
˚C
˚C
ON/OFF ON/OFF
Error Code
Ɣ If only the error code is blinking (while the ON lamp remains lit): Operation is continuing, but there may be a problem with the system. In this case,
you should note down the error code and then call your dealer or servicer for advice.
* If you have entered contact number to be called in the event of a problem, push the Check button to display it on the screen. (You can set this up
under Function Selection of remote controller. For information, refer to section 8.)
8. Function Selection
Function selection of remote controller

The setting of the following remote controller functions can be changed using the remote controller function selection mode. Change the setting when
needed.
Item 1 Item 2 Item 3 (Setting content)
1. Change Language Language setting to display • Display in multiple languages is possible
(“CHANGE LAN-
GUAGE”)
2. Function limit (1) Operation function limit setting (operation lock) (“LOCKING • Setting the range of operation limit (operation lock)
(“FUNCTION SELEC- FUNCTION”)
TION”)
(2) Use of automatic mode setting (“SELECT AUTO MODE”) • Setting the use or non-use of “automatic” operation mode
(3) Temperature range limit setting (“LIMIT TEMP FUNCTION”) • Setting the temperature adjustable range (maximum, minimum)
3. Mode selection (1) Remote controller main/sub setting (“CONTROLLER MAIN/ • Selecting main or sub remote controller
(“MODE SELEC- SUB”) * When 2 remote controllers are connected to 1 group, 1 controller
TION”) must be set to sub.
(2) Use of clock setting (“CLOCK”) • Setting the use or non-use of clock function
(3) Timer function setting (“WEEKLY TIMER”) • Setting the timer type
(4) Contact number setting for error situation (“CALL.”) • Contact number display in case of error
• Setting the telephone number
4. Display change (1) Temperature display °C/°F setting (“TEMP MODE °C/°F”) • Setting the temperature unit (°C or °F) to display
(“DISP MODE SET-
(2) Room air temperature display setting (“ROOM TEMP DISP • Setting the use or non-use of the display of indoor (suction) air tempera-
TING”)
SELECT”) ture
(3) Automatic cooling/heating display setting (“AUTO MODE • Setting the use or non-use of the display of “Cooling” or “Heating” dis-
DISP C/H”) play during operation with automatic mode
14
[Function selection flowchart] Normal display

Setting language (English) (Display when the air conditioner is not running)
Hold down the button and press the button for 2 seconds.
Hold down the button and press the button for 2 seconds. Press the operation mode button.
Press the TIMER MENU button.
Remote controller function selection mode Press the TIMER ON/OFF button.
Item 1 Item 2

Change English
Language Dot display

German
Spanish
TEMP. ON/OFF

Russian
BACK
MENU
MONITOR/SET
ON/OFF
DAY
FILTER
CHECK TEST

Italian PAR-21MAA CLOCK OPERATION CLEAR

Chinese

French
Japanese
Item 3

Function OFF Operation lock setting is not used.
selection (Initial setting value)

no1 Operation lock setting is except On/Off button.

no2 Operation lock setting is all buttons.

ON The automatic mode is displayed when the operation
mode is selected. (Initial setting value)

OFF The automatic mode is not displayed when the operation mode
is selected.

OFF The temperature range limit is not active. (Initial setting value)

The temperature range can be changed on cooling/dry mode.

The temperature range can be changed on heating mode.
The temperature range can be changed on automatic mode.
Automatic filter elevation panel up/down operation mode

Not necessary to set this mode. Refer to OPERATION MANUAL of
Optional Parts (Panel) for details on operation.
Fixed airflow direction mode
Not necessary to set this mode. Refer to OPERATION MANUAL of
indoor unit for details on operation.

Mode The remote controller will be the main controller. (Initial setting value)
selection

The remote controller will be the sub controller.

ON The clock function can be used. (Initial setting value)

OFF The clock function can not be used.

Weekly timer can be used. (Initial setting value)

Auto off timer can be used.
Simple timer can be used.
Timer mode can not be used.
OFF The set contact numbers are not displayed in case of error.
(Initial setting value)
CALL-
The set contact numbers are displayed in case of error.

Display ˚C The temperature unit °C is used. (Initial setting value)
mode setting
˚F
The temperature unit °F is used.

ON
Room air temperature is displayed. (Initial setting value)

OFF Room air temperature is not displayed.

ON
One of “Automatic cooling” and “Automatic heating” is displayed
under the automatic mode is running. (Initial setting value)
OFF Only “Automatic” is displayed under the automatic mode.
15
[Detailed setting] [4]-3 Mode selection setting
[4]-1 CHANGE LANGUAGE setting (1) Remote controller main/sub setting

The language that appears on the dot display can be selected. • To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button D.
• Press the [ MENU] button G to change the language. 1 Main: The controller will be the main controller.
1 English (GB), 2 German (D), 3 Spanish (E), 4 Russian (RU), 2 Sub: The controller will be the sub controller.
5 Italian (I), 6 Chinese (CH), 7 French (F), 8 Japanese (JP)
Refer to the dot display table. (2) Use of clock setting
• To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button D.
[4]-2 Function limit 1 ON: The clock function can be used.
(1) Operation function limit setting (operation lock) 2 OFF: The clock function cannot be used.
• To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button D.
1 no1: Operation lock setting is made on all buttons other than (3) Timer function setting
the [ ON/OFF] button I. • To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button D (Choose
2 no2: Operation lock setting is made on all buttons. one of the followings.).
3 OFF (Initial setting value): Operation lock setting is not made. 1 WEEKLY TIMER (initial setting value):
* To make the operation lock setting valid on the normal screen, it The weekly timer can be used.
is necessary to press buttons (Press and hold down the [FILTER] 2 AUTO OFF TIMER:
A and [ ON/OFF] buttons I at the same time for 2 seconds.) The auto off timer can be used.
on the normal screen after the above setting is made. 3 SIMPLE TIMER:
The simple timer can be used.
(2) Use of automatic mode setting 4 TIMER MODE OFF:
When the remote controller is connected to the unit that has auto- The timer mode cannot be used.
matic operation mode, the following settings can be made. * When the use of clock setting is OFF, the “WEEKLY TIMER” can-
• To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button D. not be used.
1 ON (Initial setting value):
The automatic mode is displayed when the operation mode is (4) Contact number setting for error situation
selected. • To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button D.
2 OFF: 1 CALL OFF:
The automatic mode is not displayed when the operation mode The set contact numbers are not displayed in case of error.
is selected 2 CALL **** *** ****:
. The set contact numbers are displayed in case of error.
(3) Temperature range limit setting CALL_:
After this setting is made, the temperature can be changed within The contact number can be set when the display is as shown
the set range. above.
• To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button D. • Setting the contact numbers
1 LIMIT TEMP COOL MODE: To set the contact numbers, follow the following procedures.
The temperature range can be changed on cooling/dry mode. Move the blinking cursor to set numbers. Press the [ TEMP.
2 LIMIT TEMP HEAT MODE: ( ) and ( )] button F to move the cursor to the right (left).
The temperature range can be changed on heating mode. Press the [ CLOCK ( ) and ( )] button C to set the num-
3 LIMIT TEMP AUTO MODE: bers.
The temperature range can be changed on automatic mode.
4 OFF (initial setting): The temperature range limit is not active. [4]-4 Display change setting
* When the setting other than OFF is made, the temperature (1) Temperature display °C/°F setting
range limit setting on cooling, heating and automatic mode is • To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button D.
made at the same time. However, the range cannot be limited 1 °C: The temperature unit °C is used.
when the set temperature range has not changed. 2 °F: The temperature unit °F is used.
• To increase or decrease the temperature, press the [ TEMP.
( ) or ( )] button F. (2) Room air temperature display setting
• To switch the upper limit setting and the lower limit setting, press • To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button D.
the [ ] button H. The selected setting will blink and the tem- 1 ON: The room air temperature is displayed.
perature can be set. 2 OFF: The room air temperature is not displayed.
• Settable range
Cooling/Dry mode: (3) Automatic cooling/heating display setting
Lower limit:19°C ~ 30°C Upper limit:30°C ~ 19°C • To switch the setting, press the [ ON/OFF] button D.
Heating mode: 1 ON:
Lower limit:17°C ~ 28°C Upper limit:28°C ~ 17°C One of “Automatic cooling” and “Automatic heating” is dis-
Automatic mode: played under the automatic mode is running.
Lower limit:19°C ~ 28°C Upper limit:28°C ~ 19°C 2 OFF:
Only “Automatic” is displayed under the automatic mode.
16
[Dot display table]

Selecting language English German Spanish Russian Italian Chinese French Japanese
Waiting for start-up
Operation mode Cool
Dry
Heat
Auto
Auto(Cool)
Auto(Heat)
Fan
Ventilation
Stand by
(Hot adjust)
Defrost
Set temperature
Fan speed
Not use button
Check (Error)
Test run
Self check
Unit function selection
Setting of ventilation
Selecting language English German Spanish Russian Italian Chinese French Japanese
CHANGE LANGUAGE
Function selection
Operation function limit setting
Use of automatic mode setting
Temperature range limit setting
Limit temperature cooling/day

mode
Limit temperature heating mode
Limit temperature auto mode
Mode selection
Remote controller setting MAIN
Remote controller setting SUB
Use of clock setting
Setting the day of the week and

time
Timer set
Timer monitor
Weekly timer
Timer mode off
Auto off timer
Simple timer
Contact number setting of error

situation
Display change
Temperature display °C/°F setting
Room air temperature display

setting
Automatic cooling/heating display
setting
17
9. Emergency Operation for Wireless Remote-controller
When the remote controller cannot be used

When the batteries of the remote controller run out or the remote control-
ler malfunctions, the emergency operation can be done using the emer-
gency buttons on the grille.
A DEFROST/STAND BY lamp
B Operation lamp
C Emergency operation switch (heating)
D Emergency operation switch (cooling)
E Receiver
Starting operation
• To operate the cooling mode, press the button D for more than 2
seconds.
• To operate the heating mode, press the button C for more than 2
seconds.
* Lighting of the Operation lamp B means the start of operation.
Note:
• Details of emergency mode are as shown below.
Operation mode COOL HEAT
Set temperature 24°C 24°C
Fan speed High High
Airflow direction Horizontal Downward 5
Stopping operation
• To stop operation, press the button D or the button C.
10. Care and Cleaning
Filter removal
Caution:
• In removing the filter, precautions must be taken to protect your
eyes from dust. Also, if you have to climb up on a stool to do the
C FILTER job, be careful not to fall.
C • When the filter is removed, do not touch the metallic parts inside
the indoor unit, otherwise injury may result.
TEMP. ON/OFF
Ŷ PLA-RP·BA
Ŷ Indicates that the filter needs cleaning.
Ask authorized people to clean the filter.
Ŷ When resetting “FILTER” display
When the [FILTER] button is pressed 2 times successively after
cleaning the filter, the display goes off and is reset.
Note:
Ɣ When two or more different types of indoor unit are controlled, the clean-
ing period differs with the type of filter. When the master unit cleaning
period arrives, “FILTER” is displayed. When the filter display goes off, the
cumulative time is reset.
Ɣ “FILTER” indicates the cleaning period when the air conditioner was used
under general indoor air conditions by criteria time. Since the degree of
dirtiness depends on the environmental conditions, clean the filter accord-
ingly.
Ɣ The filter cleaning period cumulative time differs with the model.
Ɣ This indication is not available for wireless remote controller.

Ź Cleaning the filters
• Clean the filters using a vacuum cleaner. If you do not have a vacuum clean-
er, tap the filters against a solid object to knock off dirt and dust.
• If the filters are especially dirty, wash them in lukewarm water. Take care to
rinse off any detergent thoroughly and allow the filters to dry completely 1 Pull the knob on the intake grille in the direction indicated by the arrow
before putting them back into the unit. and it should open.
2 Open the intake grille.
Caution:
3 Release the knob on the center edge of the intake grille and pull the
• Do not dry the filters in direct sunlight or by using a heat source, such as an
electric heater: this may warp them.
filter forward to remove the filter.
• Do not wash the filters in hot water (above 50°C), as this may warp them. A Knob B Grille C Intake grille D Filter
• Make sure that the air filters are always installed. Operating the unit without
air filters can cause malfunction.
Caution:
• Before you start cleaning, stop operation and turn OFF the power supply.
• Indoor units are equipped with filters to remove the dust of sucked-in air.
Clean the filters using the methods shown in the following sketches.
18
11. Trouble Shooting
Having trouble? Here is the solution. (Unit is operating normally.)

Air conditioner does not heat or cool well. Ŷ Clean the filter. (Airflow is reduced when the filter is dirty or clogged.)
Ŷ Check the temperature adjustment and adjust the set temperature.
Ŷ Make sure that there is plenty of space around the outdoor unit. Is the
indoor unit air intake or outlet blocked?
Ŷ Has a door or window been left open?
When heating operation starts, warm air does not blow from the indoor Ŷ Warm air does not blow until the indoor unit has sufficiently warmed up.
unit soon.
During heating mode, the air conditioner stops before the set room tem- Ŷ When the outdoor temperature is low and the humidity is high, frost
perature is reached. may form on the outdoor unit. If this occurs, the outdoor unit performs
a defrosting operation. Normal operation should begin after approxi-
mately 10 minutes.
Airflow direction changes during operation or airflow direction cannot be Ŷ During cooling mode, the vanes automatically move to the horizontal
set. (down) position after 1 hour when the down (horizontal) airflow direc-
tion is selected. This is to prevent water from forming and dripping from
the vanes.
Ŷ During heating mode, the vanes automatically move to the horizontal
airflow direction when the airflow temperature is low or during defrost-
ing mode.
When the airflow direction is changed, the vanes always move up and Ŷ When the airflow direction is changed, the vanes move to the set posi-
down past the set position before finally stopping at the position. tion after detecting the base position.
A flowing water sound or occasional hissing sound is heard. Ŷ These sounds can be heard when refrigerant is flowing in the air condi-
tioner or when the refrigerant flow is changing.
A cracking or creaking sound is heard. Ŷ These sounds can be heard when parts rub against each due to expan-
sion and contraction from temperature changes.
The room has an unpleasant odor. Ŷ The indoor unit draws in air that contains gases produced from the
walls, carpeting, and furniture as well as odors trapped in clothing, and
then blows this air back into the room.
A white mist or vapor is emitted from the indoor unit. Ŷ If the indoor temperature and the humidity are high, this condition may
occur when operation starts.
Ŷ During defrosting mode, cool airflow may blow down and appear like a
mist.
Water or vapor is emitted from the outdoor unit. Ŷ During cooling mode, water may form and drip from the cool pipes and
joints.
Ŷ During heating mode, water may form and drip from the heat exchang-
er.
Ŷ During defrosting mode, water on the heat exchanger evaporates and
water vapor may be emitted.
The operation indicator does not appear in the remote controller display. Ŷ Turn on the power switch. “ ” will appear in the remote controller dis-
play.
“ ” appears in the remote controller display. Ŷ During central control, “ ” appears in the remote controller display
and air conditioner operation cannot be started or stopped using the
remote controller.
When restarting the air conditioner soon after stopping it, it does not oper- Ŷ Wait approximately 3 minutes. (Operation has stopped to protect the air
ate even though the ON/OFF button is pressed. conditioner.)
Air conditioner operates without the ON/OFF button being pressed. Ŷ Is the on timer set?
Press the ON/OFF button to stop operation.
Ŷ Is the air conditioner connected to a central remote controller?
Consult the concerned people who control the air conditioner.
Ŷ Does “ ” appear in the remote controller display?
Ŷ Has the auto recovery feature from power failures been set?
Press the ON/OFF button to stop operation.
Air conditioner stops without the ON/OFF button being pressed. Ŷ Is the off timer set?
Press the ON/OFF button to restart operation.
Ŷ Is the air conditioner connected to a central remote controller?
Ŷ Does “ ” appear in the remote controller display?
Remote controller timer operation cannot be set. Ŷ Are timer settings invalid?
If the timer can be set, WEEKLY , SIMPLE , or AUTO OFF appears
in the remote controller display.
“PLEASE WAIT” appears in the remote controller display. Ŷ The initial settings are being performed. Wait approximately 3 minutes.
An error code appears in the remote controller display. Ŷ The protection devices have operated to protect the air conditioner.
Ŷ Do not attempt to repair this equipment by yourself.
Turn off the power switch immediately and consult your dealer. Be sure
to provide the dealer with the model name and information that ap-
peared in the remote controller display.
19
11. Trouble Shooting
Having trouble? Here is the solution. (Unit is operating normally.)

Draining water or motor rotation sound is heard. Ŷ When cooling operation stops, the drain pump operates and then stops.
Wait approximately 3 minutes.
Noise is louder than specifications. Ŷ The indoor operation sound level is affected by the acoustics of the
particular room as shown in the following table and will be higher than
the noise specification, which was measured in anechoic room.
High sound Low sound
Normal rooms
absorbing rooms absorbing rooms
Broadcasting
Location Reception room, Office, hotel
studio, music
examples hotel lobby, etc. room
room, etc.
Noise levels 3 to 7 dB 6 to 10 dB 9 to 13 dB
Nothing appears in the wireless remote controller display, the display Ŷ The batteries are low.
is faint, or signals are not received by the indoor unit unless the remote Replace the batteries and press the Reset button.
controller is close. Ŷ If nothing appears even after the batteries are replaced, make sure that
the batteries are installed in the correct directions (+, –).
The operation lamp near the receiver for the wireless remote controller on Ŷ The self diagnosis function has operated to protect the air conditioner.
the indoor unit is blinking. Ŷ Do not attempt to repair this equipment by yourself.
Turn off the power switch immediately and consult your dealer. Be sure
to provide the dealer with the model name.
12. Specifications
Model PLA-RP35BA PLA-RP50BA PLA-RP60BA PLA-RP71BA PLA-RP100BA PLA-RP125BA PLA-RP140BA2

Power source(voltage <V>/Frequency<Hz>) ~/N 230/50
Rated Input(Indoor only) <kW> 0.03 0.05 0.05 0.07 0.14 0.15 0.16
Rated Current(Indoor only) <A> 0.22 0.36 0.36 0.51 0.94 1.00 1.07
Heater <kW> - - - - - - -
Dimension(Height) <mm> 258(35) 298(35)
Dimension(Width) <mm> 840(950)
Dimension(Depth) <mm> 840(950)
Fan airflow rate(Low-Middle2-Middle1-High)
11-12-13-15 12-14-16-18 12-14-16-18 14-16-18-21 20-23-26-30 22-25-28-31 24-26-29-32
<m3/min>
Noise level(Low -Middle2-Middle1-High) <dB> 27-28-29-31 28-29-31-32 28-29-31-32 28-30-32-34 32-34-37-40 34-36-39-41 36-39-42-44
Net weight <kg> 22(6) 23(6) 25(6) 27(6)
Model PLA-RP71BA2 PLA-RP100BA3 PLA-RP125BA2

Power source(voltage <V>/Frequency<Hz>) ~/N 230/50
Rated Input(Indoor only) <kW> 0.07 0.15 0.16
Rated Current(Indoor only) <A> 0.51 1.00 1.07
Heater <kW> - - -
Dimension(Height) <mm> 258(35) 298(35)
Dimension(Width) <mm> 840(950)
Dimension(Depth) <mm> 840(950)
Fan airflow rate(Low-Middle2-Middle1-High)
14-16-18-21 20-23-26-30 22-25-28-31
<m3/min>
Noise level(Low -Middle2-Middle1-High) <dB> 28-30-32-34 32-34-37-40 34-36-39-41
Net weight <kg> 23(6) 26(6) 27(6)
*1 The figure in ( ) indicates Grille’s.
20
This product is designed and intended for use in the residential,
commercial and light-industrial environment.
Please be sure to put the contact address/telephone number on

this manual before handing it to the customer.
HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BLDG., 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
RG79D506H01 Printed in Japan

10-15
Air Conditioning Indoor Unit - PLA-RP60 BA - Service Manual

SPLIT-TYPE, HEAT PUMP AIR CONDITIONERS
SPLIT-TYPE, AIR CONDITIONERS
August 2009
No. OCH412
REVISED EDITION-E
SERVICE MANUAL
Indoor unit
[Model names] [Service Ref.] Revision:
PLA-RP35BA PLA-RP35BA.UK • "11. SPECIAL
FUNCTION" has been
PLA-RP35BA1.UK PLA-RP35BA#2.UK modified in REVISED
PLA-RP50BA PLA-RP50BA.UK EDITION-E.
• Some descriptions have
PLA-RP50BA1.UK PLA-RP50BA#2.UK been modified.
PLA-RP60BA PLA-RP60BA.UK • Please void OCH412
PLA-RP60BA1.UK PLA-RP60BA#2.UK REVISED EDITION-D.
PLA-RP71BA PLA-RP71BA.UK NOTE:

• This manual describes
PLA-RP71BA1.UK PLA-RP71BA#2.UK only service data of the
PLA-RP100BA PLA-RP100BA.UK PLA-RP100BA#2.UK indoor units.
• RoHS compliant prod-
PLA-RP125BA PLA-RP125BA.UK PLA-RP125BA#2.UK ucts have <G> mark on
the spec name plate.
PLA-RP140BA PLA-RP140BA.UK PLA-RP140BA#2.UK
PLA-RP71BA2 PLA-RP71BA2.UK
CONTENTS
1. TECHNICAL CHANGES.................................. 2
2. REFERENCE MANUAL................................... 2
3. SAFETY PRECAUTION................................... 3
4. PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS................... 4
5. SPECIFICATIONS............................................ 7
6. NOISE CRITERION CURVES.........................11
Model name 7. OUTLINES AND DIMENSIONS......................13
indication 8. WIRING DIAGRAM.........................................14
INDOOR UNIT 9. REFRIGERANT SYSTEM DIAGRAM............ 16
10. TROUBLESHOOTING....................................17
11. SPECIAL FUNCTION .....................................32
ON/OFF TEMP
12. DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE.......................41
TEMP. ON/OFF
PARTS CATALOG (OCB412)
WIRELESS REMOTE WIRED REMOTE

CONTROLLER CONTROLLER
1 TECHNICAL CHANGES
PLP-6BAJ (Automatic filter elevation panel, option)

The controller board (U.B) has been changed. (only for the panel but not for the service part)
PLA-RP140BA#2.UK PLA-RP140BA2.UK
HEAT EXCHANGER has been changed.

INDOOR CONTROLELR BOARD (I.B.) has been changed. (S/W version up)
PLA-RP35BA1.UK PLA-RP35BA#2.UK
PLA-RP100BA.UK PLA-RP100BA#2.UK
INDOOR CONTROLELR BOARD (I.B.) has been changed. (S/W version up)
PLA-RP35BA.UK PLA-RP35BA1.UK
FAN MOTOR (MF) has been changed.

TURBO FAN, NUT and WASHER have been changed.
2 REFERENCE MANUAL
OUTDOOR UNIT’S SERVICE MANUAL
Service Ref. Service Manual No.
PUHZ-RP200/250YHA(1)(2) OC338
SUZ-KA·VA(1).TH
OC322
SUZ-KA.VAR2.TH
PUHZ-RP35/50/60/71/100/125/140VHA2(1)
PUHZ-RP125/140VHA2#2
PUHZ-RP35/50/60/71/100VHA3(#1) OC374
PUHZ-RP100/125/140YHA2(1)
PUHZ-RP125/140YHA2#2
PUHZ-RP100YHA3(#1)
PU(H)-P71/100VHA(1).UK
PU(H)-P71/100VHA#2.UK
PU(H)-P71/100VHAR3.UK OC379
PU(H)-P71/100/125/140YHA(1).UK
PU(H)-P71/100/125/140YHA㧏2.UK
PU(H)-P71/100/125/140YHAR3.UK
PUHZ-P100/125/140VHA2(1).UK OCH415/OCB415
PUHZ-P100/125/140VHA3(R1).UK
MXZ-8A140VA2/VA3 OC316
PUHZ-P200/250YHA(3) OCH424/OCB424
PUHZ-HRP71/100VHA(2) OCH425/OCB425
PUHZ-HRP100/125YHA(2)
PUHZ-RP200/250YHA2 OCH428/OCB428
PUHZ-RP35/50/60/71VHA4
PUHZ-RP100/125/140VKA OCH/OCB451
PUHZ-RP100/125/140/200/250YKA
2
3 SAFETY PRECAUTION
3-1. ALWAYS OBSERVE FOR SAFETY

Before obtaining access to terminal, all supply
circuits must be disconnected.
3-2. CAUTIONS RELATED TO NEW REFRIGERANT

Cautions for units utilising refrigerant R410A
Use new refrigerant pipes. Do not use refrigerant other than R410A.
In case of using the existing pipes for R22, be careful with If other refrigerant (R22 etc.) is used, chlorine in refrige-
the followings. rant can cause deterioration of refrigerant oil etc.
· For RP100, 125 and 140, be sure to perform replace-
ment operation before test run.
· Change flare nut to the one provided with this product.
Use a vacuum pump with a reverse flow check
Use a newly flared pipe. valve.
· Avoid using thin pipes. Vacuum pump oil may flow back into refrigerant cycle and
that can cause deterioration of refrigerant oil etc.
Make sure that the inside and outside of refrige-

Use the following tools specifically designed for
rant piping is clean and it has no contamination
use with R410A refrigerant.
such as sulfur hazardous for use, oxides, dirt,
shaving particles, etc. The following tools are necessary to use R410A refrigerant.
In addition, use pipes with specified thickness. Tools for R410A
Gauge manifold Flare tool
Contamination inside refrigerant piping can cause deterio- Charge hose Size adjustment gauge
ration of refrigerant oil etc. Gas leak detector Vacuum pump adaptor
Torque wrench Electronic refrigerant
Store the piping to be used indoors during charging scale
installation and both ends of the piping sealed
until just before brazing. (Leave elbow joints, etc.
in their packaging.) Handle tools with care.
If dirt, dust or moisture enters into refrigerant cycle, that can If dirt, dust or moisture enters into refrigerant cycle, that can
cause deterioration of refrigerant oil or malfunction of com- cause deterioration of refrigerant oil or malfunction of com-
pressor. pressor.
Use ester oil, ether oil or alkylbenzene oil (small

Do not use a charging cylinder.
amount) as the refrigerant oil applied to flares
and flange connections. If a charging cylinder is used, the composition of refrigera-
If large amount of mineral oil enters, that can cause deterio- nt will change and the efficiency will be lowered.
ration of refrigerant oil etc.
Ventilate the room if refrigerant leaks during
Charge refrigerant from liquid phase of gas operation. If refrigerant comes into contact with
cylinder. a flame, poisonous gases will be released.
If the refrigerant is charged from gas phase, composition
change may occur in refrigerant and the efficiency will be
lowered.
[1] Cautions for service

(1) Perform service after recovering the refrigerant left in unit completely.
(2) Do not release refrigerant in the air.
(3) After completing service, charge the cycle with specified amount of refrigerant.
(4) When performing service, install a filter drier simultaneously.
Be sure to use a filter drier for new refrigerant.
[2] Additional refrigerant charge

When charging directly from cylinder
· Check that cylinder for R410A on the market is syphon type.
· Charging should be performed with the cylinder of syphon stood vertically. (Refrigerant is charged from liquid phase.)
3
Unit
Gravimeter
[3] Service tools

Use the below service tools as exclusive tools for R410A refrigerant.
No. Tool name Specifications

1 Gauge manifold · Only for R410A
· Use the existing fitting specifications. (UNF1/2)
· Use high-tension side pressure of 5.3MPa·G or over.
2 Charge hose · Only for R410A
· Use pressure performance of 5.09MPa·G or over.
3 Electronic scale
4 Gas leak detector · Use the detector for R134a, R407C or R410A.
5 Adaptor for reverse flow check · Attach on vacuum pump.
6 Refrigerant charge base
7 Refrigerant cylinder · Only for R410A · Top of cylinder (Pink)
· Cylinder with syphon
8 Refrigerant recovery equipment
4 PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
Drain pipe
Filter
Air outlet
Liquid pipe
Gas pipe
i-see sensor
(option)
Vane
Air intake
(Intake grille)
4
Wired remote controller
“Sensor” indication
Display Section
Displayed when the remote controller
Day-of-Week sensor is used.
For purposes of this explanation,
Shows the current day of the week.
all parts of the display are shown
as lit. During actual operation, only
the relevant items will be lit. Time/Timer Display
Shows the current time, unless the simple or Auto Off “Locked” indicator
timer is set. Indicates that remote controller but-
If the simple or Auto Off timer is set, the time to be tons have been locked.
switched off is shown.
Identifies the current operation
Shows the operating mode, etc. “Clean The Filter” indicator
*Multilanguage display is available. To be displayed on when it is time to
clean the filter.
TIME SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT

TIMER Hr ON
AFTER AFTER OFF Timer indicators
ERROR CODE FUNCTION The indicator comes on if the corre-
°F°C FILTER sponding timer is set.
“Centrally Controlled” indicator °F°C WEEKLY
SIMPLE
Indicates that operation from the ONLY1Hr. AUTO OFF
remote controller has been prohib-
ited by a master controller. Fan Speed indicator
Shows the selected fan speed.
Up/Down Air Direction indica- Room Temperature display
Ventilation indicator
tor Shows the room temperature. The room
“Timer is Off” indicator Appears when the unit is running in
The indicator shows the direc- temperature display range is 8–39.
Indicates that the timer is off. Ventilation mode.
tion of the outcoming airflow. The display blinks if the temperature
is less than 8 or 39 or more.
“One Hour Only” indicator
Displayed if the airflow is set to
Louver display
low or downward during COOL Indicates the action of the swing louver.
Temperature Setting or DRY mode. (Operation varies Does not appear if the louver is not
Shows the target temperature. according to model.) running.
The indicator goes off in 1 hour,
when the airflow direction (Power On indicator)
also changes. Indicates that the power is on.
Operation Section
Temperature setting buttons ON/OFF button
Down
Fan Speed button
Up
Timer Menu button

(Monitor/Set button)
Filter button
Mode button (Return button) (<Enter> button)
Test Run button

TEMP. ON/OFF
Set Time buttons Check button (Clear button)
Back MENU ON/OFF FILTER
Ahead
Airflow Up/Down button
Timer On/Off button PAR-21MAA CLOCK OPERATION CLEAR
(Set Day button)
Louver button
( Operation button)
To return operation
Opening the number
lid
Ventilation button
Built-in temperature sensor ( Operation button)
To go to next operation
number
Note:
L “PLEASE WAIT” message
This message is displayed for approximately 3 minutes when power is supplied to the indoor unit or when the unit is recovering from a power failure.
L “NOT AVAILABLE” message
This message is displayed if an invalid button is pressed (to operate a function that the indoor unit does not have).
If a single remote controller is used to operate multiple indoor units simultaneously that are different types, this message will not be displayed as
far as any of the indoor units is equipped with the function.
5
Wireless remote controller
CHECK TEST RUN display

CHECK and TEST RUN display indicate that
the unit is being checked or test-run.
MODEL SELECT display

Blinks when model is selected.
display
Lights up while the signal is transmitted to
the indoor unit when the button is pressed.
display
SET TEMP. display indicates the desired
temperature which is set.
display CLOCK display

OPERATION MODE display Displays the current time.
Operation mode display indicates which
operation mode is in effect. TIMER display
CHECK TEST RUN
MODEL SELECT °C Displays when in timer operation or when
AMPM setting timer.
“ ”“ ” display
AMPM
Displays the order of timer operation.
NOT AVAILABLE
display “ ”“ ” display
ON/OFF TEMP Displays whether timer is on or off.
The vertical direction of air flow is indicated.
display
FAN SPEED display indicates which fan
button
speed has been selected. SET TEMPERATURE button sets any desired
room temperature.
FAN AUTO STOP
ON/OFF button
The unit is turned ON and OFF alternately MODE VANE AUTO START
each time the button is pressed. TIMER CONTROL buttons
CHECK LOUVER h AUTO STOP (OFF timer): when this switch
is set, the air conditioner will be
FAN SPEED SELECT button automatically stopped at the preset time.
Used to change the fan speed. TEST RUN min AUTO START (ON timer): when this switch is
set, the air conditioner will be automatically
started at the preset time.
MODE SELECT button SET RESET CLOCK
Used to switch the operation mode between

cooling, drying, heating, auto and fan mode. h and min buttons
Buttons used to set the “hour and minute” of
the current time and timer settings.
LOUVER button
CHECK-TEST RUN button
Changes left/right airflow direction.
Only press this button to perform an (Not available for this model.)
inspection check or test operation.
Do not use it for normal operation.
CLOCK button
VANE CONTROL button
RESET button
Used to change the air flow direction.
SET button
6
5 SPECIFICATIONS
Service Ref. PLA-RP35BA.UK PLA-RP35BA1.UK PLA-RP35BA#2.UK

Mode Cooling Heating
Power supply (phase, cycle, voltage) Single phase, 50Hz, 230V
Input kW 0.03 0.02
Running current A 0.22 0.14
External finish (Panel) Munsell 6.4Y 8.9/0.4
Heat exchanger Plate fin coil
INDOOR UNIT
Fan Fan (drive) % No. Turbo fan (direct) % 1

Fan motor output kW 0.050
Airflow (Low-Medium2-Medium1-High) */min(CFM) 11-12-13-15(390-425-460-530)
External static pressure Pa(mmAq) 0(direct blow)
Booster heater kW –
Operation control & Thermostat Remote controller & built-in
Noise level (Low-Medium2-Medium1-High) dB 27-28-29-31
Field drain pipe O.D. mm(in.) 32 (1-1/4)
Dimensions W mm(in.) UNIT : 840 (33-1/16) PANEL : 950 (37-3/8)
D mm(in.) UNIT : 840 (33-1/16) PANEL : 950 (37-3/8)
H mm(in.) UNIT : 258 (10-3/16) PANEL : 35 (1-3/8)
Weight kg(lbs) UNIT : 22 (49) PANEL: 6 (13)

Input kW 0.05 0.04
INDOOR UNIT

Field drain pipe O.D. mm(in.) 32(1-1/4)
D mm(in.) UNIT : 840 (33-1/16) PANEL : 950 (37-3/8)
H mm(in.) UNIT : 258 (10-3/16) PANEL : 35 (1-3/8)

Input kW 0.05 0.04
INDOOR UNIT
Fan Fan (drive) % No. kW Turbo fan (direct) % 1

Fan motor output */min(CFM) 0.050
Airflow (Low-Medium2-Medium1-High) Pa(mmAq) 12-14-16-18(425-495-565-635)
External static pressure kW 0(direct blow)
Booster heater –
D mm(in.) UNIT : 840 (33-1/16) PANEL : 950 (37-3/8)
H mm(in.) UNIT : 258 (10-3/16) PANEL : 35 (1-3/8))
7
Input kW 0.07 0.06
INDOOR UNIT

D mm(in.) UNIT : 840 (33-1/16) PANEL : 950 (37-3/8)
H mm(in.) UNIT : 258 (10-3/16) PANEL : 35 (1-3/8)
Service Ref. PLA-RP100BA.UK PLA-RP100BA#2.UK

Input kW 0.14 0.13
INDOOR UNIT

Airflow (Low-Medium2-Medium1-High) */min(CFM) 20-23-26-30(710-810-920-1,060)
D mm(in.) UNIT : 840 (33-1/16) PANEL : 950 (37-3/8)
H mm(in.) UNIT : 298 (11-3/4) PANEL : 35 (1-3/8)
Weight kg(lbs) UNIT : 25 (55) PANEL : 6 (13)

Input kW 0.15 0.14
INDOOR UNIT

D mm(in.) UNIT : 840 (33-1/16) PANEL : 950 (37-3/8)
H mm(in.) UNIT : 298 (11-3/4) PANEL : 35 (1-3/8)
8
Input kW 0.16 0.15
INDOOR UNIT
Fan Fan(drive) % No. Turbo fan (direct) % 1

Airflow (Low-Medium2-Medium1-High) */min(CFM) 24-26-29-32(850-920-1,020-1,130)
D mm(in.) UNIT : 840 (33-1/16) PANEL : 950 (37-3/8)
H mm(in.) UNIT : 298 (11-3/4) PANEL : 35 (1-3/8)
Service Ref. PLA-RP71BA2.UK

Input kW 0.07 0.06
INDOOR UNIT

D mm(in.) UNIT : 840 (33-1/16) PANEL : 950 (37-3/8)
H mm(in.) UNIT : 258 (10-3/16) PANEL : 35 (1-3/8)

Input kW 0.15 0.14
INDOOR UNIT

D mm(in.) UNIT : 840 (33-1/16) PANEL : 950 (37-3/8)
H mm(in.) UNIT : 298 (11-3/4) PANEL : 35 (1-3/8)
Weight kg(lbs) UNIT : 27(60) PANEL : 6 (13)
9
Input kW 0.16 0.15
INDOOR UNIT

D mm(in.) UNIT : 840 (33-1/16) PANEL : 950 (37-3/8)
H mm(in.) UNIT : 298 (11-3/4) PANEL : 35 (1-3/8)
Weight kg(lbs) UNIT : 27(60) PANEL : 6 (13)

Input kW 0.16 0.15
INDOOR UNIT
Fan Fan(drive) % No. Turbo fan (direct) % 1

Airflow (Low-Medium2-Medium1-High) */min(CFM) 24-26-29-32(850-920-1,020-1,130)
D mm(in.) UNIT : 840 (33-1/16) PANEL : 950 (37-3/8)
H mm(in.) UNIT : 298 (11-3/4) PANEL : 35 (1-3/8)
10
6 NOISE CRITERION CURVES
PLA-RP35BA.UK NOTCH SPL(dB) LINE PLA-RP50BA.UK NOTCH SPL(dB) LINE

High 31 High 32
PLA-RP35BA1.UK Medium1 29
PLA-RP35BA#2.UK Medium2 28 PLA-RP50BA#2.UK Medium2 29
Low 27 Low 28
90 90
OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL, dB (0 dB = 0.0002 ȝbar)

80 80
70 70
NC-70 NC-70
60 60
NC-60 NC-60
50 50
NC-50 NC-50
40 40
NC-40 NC-40
30 30
NC-30 NC-30
20 APPROXIMATE APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD OF
20
THRESHOLD OF
HEARING FOR NC-20 HEARING FOR NC-20
CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS
NOISE NOISE
10 10
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
BAND CENTER FREQUENCIES, Hz BAND CENTER FREQUENCIES, Hz

High 32 High 34
PLA-RP60BA#2.UK Medium2 29 PLA-RP71BA#2.UK Medium2 30
Low 28 Low 28
PLA-RP71BA2.UK
90 90
OCTAVE .UKND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL, dB (0 dB = 0.0002 ȝbar)
80 80
70 70
NC-70 NC-70
60 60
NC-60 NC-60
50 50
NC-50 NC-50
40 40
NC-40 NC-40
30 30
NC-30 NC-30
20 APPROXIMATE APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD OF
20
THRESHOLD OF
HEARING FOR NC-20 HEARING FOR NC-20
NOISE NOISE
10 10
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
11
High 40 High 41
PLA-RP100BA#2.UK Medium1 37
PLA-RP100BA2.UK Medium2 34 PLA-RP125BA2.UK Medium2 36
Low 32 Low 34
90 90

80 80
70 70
NC-70 NC-70
60 60
NC-60 NC-60
50 50
NC-50 NC-50
40 40
NC-40 NC-40
30 30
NC-30 NC-30
20 APPROXIMATE 20 APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD OF THRESHOLD OF
HEARING FOR NC-20
HEARING FOR NC-20
NOISE NOISE
10 10
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
PLA-RP140BA.UK NOTCH SPL(dB) LINE

High 44
Low 36
90
80
UNIT
70
NC-70 CEILING
60
NC-60
50
NC-50
1.5m
40
NC-40
30
NC-30
MICROPHONE
20 APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD OF
HEARING FOR NC-20
CONTINUOUS
NOISE
10
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
BAND CENTER FREQUENCIES, Hz
12
7 OUTLINES AND DIMENSIONS
PLA-RP35BA.UK PLA-RP50BA.UK PLA-RP60BA.UK PLA-RP71BA.UK

PLA-RP100BA.UK PLA-RP125BA.UK PLA-RP140BA.UK
PLA-RP35BA1.UK PLA-RP50BA1.UK PLA-RP60BA1.UK PLA-RP71BA1.UK
PLA-RP35BA#2.UK PLA-RP50BA#2.UK PLA-RP60BA#2.UK PLA-RP71BA#2.UK
PLA-RP100BA#2.UK PLA-RP125BA#2.UK PLA-RP140BA#2.UK
Ceiling hole
20~45 860~910 20~45 Unit: mm
810
Fresh air Suspension bolt pitch Detail connecting of branch duct(Both aspects)
20~45
intake hole 160
90 100 100 90 Cut out hole
100
130
(7.5)
160
70°
Remote controller
155
167
terminal block + +
Suspension bolt pitch

Indoor unit/Outdoor unit
Ceiling hole
Branch duct hole connecting terminal block
-5
605 +35
860~910
Branch duct hole
840
620
350
:175 14-:2.8
Indoor power supply Burring hole pitch Burring hole
terminal block(Option part)
:150
Cut out hole
150
160
Detail drawing of fresh air intake hole

24
D
90
C
(7.5)
Burring hole
Burring hole pitch
3-:2.8
20~45
187.5 160
120°
:125
Suspension bolt 840
M10 or W3/8
1 60 284 377
Drain pipe Connected the attached
connected to VP-25 flexible pipe or socket. ( ) Cut out hole
120°
:100
158
Keep approximately
2 10 to 15mm space +
between unit ceiling
and ceiling slab.
A
B
+ Ceiling
190
156
170
105
140
+ + +
+ +
In case of standard grille : PLP-6BA / PLP-6BAMD
50~70
Suspension bolt Power supply wire,

17 +50
35
lower edge Indoor unit/Outdoor unit Ceiling

+
Control wire entry connecting wire entry Grille
597
Air intake hole Drain hole
Drain pump clean hole In case of auto-grille : PLP-6BAJ
M and Drain emergency
drainage hole In case of wireless remote controller : PLP-6BALM Auto grille
Emergency operation Air intake grille up/down distance
M Auto vane switch<Cooling>and
(Air outlet) Emergency Up/Down switch<Up>
Emergency operation
switch<Heating>and
Air intake hole
Air outlet hole
Emergency Up/Down switch<Down>

950
500
597
Ceiling
Max. 4.0m
L.L Filter
Air intake grille
Receiver DEFROST/STAND BY lamp
M
Operation lamp
Air intake grille
M Vane motor
83
Note1. Please choose the grille from a standard grille, auto-grille.

500 83 36 2. As for drain pipe, please use VP-25(O.D. :32 PVC TUBE).
36
Air outlet hole Drain pump is included.

950 Max. lifting height is 850mm from the ceiling.
3. As for suspension bolt, please use M10 or W3/8.
(Procured at local site)
4. Electrical box may be removed for the service purpose.
Indoor unit Indoor unit Make sure to slack the electrical wire little bit for control/power wires connection.
5. The height of the indoor unit is able to be adjusted with the grille attached.
6. For the installation of the optional high efficiency filter or optional multi-functional casement.
1) Requires E or more space between transom and ceiling for the installation.
2) Add 135 mm to the dimensions + marked on the figure.
3) The optional high efficiency filter must be used jointly with the optional multi-functional casement.
Ceiling 7. When installing the branch ducts, be sure to insulate adequately.
1000mm
or more
3000mm or more Otherwise condensation and dripping may occur.

Grille 1800mm or more
from floor (It becomes the cause of dew drops/Water dew.)
For high 8. As for necessary installation/service space, please refer to the left figure.
Obstacle attachment
1500mm Models 1 2 A B C D E
or more PLA-RP35/50BA Refrigerant pipe Refrigerant pipe
···:6.35 ···:12.7
Flared connection Flared connection 80
Floor ···1/4 inch ···1/2 inch
74
PLA-RP60BA Refrigerant pipe
:6.35 / :9.52
Flared connection 241 258 87 400
1/4 inch/ 3/8 inch Refrigerant pipe
(compatible) ···:15.88
PLA-RP71BA Flared connection
Refrigerant pipe ···5/8 inch
PLA-RP71BA2 ···:9.52
Flared connection 85 77
PLA-RP100,125,140BA
PLA-RP100,125,140BA2 ···3/8 inch 281 298 440
13
8 WIRING DIAGRAM

[LEGEND]
SYMBOL NAME SYMBOL NAME <Table 1>SW1(MODEL SELECTION)
I.B INDOOR CONTROLLER BOARD MF FAN MOTOR SW1
CN2L CONNECTOR (LOSSNAY) MV VANE MOTOR SETTING
CN32 CONNECTOR (REMOTE SWITCH) TB2 TERMINAL BLOCK (Indoor unit Power (option)) 1 2 3 4 5
CN41 CONNECTOR (HA TERMINAL-A) TB4 TERMINAL BLOCK (INDOOR/OUTDOOR CONNECTING LINE) ON
OFF
CN51 CONNECTOR (CENTRALLY CONTROL) TB5,TB6 TERMINAL BLOCK (REMOTE CONTROLLER
FUSE FUSE (T6.3AL250V) TRANSMISSION LINE) <Table 2>SW2(CAPACITY CODE)
LED1 POWER SUPPLY (I.B) TH1 ROOM TEMP. THERMISTOR SW2
LED2 POWER SUPPLY (R.B) (0 / 15k, 25 / 5. 4k DETECT) MODELS SETTING MODELS SETTING
LED3 TRANSMISSION (INDOOR-OUTDOOR) TH2 PIPE TEMP. THERMISTOR/LIQUID 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
SW1 SWITCH (MODEL SELECTION) +See table 1 (0 / 15k, 25 / 5. 4k DETECT) PLA-RP35BA ON PLA-RP100BA ON
OFF OFF
SW2 SWITCH (CAPACITY CODE) +See table 2 TH5 COND. / EVA. TEMP. THERMISTOR
SWE CONNECTOR (EMERGENCY OPERATION) (0 / 15k, 25 / 5. 4k DETECT) 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
PLA-RP50BA ON PLA-RP125BA ON
X1 RELAY (DRAIN PUMP) OPTION PART OFF OFF
DCL REACTOR W.B PCB FOR WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
DP DRAIN PUMP BZ BUZZER PLA-RP60BA ON PLA-RP140BA ON
LED1 LED (OPERATION INDICATION : GREEN) OFF OFF
FS DRAIN FLOAT SWITCH
LED2 LED (PREPARATION FOR HEATING : ORANGE) 1 2 3 4 5
PLA-RP71BA ON
RU RECEIVING UNIT OFF
SW1 EMERGENCY OPERATION (HEAT / DOWN)
SW2 EMERGENCY OPERATION (COOL / UP) The black square (Ŷ) indicates a switch position.
Refer to tables 1 and 2.

TB5 DCL
Please set the voltage using the
2
remote controller. 1
For the setting method, please refer to
the indoor unit Installation Manual. TRANSMISSION YLW
2 1
WIRES
TB6
DC12V
I.B R.B
VANE CNV(WHT) J41 J42 CN32 OUTDOOR 1 3 5
20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 SW1 SW2 (WHT) 1 CN01
3 (BLK)
CN51(WHT)
1 3
19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 Pair No. INDOOR/OUTDOOR FUSE
COMMUNICATION
5 1 CN3C
CN41(WHT) (BLU)
CN2L 1 2 DC325V
2 1 4 1 REMOCON
LED3 LED2 LED1 SWE CN22 RECTIFICATION
(BLU) TB4
3 ON OFF YLW YLW S1
AUTO GRILLE X1 ORN ORN S2 TO OUTDOOR
I-SEE UNIT
WIRELESS I-SEE SENSOR SENSOR MOTOR POWER FLOAT SW LIQUID/PIPE INTAKE FAN S3
1 3 CN90 CN4Y CN6Y CNAC CN4F CN44 CN20 CNMF
AUTO GRILLE (WHT) (WHT) (RED) (WHT) (WHT) (WHT) (RED) (WHT)
CN3G 1 9 1 4 1 6 3 1 1 4 1 4 1 2 7 4 1 3 1 D.U.M ORN
CNP BRN
(BLK) (BLU)
MS M
4 5 3 3~ 1~
9 t° t° t°
FS TH2 TH5 TH1 MF DP
CNB
5 5 5 5 BZ I-SEE M
SENSOR U.B + Be sure to turn off the power source
MT 3 1 5 3 1
SW1 LED2 I-SEE SENSOR
and then disconnect fan motor connector.
M M M M CORNER PANEL CN3G CN3A (Failure to do so will cause trouble in fan motor.)
SW2 LED1 (OPTION PART)
MV MV MV MV AUTOMATIC FILTER ELEVATION PANEL
RU (OPTION PART)
+1(Fig. 1)
GRILLE W.B
CN01 I.B
(BLK) TB2
Notes: 5
YLW RED
L POWER SUPPLY
ORN BLU
1.SymboIs used in wiring diagram above are, :Connector, : Terminal (block). 3
GRN/YLW
N ~(1PHASE)
2.Indoor and outdoor connecting wires have poIarities, make sure to match terminal numbers 1 230V 50Hz
(S1, S2, S3) for correct wirings.
3.Since the outdoor side electric wiring may change, be sure to check the outdoor unit electric YLW TB4
wiring diagram for servicing. ORN S1
ORN S2
4.This diagram shows the wiring of indoor and outdoor connecting wires.(specification of 230V), BRN TO OUTDOOR UNIT
I.B S3
adopting superimposed system for power and signal.
+1:If indoor and outdoor units have separate power supplies, refer to Fig.1. 1 3 INDOOR/OUTDOOR
+2:For power supply system of this unit, refer to the caution label located near this diagram. CN3C COMMUNICATION
(BLU)
14
[LEGEND]
SYMBOL NAME SYMBOL NAME <Table 1> SW1 (MODEL SELECTION)
I.B INDOOR CONTROLLER BOARD MF FAN MOTOR SW1
CN2L CONNECTOR (LOSSNAY) MV VANE MOTOR MODELS SETTING
CN32 CONNECTOR (REMOTE SWITCH) TB2 TERMINAL BLOCK (Indoor unit Power (option)) PLA-RP71BA2 1 2 3 4 5
CN41 CONNECTOR (HA TERMINAL-A) TB4 PLA-RP100BA2 ON
TERMINAL BLOCK (INDOOR/OUTDOOR CONNECTING LINE) PLA-RP125BA2 OFF
CN51 CONNECTOR (CENTRALLY CONTROL) TB5,TB6 TERMINAL BLOCK (REMOTE CONTROLLER
1 2 3 4 5
FUSE FUSE (T6.3AL250V) TRANSMISSION LINE) PLA-RP140BA2 ON
LED1 POWER SUPPLY (I.B) TH1 ROOM TEMP. THERMISTOR OFF
LED2 POWER SUPPLY (R.B) (0 / 15k, 25 / 5. 4k DETECT)
LED3 TRANSMISSION (INDOOR-OUTDOOR) TH2 PIPE TEMP. THERMISTOR/LIQUID <Table 2> SW2 (CAPACITY CODE)
SW1 SWITCH (MODEL SELECTION) +See table 1 (0 / 15k, 25 / 5. 4k DETECT) SW2
SW2 SWITCH (CAPACITY CODE) +See table 2 TH5 COND. / EVA. TEMP. THERMISTOR MODELS SETTING
SWE CONNECTOR (EMERGENCY OPERATION) (0 / 15k, 25 / 5. 4k DETECT) 1 2 3 4 5
PLA-RP71BA2 ON
X1 RELAY (DRAIN PUMP) OPTION PART OFF
DCL REACTOR W.B PCB FOR WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER 1 2 3 4 5
DP DRAIN PUMP BZ BUZZER PLA-RP100BA2 ON
OFF
FS DRAIN FLOAT SWITCH LED1 LED (OPERATION INDICATION : GREEN)
LED2 LED (PREPARATION FOR HEATING : ORANGE) 1 2 3 4 5
PLA-RP125BA2 ON
RU RECEIVING UNIT OFF
SW1 EMERGENCY OPERATION (HEAT / DOWN) 1 2 3 4 5
SW2 EMERGENCY OPERATION (COOL / UP) PLA-RP140BA2 ON
OFF
The black square (Ŷ) indicates a switch position.
Refer to tables 1 and 2.

DCL
TB5
2
1
TRANSMISSION YLW
2 1
WIRES
TB6
DC12V
R.B
I.B VANE CNV(WHT) J41 J42 CN32 OUTDOOR
20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 SW1 SW2 (WHT) 1 CN01
3 1 3 (BLK) 1 3 5
CN51(WHT) INDOOR/OUTDOOR
19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 Pair No. COMMUNICATION FUSE
CN3C
5 1 (BLU)
CN2L CN41(WHT) 1 2 DC325V
2 1 REMOCON
LED3 LED2 LED1 4 1 CN22
(BLU) RECTIFICATION TB4
SWE
3 ON OFF YLW YLW
S1
AUTO GRILLE ORN ORN TO OUTDOOR
1 3 I-SEE I-SEE X1 S2 UNIT
POWER FLOAT SW LIQUID/PIPE INTAKE FAN S3
WIRELESS SENSOR SENSOR MOTOR CNAC CN4F CN44 CN20 CNMF
AUTO GRILLE CN90 CN4Y CN6Y (WHT) (WHT) (WHT) (RED) (WHT) ORN
CN3G 1 (WHT) 9 1 (WHT) 4 1 (RED) 6 3 1 1 4 1 4 1 2 7 4 1 3 1 D.U.M
CNP BRN
(BLK)
(BLU)
4 5 MS M
9 3~ 1~
3 t° t° t°
5 5 5 5 CNB I-SEE M DP
BZ MF
SENSOR FS TH2 TH5 TH1
MT U.B
M M M M SW1 LED2 I-SEE SENSOR +Be sure to turn off the source power
CORNER PANEL 3 1 5 3 1
(OPTION PART) and then disconnect fan motor connector.
MV MV MV MV SW2 LED1
RU
CN3G CN3A (Failure to do so will cause trouble in fan motor)
AUTOMATIC FILTER ELEVATION PANEL
(OPTION PART)
GRILLE W.B
+1(Fig. 1)
CN01 I.B
Notes: (BLK) TB2
YLW RED L
1.SymboIs used in wiring diagram above are, 5 POWER SUPPLY
ORN BLU
:Connector, : : Terminal (block). 3 N ~(1PHASE)
1 GRN/YLW 230V 50Hz
2.Indoor and outdoor connecting wires have polarities, make sure to
match the terminal numbers (S1, S2, S3) for correct wirings. TB4
YLW
3.Since the outdoor side electric wiring may change, be sure to check S1
ORN
the outdoor unit electric wiring for servicing. ORN S2
4.This diagram shows the wiring of indoor and outdoor connecting BRN TO OUTDOOR UNIT
wires.(specification of 230V), adopting superimposed system for I.B S3
power and signal. INDOOR/OUTDOOR

+1: If indoor and outdoor units have separate power supplies, refer to Fig.1. 1 3 COMMUNICATION
CN3C(BLU)
+2:For power supply system of this unit, refer to the caution label
located near this diagram.
Please set the voltage using the

remote controller.
For the setting method, please refer to
the indoor unit Installation Manual.
15
9 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM DIAGRAM

Strainer (#50)
Heat exchanger
Refrigerant GAS pipe connection
(Flare)
Thermistor TH5
(Cond./ Eva.temperature)
Refrigerant flow in cooling
Refrigerant flow in heating
Refrigerant LIQUID pipe connection

(Flare)
Thermistor TH2
Thermistor TH1 Pipe temperature(Liquid)
(Room temperature)
Strainer (#50)
Distributor
with strainer (#50)
16
10 TROUBLESHOOTING
10-1. TROUBLESHOOTING
<Error code display by self-diagnosis and actions to be taken for service (summary)>
Present and past error codes are logged and displayed on the wired remote controller or controller board of outdoor unit.
Actions to be taken for service and the trouble reoccurrence at field are summarized in the table below. Check the contents
below before investigating details.
Unit conditions at service Error code Actions to be taken for service (summary)
Judge what is wrong and take a corrective action according

Displayed to “10-3. Self-diagnosis action table”.
The trouble is reoccurring.
Conduct troubleshooting and ascertain the cause of the
Not displayed trouble according to “10-4. Troubleshooting by inferior
phenomena”.
Consider the temporary defects such as the work of

protection devices in the refrigerant circuit including
compressor, poor connection of wiring, noise and etc.
Re-check the symptom, and check the installation
environment, refrigerant amount, weather when the
trouble occurred, matters related to wiring and etc.
Logged
Reset error code logs and restart the unit after finishing

service.
There is no abnormality in electrical component,

controller board, remote controller and etc.
The trouble is not reoccurring.
Re-check the abnormal symptom.

Conduct trouble shooting and ascertain the cause of

the trouble according to “10-4. Troubleshooting by
inferior phenomena”.
Not logged Continue to operate unit for the time being if the cause

is not ascertained.
There is no abnormality concerning of parts such as

electrical component, controller board, remote controller
and etc.
17
10-2. MALFUNCTION-DIAGNOSIS METHOD BY REMOTE CONTROLLER
<In case of trouble during operation>
When a malfunction occurs to air conditioner, both indoor unit and outdoor unit will stop and operation lamp blinks to inform
unusual stop.
<Malfunction-diagnosis method at maintenance service>
[Procedure]
1. Press the CHECK button twice. • "CHECK" lights, and refrigerant
Refrigerant address "00" flashes.
address
display • Check that the remote controller's
CHECK
CHECK display has stopped before continuing.
display
2. Press the temperature • Select the refrigerant address of the
Temperature buttons. indoor unit for the self-diagnosis.
button
ON/OFF TEMP Note: Set refrigerant address using the
outdoor unit’s DIP switch (SW1).
ON/OFF
button (For more information, see the
outdoor unit installation manual.)
FAN AUTO STOP
MODE VANE AUTO START 3. Point the remote controller at the • If an air conditioner error occurs, the
HOUR sensor on the indoor unit and indoor unit's sensor emits an intermit-
button
CHECK LOUVER h press the HOUR button. tent buzzer sound, the operation light
CHECK TEST RUN min
flashes, and the error code is
button output.
SET RESET CLOCK (It takes 3 seconds at most for error
code to appear.)
4. Point the remote controller at the • The check mode is cancelled.

sensor on the indoor unit and
press the ON/OFF button.
18
• Refer to the following tables for details on the check codes.
[Output pattern A]
Beeper sounds Beep Beep Beep Beep Beep Beep Beep
OPERATION 1st 2 nd 3 rd nth 1st 2 nd · · · Repeated
INDICATOR
lamp flash Off On On On On Off On On
pattern
Self-check Approx. 2.5 sec. 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec. Approx. 2.5 sec. 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec.
starts
(Start signal
received) Number of flashes/beeps in pattern indicates the check Number of flashes/beeps in pattern indicates
code in the following table (i.e., n=5 for “P5”) the check code in the following table
[Output pattern B]
Beeper sounds Beep Beep Beep Beep Beep Beep Beep
OPERATION 1st 2nd 3 rd nth 1st 2 nd · · · Repeated

INDICATOR
lamp flash Off On On On On On Off On On On
pattern
Self-check Approx. 2.5 sec. Approx. 3 sec. 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec. Approx. 2.5 sec. Approx. 3 sec. 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec.
starts
(Start signal
received) Number of flashes/beeps in pattern indicates the check Number of flashes/beeps in pattern indicates
code in the following table (i.e., n=5 for “U2”) the check code in the following table
[Output pattern A] Errors detected by indoor unit

Wireless remote controller Wired remote controller
Beeper sounds/OPERATION Symptom Remark
INDICATOR lamp flashes Check code
(Number of times)
1 P1 Intake sensor error
P2 Pipe (TH2) sensor error
2
P9 Pipe (TH5) sensor error
3 E6,E7 Indoor/outdoor unit communication error
4 P4 Drain sensor error/Float switch connector (CN4F) open
P5 Drain pump error
5
PA Forced compressor stop(due to water leakage abnormality)
6 P6 Freezing/Overheating protection operation
7 EE Communication error between indoor and outdoor units
8 P8 Pipe temperature error
9 E4, E5 Remote controller signal receiving error
10 – –
11 – –
12 Fb Indoor unit control system error (memory error, etc.)
– E0, E3 Remote controller transmission error
– E1, E2 Remote controller control board error
[Output pattern B] Errors detected by unit other than indoor unit (outdoor unit, etc.)
Wireless remote controller Wired remote controller
Beeper sounds/OPERATION Symptom Remark
INDICATOR lamp flashes Check code
(Number of times)
Indoor/outdoor unit communication error
1 E9 (Transmitting error) (Outdoor unit)
2 UP Compressor overcurrent interruption
3 U3,U4 Open/short of outdoor unit thermistors
For details, check
4 UF Compressor overcurrent interruption (When compressor locked)
the LED display
Abnormal high discharging temperature/49C worked/ of the outdoor
5 U2 insufficient refrigerant
controller board.
Abnormal high pressure (63H worked)/Overheating As for outdoor
6 U1,Ud protection operation unit, refer to
7 U5 Abnormal temperature of heat sink outdoor unit's
8 U8 Outdoor unit fan protection stop service manual.
9 U6 Compressor overcurrent interruption/Abnormal of power module
10 U7 Abnormality of super heat due to low discharge temperature
Abnormality such as overvoltage or voltage shortage and
11 U9,UH abnormal synchronous signal to main circuit/Current sensor error
12 – –
13 – –
14 Others Other errors (Refer to the technical manual for the outdoor unit.)
*1 If the beeper does not sound again after the initial 2 beeps to confirm the self-check start signal was received and
the OPERATION INDICATOR lamp does not come on, there are no error records.
*2 If the beeper sounds 3 times continuously “beep, beep, beep (0.4 + 0.4 + 0.4 sec.)” after the initial 2 beeps to confirm
the self-check start signal was received, the specified refrigerant address is incorrect.
• On wireless remote controller
The continuous buzzer sounds from receiving section of indoor unit.
Blink of operation lamp
• On wired remote controller
Check code displayed in the LCD.
19
• On wireless remote controller
The continuous buzzer sounds from receiving section of indoor unit.
Blink of operation lamp
• On wired remote controller
Check code displayed in the LCD.
• If the unit cannot be operated properly after test run, refer to the following table to find the cause.
Symptom
Cause
Wired remote controller LED 1, 2 (PCB in outdoor unit)
For about 2 After LED 1, 2 are lighted, LED 2 is •For about 2 minutes following power-on,op-
PLEASE WAIT minutes after turned off, then only LED 1 is eration of the remote controller is not possible
power-on lighted. (Correct operation) due to system start-up. (Correct operation)
•Connector for the outdoor unit’s protection
Only LED 1 is lighted. ĺ device is not connected.
PLEASE WAIT ĺ Error code
Subsequent to LED 1, 2 blink. •Reverse or open phase wiring for the outdoor
about 2 minutes unit’s power terminal block (L1, L2, L3)
Display messages do not after power-on Only LED 1 is lighted. ĺ •Incorrect wiring between indoor and outdoor
appear even when operation LED 1 blinks twice, units (incorrect polarity of S1, S2, S3)
switch is turned ON (operation LED 2 blinks once. •Remote controller wire short
lamp does not light up).
On the wireless remote controller with condition above, following phenomena take place.
• No signals from the remote controller can be received.
• Operation lamp is blinking.
• The buzzer makes a short ping sound.
Note:
Operation is not possible for about 30 seconds after cancellation of function selection. (Correct operation)
For description of each LED (LED1, 2, 3) provided on the indoor controller, refer to the following table.
LED1 (power for microcomputer) Indicates whether control power is supplied. Make sure that this LED is
always lit.
LED2 (power for remote controller) Indicates whether power is supplied to the remote controller.
This LED lights only in the case of the indoor unit which is connected to the
outdoor unit refrigerant addresses “0”.
LED3 (communication between indoor and Indicates state of communication between the indoor and outdoor units.
outdoor units) Make sure that this LED is always blinking.
20
Note: Refer to the manual of outdoor unit for the details of display
10-3. SELF-DIAGNOSIS ACTION TABLE such as F, U, and other E.
Error Code Abnormal point and detection method Cause Countermeasure

Room temperature thermistor (TH1) 1 Defective thermistor 1–3 Check resistance value of thermistor.
1 The unit is in 3-minute resume characteristics 0: 15.0k"
prevention mode if short/open of 2 Contact failure of connector 10: 9.6k"
thermistor is detected. Abnormal if the (CN20) on the indoor controller 20: 6.3k"
unit does not reset normally after 3 min- board (Insert failure) 30: 4.3k"
utes. (The unit returns to normal opera- 3 Breaking of wire or contact 40: 3.0k"
tion, if it has been reset normally.) failure of thermistor wiring If you put force on (draw or bend) the lead wire
2 Constantly detected during cooling, 4 Defective indoor controller while measuring resistance value of thermis-
drying, and heating operation. board tor, breaking of wire or contact failure can be
Short: -90: or more detected.
Open: -40: or less 2 Check contact failure of connector (CN20)
P1 on the indoor controller board. Refer to 10-7.
Turn the power on again and check restart
after inserting connector again.
4 Check room temperature display on remote
controller.
Replace indoor controller board if there is
abnormal difference with actual room
temperature.
Turn the power off, and on again to operate

after check.
Pipe temperature thermistor/Liquid 1 Defective thermistor 1–3 Check resistance value of thermistor.
(TH2) characteristics For characteristics, refer to (P1) above.
1 The unit is in 3-minute resume 2 Contact failure of connector 2 Check contact failure of connector (CN44)
prevention mode if short/open of (CN44) on the indoor controller on the indoor controller board. Refer to 10-7.
thermistor is detected. Abnormal if the board (Insert failure) Turn the power on and check restart after
unit does not reset normally after 3 min- 3 Breaking of wire or contact inserting connector again.
utes. (The unit returns to normal opera- failure of thermistor wiring 4 Check pipe <liquid> temperature with remote
tion, if it has been reset normally.) 4 Defective refrigerant circuit is controller in test run mode. If pipe <liquid>
2 Constantly detected during cooling, causing thermistor temperature temperature is extremely low (in cooling
P2 drying, and heating (except defrosting) of 90: or more or -40: or mode) or high (in heating mode), refrigerant
operation less. circuit may have defective.
Short: 90: or more 5 Defective indoor controller 5 Check pipe <liquid> temperature with
Open: -40: or less board remote controller in test run mode. If there is
extremely difference with actual pipe <liquid>
temperature, replace indoor controller board.

after check.
Contact failure of drain float switch 1 Contact failure of connector 1 Check contact failure of float switch connector.
(CN4F) (Insert failure) Turn the power on again and check after
• Extract when the connector of drain float inserting connector again.
switch is disconnected. 2 Operate with connector (CN4F) short-
P4
(3 and 4 of connector CN4F is not 2 Defective indoor controller circuited.
short-circuited.) board Replace indoor controller board if abnormality
• Constantly detected during operation reappears.
Drain over flow protection operation 1 Malfunction of drain pump 1 Check if drain pump works.
1 Suspensive abnormality, if drain float 2 Defective drain 2 Check drain function.
switch is detected to be underwater for Clogged drain pump
1 minute and 30 seconds continuously Clogged drain pipe
with drain pump on. 3 Defective drain float switch 3 Remove drain float switch connector CN4F
Compressor and indoor fan will be Jamming of the drain float and check if it is short (Switch On) with the
turned off. switch or malfunction of mov- moving part of float switch UP, or OPEN with
2 Drain pump is abnormal if the condition ing parts causing the drain float the moving part of float switch down.
above is detected during suspensive switch to be detected under Replace float switch if it is short with the
abnormality. water (Switch On) moving part of float switch down.
P5 3 Constantly detected during drain pump 4 Defective indoor-controller 4 Replace indoor controller board if it is short-
operation board circuited between 3-4 of the drain float
switch connector CN4F and abnormality
reappears.
It is not abnormal if there is no problem about

the above-mentioned
after check.
21
Freezing/overheating protection is work- (Cooling or drying mode) (Cooling or drying mode)
ing 1 Clogged filter (reduced airflow) 1 Check clogs of the filter.
1 Freezing protection (Cooling mode) 2 Short cycle of air path 2 Remove blockage.
The unit is in 6-minute resume preven- 3 Low-load (low temperature)
tion mode if pipe <liquid or condenser/ operation out of the tolerance
evaporator> temperature stays under range
-15: for 3 minutes, 3 minutes after the
compressor started. Abnormal if it stays 4 Defective indoor fan motor 4 Refer to 10-6.
under -15: for 3 minutes again within • Fan motor is defective.
16 minutes after 6-minute resume pre- • Indoor controller board is defec-
vention mode. tive.
5 Defective outdoor fan control 5 Check outdoor fan motor.

6 Overcharge of refrigerant 67 Check operating condition of refrigerant
7 Defective refrigerant circuit circuit.
(clogs)
(Heating mode) (Heating mode)

2 Overheating protection (Heating mode) 1 Clogged filter (reduced airflow) 1 Check clogs of the filter.
P6 The units is in 6 minute resume 2 Short cycle of air path 2 Remove blockage.
prevention mode if pipe <liquid or con- 3 Over-load (high temperature)
denser/evaporator> temperature is operation out of the tolerance
detected as over 70: after the com- range
pressor started. Abnormal if the tem- 4 Defective indoor fan motor 4 Refer to 10-6.
perature of over 70: is detected again • Fan motor is defective.
within 30 minutes after 6 minute resume • Indoor controller board is defec-
prevention mode. tive.
5 Defective outdoor fan control 5 Check outdoor fan motor.
6 Overcharge of refrigerant 6~8 Check operating condition of refrigerant
7 Defective refrigerant circuit circuit.
(clogs)
8 Bypass circuit of outdoor unit
is defective.
Pipe temperature 1 Slight temperature difference 1~4 Check pipe <liquid or condenser/evapora-
<Cooling mode> between indoor room tor> temperature with room temperature
Detected as abnormal when the pipe tem- temperature and pipe <liquid display on remote controller and outdoor
perature is not in the cooling range 3 min- or condenser/evaporator> controller circuit board.
utes after compressor start and 6 minutes temperature thermistor Pipe <liquid or condenser/evaporator>
after the liquid or condenser/evaporator • Shortage of refrigerant temperature display is indicated by set-
pipe is out of cooling range. • Disconnected holder of pipe ting SW2 of outdoor controller circuit
Note 1) It takes at least 9 minutes to <liquid or condenser/ board as follows.
detect. evaporator> thermistor
( )
Note 2) Abnormality P8 is not detected in • Defective refrigerant circuit Conduct temperature check with outdoor
drying mode. 2 Converse connection of controller circuit board after connecting
Cooling range : -3 °C ] (TH-TH1) extension pipe (on plural units ‘A-Control Service Tool(PAC-SK52ST)’.
TH: Lower temperature between: liquid connection)
pipe temperature (TH2) and condens- 3 Converse wiring of indoor/ 23 Check converse connection of extension
er/evaporator temperature (TH5) outdoor unit connecting wire pipe or converse wiring of indoor/outdoor
TH1: Intake temperature (on plural units connection) unit connecting wire.
P8 4 Defective detection of indoor
<Heating mode> room temperature and pipe
When 10 seconds have passed after the <condenser/evaporator>
compressor starts operation and the hot temperature thermistor
adjustment mode has finished, the unit is 5 Stop valve is not opened
detected as abnormal when condenser/ completely.
evaporator pipe temperature is not in heat-
ing range within 20 minutes.
Note 3) It takes at least 27 minutes to

detect abnormality.
Note 4) It excludes the period of defrosting.
(Detection restarts when defrosting
mode is over.)
Heating range : 3 °C [ (TH5-TH1)
22
Pipe temperature thermistor/ 1 Defective thermistor
Condenser-Evaporator (TH5) characteristics 1–3 Check resistance value of thermistor.
1 The unit is in 3-minute resume protec- 2 Contact failure of connector For characteristics, refer to (P1) above.
tion mode if short/open of thermistor is (CN44) on the indoor controller 2 Check contact failure of connector (CN44)
detected. Abnormal if the unit does not board (Insert failure) on the indoor controller board.
get back to normal within 3 minutes. (The 3 Breaking of wire or contact Refer to 10-7.
Turn the power on and check restart after
unit returns to normal operation, if it has failure of thermistor wiring inserting connector again.
been reset normally.) 4 Temperature of thermistor is 4 Operate in test run mode and check pipe
2 Constantly detected during cooling, 90: or more or -40: or less <condenser/evaporator> temperature with
drying, and heating operation (except caused by defective refrigerant outdoor controller circuit board. If pipe
defrosting) circuit. <condenser/evaporator> temperature is
Short: 90: or more 5 Defective indoor controller extremely low (in cooling mode) or high (in
Open: -40: or less board heating mode), refrigerant circuit may have
P9 defect.
5 Operate in test run mode and check pipe
<condenser/evaporator> temperature with
outdoor control circuit board. If there is
extreme difference with actual pipe
<condenser / evaporator> temperature,
replace indoor controller board.
There is no abnormality if none of above
comes within the unit.
Turn the power off and on again to operate.
( )
In case of checking pipe temperature
with outdoor controller circuit board,
be sure to connect A-control service
tool (PAC-SK52ST).
Remote controller transmission 1 Contact failure at transmission 1 Check disconnection or looseness of indoor
error(E0)/signal receiving error(E4) wire of remote controller unit or transmission wire of remote controller.
1 Abnormal if main or sub remote con- 2 All remote controllers are set 2 Set one of the remote controllers “main”
troller cannot receive any transmission as “sub” remote controller. if there is no problem with the action above.
normally from indoor unit of refrigerant In this case, E0 is displayed 3 Check wiring of remote controller.
• Total wiring length: max. 500m
address “0” for 3 minutes. on remote controller, and E4 (Do not use cable x 3 or more.)
(Error code : E0) is displayed at LED (LED1, • The number of connecting indoor units:
2 Abnormal if sub remote controller could LED2) on the outdoor controller max. 16 units
not receive any signal for 2 minutes. circuit board. • The number of connecting remote control-
(Error code: E0) 3 Miswiring of remote controller ler: max. 2 units
4 Defective transmitting receiving
1 Abnormal if indoor controller board can circuit of remote controller When it is not the above-mentioned problem of
E0 not receive any data normally from 5 Defective transmitting receiving 1~3
or remote controller board or from other circuit of indoor controller board 4 Diagnose remote controllers.
E4 indoor controller board for 3 minutes. of refrigerant addresses “0”. a) When “RC OK” is displayed,
(Error code: E4) 6 Noise has entered into the Remote controllers have no problem.
2 Indoor controller board cannot receive transmission wire of remote Turn the power off, and on again to check.
any signal from remote controller for 2 controller. If abnormality generates again, replace
indoor controller board.
minutes. (Error code: E4)
b) When “RC NG” is displayed,
Replace remote controller.
c) When “RC E3” or “ERC 00-66” is dis-
played, noise may be causing abnormality.
* If the unit is not normal after replacing
indoor controller board in group control,
indoor controller board of address “0” may
be abnormal.
Remote controller transmission

error(E3)/signal receiving error(E5) 1 2 remote controllers are set as 1 Set a remote controller to main, and the
1 Abnormal if remote controller could not “main.” other to sub.
find blank of transmission path for 6 sec- (In case of 2 remote con-
onds and could not transmit. trollers)
(Error code: E3) 2 Remote controller is connected 2 Remote controller is connected with only one
2 Remote controller receives transmitted with 2 indoor units or more. indoor unit.
data at the same time and compares the
received and transmitted data. Abnormal 3 Repetition of refrigerant 3 The address changes to a separate setting.
if these data are judged to be different address
E3
30 continuous times. (Error code: E3) 4 Defective transmitting receiving 4~6 Diagnose remote controller.
or
circuit of remote controller a) When “RC OK” is displayed, remote con-
E5 trollers have no problem.
1 Abnormal if indoor controller board could 5 Defective transmitting receiving
not find blank of transmission path. circuit of indoor controller board Turn the power off,and on again to check.
(Error code: E5) 6 Noise has entered into trans- When becoming abnormal again, replace
2 Indoor controller board receives trans- indoor controller board.
mission wire of remote control-
mitted data at the same time and com- b) When “RC NG” is displayed, replace
ler. remote controller.
pares the received and transmitted data.
Abnormal if these data are judged to c) When “RC E3” or “ERC 00-66” is dis-
be different 30 continuous times. (Error played, noise may be causing abnormal-
code: E5) ity.
23
Indoor/outdoor unit communication 1 Contact failure, short circuit or, * Check LED display on the outdoor control
error (Signal receiving error) miswiring (converse wiring) of circuit board. (Connect A-control service
1 Abnormal if indoor controller board indoor/outdoor unit connecting tool, PAC-SK52ST.)
cannot receive any signal normally for 6 wire Refer to outdoor unit service manual.
minutes after turning the power on. 1 Check disconnection or looseness of indoor/
2 Abnormal if indoor controller board 2 Defective transmitting receiving outdoor unit connecting wire of indoor unit or
cannot receive any signal normally for 3 circuit of indoor controller board outdoor unit.
minutes. 3 Defective transmitting receiving Check all the units in case of twin triple
E6 3 Consider the unit abnormal under the fol- circuit of indoor controller board indoor unit system.
lowing condition: When 2 or more indoor 4 Noise has entered into indoor/ 2-4 Turn the power off, and on again to check.
units are connected to an outdoor unit connecting wire. If abnormality generates again, replace
outdoor unit, indoor controller board indoor controller board or outdoor
cannot receive a signal for 3 minutes controller circuit board.
from outdoor controller circuit board, a * Other indoor controller board may have
signal which allows outdoor controller defect in case of twin triple indoor unit
circuit board to transmit signals. system.
Indoor/outdoor unit communication 1 Defective transmitting receiving 1-3 Turn the power off, and on again to check.
error (Transmitting error) circuit of indoor controller board If abnormality generates again, replace
Abnormal if “1” receiving is detected 30 2 Noise has entered into power indoor controller board.
E7 times continuously though indoor controller supply.
board has transmitted “0”. 3 Noise has entered into outdoor
control wire.
Indoor controller board 1 Defective indoor controller 1 Replace indoor controller board.
Abnormal if data cannot be read normally board
Fb from the nonvolatile memory of the indoor
controller board.
Remote controller control board 1 Defective remote controller 1 Replace remote controller.
1 Abnormal if data cannot be read nor-
mally from the nonvolatile memory of the
remote controller control board.
E1 (Error code: E1)
or
E2 2 Abnormal if the clock function of remote
controller cannot be operated normally.
(Error code: E2)
Forced compressor stop 1 Drain pump trouble 1 Check the drain pump.
(due to water leakage abnormality)
1 The unit has a water leakage abnor- 2 Drain defective 2 Check whether water can be drained.
mality when the following conditions, a) · Drain pump clogging
and b), are satisfied while the above- · Drain pipe clogging
mentioned detection is performed.
a) The intake temperature subtracted 3 Open circuit of float switch 3 Check the resistance of the float switch.
with liquid pipe temperature detects
to be less than -10: for a total of 4 Contact failure of float switch 4 Check the connector contact failure.
30 minutes. (When the drain sensor connector
is detected to be NOT soaked in the
water, the detection record of a) and b) 5 Dew condensation on float 5 Check the float switch leadwire mounted.
will be cleared.) switch Check the filter clogging.
b) Drain float switch detects to be in the · Drain water descends along
water for more than 15 minutes. lead wire.
*Once the water leakage abnormality is · Drain water waving due to
PA detected, abnormality state will not be filter clogging.
released until the main power is reset.
6 Extension piping connection 6 Check the piping connection.
difference at twin, triple, quad-
ruple system.
7 Miswiring of indoor/ outdoor 7 Check the indoor/outdoor connecting wires.

connecting at twin, triple, quad-
ruple system.
8 Room temperature thermistor/ 8 Check the room temperature display of

liquid pipe temperature thermis- remote controller.
tor detection is defective. Check the indoor liquid pipe temperature dis
play of outdoor controller board.
24
10-4. TROUBLESHOOTING BY INFERIOR PHENOMENA
Note: Refer to the manual of outdoor unit for the detail of remote
controller.
Phenomena Cause Countermeasure
(1)LED2 on indoor controller board • When LED1 on indoor controller board is also off.
is off. 1 Power supply of rated voltage is not supplied to out- 1 Check the voltage of outdoor power
door unit. supply terminal block (L, N) or (L3, N).
• When AC 220~240V is not detected,
check the power wiring to outdoor unit
and the breaker.
• When AC 220~240V is detected, check
2 (below).
2 Defective outdoor controller circuit board 2 Check the voltage between outdoor
terminal block S1 and S2.
—check the fuse on outdoor controller
circuit board.
—check the wiring connection.
• When AC 220~240V is detected, check
3 (below).
3 Power supply of 220~240V is not supplied to indoor 3 Check the voltage between indoor termi-
unit. nal block S1 and S2.
check indoor/outdoor unit connecting
wire for miswiring.
• When AC 220~240V is detected,
check 4 (below).
4 Defective indoor controller board 4 Check the fuse on indoor controller
board.
Check the wiring connection.
If no problem are found, indoor controller
board is defective.
(For the separate indoor/outdoor unit power sup-

ply system)
1 Power supply of 220~240V AC is not supplied to 1 Check the voltage of indoor power supply
indoor unit. terminal block (L,N).
• When AC220~240V is not detected,
check the power supply wiring.
• When AC220~240V is detected,
check 2 (below).
2 The connectors of the optional replacement kit are 2 Check that there is no problem in the
not used. method of connecting the connectors.
• When there are problems in the method
of connecting the connectors,
connect the connector correctly refer-
ring to installation manual of an optional
kit.
• When there is no problem in the meth-
od of connecting the connectors,
check 3 (below).
3 Defective indoor controller board 3 Check the fuse on indoor controller
board.
Check the wiring connection.
If no problem are found, indoor controller
board is defective.
• When LED1 on indoor controller board is lit.

1 Mis-setting of refrigerant address for outdoor unit 1 Check again the setting of refrigerant
(There is no unit corresponding to refrigerant address for outdoor unit.
address “0”.) Set the refrigerant address to “0”.
(For grouping control system under
which 2 or more outdoor units are

connected, set one of the units to “0”.)
Set refrigerant address using SW1 (3-6)
on outdoor controller circuit board.
25
Note: Refer to the manual of outdoor unit for the detail of remote
controller.
Phenomena Cause Countermeasure
(2)LED2 on indoor controller board • When LED1 on indoor controller board is also blinking. Check indoor/outdoor unit connecting wire
is blinking. Connection failure of indoor/outdoor unit connecting for connection failure.
wire
• When LED1 is lit. 1 Check the connection of remote con-

1 Miswiring of remote controller wires troller wires in case of twin triple indoor
Under twin triple indoor unit system, 2 or more indoor unit system. When 2 or more indoor units
units are wired together. are wired in one refrigerant system,
connect remote controller wires to one of
those units.
2 Refrigerant address for outdoor unit is wrong or not 2 Check the setting of refrigerant address
set. in case of grouping control system.
Under grouping control system, there are some units If there are some units whose refrigerant
whose refrigerant address is 0. addresses are 0 in one group, set one of
the units to 0 using SW1 (3-6) on outdoor
controller circuit board.
3 Short-cut of remote controller wires 34 Remove remote controller wires and
4 Defective remote controller check LED2 on indoor controller board.
• When LED2 is blinking, check the short-
cut of remote controller wires.
• When LED2 is lit, connect remote
controller wires again and:
if LED2 is blinking, remote controller
is defective; if LED2 is lit, connection
failure of remote controller terminal
block etc. has returned to normal.
(3)Upward/downward vane 1 The vane is not downward during defrosting and heat 1 Normal operation (The vane is set to
performance failure preparation and when the thermostat is OFF in HEAT horizontal regardless of remote control.)
mode. (Working of COOL protection function)
2 Vane motor does not rotate. 2 Check 2 (left).
• Defective vane motor • Check the vane motor. (Refer to “How
• Breaking of wire or connection failure of connector to check the parts”.)
• Check for breaking of wire or connec-
tion failure of connector.
3 Upward/downward vane does not work. 3 Normal operation (Each connector on
• The vane is set to fixed position. vane motor side is disconnected or set-
ting the fixed vanes by wired remote
controller.)
(4)Receiver for wireless remote 1 Weak batteries of wireless remote controller. 1 Replace batteries of wireless remote con-
controller troller.
2 Contact failure of connector (CNB) on wireless 2~4
remote controller board Check contact failure of each connector.
(Insert failure) If no problems are found of connector,
3 Contact failure of connector (CN90) on indoor con- replace indoor controller board.
troller board (Insert failure) When the same trouble occurs even if
4 Contact failure of connector between wireless remote indoor controller board is replaced,
controller board and indoor controller board replace wireless remote controller
board.
26
10-5. EMERGENCY OPERATION
10-5-1. When wireless remote controller fails or its battery is exhausted
When the remote controller cannot be used

When the batteries of the remote controller run out or the remote control-
ler malfunctions, the emergency operation can be done using the emer-
gency buttons on the grille.
DEFROST/STAND BY lamp
Operation lamp
Emergency operation switch (heating)
Emergency operation switch (cooling)
Receiver
Starting operation
• To operate the cooling mode, press the button for more than 2
seconds.
• To operate the heating mode, press the button for more than 2
seconds.
* Lighting of the Operation lamp means the start of operation.
Details of EMERGENCY MODE are as shown below.

Operation mode COOL HEAT
Set temperature 24°C 24°C
Fan speed High High
Air ow direction Horizontal Downward 5
Stopping operation
• To stop operation, press the button or the button .
10-5-2. When wired remote controller or indoor unit microcomputer fails

1. When the wired remote control or the indoor unit microcomputer has failed, but all other components work properly,
if you set the switch (SWE) on the indoor controller board ON, the indoor unit will begin Emergency Operation.
When Emergency Operation is activated, the indoor unit operates as follows:
(1) Indoor fan is running at high speed. (2) Drain-up machine is working.
+ Note on the wireless remote control
When the remote control does not function, it is possible to activate.
Emergency Operation by using the indoor unit Emergency operation switch (SW1, SW2 of the wireless signal
receiver board).
However, if the indoor unit microcomputer has failed, it is nesessary to proceed with points 2 and 3 below as in the
case of the wired remote control.
2. When you activate Emergency operation of the cooling or heating, you have to set the switch (SWE) on the indoor
controller board and activate Emergency operation of the outdoor unit.
For details on how to activate Emergency operation of the outdoor unit, refer to the outdoor unit wiring diagram.
Note: Emergency operation will not work unless outdoor unit is PU series.
3. Before you activate Emergency operation, check the following points:

(1) Emergency operation cannot be activated when:
• the outdoor unit malfunctions. • the indoor fan malfunctions.
• when it has detected the malfunction of drain-up machine during self-diagnosing.
(2) Emergency operation becomes continuous only by switching the power source on/off.
ON/OFF on the remote control or temperature control etc. does not function.
(3) Avoid operating for a long time when the outdoor unit begins defrosting
while Emergency operation of the heating is activated, because it will start to blow cold air.
(4) Emergency cooling should be limited to 10 hours maximum (The indoor unit heat exchanger may freeze).
(5) After Emergency operation has been deactivated, set the switches etc. to their original positions.
(6) Movement of the vanes does not work in Emergency operation, therefore
you have to slowly set them manually to the appropriate position.
27
10-6. HOW TO CHECK THE PARTS
Parts name Check points
Room temperature Disconnect the connector then measure the resistance with a tester.
thermistor (TH1) (At the ambient temperature of 10~30)
Pipe temperature
thermistor/liquid(TH2) Normal Abnormal
(Refer to the thermistor.)
Condenser/Evaporator 4.3k~9.6k Open or short
temperature thermistor
(TH5)
Vane motor (MV) Measure the resistance between the terminals with a tester.
(At the ambient temperature of 20~30)
White
Connector Normal Abnormal
Orange
Red - Yellow (-, -, -, -)
Red - Blue (-
, -, - , -)
Red 300 Open or short
Blue Yellow Red - Orange (- , -, -, -)
Red - White (-, -, -
, -)
Drain pump (DP) Measure the resistance between the terminals with a tester.
(Winding temperature 20)
YLW
1 Normal Abnormal
3 290 Open or short
YLW
Drain float switch (FS)

Measure the resistance between the terminals with a tester.
Moving part Switch
State of moving part Normal Abnormal Magnet
1
2 UP Short Other than short
3 DOWN Open Other than open
4
Moving
Part
i-see sensor Turn on the indoor unit with the black plastic tape on the outside of
(Option) i-see sensor controller board.
With electricity being turned on, measure the power voltage between connectors with tester.
i-see sensor rotates and pull out the connector of motor for i-see sensor.
Do not disassemble corner panel

with i-see sensor.
Black plastic tape
4 3 2 1 i-see sensor (At the ambient temperature of 10~40)

i-see sensor connector Normal Abnormal
4 3 2 1 (–)— (+) DC 1.857V ~ 3.132V Other than the normal
Blue BlackPink Brown
(+)—(–) DC 0.939V ~ 1.506V Other than the normal
NOTE : Be careful not to discharge static electricity into electronics.
Vane motor for Measure the resistance between the terminals with a tester.
i-see sensor (Option) (At the ambient temperature of 20~30)
White Connector Normal Abnormal
Red - Yellow
Orange Red - Blue
250 Open or short
Red Red - Orange
Blue Yellow Red - White
28
10-6-1. Thermistor
< Thermistor for lower temperature >
<Thermistor Characteristic graph>
50
Thermistor for Room temperature thermistor (TH1)

lower temperature Pipe temperature thermistor/liquid (TH2)
Condenser/evaporator temperature 40
thermistor (TH5)
Resistance (k)
Thermistor R0=15k' ± 3% 30
Fixed number of B=3480 ± 2%
Rt=15exp { 3480( 1 1 )} 20
273+t 273
0: 15k'
10: 9.6k' 10
20: 6.3k'
25: 5.4k'
30: 4.3k' 0
40: 3.0k' -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
Temperature ()
10-6-2. DC Fan motor (FAN MOTOR/INDOOR CONTROLLER BOARD)

Check method of DC fan motor (fan motor / indoor controller circuit board)

Notes
· High voltage is applied to the connector (CNMF) for the fan motor. Pay attention to the service.
· Do not pull out the connector (CNMF) for the motor with the power supply on.
(It causes trouble of the indoor controller circuit board and fan motor.)
Self check
Symptom : The indoor fan cannot turn around.
Indoor controller board fuse check
Is the resistance
No Yes Replace the fan motor.
Is the fuse normal? between the terminals of
Replace the indoor controller board.
drain pump normal?
Yes
Wiring contact check No
Contact of fan motor connector (CNMF) Replace the drain pump.
Yes
Is there contact failure? Wiring recovery
No
Power supply check (Remove the connector (CNMF))
Measure the voltage in the indoor controller circuit board.
TEST POINT
: VDC (between 1 (+) and 4 (-) of the fan connector): VDC DC 310~340 V
TEST POINT : VCC (between 5 (+) and 4 (-) of the fan connector): VCC DC 15 V
Yes
Is the voltage normal? Replace the fan motor.
No OK
Check the operation of fan. END
Replace indoor
NG
controller board
Replace indoor controller board.
OK
Check the operation END
NG
Replace the fan motor.
29
10-7.TEST POINT DIAGRAM
Indoor controller board
PLA-RP35/50/60/71/100/125/140BA.UK
PLA-RP35/50/60/71BA1.UK
PLA-RP30/50/60/71/100/125/140BA#2.UK
PLA-RP71/100/125/140BA2.UK
LED3 CN3G
Transmission (Indoor/outdoor) Connect to the auto grille controller board (CN3G)
CN90 13V pulse output
Connect to the wireless CNV
remote controller board Vane motor output (MV)
(CNB) 12V pulse output
CN4Y SW1
i-see sensor Model selection
CN6Y
i-see sensor motor output SW2
12V DC pulse output Capacity setting
LED2 Jumper wire J41,J42

Power supply (R.B) Pair No. setting for wireless
remote controller
CN4F
Drain float switch (FS)
CN2L
CN44 Connector (LOSSNAY)
Pipe temperature SWE
thermistor Emergency operation
1-2 : Liquid (TH2) CN41
3-4 : Condenser/Evaporator(TH5) Connector
(HA terminal-A)
CN20
CN32
Room temperature
Connector
thermistor (TH1)
(Remote switch)
LED1 CN22
Power supply (I.B) Connect to the terminal
block (TB5)
(Remote controller con-
necting wire)
(10.4~14.6V DC)
CN3C
Transmission
(Indoor/outdoor)
(0~24V DC)
VCC : Voltage between pins of

C955 15VDC
(Same as 5(+)–4(-) of CNMF)
CNMF
Fan motor
1-4: DC 310~340V
5-4: DC15V
CN01
Connect to the Terminal Block (TB4)
(Indoor/outdoor connecting line)
CNP
Between 3 and 5
Drain-pump output (DP)
220-240V AC
(220-240V AC)
CNAC
Connect to the auto grille
controller board (CN3A) FUSE 6.3A /250V
(220-240V AC)
30
10-8. FUNCTIONS OF DIP SWITCH AND JUMPER WIRE
Each function is controlled by the dip switch and the jumper wire on control P.C. board.
The black square (Ŷ) indicates a switch position

Jumper wire ( : Short : Open)
Jumper wire Functions Setting by the dip switch and jumper wire Remarks
MODELS SETTING
1 2 3 4 5
PLA-RP·BA ON
OFF
SW1 Model PLA-RP71BA2 1 2 3 4 5

settings PLA-RP100BA2 ON
PLA-RP125BA2 OFF
1 2 3 4 5
PLA-RP140BA2 ON
OFF
MODELS SETTING MODELS SETTING

SW2 Capacity 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
PLA-RP35BA ON PLA-RP100BA(2) ON
settings OFF OFF
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
OFF OFF
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
OFF OFF
1 2 3 4 5
PLA-RP71BA(2) ON
OFF
<Initial setting>
Wireless remote controller: 0
Wireless remote Control PCB setting Control PCB: (for both J41 and J42)
Pair number controller setting J41 J42
setting with 4 pair number settings are supported.
J41 0
wireless The pair number settings of the wireless remote
J42 1
controller and indoor control PCB (J41/J42) are
remote
2
controller given in the table on the left.
3~9
(' ' in the table indicates the jumper wire is dis-
connected.)
Model JP1 There is no jumper (JP1) because these models

Unit type
JP1 Without TH5 have the cond./eva. temperature thermistor (TH5).
setting
With TH5
Indoor
Indoor controller board type JP3
controller
JP3 For product
board type
Service parts
setting
31
11 SPECIAL FUNCTION
11-1. HOW TO PERFORM THE UP/DOWN OPERATION OF THE AIR INTAKE GRILLE
11-1-1. Setting up the lowering distance of air intake grille
Unit
You can set up 8 different stages of lowering distance for Decorative
the air intake grille according to the set up location if desired. panel
* As a factory default, the decorative panel will automatically
stop at 1.6 m from the ceiling surface. The distance is a
rough indication, check by actually lowering it.
1) Take the cover off the electric box of the decorative panel. (2 screws)
2) Set up the dip switches of SW22 or SW2 on the control board of the
decorative panel as followed.
Cover for
Electric Box of
the decorative
panel Control board of
the decorative
Screws panel
SW 22 or SW2
Dip SW 22 Dip SW 2
The black square (Ŷ) indicates a switch position. The black square (Ŷ) indicates a switch position.
Lowering distance Lowering distance Lowering distance Lowering distance
SW22 SW22 SW2 SW2
(Rough indication (Rough indication (Rough indication (Rough indication
of the ceiling height) (Lowering distance) of the ceiling height) (Lowering distance) of the ceiling height) (Lowering distance) of the ceiling height) (Lowering distance)
Initial setting Initial setting
1.2m 1.6m 1.2m 1.6m
(~ 2.4m) (2.4m ~ 2.8m) (~ 2.4m) (2.4m ~ 2.8m)
2.0m 2.4m 2.0m 2.4m

(2.8m ~ 3.2m) (3.2m ~ 3.6m) (2.8m ~ 3.2m) (3.2m ~ 3.6m)
2.8m 3.2m 2.8m 3.2m

(3.6m ~ 4.0m) (4.0m ~ 4.4m) (3.6m ~ 4.0m) (4.0m ~ 4.4m)
3.6m 4.0m 3.6m 4.0m

(4.4m ~ 4.8m) (4.8m ~ 5.2m) (4.4m ~ 4.8m) (4.8m ~ 5.2m)
* Airflow outreach distance is different depending on indoor units and * Airflow outreach distance is different depending on indoor units and
air volume (ceiling height), so airflow may not reach the indicated air volume (ceiling height), so airflow may not reach the indicated
ceiling height as shown in the above table. ceiling height as shown in the above table.
3) Put the cover back on the electric box of the decorarive panel.
11-1-2. How to perform the up/down operation using wireless remote controller
1) Ensure that the air-conditioner is not running. Ensure that the air-conditioner is not running.
Warning:
2) Press the "Down" button to lower the air intake grille. • Otherwise, it may cause an injury or a failure.
* By default, the air intake grille will automatically stop at a lowering distance of 1.6 m from the ceiling level.
The distance can be changed to 1.2 m, 2.0 m, 2.4 m, 2.8 m, 3.2 m, 3.6 m and 4.0 m. These should be used
only as a guide. You should lower the air intake grille yourself to check the exact distance.
* When you want to stop the air intake grille while it is lowering, press the "Stop" or "Up" button on the remote
controller to stop at that position.
3) Remove the filter or air intake grille and clean them.
4) Attach the filter and air intake grille.
Wireless remote
5) Press the "Up" button on the remote controller to put the air intake grille in place. controller for
* If the air intake grille is not placed in the correct position at a time, the operation is automatically retried. Automatic Filter
* When you want to stop the air intake grille while it is rising, press the "Stop" or "Down" button on the remote controller Elevation Panel
to stop at that position.
32
11-1-3. How to perform the up/down operation using wired remote controller (PAR-21MAA)
ŶGeneral Operation
* Raise or lower all the air intake grilles managed by the remote controller at the same time.
Install the remote controller in a place where you can observe all the air-conditioners. Otherwise, the lowering grille may make
contact with something and cause damage to it.
* The up/down operation mode is only available when the Warning:
• Otherwise, it may cause an injury or a failure.
airconditioner is "OFF".
2) Press both the "FILTER" and "Ventilation" buttons simultaneously for 2 seconds or more to enter the up/down
operation mode.
"Up/down operation
mode" display
3) Press the TEMP. ( ) button. After a while, the air intake grille will begin lowering.
Alternately [ Note: ]
"Stand by for lowering"
display • You cannot stop the operation while the air intake grille is lowering.
* If you press the ( ) button while the air intake grille is moving down, the air intake grille
"Lowering" display may stop lowering, but it will not stop immediately.
• By default, the air intake grille will automatically stop at the lowering distance of 1.6 m
(blinking)
from the ceiling level.
* The distance can be changed to 1.2 m, 2.0 m, 2.4 m, 2.8 m, 3.2 m, 3.6 m, and 4.0 m.
"Stopped" display These should be used only as a guide. You should lower the air intake grille yourself to check
(when finished lowering) the exact distance. the air intake grille
4) Remove the filter and/or air intake grille to clean them.
5) Press the TEMP. ( ) button. After a while, the air intake grille will begin to rise and then be put back into place.
Alternately
"Stand by for raising" display
"Raising" display (blinking) [ Note: ]

• You cannot stop the operation while the air intake grille is rising.
* If you press the ( ) button while the intake grille is moving up, the air
"Stopped" display (when the air intake intake grille may stop rising, but it will not stop immediately.
grille has been put back into place)
6) Exit the up/down mode either by pressing the "ON/OFF" button or by pressing both the "FILTER" and "Ventilation"
buttons simultaneously for 2 seconds or more.
* After exiting the up/down mode, wait for
about 30 seconds to perform the next
operation. The remote controller will not Operation status
display
accept any operation for that period. Button to exit the up/down
operation mode
Down/Up
buttons
TEMP. ON/OFF
Buttons to enter the up/down
MENU ON/OFF FILTER
operation mode (Press them
simultaneously for 2 seconds.)
33
Ŷ Up/down operation with the individual specified air-conditioner (when used in combination with Mr. SLIM model)
* Raise or lower the air intake grille of the specific air-conditioner that you select from all that are managed by that remote controller.
* The up/down operation mode is only available when the Warning:
• Otherwise, it may cause an injury or a failure.
air-conditioner is "OFF".
2) Press both the "FILTER" and "Ventilation" buttons simultaneously for 2 seconds or more to enter the up/down
operation mode.
Up/down operation mode
3) Press the "Ventilation" button. After a while, it will switch to the "individually-specified up/down operation
mode".
Up/down operation mode Individually-specified up/down operation mode
Unit No. Refrigerant address No.
In the upper right figure, the air-conditioner

for which the refrigerant address is "00"
If the number of the target air- and the unit No. is "1" is currently If the number of the target air-
conditioner is unknown, go to 4). selected. conditioner is known, go to 5).
4) If you press the "FILTER" button when the "Unit No." or "Refrigerant address No." is blinking, after a while,
the up/down airflow direction of the displayed air-conditioner will be switched downward; and the airflow
direction of the other vents will all be blocked.
Ŷ In Step 5) described below, identify the target [Remarks:]
air-conditioner by changing the "Unit No." and Ŷ If "Err" is displayed when you press the "FILTER" button to check the target
"Refrigerant address No." and by pressing the "FILTER" air-conditioner, the air-conditioner with that "Unit No." or "Refrigerant
address" may not exist. Check and set that air-conditioner again.
button to check the up/down airflow direction.
5) Select the "Unit No." and "Refrigerant address No.".

Ŷ "Unit No." and "Refrigerant address No." can be changed by using the "TEMP." buttons ( ) ( ) when the panel
displays (a) or (b).
Ŷ Every time you press the "Mode selection" button, the target of operation will change as illustrated below.
(a) "Unit No." selection (c) "Standby for up/down operation" display
display
[Remarks:]
Ŷ Each pressing action changes the unit No. from "1 - 4" to "0".
(Unit No. "0" means that all of 1 - 4 are targeted.)
Ŷ Each press changes the "Refrigerant address" from "0 to 15".
(b) "Refrigerant address No." selection display
6) Continue to press the "Mode selection" button until "Waiting for up/down operation" is displayed.
"Waiting for up/down operation" display

The following steps are the same as steps 3) - 6) described in the "General Operation" section. Refer to that
section.
Operation status display
Down/Up buttons (for selecting Button to exit the up/down

unit No. and refrigerant operation mode
address) TEMP. ON/OFF
MENU ON/OFF FILTER

Buttons to enter the up/down
Mode selection BACK MONITOR/SET DAY CHECK TEST
operation mode (Hold them
down simultaneously for 2
seconds.)
34
11-2. OPERATION (AUTOMATIC FILTER ELEVATION PANEL: PLP-6BAJ)
(1) Normal operation

UP/DOWN
Air intake grille is raised/lowered by Wire 1b
UP/DOWN UP/DOWN
commands of UP and DOWN.
Machine 1 Machine 2
Air intake grille does not move under the
state of no-load detection or obstacle detection.
Air intake grille stops automatically at the set lowering
distance from the ceiling level. Detection
STOP switch Wire 2b
Wire 2a
It stops in the cases below :
• When it reaches at the set lowering distance from
the ceiling level.
It automatically stops after a predetermined period Wire 1a
of lowering. Fig.1
• When it is stored in the panel.
The air intake grille is judged to be stored in the panel
when the storage detection switch is pressed for 3 seconds continuously.
• When receiving commands of STOP, DOWN while moving up or UP while moving down.
The STOP button is only available on the automatic filter elevation panel remote controller.
When the wired remote controller is used, there will be a slight delay in stopping due to transmission speed.
• When both wire 1b and 2b are not loaded.
Only the wire b in each UP/DOWN Machine has a tension detection switch.
(2) Special operation

Storage operation
Case : Obstruction of the raising grille before storage or malfunction of storage detection switch
Storage operation will be performed when the intake grille has been raised the set distance but the
storage detection switch is not engaged.
In this case, the operation below will be repeated up to 4 times.
10 cm down 30 cm up ···· 10 cm down 30 cm up
No-load detection
Case : UP/DOWN commands with no grille suspended.
When both wire 1b and wire 2b are not loaded, the wires will not move.
Obstacle detection
Case : Making contact with something while lowering.
Should the loads on the wire 1b and wire 2b be removed due to the grille making contact with something while lowering,
the lowering operation will stop. The grille will then be raised 10 cm and stop again.
[Emergency operation]
• When the wireless remote controller cannot be used (in the case of battery discharge, misplacing of the wireless
remote controller, malfunctioning and so on), the emergency switch on the receiver can be used as an alternative.
* When doing this, particular caution must be taken not to fall.
To lower the air intake grille : Press the button once.
(For emergency heating operation, press and hold this button.)
To raise the air intake grille : Press the button once.
(For emergency cooling operation, press and hold this button.)
• To stop the air intake grille from moving, use the opposite buttons to those used to initiate movement.
(To stop it from lowering, press the UP button; To stop it from rising, press the Down button.)
• If up/down machine is out of order, fix air intake grille temporarily and the indoor unit can be operated.
+ For details, refer to installation manual for the attachment of grille.
35
11-3. ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT (Controller board and wiring diagram (Panel))
11-3-1. Dip SW 22 type
SW22
Panel Indoor unit
3
LS1 BLK
BLK B O Y 1 9
UK1 R R L W.B CNB
N N W (WHT) 2
LS21 I.B
CN3G BZ 3 CN90
WHT 3 2 1
2 1 2 4 (WHT)
WHT CN2G (BLK) SW1
1 (BLK) 5
6 CN3G
MU1 CN22 (BLK)
FUSE 7
CN2F SW2 (BLU)
(BLK)
RU 8 CNAC
1 2 1 2 (WHT)
UK1 9
CN2E
LS21 (RED) CN2B
CN2C
2 WHT (WHT)
(WHT) GRN/YLW
1 WHT 1 2 R R B
1 2 E E L
SW22 CN3A D D K
MU1 B R B R
ON 5 3 1 TB6
L E L E (RED) TB5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
K D K D 1 1
U.B 2 2
R.B
Symbol Name Symbol Name

U.B Auto grille controller board W.B Wireless remote controller board
BZ Buzzer
FUSE Fuse (3.15A)
RU Receiver
SW22 Switch (Lowering distance set up) SW1 Emergency switch (heating/down)
UK1 Up/down machine SW2 Emergency switch (cooling/up)
MU1 Motor (Up/down) LS1 Limit switch (storage detection)
LS21 Limit switch (tension detection) R.B Wired remote controller
I.B Indoor controller board
11-3-2. Dip SW 2 type SW2
SYMBOL NAME SYMBOL NAME SYMBOL NAME

U.B CONTROLLER BOARD I.B INDOOR UNIT CONTROLLER BOARD UK1 UP/DOWN MACHINE
FUSE FUSE (T3.15AL250V) W.B WIRELESS SIGNAL RECEIVER BOARD M MOTOR (FOR GRILLE UP/DOWN)
SW1 SWITCH (MODEL SELECTION) BZ BUZZER LS21 LIMIT SWITCH (TENSION DETECTION)
SW2 SWITCH (LOWERING DISTANCE) RU RECEIVING UNIT LS1 LIMIT SWITCH (STORAGE DETECTION)
SW3 SWITCH (SYSTEM SELECTION) EMERGENCY HEATING GRILLE / DOWN R.B. WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
SW1
LED RED LONG PRESS FOR OVER 2 SEC) (SHORT PRESS)
LED1
(MICROCOMPUTER POWER) EMERGENCY COOLING GRILLE / UP
SW2
LED RED LONG PRESS FOR OVER 2 SEC) (SHORT PRESS)
LED2 (GRILLE CONDITION)
36
11-3-3. Check point of trouble
<LED (SW22 type) /LED2 (SW2 type) display>
Turn OFF : No power supply
Blink : Storage detection switch ON (short)
One blink : Storage detection switch OFF (open)
Two blinks : Tension detection switch OFF (open)
<controller board>
Check item Check point Normal Remarks
Up/down controller
CN3A
P.C. board supply AC 198~264 V
(between 3-5)
voltage
Up/down machine Check when instructing up/down with LED
CN2B, CN2C DC 10~12 V
supply voltage blinking once.
<Up/down machine>
Check item Check point Normal Check contents
Storage detection
CN2E open or short Check if it is short when pressing push switch.
switch
Tension detection
CN2F, CN2G open or short Check if it is short when wire b is tensioned.
switch
Motor CN2B, CN2C 5~20 Check if it is not open or short.
Retension:
Entwining wires Pull wire Check if wire is drawn out by pulling with 3 kgf.
about 2 kgf
11-4. TROUBLESHOOTING
• Check the following points.
Problem Possible Reason Corrective Action
Air intake grille does not Air-conditioner is running. Stop running the air-conditioner and try again.
function with operation of the Power failure After recovering from power failure, try again.
wireless remote controller.
Batteries are not inserted into the wireless remote controller. Insert or replace the battery.
Or battery power is running low.
There is something on the air intake grille. Remove the objects or obstacles from the
Or something is stuck in the air intake grille. air intake grille.
Or, remove the stuck object.
Air intake grille cannot be There is something on the air intake grille. Remove the objects or obstacles from the
fixed in place. air intake grille.
Filter is not properly installed. Lower the air intake grille again and check
whether the filter is installed in the correct
position.
Air intake grille is not hung with all 4 hooks. Lower the air intake grille again and hook
on the air intake grille.
Air intake grille stops lowering. The air intake grille has finished lowering to the auto-stop This is normal.
(Air intake grille would not position.
lower any further.)
Noises are made during This is the noise made when the wire is wound and
up/down operation. unwound.
(While air intake grille is
moving up/down.)
Noises are made while putting This is the operational noise for putting the air intake
the air intake grille into place. grille into place.
This is normal.
Air intake grille repeats rising This is the operation for putting the air intake grille into
and lowering several times place.
while being put into place.
Air intake grille leans toward The speeds of winding/unwinding wires are slightly
one side during the up/down different for each wire.
operation.
37
11-5. ROTATION FUNCTION (AND BACK-UP FUNCTION, 2ND STAGE CUT-IN FUNCTION)
11-5-1. Operation
(1) Rotation function (and Back-up function)
• Outline of functions
· Main and sub unit operate alternately according to the interval of rotation setting.
w Main and sub unit should be set by refrigerant address. (Outdoor Dip switch setting)
Refrigerant address "00" Main unit
Refrigerant address "01" Sub unit
· When error occurs to one unit, another unit will start operation.(Back-up function)
• System constraint
· This function is available only by the grouping control system (INDOOR UNIT : OUTDOOR UNIT=1:1) of 2 refrigerant
groups. (Refer to Fig. 1)
· Main indoor unit should be connected for wired remote controller and the transmission line (TB5) for main and sub unit
should also be connected. (Refer to Fig. 1)
(This function cannot be set by wireless remote controller.)
· Set refrigerant address of each unit. (Dip switch on the outdoor unit···Refrigerant address 00/01)
Operation pattern Fig. 1 Refrigerant address Refrigerant address

"00" "01"

[Back-up function only]··· Request code number "312"
Error occurs on main unit.
Start operation Main Sub OC-1 OC-2
Main
unit Abnormal condition Main Sub
Run 3(2)
IC-1 unit 3(2) unit
Sub IC-1 IC-2

unit Stop Run
IC-2
2 2
[Rotation function] & [Back-up function]··· Request code number "313~318"
RC
Error occurs on main unit.
Start operation Main Sub Main Sub Main Sub OC : Outdoor unit
Main IC : Indoor unit
Abnormal condition RC : Wired remote controller
unit
Run Stop Run
IC-1
Sub
unit Stop Run Stop Run
IC-2
1~28 days 1~28 days
(Ex:When the request code number is "313", each unit operates alternately in daily cycle.)
Note:
· When the unit is restarted to operate after turning off the power or OFF operation, the unit which was operationg will start
operation.
· To operate the main unit, refer to the 11-5-2. and set the request code No. which is not the same as the current one, and set
again the former request code No.
(2) 2nd stage cut-in function

Outline of functions
· When the 1st unit can NOT supply with sufficient capacity for exceptionally high-demand conditions and the actual room
temperature reaches set point *, the 2nd unit starts operation in conjunction with the 1st unit.
· Once the actual room temperature goes down to 4degrees C below set point *, the 2nd unit stops operation automatically.
(* set point = set temperature by R/C (remote controller) + 4, 6, 8: (selectable) )
· Number of operating units is determined according to the room temperature and set point.
· When room temperature becomes higher than set point, standby unit starts.(2 units operation)
· When room temperature falls below set point -4:, standby unit stops.(1 unit operation)
38
• System constraint
· This function is available only in cooling mode.
Ex.) Set temp. by R/C = 20: [2nd stage cut-in function]··· Request code number "322~324"
Set point = 26:
When request code number is “323”. Room temp. Set point Room temp. < Set point -4
Start operation Sub unit start operation Sub unit stop
26: 2nd unit Cut-in Main
unit
Run
IC-1
4 degree C
Sub
22: 2nd unit Cut-out unit Stop Run Stop
IC-2
20:
11-5-2. How to set rotation function (Back-up function, 2nd stage cut-in function)
You can set these functions by wired remote controller. (Maintenance monitor)
NOTICE
Both main and sub unit should be set in same setting.
Every time replacing indoor controller board for servicing, the function should be set again.
(1) Request Code List

Rotation setting
Setting No. Initial
Setting contents
(Request code) setting
No.1
Monitoring the request code of current setting.
(310)
No.2
Rotation and Back-up OFF (Normal group control operation)
(311)
No.3
Back-up function only
(312)
No.4
Rotation ON (Alternating interval = 1day) and back-up function
(313)
No.5
Rotation ON (Alternating interval = 3days) and back-up function
(314)
No.6
(315)
No.7
(316)
No.8
(317)
No.9
(318)
2nd unit cut-in setting

Setting No. Initial
Setting contents
(Request code) setting
No.1
Monitoring the request code of current setting.
(320)
No.2
Cut-in function OFF
(321)
No.3
(322) Cut-in function ON(Set point = Set temp.+ 4(7.2F)
No.4 Cut-in function ON(Set point = Set temp.+ 6(10.8F)
(323)
No.5
(324) Cut-in function ON(Set point = Set temp.+ 8(14.4F)
39
(2) Setting method of each function by wired remote controller

B: Refrigerant address
C: Data display area
D: Request code display area

1. Stop operation(
).
2. Press the TEST button () for 3 seconds so that [Maintenance mode] appears on the screen ().
After a while, [00] appears in the refrigerant address number display area. (at )
3. Press the CHECK button () for 3 seconds to switch to [Maintenance monitor].

Note) It is not possible to switch to [Maintenance monitor] during data request in maintenance mode
(i.e., while “----” is blinking) since no buttons are operative.
[----] appears on the screen () when [Maintenance monitor] is activated.

(The display () now allows you to set a request code No.)
4. Press the [TEMP ( and )] buttons ( ) to select the desired refrigerant address.
[ScreenB]
5. Press the [CLOCK ( and )] buttons () to set the desired request code No. (“311~318”, “321~324”)
6. Press the FILTER button () to perform function setting.

If above setting operations are done correctly, "Request code number will appear in data display area.()
[Example: When the "311" of "Request code number" is set, [311] appears on the screen.()]
[Refererence]
You can check current "request code number" setting by setting the "request code number" (“310” or “320”) and
pressing the FILTER button.()
[Example: When the current setting is "Setting No.2 (Request code 311)", [311] appears on the screen.()]
7. To return to normal mode, press the ON/OFF button (

).
40
12 DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE

Be careful when removing heavy parts.
OPERATING PROCEDURE PHOTOS & ILLUSTRATIONS

1. Removing the air intake grille Figure 1
(1) Slide the knob of air intake grille toward the arrow 1 to Filter
open the air intake grille.
(2) Remove drop prevention hook from the panel.
(3) Slide the shaft in the hinge to the direction of the arrow 2
and remove the air intake grille.
2. Removing the room temperature thermistor (TH1)

(1) Remove the air intake grille and the filter. (See Figure 1) Photo 1 Reactor cover
(2) Remove the 2 screws from the electrical box.
(3) Disconnect the connector CN20 (Red) from the indoor con- Fixing
screw
troller board. (reactor)
(4) Remove the room temperature thermistor and holder.
3. Removing the reactor (DCL)

(1) Remove the air intake grille and the filter. (See Figure 1)
(2) Remove the 2 screws from the reactor cover.
(3) Disconnect the relay connector of reactor.
(4) Remove 2 reactor fixing screws and remove the reactor.
4. Removing the indoor controller board (I.B)

(1) Remove the air intake grille and the filter. (See Figure 1) Fixing screw
Electrical box cover
(2) Remove the 2 screws from the electrical box cover. (Electrical box)
(3) Disconnect the connectors :
CNMF (White/7P) for fan motor
CN44 (White/4P) for thermistor (TH2/TH5) Photo 2
CNP (Blue/3P) for drain pump Bell mouth
Room temp.
CN4F (White/4P) for float switch thermistor (TH1)
CN01 (Black/5P) for earth and reactor Electrical box Turbo fan
CNV (White/20P) for vane motor Fixing screw
(4) Remove the 6 supports from indoor controller board.
(5) Remove the indoor controller board.
5. Removing the electrical box

(1) Remove the air intake grille and the filter. (See Figure 1)
(2) Remove the 2 screws from the electrical box cover.
(3) Disconnect the connectors. (Refer to 4.)
(4) Remove 2 electrical box fixing screws and remove 2 hooks.
(5) Pull the electrical box.
<Electrical parts in the electrical box>
Indoor controller board
Terminal block (TB4)(TB5) Electrical box Electrical box
Indoor controller Fixing screw
board (I.B)
41
6. Removing the fan and fan motor (MF) Photo 3 Coil plate
(1) Remove the electrical box. (See Photo 2)
(2) Remove the bell mouth (3 screws). (See Photo 2)
(3) Remove the turbo fan nut.
(4) Pull out the turbo fan. Fan motor
(5) Remove the wire cover (3 screws).
(6) Remove 2 wiring clamps. Clamp
(7) Disconnect the connector of the fan motor (CNMF).
(8) Remove the 3 nuts and washers and rubber mounts of the
Wire cover
fan motor. fixing screw
Nut
Washer
Rubber mount
7. Removing the panel Figure 2

(1) Remove the air intake grille and the filter. (See Figure 1) Screw
(2) Disconnect the connector CNV (White/20P). Detail Screw Corner panel Panel
Corner panel (See Figure 2)
(3) Remove the corner screw.
(4) Slide the corner panel to the direction of the arrow 1, and
remove the corner panel.
Panel (See Photo 4, 5) Corner panel
(5) Remove the 2 screws from the panel which fix to the oval Photo 4 Photo 5
holes. Ball shaped hole
(6) Rotate the panel a little to come to the bell shaped hole
where the screw is large and remove the panel.
Oval hole
8. Removing the drain pan Photo 6 Drain pan

(1) Remove the air intake grille and the filter. (See Figure 1) fixing screw
(2) Remove the 2 screws from the electrical box cover. Drain pan
(3) Disconnect the connectors. (Refer to 4.) fixing screw
(4) Remove the panel. (See Photo 4, 5)
(5) Remove the electrical wiring service panel (3 screws). Electrical wiring
(6) Remove the electrical box. (See Photo 2) service panel
(7) Remove the bell mouth. (See Photo 2)
(8) Remove the 4 screws and pull out the drain pan.
w Pull out the left and right of the pan gradually.
Be careful not to crack or damage the pan.
Drain pan
fixing screw
Electrical wiring ser- Drain pan
vice panel fixing screw
Photo 7 Liquid pipe temp. thermistor (TH2)

9. Removing the pipe temperature thermistor (TH2)
and condenser evaporator temperature thermistor (TH5)
(1) Remove the drain pan. (See Photo 6)
(2) Remove the turbo fan. (See Photo 3)
(3) Remove the 2 wiring clamps. (See Photo 3)
(4) Remove the coil plate (2 screws).
(5) Remove the thermistors which are inserted into the holders
installed to the thin copper pipe.
(6) Disconnect the 4-pin white connector (CN44).
Cond./ eva. thermistor (TH5)
42
10. Removing the drain pump (DP) and float switch (FS) Photo 8
(2) Cut the hose band and remove the hose. Float switch
(3) Remove the drain pump assembly (3 screws and 2 hooks).
(4) Remove the drain pump (3 screws). Hose band
(5) Remove the float switch (2 screws).
Drain pump
Drain pump
assembly fixing screw
Photo 9
Drain pump fixing screw Float switch fixing screw
11. Removing the heat exchanger Photo 10

(2) Remove the 3 screws of the piping cover, and pull out Piping cover
piping cover. Coil plate
Heat exchanger
(3) Remove the 2 screws of coil plate.
(4) Remove the 2 screws of the coil.
(5) Remove the screw of the coil support.
(6) Pull out the heat exchanger.
Heat exchanger
fixing screw Coil support
Coil support fixing screw
43
HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BLDG., 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
CCopyright 2007 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING CO., LTD.
Distributed in Aug. 2009 No.OCH412 REVISED EDITION-E PDF 6
Distributed in Mar. 2009 No.OCH412 REVISED EDITION-D PDF 6
Distributed in Apr. 2008 No.OCH412 REVISED EDITION-C PDF 7 New publication, effective Aug. 2009
Distributed in Feb. 2008 No.OCH412 REVISED EDITION-B PDF 7 Specifications subject to change without notice
Distributed in Oct. 2007 No.OCH412 REVISED EDITION-A PDF 7
Distributed in Mar. 2007 No.OCH412 PDF 7
Made in Japan
10-16
Air Conditioning Outdoor Unit – PUHZ-RP60VHA4 - Service Manual

SPLIT-TYPE, HEAT PUMP AIR CONDITIONERS
January 2010
No.OCH451
REVISED EDITION-A
SERVICE MANUAL
R410A
Outdoor unit Revision:
[model name] [Service Ref.] • PUHZ-RP200YKAR1 is added in
REVISED EDITION-A.
PUHZ-RP35VHA4 PUHZ-RP35VHA4 • Some descriptions have been
PUHZ-RP50VHA4 PUHZ-RP50VHA4 modified.
PUHZ-RP60VHA4 PUHZ-RP60VHA4 • Please void OCH451.

PUHZ-RP71VHA4 PUHZ-RP71VHA4
PUHZ-RP100VKA PUHZ-RP100VKA Note:
• This manual does not cover the
PUHZ-RP125VKA PUHZ-RP125VKA outdoor units. When serving out-
door units, please refer to the serv-
PUHZ-RP140VKA PUHZ-RP140VKA ice manual of outdoor unit and this
PUHZ-RP100YKA PUHZ-RP100YKA manual in a set.
• RoHS compliant products have <G>
PUHZ-RP125YKA PUHZ-RP125YKA mark on the spec name plate.
PUHZ-RP140YKA PUHZ-RP140YKA
PUHZ-RP200YKAR1
CONTENTS
1 TECHNICAL CHANGE···································· 2
2 REFERENCE MANUAL ·································· 2
3 SAFETY PRECAUTION ·································· 2
4 FEATURES ······················································ 6
5 SPECIFICATIONS ··········································· 7
6 DATA······························································ 10
7 OUTLINES AND DIMENSIONS ···················· 16
8 WIRING DIAGRAM ······································· 20
9 WIRING SPECIFICATIONS··························· 26
10 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM DIAGRAM ·············· 31
11 TROUBLESHOOTING ··································· 35
12 FUNCTION SETTING ···································· 94
13 MONITORING THE OPERATION DATA BY THE REMOTE CONTROLLER ···101
14 EASY MAINTENANCE FUNCTION ·············111
15 DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE ···················· 116
PARTS CATALOG (OCB451)

PUHZ-RP60VHA4
PUHZ-RP71VHA4
1 TECHNICAL CHANGE
PUHZ-RP200YKA PUHZ-RP200YKAR1
• Power board (P.B.) has been changed.
• Controller board (C.B.) has been changed. (S/W version up)
2 REFERENCE MANUAL
2-1. INDOOR UNIT SERVICE MANUAL
Model name Service Ref. Service
Manual No.
PLA-RP35/50/60/71/100/125BA PLA-RP35/50/60/71/100/125BA#2.UK OCH412
PLA-RP71/125/140BA2 PLA-RP71/125/140BA2.UK OCB412
OCH459
PLA-RP100BA3 PLA-RP100BA3
OCB459
OCH454
PCA-RP50/60/71/100/125/140KA PCA-RP50/60/71/100/125/140KA
OCB454
PCA-RP71/125HA PCA-RP71/125HA#1 OC329
OCH453
PKA-RP35/50HAL PKA-RP35/50HAL
OCB453
OCH452
PKA-RP60/71/100KAL PKA-RP60/71/100KAL
OCB452
PSA-RP71/100/125/140GA PSA-RP71/100/125/140GA#1 OC332
HWE08130
PEAD-RP35/50/60/71/100/125/140JA(L) PEAD-RP35/50/60/71/100/125/140JA(L)(R1).UK BWE08240
BWE09220
PEA-RP200/250/400/500GA.TH-AF
PEA-RP200/250/400/500GA HWE0708A
PEA-RP200/250GA.TH-AFMF
3 SAFETY PRECAUTION
3-1. ALWAYS OBSERVE FOR SAFETY
Before obtaining access to terminal, all supply circuits must be disconnected.
3-2. CAUTIONS RELATED TO NEW REFRIGERANT

Cautions for units utilizing refrigerant R410A
Preparation before the repair service.

• Prepare the proper tools.
• Prepare the proper protectors.
• Provide adequate ventilation.
• After stopping the operation of the air conditioner, turn off the power-supply beaker.
• Discharge the condenser before the work involving the electric parts.
Precautions during the repair service.

• Do not perform the work involving the electric parts with wet hands.
• Do not pour water into the electric parts.
• Do not touch the refrigerant.
• Do not touch the hot or cold areas in the refrigerating cycle.
• When the repair or the inspection of the circuit needs to be done without turning off the power,
exercise great caution not to touch the live parts.
2
Use new refrigerant pipes. Do not use refrigerant other than R410A.
In case of using the existing pipes for R22, be careful with If other refrigerant (R22 etc.) is used, chlorine in refrige-
the followings. rant can cause deterioration of refrigerant oil etc.
· Be sure to clean the pipes and make sure that the insides
of the pipes are clean.
· Change flare nut to the one provided with this product.
Use a vacuum pump with a reverse flow check
Use a newly flared pipe. valve.
· Avoid using thin pipes. Vacuum pump oil may flow back into refrigerant cycle and
that can cause deterioration of refrigerant oil etc.
Make sure that the inside and outside of refrige-

Use the following tools specifically designed for
rant piping is clean and it has no contaminants
use with R410A refrigerant.
such as sulfur, oxides, dirt, shaving particles, etc,
which are hazard to refrigerant cycle. The following tools are necessary to use R410A refrigerant.
In addition, use pipes with specified thickness. Tools for R410A
Gauge manifold Flare tool
Contamination inside refrigerant piping can cause deterio- Charge hose Size adjustment gauge
ration of refrigerant oil etc. Gas leak detector Vacuum pump adaptor
Torque wrench Electronic refrigerant
Store the piping to be used indoors during charging scale
installation and both ends of the piping sealed
until just before brazing. (Leave elbow joints, etc.
in their packaging.) Handle tools with care.
If dirt, dust or moisture enters into refrigerant cycle, that can If dirt, dust or moisture enters into refrigerant cycle, that can
cause deterioration of refrigerant oil or malfunction of com- cause deterioration of refrigerant oil or malfunction of com-
pressor. pressor.
The refrigerant oil applied to flare and flange

Do not use a charging cylinder.
connections must be ester oil, ether oil or
alkylbenzene oil in a small amount. If a charging cylinder is used, the composition of refrigera-
If large amount of mineral oil enters, that can cause deterio- nt will change and the efficiency will be lowered.
ration of refrigerant oil etc.
Ventilate the room if refrigerant leaks during
Charge refrigerant from liquid phase of gas operation. If refrigerant comes into contact with
cylinder. a flame, poisonous gases will be released.
If the refrigerant is charged from gas phase, composition change
may occur in refrigerant and the efficiency will be lowered.
[1] Cautions for service

(1) Perform service after recovering the refrigerant left in unit completely.
(2) Do not release refrigerant in the air.
(3) After completing service, charge the cycle with specified amount of refrigerant.
(4) When performing service, install a filter drier simultaneously.
Be sure to use a filter drier for new refrigerant.
[2] Additional refrigerant charge

When charging directly from cylinder
· Check that cylinder for R410A on the market is syphon type.
· Charging should be performed with the cylinder of syphon stood vertically. (Refrigerant is charged from liquid phase.)
Unit
Gravimeter
3
[3] Service tools
Use the below service tools as exclusive tools for R410A refrigerant.
No. Tool name Specifications

1 Gauge manifold · Only for R410A
· Use the existing fitting specifications. (UNF1/2)
· Use high-tension side pressure of 5.3MPa·G or over.
2 Charge hose · Only for R410A
· Use pressure performance of 5.09MPa·G or over.
3 Electronic scale
4 Gas leak detector · Use the detector for R134a, R407C or R410A.
5 Adaptor for reverse flow check · Attach on vacuum pump.
6 Refrigerant charge base
7 Refrigerant cylinder · Only for R410A · Top of cylinder (Pink)
· Cylinder with syphon
8 Refrigerant recovery equipment
[4] Refrigerant leakage detection function

This air conditioner (outdoor unit PUHZ-RP35~140, except PUHZ-RP200/250) can detect refrigerant leakage which may
happen during a long period of use. In order to enable the leakage detection, settings are required to let the unit memo-
rize the initial conditions (initial learning). Refer to 14-3. INITIAL SETTINGS FOR REFRIGERANT LEAKAGE DETECTION
FUNCTION.
3-3. PRECAUTIONS WHEN REUSING EXISTING R22 REFRIGERANT PIPES

(1) Flowchart
• Refer to the flowchart below to determine if the existing pipes can be used and if it is necessary to use a filter dryer.
• If the diameter of the existing pipes is different from the specified diameter, refer to technological data materials to confirm if
the pipes can be used.
Measure the existing pipe thickness and

check for damage. The existing pipe thickness does not meet
The existing pipe thickness meets specifica-
tions and the pipes are not damaged. specifications or the pipes are damaged.
ź
Check if the existing air conditioner can operate.
ź
After operating the cooling system for about 30 * If the existing air conditioner cannot operate, use
minutes, do a pump down work. a refrigerant recovery device to collect the refrigerant.
ź
Disconnect the existing air conditioner from the * In case existing pipes were used for gas or oil
pipes. heat pump systems, be sure to clean the pipes
for RP100-250 models.
ź Use new pipes for RP35-71 models.
Attach the new air conditioner
ź
Perform the airtight test, vacuum air purging,
additional refrigerant charging (if necessary),
and gas leak check.
ź ź
Test run The existing pipes cannot be reused.
Use new pipes.
4
(2) Cautions for refrigerant piping work
New refrigerant R410A is adopted for replacement inverter series. Although the refrigerant piping work for R410A is same
as for R22, exclusive tools are necessary so as not to mix with different kind of refrigerant. Furthermore as the working
pressure of R410A is 1.6 times higher than that of R22, their sizes of flared sections and flare nuts are different.
1 Thickness of pipes
Because the working pressure of R410A is higher compared to R22, be sure to use refrigerant piping with thickness
shown below. (Never use pipes of 0.7 mm or below.)
Diagram below: Piping diameter and thickness

Nominal Outside Thickness (mm)
dimensions(inch) diameter (mm) R410A R22
1/4 6.35 0.8 0.8
3/8 9.52 0.8 0.8
1/2 12.70 0.8 0.8
5/8 15.88 1.0 1.0
3/4 19.05 — 1.0
2 Dimensions of flare cutting and flare nut

The component molecules in HFC refrigerant are smaller compared to conventional refrigerants. In addition to that,
R410A is a refrigerant, which has higher risk of leakage because its working pressure is higher than that of other refriger-
ants. Therefore, to enhance airtightness and intensity, flare cutting dimension of copper pipe for R410A has been speci-
fied separately from the dimensions for other refrigerants as shown below. The dimension B of flare nut for R410A also
has partly been changed to increase intensity as shown below. Set copper pipe correctly referring to copper pipe flaring
dimensions for R410A below. For 1/2 and 5/8 inch, the dimension B changes.
Use torque wrench corresponding to each dimension.
Dimension A
Dimension B
Flare cutting dimensions (mm) Flare nut dimensions (mm)

Nominal Outside Dimension A ( +0
-0.4 ) Nominal Outside Dimension B
dimensions(inch) diameter R410A R22 dimensions(inch) diameter R410A R22
1/4 6.35 9.1 9.0 1/4 6.35 17.0 17.0
3/8 9.52 13.2 13.0 3/8 9.52 22.0 22.0 +36.0mm for
1/2 12.70 16.6 16.2 1/2 12.70 26.0 24.0 indoor unit
5/8 15.88 19.7 19.4 5/8 15.88 29.0 + 27.0 of RP100,
3/4 19.05 — 23.3 3/4 19.05 — 36.0 125 and 140
3 Tools for R410A (The following table shows whether conventional tools can be used or not.)
Tools and materials Use R410A tools Can R22 tools be used? Can R407C tools be used?
Gauge manifold Air purge, refrigerant charge Tool exclusive for R410A
Charge hose and operation check Tool exclusive for R410A
Gas leak detector Gas leak check Tool for HFC refrigerant
Refrigerant recovery equipment Refrigerant recovery Tool exclusive for R410A
Refrigerant cylinder Refrigerant charge Tool exclusive for R410A
Applied oil Apply to flared section Ester oil and alkylbenzene Ester oil:
oil (minimum amount) Alkylbenzene oil: minimum amount
Safety charger Prevent compressor malfunction Tool exclusive for R410A
when charging refrigerant by
spraying liquid refrigerant
Charge valve Prevent gas from blowing out Tool exclusive for R410A
when detaching charge hose
Vacuum pump Vacuum drying and air Tools for other refrigerants can (Usable if equipped (Usable if equipped
purge be used if equipped with adop- with adopter for rever- with adopter for rever-
ter for reverse flow check se flow) se flow)
Flare tool Flaring work of piping Tools for other refrigerants (Usable by adjusting (Usable by adjusting
can be used by adjusting flaring dimension) flaring dimension)
flaring dimension
Bender Bend the pipes Tools for other refrigerants can be used
Pipe cutter Cut the pipes Tools for other refrigerants can be used
Welder and nitrogen gas cylinder Weld the pipes Tools for other refrigerants can be used
Refrigerant charging scale Refrigerant charge Tools for other refrigerants can be used
Vacuum gauge or thermis- Check the degree of vacuum. (Vacuum Tools for other refrigerants
tor vacuum gauge and valve prevents back flow of oil and refri- can be used
vacuum valve gerant to thermistor vacuum gauge)
Charging cylinder Refrigerant charge Tool exclusive for R410A
: Prepare a new tool. (Use the new tool as the tool exclusive for R410A.)
: Tools for other refrigerants can be used under certain conditions.
: Tools for other refrigerants can be used.
5
4 FEATURES
PUHZ-RP35VHA4 PUHZ-RP60VAH4
PUHZ-RP50VHA4 PUHZ-RP71VHA4
PUHZ-RP100VKA
PUHZ-RP125VKA
PUHZ-RP140VKA
PUHZ-RP100YKA
PUHZ-RP125YKA
PUHZ-RP140YKA
PUHZ-RP200YKA
PUHZ-RP200YKAR1
PUHZ-RP250YKA
CHARGELESS SYSTEM
PRE-CHARGED REFRIGERANT IS SUPPLIED FOR PIPING LENGTH AT SHIPMENT.
Max. 30m (PUHZ-RP35-250)
The refrigerant circuit with LEV (Linear Expansion Valve) and power receiver always control the optimal refrigerant level
regardless of the length (30 m max. and 5 m min.) of piping. The additional refrigerant charging work during installation
often causes problems. It is completely eliminated by chargeless system. This unique system improves the quality and reli-
ability of the work done. It also helps to speed up the installation time.
REFRIGERANT LEAKAGE DETECTION FUNCTION (except for RP200/250)

PUHZ-RP35-140 can detect refrigerant leakage which may happen during a long period of use.
6
5 SPECIFICATIONS
Service Ref. PUHZ-RP35VHA4 PUHZ-RP50VHA4

Mode Cooling Heating Cooling Heating
Power supply (phase, cycle, voltage) Single, 50Hz, 230V
Max. current A 13 13
External finish Munsell 3Y 7.8/1.1
Refrigerant control Linear Expansion Valve
Compressor Hermetic
Model SNB130FGCH
Motor output kW 0.9 1.1
Starter type Inverter
Protection devices HP switch
Comp.shell thermo
OUTDOOR UNIT
Discharge thermo
Crankcase heater W —
Fan Fan(drive) % No. Propeller fan % 1
Airflow */min(CFM) 35(1,240)
Defrost method Reverse cycle
Noise level Cooling dB 44
Heating dB 46
Dimensions W mm(in.) 800(31-1/2)
D mm(in.) 300+23(11-13/16+7/8)
H mm(in.) 600(23-5/8)
Weight kg(lbs) 42(93)
Refrigerant R410A
Charge kg(lbs) 2.5(5.5)
Oil (Model) L 0.45(NEO22)
6.35(1/4)
REFRIGERANT PIPING
Pipe size O.D. Liquid mm(in.)

Gas mm(in.) 12.7(1/2)
Connection method Indoor side Flared
Outdoor side Flared
Between the indoor & Height difference Max. 30m
outdoor unit Piping length Max. 50m
Service Ref. PUHZ-RP60VHA4 PUHZ-RP71VHA4

Power supply (phase, cycle, voltage) Single, 50Hz, 230V
Max. current A 19
Compressor Hermetic
Model SNB172FDHM1
Comp.shell thermo
OUTDOOR UNIT
Discharge thermo
Noise level Cooling dB 47
Heating dB 48
Dimensions W mm(in.) 950(37-3/8)
D mm(in.) 330+30(13+1-3/16)
H mm(in.) 943(37-1/8)
Weight kg(lbs) 67(148)
Refrigerant R410A
Oil (Model) L 0.70(FV50S)
Pipe size O.D. Liquid 9.52(3/8)
REFRIGERANT PIPING
mm(in.)
Gas mm(in.) 15.88(5/8)
Outdoor side Flared
7
Service Ref. PUHZ-RP100VKA PUHZ-RP125VKA PUHZ-RP140VKA
Mode Cooling Heating Cooling Heating Cooling Heating
Power supply (phase, cycle, voltage) Single 50Hz, 230V
Max. current A 26.5 28
Compressor Hermetic
Model
ANB33FDUMT ANB42FDWMT
Motor output kW 1.9 2.4 2.9
Comp.shell ther mo
Discharge thermo
OUTDOOR UNIT
Fan motor output kW 0.060+0.060
Airflow */min(CFM) 110(3,880) 120(4,230)
Noise level Cooling dB 49 50
Heating dB 51 52
Dimensions W mm(in.) 1,050(41-5/16)
D mm(in.) 330+30(13+1-3/16)
H mm(in.) 1,338(52-11/16)
Weight kg(lbs) 116(256) 119(262)
Refrigerant R410A
Pipe size O.D. Liquid mm(in.) 9.52(3/8)
REFRIGERANT PIPING
Gas mm(in.) 15.88(5/8)

Outdoor side Flared
Service Ref. PUHZ-RP100YKA PUHZ-RP125YKA PUHZ-RP140YKA

Power supply (phase, cycle, voltage) 3phase, 50Hz, 400V
Max. current A 8 9.5 13
Compressor Hermetic
Model
ANB33FDVMT ANB42FDXMT
Motor output kW 1.9 2.4 2.9
Comp.shell ther mo
Discharge thermo
OUTDOOR UNIT
Fan motor output kW 0.060+0.060
Airflow */min(CFM) 110(3,880) 120(4,230)
Heating dB 51 52
D mm(in.) 330+30(13+1-3/16)
H mm(in.) 1,338(52-11/16)
Weight kg(lbs) 124(273) 126(278) 132(291)
Refrigerant R410A
Pipe size O.D. 9.52(3/8)
REFRIGERANT PIPING
Liquid mm(in.)
Gas mm(in.) 15.88(5/8)
Outdoor side Flared
8
PUHZ-RP200YKA
Service Ref. PUHZ-RP250YKA
PUHZ-RP200YKAR1
Power supply (phase, cycle, voltage) 3 phase 50Hz, 400V
Max. current A 19 21
Compressor Hermetic
Model ANB52FFQMT ANB66FFRMT
Comp.shell ther mo
Discharge thermo
OUTDOOR UNIT
Fan motor output kW 0.150 + 0.150
Heating dB 59 59
D mm(in.) 330 + 30(13+1-3/16)
H mm(in.) 1,338(52-11/16)
Weight kg(lbs) 135(297) 141(311)
Refrigerant R410A
Charge kg(lbs) 7.1(15.7) 7.7(17.0)
Oil (Model) L 1.70(FV50S) 1.70(FV50S)
Pipe size O.D. Liquid 9.52(3/8) 12.7(1/2)
REFRIGERANT PIPING
mm(in.)
Gas mm(in.) 25.4(1) 25.4(1)
Outdoor side Flared & Brazing
9
6 DATA
6-1. REFILLING REFRIGERANT CHARGE (R410A : kg) PUHZ-RP35~140
Piping length (one way) Initial
Service Ref.
10m 20m 30m 40m 50m 60m 75m charged
PUHZ-RP35VHA4 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.7 2.9 — — 2.5
PUHZ-RP50VHA4 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.7 2.9 — — 2.5
PUHZ-RP60VHA4 3.1 3.3 3.5 4.1 4.7 — — 3.5
PUHZ-RP71VHA4 3.1 3.3 3.5 4.1 4.7 — — 3.5
PUHZ-RP100VKA
4.6 4.8 5.0 5.6 6.2 6.8 7.5 5.0
PUHZ-RP100YKA
PUHZ-RP125VKA
4.6 4.8 5.0 5.6 6.2 6.8 7.5 5.0
PUHZ-RP125YKA
PUHZ-RP140VKA
4.6 4.8 5.0 5.6 6.2 6.8 7.5 5.0
PUHZ-RP140YKA
Longer pipe than 30 m, additional charge is

required.
6-2. ADJUSTING THE AMOUNT OF REFRIGERANT PUHZ-RP200/250

Permitted Initial charge Amount of additional refrigerant charge (kg)
Service Ref.
pipe length (kg)
30 m and less 31-40 m and less 41-50 m and less 51-60 m and less 61-70 m and less 71-120 m and less
PUHZ-RP200YKA The additional charge
7.1 No additional 0.9 kg 1.8 kg 2.7 kg 3.6 kg
PUHZ-RP200YKAR1 120m or less amount is obtained by
charge necessary the following formula.
PUHZ-RP250YKA 7.7 1.2 kg 2.4 kg 3.6 kg 4.8 kg
Calculate the additional charge amount based on the following procedure.

If the calculation results in an amount that is smaller than the "Additional charge amount for 70m," perform the additional charge using the amount shown
in "Additional charge amount for 70m."
Main piping: Main piping: Branch piping: Liquid Branch piping: Liquid
Amount of additional = Liquid line size + Liquid line size line size + line size – 3.6 (kg)
+
charge [kg] :12.7 over all length [m] :9.52 overall length [m] :9.52 overall length [m] :6.35 overall length [m]
% 0.11 [kg/m] % 0.09 [kg/m] % 0.06 [kg/m] % 0.02 [kg/m]
Additional charge amount RP200 3.6 kg

for 70 m RP250 4.8 kg
6-3. COMPRESSOR TECHNICAL DATA (at 20°C)

Service Ref. PUHZ-RP35/50VHA4 PUHZ-RP60/71VHA4 PUHZ-RP100/125VKA PUHZ-RP140VKA PUHZ-RP100/125YKA PUHZ-RP140YKA
Compressor model SNB130FGCH SNB172FDHM1 ANB33FDUMT ANB42FDWMT ANB33FDVMT ANB42FDXMT
U-V 0.64 1.34 0.466 0.302 1.20 1.20

Winding
Resistance U-W 0.64 1.34 0.466 0.302 1.20 1.20
()
W-V 0.64 1.34 0.466 0.302 1.20 1.20
(at 20°C)
Service Ref. PUHZ-RP200YKA(R1) PUHZ-RP250YKA
Compressor model ANB52FFQMT ANB66FFRMT
U-V 0.30 0.37

Winding
Resistance U-W 0.30 0.37
()
W-V 0.30 0.37
10
6-4. NOISE CRITERION CURVES MICROPHONE
1m
UNIT
1.5m
GROUND
PUHZ-RP35/50VHA4 MODE SPL(dB) LINE PUHZ-RP60VHA4 MODE SPL(dB) LINE

COOLING 44 COOLING 47
HEATING 46
PUHZ-RP71VHA4 HEATING 48
90 90
OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL, dB (0 dB = 0.0002 bar)

80 80
70 70
NC-70 NC-70
60 60
NC-60 NC-60
50 50
NC-50 NC-50
40 40
NC-40 NC-40
30 30
NC-30 NC-30
20 APPROXIMATE
20 APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD OF
THRESHOLD OF
HEARING FOR HEARING FOR
NC-20 CONTINUOUS
NC-20
CONTINUOUS
NOISE NOISE
10 10
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
PUHZ-RP100VKA MODE SPL(dB) LINE PUHZ-RP125VKA MODE SPL(dB) LINE

PUHZ-RP100YKA HEATING 51
PUHZ-RP125YKA HEATING 52
90 90
80 80
70 70
NC-70 NC-70
60 60
NC-60 NC-60
50 50
NC-50 NC-50
40 40
NC-40 NC-40
30 30
NC-30 NC-30
20 APPROXIMATE 20 APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD OF THRESHOLD OF
HEARING FOR HEARING FOR
CONTINUOUS
NC-20 CONTINUOUS
NC-20
NOISE NOISE
10 10
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
11
MODE SPL(dB) LINE
PUHZ-RP140VKA PUHZ-RP200YKA MODE SPL(dB) LINE
PUHZ-RP140YKA HEATING 52 PUHZ-RP200YKAR1 HEATING 59
90
90

80
80
70
NC-70 70
NC-70
60
NC-60 60
NC-60
50
NC-50 50
NC-50
40
NC-40 40
NC-40
30
NC-30 30
NC-30
20 APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD OF
20 APPROXIMATE
HEARING FOR
NC-20 THRESHOLD OF
CONTINUOUS
HEARING FOR
NOISE NC-20
CONTINUOUS
10 NOISE
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 10
BAND CENTER FREQUENCIES, Hz 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
PUHZ-RP250YKA MODE SPL(dB) LINE

COOLING 58
HEATING 59
90
80
70
NC-70
60
NC-60
50
NC-50
40
NC-40
30
NC-30
20 APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD OF
HEARING FOR
CONTINUOUS
NC-20
NOISE
10
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
12
6-5. STANDARD OPERATION DATA
Representative matching PLA-RP35BA PLA-RP50BA PLA-RP60BA PLA-RP71BA2
Mode Cooling Heating Cooling Heating Cooling Heating Cooling Heating

Capacity W 3,600 4,100 5,000 6,000 6,000 7,000 7,100 8,000
Total
Input kW 1.07 1.12 1.55 1.62 1.60 1.82 1.90 1.90
Indoor unit PLA-RP35BA PLA-RP50BA PLA-RP60BA PLA-RP71BA2

Phase , Hz 1 , 50 1 , 50 1 , 50 1 , 50
Electrical circuit
Voltage V 230 230 230 230

Current A 0.22 0.14 0.36 0.29 0.36 0.29 0.51 0.43
Outdoor unit PUHZ-RP35VHA4 PUHZ-RP50VHA4 PUHZ-RP60VHA4 PUHZ-RP71VHA4
Phase , Hz 1 , 50 1 , 50 1 , 50 1 , 50
Voltage V 230 230 230 230
Current A 4.66 4.93 6.72 7.08 6.95 7.98 8.20 8.25
Discharge pressure MPa 2.70 2.69 2.91 2.76 2.64 2.90 2.73 2.65
Refrigerant circuit
Suction pressure MPa 1.01 0.74 0.99 0.67 0.96 0.74 0.95 0.71
Discharge temperature °C 70 71 73 77 67 80 69 72
Condensing temperature °C 46 41 49 44 44 46 45 43
Suction temperature °C 15 2 11 -1 11 3 12 3
Ref. pipe length m 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
D.B. 27 20 27 20 27 20 27 20
Outdoor Indoor side
°C
Intake air temperature
W.B. °C 19 15 19 15 19 15 19 15
Discharge air temperature D.B. °C 15.8 34.6 15.3 37.8 14.2 39.2 14.5 38.8
D.B. °C 35 7 35 7 35 7 35 7
side

W.B. °C 24 6 24 6 24 6 24 6
SHF 0.84 — 0.81 — 0.76 — 0.73 —
BF 0.28 — 0.24 — 0.21 — 0.21 —
The unit of pressure has been changed to MPa based on international SI system.
The conversion factor is : 1(MPa)=10.2(kgf/cm²)
13
Representative matching PLA-RP100BA3 PLA-RP125BA2 PLA-RP140BA2

Capacity W 10,000 11,200 12,500 14,000 14,000 16,000
Total
Input kW 2.39 2.43 3.67 3.50 4.36 4.32
Indoor unit PLA-RP100BA3 PLA-RP125BA2 PLA-RP140BA2
Phase , Hz 1 , 50 1 , 50 1 , 50
Electrical circuit
Voltage V 230 230 230

Current A 1.00 0.94 1.07 1.00 1.07 1.00
Outdoor unit PUHZ-RP100VKA/ PUHZ-RP125VKA/ PUHZ-RP140VKA/

PUHZ-RP100YKA PUHZ-RP125YKA PUHZ-RP140YKA
Phase , Hz 1/3, 50 1/3, 50 1/3, 50

Voltage V 230/400 230/400 230/400
Current A 10.4/3.51 10.26/3.59 15.73/5.51 15.20/5.26 18.83/6.59 18.69/6.54

Discharge pressure MPa 2.61 2.39 2.75 2.81 2.78 2.89
Refrigerant circuit
Suction pressure MPa 0.99 0.72 0.85 0.69 0.83 0.66

Discharge temperature °C 67 66 72 81 71 83
Condensing temperature °C 44 38 46 46 46 47
Suction temperature °C 15 4 8 5 7 5
Ref. pipe length m 5 5 5 5 5 5
D.B. 27 20 27 20 27 20
Outdoor Indoor side
°C
W.B. °C 19 15 19 15 19 15
Discharge air temperature D.B. °C 14.5 38.5 12.5 42.3 11.3 44.7
D.B. °C 35 7 35 7 35 7
side

W.B. °C 24 6 24 6 24 6
SHF 0.74 — 0.71 — 0.71 —
BF 0.21 — 0.18 — 0.14 —
14
Representative matching PLA-RP100BA3 ×2 PLA-RP125BA2 ×2
Capacity W 19,000 22,400 22,000 27,000

Total
Input kW 5.50 5.70 6.83 7.48
Indoor unit PLA-RP100BA3 PLA-RP125BA2
Phase , Hz 1, 50 1, 50
Electrical circuit
Voltage V 230 230
Current A 1.00 × 2 0.94 × 2 1.07 x 2 1.00 × 2
Outdoor unit
PUHZ-RP200YKAR1
Phase , Hz 3, 50 3, 50
Voltage V 400 400

Current A 8.19 8.50 10.24 11.26
Discharge pressure Mpa 2.72 2.30 2.96 2.67
Refrigerant circuit
Suction pressure Mpa 0.95 0.64 0.88 0.61

Discharge temperature ˚C 72 70 72 77
Condensing temperature ˚C 46 38 49 44
Suction temperature ˚C 16 2 11 3
Ref. pipe length m 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5

D.B. ˚C 27 20 27 20
Outdoor Indoor side

W.B. ˚C 19 15 19 15
Discharge air temperature D.B. ˚C 14.4 38.5 13.2 41.5

D.B. ˚C 35 7 35 7
side

W.B. ˚C 24 6 24 6
SHF 0.79 – 0.77 –
BF 0.13 – 0.10 –
15
7 OUTLINES AND DIMENSIONS
PUHZ-RP35VHA4 Unit : mm
PUHZ-RP50VHA4
400
:33 drain hole
347.5
Air intake
43.6
155
152
330
365
300
Air intake
:33 drain hole
45.4
4-10 % 21 oval hole Service panel
40 23
32.5
(M10 foundation bolt) Service panel
18 for charge plug
Air discharge
Handle for Connection for
moving liquid pipe
600
35
43
300
155
Connection for
10
90
gas pipe
150 183
69
287.5
Service port
Installation bolt pitch: 500
800
1. FOUNDATION BOLTS 2. PIPING-WIRING DIRECTION
Please secure the unit firmly Piping and wiring connection can
Free space around the outdoor unit with 4 foundation (M10) bolts. be made from the rear direction only.
(basic example) (Bolts, washer and nut must
be purchased locally.)
3. ATTACHING THE CONDUIT
Basically open
<Foundation bolt height> In order to attach the conduit, it is

100 mm or more as long as necessary to fix the metal plate with
no obstacle is placed on the 2 screws to the back panel. Procure
rear and right-and-left sides the metal plate and make screw holes
of the unit. +1 locally. It is recommended to use the
18 or below
ore metal plate shown below. Align the

or m FOUNDATION
metal plate to the marks on the unit
00 mm
1 and attach it.
100
mm
or m
ore
+ The position and the size of
conduit hole depend on the
conduit to be used.
20
350 40
ore mm
+1 or m or m
mm
500 ore
+2
2 sides should be open in

the right, left and rear side.
+ Conduit hole
Minimum installation space for outdoor unit

80
60
+ 1 In the place where short cycle tends to occur, cooling and heating
capacity and power consumption might get lowered 10%. Air outlet
guide (optional PAC-SG58SG) will help them improve.
+ 2 If air discharges to the wall, the surface might get stained.
Holes for metal plate fixing screw

+ The size of hole depends on the
screw to be used.
16
1 FREE SPACE (Around the unit) 2 SERVICE SPACE 3 FOUNDATION BOLTS 4 PIPING-WIRING DIRECTIONS
The diagram below shows a Dimensions of space needed Please secure the unit firmly Piping and wiring connections Rear Air Intake
basic example. for service access are with 4 foundation (M10) bolts. can be made from 4 directions: 2-U Shaped notched holes
Explanation of particular details is shown in the below diagram. (Bolts and washers must be front, right, rear and below. (Foundation Bolt M10)
given in the installation manuals etc. purchased locally.)
175 600 175
19
Over100
Installation Feet
FREE
Side Air Intake
<Foundation bolt height>
over 10mm over 10mm
330
417
370
PUHZ-RP71VHA4
PUHZ-RP60VHA4
500
Over
40
54
Over10 FOUNDATION
30
Less than
Service space Over
500
30
28
57 41
53
over 500mm over 100mm

2-12 % 36 oval holes
(Foundation Bolt M10)
Air Discharge
950
Example of Notes Terminal Connections
Rear Air Intake 322 Earth terminal Left···Power supply wiring
Handle for moving
Right···Indoor/Outdoor wiring
Side Air Intake

Refrigerant GAS pipe connection (FLARE):15.88(5/8 inch)
Service panel
Refrigerant LIQUID pipe connection (FLARE):9.52(3/8 inch)
*1...Indication of STOP VALVE connection location. Handle for moving
17
Handle for moving
Handle for moving
Handle for moving 943
1
673
Air Intake 2
473
*1 447
*1 431
23
Piping Knockout Hole Details Front piping cover

Power supply wiring hole
71
(2-:27Knockout)
Rear piping cover
Power supply wiring hole Right trunking hole Power supply wiring hole
Right piping hole
(2-:27Knockout) (Knockout) (2-:27Knockout)
71
(Knockout)
Front trunking hole 40 45 75 40 45 40 Rear trunking hole
219
(Knockout) (Knockout) Bottom piping hole

(Knockout)
55
55
63
81
:92 :92
73 63
73 63
:92
Drain hole
19 55 92 Rear piping hole 30 220 145 145 145
27
23
Front piping hole
73
(5-:33)
23 27 92
92
27
23
(Knockout) (Knockout)
65 92 65
Unit : mm
1 FREE SPACE (Around the unit) 2 SERVICE SPACE 3 FOUNDATION BOLTS 4 PIPING-WIRING DIRECTIONS Rear Air Intake
2-U Shaped notched holes
The diagram below shows a Dimensions of space needed Please secure the unit firmly (Foundation Bolt M10)
Piping and wiring connections 225 600
basic example. for service access are with 4 foundation (M10) bolts. can be made from 4 directions: 225
19
Explanation of particular details are shown in the below diagram. (Bolts and washers must be FRONT,Right,Rear and Below. Installation Feet
PUHZ-RP140YKA
PUHZ-RP125YKA
PUHZ-RP100YKA
PUHZ-RP140VKA
PUHZ-RP125VKA
PUHZ-RP100VKA
given in the installation manuals etc. purchased locally.)

Side Air Intake
150
Over
FREE
<Foundation bolt height>
370
417
330
56

PC1000 Favco Other Crane

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

PC1000 Favco Other Crane

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CRANE

2. CRANEDESCRIPTION CHP02.01

3. CRANEINSTALLATION CHP03.01

4. CRANEOPERATION CHP04.02

5. MAINTENANCE CHP05.01

6. TROUBLESHOOTINGGUILDELINE CHP06.01

7. DRAWINGS CHP07.02

8. SPAREPARTLIST CHP08.01

9. REFERENCEMATERIAL CHP09.01

10. COMPONENT/EQUIPMENTMANUALS CHP10.02

1.2 Safety 1Ͳ3

1.3 Warranty 1Ͳ10

Holding the load

2.2 CraneReachDiagram 2Ͳ14

2.3 OperatingEnvironment 2Ͳ17

© Copyright of Favelle Favco Cranes Pty Ltd, 2013 IOM1814 CHP02.01.doc

© Copyright of Favelle Favco Cranes Pty Ltd, 2013 IOM1814 CHP02.01.doc

2.1 Major Crane Components

© Copyright of Favelle Favco Cranes Pty Ltd, 2013 IOM1814 CHP02.01.doc

PEDESTAL PEDESTAL EXTERNAL

2" BSP FLANGE

© Copyright of Favelle Favco Cranes Pty Ltd, 2013 IOM1814 CHP02.01.doc

© Copyright of Favelle Favco Cranes Pty Ltd, 2013 IOM1814 CHP02.01.doc

AUXILIARY HOIST WINCH

PORT HOIST WINCH

BOOM ACCESS PLATFORM

TUGGER WINCH SLEW BEARING

© Copyright of Favelle Favco Cranes Pty Ltd, 2013 IOM1814 CHP02.01.doc

REMOVEABLE HOUSE ROOF

MULTIPLE ACCESS DOOR

© Copyright of Favelle Favco Cranes Pty Ltd, 2013 IOM1814 CHP02.01.doc

© Copyright of Favelle Favco Cranes Pty Ltd, 2013 IOM1814 CHP02.01.doc

MAST HEAD SHEAVES

MAST AVIATION LIGHT MAST

MAST TOP PLATFORM

MAST INTERMEDIATE BOOM BUFFER

MAST REAR LEG

© Copyright of Favelle Favco Cranes Pty Ltd, 2013 IOM1814 CHP02.01.doc

© Copyright of Favelle Favco Cranes Pty Ltd, 2013 IOM1814 CHP02.01.doc

STARBOARD EMERGENCY POWERPACK

LUFF DRUM FLANGE

AUX DRUM GEAR

PIN CONNECTION AUX DRIVE PINION

DRUM GEAR DRIVE PINION DRIVE ASSEMBLY

© Copyright of Favelle Favco Cranes Pty Ltd, 2013 IOM1814 CHP02.01.doc

2.2 Crane Reach Diagram

© Copyright of Favelle Favco Cranes Pty Ltd, 2013 IOM1814 CHP02.01.doc

2.3 Operating Environment

© Copyright of Favelle Favco Cranes Pty Ltd, 2013 IOM1814 CHP02.01.doc

3.2 Delivery Checks 3-4

3.3 Crane Erection – General 3-5

3.4 Erection Accessories and Field Handling Procedure 3-5

3.5 Lifting & Installation Guides for Pedestal Adaptor 3-8

3.6 Installation and Erection of Crane Structure 3-10

© Copyright of Favelle Favco Cranes Pty Ltd, 2013 IOM1814 CHP03.01

FIGURE 3-1 – PROPER DRUM REEL REEVING ....................................................................................................... 3-7

© Copyright of Favelle Favco Cranes Pty Ltd, 2013 IOM1814 CHP03.01

3.1 Dimensions and Masses of Major Assemblies

© Copyright of Favelle Favco Cranes Pty Ltd, 2013 IOM1814 CHP03.01

3.2 Delivery Checks

Item Crane Arrival Check

© Copyright of Favelle Favco Cranes Pty Ltd, 2013 IOM1814 CHP03.01

3.3 Crane Erection – General

3.4 Erection Accessories and Field Handling Procedure